GLE (2022) - Automotive Mercedes-Benz - Free user manual and instructions

USER MANUAL GLE (2022) Mercedes-Benz

GLE Operator's Manual + Mercedes-Benz F167 0009 02

Front passenger airbag warning

AIRBAG

WARNING Risk of injury or death due to an enabled co-driver airbag

If the co-driver airbag is enabled, a child on the co-driver seat may be struck by the co-driver airbag during an accident.

▶ NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint system on a seat with an ENABLED FRONT AIRBAG. DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur.

Observe the chapter "Children in the vehicle".

Welcome to the world of Mercedes-Benz

Before your first drive, please read this Owner's Manual carefully and familiarise yourself with your vehicle. For your own safety and a longer service life of the vehicle, follow the instructions and warning notices in this Owner's Manual. Disregarding them may lead to damage to the vehicle or injury to people.

The standard equipment and product description of your vehicle may vary and depends on the following factors:

• Model
• Order
  • National version
• Availability

Your vehicle may therefore differ from that shown in the descriptions and illustrations in individual cases.

The illustrations in this Owner's Manual show a left-hand drive vehicle. On right-hand drive vehicles, the layout of vehicle parts and controls differs accordingly.

Mercedes-Benz is constantly developing its vehicles further.

Mercedes-Benz therefore reserves the right to introduce changes in the following areas:

• Design
• Equipment
• Technical features

The following documents are components of the vehicle:

• Digital Owner's Manual
• Printed Owner's Manual
- Service Booklet
• Supplementary manuals relating to specific equipment
• Supplementary documents

Keep these documents in the vehicle at all times. Ensure that all documents are in the vehicle or passed on in the event of sale or rental.

Disclaimer

The following online version of the Owner's Manual describes all models as well as all the stand-

F167 0009 02

ard and optional equipment of your vehicle. Country-specific differences in the language variants are possible. Note that your vehicle may not be fitted with all features described. This is also the case for safety-relevant systems and functions.

Please contact your authorised Mercedes-Benz dealer if you would like to have a printed Owner's Manual for other vehicle models and vehicle model years. The online version is the current valid Owner's Manual version. Possible variations to your vehicle may not be taken into account as Mercedes-Benz constantly updates their vehicles and equipment to the state of the art and introduces changes in design and equipment.

Please also read the printed Owner's Manual, any supplementary documents and the digital Owner's Manual in the vehicle.

Copyright

All Rights Reserved. All texts, images, graphics, are subject to Copyright and other laws for the protection of intellectual property. They may not

be copied for commercial purposes or for transmission, nor changed and used on other websites.

F167 0009 02

Symbols 6

Quick start and Tips 7

Seats 7

Children in the vehicle 7

Touch-sensitive controls 8

Radio 9

Wi-Fi hotspot 9

Connecting a mobile phone 10

MBUX Interior Assistant 10

MBUX Voice Assistant 11

ENERGIZING Packages 12

Driving Assistance package 12

Parking Package 13

High-voltage battery AC charging (mode 2

or 3)....13

High-voltage battery direct current charg-

ing (mode 4) 13

Destination entry navigation 13

New multimedia system features 14

At the filling station 21

Preparing for a holiday 33

Luggage and loading 38

Ice and snow 48

Help in the event of a breakdown 55

Expert tips 65

At a glance 70

Cockpit 70

Cockpit (plug-in hybrid) 74

Indicator and warning lamps 76

Overhead control panel 78

Door operating unit and seat adjustment ..... 80

Control settings in the rear passenger

compartment 82

Emergencies and breakdowns 84

Digital Owner's Manual 86

Calling up the Digital Owner's Manual 86

General notes 87

Protection of the environment 87

Take-back of end-of-life vehicles 87

Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts 88

Touch-sensitive controls 89

Mercedes me App 89

Operating safety 90

Notes on assembling the number plate on

the front licence plate holder 93

Declarations of conformity and notes on

driving in different countries 93

Diagnostics connection 99

Qualified specialist workshop 100

Vehicle registration 100

Correct use of the vehicle 101

Information on the REACH regulation ..... 101

Notes for persons with electronic medical

aids 101

Implied warranty 102

QR code for rescue card 102

Data storage 102

Copyright 106

Occupant safety 107

Brief overview of most important points ..... 107

Information on the automatic functions of

the restraint system 114

Purpose and function of the restraint sys-

tem 118

Seat belts 123

Airbags 123

Safely transporting children in the vehicle .... 124

Brief overview of most important points ..... 124

Important safety notes 125

Suitable child restraint systems for the transport of children 131

Suitable seats for attaching child restraint systems 136

Securing the child restraint system 141

Child safety locks 146

Opening and closing 150

Key 150

Doors 154

Load compartment 158

Side windows 163

Sliding sunroof 167

Roller sunblinds 171

Anti-theft protection 172

Seats and stowing 175

Notes on the correct driver's seat position .. 175

Notes on grab handles 175

Seats 176

Steering wheel 192

Easy entry and exit feature 195

Memory function 197

Stowage areas 198

Cup holders 220

Ashtray and cigarette lighter 223

Sockets 224

Wireless charging of the mobile phone and connection with the exterior aerial ..... 225

Fitting/removing the floor mats 228

Light and sight 230

Exterior lighting 230

Interior lighting 239

Windscreen wipers and windscreen

washer system 241

Mirrors 245

Area permeable to radio waves on the

windscreen 248

Infrared-reflective windscreen function ..... 249

Climate control 250

Overview of climate control systems ..... 250

Operating the climate control system ..... 252

Driving and parking 265

Driving 265

DYNAMIC SELECT 292

Automatic transmission 301

Function of 4MATIC 309

Refuelling 309

Charging the high-voltage battery (plug-in hybrid) 316

Parking 336

Driving and driving safety systems 343

Trailer hitch 430

Bicycle rack function 437

Vehicle towing instructions 439

Driver's display 441

Notes on the driver's display 441

Operating the driver's display 441

Driver display menus 442

Head-up display 452

Vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical system 454

Function of the power meter 454

Overview of status displays on the driver's display 454

Overview of status displays on the driver's display (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) 455

MBUX Voice Assistant 457
Notes on operating safety 457
Notes on operating safety 457
Operation 457
Using LINGUATRONIC effectively 459
Essential voice commands 460

MBUX multimedia system 465
Overview and operation 465
System settings 489
AMG TRACK PACE 499
Plug-in hybrid settings 504
Off-road menu 505
Fit & Healthy 506
Navigation and traffic 510
Telephone 550
Online and Internet functions 586
Media 594
Radio 600
Sound 604
MBUX rear tablet 606

Maintenance and care 610
ASSYST PLUS service interval display ..... 610
Maintenance Management 611
Telediagnostics 611
Engine compartment 612
Cleaning and care 620

Breakdown assistance 629

Emergency 629

Flat tyre 632

Battery (vehicle) 639

Tow-starting or towing away 646

Electrical fuses 652

Wheels and tyres 656

Notes on noise or unusual handling char-

acteristics 656

Notes on regularly inspecting wheels and

tyres 656

Notes on snow chains 656

Tyre pressure 657

Wheel change 660

Emergency spare wheel 670

Collapsible spare wheel 672

F167 0009 02

Technical data 676
Notes on technical data 676
On-board electronics 676
Regulatory radio information 678
Vehicle identification plate, VIN and
engine number overview 784
Operating fluids 786
Vehicle data 798
Trailer hitch 810

Display messages and warning/indicator

lamps 817

Display messages 817

Warning and indicator lamps 909

Index 929

In this Owner's Manual, you will find the following symbols:

⚠ WARNING Danger due to not observing the warning notices

Warning notices draw your attention to hazards that may endanger your health or life, or the health or life of others.

▶ Observe the warning notices.

ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage due to failure to observe environmental notes

Environmental notes include information on environmentally responsible behaviour or environmentally responsible disposal.

▶ Observe environmental notes.

NOTE Damage to property due to failure to observe notes on material damage

Notes on material damage inform you of risks which may lead to your vehicle being damaged.

▶ Observe notes on material damage.

These symbols indicate useful instructions or further information that could be helpful to you.

Instruction

(→ page) Further information on a topic

Display Display in the central display

Highest menu level, which is to be selected in the multimedia system

Relevant submenus, which are to be selected in the multimedia system

* Indicates a cause

Seats

Adjusting the seats

Diagram showing a vehicle interior with numbered components and directional arrows indicating movement or flow.

① Head restraint height / head restraint fore-and-aft position
② Seat backrest inclination
3 Seat height
④ Seat cushion length

5 Seat cushion inclination
6 Seat fore-and-aft position

Children in the vehicle

Safely transporting children in the vehicle

Always observe when children are travelling in the vehicle ( page 125)
▶ Important warning notices (→ page 126)
Recommended child restraint systems ( page 133)
Suitable vehicle seats for fitting a child restraint system ( page 124)
Approval categories for child restraint systems ( page 131)
Suitability of the seats for attaching ISOFIX/LATCH child restraint systems ( page 136) - Fitting the ISOFIX/LATCH child restraint system on the rear seat ( page 143)
Suitability of the seats for attaching i-Size child restraint systems ( page 138)

• Fitting the i-Size child restraint system on the rear seat ( page 143)
  Attaching Top Tether belt ( page 144)
  Suitability of seats for attaching belt-secured child restraint systems ( page 138)
• Notes on vehicles without automatic front passenger airbag shutoff (→ page 131)
• Notes on rearward-facing and forward-facing child restraint systems on the front passenger seat (→ page 129)
  • Securing the child restraint system with the seat belt ( page 146)
  ▶ Automatic front passenger airbag shutoff ( page 131)
  Child safety locks for the rear side windows ( page 148)
  Child safety locks for the rear doors ( page 146)

Touch-sensitive controls

Overview of touch-sensitive controls

Diagram of a car interior with labeled parts including steering wheel, dashboard, and seatbelt

F167 0009 02

Control panel:
Driver's display
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and variable limiter
2 Control panel for the MBUX multimedia system
MBUX multimedia system touchpad
Observe the notes on the touch-sensitive controls ( page 89).

Radio

Operating radio

To switch to radio:

• Briefly press 📋 on the multimedia system display.
• Tap on

To set the frequency band:

• Briefly press 📋 on the multimedia system display.
• Tap on
• Select a frequency band or a favourite.

To set a radio station:

• Briefly press 📋 on the multimedia system display.
• Tap on
• Swipe to the left or right on the control element or select a radio station.

To call up the radio station list:

• Briefly press 📋 on the multimedia system display.
• Tap on
• Select :≡.

To search for radio stations using station names or frequency entry:

• Briefly press 📄 on the multimedia system display.
• Tap on
• Select ⭕.
• Enter a station name or frequency.
• Select a station.

To store radio stations:

- Briefly press 📋 on the multimedia system display.

• Tap on
• Select ☆.

To set the traffic information service volume increase:

• Briefly press 📋 on the multimedia system display.
• Tap on
• Select System.
• Select Audio.
• Select Navigation & traffic announcements.
• Set a value for Traffic announce. vol. increase.

Wi-Fi hotspot

Setting up a Wi-Fi hotspot

Generally, two types of Wi-Fi connection are available:

• Using the multimedia system as a Wi-Fi hotspot

The multimedia system serves as a Wi-Fi hotspot for mobile communication devices such as a smartphone or tablet PC.

The data volume of the vehicle or an already connected tethering device is used for the data connection.

Data volumes must be purchased via the Mercedes me Portal.

The use of the vehicle data tariff by external devices is not available in all countries.

- Using a mobile communication device as a Wi-Fi hotspot (tethering)

An external Wi-Fi hotspot is accessed for the Internet connection of the multimedia system.

The data tariff of the mobile communication device via Acquired package is used for the data connection.

Options for setting up a connection:

- QR code

The connection is set up by scanning the QR code shown on the multimedia system.

- NFC

The connection is set up by placing the mobile communication device in the NFC interface of the vehicle.

- Security key

The connection is established by entering the security key displayed on the multimedia system.

Connecting a mobile phone

Connecting a mobile phone

Activating Bluetooth®:

- Make sure that the mobile phone Bluetooth ^ is switched on.

- Tap on 📋 on the central display or media display.

- Select Settings.

- Select System.

- Select Internet and Bluetooth.

- Activate Bluetooth ^® .

Searching for a mobile phone:

• Tap on 📋 on the central display or media display.
• Select Phone.
• Select
• Select Devices.
• Select Devices.
• Select Connect new device.

Authorising a mobile phone:

- Select a mobile phone.

A code is displayed in the multimedia system and on the mobile phone.

If the codes match, confirm the code on the mobile phone.

MBUX Interior Assistant

Using the MBUX Interior Assistant

If the vehicle is fitted with the MBUX Interior Assistant, selected functions of the multimedia system can be operated contact-free

The Assistant recognises driver and front passenger interactions.

The Assistant supports vehicle and infotainment functions at three interaction levels:

• INTELLIGENT

The Assistant recognises vehicle occupants and objects automatically and activates functions.

- REACTIVE

The Assistant recognises the natural body language of a vehicle occupant and carries out functions automatically, appropriate to the situation.

- CONTACTLESS

The vehicle occupant actively requests a function using a hand movement or pose.

The Assistant offers functions for the following:

- SAFETY

The Assistant supports vehicle occupants with the use of restraint systems.

• COMFORT

The Assistant enhances comfort by automating functions inside the vehicle and supporting natural interaction with the vehicle.

• INFOTAINMENT

The Assistant facilitates operation of the Infotainment functions.

One application example is switching the reading light on or off.

Illustration of a hand holding a plastic bag with a circular object above (no text or symbols)

Carrying out operation of the reading light for the driver and front passenger

Move your hand up and down under the inside rearview mirror. The reading light is switched on or off.

MBUX Voice Assistant

Operating the MBUX voice assistant

You can use the MBUX voice assistant to operate the following functions depending on the vehicle equipment:

• Telephone
  • Text message and e-mail
• Navigation
• Radio and media
• Vehicle functions
• Online functions

Examples of possible voice commands:

• To operate the phone: Call my father.
• To manage e-mails: Show me my new e-mails.
- To operate the navigation: Search for a French restaurant in the area.
- To operate the radio: Which station am I currently listening to?
• To operate media: Play a similar track.
• To operate climate control: My feet are cold.

• To operate vehicle functions: Open the window.
• To call up the weather: Will it be sunny tomorrow?
• To ask a general knowledge question: Who painted the picture "The Scream"?

ENERGIZING Packages

Operating ENERGIZING COMFORT

To start an ENERGIZING programme:
- Briefly press 📋 on the multimedia system display.
- Select Comfort.
- Select ENERGIZING COMFORT.
- Select a programme and start with ▶.
To configure an ENERGIZING programme:
- Select a programme.
- Select Settings.
- Switch the functions included in the programme on or off.
To start a training programme:

• Select Training.
• Select a programme and start with ▶.
  • To activate fragrancing for training, select Air freshener.

To start tips:

- Select Tips.

- Select an area of the body and start with ▶.

Driving Assistance package

Functions of the Driving Assistance Package

The Driving Assistance Package contains various functions that assist you when driving. For this purpose, your vehicle uses cameras and radar sensors to monitor the area in front of, behind or next to the vehicle.

The following functions are included in the Driving Assistance Package, depending on country-specific availability:

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC ( page 359)

You can watch an animation on this topic via the following link:

Active Speed Limit Assist (country-dependent) ( page 365)

You can watch an animation on this topic via the following link:

Active Brake Assist ( page 373)

You can watch an animation on this topic via the following link:

Active Steering Assist (country-dependent) ( page 370)

You can watch an animation on this topic via the following link:

Active Blind Spot Assist with exit warning ( page 383)

Active Lane Keeping Assist ( page 386)

PRE-SAFE® Impulse Side (→ page 116)

Parking Package

Functions of the Parking Package

Depending on country-specific availability, your vehicle may be equipped with various functions to assist you with parking and manoeuvring. For this purpose, your vehicle uses cameras and ultrasonic sensors to monitor the area around the vehicle.

Depending on the equipment level, the following systems and functions are part of your Parking Package:

▶ Reversing camera: monitors the area to the rear of the vehicle and displays this in the driver display ( page 408).
360° Camera: a system that consists of four cameras which cover the immediate surroundings of the vehicle and display this in the driver display ( page 410).
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC: an electronic parking assistance system which monitors the area surrounding your vehicle and the distance to obstacles in the vicinity using ultrasound ( page 416).

Active Parking Assist: an electronic parking assistance system which assists you when parking or leaving a parking space by changing gear, accelerating, braking and steering the vehicle ( page 420).

You can watch an animation on this topic via the following link:

▶ Trailer Manoeuvering Assist: Trailer Manoeuvering Assist provides support when reversing with a trailer attached. Using the reversing camera, it monitors the articulation angle between the vehicle and trailer and adjusts it to a specified value. Trailer Manoeuvering Assist also limits your speed. (→ page 428).

High-voltage battery AC charging (mode 2 or 3)

AC charging (mode 2 or 3)

Starting and ending the charging process

▶ More notes on charging the high-voltage battery ( page 316).
Overview of the charging cable control panel ( page 323)

High-voltage battery direct current charging (mode 4)

DC charging (mode 4)

Starting and ending the charging process

▶ Further notes on charging the high-voltage battery ( page 316)
Overview of the charging cable control panel ( page 323)

Destination entry navigation

Entering a navigation destination

Briefly press 📋 on the multimedia system display.
The zero layer is shown.
Select
Select the following options for destination entry:
- Enter a POI, an address or a three-word address in the input line.
Online search results for POIs (if available) may contain additional information, for exam-

ple opening times and prices. The information is provided by an online map service.

You can find further information about 3 word addresses at: http://+what3words.com

- Select a destination suggestion.

Requirements:

The Navigation option is switched on in the user settings for Suggestions.

The multimedia system has gathered sufficient data in order to show destination suggestions.

- Select Previous destinations.

Select a previous destination.

You can save the destination as a favourite.

- Select POIs.

Select a POI category, e.g. P or enter a POI name or POI category in the input line.

If search results are displayed, limit them with Filter, for example by search position or the desired travel time.

- Select Contacts.

Requirements:

A mobile phone is connected to the multimedia system and contacts have been downloaded.

The contact contains a navigable address.

- Enter the geocoordinates as latitude and longitude in the input line.

Example 1: 47°58'11"N 7°57'25"E (degrees, minutes, seconds and compass direction)

Example 2: 47.969722 7.956944 (decimal degrees)

- Select a destination on the map.

- Select Favourites.

Requirements:

The destinations have been saved as favourites.

- Select Received destinations.

Requirements:

There is an Internet connection for receiving external destinations.

The destinations have been sent to the vehicle.

New multimedia system features

Information about the telephone menu

iPhone SE (SISC) Phone 2 1 2 3 4 9 8 7 6 5 $1.0W P Search IP O $1.0W

Bluetooth ^® device name of the currently connected mobile phone/of the mobile phone
2 Bluetooth® device name of the other currently connected mobile phone/of the mobile phone
3 Signal strength of the mobile phone network
4 Battery status of the connected mobile phone
5 Options
6 Messages
⑦ Calls up my devices

8 Numerical pad
9 Starts contact search

Telephone menu overview

Via the telephone menu you can use the functions in connection with your mobile phone.

The following functions can be used:

• Call lists
• Contacts
• Messages
• Device manager

Using call lists

If your mobile phone supports the PBAP Bluetooth® profile, the call lists from the mobile phone are displayed in the multimedia system.

The following functions are available:

• Making calls from the call list
- Opening contacts on the call list

Messages

In the message menu you can receive text messages and create and send them with the help of the MBUX voice assistant. In addition, you can

conveniently use the read-aloud function during the journey.

Device manager

In the device manager, you can connect your mobile phone with the multimedia system.

You have the option of using your mobile phone alone in single telephone mode or together with another mobile phone in two phone mode.

Using contacts

If you permit the multimedia system to access the contacts in your mobile phone, you can use these in the vehicle. You can store up to 8,000 contacts.

The following options are available to you via the contacts menu:

• Making telephone calls (calling a contact)
- Navigation
- Composing messages with the help of the MBUX voice assistant
• Additional options

The contacts from your mobile phone can be downloaded automatically or manually.

F167 0009 02

Conducting a call

When conducting a call, additional functions are available apart from making, accepting or rejecting a call. For example, you can switch between calls, conduct a call with several participants or conference calls.

It is also possible to accept or reject waiting calls. If you receive a call while already in a call, a message is displayed.

During a call you can activate the following functions:

• Microphone off
• Fade in the numerical pad to send DTMF tones
• Add a call
• Hands-free mode to transfer the call to the front or rear passenger compartment
• Privacy mode to transfer the call to the telephone or headphones

Information about navigation

1 16:05 07:00 3 2 4 47 cm 那道 Nursberg Wülsburg 7 6 5 4 RADIO BOBI Friday On My Mind - Co. Phone

Zero layer with digital map

① Navigation module (reduced view) Route guidance active:

The navigation module shows the information relevant to the route in the zoomed-out view, e.g. the destination or a traffic delay

☒ Ends the current route guidance

Tapping opens the navigation module in the expanded view with the route overview

② Destination entry

③ Searches for a parking space

④ Map orientation ⚙️ and set map type

5 Current vehicle position (vehicle symbol or arrow)

6 Display area with entertainment sources, phone, active applications and suggestions

7 Navigation window shows the next driving manoeuvre (zoomed out view) or the route monitor (zoomed in view)

Route guidance active: route monitor shows, e.g. route sections, upcoming driving manoeuvres with lane recommendations, destination, traffic delays, 3D images at motor-way exits, online content

Switches off navigation announcements Switches on navigation announcements

When you switch on the multimedia system or after selecting 📄, the digital map is shown in the zero layer.

The navigation system offers many options for destination entry, route planning and route guidance. The traffic situation is taken into account during route guidance. When using route guidance with augmented reality, additional information can be shown in a camera image before a turning manoeuvre. Services and apps help you reach the destination quickly, safely and in comfort.

Start entering the destination via ② on the digital map. You can enter the POI, address or contact as the destination on-board or search online using a map service. Or you select a previous destination. The destination can be stored here as a favourite or be saved as an address for home and work. When the Allow destination suggestions option is switched on, the vehicle makes suggestions based on your visited navigation destinations. If external destinations and routes are received from apps or services, these are also available.

The following options are available for route planning, for example:

- Route options

e.g. avoid or use toll roads, tunnels, unpaved roads or areas

• Intermediate destinations
• Alternative routes
- Commuter route
• Automatic filling station and service station search

You can record and save routes then select or share them with a USB device.

Lane recommendations are shown during route guidance on multi-lane roads. When driving on a motorway, service facilities on the route ahead can be shown and used for route guidance.

The Live Traffic Information service takes the current traffic situation into account. The map can show the current traffic flow, traffic incidents or warning messages, e.g. before the end of traffic jams that pose a risk.

Hazardous situations on public roads are detected automatically by the vehicle via Car-to-X-Communication or these can be reported by the driver. The early warning makes it possible to adapt your driving characteristics in good time. Accidents,

broken-down vehicles, weather hazards or a vehicle with activated hazard warning lights are shown on the map.

For route guidance with augmented reality, information objects such as arrows indicating a turn, street names and house numbers are shown in a video image during the driving manoeuvre or at traffic lights.

The map shows map data from the database or from an online map service. In small map scales, buildings are shown as realistic images. The online map update service makes possible the updating of the map data.

Weather information and data from other services can be shown on the map. Multi-storey car parks with the corresponding equipment, deliver data about the current occupancy and about parking charges, for example.

The options offered vary depending on the country, vehicle equipment and available services.

Navigation module (expanded view) with route overview

Delay: 2 min Autobahnkreuz Nürnberg: Ost +2 min +1.2 km 13 km 7 min 213 km 1x51 min 16:08 > Previous dest. Filling stations Parking spaces Other routes Route

Example: route guidance is active

① Traffic event on the route
Distance from current vehicle position and remaining driving time
2 Destination

3 Searches for a filling station
4 Switches traffic information display on or off

Information on radio

Favourites FM/DAB AM Tune in Radio 1 SWR4 2 SWR4 KA DAB | 208.1 MHz Wave (M): 100% / Marianne Rosenberg 3 JP Search 4 5 6 7

① Active frequency band
2 Station name or set frequency
③ Settings

4 Additional options
5 Switches on traffic reports
6 Station list
⑦ Search

Using the radio menu you can play a multitude of radio stations and use the Internet Radio Tuneln. Search for your preferred stations and save these as favourites or in station lists.

The function of Tuneln Internet radio is country-dependent.

Radio text: this function shows you the station name, the track and the artist for the song currently playing, for example.

DAB: with the DAB function, graphically formatted extra information about a station can be shown, e.g. logos, album covers, music tracks, programmes, news or also service information.

Traffic announcements: Traffic messages can be displayed by pressing TA.

Information on media

Bluetooth Online music USB If It Hacn't Been For Love Adobe 0:41 5:179 6 13 14 2 3 4 5 8 7 9 10 11 12 P Search

Album cover
2 Active media source
3 Track and artist
4 Active data storage medium and current track number/track in playback list
5 Random playback
6 Repeat

7 Settings
B Additional options
9 Previous or next track and fast rewind or fast forward
10 Additional categories
⑪ Playlists and categories
12 Media search
13 Controls playback
14 Timeline

Using the Media application, you can set and use the audio and video functions of your multimedia system. You can listen to music or look at videos, for example.

USB: Using the USBmenu, you can play back your own audio or video data from a data storage medium connected by USB.

Bluetooth®: Using the Bluetooth menu, you can connect Bluetooth® audio equipment with the multimedia system and play back the available tracks on the audio equipment. Connecting the device can be conveniently handled in the device manager, so you can complete all settings with just a few clicks.

Online music: The Online music menu allows you to access music streaming services.

Notes on comfort

The Comfort menu makes all the functions available that contribute to your comfort when driving or taking a break.

Seat Comfort

The Seat menu allows you to flexibly adjust the contours of the seats to your needs by adjusting the side bolsters and lumbar support independently. You can save these settings in your Mercedes me profile, so they can be called up each time you drive. With the Seat kinetics function, you can start a programme that causes slight modifications of the seat position when you are driving. These modifications promote a healthy back.

Massage

In the Massage menu you will find the massage programmes that are available for your vehicle. By selecting the desired program you start it directly and it runs for a period of approximately ten

minutes, depending on the program selected. With the High intensity function you can increase the effect of the massage programme.

Ambient light

In the Ambient light menu you can set the colour and brightness for your ambient lighting. Using the Link zones function, the ambience, accent and impression zones can be regulated separately so that you can set the lighting of your vehicle individually.

Information about smartphone integration

Using the Smartphone Integration menu, various applications are available that can bring the functions of your mobile phone to the multimedia system display. Operation can by carried out via the touchscreen or voice control, for example.

Only one mobile phone at a time can be connected via Smartphone Integration to the multimedia system. Also for use with two phone mode with Smartphone Integration, only one additional mobile phone can be connected using Bluetooth® with the multimedia system.

Use Android Auto for mobile phones with the Android operating system and use Apple CarPlay ^® with your iPhone ^® . The full functionality of Android Auto and Apple CarPlay ^® is only possible with an Internet connection.

Information about vehicle info

You can have important vehicle information displayed in the Info menu. At a glance you will have an overview of vehicle and engine data or current consumption values, for example. In addition, you can call up the Digital Owner's Manual via the Owner's Manual menu item.

Vehicle data

The following data will be shown, for example:

• Activity of the acceleration and brake pedal
• Activity of the suspension strut
- Wheel angle
- G-force display for the linear and lateral acceleration

Engine data

The following data is shown:

• Transmission oil temperature
• Engine/coolant temperature
- Performance
- Torque
- Boost pressure

Consumption data

Depending on your driving style, this display shows the current and average fuel consumption. Together with the displays of vehicle and engine data, you can adapt your driving style to be as efficient and economical as possible.

Information about In-Car Office

Using the In-Car Office menu, you can connect your online services with the multimedia system. You then have multiple options available:

• Organising your meetings and telephone conferences.
  • Managing your e-mails and appointments.

- Have navigation to the location for a meeting.

Information about Mercedes me Apps

Using the Mercedes me Apps menu, various services and online functions are available to you:

• Managing Mercedes me services
- Using the dashcam
• Using the web browser to surf the Internet

You require a user account, and have to connect your vehicle with the user account, in order to be able to use services.

If the Mercedes me App is available on a mobile phone, the vehicle connection can be accomplished using the QR code shown.

Please not that the available features are country-dependent.

Information on settings

In the Settings you can set the basic configuration for your multimedia system and the vehicle. You have access to all functions in this menu,

from switching the driver assistance systems on and off to display and language settings.

The settings are structured in the following menus:

• Assistance
• Vehicle
• Lights
• System

Assistance menu

With the Assistance menu you have direct access to the driver assistance systems which are installed in your vehicle and can either switch these on or off, or configure according to your wishes.

Vehicle menu

Here you can activate the following functions, for example:

• Automatic folding in of the outside mirrors when parking the vehicle
- Automatic adjustment of the seat and steering wheel, for comfortable entry and exit from the vehicle

• Automatic activation of the 360^ camera when selecting reverse gear

Light menu

All the light settings can be carried out in the Lights menu. You can activate or deactivate the Intelligent Light System here, set for how long your vehicle should remain lit after parking or unlocking or switch the function off.

System menu

All important settings for the multimedia system can be carried out in the System menu.

You can carry out the following settings, for example:

• Setting the system language
  • The configuration of Wi-Fi and Bluetooth®
• Setting of time and date

At the filling station

Refuelling the vehicle

WARNING Risk of fire or explosion from fuel

Fuels are highly flammable.

▶ Fire, naked flames, smoking and creating sparks must be avoided.
Before refuelling, switch off the vehicle and, if fitted, the stationary heater and keep switched off during filling.

WARNING Risk of injury from fuels

Fuels are poisonous and hazardous to your health.

Do not swallow fuel or let it come into contact with skin, eyes or clothing.
Do not inhale fuel vapour.
▶ Keep children away from fuel.
Keep doors and windows closed during the refuelling process.

If you or other people come into contact with fuel, observe the following:

Immediately rinse fuel off your skin with soap and water.
If fuel comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse them thoroughly with clean water. Seek medical attention immediately.
If you swallow fuel, seek medical attention immediately. Do not induce vomiting.
Change immediately out of clothing that has come into contact with fuel.

WARNING Risk of fire and explosion due to electrostatic charge

Electrostatic charge can ignite fuel vapour.

Before you open the fuel filler cap or take hold of the pump nozzle, touch the metallic vehicle body.

To avoid creating another electrostatic charge, do not get into the vehicle again during the refuelling process.

WARNING Risk of fire from fuel mixture

Vehicles with a diesel engine:

If you mix diesel fuel with petrol, the flash point of the fuel mixture is lower than that of pure diesel fuel.

While the vehicle is running, component parts in the exhaust system may overheat without warning.

▶ Never refuel using petrol.
▶ Never mix petrol with diesel fuel.

NOTE Damage caused by the wrong fuel

Vehicles with a petrol engine:

Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system, the engine and the emission control system.

▶ Only refuel using unleaded, sulphur-free spark-ignition engine fuel that conforms

to European EN 228, or an equivalent specification.

Fuel of this specification may contain up to 10% ethanol. Your vehicle is suitable for use with E10 fuel.

Never refuel with one of the following fuels:

• Diesel
• Regular petrol with an octane number lower than 91 RON
- Petrol with more than 10% ethanol by volume, e.g. E15, E20, E85, E100
- Petrol with more than 3% methanol by volume, e.g. M15, M30
• Petrol with additives containing metal

If you have accidentally refuelled with the wrong fuel:

▶ Do not switch on the vehicle.
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

NOTE Damage caused by the wrong fuel

Vehicles with a diesel engine:

Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system, the engine and the emission control system.

Only refuel using sulphur-free diesel fuel that conforms to European standard EN 590, or an equivalent specification. In countries without sulphur-free diesel fuel, refuel using only low-sulphur diesel fuel with a sulphur content less than 50 ppm.

Never refuel with one of the following fuels:

• Petrol
• Marine diesel
• Heating oil
  • Pure bio-diesel or vegetable oil
• Paraffin or kerosene

If you have accidentally refuelled with the wrong fuel:

Do not switch on the vehicle.
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

! NOTE Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a petrol engine

If you have accidentally refuelled with the wrong fuel:

- Do not switch on the vehicle. Otherwise fuel can enter the engine. Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system and the engine. The repair costs are high.

Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained completely.

NOTE Do not use petrol to refuel vehicles with a diesel engine

If you have accidentally refuelled with the wrong fuel:

• Do not switch on the vehicle. Otherwise, fuel can enter the fuel system. Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system and the engine. The repair costs are high.
  Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
  Have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained completely.

NOTE Damage to the fuel system due to overfilling the fuel tank

Only fill the fuel tank until the pump nozzle switches off.
If too much fuel has been added due, for example, to a faulty filling pump:
Do not switch on the vehicle.

Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

NOTE Fuel may spray out when you remove the fuel pump nozzle

Only fill the fuel tank until the pump nozzle switches off.

Requirements

• The vehicle is unlocked.
- Plug-in hybrid with petrol engine: The fuel tank was vented before refuelling ( page 313). This function is country-dependent.

Observe the notes on service fluids and fuel. The recommended octane number for your vehicle can be found on the information label in the fuel filler flap.

Diagram showing car interior components with numbered labels and directional arrows indicating movement or change.

① Fuel filler flap
2 Bracket for fuel filler cap
3 Fuel type
QR code for rescue card
5 Tyre pressure table
i Plug-in hybrid with a petrol engine: The fuel filler flap opens automatically after the fuel tank has been vented ( page 313).

Press on the rear part of fuel filler flap ①.
Turn the fuel filler cap anti-clockwise and remove it.
Insert fuel filler cap from above into bracket 2.
Completely insert the pump nozzle into the tank filler neck, hook in place and refuel.
Only fill the fuel tank until the pump nozzle switches off.

Vehicles with a diesel engine: The tank filler neck is designed for refuelling at diesel filling pumps.

Your vehicle is equipped with an incorrect fuel protection system to prevent filling up with the wrong fuel. This function may be deactivated in some countries due to local circumstances. For more information, consult a Mercedes-Benz service centre.

Vehicles with a diesel engine: Refuel with at least 5 litres of diesel if the fuel tank has been run dry completely.

① Vehicles with a diesel engine: Use a filler neck with a large diameter for vehicles with a diesel engine when topping up fuel from a fuel can. Otherwise, the filler neck cannot be pushed into the tank shaft.
Replace the cap on the filler neck and turn clockwise until it engages audibly.
Close fuel filler flap ①.

Resetting values in the Trip menu of the on-board computer

On-board computer:

→ Trip

The wording may differ on the main menu displayed, so pay attention to the menu overview for the instrument display.

You can reset the values of the following functions:

• Trip distance
• Trip computer From start and From reset
  • ECO display ( page 283)

To reset a selected function: swipe upwards or downwards on the left-hand Touch Control.
Press the left-hand Touch Control.
Select Yes.
To confirm: press left-hand Touch Control.
If you press and hold the left-hand Touch Control, the values of the function will be reset immediately.

Refilling AdBlue®

NOTE Engine damage due to AdBlue® being in the fuel

AdBlue ^® must not be used to fill the fuel tank.
Only use AdBlue ^® to fill the AdBlue ^® tank.
Do not overfill the AdBlue ^® tank.

NOTE Contamination of the vehicle interior due to AdBlue® leakage

After topping up, carefully close the AdBlue® refill container.
Avoid carrying AdBlue ^® refill containers permanently in the vehicle.

Requirements

• The vehicle is unlocked.

The following messages appear in order in the driver's display when the AdBlue ^® tank requires refilling:

• Refill AdBlue See Owner's Manual. The AdBlue® level has fallen into the reserve range. Refill with at least 5 l of AdBlue®.
• Top up AdBlue Emergency op. in XXX km See Owner's Manual. The low AdBlue ^® level will lead to limited performance after the remaining distance displayed has been covered. Refill with at least 5 l of AdBlue ^® .
• Top up AdBlue XX,X | Emerg. op.: max. XXX km/h Start not poss. in XXX km. The low

AdBlue ^® level will lead to an output restriction from the speed displayed. After the remaining distance displayed has been covered, it will no longer be possible to start the vehicle. Refill at least the indicated amount of AdBlue ^® .

- Top up AdBlue XX,X | Switch vehicle on, wait 60 sec. or engine start not poss.. The AdBlue ^® tank is empty. You can no longer start the vehicle. Refill at least the indicated amount of AdBlue ^® . Switch on the vehicle and wait for approximately 60 seconds. Start the vehicle.

You can see the AdBlue ^® range and level in the Service menu in the driver's display.

The AdBlue ^® range shown depends strongly on the driving style and operating conditions. The actual range can therefore deviate from the calculated range.

Opening the AdBlue ^® filler cap

Diagram showing car interior components with numbered labels and directional arrows indicating flow or movement

Press on the rear part of fuel filler flap ①.

Turn AdBlue ^® filler cap ② anti-clockwise and remove it.

Refilling AdBlue®

Mercedes-Benz recommends refilling AdBlue® at a filling pump. If no AdBlue® filling pump is available, you can also top up AdBlue® using a canister.

Diagram showing car charging station with labeled components including battery and plug

Screw on the fastener of AdBlue ^® refill canister 4.
Screw the disposable hose ③ onto the opening of AdBlue® refill canister ④ until hand-tight.
Screw the disposable hose ③ onto the filler neck of the vehicle until hand-tight.

Lift up and tip AdBlue ^® refill canister ④. The filling process stops when the AdBlue ^® tank is completely full.
AdBlue ^® refill canister ④ can be removed when it has been only partially emptied.
Unscrew and close the disposable hose ③ and AdBlue® refill canister ④ in reverse order.
Replace AdBlue ^® filler cap ② and turn it clockwise until it audibly engages.
Close fuel filler flap ①.
Switch on the vehicle for at least 60 seconds.
If the vehicle could not be started as the AdBlue® tank was empty, it can take up to 60 seconds for the refill to be detected.
Start the vehicle.
Avoid storing AdBlue ^® refill containers permanently in the vehicle.

Topping up the windscreen washer system

A DANGER Risk of fatal injuries when carrying out maintenance work during the charging process

During the charging process, the high-voltage on-board electrical system is under high voltage.

Do not perform any maintenance work during the charging process.

WARNING Risk of burns when opening the bonnet

If you open the bonnet in the event of an overheated engine or fire in the engine compartment, the following situations may occur:

• You may come into contact with hot gases.
- You may come into contact with other escaping hot operating fluids.
Before opening the bonnet, allow the engine to cool down.

In the event of a fire in the engine compartment, keep the bonnet closed and call the fire service.

WARNING Risk of injury due to moving parts

Components in the engine compartment may continue to run or start unexpectedly even when the drive system is switched off.

Observe the following if you must open the bonnet:

▶ Switch off the vehicle.
▶ Never touch the danger zones surrounding moving components, e.g. the rotation area of the fan.
Remove jewellery and watches.
Keep items of clothing and hair away from moving parts.

WARNING Risk of burns from hot component parts in the engine compartment

Certain component parts in the engine compartment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the cooler and parts of the exhaust system.

Allow the engine to cool down and only touch component parts described in the following.
WARNING - Risk of fire and injury due to windscreen washer concentrate

Windscreen washer concentrate is highly flammable. It could ignite if it comes into contact with hot engine component parts or the exhaust system.

Make sure that no windscreen washer concentrate spills out next to the filler opening.

Diagram of a car interior with labeled components and an inset showing a device component with a numbered label.

Remove cap ① by the tab.
Top up the washer fluid.

Replacing the windscreen wiper blades (MAGIC VISION CONTROL)

A WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the windscreen wipers are switched on while wiper blades are being replaced

If the windscreen wipers begin to move while you are changing the wiper blades, you can be trapped by the wiper arm.

Always switch off the windscreen wipers and vehicle before changing the wiper blades.

Moving the wiper arms into the replacement position

Switch off the vehicle.
Within around 15 seconds, press the button on the combination switch (→ page 241). The wiper arms will move into the replacement position.

Removing the wiper blades

Diagram showing car exterior with a pen and a magnified inset highlighting a 3D model with starburst graphic and directional arrows.

To bring the wiper blade into position to be removed: hold the wiper arm firmly with one hand. With the other hand, turn the wiper blade in the direction of arrow ① beyond the point of resistance. The wiper blade will engage in the removal position with a click.

To remove the wiper blade: press release knob ②, pull the wiper blade in the direction of arrow ③ and remove.

Fitting the wiper blades

Diagram showing car interior with tool and component annotations, including numbered callouts and a warning symbol

Push the new wiper blade onto the wiper arm in the direction of arrow ① until release knob ② engages.

- Press the wiper blade onto the wiper arm beyond the point of resistance in the direction of arrow ③. The wiper blade will engage with a noticeable click and move freely again. - Fold the wiper arm back onto the windscreen. - Check the condition of the wiper blades regularly and replace them in the event of visible damage or ongoing smearing.

Replacing the windscreen wiper blades

A WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the windscreen wipers are switched on while wiper blades are being replaced

If the windscreen wipers begin to move while you are changing the wiper blades, you can be trapped by the wiper arm.

Always switch off the windscreen wipers and vehicle before changing the wiper blades.

Moving the wiper arms into the replacement position

Switch the vehicle on and then off again immediately.
Within around 15 seconds, press and hold the button on the combination switch for approximately three seconds (→ page 241). The wiper arms will move into the replacement position.

Check the condition of the wiper blades regularly and replace them in the event of visible damage or ongoing smearing.

Observe the information about the maintenance display.

Maintenance display

Diagram showing car exterior and cable installation with labeled components, including a magnified view of the cable being inserted.

Remove protective film ① from the maintenance displays on the tips of the newly fitted wiper blades.

When the colour of the maintenance displays changes from black to yellow, replace the wiper blades.

The duration until the colour changes varies depending on the usage conditions.

Checking the engine oil level using the driver's display

Requirements

• The engine has been warmed up.
• The vehicle is parked on a level surface.
• The engine is running at idle speed.
• The bonnet is closed.

Determining the engine oil level can take up to 30 minutes with a normal driving style and even longer with an active driving style.

Driver's display:

Service

The engine oil level is shown.

One of the following messages will appear on the driver's display:

- Engine oil level Measuring now...: the engine oil level cannot be determined yet.

Repeat the request after a maximum of 30 minutes' driving.
- Engine oil level OK and the bar display for indicating the engine oil level on the driver's display is green and is between "min" and "max": the engine oil level is correct.
- Engine oil level Top up 1,0 l and the bar display for indicating the engine oil level on the driver's display is yellow and is below "min":
▶ Add 1 l of engine oil.
- Engine oil level Reduce and the bar display for indicating the engine oil level on the driver's display is yellow and is above "max":
Drain off any excess engine oil that has been added. To do so, consult a qualified specialist workshop.
• For engine oil level, switch on vehicle
Switch on the vehicle to check the engine oil level.
• Engine oil level System inoperative: The oil level sensor is defective or not connected.

Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
• Engine oil level System currently inoperative
Close the bonnet.

Information on washing the vehicle in a car wash

WARNING Risk of an accident due to reduced braking power after washing the vehicle

Braking efficiency is reduced after washing the vehicle.

After the vehicle has been washed, brake carefully while paying attention to the traffic conditions until braking power has been fully restored.

NOTE Damage from automatic braking

If one of the following functions is activated, the vehicle will brake automatically in certain situations:

• Active Brake Assist

• Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
- HOLD function
• Active Parking Assist

To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate these systems in the following or similar situations:

When towing.
In a car wash.

NOTE Damage due to unsuitable car wash

Before driving into a car wash make sure that the car wash is suitable for the vehicle dimensions.
▶ Ensure there is sufficient ground clearance between the underbody and the guide rails of the car wash.
▶ Ensure that the clearance width of the car wash, in particular the width of the guide rails, is sufficient.

To avoid damage to your vehicle when using a car wash, ensure the following beforehand:

• Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is deactivated.
• The HOLD function is switched off.
- The 360° camera or the reversing camera is switched off.
- The side windows and sliding sunroof are completely closed.
• The outside mirrors are folded in.
- The blower for the ventilation and heating is switched off.
- The windscreen wiper switch is in position 0.
- The key is at a minimum distance of 3 m from the vehicle. Otherwise, the tailgate could open unintentionally.
• For car washes with a conveyor system:
- Neutral N is engaged.
- If you would like to leave the vehicle while it is being washed, make sure the key is located in the vehicle. Park position P will otherwise be engaged automatically.

To prevent damage to the tyres or rims, drive straight and in to the centre of the guide rails of the car wash.
If, after the car wash, you remove the wax from the windscreen and wiper rubbers, this will prevent smearing and reduce wiper noise.

Car wash mode

In car wash mode, the vehicle is prepared for driving into an automatic car wash. Car wash mode can be activated at a speed of up to 20 km/h ( page 622).

The following settings are adjusted when car wash mode is activated:

• The outside mirrors will be folded in.
- To prevent the windscreen washer system from starting up automatically, the rain sensor will be deactivated.
• The rear window wiper will be deactivated.
- The windows and the sliding sunroof will be closed, if necessary.
- The air conditioning system will be set to air-recirculation mode.

• Parking Assist PARKTRONIC will be deactivated.
• Vehicles with 360° camera: The front image will be activated after approximately eight seconds.
• Vehicles with AIRMATIC: The vehicle will be raised to the maximum possible chassis level(→ page 391).
  If raising takes longer than 25 seconds, the following message will appear on the driver's display:
  Preparation for car wash incomplete See central display. After some time, the vehicle will automatically continue being raised.
• Vehicles with E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL: The vehicle will be raised to the maximum possible chassis level(→ page 404).
  If raising takes longer than 25 seconds, the following message will appear on the driver's display:
  Preparation for car wash incomplete See central display. After some time, the vehicle will automatically continue being raised.

If one of the settings cannot be selected, this will be shown by the X symbol next to the respective setting.

Above a speed of 20 km/h, car wash mode will be deactivated automatically.

The following settings will be reset when car wash mode is deactivated:

• The outside mirrors will be folded out.
• The rain sensor will be activated.
• The rear window wiper will be activated.
- The air conditioning system will be set to fresh air mode.
- Parking Assist PARKTRONIC will be reset to the previously selected setting.
- The windows and the sliding sunroof will remain closed.
- Vehicles with 360° camera: The front image will be deactivated at speeds above 18 km/h.
• Vehicles with AIRMATIC: The vehicle will be lowered to the previously set chassis level.

- Vehicles with E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL: The vehicle will be lowered to the previously set chassis level.

Preparing for a holiday

Notes on adjusting the lights when driving abroad

Vehicles with static LED headlamps: it is not necessary to convert the headlamps. The legal requirements are also met in countries in which traffic drives on the other side of the road.

Vehicles with Intelligent Light System: The head-lamps are automatically adjusted when the vehicle enters countries in which traffic drives on the other side of the road.

In the following cases, check the headlamp setting and change it manually if necessary:

• If the Dipped-beam setting (left/right-side traffic) Manual adjustment only display message is displayed.
• If the Check dipped-beam setting (left/right-side traffic) display message is displayed.

Once the headlamps have been converted:

• Oncoming traffic will not be dazzled.
• The edge of the road will not be illuminated as far or as high.
• The "motorway mode" and "enhanced fog light" functions will not be available.

Notes on regularly inspecting wheels and tyres

WARNING Risk of injury due to damaged tyres
Damaged tyres can cause tyre pressure loss.
▶ Check the tyres regularly for signs of damage and replace any damaged tyres immediately.

WARNING Risk of aquaplaning due to insufficient tyre tread

Insufficient tyre tread will result in reduced tyre grip.

The risk of aquaplaning is increased on wet roads, especially when the speed of the vehicle is not adapted to suit the conditions.

Thus, you should regularly check the tread depth and the condition of the tread across the entire width of all tyres.

Minimum tread depth for:

• Summer tyres: 3 mm
• M+S tyres: 4 mm
For safety reasons, replace the tyres before the legally-prescribed limit for the minimum tread depth is reached.

Carry out the following checks on all wheels regularly, at least once a month or as required, for example, prior to a long journey or driving off-road:

• Check the tyre pressure (→ page 657).
  • Visually inspect wheels and tyres for damage.
• Check the valve caps.
• Visual check of the tyre tread depth and the tyre contact surface across the entire width.

The minimum tread depth for summer tyres is 3 mm and for winter tyres 4 mm.

Removing the safety vest

Diagram of car interior showing dashboard and steering wheel with numbered annotations highlighting key components

There are safety vest compartments in the door compartments of all doors where safety vests can be stored.

To remove: pull out the safety vest bag ① by the loop ②.
Open the safety vest bag ① and pull out the safety vest.
Put back: Fold up the safety vest, roll it up and stow it in the safety vest bag ^① .
Slide the safety vest bag ① along the lower edge of the armrest into the warning vest compartment. Make sure that the loop ② hangs out to be easy to reach.

For a new safety vest, remove the packaging film before sliding it into the safety vest compartment. Otherwise, it may cause unintentional slipping out or make it difficult to remove. Observe the legal requirements in the individual countries.

1 Max. 15 x 2 40° 3 6 7 2

1 Maximum number of washes
② Maximum wash temperature
Do not bleach
4 Do not iron
Do not tumble dry
6 Do not dry clean
⑦ Class 2 safety vest

The requirements defined by the legal standard are only fulfilled if the safety vest is the correct size and is fully closed.

Replace the safety vest in the following cases:

• The reflective strips are damaged or dirty

• The maximum permissible number of washes is exceeded
• The fluorescence property decreases, e.g. due to permanent exposure to sunlight.

Dispose of the safety vest in an environmentally friendly way:

- Please contact your local waste disposal company.

Removing the warning triangle (not plug-in hybrid)

Vehicles with two rows of seats

Top-down view of a car engine bay with a highlighted internal component (no text or symbols)

Remove warning triangle ①.

Vehicles with three rows of seats

Line drawing of a car backrest with a circular traffic sign indicating '1' (no text or symbols on the diagram itself)

Remove warning triangle ①.

Removing the warning triangle (plug-in hybrid)

Line drawing of a car interior showing the trunk and side panel, with a numbered label pointing to the front panel (no text or symbols on the main diagram)

F167 0009 02

The warning triangle is located in the load compartment on the right behind service flap ①.

First-aid kit (soft sided) overview

Diagram of a car interior with labeled components and a zoomed-in view showing internal grid layout

Depending on the vehicle equipment, the first aid kit (soft-sided) may be located in the following places in the vehicle:

• The first-aid bag ① is in the stowage net in the load compartment on the left or right.
• Plug-in-Hybrid: The first-aid kit is in the door tray of the driver's door. (→ page 46)

Map data update overview

As the content of a digital road map has a short life, outdated data may have a negative effect on all navigation functions. For the best MBUX navigation experience, you should install all of the map updates offered by Mercedes-Benz.

The following options are available for the update of map data:

• Online map update
• Updates from the Mercedes me Portal
- Update at a Mercedes-Benz service centre
Additional costs can be incurred in this process.

Online map update

Requirements:

• Mercedes me connect is available.
• You have a Mercedes me user account.
- The Online Map Update service is available for your region.
• The service has been activated.

The Online Map Update service is only available in certain countries.

Installation takes place in the background as an automatic map update.

The MBUX multimedia system installs all of the available map updates for the European regions in which the vehicle is located or is moved.

The online map update is activated at the latest after the next time the vehicle is switched on.

Updates from the Mercedes me Portal

The map data for several regions can also be updated manually. Log in with your Mercedes me user account at: https://www.mercedes-benz.de/

Follow the menu path My Mercedes Me account > My vehicles > Selection of car > Online Map Update. Select the regions to be downloaded to a storage medium.

After the map data has been copied, connect the storage medium with your vehicle. Select the notification with information about a new version of the map data and start the installation. After the MBUX multimedia system has been restarted, the updated map data is used.

Entering a POI or address

Requirements

• For the online search:

• There is an Internet connection.
• Mercedes me connect is available.
• You have set up a user account in the Mercedes me Portal.
• The vehicle is connected with the user account and you have accepted the terms of use.
• Further information can be found at: https://www.mercedes.me

- The service is available and has been activated.

If Online Search is not available, the search is performed using the data of the digital map.

Multimedia system:

1 St 2 Previous Destinations 1061 499 in. Netherlands St. Mana 2.0 in. Sinderflog... St. Bonfa... 2.7 in. Booblin e... 12 x e r l y u i o p s d f g h j k l z x c v b n m 123 - OK 5 8 9 6 10 11

Example: entering a POI or address

① Input line with current entry
② Deletes an entry
3 Selects previous destinations
4 Displays and selects additional destination searches

5 Adopts the search result in the input line and continues the search
6 Search result
⑦ Deletes the last character entered
8 Hides the keypad
9 Switches to handwriting recognition ( page 487)
Sets the written language
⑪ Switches to digits and special characters
12 Switches to upper-case or lower-case letters

If available, selecting the symbol starts the MBUX voice assistant.

Enter a destination. The entries can be made in any order. The search results are displayed in a list.
① Online search results for POIs may contain additional information, for example opening times and ratings. The information is provided by an online map service. This online function is not available in all countries.

The following entries can be made, for example in ①:

• Town, street, house number or street, town
• Postcode
  • POI name or POI category, e.g. Restaurants
• Town, POI name
• Contact name
  • Geo-coordinates ( page 515)
• Three-word addresses from what3words ( page 515)

Entering three-word addresses is possible in the online search.

▶ Hide the keyboard with OK.
▶ Select the destination in the list.

The following menu shows the selected destination with the address information and a corresponding map section.

The menu enables the route to be calculated.

Searching for radio stations using station names or frequency entry

Multimedia system:

Radio

Select
Enter a station name or frequency.
Select a station.

Luggage and loading

Attaching a roof luggage rack

WARNING Risk of accident due to exceeding the maximum roof load

The vehicle centre of gravity and the usual driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking characteristics alter.

If you exceed the maximum roof load, the driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, will be greatly impaired.

▶ Never exceed the maximum roof load and adjust your driving style.

You will find information on the maximum roof load in the "Technical data" section in the printed Owner's Manual.

NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to not observing the maximum permitted head-room clearance

If the vehicle height is greater than the maximum permitted headroom clearance, the roof and other parts of the vehicle may be damaged.

Observe the signposted headroom clearance.
If the vehicle height is greater than the permitted headroom clearance, do not enter.
Observe the changed vehicle height with add-on roof equipment.

! NOTE Damage to the panorama sliding sunroof due to non-approved roof luggage racks

The panorama sliding sunroof may be damaged by the roof luggage rack if you attempt to open it when using a roof luggage rack not tested and approved for Mercedes-Benz.

When a roof luggage rack is fitted, open the panorama sliding sunroof only if this has been tested and approved for Mercedes-Benz.

The panorama sliding sunroof may be raised to allow ventilation of the vehicle interior.

▶ Secure the roof rack to the roof railing.
Observe the manufacturer's installation instructions.

Folding the rear seat backrest forwards

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when adjusting the seats

When you adjust a seat, you may trap yourself or a vehicle occupant.

When adjusting a seat, make sure that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the seat.

WARNING Risk of accident if the seat and seat backrest are not engaged

The seat and seat backrest can fold forwards. There is a risk of the following, in particular:

• The vehicle occupant may be pressed against the seat belt. The seat belt cannot protect as intended and could cause additional injury.
• A child restraint system will no longer be properly supported or positioned and will no longer fulfil its function as intended.

- The seat backrest will not be able to restrain objects or goods in the load compartment.

Always ensure that the seat and seat backrest are engaged, in particular:

• Before persons travel in the vehicle while sitting on a seat with the easy entry and exit feature
  • After the seat has been adjusted.
  • After the easy entry and exit feature has been used
  • After the load compartment enlargement has been folded forwards

Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have their seat belts fastened correctly and are sitting properly. Particular attention must be paid to children.

If you no longer require the folded-down rear seat backrest as a load area, fold the backrest back into place.

Make sure that the red marking of the lock verification indicator is no longer visible. Otherwise, the seat backrest is not locked.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, a message will be displayed on the instrument cluster instead of the red lock verification indicator.

Folding the rear seats forwards mechanically Depending on the vehicle equipment, you can fold the outer seat backrests forwards mechanically.

Interior view of a car showing a rear seat with a highlighted side panel and a close-up of the seat cover (no text or symbols)

Move the driver's or front passenger seat forwards, if necessary.

To fold the left and right seat backrests forwards: if necessary, insert the head restraints for the seat backrests ( page 186).
Pull release lever 1.
Fold the corresponding seat backrest forwards.

Diagram showing car seatbelt buckle assembly with numbered parts and directional arrows indicating movement

Fold the rear seat armrest back if necessary.

To fold the centre seat backrest forwards: press release catch 3.
Fold seat backrest ② forwards.

Observe the following recommendations:

• If you wish to fold only one of the outer seat backrests forwards, it is recommended that you fold the right seat backrest forwards.
• If you wish to fold one of the outer seat backrests forwards together with the centre seat backrest, it is recommended that you fold the left and centre seat backrests forwards.

Folding the rear seats forwards electrically If a seat in the second row of seats is not engaged and locked, this will be shown on the multifunction display on the instrument cluster.

Ensure that the centre seat backrest is in an upright position.

Diagram of car interior showing dashboard and seatbelt with labeled buttons and a numbered inset

To fold the left or right seat backrest forwards: briefly press one of buttons ①. The head restraint in the rear will move into a suitable position. The rear seat will fold forwards. The centre seat backrest will fold forwards together with the left seat backrest.

Observe the following recommendations:

• If you wish to fold only one of the outer seat backrests forwards, it is recommended that you fold the right seat backrest forwards.
• If you wish to fold one of the outer seat backrests forwards together with the centre seat backrest, it is recommended that you fold the left and centre seat backrests forwards.

Folding back the rear seat backrest

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when adjusting the seats

When you adjust a seat, you may trap yourself or a vehicle occupant.

When adjusting a seat, make sure that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the seat.

WARNING Risk of accident if the rear bench seat, rear seat and seat backrest are not engaged

The rear bench seat, rear seat and seat back-rest may fold forwards, even while the vehicle is in motion.

• As a result, the vehicle occupant will be pressed into the seat belt with increased force. The seat belt will not be able to protect as intended and could cause additional injury.
• Objects or loads in the boot or load compartment cannot be restrained by the seat backrest.
  Make sure that the rear bench seat, the rear seat and the seat backrest are engaged before every trip.

! NOTE Damage caused by trapping the seat belt when folding back the seat back-rest

The seat belt could become trapped and thus be damaged when the seat backrest is folded back.

Make sure that the seat belt is not trapped when folding back the seat backrest.

Folding back the rear seat mechanically

Diagram showing car interior with directional arrows and numbered label 1, likely indicating vehicle movement or traffic flow.

Move the driver's or front passenger seat forwards, if necessary.
Swivel seat backrest ① back until it engages.

Make sure that the red marking of the lock verification indicator is no longer visible. Otherwise, the seat backrest is not locked.

Folding back the rear seat electrically

Interior view of a car showing the dashboard and seatbelt with a control panel (no text or symbols visible)

Left or right seat backrest: briefly pull one of buttons ①.
The rear seat will fold back. The centre seat backrest will fold back together with the left-hand seat backrest.
If a seat backrest is not engaged and locked, this will be shown on the multifunction display on the instrument cluster.

Opening or closing the stowage space under the load compartment floor

WARNING Risk of injury due to an open load compartment floor

If you drive with the load compartment floor open, objects could be flung around and hit vehicle occupants as a result. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction.

Always close the load compartment floor before a journey.

Opening

Diagram of a car interior with labeled parts, showing front and rear views with numbered annotations.

Vehicles with a second row of seats

Line drawing of a car interior showing the rear compartment and seat area, with no text or symbols present.

Vehicles with a third row of seats

Pull handle ① upwards.
Lift the load compartment floor up using handle ①.
Fold out the hook on the underside of the load compartment floor.
Clip hook onto drip rail ②.

Vehicles with a third row of seats

Pull handle ① upwards.
Lift the load compartment floor up using handle ①.

Closing

Unhook the hook from drip rail ② and fasten it to the holder on the underside of the load compartment floor.
Fold the load compartment floor down and then press handle ① down until it engages.

Vehicles with a third row of seats

Fold the load compartment floor down and then press handle ① down until it engages.

Extending and retracting the ball neck fully electrically

WARNING Risk of accident due to the ball neck not being engaged

If the ball neck is not engaged, the trailer may come loose.

Make sure that the ball neck securely engages and locks into place.

NOTE Damage to the all-electric trailer hitch due to additional pressure

The all-electric trailer hitch could be mechanically damaged by applying additional pressure when the ball neck is being extended or retracted.

Do not make the ball neck extend/retract faster by applying additional pressure.

NOTE Increased risk of damage to property due to folded-out ball neck

When the trailer is not coupled or the bicycle rack is attached, fold in the ball neck or, in the case of a fully electric trailer hitch, retract the ball neck.

NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to incorrect use of the trailer hitch

If a trailer hitch is used to recover the vehicle, the vehicle or the trailer hitch itself may be damaged in the process.

▶ Use the trailer hitch only for pulling a trailer or attaching approved carrier systems (e.g. a bicycle rack).

Exception: Since vehicles with a trailer hitch do not have a fixture for a towing eye at the rear, towing or tow-starting is permitted.

When towing or tow-starting with the trailer hitch, observe the information in the section "Fitting and removing the towing eye."

Extending the ball neck fully electrically

Diagram of car rearview showing a camera module and its internal panel with labeled parts 1 and 2

▶ Secure the vehicle against rolling away.
Keep the swivel range clear.
Pull button ①. Indicator lamp ② will flash and a message reading Trailer coupling in motion will appear on the driver's display.

The ball neck will extend fully electrically.

Wait until the ball neck has locked in place. When indicator lamp ② is continuously lit, the ball neck is securely locked in place. If the ball neck is not securely locked in place, indicator lamp ② will flash and a message reading Trailer coupling Check lock will appear on the driver's display.

Line drawing of a car's rearview with a magnified inset showing the engine component (no text or symbols)

Retracting the ball neck fully electrically

Remove the trailer cable or adapter plug.
Pull button 1.
Indicator lamp ② will flash and a message reading Trailer coupling in motion will appear on the driver's display.
The ball neck will retract fully electrically.
Wait until the ball neck has locked in place. When indicator lamp ② goes out, the ball neck is securely locked in place.
If the ball neck is not securely locked in place, indicator lamp ② will flash and a message reading Trailer coupling Check lock will appear on the driver's display.

Observe the information about the displays on the driver's display:

• Indicator and warning lamps (→ page 909)
• Display messages (→ page 817)

Overview of the tie-down eyes in the load compartment

Observe the notes on loading the vehicle ( page 198).

Diagram of car interior with labeled components and a magnified inset showing a fetal head silhouette

① Tie-down eyes

Overview of the front stowage compartments

WARNING Risk of injury due to objects being stowed incorrectly

If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addition, cup holders, open stowage spaces and mobile phone receptacles cannot always retain all objects within.

There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction.

Always stow objects so that they cannot be thrown around in such situations.
Always make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage spaces, luggage nets or stowage nets.
Close the lockable stowage spaces before starting a journey.
Always stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects in the boot/load compartment.

Observe the notes on loading the vehicle.

Diagram of car interior with numbered components for identification

① Stowage spaces in the doors
2 Stowage compartment in the armrest with USB ports (depending on vehicle equipment)
3 Stowage/telephone compartment with cup holder in the front centre console
4 Glove compartment

Locking/unlocking the glove compartment

WARNING Risk of injury due to objects being stowed incorrectly

If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addition, cup holders, open stowage spaces and mobile phone receptacles cannot always retain all objects within.

There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction.

Always stow objects so that they cannot be thrown around in such situations.
Always make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage spaces, luggage nets or stowage nets.
▶ Close the lockable stowage spaces before starting a journey.
Always stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects in the boot/load compartment.

Observe the notes on loading the vehicle.

Diagram of a car interior with labeled control buttons and dashboard, showing numbered indicators for function keys.

Turn the emergency key a quarter turn clockwise 2 (to lock) or anti-clockwise 1 (to unlock).

Using the stowage compartment and MBUX rear tablet in the rear armrest

WARNING Risk of injury due to objects being stowed incorrectly

If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addition, cup holders, open stowage spaces and mobile phone brackets cannot always retain all objects they contain.

There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction.

▶ Always stow objects in such a way that they cannot be thrown around in such situations.
Always make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage spaces, luggage nets or stowage nets.
▶ Close the lockable stowage spaces before starting a journey.

Always stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects in the boot.

A WARNING - Risk of accident or injury when using the cup holder while the vehicle is in motion

The cup holder cannot hold a container secure while the vehicle is in motion.

If you use a cup holder while the vehicle is in motion, the container may be flung around and liquids could be spilled. The vehicle occupants may come into contact with the liquid and if it is hot, they could be scalded. You could be distracted from traffic conditions and you may lose control of the vehicle.

Only use the cup holder when the vehicle is stationary.
Only use the cup holder for containers of the right size.
Always close the container, particularly if the liquid is hot.

Observe the notes on loading the vehicle.

! NOTE Damage to the rear armrest due to body weight

When folded out, the rear armrest can be damaged by body weight.

Do not sit or support yourself on the rear seat armrest.

In vehicles with a folding rear seat armrest, this can be folded down to allow the stowage compartments to be used. The available rear armrests and stowage compartments vary depending on the vehicle equipment.

Interior view of a car showing seatbelt and side arm (no text or symbols)

Pull handle ① and fold down the rear arm-rest.

Interior view of a car showing seatbelt and dashboard (no text or symbols)

Depending on the vehicle equipment, use the MBUX rear tablet ②(→ page 606).

Ice and snow

Notes on regularly inspecting wheels and tyres

WARNING Risk of injury due to damaged tyres

Damaged tyres can cause tyre pressure loss.

▶ Check the tyres regularly for signs of damage and replace any damaged tyres immediately.

WARNING Risk of aquaplaning due to insufficient tyre tread

Insufficient tyre tread will result in reduced tyre grip.

The risk of aquaplaning is increased on wet roads, especially when the speed of the vehicle is not adapted to suit the conditions.

Thus, you should regularly check the tread depth and the condition of the tread across the entire width of all tyres.

Minimum tread depth for:

• Summer tyres: 3 mm

- M+S tyres: 4 mm

For safety reasons, replace the tyres before the legally-prescribed limit for the minimum tread depth is reached.

Carry out the following checks on all wheels regularly, at least once a month or as required, for example, prior to a long journey or driving off-road:

• Check the tyre pressure (→ page 657).
  • Visually inspect wheels and tyres for damage.
• Check the valve caps.
• Visual check of the tyre tread depth and the tyre contact surface across the entire width. The minimum tread depth for summer tyres is 3 mm and for winter tyres 4 mm.

Setting the speed limit for winter tyres

Multimedia system:

→ Settings → Vehicle
▶ Winter tyre limit

Activate or deactivate Winter tyre limit.

Setting a speed

Select Winter tyre limit.

Select a speed.

Notes on snow chains

⚠ WARNING Risk of accident due to incorrectly fitted snow chains

If you have fitted snow chains to the front wheels, they may drag against the vehicle body or chassis components.

▶ Never fit snow chains to the front wheels.
▶ Only fit snow chains on the rear wheels in pairs.

NOTE Damage to components of the vehicle body or chassis due to fitted snow chains

If you fit snow chains to the front wheels of 4MATIC vehicles, you may damage components of the vehicle body or chassis.

Only fit snow chains to the rear wheels of 4MATIC vehicles.

- Snow chains are only permissible for certain wheel/tyre combinations. You can obtain

information about this from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

• For safety reasons, only use snow chains that have been specifically approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or snow chains with the same quality standard.
• Comply with the installation instructions of the snow chain manufacturer.
• If snow chains are fitted, the maximum permissible speed is 50 km/h.
  • Vehicles with Active Parking Assist: do not use Active Parking Assist when snow chains are fitted.

① You can permanently limit the maximum speed for driving with winter tyres ( page 359).
① You can deactivate ESP ^® to pull away (→ page 350). This allows the wheels to spin, achieving an increased driving force.

Notes on windscreen washer fluid

Observe the notes on operating fluids ( page 786).

WARNING - Risk of fire and injury due to windscreen washer concentrate

Windscreen washer concentrate is highly flammable. It could ignite if it comes into contact with hot engine component parts or the exhaust system.

Make sure that no windscreen washer concentrate spills out next to the filler opening.

NOTE Damage to the exterior lighting due to unsuitable windscreen washer fluid

Unsuitable windscreen washer fluids may damage the plastic surface of the exterior lighting.

Only use windscreen washer fluids which are also suitable for use on plastic surfaces, e.g. MB SummerFit or MB WinterFit.

NOTE Blocked spray nozzles caused by mixing windscreen washer fluids

Do not mix MB SummerFit and MB WinterFit with other windscreen washer fluids.

Do not use distilled or de-ionised water. Otherwise, the fill level sensor may be triggered erroneously.

Recommended windscreen washer fluid:

• above freezing point: e.g. MB SummerFit
• below freezing point: e.g. MB WinterFit

For the correct mixing ratio, refer to the information on the antifreeze container.

Mix washer fluid with windscreen washer fluid all year round.

Topping up the windscreen washer system

A DANGER Risk of fatal injuries when carrying out maintenance work during the charging process

During the charging process, the high-voltage on-board electrical system is under high voltage.

Do not perform any maintenance work during the charging process.

⚠ WARNING Risk of burns when opening the bonnet

If you open the bonnet in the event of an overheated engine or fire in the engine compartment, the following situations may occur:

• You may come into contact with hot gases.
• You may come into contact with other escaping hot operating fluids.
  Before opening the bonnet, allow the engine to cool down.

In the event of a fire in the engine compartment, keep the bonnet closed and call the fire service.

WARNING Risk of injury due to moving parts

Components in the engine compartment may continue to run or start unexpectedly even when the drive system is switched off.

Observe the following if you must open the bonnet:

▶ Switch off the vehicle.
▶ Never touch the danger zones surrounding moving components, e.g. the rotation area of the fan.
Remove jewellery and watches.
Keep items of clothing and hair away from moving parts.

WARNING Risk of burns from hot component parts in the engine compartment

Certain component parts in the engine compartment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the cooler and parts of the exhaust system.

Allow the engine to cool down and only touch component parts described in the following.

WARNING - Risk of fire and injury due to windscreen washer concentrate

Windscreen washer concentrate is highly flammable. It could ignite if it comes into contact with hot engine component parts or the exhaust system.

Make sure that no windscreen washer concentrate spills out next to the filler opening.

Diagram of a car interior with labeled components and a numbered inset showing a gear icon and a magnified view.

Remove cap ① by the tab.
Top up the washer fluid.

Replacing the windscreen wiper blades (MAGIC VISION CONTROL)

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the windscreen wipers are switched on while wiper blades are being replaced

If the windscreen wipers begin to move while you are changing the wiper blades, you can be trapped by the wiper arm.

Always switch off the windscreen wipers and vehicle before changing the wiper blades.

Moving the wiper arms into the replacement position

Switch off the vehicle.

Within around 15 seconds, press the button on the combination switch (→ page 241).

The wiper arms will move into the replacement position.

Removing the wiper blades

Diagram showing car exterior and engine components with numbered annotations indicating parts of the engine section

To bring the wiper blade into position to be removed: hold the wiper arm firmly with one hand. With the other hand, turn the wiper blade in the direction of arrow ① beyond the point of resistance.

The wiper blade will engage in the removal position with a click.

To remove the wiper blade: press release knob ②, pull the wiper blade in the direction of arrow ③ and remove.

Fitting the wiper blades

Diagram showing car interior cleaning steps with numbered instructions and a close-up of the tool.

Push the new wiper blade onto the wiper arm in the direction of arrow ① until release knob ② engages.

Press the wiper blade onto the wiper arm beyond the point of resistance in the direction of arrow ③.
The wiper blade will engage with a noticeable click and move freely again.
Fold the wiper arm back onto the windscreen.
Check the condition of the wiper blades regularly and replace them in the event of visible damage or ongoing smearing.

Replacing the windscreen wiper blades

A WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the windscreen wipers are switched on while wiper blades are being replaced

If the windscreen wipers begin to move while you are changing the wiper blades, you can be trapped by the wiper arm.

Always switch off the windscreen wipers and vehicle before changing the wiper blades.

Moving the wiper arms into the replacement position

Switch the vehicle on and then off again immediately.
Within around 15 seconds, press and hold the button on the combination switch for approximately three seconds (→ page 241). The wiper arms will move into the replacement position.
Check the condition of the wiper blades regularly and replace them in the event of visible damage or ongoing smearing.
Observe the information about the maintenance display.

Maintenance display

Diagram showing car exterior and close-up of a cable connector with labeled parts, including a numbered annotation.

Remove protective film ① from the maintenance displays on the tips of the newly fitted wiper blades.

When the colour of the maintenance displays changes from black to yellow, replace the wiper blades.

① The duration until the colour changes varies depending on the usage conditions.

Switching the stationary heater/ventilation on/off via the operating unit

DANGER Risk of fatal injury due to poisonous exhaust gases

If the tailpipe is blocked or sufficient ventilation is not possible, poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide may enter the vehicle. This is the case in enclosed spaces or if the vehicle gets stuck in snow, for example.

▶ Always switch the stationary heater off in enclosed spaces without an air extraction system, e.g. in garages.
Keep the tailpipe and the area around the vehicle free from snow when the engine or the stationary heater is running.
Open a window on the side of the vehicle facing away from the wind to ensure an adequate supply of fresh air.

WARNING Risk of fire due to hot stationary heater components and exhaust gases

Flammable materials such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite.

When the stationary heater is switched on, make sure that:
- hot vehicle parts do not come into contact with flammable materials.
- the exhaust gas can flow out of the stationary heater exhaust pipe unhindered.
- the exhaust gas does not come into contact with flammable materials.

NOTE Battery discharge caused by stationary heater or stationary ventilation operation

Operating the stationary heater or stationary ventilation drains the battery.

After heating or ventilating the vehicle twice, drive for a longer period of time.

Requirements

• The fuel tank is sufficiently full.
i Please note that if the tank fill level is too low, it can result in function restrictions during auxiliary heating operation.

Interior view of a car dashboard with steering wheel and air conditioner panel (no text or symbols)

Set the desired temperature using the button.

Press button 1

The red or blue indicator lamp on button will light up or go out.

Indicator lamp colours:

• Blue: stationary ventilation is switched on.
• Red: the stationary heater is switched on.
- Yellow: the departure time has been preselected.

The stationary heater/ventilation will switch off automatically after 50 minutes.

Help in the event of a breakdown

Activating/deactivating the hazard warning lights

Diagram of car interior showing dashboard, steering wheel, and control panel with labeled button 1

Press button 1.

The hazard warning lights will switch on automatically if:

• the airbag has been deployed.

- the vehicle is braked heavily from a speed of more than 70 km/h to a standstill.

When you pull away again, the hazard warning light system will switch off automatically at approximately 10 km/h. You can also switch off the hazard warning light system using button ①.

When the turn signal indicator is activated, the hazard warning lights will be interrupted.

Removing the fire extinguisher

A WARNING Risk of accident due to an incorrectly secured fire extinguisher in the driver's footwell

A fire extinguisher may impede pedal travel or block a depressed pedal.

This jeopardises the operating and road safety of the vehicle.

The fire extinguisher can be flung around and injure the driver or other vehicle occupants.

Always store and secure the fire extinguisher in the bracket.

Do not remove the fire extinguisher while driving.

Diagram of car seatbelt mechanism with numbered labels pointing to key components

Left-hand drive vehicle: pull tab 1 upwards.
Right-hand drive vehicle: pull tab ① downwards.
Remove fire extinguisher ②.

Removing the safety vest

Diagram of car interior showing dashboard and steering wheel with numbered labels pointing to key components

There are safety vest compartments in the door compartments of all doors where safety vests can be stored.

To remove: pull out the safety vest bag ① by the loop ②.
Open the safety vest bag ① and pull out the safety vest.
Put back: Fold up the safety vest, roll it up and stow it in the safety vest bag.

F167 0009 02

Slide the safety vest bag ① along the lower edge of the armrest into the warning vest compartment. Make sure that the loop ② hangs out to be easy to reach.
For a new safety vest, remove the packaging film before sliding it into the safety vest compartment. Otherwise, it may cause unintentional slipping out or make it difficult to remove. Observe the legal requirements in the individual countries.

1 Max. 15x 2 40° 3 4 5 6 7 2

① Maximum number of washes
2 Maximum wash temperature
Do not bleach

4 Do not iron
Do not tumble dry
6 Do not dry clean
⑦ Class 2 safety vest

The requirements defined by the legal standard are only fulfilled if the safety vest is the correct size and is fully closed.

Replace the safety vest in the following cases:

• The reflective strips are damaged or dirty
- The maximum permissible number of washes is exceeded
- The fluorescence property decreases, e.g. due to permanent exposure to sunlight.

Dispose of the safety vest in an environmentally friendly way:

- Please contact your local waste disposal company.

Removing the warning triangle (not plug-in hybrid)

Vehicles with two rows of seats

Top-down view of a car engine bay with a highlighted internal component (no text or symbols)

Remove warning triangle ①.

Vehicles with three rows of seats

Line drawing of a car interior showing the hood and dashboard (no text or symbols)

Remove warning triangle ①.

Removing the warning triangle (plug-in hybrid)

Interior view of a car showing the backrest and dashboard area with a numbered label pointing to a dark object (no text or symbols on the diagram itself)

The warning triangle is located in the load compartment on the right behind service flap ①.

First-aid kit (soft sided) overview

Diagram of a car interior with labeled components, showing a closed trunk and a grid-patterned panel on the back.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, the first aid kit (soft-sided) may be located in the following places in the vehicle:

• The first-aid bag ① is in the stowage net in the load compartment on the left or right.
• Plug-in-Hybrid: The first-aid kit is in the door tray of the driver's door. (→ page 46)

QR code for rescue card

QR codes are attached in the fuel filler flap and on the opposite side on the B-pillar. In the event of an accident, rescue services can use the QR code to quickly find the appropriate rescue card for your vehicle. The current rescue card contains the most important information about your vehicle (e.g. the routing of the electric lines) in compact form.

Further information can be obtained at https://www.mercedes-benz.de/qr-code

Starting assistance and charging the 12 V battery

Requirements

• The vehicle is secured with the electric parking brake.
• Vehicles with automatic transmission: the transmission is in position P.
• The vehicle and all electrical consumers are switched off.
  • The bonnet is open.

Automotive engine component diagram with numbered parts and directional indicators for repair or maintenance.

Example: engine compartment

Slide cover ① of POSITIVE contact ② on the jump-starting connection point in the direction of the arrow.
Connect POSITIVE contact ② on your vehicle to the positive terminal of the donor battery using the jump lead/charging cable. Always

begin with POSITIVE contact ② on your own vehicle first.
During starting assistance: start the engine of the donor vehicle and run at idle speed.
Connect the negative terminal of the donor battery and earth point ③ of your own vehicle by using the jump lead/charging cable. Begin with the donor battery first.
During starting assistance: start the engine of your own vehicle.
During the charging process: start the charging process.
During starting assistance: let the engines run for several minutes.
During starting assistance: before disconnecting the jump lead, switch on an electrical consumer on your own vehicle, e.g. the rear window heater or lighting.

When the starting assistance/charging process is complete, perform the following steps:

First, remove the jump lead/charging cable from earth point ③ and the negative terminal

of the donor battery, then POSITIVE contact ② and the positive terminal of the donor battery. Begin each time with the contacts on your own vehicle first.
After removing the jump lead/charging cable, close cover ① of POSITIVE contact ②.

Plug-in hybrid: if your vehicle has been started with starting assistance, it may not be possible to use the electric drive for approximately 30 minutes.

Further information can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop.

Notes on electrical fuses

WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to overloaded lines

If you manipulate or bridge a faulty fuse or if you replace it with a fuse with a higher amperage, the electric line could be overloaded.

This could result in a fire.

Always replace faulty fuses with specified new fuses containing the correct amperage.

NOTE Damage due to incorrect fuses

Using incorrect fuses can result in damage to electrical components or systems or their functions being considerably restricted.

Use only fuses approved for Mercedes-Benz with the respective specified fuse rating.

Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of the same rating, which you can recognise by the colour and the label. The fuse ratings and further information to be observed can be found in the fuse assignment diagram.

Fuse assignment diagram: on the fuse box in the load compartment ( page 654).

NOTE Damage or malfunctions caused by moisture

Moisture may cause damage to the electrical system or cause it to malfunction.

When the fuse box is open, make sure that no moisture can enter the fuse box.
When closing the fuse box, make sure that the seal of the lid is positioned correctly on the fuse box.

If the newly inserted fuse also blows, have the cause traced and rectified at a qualified specialist workshop.

Ensure the following before replacing a fuse:

• The vehicle is secured against rolling away.
• All electrical consumers are switched off.
• The vehicle is switched off.

The electrical fuses are located in various fuse boxes:

- Fuse box in the engine compartment on the left-hand side of the vehicle, when viewed in the direction of travel ( page 653)

• Fuse box on the driver's side of the cockpit (→ page 654)
• Fuse box in the front passenger footwell (→ page 654)
• Fuse box in the load compartment on the right-hand side of the vehicle, when viewed in the direction of travel ( page 654)

Notes on flat tyres

⚠ WARNING Risk of accident due to a flat tyre

A flat tyre severely affects the driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking of the vehicle.

Tyres without run-flat characteristics:

Do not drive with a flat tyre.
Change the flat tyre immediately with an emergency spare wheel or spare wheel. Alternatively, consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Tyres with run-flat characteristics:

Observe the information and warning notes on MOExtended tyres (run-flat tyres).

In the event of a flat tyre, the following options are available depending on your vehicle's equipment:

• Vehicles with MOExtended tyres: it is possible to continue the journey for a short period of time. Make sure you observe the notes on MOExtended tyres (run-flat tyres) (→ page 632).
• Vehicles with a TREFIT kit: you can seal the tyre so that it is possible to continue the journey for a short period of time. To do this, use the TREFIT kit ( page 634).
• Vehicles with Mercedes me connect: you can make a call for breakdown assistance via the overhead control panel in the case of a breakdown ( page 572).
• All vehicles: change the wheel (→ page 665).

Overview of the tyre-change tool kit

Apart from some country-specific variants, vehicles are not equipped with a tyre-change tool kit. For more information on which tools are required and approved to perform a wheel change on your vehicle, consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Required tyre-changing tools may include, forexample:

• Jack
• Chock
• Wheel wrench

The jack weighs approximately 3.4 kg. The maximum load capacity of the jack can be found on the sticker affixed to the jack. The jack is maintenance-free. If there is a malfunction, please contact a qualified specialist workshop.

Tyre-change tool kit ① is located under the load compartment floor.

Depending on the model, the tyre change tool kit may be located in other positions under the load compartment floor.

Interior view of a car hood with visible engine compartment and gear mechanism (no text or symbols)

The tyre-change tool kit includes the following:

• Jack
• Wheel wrench
• Wheel studs
• Folding chock

- Extension attachment for wheel studs, if necessary (depending on vehicle version)

- Ratchet ring spanner

Plug-in hybrid

The tyre-change tool kit is located in breakdown bag ①.

Depending on the vehicle version, the breakdown bag is located in the load compartment or under the load compartment floor.

When stowing the breakdown bag, ensure that it is adequately secured.

1

Storage location of the TREFIT kit (not plug-in hybrid)

The TREFIT kit is located under the load compartment floor.

Vehicles with two rows of seats

Technical diagram of a vehicle engine compartment with labeled parts 1 and 2

① Tyre sealant bottle
② Tyre inflation compressor

Vehicles with three rows of seats

Diagram of a car interior with labeled parts, showing two numbered components (1 and 2) pointing to internal compartments.

① Tyre sealant bottle
2 Tyre inflation compressor

Depending on the vehicle version, the TREFIT kit may also be located in other places under the load compartment floor.

You can find information on the power category (LK) and/or electrical data on the back of the tyre inflation compressor:

• LK3 - 12 V/20 A, 240 W, 1 kg

At a distance of approximately 1 m to the tyre inflation compressor and approximately 1.6 m above the ground, the following sound pressure levels apply:

R Emission sound pressure level L_PA 84 dB(A)
R Sound power level L_WA 92 dB(A)

The tyre in-lation compressor is maintenance-free. If there is a malfunction, please contact a qualified specialist workshop.

Storage location of the TREFIT Kit (plug-in hybrid)

①

TREFIT kit 1 is located on the le-hand side of the load compartment. Observe the loading guidelines in the vehicle Owner's Manual.

% You can nd information on the power category (LK) and/or electrical data on the back of the tyre inflation compressor:

R LK2 - 12 V/15 A, 180 W, 0.8 kg

At a distance of approximately 1 m to the tyre inflation compressor and approximately 1.6 m above the ground, the following sound pressure levels apply:

R Emission sound pressure level L_PA 83 dB (A)
R Sound power level L_WA 91 dB (A)

The tyre inflation compressor is maintenance-free. If there is a malfunction, please contact a qualified specialist workshop.

Towing away the vehicle with both axles on the ground

# Observe the notes on the permitted towing methods (/ page 646).

F167 0009 02

Plug-in hybrid: observe the notes on the permitted towing methods (/ page 647).
Make sure that the battery is connected and charged.

A discharged battery has the following e·ects:

R the vehicle cannot be switched on
R the electric parking brake cannot be released or applied
R The transmission cannot be shiied to position i or j
% If the transmission cannot be shilled to position i, or the multifunction display in the instrument cluster does not show anything, the vehicle must be transported away (/ page 650). A towing vehicle with liling equipment is required for vehicle transportation.

NOTE Damage due to towing away at excessively high speeds or over long distances

The drivetrain could be damaged when towing at excessively high speeds or over long distances.

A towing speed of 50 km/h must not be exceeded.
A towing distance of 50 km must not be exceeded.

WARNING Risk of accident when towing a vehicle which is too heavy

If the vehicle to be tow-started or towed away is heavier than the permissible gross mass of your vehicle, the following situations can occur:

• the towing eye may become detached.
- the vehicle/trailer combination may swerve or overturn.
Before tow-starting or towing away, check if the vehicle to be tow-started or

towed away exceeds the permissible gross mass.

Information on the permissible gross mass of the vehicle can be found on the vehicle identification plate ( page 784).
Do not open the driver's door or front passenger door as the transmission could otherwise shift to position P automatically.
Fit the towing eye ( page 652).
▶ Fasten the towing device.

NOTE Damage due to incorrect connection of the tow bar

Only connect the tow rope or tow bar to the towing eyes.

You can also attach the tow bar to the trailer hitch.

Deactivate the automatic locking mechanism ( page 156).
Do not activate the HOLD function.

Deactivate tow-away protection ( page 174).
Deactivate Active Brake Assist ( page 377).
Shift the transmission to position [N] (→ page 302).
Release the electric parking brake.

A WARNING Risk of accident due to limited safety-related functions during the towing process

Safety-related functions are limited or no longer available in the following situations:

• the vehicle is switched off.
- the brake system or power steering system is malfunctioning.
- the energy supply or the on-board electrical system is malfunctioning.

When your vehicle is towed away, significantly more effort may be required to steer and brake than is normally required.

▶ Use a tow bar.

Make sure that the steering wheel can move freely before towing the vehicle away.
! NOTE Damage due to excessive tractive power
If you pull away sharply, the tractive power may be too high and the vehicles could be damaged.
▶ Pull away slowly and smoothly.

Expert tips

Additional functions of buttons

Opening and closing the windows using the air-recirculation button (convenience closing/opening)

When air-recirculation mode is activated, the side windows close automatically, for example, before entering a tunnel. When the air-recirculation mode is deactivated, the side windows move back to their original position.

A WARNING Risk of entrapment due to not paying attention during convenience closing

When the convenience closing feature is operating, parts of the body could become trapped in the closing area of the side window and the sliding sunroof.

When the convenience closing feature is operating, monitor the entire closing process and make sure that no body parts are in the closing area.

A WARNING Risk of entrapment due to not paying attention during convenience closing

When the convenience closing feature is operating, parts of the body could become trapped in the closing area of the side windows.

When the convenience closing feature is operating, monitor the entire closing process and make sure that no body parts are in the closing area.

To close the windows: press and hold the button until the windows start to move. The windows close and air-recirculation mode switches on.
WARNING Risk of entrapment from the convenience opening feature
During convenience opening parts of the body could be drawn in or become trapped between the side window and window frame.
When opening, make sure that nobody is touching the side windows.
If someone becomes trapped, immediately press the button in the door to open the side windows. The side windows stop.
To continue closing the side windows, pull on the button.
To reopen closed windows: press and hold the button until the windows start to move. The windows move back to their original position and air-recirculation mode switches off.

Vehicles with a sliding sunroof: the sliding sunroof closes or opens simultaneously.

If body parts become entrapped in the sliding sunroof:

To stop: press the button.
To open: pull the button back.

Resetting the climate control settings

Press and hold the MENU button on the front control panel for four seconds. The climate control settings will be reset to the basic settings.

Activating/deactivating traffic announcements Multimedia system:

Select TA. The traffic information is switched on or off.

Useful vehicle functions

Notes about the automatically active rear window wiper

The rear window wiper will automatically be active if the following conditions are met at the same time:

• The front windscreen wiper is switched on
- Reverse gear is engaged

Storing the parking position of the front-passenger outside mirror using the memory button

Requirements:

• Reverse gear has not been engaged.

Diagram of car interior showing labeled buttons and a control panel with numbered annotations

Select the front-passenger outside mirror using button ①.
Move the front-passenger outside mirror into the desired parking position using button ②.
Press the M button.
Confirm immediately using button ② to store the setting.

No more than three seconds may pass between the M button and button being pressed. The mirror adjustment will be cancelled after three seconds.

Tips for on the move

■ Vehicle conditions for automatic engine stop or start

Conditions for automatic engine stop:

• The ECO start/stop function is switched on.
- The brake system does not require a running engine.
- The outside temperature is within the range that is suitable for the system (vehicles without 48 V on-board electrical system).
- The atmospheric air pressure is within the range that is suitable for the system.
- The engine is at normal operating temperature.
• Engine diagnostics are not active.

• The engine speed is within the range that is suitable for the system (vehicles without 48 V on-board electrical system).
• The transmission oil temperature is within the range that is suitable for the system.
• The temperature in the vehicle interior is within the set range.
  • The fuel tank is sufficiently full.
• The system detects that there is no moisture on the windscreen when the air conditioning system is switched on.
• The state of charge and voltage of the battery are sufficient (vehicles without 48 V on-board electrical system).
• The battery temperature is within the range that is suitable for the system (vehicles without 48 V on-board electrical system).
  • The system does not detect a steep gradient.
  • The bonnet is closed.

Conditions for automatic engine start:

- The vehicle continues to roll (vehicles without 48 V on-board electrical system).

• The brake system requires a running engine.
- The outside temperature is not within the range suitable for the system (vehicles without 48 V on-board electrical system).
- The atmospheric air pressure has exceeded the range that is suitable for the system.
• Engine diagnostics require a running engine.
- The transmission oil temperature has exceeded the range that is suitable for the system.
- The temperature in the vehicle interior deviates from the set range.
- The system detects moisture on the wind-screen when the air conditioning system is switched on.
- The state of charge of the battery is too low (vehicles without 48 V on-board electrical system).
- The battery temperature is not within the range suitable for the system (vehicles without 48 V on-board electrical system).

Good to know

Deactivating the function of the key

If you deactivate the key function, the KEYLESS-GO functions are also deactivated. Access or drive authorization by KEYLESS-GO is then no longer possible with that particular key. Activate the function of the key so that all its functions will again be available. You can also deactivate the function of the key to reduce the energy consumption of the key if you do not use the vehicle or a key for an extended period of time.

If you do not use the vehicle or a key for an extended period of time, you can also deactivate the function of the key to reduce the energy consumption of the key.

Press and hold the key 📞 button.

With the key button 📄 pressed, immediately press key button ⚡ twice in quick succession.

The indicator light of the key lights up once briefly and once for a long time.

(i) You have the following options to reactivate the key:

• Press any key on the key.
• Start the vehicle with the key in the centre console storage compartment ( page 270).

Overview of emergency call systems

Both the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system as well as the 112 emergency call system (EU eCall) can help to reduce the time between an accident and the arrival of emergency services at the site of the accident. They help locate an accident site in places that are difficult to access.

Both emergency call systems can initiate an emergency call automatically ( page 582) or manually ( page 582).

Only make emergency calls if you or others are in need of rescue. Do not make an emergency call in the event of a breakdown or a similar situation.

Indicators in the displays

The following messages appear on the central display or the media display of both emergency call systems:

• SOS NOT READY: the vehicle is not switched on or the emergency call system is malfunctioning. This does not necessarily indicate complete failure of the emergency call system. Emergency calls can still be transmitted.
  The display only refers to the vehicle and does not take account of the availability of mobile phone networks and the Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre.
  The functional readiness of the emergency call system on the vehicle can be seen when the SOS NOT READY display disappears once the vehicle is switched on.
• SOS: the icon appears in the display during an active emergency call.
  If there is a malfunction of the emergency call system, the loudspeakers, microphone, airbag or the SOS button, for example, are faulty.

You can recognise a fault in the emergency call system by the following displays:

• A corresponding message will also appear in the driver's display.
  • The SOS button lights up red continuously.

The availability as well as the scope of the emergency guide can vary depending in the country and vehicle equipment.

Emergency guide

In the event of an accident or breakdown, the emergency guide shows safety notes on the central display.

These include, for example:

• Recommended actions when leaving the vehicle
• Procedure for safely removing seat belts in the event of an accident whereby the vehicle comes to rest on its roof

The emergency guide is activated in the following situations:

• Occupant protection system has been triggered
• An emergency call is made
• Certain breakdown situations

Diagram of a car interior with numbered components and labeled parts, including the Mercedes-Benz logo.

Left-hand-drive vehicles
F167 0009 02

① Steering wheel gearshift paddles → 306
② Combination switch → 232
Driver's display → 441
4 DIRECT SELECT lever → 301
5 Central display
6 Climate control systems → 252
7 Hazard warning light system → 55
8 PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps → 112
Glove compartment → 46
10 Stowage compartment → 46
Controller for volume and switching sound on/off
Switches the MBUX multimedia system on/off
12 NAVI MAP Calls up navigation
13 RADIO MEDIA Calls up radio or media
TEL Calls up the telephone

15 Switch panel for:
Off-road menu → 505
M Manual shifting → 305
AIRMATIC or → 389
E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL → 400
Activates/deactivates ESP ^® → 346
Downhill Speed Regulation → 368
16 Fingerprint sensor
⑰ Calls up vehicle functions
18 Active Parking Assist → 422
19 DYNAMIC SELECT switch → 297
20 Touchpad
21 Start/stop button → 268
(A) ECO start/stop function → 283
22 Control panel for the MBUX multimedia system
23 Adjusts the steering wheel mechanically → 192

Adjusts the steering wheel electrically	→	193
Switches the steering wheel heater on/off	→	194
Control panel:
Driver's display	→	441
Cruise control or variable limiter	→	357

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC → 362

26 Diagnostics connection → 99
27 Opens the bonnet → 612
28 (P) Electric parking brake → 338
29 Light switch → 230

F167 0009 02

Diagram of a car interior with numbered components for identification and assembly reference.

Left-hand-drive vehicles
F167 0009 02

1 Driver's display:
	READY Operational readiness →	441
Power availability display
Power meter	→	454
Trip computer	→	444
ECO Assist	→	288
2 Central display:
Plug-in hybrid settings	→	504
Energy flow display	→	505
3 Switches immediate pre-entry climate control on/off	→	260

4	Sets pre-entry climate control for departure time	→	260
5	DYNAMIC SELECT switch	→	292
6	Calls up the EQ menu	→	504
7	Haptic accelerator pedal	→	290
8	+ Reduces recuperation	→	287
9	- Increases recuperation	→	287
10	Depressurises the fuel tank	→	21

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 1 15 OFF 125.3 km 24967 200 READY 25 24 23 22 21 (●) (P) (P) 20 19 18 17 16

Driver's display
F167 0009 02

① Turn signal lights → 232
2 Trailer hitch → 913
3 Suspension (red) → 921
Suspension (yellow) → 921
4 Electrical fault → 915
5 Power steering (red) → 913
Power steering (yellow) → 913
6 Restraint system → 911
⑦ Seat belt → 911
8 Distance warning → 921
9 ABS → 921
10 Tyre pressure monitoring system → 927
11 Engine diagnostics → 915
12 ESP ^® OFF → 921
ESP ^③ → 921
13 00 Diesel engine: preglow

14 Plug-in hybrid: reduced power → 912
15 Petrol engine: reduced power
16 Coolant temperature → 915
17 Coolant temperature display → 444
18 (P) Electric parking brake (yellow) → 919
19 (P) Electric parking brake (red) → 919
20 (1) Brakes(red) → 919
(1) Brakes (yellow) → 919
21 Reserve fuel with fuel filler flap location → 915 indicator
22 Fuel level → 444
23 High beam → 232
D Low beam → 230
200≤ Standing lights → 230
24 0‡ Rear fog light → 231
25 SOS BDT REMED Mercedes-Benz emergency call system → 927

Diagram of car interior with numbered labels pointing to various controls and seating areas

F167 0009 02

Sun visors
2 Switches the left-hand reading lamp → 239 on/off
3 Switches automatic interior lighting control on/off → 239
4 \~ Switches the front interior lighting on/off → 239
5 Switches the rear interior lighting on/off → 239
6 Switches the right-hand reading lamp → 239 on/off

⑦ me button → 572
8 SOS SOS button → 572
9 Opens/closes the panorama sliding sun- → 167 roof

Opens/closes the roller sunblind → 167

10 Inside rear-view mirror → 247

Diagram of car interior with numbered car compartments and seat labels, likely for vehicle safety or diagnostic reference.

F167 0009 02

① Opens the door → 154
Locks/unlocks the vehicle → 155
3 M Sets the memory function → 197
4 Adjusts the seats electrically → 176
5 Switches the seat heating on/off → 190
6 Switches the seat ventilation on/off → 192
7 Adjusts the front passenger seat from → 178 the driver's seat
8 Opens/closes the tailgate → 158
? ☐ Opens/closes the right side window → 163

10 Opens/closes the rear right side window → 163
11 Child safety lock for the rear side windows → 148
12 Opens/closes the rear left side window → 163
13 Opens/closes the left side window → 163
14 Operates the outside mirrors → 245
15 Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support → 180
16 Seat adjustment using the multimedia system → 189
⑰ Adjusts the head restraints → 185

Diagram of car interior compartments with numbered labels indicating different seat positions and features

F167 0009 02

① Rear climate control operating unit
② Stowage compartment in the centre console

USB charge port → 224

3 Switches the rear seat heating on/off → 190
4 Adjusts the rear seats electrically → 180
5 Cup holder

Diagram of a car interior with numbered parts for identification and assembly reference.

F167 0009 02

B-pillar with: QR code for accessing the rescue card → 58
Safety vests → 34
3 Fire extinguisher → 55
4 me button → 572
SOS SOS button → 572
5 Hazard warning light system → 55
To check and top up operating fluids → 786
Starting assistance → 58
⑦ Tow-starting or towing away → 63

8 Flat tyre → 60
9 Tow-starting or towing away → 63
10 Fuel filler flap with: information label on fuel type → 21
information label on tyre pressure → 658
QR code for accessing the rescue card → 58
⑪ Warning triangle → 35
⑫ TREFIT kit → 634
13 First-aid kit (soft sided) → 36

Calling up the Digital Owner's Manual

Multimedia system:

→ Settings Info
Owner's Manual
▶ Open Digital Owner's Manual

The Digital Owner's Manual describes the functions and operation of the vehicle and the multimedia system.

Select one of the following menu items in the Digital Owner's Manual:
- Quick start: find the first steps towards adjusting your seat (driver's side).
- Tips: find information that prepares you for certain everyday situations with your vehicle.
• Animations: watch animations of the vehicle functions.
- Messages: receive additional information about the messages in the driver's display.
• Language: select the language for the Digital Owner's Manual.

You can search for keywords using the search field Search, in order to find quick answers to questions about the operation of the vehicle.

Search 1 2 3 4

① Menu
2 Search
Back
④ Contents section

Some sections in the Digital Owner's Manual, such as warning notes, can be expanded and collapsed.

Additional methods of calling up the Digital Owner's Manual:

Driver's display: call up brief information as display messages in the driver's display

MBUX Voice Assistant: call up via the voice control system

Global search: call up search results for contents of the Digital Owner's Manual in the home screen For safety reasons, the Digital Owner's Manual is deactivated while driving.

Protection of the environment

ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage due to operating conditions and personal driving style

The pollutant emission of the vehicle is directly related to the way you operate the vehicle.

Operate your vehicle in an environmentally responsible manner to help protect the environment. Please observe the following recommendations on operating conditions and personal driving style.

Operating conditions:

Make sure that the tyre pressure is correct.
Do not carry any unnecessary weight (e.g. roof luggage racks once you no longer need them).
Adhere to the service intervals. A regularly serviced vehicle will contribute to environmental protection.

Always have maintenance work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

Personal driving style:

Do not depress the accelerator pedal when starting the engine.
Do not warm up the vehicle while stationary.
▶ Drive carefully and maintain a suitable distance from the vehicle in front.
Avoid frequent, sudden acceleration and braking.
Change gear in good time and use each gear only up to 23 of its maximum engine speed.
▶ Switch off the vehicle in stationary traffic, e.g. by using the ECO start/stop function.
▶ Drive in a fuel-efficient manner. Observe the ECO display for an economical driving style.

Plug-in hybrid

ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental pollution caused by irresponsible disposal of the high-voltage battery

A high-voltage battery contains materials which are harmful to the environment.
▶ Dispose of faulty high-voltage batteries at a qualified specialist workshop.

Take-back of end-of-life vehicles

EU countries only:

Mercedes-Benz will take back your end-of-life vehicle for environment-friendly disposal in accordance with the European Union (EU) End-Of-Life Vehicles Directive.

A network of vehicle take-back points and dismantlers has been established for you to return your vehicle. You can leave it at any of these points free of charge. This makes an important contribution to closing the recycling circle and conserving resources.

For further information about the recycling and disposal of end-of-life vehicles, and the take-back conditions, please visit the national Mercedes-Benz website for your country.

Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts

ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage caused by not using recycled reconditioned components

Mercedes-Benz AG offers recycled reconditioned components and parts with the same quality as new parts. The same entitlement from the implied warranty is valid as for new parts.

Recycled reconditioned components and parts from Mercedes-Benz AG.

NOTE Impairment of the operating efficiency of the restraint systems from installing accessory parts or from repairs or welding

Airbags and seat belt tensioners, as well as control units and sensors for the restraint systems, may be installed in the following areas of your vehicle:

• doors
• door pillars
  • Sill
• Seats
• Cockpit
• Instrument display
• Centre console
• lateral roof frame

Do not install accessory parts such as audio systems in these areas.
Do not carry out repairs or welding.
▶ Have accessories retrofitted at a qualified specialist workshop.

You could jeopardise the operating safety of your vehicle if you use parts, tyres and wheels as well as accessories relevant to safety that have not been approved by Mercedes-Benz. Safety-critical systems (e.g. the brake system) may malfunction. Use only Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts or parts of equal quality. Use only tyres, wheels and accessory parts that have been specifically approved for your vehicle model.

Mercedes-Benz tests original parts and conversion parts and accessory parts that have been specifically approved for your vehicle model for their reliability, safety and suitability. Despite ongoing market research, Mercedes-Benz is unable to assess other parts. Mercedes-Benz therefore accepts no responsibility for the use of such parts in Mercedes-Benz vehicles, even if they have been officially approved or independently approved by a testing centre.

Certain parts are officially approved for installation or modification only if they comply with legal requirements. All Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts meet the approval requirements. The use of non-approved parts may invalidate the vehicle's general operating permit.

This is the case in the following situations:

• The vehicle type is different from that for which the vehicle's general operating permit was granted.
  • Other road users could be endangered.
  • The exhaust gas or noise level gets worse.

Always specify the vehicle identification number (VIN) ( page 784) when ordering Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts.

Touch-sensitive controls

In addition to conventional switches and buttons, your vehicle is equipped with touch-sensitive controls.

These are located in the following areas of your vehicle:

• Roof and door control panel
- Climate control
- Steering wheel
• MBUX multimedia system

The controls have touch-sensitive user interface surfaces. The surfaces are controlled by pressing or swiping to adjust settings or to trigger functions, forexample.

In the area of the touchscreen, you also receive haptic feedback in the form of a pulse or a vibration, or the surface structure changes on the touch-sensitive user interface surface, forexample.

You receive haptic feedback in the following situations, forexample:

• When pressing a button on the user interface surface
• When scrolling in a list or table
• When reaching a new area on the user interface surface, e.g. a pop-up window

When handling touch-sensitive user interface surfaces, observe the following points to avoid problems operating:

• Do not affix stickers or similar objects on the surfaces
• Keep the surfaces protected from moisture and wet conditions.

F167 0009 02

- Keep the surfaces free of dust and dirt ( page 626).

Some touch-sensitive control elements have a symbol and integrated indicator lamps. When operating, make sure to press on the symbol of the control element.

Mercedes me App

Notes about the on-demand feature

You can also activate various functions (on-demand feature) subsequently via Mercedes me after purchasing your vehicle.

Information is available at any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

Activating on-demand feature using Mercedes me

Requirements:

• The vehicle has a wireless connection.
- The vehicle is linked to the Mercedes me user account.

Ordering and activating on-demand feature

Add the desired on-demand feature for the vehicle to the shopping basket in the Mercedes me Store.
Complete the order. The on-demand feature is activated when operating the vehicle.

Speeding up activation

▶ Switch the vehicle off and lock it.
Unlock the vehicle after about two minutes and switch on the vehicle. The on-demand feature has been activated. For some features, a notification also appears in the vehicle's multimedia system.

If the activation was not successful, repeat the process.

Operating safety

WARNING Risk of accident due to malfunctions or system failures

If you do not have the prescribed service/maintenance work or any required repairs carried out, this could result in malfunctions or system failures.

Always have the prescribed service- and maintenance work or any required repairs carried out in a qualified workshop.

WARNING Risk of accident or injury due to improper modifications to electronic components

Modifications to electronic components, their software or wiring can impair their functionality and/or the functionality of other networked components or safety-relevant systems. This can endanger the vehicle's operating safety.

You must not tamper with wiring, electronic components, or their software.
Always have work on electrical and electronic devices carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

If you modify the on-board electronics, the general operating permit is rendered invalid.

Observe the "On-board electronics" section in "Technical data".

WARNING Risk of fire due to flammable material coming into contact with hot parts of the exhaust system

If combustible materials, e.g. leaves, grass or twigs, come into contact with hot parts of the exhaust system, they may ignite.

When driving off-road or on unpaved surfaces, check the underside of the vehicle at regular intervals.
In particular, remove any trapped parts of plants or other flammable material.

If damage should occur, immediately inform a qualified specialist workshop.

NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to driving too fast and due to impacts to the vehicle underbody or suspension components

In the following situations, in particular, there is a risk of damage to the vehicle:

• the vehicle becomes grounded, e.g. on a high kerb or an unpaved road
• the vehicle is driven too fast over an obstacle, e.g. a kerb, speed bump or pothole
• a heavy object strikes the underbody or suspension components

In situations such as these, damage to the body, underbody, suspension components, wheels or tyres may not be visible. Components damaged in this way can unexpectedly fail or, in the case of an accident, may no longer absorb the resulting force as intended.

If the underbody panelling is damaged, flammable materials such as leaves, grass or twigs can collect between the underbody and the underbody panelling. These materials may ignite if they come into contact with hot parts of the exhaust system.

Have the vehicle checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
or
If driving safety is impaired while continuing your journey, pull over and stop the vehicle immediately, while paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and contact a qualified specialist workshop.

Plug-in hybrid

Hybrid vehicles have an internal-combustion engine and at least one electric motor. The energy supply for operating the vehicle electrically is provided by the high-voltage on-board electrical system.

DANGER Risk of death and fire due to modified and/or damaged components of the high-voltage on-board electrical system

The vehicle's high-voltage on-board electrical system is under high voltage. If you modify component parts in the vehicle's high-voltage on-board electrical system or touch damaged component parts, you may be electrocuted. In addition, modified and/or damaged components may cause a fire.

In the event of an accident or impact to the vehicle underbody, components of the high-voltage electrical system may be damaged although the damage is not visible.

▶ Never make any modifications to the high-voltage on-board electrical system.
Do not switch on or use the vehicle if its high-voltage on-board electrical system components have been modified or damaged.

▶ Never touch damaged components of the high-voltage on-board electrical system.
After an accident, do not touch any components of the high-voltage on-board electrical system.
After an accident, have the vehicle transported away.
Have the components of the high-voltage on-board electrical system checked at a qualified specialist workshop and replaced if necessary.

The components of the vehicle's high-voltage on-board electrical system are marked with yellow warning stickers. The cables of the high-voltage on-board electrical system are orange.

Warning symbols including warning triangle, lightning bolt, and hand gesture with text labels

High-voltage components that can become very hot are marked with an additional warning sticker:

Warning symbols including warning triangle, lightning bolt, hand gesture, and warning sign with text

Example

vehicles with hybrid systems generate significantly less noise than vehicles with internal-combustion engines.

When you are driving in electric mode, the vehicle may not be heard by other road users due to the significantly lower noise generated.

For this reason the vehicle is equipped with a sound generator, which serves as an acoustic vehicle alerting system (AVAS). This protective equipment is prescribed by law.

The outside sound produced by the sound generator (AVAS) can be heard in the passenger compartment at low speeds and does not represent a malfunction.

Vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical system

DANGER Risk of fatal injury by touching damaged high-voltage components

Vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical system contain individual high-voltage components. These high-voltage components are under high voltage.

If you modify component parts of these high-voltage components or touch damaged component parts, you may be electrocuted.

High voltage components may be damaged in an accident, although the damage may not be visible.

▶ Never perform modifications to component parts of high-voltage components.
▶ Never touch damaged component parts of high-voltage components.
▶ Never touch component parts of high-voltage components after an accident.

Vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical system contain high-voltage components. These components are marked with a high-voltage label:

Safety warning symbols including warning triangle, warning triangle with lightning bolt, and hazard symbol with lightning bolt

All work on high voltage components must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

Notes on assembling the number plate on the front licence plate holder

NOTE Malfunctions and system failures due to incorrect assembly of the licence plate on the front licence plate holder

If the licence plate is incorrectly assembled on the front licence plate holder, sensors, cameras or driving and safety systems may malfunction or fail.

Observe the following points when assembling the licence plate on the front licence plate holder:

Assemble the licence plate directly on the licence plate holder without advertising media or other holders.
Assemble the licence plate so that it does not protrude above or to the side of the licence plate adapter.

Declarations of conformity and notes on driving in different countries

Electromagnetic compatibility

The electromagnetic compatibility of the vehicle components has been checked and certified according to the currently valid version of Regulation UN-R 10.

National information for regulatory radio components

Notes when crossing national borders You must observe the radio regulatory requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the multimedia system.

Only for EU and EFTA countries and countries that recognise the EU manufacturer's declaration of conformity:

The following information applies to all wireless components of the vehicle and of the information systems and communication devices integrated in the vehicle:

The manufacturers of the wireless components ensure that all wireless components installed in the vehicle comply with Directive 2014/53/EU. The full texts of the EU declarations of conformity are available at the following web address: https://moba.i.mercedes-benz.com/markets/ece-row/baix/cars/certificates-of-conformity/en_GB/index.html

QR code image containing encoded data, no visible human-readable text

You can obtain further information from a Mercedes-Benz service centre.

For Israel only:

It is prohibited to make any change to a vehicle-installed radio component that could affect the

wireless specifications of the device, including software changes, replacement of the original antenna, or adding the option to connect the device to an external antenna, without first obtaining approval from the Communica-tions Ministry, because of concern about wireless interference.

For the United Kingdom only:

The following information applies to all wireless components of the vehicle and of the information systems and communication devices integrated in the vehicle:

The manufacturers of the radio components declare that all radio equipment installed in the vehicle is in compliance with the relevant statutory requirements. The full texts of the declarations of conformity are available at the following web address:

https://moba.i.mercedes-benz.com/markets/ece-row/baix/cars/certificates-of-conformity/en_GB/index.html

QR code image containing encoded data, no visible human-readable text

For Brazil only:

Note on two-way radio systems in the vehicle:

These systems are not protected against harmful interference and must not cause interference in properly approved systems.

For Jamaica only:

All wireless vehicle components have received type approval from the SMA.

For Nigeria only:

Connection and use of this communications equipment is permitted by the Nigerian Communications Commission

Connection and use of the radio communications equipment in this vehicle is permitted by the Nigerian Communications Commission

For Russia only:

EAC EAC

The manufacturers of the wireless components installed in the vehicle hereby declare that all wireless components installed in the vehicle comply with the technical regulations for two-way radios. You can obtain further information from a Mercedes-Benz service centre.

For Ukraine only:

The manufacturers of the wireless components installed in the vehicle hereby declare that the wireless components installed in the vehicle comply with the technical regulations for two-way radios. You can obtain further information from a Mercedes-Benz service centre.

Jack

For EU and EFTA countries only:

Copy and translation of the original declaration of conformity:

EC declaration of conformity

1.

The undersigned, representing

Manufacturer:

BRANO a.s.

herewith declares under our sole responsibility that the product:

1. a)

Name:

Jack

Type, Number:

A) A 164 580 02 18, A 166 580 01 18

B) A 240 580 00 18

C) A 639 580 02 18

D) A 639 580 03 18

E) A 910 580 00 00

F) A 247 580 00 00, A 293 580 00 00

G) A 247 580 01 00, A 293 580 01 00

H) A 247 580 02 00, A 293 580 02 00

Year of manufacture: 2022

Complies with all relevant provisions

Directive No. 2006/42/EC

b)

Description and purpose of use:

Car jack is intended solely for lifting of the concrete car, in accordance with the instruction label on the car jack.

3.

References of harmonized and other standards or specifications

ISO 4063, EN ISO 14341-A, AS 2693, DBL

8230.10, DBL 7382.20, DBL 7392.10, DBL

8451.15, MBN 10435,

Technical documentation of the product is stored at the premise of the manufacturer. The person responsible for assembling the technical documentation of the product: Head of the Technical Department Brano a.s.

4.

Hradec nad Moravicí

Place

5.

14.03.2022

Date

Dipl. Engineer Michal Koberský

[Signature]

Director SBU-CJ

For the United Kingdom only:

Copy and translation of the original declaration of conformity:

UK declaration of conformity

1.

The undersigned, representing

Manufacturer:

BRANO a.s.

74741 Hradec nad Moravici, Opavská 1000,

Czech Republic

ID No.: 64-387-5933

VAT No.: CZ64-387-5933

herewith declares under our sole responsibility that the product:

1. a)

Name:

Jack

Type, Number:

A) A 164 580 02 18, A 166 580 01 18

B) A 240 580 00 18

C) A 639 580 02 18

D) A 639 580 03 18

E) A 910 580 00 00

F) A 247 580 00 00, A 293 580 00 00

G) A 247 580 02 00, A 293 580 02 00

Year of manufacture: 2022

Complies with all relevant provisions

Supply of Machinery (Safety) Regulations 2008 b)

Description and purpose of use:

Car jack is intended solely for lifting of the concrete car, in accordance with the instruction label on the car jack.

3.

References of harmonized and other standards or specifications

ISO 4063, EN ISO 14341-A, DBL 8230.10, DBL 7382.20, DBL 7392.10, DBL 8451.15, MBN 10435,

Technical documentation of the product is stored at the premise of the manufacturer. The person

responsible for assembling the technical documentation of the product: Head of the Technical Department Brano a.s.

4. Hradec nad Moravicí	5. 04.07.2022	[Signature] Dipl. Engineer Michal Kober-ský
Place Date Director SBU-		CJ

TREFIT kit

For EU and EFTA countries only:

Copy and translation of the original declaration of conformity:

CE

EU Declaration of Conformity

We

Dunlop Tech GmbH

Offenbacher Landstr. 8

DE-63456 Hanau

Declare under our sole responsibility that

Product Description: Electrical Air Pump

Serial Number: 000000001 to 999999999

is in conformity with all relevant provisions of the directives: The Electromagnetic Compatibility Regulations 2016

and complies with the following standards :

EN 55014-1:2017

EN 55014-2: 2015

Including (Category I)

Dunlop Tech GmbH, Offenbacher Landstr. 8, 63456 Hanau, Germany authorized representative for the compilation of the technical documentation.

Factory name: UNIK WORLD IND. CO., LTD.

Address: NO. 110-2, Xiwei, Shanhua Dist., Tainan City 74163, Taiwan (R.O.C.)

Name Dunlop Tech GmbH, Authorized Representative: IMS Department

Adress: Offenbacher Landstraße 8, 63456 Hanau, Germany

06-05-2022 i.A. [signa-ture]	i.A. [signa-ture]
	(Signature 1) (Signature 2)

Declaration place: Germany

For the United Kingdom only:

Copy and translation of the original declaration of conformity:

Dunlop Tech GmbH

UKCA Declaration of Conformity

Product :

Product

Electrical Air pump

Model / Brand

DT 200116 (UW0852-LK1), DT 200136 (UW0855-LK2), DT 200146 (UW0851ve-IBK LK2), DT 200177 (UW0872-IBK-LK2P), DT 200156 (UW0867-LK3)

Mercedes Benz Part Number:

A 000 583 8805, A 000 583 8905, A 000 583 8205, A 000 583 8305, A 000 583 8405

Authorized Representative (UK-GB):

Name:

Address:

Contact person:

This declaration is issued under the sole responsibility of the mentioned Representative. The subject equipment under declaration is in conformity with the UK-GB Regulation(s) below:

Statutory Instruments 2016 No. 1091

The Electromagnetic Compatibility Regulations 2016

Below designated standards were taken conferring a presumption of conformity with the relevant UK-GB regulations:

BS EN 55014-1: 2017

BS EN 55014-2: 2015

including(Category I)

Authorized Representative responsible for making this declaration:

Name: Dunlop Tech GmbH, Authorized Representative: Department IMS

Address: Offenbacher Landstraße 8, 63456 Hanau, Germany

06-05-2022 i.A. [signa-ture]	i.A. [signa-ture]
(Date) (Signature 1) (Signature 2)

Diagnostics connection

The diagnostics connection is a technical interface in the vehicle. It is used, for example, during repair and maintenance work or for reading out vehicle data in a specialist workshop. Diagnostic devices should therefore be connected only at a qualified specialist workshop.

WARNING Risk of accident due to connecting devices to the diagnostics connection

If you connect devices to the diagnostics connection of the vehicle, the function of vehicle systems and operating safety may be impaired.

For safety reasons, we recommend that you only use and connect products approved by a Mercedes-Benz service centre.

WARNING Risk of accident due to objects in the driver's footwell

Objects in the driver's footwell may impede pedal travel or block a depressed pedal. This jeopardises the operating and road safety of the vehicle.

Stow all objects in the vehicle securely so that they cannot get into the driver's footwell.

Always fit the floor mats securely and as prescribed in order to ensure that there is always sufficient room for the pedals.
Do not use loose floor mats and do not place floor mats on top of one another.

NOTE Battery discharging from using devices connected to the diagnostics connection

Using devices at the diagnostics connection drains the battery.

▶ Check the charge level of the battery.

If the charge level is low, charge the battery, e.g. by driving a considerable distance.

Please also note the information about the 12 V battery and short-distance trips in the "Driving and Parking" chapter ( page 275).

Diagram showing car interior and a close-up of a 3D model with warning labels and an arrow indicating a change.

Connecting and using another device with the diagnostics connection can have the following effects:

• Malfunctions in the vehicle system
  • Permanent damage to vehicle components

Please refer to the warranty terms and conditions for this matter.

Moreover, connecting equipment to the diagnostics connection can lead to emissions monitoring information being reset, for example. This may lead to the vehicle failing to meet the requirements of the next emissions inspection during the main inspection.

Qualified specialist workshop

A qualified specialist workshop has the necessary special skills, tools and qualifications to correctly carry out any necessary work on your vehicle. This particularly applies to safety-relevant work.

Always have the following work carried out on your vehicle at a qualified specialist workshop:

• Safety-relevant work
  • Service and maintenance work
• Repair work
• Modifications as well as installations and conversions
  • Work on electronic components
  • Plug-in hybrid: work on the hybrid system

- Vehicles with 48 V on-board electrical system: work on the high-voltage component of the 48 V on-board electrical system

Mercedes-Benz recommends a Mercedes-Benz service centre.

Vehicle registration

Mercedes-Benz may ask its service centres to carry out technical inspections on certain vehicles. The quality or safety of the vehicle is improved as a result of the inspection.

Mercedes-Benz can only inform you about vehicle checks if Mercedes-Benz has your registration data.

It is possible that your vehicle has not yet been registered in your name in the following cases:

• if your vehicle was not purchased at an authorised specialist dealer.
• if your vehicle has not yet been examined at a Mercedes-Benz service centre.

It is advisable to register your vehicle with a Mercedes-Benz service centre.

Inform Mercedes-Benz as soon as possible about any change in address or vehicle ownership. You can do this at a Mercedes-Benz service centre, for example.

Correct use of the vehicle

If you remove any warning stickers, you or others could fail to recognise certain dangers. Leave warning stickers in position.

Observe the following information in particular when driving your vehicle:

• the safety notes in this Owner's Manual, vehicle-specific supplements and further supplementary documents
  • technical data for the vehicle
• Traffic rules and -regulations of the country you are currently in
• Motor vehicle laws and safety standards of the country you are currently in
• Radio regulatory requirements of the country you are currently in

Information on the REACH regulation

EU and EFTA countries only:

the REACH regulation (Regulation (EC) No. 1907/2006, Article 33) stipulates a duty to supply information about substances of very high concern (SVHCs).

Mercedes-Benz AG acts to the best of its knowledge to prevent these SVHCs from being used and to enable customers to safely handle these substances. There are SVHCs known to Mercedes-Benz AG, according to supplier information and internal product information, found in individual components of this vehicle in quantities of over 0.1 percent by weight.

Further information can be obtained at the following addresses:

• https://reach.daimler.com/de/home/
• https://reach.daimler.com/en/home/

Notes for persons with electronic medical aids

Mercedes-Benz AG cannot, despite carefully developing vehicle systems, completely rule out

the interaction of vehicle systems with electronic medical aids such as cardiac pacemakers.

In addition, there are components installed in the vehicle that, regardless of the operating status of the vehicle, can generate magnetic fields on a par with permanent magnets. These fields can be found, for example, in the area around the multi-media and sound system or also in the area of the seats, depending on the vehicle equipment.

For this reason, the following can occur in isolated cases, depending on the aids used:

• Medical aids malfunctioning
- Adverse health effects

Observe the notes and warnings of the manufacturer of the medical aids; if in doubt, contact the device manufacturer and/or your doctor. If there is continuing uncertainty concerning the possibility of medical aids malfunctioning, Mercedes-Benz AG recommends using only few electrical vehicle systems and/or maintaining a distance from the components.

Plug-in hybrid

When charging the high-voltage battery, keep a distance of at least an arm's length between the medical aid and the following components:

• the power supply equipment This includes charging stations in the form of a wallbox or a public charging point, for example.
• vehicle components carrying live voltage This includes the charging cable and the charging control box, for example.

Only have repairs and maintenance work in the area of the following components carried out at a qualified specialist workshop:

• vehicle components carrying live voltage
- transmission aerials
• multimedia system and sound system

If you have any queries or suggestions, consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Implied warranty

NOTE Damage to the vehicle arising from violation of these operating instructions.

Damage to the vehicle can arise from violation of these operating instructions.

This damage is not covered either by the Mercedes-Benz implied warranty or by the New- or Used-Vehicle Warranty.

Follow the instructions in these operating instructions on proper operation of your vehicle as well as on possible vehicle damage.

QR code for rescue card

QR codes are attached in the fuel filler flap and on the opposite side on the B-pillar. In the event of an accident, rescue services can use the QR code to quickly find the appropriate rescue card for your vehicle. The current rescue card contains the most important information about your vehicle (e.g. the routing of the electric lines) in compact form.

Further information can be obtained at https://www.mercedes-benz.de/qr-code

Data storage

Data processing in the vehicle

Electronic control units

Electronic control units are fitted in your vehicle. Control units process data they receive from vehicle sensors, forexample, generate themselves or exchange between themselves. Some control units are required for the safe operation of your vehicle. For example, some assist you when driving, such as driver assistance systems, while others enable convenience or infotainment functions.

The following provides you with general information regarding data processing in the vehicle. Additional information regarding which data in your vehicle are collected, saved and transmitted to third parties and for what purpose can be found in the information directly related to the functional characteristics in question in their respective Owner's Manual. This information is available online and digitally, depending on the vehicle's equipment.

Personal data

A unique vehicle identification number identifies every vehicle. Depending on the country, this vehicle identification number can be used by, forexample, governmental authorities to determine the owner's identity. There are other possibilities for using data collected from the vehicle to identify the owner or driver, such as the licence plate number.

Therefore, data generated or processed by control units may be attributable to a person or, under certain conditions, become attributable to a person. Depending on which vehicle data are available, it may be possible to make inferences about, forexample, your driving behaviour, location, route or use patterns.

Legal requirements regarding the disclosure of data

If legally required to do so, manufacturers are, in individual cases, legally obliged to provide governmental entities, upon request and to the extent required, data stored by the manufacturer. Forexample, this may be the case during the investigation of a criminal offence. Governmental entities are themselves authorised to read out data from the vehicle in individual cases and within the applicable legal framework. In the case of an accident, information that can help with an investigation can be taken from the airbag control unit, forexample.

Operational data in the vehicle

This is data regarding the vehicle's operation, which control units have processed.

This includes the following data, forexample:

• Vehicle status information such as the speed, longitudinal acceleration, lateral acceleration, number of wheel revolutions or the fastened seat belts display
• Ambient conditions, such as temperature, rain sensor or distance sensor

Generally, these are volatile data and will not be stored beyond the period of operation but will only be processed within the vehicle itself. Control units, forexample, vehicle keys, often contain data memories. Their use permits the temporary or permanent documentation of technical information about the vehicle's operating state, component loads, maintenance requirements and technical events or faults.

Depending on the technical equipment, the following data are stored:

• Operating status of system components, such as fill levels, tyre pressure or battery status
• Malfunctions or faults in important system components, such as lights or brakes
• System reactions in special driving situations, such as an airbag deployment or the intervention of stability control systems
• information on events leading to vehicle damage

In certain cases, storing data that would have otherwise been temporary may be required. This may be the case if the vehicle has detected a malfunction, forexample.

If you use services such as repair services and maintenance work, stored operational data and the vehicle identification number can be read out and used. Service network employees can read them out, such as workshops and manufacturers

or third parties, such as breakdown services. The same is true in the case of warranty claims and quality assurance measures.

In general, the readout is performed via the legally prescribed port for the diagnostics connection in the vehicle. The operational data that are read out technical document states of the vehicle or of individual components and assist in diagnosing malfunctions, compliance with warranty obligations and quality improvement. To that end, these data, particularly information about component loads, technical events, malfunctions and other faults, may be transmitted along with the vehicle identification number to the manufacturer. Furthermore, the manufacturer is subject to product liability. For this reason, the manufacturer also uses operational data from the vehicle, forexample, for recalls. These data can also be used to examine the customer's warranty and guarantee claims.

Fault memories in the vehicle can be reset by a service outlet or at your request as part of repair or maintenance work.

Convenience and infotainment functions

You can store the vehicle's convenience settings and individual settings and change or reset them at any time.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, this includes the following settings, forexample:

• Seat and steering wheel positions
• Suspension and climate control settings
  • Individual settings, such as interior lighting

Depending on the selected equipment, you can import data into vehicle infotainment functions yourself.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, this includes the following data, forexample:

• Multimedia data, such as music, films or photos for playback in an integrated multimedia system
• address book data for use in connection with an integrated hands-free system or an integrated navigation system
• entered navigation destinations
  • data about the use of Internet services

These data for convenience and infotainment functions may be saved locally in the vehicle or located on a device you have connected to the vehicle, such as a smartphone, USB flash drive or MP3 player. If you have entered these data yourself, you can delete them at any time.

These data are transmitted only from the vehicle to third parties at your request. This applies, in particular, when you use online services per the settings you have selected.

Smartphone integration (e.g. Android Auto or Apple CarPlay®)

If your vehicle is accordingly equipped, you can connect your smartphone or another mobile end device to the vehicle. You can then control them by employing the control elements integrated into the vehicle. Images and audio from the smartphone can be output via the multimedia system. Certain information is simultaneously transferred to your smartphone. Depending on the type of integration, this includes position data, day/night mode and other general vehicle statuses. For more information, please consult the vehicle Owner's Manual/infotainment system.

This integration allows the use of selected smartphone apps, such as navigation or music player apps. There is no further interaction between the smartphone and the vehicle; in particular, vehicle data is not directly accessible. The type of additional data processing is determined by the provider of the app being used. Which settings you can make, if any, depends on the specific app and your smartphone's operating system.

Online services

Wireless network connection

If your vehicle has a wireless network connection, it enables data to be exchanged between your vehicle and additional systems. The wireless network connection is made possible by the vehicle's own transmitter and receiver or by a mobile end device that you have brought into the vehicle, forexample, a smartphone. Online functions can be used via the wireless network connection. This includes online services and applications/apps provided to you by the manufacturer or by other providers.

Manufacturer's services

Regarding the manufacturer's online services, the individual functions are described by the manufacturer in a suitable place, forexample, in the Owner's Manual or on the manufacturer's website, where the relevant data protection information is also given. Personal data may be used for the provision of online services. Data are exchanged via a secure connection, such as the manufacturer's designated IT systems. Any personal data which are collected, processed and used, other than for the provision of services, is done so exclusively on the basis of legal permission. This is the case, forexample, for a legally prescribed emergency call system, a contractual agreement or when consent has been given. You can have services and functions, some of which are subject to a fee, activated or deactivated. This excludes legally prescribed functions and services, such as an emergency call system.

Third party services

If you use online services from other providers (third parties), these services are the responsibility of the provider in question and subject to that provider's data protection conditions and terms of

F167 0009 02

use. As a general rule, the manufacturer has no influence on the content exchanged.

For this reason, when services are provided by third parties, please ask the service provider in question for information about the type, extent and purpose of the collection and use of personal data.

Data protection rights

Depending on your country or the equipment and range of functions of your vehicle as well as the services you use and the services on offer, you are entitled to different data protection rights. Further information on data protection and your data protection rights can either be found on the manufacturer's website or you will receive this information as part of the various services and service offers. There you will also find the contact information for the manufacturer and its data protection officers.

At a workshop, forexample, with the support of a specialist and possibly for a fee, you can have data read out which is stored only locally in the vehicle.

Copyright

Information on licences for free and open-source software used in your vehicle can be found on the data carrier in your vehicle document wallet and with updates on the following website:

https://www.mercedes-benz.com/opensource

Brief overview of most important points

Basic information

Make sure that the following prerequisites in particular have been met so that the components of the restraint system are able to provide the intended level of protection:

• Sit correctly (→ page 108).
• Fasten the seat belt correctly (→ page 109).
  Function of the 4 seat belt warning lamp ( page 111).
  Function of the rear seat belt status display ( page 111).

- The restraint system warning lamp is not lit up after the self-test ( page 110).

- The PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps display the correct status of the front passenger airbag ( page 112).

For clear understanding

The chapter "Occupant safety" includes information on equipment, functions and behaviours that contribute directly to safety of vehicle occupants.

The information is structured as follows:

• The most important information in brief: in this chapter, you are provided with an overview of the relationship between the restraint system and the correct behaviour of all vehicle occupants.
• Specific information: in further sections of the chapter "Occupant safety", you can find specific information on the equipment and functions of the restraint system.
• Keyword directory: you can also find certain subjects in this Owner's Manual using the keyword directory.

Information on the following subjects, among others, are not provided in the chapter "Occupant safety":

• Children in the vehicle (→ page 124)

- Driving and driving safety systems (→ page 343)

• Stowage areas ( page 198)

Defining generic terms clearly

In this Owner's Manual, the following generic terms are used:

• Occupant safety: comprises the components and system functions which help to minimise, as much as possible, the stresses on and consequences for vehicle occupants during an accident.
• Restraint system: comprises those components which, along with the vehicle structure, help prevent vehicle occupants from potentially coming into contact with parts of the vehicle interior. The seat belts and airbags, for example, are components of the restraint system.
• Child restraint system: you can find all information on this subject in the chapter "Children in the vehicle" (→ page 124).

Be diligent

For the components of the restraint system to provide the intended level of protection, it is essential that your posture is correct and that the seat belt is correctly fastened.

Bear in mind that negligence when adjusting your sitting position and fastening the seat belt may have serious consequences. Be diligent and make sure that all vehicle occupants are sitting correctly and have fastened their seat belts properly before starting every journey ( page 108).

Information on the correct seat position

The seat position must be correct in order for the components of the restraint system to provide the intended level of protection.

The seat position influences both the protection provided by the seat belt and the additional protection provided by the airbag.

A correct seat position in which the seat is nearly perfectly upright and a correctly fastened seat belt reduce the risks posed by the airbag when it is deployed.

Keep space considerations in mind when choosing a seat. With the seat in the correct, nearly upright position, your head should not touch the roof.

WARNING Risk of injury or death due to an incorrect seat position

If you deviate from the correct seat position, the airbag cannot provide its intended protective function.

Each vehicle occupant must make sure of the following.

Put the seat in the correct position.
Fasten seat belts correctly. Pregnant women must take particular care to ensure that the lap belt never lies across the abdomen.
▶ Observe the following information.

In order for the restraint system to provide the intended level of protection, observe the following information:

- Before starting your journey, adjust your seat correctly ( page 175).

When doing so, make sure you are able to fasten your seat belt correctly. The shoulder belt strap must be routed forward from the seat belt outlet over the centre of your shoulder.

• Keep your distance from the airbags, especially the front airbags. Set the driver's seat and front passenger seat as far back as possible while making sure the seat belt is fastened correctly.
• If persons are sitting on the rear seats, vehicle occupants should maintain an sufficient distance to the parts of the vehicle interior in front of them.
• Make sure there are no people, animals or objects between the vehicle occupants and an airbag.
• If you are the driver, observe the following information on the correct position of the driver's seat ( page 175).

Only hold the steering wheel by the steering wheel rim. This allows the driver's airbag to fully deploy.

- Assume a nearly upright sitting posture, with your buttocks positioned as far back as possible in the gap between the seat cushion and the seat backrest.

Your back must lie as flatly and as firmly as possible against the seat backrest.

• While driving, do not lean forward and do not lean against the door or side window. You may otherwise be in the deployment area of the airbags.
• Sit with their feet resting on the floor, if possible. Your thighs are slightly supported by the seat cushion
  Do not put your feet on the cockpit, for example. Your feet may otherwise be in the deployment area of the airbag.
• Fasten the seat belt correctly (→ page 109).

Notes on wearing the seat belt correctly

Always fasten your seat belt correctly before starting a journey. A seat belt can only provide the best level of protection if it is worn correctly.

WARNING Risk of injury or death due to incorrectly fastened seat belt

If the seat belt is not worn correctly, it cannot perform its intended protective function.

In addition, an incorrectly fastened seat belt can also cause injuries, for example, in the event of an accident or when braking or changing direction suddenly.

Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have their seat belts fastened correctly and are sitting properly.

WARNING Risk of injury or death when additional restraint systems are not used for persons with a smaller stature

Persons under 1.50 m tall cannot wear the seat belt correctly without a suitable additional restraint system.

Always secure persons under 1.50 m tall in a suitable restraint system.

Observe the following information on the correct seat position and posture ( page 108). Each vehicle occupant must observe the following notes in particular:

• The seat belt must not be twisted.

• The shoulder belt strap must be routed forward from the seat belt outlet over the centre of your shoulder.
• The shoulder belt strap should neither touch your neck nor be routed under your arm or behind your back.
• The lap belt must be routed as low down across the hips as possible.
  In addition, push the lap belt down as far as possible across your hips and pull tight with the shoulder belt strap. Never route the lap belt across your abdomen.
  Pregnant women must also take particular care with this.
• After being tightened, the shoulder belt strap and lap belt must fit snugly against the body.
• Avoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a winter coat.
• Never route the seat belt across sharp, pointed, abrasive or fragile objects.
• Only one person should use each seat belt at any one time.

- Never secure objects with a seat belt if the seat belt is also being used by one of the vehicle's occupants.

Also ensure that no objects, e.g. a cushion, are ever placed between a person and the seat.

If you are driving with a child in the vehicle, observe the information in the chapter "Children in the vehicle" ( page 124)

Observe the instructions for loading the vehicle when securing objects, luggage or loads ( page 198).

Fastening and adjusting seat belts

If the seat belt is pulled quickly or sharply, the seat belt retractor locks. The seat belt strap cannot be pulled out any further.

Diagram showing car seatbelt usage with numbered instructions for adjusting seatbelt positions

Always engage seat belt tongue ① of the seat belt into seat belt buckle ② of the corresponding seat.
To adjust the seat belt height: press button 3 on the seat belt outlet and slide the seat belt outlet to the desired position.
To engage the seat belt outlet: release button ③ and ensure that the seat belt outlet engages.

NOTE Deployment of components of the restraint system when the front passenger seat is unoccupied and a seat belt is buckled

When the front passenger seat is unoccupied and the seat belt tongue of the seat belt is engaged in the seat belt buckle, components of the restraint system may deploy unnecessarily on the front passenger side, e.g. the seat belt tensioner.

Only buckle the seat belts as intended.

Function of the restraint system warning lamp

When the vehicle is switched on, a self-test is performed, during which the 🎨 restraint system warning lamp lights up. It goes out no later than a few seconds after the vehicle is started. The components of the restraint system are then functional.

A malfunction has occurred in the restraint system if:

• the restraint system warning lamp does not light up when the vehicle is switched on
• the restraint system warning lamp lights up continuously or repeatedly during a journey

If components of the restraint system have been deployed, the ☐ restraint system warning lamp lights up continuously.

WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunctions in the restraint system

Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as intended in an accident.

Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

Plug-in hybrid vehicles: if the restraint system is malfunctioning, the automatic high voltage emergency shutoff may not function.

A DANGER Risk of fatal injury due to malfunctioning automatic high-voltage emergency shutoff

In the event of an accident, the high-voltage on-board electrical system may not be deactivated as intended.

You may receive an electric shock if you touch the damaged components of the high-voltage on-board electrical system.

Have the automatic high-voltage emergency shutoff checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
After an accident, switch off the vehicle immediately.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the vehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshop.

Function of the seat belt warning lamp

The 4 seat belt warning lamp in the driver's display is a reminder that all vehicle occupants must wear their seat belts correctly.

F167 0009 02

In addition, a warning tone may sound.

As soon as the driver and front passenger fasten their seat belts, the seat belt warning goes out.

Function of the rear seat belt status display

The rear seat belt status display in the driver's display is a reminder that all vehicle occupants must wear their seat belts correctly.

In addition, a warning tone may sound.

If a person unfastens a seat belt in the rear passenger compartment while the vehicle is motion, the rear seat belt status display appears again.

Display in the driver's display

Every time the vehicle is switched on, the rear seat belt status display informs you for a certain amount of time which rear seat belt is not fastened.

Three types of car seatbelt components shown in grayscale: front, side, and side (no text or symbols)

Example: vehicle with three rear seats

You can determine the status of the rear seat belt by the colour of the seat symbol in the driver's display as follows:

• Grey: the rear seat belt is not fastened.
• Green: the seat belt tongue of a rear seat belt is engaged in the seat belt buckle of the displayed seat.
• Red: the person in the rear seat has unfastened their seatbelt.

Function of the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps (front passenger airbag)

PASSENGER ON AIR BAG OFF

The PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps display the status of the front passenger airbag.

If the front passenger seat is occupied or a child restraint system is fitted on the front passenger seat, you must make sure both before, and also during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct for the situation.

F167 0009 02

WARNING Risk of potentially fatal injuries due to objects trapped under the front passenger seat

Objects trapped under the front passenger seat may interfere with the function of the automatic front passenger airbag shutoff or damage the system.

Do not stow any objects under the front passenger seat.
When the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure that no objects have become trapped beneath the front passenger seat.

Self-test: when the vehicle is switched on, both the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and OFF indicator lamps light up simultaneously for several seconds. After the self-test, you can determine the status of the front passenger airbag as follows:

- Front passenger airbag disabled: PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF lights up continuously.

The front passenger airbag will not be deployed in the event of an accident. If

PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF is lit, no one may use the front passenger seat.

If a rearward-facing child restraint system is fitted on the front passenger seat, PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF must be lit continuously.

- Front passenger airbag enabled: PASSENGER AIR BAG ON lights up for up to 60 seconds or until both the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and OFF indicator lamps go out.

The front passenger airbag may be deployed during an accident. If the front passenger airbag is in this status, no rearward-facing child restraint system may be fitted on the front passenger seat.

If you are driving with a child in the vehicle, observe the information in the chapter "Children in the vehicle" (→ page 124)

WARNING Risk of injury or death due to a disabled front passenger airbag

The front passenger airbag is disabled when the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit.

A person in the front passenger seat could then, for example, come into contact with the vehicle interior, especially if the person is sitting too close to the cockpit.

If the front passenger seat is occupied, always ensure that:

• the classification of the person in the front passenger seat is correct and the front passenger airbag is enabled or disabled in accordance with the person in the front passenger seat.
• the front passenger seat has been moved as far back as possible.
  • the person is seated correctly.
  Both before and during the journey, ensure that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct.

Malfunction of the automatic front passenger air-bag shutoff

The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp and the restraint system indicator lamp light up simultaneously.

In this case, no one may use the front passenger seat and no child restraint system may be fitted on the front passenger seat.

Have the automatic front passenger airbag shutoff checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

Disabling or enabling the front passenger airbag

The automatic front passenger airbag shutoff can disable or enable the front passenger airbag according to the situation.

This happens automatically as a result of the classification of the person or child restraint system on the front passenger seat.

You cannot manually disable or enable the front passenger airbag.

Information on the child restraint system

When fitting a child restraint system, observe the notes in "Children in the vehicle" ( page 124).

114 Occupant safety – Information on the automatic functions of the restraint system

Notes on the child restraint system on the front passenger seat

WARNING Risk of injury or death due to an enabled co-driver airbag

If the co-driver airbag is enabled, a child on the co-driver seat may be struck by the co-driver airbag during an accident.

▶ NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint system on a seat with an ENABLED FRONT AIRBAG. DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur.

Also pay particular attention to the notes on rearward-facing or forward-facing child restraint systems on the front passenger seat ( page 129).

Information on the automatic functions of the restraint system

Function of the automatic front passenger airbag shutoff

A person on the front passenger seat must observe the following information:

• Sit correctly (→ page 108).
• Fasten the seat belt correctly (→ page 109).

The automatic front passenger airbag shutoff can disable or enable the front passenger airbag according to the situation.

Make sure you observe the following information:

• The status of the front passenger airbag, see "Function of the PASSENGER AIR BAG (→ page 112) indicator lamps".
• When fitting a child restraint system to the front passenger seat, observe the vehicle-specific information ( page 129).

PASSENGER ON • AIR BAG OFF

Status of the front passenger airbag in relation to the stature of the person:

- Front passenger airbag disabled: PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF lights up continuously.

The front passenger airbag will not be deployed in the event of an accident. If PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF is lit, no one may use the front passenger seat.

- Front passenger airbag enabled: PASSENGER AIR BAG ON lights up for up to 60 seconds or until both the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and OFF indicator lamps go out.

The front passenger airbag may be deployed during an accident. Observe the following information on the correct seat position ( page 108).

Vehicles with rear seats: a person of smaller stature should use a rear seat.

System limits

The front passenger airbag may otherwise be disabled by mistake, for example, in the following situation:

• The front passenger transfers their weight by supporting themselves on a vehicle armrest.
• The front passenger sits in such a way that their weight is raised from the seat surface.

NOTE Deployment of components of the restraint system when the front passenger seat is unoccupied

In an accident, the components of the restraint system may deploy unnecessarily on the front passenger side if:

• There are heavy objects on the front passenger seat.
- The seat belt tongue is engaged in the seat belt buckle of the front passenger seat and the front passenger seat is unoccupied.

▶ Stow objects in a suitable place.

Only one person should use each seat belt at any one time.

Depending on the detected accident situation, the window airbag on the front passenger side may deploy. The airbag is deployed regardless of whether the front passenger seat is occupied.

Function of PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant protection)

PRE-SAFE ^® is able to detect certain critical driving situations and implement pre-emptive measures to protect the vehicle occupants.

PRE-SAFE ^® can implement the following measures independently of each other:

• Tightening the seat belts on the driver's seat and front passenger seat.
• Closing the side windows.
• Vehicles with sliding sunroof: closing the sliding sunroof.
• Vehicles with memory function: moving the front passenger seat to a more favourable seat position.
• Vehicles with multicontour seat: increasing the lateral support by inflating the seat side bolsters of the seat backrest.
• PRE-SAFE® Sound: provided that the multimedia system is switched on, generating a brief noise signal to stimulate the innate protective mechanism of a person's hearing.

NOTE Damage caused by objects in the footwell or behind the seat

The automatic adjustment of the seat position may result in damage to the seat and/or the object.

Stow objects in a suitable place.

Reversing the PRE-SAFE ^® system measures

If an accident did not occur, the pre-emptive measures that were taken are reversed.

You will need to perform certain settings yourself.

If the seat belt pre-tensioning is not reduced, move the seat backrest back slightly. The locking mechanism releases.

Function of PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory occupant protection plus)

PRE-SAFE® PLUS can detect certain impacts, particularly an imminent rear impact, and take preemptive measures to protect the vehicle occu-

pants. These measures cannot necessarily prevent an imminent impact.

PRE-SAFE® PLUS can implement the following measures independently of each other:

• Tightening the seat belts on the driver's seat and front passenger seat.
• Activating the rear hazard warning lights at a higher flashing frequency.
• Increasing brake pressure when the vehicle is stationary. This brake application is cancelled automatically when the vehicle pulls away.

If an accident did not occur, the pre-emptive measures that were taken are reversed.

System limits

The system will not initiate any action in the following situations:

• when reversing
  or
• when the vehicle is towing a trailer and there is a risk of a rear impact

The system will not initiate any braking application in the following situations:

• whilst driving
  or
• when entering or exiting a parking space while using Active Parking Assist

You can watch an animation on this topic via the following link:

Function of PRE-SAFE® Impulse Side

If an imminent side impact is detected, PRE-SAFE® Impulse Side can pre-emptively move the front seat vehicle occupant's upper body towards the centre of the vehicle. It does this by rapidly inflating an air cushion in the outer seat side bolster of the seat backrest on the side on which the impact is anticipated. This increases the distance between the door and the vehicle occupant.

If PRE-SAFE® Impulse Side has been deployed or is faulty, the PRE-SAFE impulse side inoperative See Owner's Manual display message appears.

Seat belt adjustment function

Vehicles with PRE-SAFE®: after you have fastened the seat belt of the front seat, it may adjust itself against your body by pulling at the shoulder until somewhat tight. Do not hold the seat belt tightly while it is adjusting.

This function is a reminder that all vehicle occupants must wear their seat belts correctly.

You can activate and deactivate the seat belt adjustment function using the multimedia system ( page 117).

Activating/deactivating seat belt adjustment via the multimedia system

Multimedia system:

→ Settings → Vehicle

▶▶ Occupant protection

▶ Activate or deactivate Belt adjustment.

Overview of the automatic measures after an accident

Depending on the type and severity of the accident, and depending on the vehicle's equipment, the following measures can be implemented, for example:

• automatic braking (post-collision brake) ( page 117)
• activating the hazard warning lights
- triggering an automatic emergency call (→ page 68)
- switching off the engine
To start the vehicle again, switch the vehicle off and on once more ( page 268). Depending on the type and severity of the accident, you may no longer be able to start the vehicle.
- switching off the fuel supply
- Plug-in hybrid: switching off the hybrid system and high-voltage on-board electrical system
- unlocking the vehicle doors
• lowering the side windows

• displaying the emergency guide in the central display ( page 69)
• switching on the interior lighting

Function of the post-collision brake after an accident

Depending on the accident situation, the post-collision brake can minimise the severity of a further collision or even avoid it.

If an accident is detected, the post-collision brake can initiate automatic braking. When the vehicle has come to a standstill, the electric parking brake is automatically applied.

The driver can cancel automatic braking by taking the following actions:

• braking more strongly than automatic braking

- fully depressing the accelerator pedal with force

Purpose and function of the restraint system

Overview of deployment situations (restraint system)

Make sure that the following prerequisites in particular have been met so that the components of the restraint system are able to provide the intended level of protection:

• Sit correctly (→ page 108).
• Fasten the seat belt correctly (→ page 109).
• Function of the seat belt warning lamp ( page 111).
• Function of the rear seat belt status display ( page 111).

- The ☐ restraint system warning lamp is not lit up after the self-test (→ page 110).

- The PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps display the correct status of the front passenger airbag ( page 112).

Depending on the detected deployment situation, the components of the restraint system can be activated or deployed independently of each other:

• Seat belt tensioner: frontal impact, rear impact, side impact, rollover
• Driver's airbag, front passenger airbag: frontal impact
• Knee airbag: frontal impact
• Side airbag: side impact
• Window airbag: side impact, rollover, frontal impact
• PRE-SAFE® Impulse Side: side impact

The installation location of an airbag is identified by the AIRBAG symbol ( page 123).

Observe the information on the function of the restraint system ( page 118).

Information on how the restraint system works

How the restraint system functions depends on the severity of the impact detected and the apparent type of accident.

For more information about types of accidents, see "Overview of deployment situations" ( page 118).

The activation thresholds for the components of the restraint system are determined based on the evaluation of the sensor values measured at various points in the vehicle. This process is pre-emptive in nature. The triggering/deployment of the components of the restraint system must take place in good time at the start of the collision.

Factors which can only be seen and measured after a collision has occurred cannot play a decisive role in airbag deployment. Nor do they provide an indication of airbag deployment.

The vehicle may be deformed significantly without an airbag being deployed. This is the case if only parts which are relatively easily deformed are affected and the rate of vehicle deceleration is not high. Conversely, an airbag may be deployed even though the vehicle suffers only minor deformation. If very rigid vehicle parts such as longitudinal members are hit, this may result in sufficiently high levels of vehicle deceleration.

Depending on the apparent type of accident and the detected deployment situation, seat belt tensioners and/or airbags supplement the protection offered by a correctly worn seat belt.

When enabled, an airbag can provide additional protection for the respective vehicle occupant.

Potential protection provided by each airbag:

• Knee airbag: thigh, knee and lower leg
• Driver's airbag, front passenger airbag: head and ribcage
• Window airbag: head
  • Side airbag: ribcage and pelvis

However, no system available today can completely eliminate injuries and fatalities in every accident situation. In particular, the seat belt and airbag generally do not protect against objects penetrating the vehicle from the outside. It is also not possible to completely rule out the risk of injury caused by the airbag deploying.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the vehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshop after an accident. Take this into account, particularly if a seat belt tensioner is triggered or an airbag deployed.

If the seat belt tensioners are triggered or an airbag is deployed, you will hear a bang, and a small amount of powder may also be released:

• The bang will not generally affect your hearing.
- In general, the powder released is not hazardous to health but may cause short-term breathing difficulties to persons suffering from asthma or other pulmonary conditions.
Provided it is safe to do so, leave the vehicle immediately or open the window in order to prevent breathing difficulties.

Information on the limited protection provided by the restraint system

Risk due to the incorrect behaviour of vehicle occupants

Every vehicle occupant must make sure of the following in particular:

- They observe the information on the correct seat position ( page 108).

- There are no heavy, sharp-edged or fragile objects in the pockets of their clothing. Store such objects in a suitable place.

WARNING Risk of injury or death due to incorrect seat position

The seat belt will not offer the intended level of protection if you have not moved the seat backrest to an almost vertical position.

In particular, you may slip under the seatbelt and injure yourself.

Adjust the seat properly before beginning your journey.
Always ensure that the seat backrest is in an almost vertical position and that the shoulder section of your seat belt is routed across the centre of your shoulder.

Risk due to objects in the vehicle interior

Every vehicle occupant must make sure of the following in particular:

- They observe the information on the correct seat position ( page 108).

• There are no objects between the seat, door and door pillar (B-pillar).
• There are no hard objects, e.g. coat hangers, hanging on the grab handles or coat hooks.
• There are no heavy, sharp-edged or fragile objects in the pockets of their clothing. Store such objects in a suitable place.

WARNING Risk of injury or death due to blocked seat belt buckle or seat belt anchorage

Objects next to the front seat that block the seat belt buckle or the moving seat belt anchorage on the front seat impair the function of the seat belt tensioners.

Before starting the journey, make sure that there are no objects around the seat belt buckle or between the front seat and door.

WARNING Risk of injury from objects in the deployment area of an airbag

Objects in the deployment area of an airbag can hinder or prevent the correct deployment of the airbag.

The airbag may then deploy in an uncontrolled manner and may even cause additional injuries to the vehicle occupants by deploying. This may be the case in particular if the airbag is integrated into the seat.

Always stow and secure objects correctly.
Before commencing your journey, make sure that no objects are stowed in the deployment area of an airbag.

The installation location of an airbag is identified by the AIRBAG ( page 123) symbol.

Risk due to fitting accessories

Do not attach accessories such as mobile navigation devices, mobile phones or cup holders, within the deployment area of an airbag, e.g. on the cockpit, on the door, on the side window or on the side trim.

In addition, no connecting cables, tensioning straps or retaining straps must be routed or attached to the vehicle within the deployment area of an airbag. Always comply with the accessory manufacturer's installation instructions and, in particular, the notes on suitable places for installation.

WARNING Risk of injury or death due to unsuitable protective covers

Due to unsuitable protective covers, the air-bags cannot protect vehicle occupants as they are designed to do.

You should only use protective covers that have been approved for the corresponding seat by Mercedes-Benz.

In addition, the function of the automatic front passenger airbag shutoff could be restricted due to an unsuitable protective cover. If the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure that the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps display the

correct status of the front passenger airbag ( page 112).

Risk due to pets in the vehicle interior

WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to animals left unsecured or unattended in the vehicle

If you leave animals in the vehicle unattended or unsecured, they could press buttons or switches, for instance.

An animal may:

• activate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example
• switch systems on or off and endanger other road users

Unsecured animals may be thrown about the vehicle in the event of an accident, or sudden steering and braking manoeuvres, and injure vehicle occupants.

▶ Never leave animals unattended in the vehicle.

Always correctly secure animals while driving, e.g. using a suitable animal carrier.

Risk due to modification, damage or wear to the components of the restraint system

WARNING Risk of injury or death due to modifications to the restraint system

Vehicle occupants may no longer be protected as intended if alterations are made to the restraint system.

▶ Never alter the parts of the restraint system.
▶ Never tamper with the wiring or any electronic component parts or their software.

If it is necessary to modify the vehicle to accommodate a person with disabilities, contact a qualified specialist workshop.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use driving aids which have been approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.

WARNING Risk of injury or death due to damaged or modified seat belts

Seat belts cannot provide protection in the following situations:

• the seat belt is damaged, has been modified, is extremely dirty, bleached or dyed
• the seat belt buckle is damaged or extremely dirty
• modifications have been made to the seat belt tensioner, seat belt anchorage or seat belt retractor

Seat belts may sustain non-visible damage in an accident, e.g. due to glass splinters.

Modified or damaged seat belts could tear or fail in the event of an accident, for example.

Modified seat belt tensioners could accidentally trigger or fail to function as intended.

▶ Never modify the seat belt system, for example the seat belt, seat belt buckle, seat belt tensioner, seat belt anchorage and seat belt retractor.

Make sure that the seat belts are undamaged, not worn and clean.
Always have the seat belts checked immediately after an accident at a qualified specialist workshop.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use seat belts which have been approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.

WARNING Risk of injury due to modifications to the cover of an airbag

If you modify the cover of an airbag or affix objects such as stickers to it, the airbag can no longer function as intended.

▶ Never modify the cover of an airbag.

Do not attach any objects to the cover.

The installation location of an airbag is identified by the AIRBAG symbol ( page 123).

WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunctioning sensors in the door

The function of the airbags can be impaired due to modifications or incorrect work performed on the doors or door trim, or if the doors are damaged.

▶ Never modify the doors or parts of the doors.
Always have work on the doors or door trim carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

Risk due to components of the restraint system which have already been deployed

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the vehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshop after an accident.

WARNING Risk of burns from hot airbag components

The airbag parts are hot after an airbag has been deployed.

Do not touch the airbag parts.

Have a deployed airbag replaced at a qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible.

WARNING Risk of injury due to deployed airbag

A deployed airbag no longer offers any protection.

Have the vehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshop in order to have the deployed airbag replaced.

Have deployed airbags replaced immediately.

WARNING Risk of injury or death from deployed pyrotechnic seat belt tensioners

Pyrotechnic seat belt tensioners that have been deployed are no longer operational and are unable to perform their intended protective function.

Therefore, have deployed pyrotechnic seat belt tensioners immediately

replaced at a qualified specialist work- shop.

Seat belts

Releasing seat belts

Press the release button in the seat belt buckle and guide the seat belt back with the seat belt tongue.

NOTE Damage caused by trapping the seat belt

If an unused seat belt is not fully retracted, it may become trapped in the door or in the seat mechanism.

Always ensure that an unused seat belt is fully retracted.

Airbags

Overview of airbags

Diagram of car interior components with numbered parts and a zoomed-in section view highlighting structural elements.

Driver's knee airbag
2 Driver's airbag
3 Front passenger airbag
4 Window airbag
5 Side airbag

The installation location of an airbag is identified by the AIRBAG symbol.

Observe the information about types of accidents under "Overview of deployment situations" ( page 118).

F167 0009 02

Brief overview of most important points

Safely transporting children in the vehicle

graph TD
    A["Top Tether"] --> B["ISOFIX"]
    A --> C["Top Tether"]
    D["Human Icon"] --> E["Top Tether"]
    F["Human Icon"] --> G["Top Tether"]
    H["Human Icon"] --> I["Top Tether"]
    J["Human Icon"] --> K["Top Tether"]
    L["Human Icon"] --> M["Top Tether"]
    N["Human Icon"] --> O["Top Tether"]
    P["Human Icon"] --> Q["Top Tether"]
    R["Human Icon"] --> S["Top Tether"]
    T["Human Icon"] --> U["Top Tether"]
    V["Human Icon"] --> W["Top Tether"]
    X["Human Icon"] --> Y["Top Tether"]
    Z["Human Icon"] --> AA["Top Tether"]
    AB["Human Icon"] --> AC["Top Tether"]
    AD["Human Icon"] --> AE["Top Tether"]
    AF["Human Icon"] --> AG["Top Tether"]
    AH["Human Icon"] --> AI["Top Tether"]
    AJ["Human Icon"] --> AK["Top Tether"]
    AL["Human Icon"] --> AM["Top Tether"]
    AN["Human Icon"] --> AO["Top Tether"]
    AP["Human Icon"] --> AQ["Top Tether"]
    AR["Human Icon"] --> AS["Top Tether"]
    AT["Human Icon"] --> AU["Top Tether"]
    AV["Human Icon"] --> AW["Top Tether"]
    AX["Human Icon"] --> AY["Top Tether"]
    AZ["Human Icon"] --> BA["Top Tether"]
    BB["Human Icon"] --> BC["Top Tether"]
    BD["Human Icon"] --> BE["Top Tether"]
    BF["Human Icon"] --> BG["Top Tether"]
    BH["Human Icon"] --> BI["Top Tether"]
    BJ["Human Icon"] --> BK["Top Tether"]
    BL["Human Icon"] --> BM["Top Tether"]
    BN["Human Icon"] --> BO["Top Tether"]
    BP["Human Icon"] --> BQ["Top Tether"]
    BR["Human Icon"] --> BS["Top Tether"]
    BT["Human Icon"] --> BU["Top Tether"]
    BV["Human Icon"] --> BW["Top Tether"]
    BX["Human Icon"] --> BY["Top Tether"]
    BZ["Human Icon"] --> CA["Top Tether"]
    CB["Human Icon"] --> CC["Top Tether"]
    CD["Human Icon"] --> CE["Top Tether"]
    CF["Human Icon"] --> CG["Top Tether"]
    CH["Human Icon"] --> CI["Top Tether"]
    CJ["Human Icon"] --> CK["Top Tether"]
    CL["Human Icon"] --> CM["Top Tether"]
    CN["Human Icon"] --> CO["Top Tether"]
    CP["Human Icon"] --> CZ["Top Tether"]
    DA["Human Icon"] --> DB["Top Tether"]
    DC["Human Icon"] --> DD["Top Tether"]
    DJ["Human Icon"] --> DE["Top Tether"]
    DF["Human Icon"] --> DG["Top Tether"]

graph LR
    A["各"] --> B["各"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#bbf,stroke:#333

Always observe the following when transporting children:

• Never leave children unattended in the vehicle (→ page 126).
• Secure children up to a height of 1.50 m on the seat (see illustration above) properly with a suitable and approved child restraint system ( page 131), and secure small children in a rearward-facing child restraint system.
• Observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions.

Left/right rear seat (preferred seats)

Second row of seats, preferred securing system:

ISOFIX securing rings ( page 136) or

i-Size securing rings ( page 138)

and

Also secure Top Tether if present ( page 144).

Second row of seats, alternative securing system:

Vehicle seat belt ( page 146)

Additionally attach Top Tether if recommended by the manufacturer of the child restraint system ( page 144).

The following child restraint systems within the Universal category are approved: U, UF, i-U, IUF. Observe the other alternatives for use ( page 136).

Third row of seats (if present), securing system:

Vehicle seat belt ( page 146)

Front passenger seat

Securing system:

Vehicle seat belt ( page 146)

Be sure to observe:

• If the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct for the current situation ( page 112).

The following child restraint systems within the Universal category are approved: U^(*) , UF. Observe the other alternatives for use ( page 138).

(*) rearward-facing child restraint system only in combination with automatic airbag shutoff

Centre rear seat (second seat row only) Securing system:

Vehicle seat belt ( page 146)

The following belt-secured child restraint systems within the Universal category are approved: U, UF. Observe the other alternatives for use ( page 146).

Important safety notes

Basic information

Be diligent

Bear in mind that negligence when securing a child in the child restraint system may have serious consequences. Always be diligent in securing a child carefully before every journey.

Never allow babies and children to travel sitting on the lap of another vehicle occupant.

To improve protection for children younger than 12 years old or under 1.50 m in height, Mercedes-Benz recommends you observe the following information:

• Always secure the child in a child restraint system suitable for this Mercedes-Benz vehicle.
• The child restraint system must be appropriate to the age, weight and size of the child.

• The vehicle seat must be suitable for the child restraint system to be fitted:

• LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings: (→ page 136)

• i-Size securing rings: (→ page 138)

- Securing with the vehicle seat belt: (→ page 138)

Accident statistics show that children secured on the rear seats are generally safer than children secured on the front seats. For this reason, Mercedes-Benz strongly advises that you fit a child restraint system to a rear seat.

The generic term child restraint system

The generic term child restraint system is used in this Owner's Manual. A child restraint system is, for example:

• a baby car seat
  • a rearward-facing child seat
  • a forward-facing child seat
• a child booster seat – Mercedes-Benz recommends using a child booster seat with a back-rest and seat belt guide

Observe laws and legal requirements

Always observe the legal requirements when using a child restraint system in the vehicle. Make sure that the child restraint system is approved in accordance with the valid test specifi-

cations and guidelines. Further information can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose.

Securing systems for child restraint systems in the vehicle

Only use the following securing systems for child restraint systems:

• the ISOFIX/LATCH or i-Size securing rings
• the vehicle's seat belt system
• the Top Tether anchorages

Simply attaching to the ISOFIX/LATCH securing rings or i-Size securing rings on the vehicle can reduce the risk of fitting the child restraint system incorrectly.

When securing a child with the integrated seat belt of the ISOFIX/LATCH or i-Size child restraint system, always comply with the permissible gross weight for the child and child restraint system ( page 143).

Important warning notices

Always secure a child restraint system correctly

WARNING Risk of injury or death due to incorrect installation of the child restraint system

The child can then not be protected or restrained as intended.

Be sure to comply with the manufacturer's installation instructions for the child restraint system and its correct use.
Make sure that the entire base of the child restraint system always rests on the sitting surface of the seat.
▶ Never place objects (e.g. cushions) under or behind the child restraint system.
▶ Use child restraint systems only with the original cover designed for them.
Always replace damaged covers with genuine covers.

• Always observe the vehicle-specific information.
- Fitting an ISOFIX or i-Size child restraint system on the rear seat ( page 143).
Securing the child restraint system with the seat belt ( page 146).
- Observe the warning labels in the vehicle interior and on the child restraint system.

WARNING Risk of injury or death due to unsecured child restraint systems in the vehicle

If the child restraint system is incorrectly fitted or not secured, it can become detached.

The child cannot then be protected or restrained as intended.

The unused child restraint system can be become detached and strike vehicle occupants.

Always comply with the manufacturer's installation instructions for the child restraint system and its correct use.

Always fit child restraint systems correctly, even if they are transported unused in the vehicle.

Do not modify the child restraint system

WARNING Risk of injury due to modifications to the child restraint system

The child restraint system can no longer function properly. This poses an increased risk of injury.

▶ Never modify a child restraint system.
Only affix accessories which have been specially approved for this child restraint system by the child restraint system's manufacturer.

Only use child restraint systems which are in proper working condition

A WARNING Risk of injury or death caused by the use of damaged child restraint systems

Child restraint systems or their retaining systems that have been subjected to stress in an accident may not be able to perform their intended protective function.

It may be the case that the child cannot be properly restrained.

▶ Always immediately replace child restraint systems that have been damaged or involved in an accident.
Have the securing systems for the child restraint systems checked at a qualified specialist workshop before installing a child restraint system again.

Avoid direct sunlight

WARNING Risk of burns when the child seat is exposed to direct sunlight

If the child restraint system is exposed to direct sunlight or heat, parts could heat up. Children could suffer burns from these parts, particularly on metallic parts of the child restraint system.

Always make sure that the child restraint system is not exposed to direct sunlight.
Protect the child restraint system with a blanket, for example.
If the child restraint system has been exposed to direct sunlight, allow it to cool before securing a child into it.
▶ Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

Observe when stopping or parking

WARNING Risk of fatal injury due to exposure to extreme heat or cold in the vehicle

If persons, particularly children, are subjected to prolonged exposure to intense heat or cold, there is a risk of severe injury or even death.

▶ Never leave persons, particularly children, unattended in the vehicle.

WARNING Accident- and risk of injury with unsupervised children in the vehicle

If you leave children unattended in the vehicle, they can in particular

• Open doors and thereby endanger other persons or road users.
  • get out of the car and are hit by traffic.
• Operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, forexample.

In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for exampleby:

• releasing the parking brake.
- change the gearbox setting.
- start the vehicle.
▶ Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
Keep the key out of reach of children.

Overview of warning stickers in the vehicle

AIRBAG AIRBAG AIRBAG AIRBAG

① Front passenger airbag warning (on the front passenger sun visor) (→ page 129)
2 Vehicles without automatic front passenger airbag shutoff (visible when the front passenger door is open) ( page 131)

Notes on rearward-facing and forward-facing child restraint systems on the front passenger seat

WARNING Risk of injury or death when using a rearward-facing child restraint system while the front passenger airbag is enabled

If you secure a child in a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off, the front passenger airbag can deploy in the event of an accident.

The child could be struck by the airbag.

Always ensure that the front passenger airbag is disabled. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit.
▶ NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint system on a seat with an ENABLED FRONT AIRBAG. This can result in the DEATH of or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD.

Observe the specific instructions for the rearward-facing and forward-facing child restraint systems ( page 141).

AIRBAG

Warning notice on the front passenger sun visor If it is absolutely necessary to install a child restraint system on the front passenger seat, always observe the additional notes.

• the notes on automatic front passenger airbag shutoff (→ page 113).
• When using a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat, the front passenger airbag must always be disabled. This is only the case if the PASSENGER AIR

BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit continuously ( page 112).

- The front passenger airbag is enabled when the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is not lit. The front passenger airbag may be deployed during an accident. In that case, do not use rearward-facing child restraint systems.

Information on the automatic front passenger air-bag shutoff

If the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct for the current situation.

WARNING Risk of injury or death due to objects between the seat surface and the child restraint system

Objects between the seat surface and the child restraint system could affect the function of the automatic co-driver airbag shutoff.

Do not place any objects between the seat surface and the child restraint system.
▶ Make sure that the entire base of the child restraint system is always resting on the seat surface of the co-driver seat.
The backrest of the forward-facing child restraint system must, as far as possible, be resting on the seat backrest of the co-driver seat.
It is essential to comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions.

When fitting a child restraint system to the front passenger seat, observe the vehicle-specific information ( page 129).

Rearward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat

If a rearward-facing child restraint system is fitted on the front passenger seat, the front passenger airbag must be disabled. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must light up continuously ( page 112).

!

WARNING Risk of injury or death when using a rearward-facing child restraint system while the front passenger airbag is enabled

If you secure a child in a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off, the front passenger airbag can deploy in the event of an accident.

The child could be struck by the airbag.

Always ensure that the front passenger airbag is disabled. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit.
▶ NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint system on a seat with an ENABLED FRONT AIRBAG. This can result in the DEATH of or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD.

The front passenger airbag is enabled depending on the child restraint system and the stature of the child. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp does not light up.

The front passenger airbag may be deployed during an accident. If the front passenger airbag is in this status, no rearward-facing child restraint system may be fitted on the front passenger seat.

Instead, fit the rearward-facing child restraint system to a suitable rear seat.

Forward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat

If a forward-facing child restraint system is fitted on the front passenger seat, the front passenger airbag may be automatically enabled or disabled. The status of the front passenger airbag depends on the child restraint system and the stature of the child.

The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is either lit continuously, or it is not lit ( page 112). Always observe the following information.

WARNING Risk of injury or death due to incorrect positioning of the child restraint system

If you secure a child in a forward-facing child restraint system on the co-driver seat and you position the co-driver seat too close to the dashboard, in the event of an accident, the child could:

• come into contact with the vehicle's interior if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit, for example
• be struck by the airbag if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off

Always move the co-driver seat as far back as possible. In doing so, always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the seat belt outlet of the vehicle to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap must be routed forwards and downwards from the seat belt outlet. If necessary, adjust the seat belt outlet and the co-driver seat accordingly.

▶ Always comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions.

Notes on vehicles without automatic front passenger airbag shutoff

Vehicles without automatic front passenger airbag shutoff have a special sticker affixed to the side of the cockpit on the front passenger side ( page 128).

Make sure you observe the following information:

• Never fit a rearward-facing child restraint system to the front passenger seat
  • Always fit a rearward-facing child restraint system to a suitable rear seat
• Notes on rearward-facing and forward-facing child restraint systems on the front passenger seat ( page 129)

Suitable child restraint systems for the transport of children

Information on the advantage of a rearward-facing child restraint system

Transport a baby in a suitable rearward-facing child restraint system only. It is also preferable to transport a small child in a suitable rearward-facing child restraint system. In this case, the child sits in the opposite direction to the direction of travel and faces backwards.

Babies and small children have comparatively weak neck muscles in relation to the size and weight of their head. The risk of injury to the cervical spine during an accident can be reduced in a rearward-facing child restraint system.

Approval categories for child restraint systems

Only child restraint systems that meet the following UNECE standards are permitted for use in the vehicle:

• UN-R44
• UN-R129

Identification on the child restraint system

The following information, e.g., is available on the approval label on the child restraint system:

• Approval category
• Child weight group
  • Authorisation number
  • Child restraint size class

Approval categories in accordance with UN-R44

universal 9 - 18 kg E1 03301095 HERSTELLER 0007386

These child restraint systems must also be secured using Top Tether or support points.

• Semi-Universal: child restraint systems in the "Semi-Universal" category may only be used if the vehicle and vehicle seat are listed in the child restraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list.
• Vehicle-specific: child restraint systems in the "vehicle-specific" category may only be used if the vehicle and vehicle seat are listed in the child restraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list.

Approval categories in accordance with UN-R129

Example of an approval label

- Universal: child restraint systems in the "Universal" category are approved for installation in vehicles. They can be used, in accordance with overviews of the suitability of seats for securing child restraint systems, on seats labelled U, UF or IUF.

The identification IUF refers to ISOFIX child restraint systems in the "Universal" category.

F167000902

Example of an approval label

- i-Sizechild restraint systems and booster seats with backrest: suitable for attachment to i-Size mounting brackets. They can be used on the seats marked i-U.

Child restraint systems in this category can also be attached to ISOFIX bars if approved by the manufacturer of the child restraint system. i-Size booster seats with backrest can be used

on seats marked U if the seat is approved for category B2/B3.

• Belted child restraint systems and belted booster seats without backrest of the Universal category: suitable for attachment to the seats marked U.
• Vehicle-specific child restraint systems (ISO-FIX or belted attachment as well as child booster seats with and without backrest): suitable for attachment to the seats marked i-U or U if this is approved by the child restraint system manufacturer.

Observe the suitability of vehicle seats

• Suitability of the seats for attaching ISOFIX child restraint systems ( page 136)
• Suitability of seats for securing i-Size child restraint systems ( page 138).
• Suitability of seats for attaching belt-secured child restraint systems ( page 138)

Overview of recommended child restraint systems

Further information on the correct child restraint system can be obtained at a quali-F167 0009 02

fied specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose.

Securing with ISOFIX/LATCH

Weight category 0+ (up to 13 kg and up to approximately 15 months)

Type1	BABY SAFE plus (including base)
Size category E
Approval E1 04 301 146
Order number2	B6 6 86 8224
1 Manufacturer: Britax Römer. 2 With colour code 9H95.

Weight category I (9 to 18 kg and from approximately 9 months to 4 years)

Type1	DUO plus
Size category B1
Approval E1 04 301 133
Order number2	A 000 970 43 02
1 Manufacturer: Britax Römer. 2 With colour code 9H95.

Securing with i-Size (R129 child restraint systems)

Weight up to 13 kg, height from 40 to 83 cm, and aged up to 15 months

Type1	Baby Safe 3 i-Size
Size category R2
Approval E1*129R03/04	*0060
	*02
Order number (including base)	A 000 970 66 02
Base order number A 000 970 73 02
1 Manufacturer: Britax Römer.

Weight up to 18 kg, height from 61 to 105 cm, and aged 3 months to 4 years

Type1	Dualfix 3 i-Size
Size category F2X/R2
Approval E1*129R03/04	*0060
	*02
Order number (including base)	A000 970 87 02
Base order number A000	970 73 02
1 Manufacturer: Britax Rämer.

Weight from 15 to 36 kg, height from 100 to 150 cm, and aged 3.5 to 12 years

Type1	KIDFIX M i-Size
Size category B2
Approval E1*129R03/04*0061*02

Type1	KIDFIX M i-Size
Order number A 000 970 89 02
1 Manufacturer: Britax Römer.

Weight from 15 to 36 kg, height from 100 to 150 cm, and aged 3.5 to 12 years

Type1	AMG KIDFIX M i-Size
Size category B2
Approval E1*129R03/04*0061*02
Order number A 000 970 91 02
1 Manufacturer: Britax Römer.

Securing with the vehicle seat belt

Weight category 0 (up to 10 kg and approximately 6 months) and weight category 0+ (up to 13 kg and approximately 15 months)

Type1	BABY SAFE plus II
Approval E1 04 301 146
Order number2	A 000 970 38 02
1 Manufacturer: Britax Römer. 2 With colour code 9H95.

R129 child restraint system (weight up to 13 kg, height from 40 to 83 cm, and aged up to about 15 months)

Type1	Baby Safe 3 i-Size
Size category R2
Approval E1*129R03/04	*0060
	*02
Order number A 000 970	68 02
1 Manufacturer: Britax Römer.

Weight category I (9 to 18 kg and from approximately 9 months to 4 years)

Type1	DUO plus
Approval E1 04 301 133
Order number2	A 000 970 43 02
1 Manufacturer: Britax Römer. 2 With colour code 9195.

Weight category II/III (15 to 36 kg and from approximately 3 to 12 years)

Type1	KIDFIX XP
Approval E1 04 301 304
Order number2	A 000 970 49 02
1 Manufacturer: Britax Römer, 2 With colour code 9H95.

Weight category II/III (15 to 36 kg and from approximately 3 to 12 years)

Type1	AMG KIDFIX XP
Approval E1 04 301 304
Order number2	A 000 970 33 02
1 Manufacturer: Britax Römer. 2 With colour code 9H95.

R129 child restraint systems (weight from 15 to 36 kg, height from 100 to 150 cm, and aged 3.5 to 12 years)

Type1	KIDFIX M i-Size
Size category B2
Approval E1*129R03/04*0061*02
Order number A 000 970 89 02
1 Manufacturer: Britax Römer.

R129 child restraint systems (weight from 15 to 36 kg, height from 100 to 150 cm, and aged 3.5 to 12 years)

Type1	AMG KIDFIX M i-Size
Size category B2
Approval E1*129R03/04*0061*02
Order number A 000 970 91 02
1 Manufacturer: Britax Römer.

Suitable seats for attaching child restraint systems

Overview of suitability of the seats for attaching ISOFIX child restraint systems

ISOFIX is a standardised securing system for specially designed child restraint systems.

The symbol indicates seats suitable for attaching an ISOFIX child restraint system in accordance with UN R44 ( page 131).

ISOFIX child restraint systems can also be installed on seats with i-Size markings ( page 138).

Attach only ISOFIX child restraint systems that are approved in accordance with UN R44 as per the following ISOFIX tables.

Carry cot for the second row of seats

Size class - Equipment	Left/right rear seat
F - ISO/L1 X
G - ISO/L2 X
X Not suitable for an ISOFX child restraint system in this weight group and/or size class.

Weight group 0 (up to 10 kg and up to approx. 6 months) for second row of seats

Size class - Equipment	Left/right rear seat
E - ISO/R1 IL
IL Suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems according to the table in "Overview of the recommended child restraint systems", or if the vehicle and the seat are listed on the child restraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list.

Weight group 0+ (up to 13 kg and up to approx. 15 months) for second row of seats

Size class - Equipment	Left/right rear seat
E - ISO/R1 IL
D - ISO/R2, ISO/R2X IL
C - ISO/R3 IL (1)
IL Suitable for ISO/FIX child restraint systems according to the table in "Overview of the recommended child restraint systems", or if the vehicle and the seat are listed on the child restraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list.(1) When using a child restraint system of size class (ISO/R3), move the front seat into the highest position. Make sure that the seat backrest of the front seat does not rest against the child restraint system.

Weight group 1 (9–18 kg and approx. 9 months to 4 years) for second row of seats

Size class - Equipment	Left/right rear seat
D - ISO/R2, ISO/R2X IL
C - ISO/R3 IL (1)
B - ISO/F2 IUF
B1 - ISO/F2X IUF

Size class - Equipment	Left/right rear seat
A - ISO/F3 IUF
IL Suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems according to the table in "Overview of the recommended child restraint systems", or if the vehicle and the seat are listed on the child restraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list.IUF Suitable for forward-facing ISOFIX child restraint systems of the "Universal" category in this weight group.(1) When using a child restraint system of size class (ISO/R3), move the front seat into the highest position. Make sure that the seat backrest of the front seat does not rest against the child restraint system.

Overview of suitability of the seats for attaching i-Size child restraint systems

i-Size is a standardised securing system for specially designed child restraint systems.
	i-Size child restraint systems can be attached to a seat with the i-Size marking (→ page 131).
	Child restraint systems that are approved in accordance with the following i-Size table may be attached.

Left and right rear seats (second row of seats only)

i-Size child restraint systems (ISO/R1, ISO/R2, ISO/R2X, ISO/R3, ISO/F2, ISO/F2X, ISO/F3, ISO/B2, ISO/B3)	i-U
i-U Suitable for forward-facing and rearward-facing i-Size child restraint systems in the "Universal" category.

Front passenger seat

i-Size child restraint systems (ISO/R1, ISO/R2, ISO/R2X, ISO/R3, ISO/F2, ISO/F2X, ISO/F3, ISO/B2, ISO/B3)	X
X Not suitable for an i-Size child restraint system in the "Universal" category.

Overview of the suitability of seats for attaching belt-secured child restraint systems

Suitability of seats for attaching belt-secured child restraint systems

Rear seats (second seat row)

Weight category 0: to 10 kg
Left/right rear seat U, L
Centre rear seat ^1	U, L
Weight category 0+: to 13 kg
Left/right rear seat U, L

Centre rear seat1	U, L
Weight category I: 9 to 18 kg
Left/right rear seat U, L
Centre rear seat1	U, L
Weight category II: 15 to 25 kg
Left/right rear seat U, L
Centre rear seat1	U, L
Weight category III: 22 to 36 kg
Left/right rear seat U, L
Centre rear seat1	U, L
1 Child restraint systems with a supporting bracket are not suitable for this seat.

F167 0009 02

U Suitable for child restraint systems of the "Universal" category in this weight category.
L Suitable for semi-universal child restraint systems according to the table in 'Recommended child restraint systems', or if the vehicle and the seat are listed in the child restraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list.

Weight category I: 9 to 18 kg
Left/right rear seat U, L
Weight category II: 15 to 25 kg
Left/right rear seat U, L
Weight category III: 22 to 36 kg
Left/right rear seat U, L

U Suitable for child restraint systems of the "Universal" category in this weight category.
L Suitable for semi-universal child restraint systems according to the table in "Recommended child restraint systems", or if the vehicle and the seat are listed in the child restraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list.

Rear seats (third seat row)

Weight category 0: to 10 kg
Left/right rear seat U, L
Weight category 0+: to 13 kg
Left/right rear seat U, L

Notes on child restraint systems on the front passenger seat

• If it is absolutely necessary for you to fit a child restraint system to the front passenger seat, be sure to observe the information on child restraint systems on the front passenger seat ( page 129).
• Observe the specific instructions for the rearward-facing and forward-facing child restraint systems. If the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure, both before and during the jour-

ney, that the status of the front passenger air-bag is correct for the current situation ( page 112).

Front passenger seat

Weight category 0: to 10 kg
Front passenger air-bag enabled ^1	X
Front passenger air-bag disabled ^1,2	U, L
Weight category 0+: to 13 kg
Front passenger air-bag enabled ^1	X
Front passenger air-bag disabled ^1,2	U, L
Weight category I: 9 to 18 kg

Front passenger air-bag enabled1	UF
Front passenger air-bag disabled1,2	U, L
Weight category II: 15 to 25 kg
Front passenger air-bag enabled1	UF
Front passenger air-bag disabled1,2	U, L
Weight category III: 22 to 36 kg
Front passenger air-bag enabled1	UF
Front passenger air-bag disabled1,2	U, L

1 Adjust the seat cushion inclination so that the front edge of the seat cushion is in the highest position and the rear edge of the seat cushion is in the lowest position.
2 The vehicle is equipped with automatic front passenger air bag shutoff. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit.
X Not suitable for children in this weight category.
U Suitable for child restraint systems of the "Universal" category in this weight category.

I. Suitable for semi-universal child restraint systems according to the table in 'Recommended child restraint systems', or if the vehicle and the seat are listed in the child restraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list.

UF Suitable for forward-facing child restraint systems of the "Universal" category in this weight category.

Securing the child restraint system

Adjusting the seat correctly

When fitting a child restraint system on the left or right rear seat, always observe the following:

Make sure that the child's feet do not touch the front seat. If necessary, move the front seat slightly forwards.

If the head restraint of the child restraint system cannot be fully extended when it is installed in the vehicle, this will result in restrictions on the maximum size setting for certain child restraint systems. Observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions.

Contact with the roof when the head restraint is fully extended and locked in place will not result in any restrictions on use.

When fitting an ISOFIX/LATCH or i-Size child restraint system, also observe the following:

When using a rearward-facing child restraint system on a rear seat: adjust the front seat so that it does not touch the child restraint system.
When using a forward-facing child restraint system with integrated child seat belt: adjust the head restraint of the respective seat so that it does not push the child restraint system forwards. If necessary, the respective head restraint can be removed. In addition, the backrest of the child restraint system must lie as flat as possible against the backrest of the

vehicle seat. After the child restraint system has been removed, replace the vehicle head restraint immediately and adjust correctly.

The child restraint system must not be put under strain between the roof and the seat cushion and/or be fitted facing the wrong direction. Where possible, adjust the seat cushion inclination accordingly.
Adjust the vehicle head restraints so that the child restraint system is not put under strain by the head restraint.

When fitting a belt-secured child restraint system, also observe the following:

When using a rearward-facing child restraint system on a rear seat: adjust the front seat so that it does not touch the child restraint system.
When using a forward-facing child restraint system with integrated child seat belt: adjust the head restraint of the respective seat so that it does not push the child restraint system forwards. If necessary, the respective head restraint can be removed. In addition, the backrest of the child restraint system must lie

as flat as possible against the backrest of the vehicle seat. After the child restraint system has been removed, replace the vehicle head restraint immediately and adjust correctly.
The backrest of the forward-facing child restraint system must, as far as possible, be resting on the seat backrest of the rear seat.
The child restraint system must not be put under strain between the roof and the seat cushion and/or be fitted facing the wrong direction. Where possible, adjust the seat cushion inclination accordingly.
Adjust the vehicle head restraints so that the child restraint system is not put under strain by the head restraint.
Make sure that the child's feet do not touch the front seat. If necessary, move the front seat slightly forwards.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, always observe the following when fitting a belt-secured child restraint system on the front passenger seat:

Observe the notes on rearward-facing and forward-facing child restraint systems on the front passenger seat ( page 129).
When using a forward-facing child restraint system integrated child seat belt: remove the head restraint from the respective seat, if possible. After the child restraint system has been removed, immediately replace the head restraint and adjust correctly.
The backrest of the forward-facing child restraint system must, as far as possible, be resting on the seat backrest of the front passenger seat.
The child restraint system must not be put under strain between the roof and the seat cushion and/or be fitted facing the wrong direction.
Adjust the vehicle head restraints so that the child restraint system is not put under strain by the head restraint.

Never place objects (e.g. cushions) under or behind the child restraint system.
Set the front passenger seat as far back as possible and move the seat into the highest position if possible. Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the seat belt outlet of the vehicle to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap must be routed forwards from the seat belt outlet and, where possible, downwards to the child restraint system.
Fully retract the seat cushion length adjustment.
Adjust the seat cushion inclination so that the front edge of the seat cushion is in the highest position and the rear edge of the seat cushion is in the lowest position.
Set the seat backrest to the most vertical position possible.

Fitting an ISOFIX or i-Size child restraint system

WARNING Risk of accident if the rear bench seat, rear seat and seat backrest are not engaged

The rear bench seat, rear seat and seat back-rest may fold forwards, even while the vehicle is in motion.

• As a result, the vehicle occupant will be pressed into the seat belt with increased force. The seat belt will not be able to protect as intended and could cause additional injury.
• Objects or loads in the boot or load compartment cannot be restrained by the seat backrest.
  Make sure that the rear bench seat, the rear seat and the seat backrest are engaged before every trip.

If the seat backrest is not engaged and locked in place, this will be shown on the Instrument Display (folding the rear seat back electrically) or the

red lock verification indicator will be visible (folding the rear seat back manually).

WARNING Risk of injury or death if the permissible gross mass of the child and child restraint system together is exceeded.

Too much load may be placed on the ISOFIX or i-Size child restraint systems and the child may not be restrained correctly in the event of an accident, for example.

If the child is secured in an ISOFIX or i-Size child restraint system with integrated seat belts, the total mass of the child and child restraint system must not exceed 33 kg.

Always comply with the information about the weight of the child restraint system:

• in the manufacturer's installation and operating instructions for the child restraint system used
• on a label on the child restraint system, if present

Regularly check that the permissible gross weight of the child and child restraint system is still complied with.

When fitting a child restraint system, observe the following:

Always observe the correct use of the seats and consider their suitability for attaching a child restraint system.

LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings (→ page 136)

or

i-Size securing rings ( page 138)

Before every journey, make sure that the ISO-FIX/LATCH child restraint system or the i-Size child restraint system is engaged correctly in both securing rings in the vehicle.

NOTE Damage to the seat belt for the centre seat during installation of the child restraint system

Make sure that the seat belt is not trapped.

Vehicles with rigid rear seats:

① ISOFIX ②

① LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings
② i-Size securing rings
Remove and stow away covers ① or ② of the securing rings in the vehicle.

Attach the ISOFIX/LATCH or i-Size child restraint system to both securing rings in the vehicle.
After removing the child restraint system, reattach covers ① or ②.

Vehicles with adjustable rear seats:

Diagram showing car seatbelt insertion with labeled parts and directional arrows indicating movement

Fold upholstered lining 1 upwards.

Turn the support on the rear side of upholstered lining ① 90°.
Upholstered lining ① remains folded upwards.
Attach the ISOFIX/LATCH or i-Size child restraint system to both securing rings ② in the vehicle.

Fastening a Top Tether

WARNING Risk of injury or death if the rear seat backrests are not locked after Top Tether belts are fitted

The rear seat backrests may fold forwards when you are driving.

As a result, child restraint systems will no longer be able to perform their intended protective function. This may also cause additional injuries.

Always lock rear seat backrests after fitting Top Tether belts.
Observe the lock verification indicator.

If the seat backrest is not engaged and locked in place, this will be shown on the instrument display (folding the rear seat back electrically) or the red lock verification indicator will be visible (folding the rear seat back manually).

If the child restraint system is equipped with a Top Tether belt:

The risk of injury may be reduced by Top Tether. The Top Tether belt enables an additional connection between the child restraint system attached with ISOFIX or i-Size and the vehicle.

Diagram of a car backrest with numbered compartments and structural connections

Technical diagram of a mechanical component with numbered parts labeled 4, 5, and 6

F167 0009 02

If necessary, slide head restraint ① upwards ( page 186).
Fit the ISOFIX or i-Size child restraint system with Top Tether. In doing so, comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions.
Guide Top Tether belt ⑤ under head restraint ① between the two head restraint bars.
If load compartment cover ③ is installed, guide Top Tether belt ⑤ downwards between load compartment cover ③ and seat back-rest ②.
Hook Top Tether hook ⑥ of Top Tether belt ⑤ into Top Tether anchorage ④ without twisting.
Tension Top Tether belt ⑤. In doing so, comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions.
If necessary, slide head restraint ① downwards (→ page 186). Make sure that you do not interfere with the correct routing of Top Tether belt ⑤.

Securing the child restraint system with the seat belt

WARNING Risk of accident if the rear bench seat, rear seat and seat backrest are not engaged

The rear bench seat, rear seat and seat back-rest may fold forwards, even while the vehicle is in motion.

• As a result, the vehicle occupant will be pressed into the seat belt with increased force. The seat belt will not be able to protect as intended and could cause additional injury.
• Objects or loads in the boot or load compartment cannot be restrained by the seat backrest.
  Make sure that the rear bench seat, the rear seat and the seat backrest are engaged before every trip.

If the seat backrest is not engaged and locked in place, this will be shown on the Instrument Display (folding the rear seat back electrically) or the

red lock verification indicator will be visible (folding the rear seat back manually).

For a child restraint system in the "Universal" or "Semi-Universal" category, make sure that the system has been approved for the vehicle seat.
Install the child restraint system. The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the sitting surface of the seat.
Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the seat belt outlet of the vehicle to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system.
The shoulder belt strap must be routed forwards from the seat belt outlet and, where possible, downwards to the child restraint system.
When fitting on the rear seat: also secure Top Tether if present.
When fitting on the front passenger seat: if necessary, adjust the seat belt outlet and the front passenger seat accordingly.

Child safety locks

Activating or deactivating the child safety lock for the rear doors

WARNING Accident- and risk of injury with unsupervised children in the vehicle

If you leave children unattended in the vehicle, they can in particular

• Open doors and thereby endanger other persons or road users.
  • get out of the car and are hit by traffic.
• Operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, forexample.

In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for exampleby:

• releasing the parking brake.
- change the gearbox setting.
- start the vehicle.
▶ Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
Keep the key out of reach of children.

WARNING Risk of fatal injury due to exposure to extreme heat or cold in the vehicle

If persons, particularly children, are subjected to prolonged exposure to intense heat or cold, there is a risk of severe injury or even death.

▶ Never leave persons, particularly children, unattended in the vehicle.

WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle

If children are travelling in the vehicle, they could, in particular:

• open doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users.
  • get out and be struck by oncoming traffic.
  • operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example.

▶ Always activate the installed child safety locks if children are travelling in the vehicle.
▶ Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle.

Vehicles for the United Kingdom: observe the important safety notes in the "Notes on the additional door lock" section.

There are child safety locks for the rear doors and the rear side windows.

The child safety lock on the rear doors secures each door separately. The doors can no longer be opened from the inside.

Diagram showing car interior and directional arrows with numbered annotations, likely illustrating vehicle movement or positioning.

Press the lever in direction ① (activate) or ② (deactivate).
▶ Check the functionality of the child lock.

Activating and deactivating the child safety lock for the rear side windows

WARNING Accident- and risk of injury with unsupervised children in the vehicle

If you leave children unattended in the vehicle, they can in particular

• Open doors and thereby endanger other persons or road users.
  • get out of the car and are hit by traffic.
• Operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, forexample.

In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for exampleby:

• releasing the parking brake.
• change the gearbox setting.
- start the vehicle.
▶ Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.

Keep the key out of reach of children.

WARNING Risk of fatal injury due to exposure to extreme heat or cold in the vehicle

If persons, particularly children, are subjected to prolonged exposure to intense heat or cold, there is a risk of severe injury or even death.

▶ Never leave persons, particularly children, unattended in the vehicle.

WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle

If children are travelling in the vehicle, they could, in particular:

• open doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users.
  • get out and be struck by oncoming traffic.
  • operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example.

Always activate the installed child safety locks if children are travelling in the vehicle.
▶ Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle.

Vehicles for the United Kingdom: observe the important safety notes in the "Notes on the additional door lock" section.

There are child safety locks for the rear doors and the rear side windows.

Diagram showing car interior with labeled parts and a zoomed-in view highlighting a vehicle's seat area.

To activate/deactivate: press button 2.

The rear side window can be opened or closed in the following cases:

• The indicator lamp ① is lit: via the switch on the driver's door
• The indicator lamp ① is off: via the switch on the corresponding rear door or driver's door

Key

Overview of key functions

WARNING Accident- and risk of injury with unsupervised children in the vehicle

If you leave children unattended in the vehicle, they can in particular

• Open doors and thereby endanger other persons or road users.
  • get out of the car and are hit by traffic.
• Operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, forexample.

In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for exampleby:

• releasing the parking brake.
- change the gearbox setting.
- start the vehicle.

▶ Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
Keep the key out of reach of children.

NOTE Damage to the key caused by magnetic fields

Keep the key away from strong magnetic fields.

Diagram of a car key with labeled components including the BMW logo and numbered parts 1 to 4.

Vehicle key

Locking
2 Indicator lamp

3 Unlocking
4 Opens/closes the tailgate
If indicator lamp ② does not light up after pressing the ☐ or ☑ button, the battery is weak or possibly discharged. Replace the battery as soon as possible.

Replace the key battery ( page 152).

The key locks and unlocks the following components:

• Doors
• Fuel filler flap
• Socket flap (plug-in hybrid)
• Tailgate

If the vehicle is not opened within approximately 40 seconds after unlocking, it locks again. Anti-theft protection is primed again.

Do not keep the key together with electronic devices or metal objects. This can affect the key's functionality.

Do not keep the key in the temperature-controlled cup holder. Otherwise, the key will not be reliably detected.

Activating/deactivating the acoustic locking verification signal

Multimedia system:

→ Settings Vehicle

▶ Open/close

Activate or deactivate the Acoustic lock.

i Please observe:

The selected setting for the acoustic locking verification signal must comply with the relevant national road and traffic regulations. In some countries, including Germany, using the acoustic locking verification signal is forbidden by traffic laws (in accordance with §16 Para. 1 and §30 Para. 1 of the German national road traffic regulations). The driver of the vehicle must comply with these regulations. In countries where the use of this function is forbidden, this function is not activated in the vehicle and must not be activated.

Changing the unlocking settings

Possible unlocking functions of the key:

- Central unlocking

• Unlocking the driver's door and fuel filler flap
• Plug-in hybrid: unlocking the driver's door and fuel filler flap/socket flap
  To switch between settings: press the ☑ and ⏻ buttons simultaneously for approximately six seconds until the indicator lamp flashes twice.

Options if the unlocking function for the driver's door and fuel filler flap has been selected:

• To unlock the vehicle centrally: press the button twice.
• Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: if you touch the inner surface of the door handle on the driver's door, only the driver's door and the fuel filler flap are unlocked.

Options if the unlocking function for the driver's door and fuel filler flap/socket flap has been selected (plug-in-hybrid):

• To unlock the vehicle centrally: press the button twice.
• Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: if you touch the inner surface of the door handle on the driv-

er's door, only the driver's door and the fuel filler flap/socket flap are unlocked.

Deactivating the function of the key

If you deactivate the key function, the KEYLESS-GO functions are also deactivated. Access or drive authorization by KEYLESS-GO is then no longer possible with that particular key. Activate the function of the key so that all its functions will again be available. You can also deactivate the function of the key to reduce the energy consumption of the key if you do not use the vehicle or a key for an extended period of time.

If you do not use the vehicle or a key for an extended period of time, you can also deactivate the function of the key to reduce the energy consumption of the key.

Press and hold the key ⏻ button.
With the key button ☐ pressed, immediately press key button ☐ twice in quick succession.
The indicator light of the key lights up once briefly and once for a long time.

(i) You have the following options to reactivate the key:

• Press any key on the key.
• Start the vehicle with the key in the centre console storage compartment ( page 270).

Removing/inserting the emergency key
Removing the emergency key

Diagram illustrating two-step mechanical or electrical process with labeled components and directional arrows

Press the release button ①. The emergency key ② is pushed out slightly.

Pull out the emergency key ② until it engages in the intermediate position.
Press the release button ① again and fully remove the emergency key ②.

Inserting the emergency key

Diagram illustrating two-step mechanical assembly or disassembly process with labeled components and directional arrows

Press the release button ①.
Insert the emergency key ② to the intermediate position or fully until it engages.
You can use the intermediate position of the emergency key ② to attach the key to a key ring.

Replacing the key battery

DANGER Risk of fatal injury due to swallowing batteries

Batteries contain toxic and corrosive substances. If batteries are swallowed or otherwise enter the body, severe internal burns can occur within two hours.

There is a risk of fatal injury!

Keep the batteries out of the reach of children.
If the lid and/or the battery compartment do not close securely, stop using the key and keep it away from children.
If batteries are swallowed or otherwise enter the body, seek immediate medical attention.

ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage due to improper disposal of batteries

Batteries contain pollutants. It is illegal, pose of them with the household rub-

Dispose of batteries in an environmentally responsible manner. Take discharged batteries to a qualified specialist workshop or to a collection point for used batteries.

Requirements

• You require a CR 2032 3 V cell battery.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the battery replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.

Remove the emergency key ( page 152).

Diagram of a computer mouse with labeled parts and directional arrows indicating movement or change.

Press release knob ② down fully and slide cover ① in the direction of the arrow.
Fold out cover ① in the direction of the arrow and remove.
Remove battery compartment ③ and take out the discharged battery.
Insert the new battery into battery compartment ③. Observe the positive pole marking in the battery compartment and on the battery when doing this.
Push in battery compartment ③.
Re-attach cover ① and push it until it engages.

Problems with the key, troubleshooting

You can no longer lock or unlock the vehicle Possible causes:

• The key battery is weak or discharged.
Check the battery using the indicator lamp ( page 150).
Replace the key battery, if necessary ( page 152).
▶ Use the replacement key.
Use the emergency key to lock or unlock ( page 157).
Have key checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

There is interference from a powerful radio signal source

Possible causes if the function of the key is impaired:

• high voltage power lines
- mobile phones
• electronic devices (notebooks, tablets)

• shielding due to metal objects or induction loops for electrical gate systems or automatic barriers
  Make sure that there is sufficient distance between the key and the potential source of interference.

You have lost a key

Have the key deactivated at a qualified specialist workshop.
If necessary, have the mechanical lock replaced as well.

Doors

Notes on the additional door lock

The additional door lock is only available for vehicles for the United Kingdom.

WARNING Risk of injury to persons inside the vehicle when the additional door lock is activated

If the additional door lock is activated, the doors can no longer be opened from the inside.

▶ Never leave persons, in particular children, unattended in the vehicle.
If there are persons in the vehicle, do not activate the additional door lock.

The additional door lock is automatically activated in the following situations:

• The vehicle is locked using the key.
• The vehicle is locked using KEYLESS-GO.
If the vehicle has been locked via Mercedes me connect, the additional door lock is not activated ( page 576).
If the additional door lock is activated, the doors cannot be opened from the inside.
i After locking you can issue a signal with the horn.

You can prevent the additional door lock from being activated by deactivating interior protection before locking the vehicle ( page 174).

Unlocking/opening the doors from the inside

United Kingdom only: observe the notes on the additional door lock ( page 154).

Diagram showing car interior components with numbered labels and directional arrows indicating movement or flow

Pull the door ② handle. Locking pin ① pops up when the door is unlocked.

Centrally locking and unlocking the vehicle from the inside

Diagram of car interior with labeled lock icons and a close-up inset showing the lock mechanism

To unlock: press ① button.
To lock: press button 2.

This does not lock or unlock the fuel filler flap.

Plug-in hybrid: the socket flap is also locked and unlocked. The socket flap can be opened even if a key is detected in the car.

The vehicle is not unlocked:

• if you have locked the vehicle using the key
- if you have locked the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO

Locking/unlocking the vehicle with KEYLESS-GO

Requirements

• The key is outside the vehicle.
- The distance between the key and the vehicle does not exceed 1 m.
- The driver's door and the door on which the door handle is used are closed.

! NOTE Vehicle damage due to unintentional opening of the tailgate

• when using an automatic car wash
• when using a high pressure cleaner
  ▶ Deactivate the function of the key in these situations.

or

Make sure that the key is at a minimum distance of 3 m away from the vehicle.

Observe the notes:

• on washing the vehicle in a car wash ( page 31)
• on using a high pressure cleaner ( page 622)

Diagram showing a car interior with two labeled buttons (1 and 2) pointing to a car door panel.

To unlock the vehicle: touch the inner surface of the door handle.
To lock the vehicle: touch sensor surface or ②.
▶ Convenience closing: touch recessed sensor surface ② until the closing process has been completed.
(i) Further information on convenience closing ( page 166).

If you open the tailgate from outside, it is automatically unlocked.

Problems with KEYLESS-GO, troubleshooting

You can no longer lock or unlock the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO

Possible causes:

• The function of the key has been deactivated.
• The key battery is weak or discharged.
▶ Activate the function of the key ( page 68).
Check the battery using the indicator lamp ( page 150).

Replace the key battery, if necessary ( page 152).
Use the replacement key.
Use the emergency key to lock or unlock ( page 157).
Have the vehicle and key checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

There is interference from a powerful radio signal source

Possible causes if the function of KEYLESS-GO is impaired:

• high voltage power lines
- mobile phones
• electronic devices (notebooks, tablets)
- shielding due to metal objects or induction loops for electrical gate systems or automatic barriers
Make sure that there is sufficient distance between the key and the potential source of interference.

Activating/deactivating the automatic locking feature

The vehicle is locked automatically when the vehicle is switched on and the wheels are turning faster than walking pace.

Diagram of car interior showing lock icons and a close-up of the door panel with labeled parts

To activate: press and hold button ② for approximately five seconds until an acoustic signal sounds.

To deactivate: press and hold button Ⓞ for approximately five seconds until an acoustic signal sounds.

In the following situations, there is a danger of being locked out when the function is activated:

• while the vehicle is being tow-started or pushed
• if the vehicle is being tested on a roller dynamometer

Activating or deactivating the automatic locking feature

Multimedia system:

Settings Vehicle

▶ Open/close

The vehicle is locked automatically when the vehicle is switched on, and the wheels are turning faster than the walking pace.
▶ Activate or deactivate Automatic locking.

In the following situations, there is a danger of being locked out when the function is activated:

• The vehicle is being towed or pushed.

- If the vehicle is being tested on a roller dynamometer.

Power closing function

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when the doors close automatically

Body parts or objects can become trapped, causing injuries.

▶ Ensure that no body parts or objects are in the closing area.
▶ Automatic closing of the doors can be cancelled by pulling the outer or inner door handle.

If you push the door into the lock to the first detent position, the power closing function will automatically pull the door into the lock.

Locking/unlocking the driver's door with the emergency key

If you wish to lock the vehicle entirely using the emergency key, first press the button for

F167 0009 02

locking from the inside while the driver's door is open. Then proceed to lock the driver's door using the emergency key.

If you unlock and open the driver's door with the emergency key, this triggers the burglar alarm system.
If you unlock the driver's door with the emergency key, the tailgate will not be unlocked.

Diagram of a car's side panel showing the steering wheel and keyway (no text or symbols present)

Remove the emergency key ( page 152).
Insert the emergency key as far as it will go into opening ① in the cover.
▶ Pull and hold the door handle.
Pull the cover on the emergency key as straight as possible away from the vehicle until it releases.
Release the door handle.

Diagram of a car's side profile showing the front wheel and dashboard, with an inset close-up highlighting a key component (no text or symbols present)

To unlock: turn the emergency key anti-clockwise to position 1.
To lock: turn the emergency key clockwise to position 1.
Carefully press the cover onto the lock cylinder until it engages and is seated firmly.

Load compartment

Opening the tailgate

DANGER Risk of poisoning from exhaust gases

Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases, such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the tailgate is open when the engine is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion.

Always switch off the engine before opening the tailgate.
▶ Never drive with the tailgate open.

NOTE Damage to the tailgate caused by obstacles above the vehicle

The tailgate swings rearwards and upwards when it is opened.

Make sure that there is sufficient space behind and above the tailgate.

If the tailgate is unlocked, pull the tailgate handle and release it again immediately.
▶ Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS: make a kicking movement with your foot below the bumper ( page 161).

Diagram showing car interior with a highlighted control panel and a close-up of the control panel, labeled with number 1.

Pull remote operating switch ① until the tail-gate opens.
or
Press and hold the button on the key. If the tailgate has stopped in an intermediate position, pull it upwards. Release it as soon as it begins to open.

If an obstacle obstructs the tailgate during the automatic opening process, blockage detection will stop the tailgate. The automatic blockage detection function is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attentiveness.

Closing the tailgate

WARNING Risk of injury from unsecured items in the vehicle

If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip over or be thrown around and thereby hit vehicle occupants.

There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction.

Always stow objects in such a way that they cannot be thrown around.
Before the journey, secure objects, luggage or loads against slipping or tipping over.

Observe the notes on loading the vehicle.

F167 0009 02

Notes on closing the tailgate: your vehicle is equipped with automatic key recognition. If a key belonging to the vehicle is detected in the vehicle, the tailgate will not be locked.

Note that the tailgate will not be locked in the following situation:

• You have locked the vehicle and close the tail-gate while a key belonging to the vehicle is inside the vehicle. and
• A second key belonging to the vehicle is not detected outside the vehicle.

Automatic key recognition is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness.

Before locking, ensure that at least one key belonging to the vehicle is outside the vehicle.
To close the tailgate: pull the tailgate downwards slightly. Release it as soon as it begins to close.

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped during automatic closing of the tailgate

Body parts may become trapped. There may be people in the closing area.

Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the closing area during the closing process.

Use one of the following options to stop the closing process:

• Press the 📞 button on the key.
• Press or pull the remote operating switch on the driver's door.
• Press the closing or locking button on the tailgate.
• Pull the tailgate handle.

Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS: it is also possible to stop the closing process by making a kicking movement below the rear bumper.

Diagram showing car interior control panel with labeled buttons and a numbered annotation pointing to the main button.

Switch on the power supply or the vehicle.
Push remote operating switch ① until the tailgate is fully closed.

1 STOP 2

Press closing button ① on the tailgate.

Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO

Press locking button ② on the tailgate. If a key is detected outside the vehicle, the tailgate will close and the vehicle will be locked.
Press and hold the 📄 button on the key (with the key in the vicinity of the vehicle).

Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS

Make a kicking movement with your foot below the bumper ( page 161).

Automatic reversing function for the tailgate The tailgate is equipped with automatic blockage detection with a reversing function. If a solid object hinders or restricts the tailgate when it is closing automatically, the tailgate will automatically open again slightly. Automatic blockage detection with reversing function is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attentiveness when you are closing the tailgate.

During the closing process, make sure that no body parts are in the closing area.

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped despite reversing function

The reversing function will not react:

• to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fingers
• towards the end of the closing procedure

In these situations in particular, the reversing function cannot prevent someone being trapped.

▶ Ensure that no body parts are in the closing area.

If someone is trapped, either:

• Press the button on the key.
• Press or pull the remote operating switch on the driver's door.
• Press the closing or locking button on the tailgate.
• Pull the tailgate handle.

HANDS-FREE ACCESS function

With HANDS-FREE ACCESS, you can open, close or stop the closing process of the tailgate by performing a kicking movement under the rear bumper.

The kicking movement triggers the opening or closing process alternately.

Observe the notes when the tailgate opens ( page 158) and closes ( page 159).

Two warning tones sound when the tailgate is opening or closing.

WARNING Risk of burns caused by a hot exhaust system

The vehicle exhaust system can become very hot. If you use HANDS-FREE ACCESS, you could burn yourself by touching the exhaust system.

Always ensure that you only make a kicking movement within the detection range of the sensors.

NOTE Vehicle damage due to unintentional opening of the tailgate

• when using an automatic car wash
• when using a high pressure cleaner
  ▶ Deactivate the function of the key in these situations.

or

Make sure that the key is at a minimum distance of 3 m away from the vehicle.

When making the kicking movement, ensure that you stand firmly on the ground. You could otherwise lose your balance, e.g. on ice.

Observe the following notes:

• The key is behind the vehicle.
- Stand at least 30 cm away from the vehicle while performing the kicking movement.
- Do not come into contact with the bumper while making the kicking movement.
- Do not carry out the kicking movement too slowly.
- The kicking movement must be towards the vehicle and back again.

Front view of a car with a blue circular marker labeled '1' pointing to the side panel (no text or symbols on the car itself)

Detection range of the sensors

If several consecutive kicking movements are not successful, wait ten seconds.

System limits

The system may be impaired or may not function in the following cases:

• The sensors are dirty, e.g. due to road salt or snow.
• The kicking movement is made using a prosthetic leg.

The tailgate can open or close unintentionally in the following situations:

• A person's arms or legs move in the sensor detection range, e.g. when polishing the vehicle or picking up objects.
• Objects are moved or placed behind the vehicle, e.g. the hose of a fuel dispenser, a charging cable or luggage
• Clamping straps, tarpaulins or other coverings are pulled over the bumper.
• A protective mat with a length reaching over the boot sill down into the detection range of the sensors is used.
  • The protective mat is not secured correctly.
  • Work is being done on the trailer hitch, trailers or rear bicycle racks.

Deactivate the function of the key ( page 68) or do not carry the key about your person in such situations.

Limiting the opening angle of the tailgate

Activating the opening angle limiter

You can limit the opening angle of the tailgate in the top half of its opening range up to a point shortly before the end position.

Stop the opening procedure of the tailgate at the desired position.

Press and hold the closing button on the tailgate until you hear a short acoustic signal. The opening angle limiter will be activated. The tailgate will then stop in the stored position when opened.

To open the tailgate fully, pull the handle on the outside of the tailgate again after it has stopped automatically.

Deactivating the opening angle limiter

Press and hold the closing button on the tailgate until two short acoustic signals sound.

Unlocking the tailgate with the emergency key

Requirements:

• The rear seat backrest has been folded forward.
• The load compartment cover has been removed.

Diagram showing car interior components with labeled parts, including a highlighted section and a zoomed-in view of the device.

Remove the emergency key ( page 152).

Insert emergency key ② into opening ① in the trim and push it in. The tailgate will be unlocked.

Side windows

Opening and closing the side windows

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when opening a side window

When you open a side window, parts of the body could be drawn in or become trapped between the side window and window frame.

When opening, make sure that nobody is touching the side window.
If someone is trapped, release the button immediately or pull it in order to close the side window again.

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when closing a side window

When closing a side window, body parts could be trapped in the closing area in the process.

When closing, make sure that no body parts are in the closing area.
If someone is trapped, release the button immediately or press the button in order to reopen the side window.

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when children operate the side windows

Children could become trapped if they operate the side windows, particularly when unattended.

Activate the child safety lock for the rear side windows.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle.
▶ Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

Requirements

- The power supply or the vehicle has been switched on.

Diagram showing car interior with two directional arrows labeled ① and ②, indicating movement or adjustment in a vehicle's dashboard.

Closing
2 Opening

The buttons on the driver's door take precedence.

To start automatic operation: press the button beyond the point of resistance or pull and release it.
To interrupt automatic operation: press or pull the ☐ button again.

When the vehicle is switched off, you can continue to operate the side windows. This function is available for around four minutes or until a front door is opened.

① Vehicles with electric sunblinds on the left and right rear doors: the buttons for the rear side windows also open and close the roller sunblinds ( page 171).

Automatic reversing function of the side windows If an obstacle impedes a side window during the closing process, the side window will open again automatically. The automatic reversing function is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness.

During the closing process, make sure that no body parts are in the closing area.

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped despite there being reversing protection on the side window

The reversing function does not react:

• to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fingers.

• during resetting.

The reversing function cannot prevent someone from becoming trapped in these situations.

During the closing process, make sure that no body parts are in the closing area.

If someone becomes trapped, press the button to open the side window again.

Automatic function of the side windows

In the following cases, the side windows will be closed automatically when the vehicle is switched off:

• if it starts to rain
  Rain is detected by a rain sensor on the windscreen.
  • in extreme temperatures
  • after a certain time (depending on the onboard electrical system voltage)

• if there is a malfunction in the power supply

The side windows will be closed as far as the ventilation position.

Vehicles with a sliding sunroof: the side windows will be closed completely if the sliding sunroof is open.

If the side windows are obstructed during automatic closing, the side window concerned will open again slightly. After another automatic closing process, the automatic function may be deactivated. The automatic function will be active again the next time the vehicle is started.

Convenience opening (ventilating the vehicle before starting a journey)

WARNING Risk of entrapment when opening a side window

When opening a side window, parts of the body could be drawn in or become trapped between the side window and window frame.

When opening, make sure that nobody is touching the side window.
Release the button immediately if somebody becomes trapped.

Requirements

• The key is in the immediate vicinity of the vehicle.
  Press and hold the [icon] button on the key. The following functions are performed:

• The vehicle is unlocked.
• The side windows are opened.
• The panoramic sliding roof is opened.
- The seat ventilation of the driver's seat is switched on.

If the roller sunblind of the panoramic sliding sunroof is closed, the roller sunblind is opened first.
① If the roller sunblinds of the rear doors are closed, the roller sunblinds are opened first.

To interrupt convenience opening: release the button.
To continue convenience opening: press and hold the 📄 button again.

Convenience closing (closing the vehicle from outside)

WARNING Risk of entrapment due to not paying attention during convenience closing

When the convenience closing feature is operating, parts of the body could become trapped in the closing area of the side window and the sliding sunroof.

When the convenience closing feature is operating, monitor the entire closing process and make sure that no body parts are in the closing area.

Requirements

- The key is in the immediate vicinity of the vehicle.

Press and hold the ⏻ button on the key. The following functions are performed:

• The vehicle is locked.
• The side windows are closed.
• The panoramic sliding roof is closed.

To interrupt convenience closing: release the button.

To continue convenience closing: press and hold the 🔒 button again.

(i) Convenience closing also functions with KEY-LESS-GO ( page 155).

Resolving problems with the side windows

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped or fatally injured if reversing protection is not activated

If you close a side window again immediately after it has been blocked, the side window will close with increased or maximum force. The reversing function is then not active and body parts may become trapped.

Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area.
To stop the closing process, release the button or press the button again to reopen the side window.

A side window cannot be closed and you cannot see the cause.

Check to see whether any objects are in the window guide.
Adjust the side windows.

Adjusting the side windows

If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens again immediately:

Immediately after this, pull and hold the corresponding button again until the side window has closed and hold the button for at least one more second (re-adjustment). The side window will be closed without the automatic reversing function.

If the side window is obstructed again and reopens again immediately:

Immediately after this, pull and hold the corresponding button again until the side window has closed and hold the button for at least one more second (follow-up adjustment). The side window will be closed without the automatic reversing function.

The side windows cannot be opened or closed using the convenience opening feature.

Possible causes:

• The key battery is weak or discharged.
Check the battery using the indicator lamp ( page 150).
Replace the key battery, if necessary ( page 152).

Sliding sunroof

Opening and closing the sliding sunroof

The term "sliding sunroof" also refers to the panorama sliding sunroof.

A WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when the sliding sunroof is being opened and closed

Body parts may become trapped in the range of movement.

During opening and closing, make sure that no body parts are in the range of movement.
Release the button immediately if somebody becomes trapped.

or
▶ Briefly press the button in any direction during automatic operation. The opening or closing process will be stopped.

WARNING Risk of entrapment if the sliding sunroof is operated by children

Children operating the sliding sunroof could get caught in the moving parts, particularly if unattended.

▶ Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle.

A WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when the roller sunblind is being opened and closed

Body parts may become trapped between the roller sunblind and frame or sliding roof.

When opening or closing, make sure that no body parts are in the roller sunblind's range of movement.
Release the button immediately if somebody becomes trapped.

or

Briefly press the button in any direction during automatic operation. The opening or closing process will be stopped.

! NOTE Malfunction due to snow and ice Snow and ice may cause the sliding sunroof to malfunction.

Open the sliding sunroof only if it is free of snow and ice.

NOTE Damage caused by protruding objects

Objects that protrude from the sliding sunroof may damage the seals.

Do not allow anything to protrude from the sliding sunroof.

NOTE Damage to the sliding sunroof when a roof luggage rack is fitted

When a roof luggage rack is fitted, raising or opening the sliding sunroof may be restricted.

▶ Check whether the sliding sunroof can be raised or opened when a roof luggage rack is fitted.

If in doubt, do not raise or open the sliding sunroof.

Diagram showing a car interior with a highlighted device and three numbered arrows indicating directional flow or movement.

1 Raise
2 Open
3 Close/lower

Use the button to operate the panorama sliding sunroof and the roller sunblind.

The panorama sliding sunroof can be operated only when the roller sunblind is open. Exception: ventilating the vehicle interior

Check whether the sliding sunroof can be raised or opened when a roof luggage rack is fitted.
To start automatic operation: press the button beyond the point of resistance or pull and release it.
To interrupt automatic operation: briefly press the button in any direction.
The opening/closing process will be stopped.
To ventilate the vehicle interior: raise the sliding sunroof.
The roller sunblind will open slightly.

Operating the roller sunblind for the sliding sun-roof from the rear passenger compartment

Interior view of a car showing the dashboard and seatbelt (no text or symbols visible)

To open: press button ①.
To close: pull button 1.
When the sliding sunroof is open, it will close first. To close the roller sunblind, you will need to pull button again.

If you press or pull button ① beyond the point of resistance, you will start automatic operation in the direction in question. You can stop automatic operation by pushing or pulling the button again.

Automatic reversing function of the sliding sun-roof

If an obstacle obstructs the sliding sunroof during the closing process, the sliding sunroof will open again automatically. The automatic reversing function is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness.

During the closing process, make sure that no body parts are in the closing area.

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped despite the reversing function being active

In particular, the reversing function does not react:

• to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fingers.
• towards the end of the closing procedure.
- during resetting.

During the closing process, make sure that no body parts are in the closing area.
Release the button immediately if somebody becomes trapped.

or
Briefly press the button in any direction during automatic operation.

The closing process will be stopped.

Automatic reversing function of the roller sunblind If an obstacle obstructs the roller sunblind during the closing process, the roller sunblind will open again automatically. The automatic reversing function is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness.

When closing the roller sunblind, make sure that no body parts are in the area of movement.

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped despite reversing function

In particular, the reversing function does not react to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fingers.

When closing the roller sunblind, make sure that no body parts are in the range of movement.

Release the button immediately if somebody becomes trapped.

or

▶ Briefly press the button in any direction during the automatic closing process. The closing process will be stopped.

Automatic functions of the sliding sunroof

① The term "sliding sunroof" also refers to the panorama sliding sunroof.

The sliding sunroof will be closed automatically when the vehicle has been switched off in the following situations:

- if it starts to rain

Rain is detected by a rain sensor on the windscreen.

• in extreme temperatures
- after a certain time (depending on the onboard electrical system voltage)
- if there is a malfunction in the power supply

The sliding sunroof will rise at the rear in order to continue ventilating the vehicle interior.

If the sliding sunroof is obstructed during an automatic closing procedure, the roof will be opened again slightly. The automatic function for the sliding sunroof and the side windows will then be deactivated.

Rain closing function when driving

Vehicles with a panorama sliding sunroof: if it starts to rain, the raised sliding sunroof will automatically be lowered while the vehicle is in motion.

Automatic lowering function

Vehicles with a panorama sliding sunroof: if the sliding sunroof is raised at the rear, it will automatically be lowered slightly at higher speeds. At low speeds, it will be raised again automatically.

F167000902

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped by automatic lowering of the sliding sunroof

At higher speeds, the raised sliding sunroof will automatically be lowered slightly at the rear.

Make sure that nobody reaches into the sliding sunroof's range of movement while the vehicle is in motion.
If somebody becomes trapped, briefly push the sliding sunroof button forwards or backwards.

By pushing or pulling the button, you can interrupt the automatic functions "Rain closing function when driving" and "Automatic lowering".

Rectifying problems with the sliding sunroof

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped or fatal injuries when the sliding sunroof is closed again

If the sliding sunroof is closed again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, it will close with increased force.

Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area.
Release the button immediately if somebody becomes trapped.

or

Briefly press the button in any direction during the automatic closing process. The closing process will be stopped.

The sliding sunroof cannot be closed and you cannot see the cause.

The term "sliding sunroof" also refers to the panorama sliding sunroof.

If the sliding sunroof is obstructed during closing and reopens again slightly:

Immediately after automatic reversing, pull and hold the button down again to the point of resistance until the sliding sunroof is closed.
The sliding sunroof will be closed with increased force.

If the sliding sunroof is obstructed again and opens again slightly:

Repeat the previous step. The sliding sunroof will be closed again with increased force.

Vehicles with a panorama sliding sunroof: the sliding sunroof or the roller sunblind is not operating smoothly.

Reset the sliding sunroof and the roller sun-blind.

Resetting the sliding sunroof and the roller sun-blind

Pull and hold the button little by little until the sliding sunroof is fully closed.
Pull and hold the button little by little until the roller sunblind is fully closed.

Use automatic operation to fully open and then close the sliding sunroof.

Roller sunblinds

Extending or retracting the roller sunblinds on the rear side windows

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when extending or retracting the roller sunblind

Body parts could become trapped in the sweep of the roller sunblind when it is being extended or retracted.

Make sure that no body parts are in the sweep of the roller sunblind when it is being extended or retracted.
If someone becomes trapped, briefly press the button in the opposite direction.

The opening or closing process will briefly be stopped. The roller sunblind will then return to its starting position.

NOTE Damage caused by objects

Objects can cause the roller sunblind to malfunction.

▶ Ensure that the roller sunblind can move freely.

The roller sunblinds for the rear side windows can be operated with the buttons for the side windows in the driver's door and in the rear doors.

Diagram of car interior showing two switches with labeled buttons, including a zoomed-in view of the first switch.

① Rear left side window/roller sunblind
② Rear right side window/roller sunblind
To close fully: briefly pull the corresponding button when the side window is closed.
To open fully: briefly press the corresponding button.

Anti-theft protection

Function of the immobiliser

The immobiliser prevents your vehicle from being started without the correct key.

The immobiliser is automatically activated when the vehicle is switched off, and deactivated when the vehicle is switched on.

ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)

Function of the ATA system

If the ATA system is primed, a visual and audible alarm is triggered in the following situations:

• when a door is opened
• when the tailgate is opened
• when the bonnet is opened
• when interior protection is triggered (→ page 174)
• when tow-away protection is triggered (→ page 173)

The ATA system is primed automatically after approximately ten seconds in the following situations:

• after locking the vehicle with the key
• after locking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO

Diagram of car interior showing dashboard, steering wheel, and air bag with a highlighted 'SANSenger' logo and control buttons

Indicator lamp ● flashes when the ATA system is primed.

The ATA system is deactivated automatically in the following situations:

• after unlocking the vehicle with the key
• after unlocking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO
- after pressing the start/stop button with the key in the stowage compartment (→ page 270)

Deactivating the ATA

Press the ☑, ☒ or ☑ button on the key.

or

Press the start/stop button with the key in the stowage compartment ( page 270)

Deactivating the alarm using KEYLESS-GO

Grasp the outside door handle with the key outside the vehicle.

Function of tow-away protection

An audible and visual alarm is triggered if an alteration to your vehicle's angle of inclination is detected while tow-away protection is primed.

Tow-away protection is automatically primed after approximately 60 seconds:

• after locking the vehicle with the key
• after locking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO

Tow-away protection is only primed when the following components are closed:

• Doors
• Tailgate

Tow-away protection is automatically deactivated:

• after pressing the ☑ or ☑ button on the key
• after pressing the start/stop button with the key in the stowage compartment ( page 270)
  • after unlocking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO
• when using HANDS-FREE ACCESS

Information on collision detection on a parked vehicle ( page 341).

Priming/deactivating tow-away protection

Multimedia system:

→ ▶ Settings ▶ Vehicle ▶ Opening/closing ▶ Vehicle protection

▶ Prime or deactivate Tow-away protection.

Tow-away protection is primed again in the following cases:

• The vehicle is unlocked again.
- A door is opened.
• The vehicle is locked again.

Function of interior protection

When interior protection is primed, a visual and audible alarm is triggered if movement is detected in the vehicle interior.

Interior protection is primed automatically after approximately ten seconds:

• after locking the vehicle with the key
• after locking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO

Interior protection is only primed when the following components are closed:

• Doors
• Tailgate

Interior protection is automatically deactivated:

• after pressing the ☑ or ☑ button on the key
• after pressing the start/stop button with the key in the stowage compartment ( page 270)
  • after unlocking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO
• when using HANDS-FREE ACCESS

The following situations can lead to a false alarm:

• when there are moving objects such as mascots in the vehicle interior
• if a side window is open
  • if the panoramic sunroof is open

Priming/deactivating interior protection

Multimedia system:

→ ▶ Settings ▶ Vehicle ▶ Opening/closing ▶ Vehicle protection

▶ Prime or deactivate Interior motion sensor. Interior protection is primed again in the following cases:

• The vehicle is unlocked again.
- A door is opened.
• The vehicle is locked again.

Notes on the correct driver's seat position

WARNING Risk of injury if vehicle settings are adjusted while the vehicle is in motion

You could lose control of the vehicle in particular in the following situations:

• If you adjust the driver's seat, the head restraints, the steering wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion.
• If you fasten your seat belt while the vehicle is in motion.

Before starting the engine: adjust the driver's seat, head restraints, steering wheel and mirror in particular and fasten your seat belt.

Diagram of a car interior showing driver's seatbelt and steering wheel with numbered labels pointing to the seatbelt.

Ensure the following when adjusting steering wheel ①, seat belt ② and driver's seat ③:

• You are sitting as far away from the driver's airbag as possible, taking the following points into consideration:
  • You are sitting in an upright position

• Your thighs are slightly supported by the seat cushion

• Your legs are not fully extended and you can depress the pedals properly

• The back of your head is supported at eye level by the centre of the head restraint
• You can hold the steering wheel with your arms slightly bent
  • You can move your legs freely
• You can see all the displays on the instrument cluster clearly
• You have a good overview of the traffic conditions
• Your seat belt sits snugly against your body and passes across the centre of your shoulder and across your hips in the pelvic area

Notes on grab handles

WARNING Risk of injury due to excessive load on the grab handles

If you apply your full body weight to the grab handle or pull it abruptly, the grab handle may

be damaged or come loose from its anchorage. This may result in injuries.

Use the grab handles only to stabilise the seating position or to assist in getting in and out of the seat.

Seats

Adjusting the front seat

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the seats are adjusted by children

Children could become trapped if they adjust the seats, particularly when unattended.

When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle.

▶ Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

You can adjust the seats when the vehicle is switched off.

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped during seat adjustment

When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the seat guide rail.

Make sure when adjusting a seat that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the seat.

Observe the safety notes on "Airbags" and "Children in the vehicle".

WARNING Risk of accident due to adjusting the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in motion

You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular:

• if you adjust the driver's seat, the head restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion
• if you fasten your seat belt while the vehicle is in motion

Before starting the vehicle: in particular, adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror, and fasten your seat belt.

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the seat height is adjusted carelessly

If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you or other vehicle occupants could be trapped and thereby injured.

Children in particular could accidentally press the electrical seat adjustment buttons and become trapped.

While moving the seats, make sure that hands or other body parts do not get under the lever assembly of the seat adjustment system.

A WARNING Risk of injury due to head restraints not being fitted or being adjusted incorrectly

If head restraints have not been installed or have not been adjusted correctly, there is an increased risk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the event of an accident or when braking.

Always drive with the head restraints fitted.
Before driving off, make sure for every vehicle occupant that the centre of the head restraint supports the back of the head at about eye level.

Do not interchange the head restraints of the front and rear seats. Otherwise, you will not be able to adjust the height and angle of the head restraints correctly.

Adjust the head restraint fore-and-aft position so that it is as close as possible to the back of your head.

WARNING Risk of injury or death due to incorrect seat position

The seat belt will not offer the intended level of protection if you have not moved the seat backrest to an almost vertical position. In particular, you may slip under the seatbelt and injure yourself.

Adjust the seat properly before beginning your journey.
Always ensure that the seat backrest is in an almost vertical position and that the shoulder section of your seat belt is routed across the centre of your shoulder.

WARNING Risk of injury due to excessive load on the grab handles

If you apply your full body weight to the grab handle or pull it abruptly, the grab handle may be damaged or come loose from its anchorage. This may result in injuries.

Use the grab handles only to stabilise the seating position or to assist in getting in and out of the seat.

A WARNING Risk of potentially fatal injuries due to objects trapped under the front passenger seat

Objects trapped under the front passenger seat may interfere with the function of the automatic front passenger airbag shutoff or damage the system.

Do not stow any objects under the front passenger seat.
When the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure that no objects have become trapped beneath the front passenger seat.

Diagram showing vehicle door panel layout with numbered components and directional arrows indicating movement or placement.

① Head restraint height
② Seat backrest inclination
3 Seat height
④ Seat cushion length
5 Seat cushion inclination
6 Seat fore-and-aft position
Save the settings with the memory function ( page 197).

Adjusting the front passenger seat electrically from the driver's seat

A WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the seats are adjusted by children

Children could become trapped if they adjust the seats, particularly when unattended.

When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle.
▶ Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

You can adjust the seats when the ignition is switched off.

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped during seat adjustment

When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the seat guide rail.

Make sure when adjusting a seat that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the seat.

Observe the safety notes on "Airbags" and "Children in the vehicle".

WARNING Risk of injury or death due to the front seat being positioned too close to the cockpit

The front airbags can also injure the occupants in the front of the vehicle.

▶ Always adjust the front seats so they are as far away as possible from the front airbags.
In addition, observe the notes on correct seat adjustment.

NOTE Damaging objects in the luggage net in the front passenger footwell when adjusting the front passenger seat

Objects in the luggage net in the front passenger footwell can become damaged when the front passenger seat is being adjusted.

Do not slide the front passenger seat as far forward as it will go.

! NOTE Damage to the seats when moving the seats back

The seats may be damaged by objects when moving the seats back.

When moving the seats back, make sure that there are no objects in the footwell, under or behind the seats.

Requirements:

• The power supply is switched on.

Diagram showing car interior with seatbelt, seatbelt switch, and a highlighted D-shaped component labeled 'R' with number 1.

You can call up the following functions for the front passenger seat:

• Seat adjustment
• Seat heating
• Seat ventilation
• Memory function

To select the front passenger seat: press button ①.
When the indicator lamp lights up, the front passenger seat is selected.
Adjust the front passenger seat using the buttons on the driver's side door operating unit.
To select the driver's seat: press button ① again.
When the indicator lamp goes out, the driver's seat has been selected.

Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support

Diagram showing a hand holding a car with labeled parts and an inset close-up of the central circular component.

① Higher
2 Softer
3 Lower
4 Firmer

Use buttons ① to ④ to adjust the contour of the backrest.

Adjusting the rear seats electrically

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the seats are adjusted by children

Children could become trapped if they adjust the seats, particularly when unattended.

When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle.
▶ Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

You can adjust the seats when the vehicle is switched off.

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped during seat adjustment

When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the seat guide rail.

Make sure when adjusting a seat that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the seat.

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the seat height is adjusted carelessly

If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you or other vehicle occupants could be trapped and thereby injured.

Children in particular could accidentally press the electrical seat adjustment buttons and become trapped.

While moving the seats, make sure that hands or other body parts do not get under the lever assembly of the seat adjustment system.

WARNING Risk of injury due to head restraints not being filled or being adjusted incorrectly

If head restraints have not been installed or have not been adjusted correctly, there is an increased risk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the event of an accident or when braking.

▶ Always drive with the head restraints fitted.
Before driving off, make sure for every vehicle occupant that the centre of the head restraint supports the back of the head at about eye level.

Do not interchange the head restraints of the front and rear seats. Otherwise, you will not be able to adjust the height and angle of the head restraints correctly.

Adjust the head restraint fore-and-aft position so that it is as close as possible to the back of your head.

WARNING Risk of injury or death due to incorrect seat position

The seat belt will not offer the intended level of protection if you have not moved the seat backrest to an almost vertical position. In particular, you may slip under the seatbelt and injure yourself.

Adjust the seat properly before beginning your journey.
Always ensure that the seat backrest is in an almost vertical position and that the shoulder section of your seat belt is routed across the centre of your shoulder.

⚠ WARNING Risk of injury due to excessive load on the grab handles

If you apply your full body weight to the grab handle or pull it abruptly, the grab handle may be damaged or come loose from its anchorage. This may result in injuries.

Use the grab handles only to stabilise the seating position or to assist in getting in and out of the seat.

NOTE Damage to the rear seat armrest when folding the centre seat backrest forward

If the rear seat armrest is folded down, it can be damaged when the centre seat backrest is folded forward.

Fold the rear seat armrest upwards before folding the centre seat backrest forward.

The middle seat backrest is adjusted together with the left seat.

Diagram showing car interior with labeled parts and a highlighted 3D model of the seat, likely illustrating seat design or positioning.

① Head restraint height
② Seat backrest inclination
3 Seat fore-and-aft position

Folding the rear seats forwards electrically

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when adjusting the seats

When you adjust a seat, you may trap yourself or a vehicle occupant.

When adjusting a seat, make sure that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the seat.
WARNING Risk of an accident because the seat backrest is not engaged

The seat backrest may fold forwards.

There is a risk of the following, in particular:

• The vehicle occupant may be pressed against the seat belt. The seat belt cannot protect as intended and could cause additional injury.
• A child restraint system will no longer be properly supported or positioned and will no longer fulfil its function as intended.

- The seat backrest will not be able to restrain objects or goods in the load compartment.

Always ensure that the seat backrest is engaged, especially:

• Before persons travel in the vehicle while sitting on a seat with the easy entry and exit feature
  • After the seat backrest has been adjusted
  • After the easy entry and exit feature has been used
  • After the load compartment enlargement has been folded forwards

WARNING Risk of injury due to seat backrests folded forwards

If the seat backrest of the rear seat is folded forwards, persons in the third row of seats may hit parts of the seat mechanism, especially in the event of an accident, braking manoeuvre or abrupt change of direction.

If there is a person in the third row of seats, the rear seat in front of them must

be folded back to the driving position before the journey begins.

▶ Persons in the third row of seats should not rest their legs on a seat backrest that has been folded forwards.

Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have their seat belts fastened correctly and are sitting properly. Particular attention must be paid to children.

If you no longer require the seat backrest to be folded down for loading or for getting in and out, fold it back into place.

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the seat is not engaged

The seat does not engage when folded forwards. The seat can fold backwards unexpectedly, e.g. when accelerating, braking or in the event of an abrupt change of direction or an accident.

People in the seat's sweep can become trapped.

If a seat is folded forwards, always fold it back before driving off.
Make sure that the seat is engaged.

WARNING Risk of injury due to excessive load on the grab handles

If you apply your full body weight to the grab handle or pull it abruptly, the grab handle may be damaged or come loose from its anchorage. This may result in injuries.

▶ Use the grab handles only to stabilise the seating position or to assist in getting in and out of the seat.

To get in and out, you can fold the seats on the second row of seats forwards in vehicles with a third row of seats. In this case, the centre seat folds forwards and backwards together with the left-hand seat in vehicles with a centre seat back-rest.

Requirements

• The area into which the seat is folded is clear.
• The seat has been folded up ( page 41).

• Vehicles with comfort seating: the centre arm-rest is folded up.
• Vehicles with an extended centre console: the stowage compartment in the centre console is closed.
• Vehicles with a centre seat backrest: the centre seat backrest is in an upright position ( page 39).

Diagram of car seat interior with blue directional arrows indicating movement or movement, labeled with number 1

To fold the seat into the front position: briefly pull on button ①.
The head restraint will move downwards. The seat backrest will move into the front position. The seat fore-and-aft adjustment will move forwards until the seat is unlocked. The seat will then tip forwards.
To fold the seat back: press and hold button ① until the rear seat engages audibly. The seat will tilt downwards and stop in the front position. The seat backrest will remain in the cargo position.
To interrupt the folding process, release button ①. To continue the folding procedure, press and hold button ① again.

If a seat on the second row of seats is not engaged, this will be shown on the multifunction display on the instrument cluster.

Set the seat backrest inclination and seat fore-and-aft adjustment using the buttons on the door control panel.
To increase the size of the luggage compartment, you can move the seat backrests into

the luggage compartment floor position ( page 39).

Folding the rear seats forwards mechanically (emergency release)

The release loops are located on the outer sides and rear sides of the seats on the second row of seats.

Line drawing of a car interior showing dashboard and seat area with no text or symbols

Side release loops

Diagram of car interior showing seatbelt and directional arrows with number 1, likely indicating movement or navigation.

Release loops on the rear sides

Pull one of release loops ①.
▶ Fold the seat backrest forwards.
Before commencing your journey, make sure that the seat backrest and the rear bench seat are engaged.

Head restraints

■ Adjusting the front seat head restraints manually

WARNING Risk of injury if vehicle settings are adjusted while the vehicle is in motion

You could lose control of the vehicle in particular in the following situations:

• If you adjust the driver's seat, the head restraints, the steering wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion.
• If you fasten your seat belt while the vehicle is in motion.

Before starting the engine: adjust the driver's seat, head restraints, steering wheel and mirror in particular and fasten your seat belt.

WARNING Risk of injury due to head restraints not being fitted or being adjusted incorrectly

If head restraints have not been installed or have not been adjusted correctly, there is an increased risk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the event of an accident or when braking.

▶ Always drive with the head restraints fitted.
Before driving off, make sure for every vehicle occupant that the centre of the head restraint supports the back of the head at about eye level.

Do not interchange the head restraints of the front and rear seats. Otherwise, you will not be able to adjust the height and angle of the head restraints correctly.

Adjust the head restraint fore-and-aft position so that it is as close as possible to the back of your head.

Diagram showing car seatbelt adjustment with numbered arrows and a magnified inset highlighting the seatbelt component.

To raise: pull the head restraint up.
To lower: press release knob ① in the direction of the arrow and push the head restraint down.
To move forward: press release knob ② and pull the head restraint forward.
To move backwards: press release knob and push the head restraint backwards.

Adjusting the front seat luxury head restraints manually

WARNING Risk of injury if vehicle settings are adjusted while the vehicle is in motion

You could lose control of the vehicle in particular in the following situations:

• If you adjust the driver's seat, the head restraints, the steering wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion.
• If you fasten your seat belt while the vehicle is in motion.
  Before starting the engine: adjust the driver's seat, head restraints, steering wheel and mirror in particular and fasten your seat belt.

WARNING Risk of injury due to incorrectly adjusted head restraints

If head restraints have not been adjusted correctly, there is an increased risk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the event of an accident or sudden braking.

Before driving off, make sure for every vehicle occupant that the centre of the head restraint supports the back of the head at about eye level.

Adjust the head restraint fore-and-aft position so that it is as close as possible to the back of your head.

Interior view of a car showing the seatbelt and dashboard with directional arrows indicating movement (no text or symbols)

To move forward: press release knob ① and pull the head restraint forward.
To move backwards: press release knob and push the head restraint backwards.

Adjusting the head restraints of the rear seats usually

WARNING Risk of injury due to head restraints not being fitted or being adjusted incorrectly

If head restraints have not been installed or have not been adjusted correctly, there is an increased risk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the event of an accident or when braking.

Always drive with the head restraints fitted.
Before driving off, make sure for every vehicle occupant that the centre of the head restraint supports the back of the head at about eye level.

Do not interchange the head restraints of the front and rear seats. Otherwise, you will not be able to adjust the height and angle of the head restraints correctly.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, you can adjust the head restraints in the rear.

Diagram showing car seatbelt adjustment with blue arrows indicating movement and a numbered inset highlighting the key point.

To raise: pull the head restraint up.
To lower: press release knob ① in the direction of the arrow and push the head restraint down.

Vehicles with a third row of seats

The head restraints on the third row of seats have a usage position and a non-usage position. The usage position is the extended, top position in which the head restraint engages; the non-usage

position is the bottom, retracted position of the head restraint. If the seats on the third row of seats are being used, the head restraint must be in the top, engaged usage position.

If the third row of seats is occupied: move the head restraints to the very top and have them engage there.
If the third row of seats is not occupied: move the head restraints to the very bottom.
Fitting/removing the rear seat head restraints

WARNING Risk of injury due to head restraints not being fitted or being adjusted incorrectly

If head restraints have not been installed or have not been adjusted correctly, there is an increased risk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the event of an accident or when braking.

▶ Always drive with the head restraints fitted.
Before driving off, make sure for every vehicle occupant that the centre of the

head restraint supports the back of the head at about eye level.

Do not interchange the head restraints of the front and rear seats. Otherwise, you will not be able to adjust the height and angle of the head restraints correctly.

Removing

Depending on the vehicle equipment, you can remove the head restraints in the rear.

Diagram showing car seatbelt adjustment with blue arrows indicating movement and a numbered inset highlighting the key point.

Release the rear seat backrest and fold it forwards slightly ( page 39).
Pull the head restraint upwards as far as it will go.
Push release knob ① in the direction of the arrow and pull out the head restraint.

Installing

Diagram showing car seatbelt adjustment with blue arrows indicating movement and a numbered inset highlighting the component '①'

Insert the head restraint such that the notches on the bar are on the left when viewed in the direction of travel.
▶ Push the head restraint down until it engages.
Fold the rear seat backrest back until it engages.

Adjusting the luxury head restraints of the rear seats mechanically

WARNING Risk of injury due to incorrectly adjusted head restraints

If head restraints have not been adjusted correctly, there is an increased risk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the event of an accident or sudden braking.

Before driving off, make sure for every vehicle occupant that the centre of the head restraint supports the back of the head at about eye level.

Do not interchange the head restraints of the front and rear seats. Otherwise, you will not be able to adjust the height and angle of the head restraints correctly.

Adjust the head restraint fore-and-aft position so that it is as close as possible to the back of your head.

Diagram showing car door keyway with numbered arrows indicating clockwise motion and directional flow

Head restraint of the standard vehicle (example)

To adjust the side bolsters of the head restraint: pull or push right or left side bolster 1.
To adjust the angle of the head restraint: pull or push the head restraint in the direction of arrow ②.

Configuring the seat settings

Multimedia system:

→ ▶ Comfort ▶ Seat

Adjusting the air cushions

In the corresponding menu, adjust the air cushions for Lumbar or Side bolsters.

Setting the seat heating balance

Select Heating settings.
▶ Select Seat heating balance.
Adjust the heat distribution for the desired seat.

Setting automatic seat adjustment

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped during adjustment of the driver's seat after calling up a driver profile

Selecting a user profile may trigger an adjustment of the driver's seat to the position saved under the user profile. You or other vehicle occupants could be injured in the process.

Make sure that when the position of driver's seat is being adjusted using the multimedia system, no people or body parts are in the seat's range of movement.
If there is a risk of someone becoming trapped, immediately stop the adjustment process by:
a) Pressing the warning message on the central display.
or
b) Pressing a position button of the memory function or a seat adjustment switch in the driver's door. The adjustment process is stopped.

Multimedia system:

→ ▶ Comfort ▶ Seat
▶ Position seat automatically

Manually adjusting driver's seat and steering wheel position to body size

The vehicle calculates a suitable driver's seat and steering wheel position on the basis of the driver's body size and sets this directly.

To set the unit of measurement: select cm or ft/in.
Set the size using the scale.
Select Start positioning. The driver's seat and steering wheel position is adjusted to the body size that has been set.
You can also configure these settings via the Mercedes me user account for your user profile. By synchronising the profiles in the vehicle and the Mercedes me connect profiles, you can carry over these settings for your vehicle. Further information about synchronising user profiles ( page 482).
If the driver's seat and steering wheel position calculated by the vehicle is not practical or comfortable, it can be manually adapted at any time via the control buttons. The outside mirrors are not set via this function. Instead, they have to be set manually via the operating switches.

Selecting a massage programme for the front seats

Multimedia system:

→ Comfort >> Massage

Select a massage programme.
Start the programme for the desired seat ▶.
To set the massage intensity: switch High intensity on or off.
To stop the massage: select □.
The availability of this function is dependent on the vehicle's equipment.

Resetting seat settings

Multimedia system:

→ ▶ Comfort ▶ Seat
Select Reset.
Select 📊 for the desired seat. The settings for the selected seat are reset.

Switching the seat heating on/off

WARNING Risk of burns due to repeatedly switching on the seat heating

Repeatedly switching on the seat heating can cause the seat cushion and seat backrest padding to become very hot.

In particular, the health of persons with limited temperature sensitivity or a limited ability to react to high temperatures may be affected or they may even suffer burn-like injuries.

Do not repeatedly switch on the seat heating.

To protect against overheating, the seat heating may be temporarily deactivated after it has been switched on repeatedly.

NOTE Damage to the seats caused by objects or documents when the seat heater is switched on

When the seat heater is switched on, overheating may occur due to objects or docu-

ments placed on the seats e.g. seat cushions or child seats. This could cause damage to the seat surface.

Make sure that no objects or documents are on the seats when the seat heater is switched on.

Requirements

• The power supply is switched on.

Diagram showing car interior with a highlighted seatbelt icon and numbered label '1'

Seat heating in the cockpit Seat heating in the rear

Diagram of a car interior with a hand cursor icon pointing to the door panel, labeled with number 1 in the top right corner.

Press button ① repeatedly until the desired heating level is set. Depending on the heating level, up to three indicator lamps will light up. If all indicator lamps are off, the seat heating is switched off.

The seat heating will automatically switch down from the three heating levels after 8, 10 and 20 minutes until the seat heating is switched off.

Setting the panel heating

Multimedia system:

Comfort

Seat

Heating settings

Panel heating

When the seat heating is switched on, the armrests, the centre panels of the doors and the centre console can be heated.

Tap on Additional panel heating. The Panel heating will be linked to the seat heating.

Switching the seat ventilation on/off

Requirements:

• The power supply is switched on.

Diagram showing car interior with seatbelt, seatbelt switch, and a device labeled '1' pointing to the screen.

Seat ventilation in the cockpit

Press button ① repeatedly until the desired ventilation level is set. Depending on the ventilation level, up to three indicator lamps will light up. If all indicator lamps are off, the seat ventilation is switched off.

Steering wheel

Adjusting the steering wheel manually

WARNING Risk of accident due to adjusting the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in motion

You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular:

- if you adjust the driver's seat, the head restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion - if you fasten your seat belt while the vehicle is in motion

Before starting the vehicle: in particular, adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror, and fasten your seat belt.

WARNING Risk of entrapment for children when adjusting the steering wheel

Children could injure themselves if they adjust the steering wheel.

▶ Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle.

Unlocking

Diagram illustrating car steering wheel and steering wheel assembly with numbered steps for clockwise motion

Fold release lever ① down as far as it will go.

Adjust height ② and distance ③ to the steering wheel.

Locking

Diagram illustrating car steering wheel and steering wheel assembly with numbered steps and directional arrows indicating motion.

Fold release lever ① up as far as it will go.
Check and make sure that the steering column is locked by moving the steering wheel.

Adjusting the steering wheel electrically

A WARNING Risk of accident due to adjusting the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in motion

You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular:

• if you adjust the driver's seat, the head restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion
• if you fasten your seat belt while the vehicle is in motion

Before starting the vehicle: in particular, adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror, and fasten your seat belt.

WARNING Risk of entrapment for children when adjusting the steering wheel

Children could injure themselves if they adjust the steering wheel.

▶ Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle.

The steering wheel can be adjusted when the vehicle is switched off.

Diagram of a car interior showing steering wheel, dashboard, and control panel with numbered labels pointing to the dashboard.

To adjust the distance to the steering wheel
② To adjust the height
Save the settings with the memory function ( page 197).

Switching the steering wheel heater on/off

Depending on the vehicle version, the steering wheel heater can be switched on and off via a switch on the steering wheel.

Requirements

• The vehicle is switched on.

Diagram showing car interior with steering wheel, dashboard, and three directional arrows labeled 1, 2, and 3 indicating movement or control points.

To switch on: push the switch into position
Indicator lamp ③ will light up.
To switch off: push the switch into position
Indicator lamp ③ will go out.

When you switch the ignition off, the steering wheel heater will switch off.

Decoupling the steering wheel heater from the seat heating

Requirements

• The power supply or the vehicle has been switched on.
• The steering wheel heater and the seat heating are linked.

Multimedia system:

Comfort Seat

Heating settings

The function is active by default and the steering wheel heater is automatically activated and deac-

tivated when the seat heating is switched on and off.

Tap on Additional steering wheel heater. The steering wheel heater will be decoupled from the seat heating.

Easy entry and exit feature

Using the easy entry and exit feature

A WARNING Risk of accident when pulling away during the adjustment process of the easy entry and exit feature

You could lose control of the vehicle.

Always wait until the adjustment process is complete before driving off.

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when adjusting the easy entry and exit feature

You and other vehicle occupants, particularly children, may become trapped.

Make sure that no one has any part of their body within the range of movement of the steering wheel and driver's seat.

If there is a risk of becoming trapped by the steering wheel:

Move the steering wheel adjustment lever. The adjustment process is stopped.

If there is a risk of becoming trapped by the driver's seat:

Press the switch for seat adjustment. The adjustment process is stopped.

▶ Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle.

Vehicles with memory function: you can stop the adjustment process by pressing one of the memory function position switches.

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if children activate the easy entry and exit feature

Children could become trapped if they activate the easy entry and exit feature, particularly when unattended.

▶ Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle.

If the easy entry and exit feature is active, the steering wheel will move upwards and the driver's seat will move back in the following situations:

• You switch off the vehicle when the driver's door is open.
• You open the driver's door when the vehicle is switched off.

The steering wheel will then move upwards only if it is not already as high as it will go. The driver's seat will then move backwards only if it is not already at the rear of the seat adjustment range.

The driver's seat backrest will then move forwards only if it is not already in the frontmost position.

The steering wheel and the driver's seat will move back to the last driving position in the following cases:

• You switch the power supply or the vehicle on when the driver's door is closed.
• You close the driver's door when the vehicle is switched on.

The last drive position will be saved when:

• You switch off the vehicle.
• Vehicles with memory function: you call up the seat settings via the memory function.
• Vehicles with memory function: you save the seat settings via the memory function.

Vehicles with memory function: press one of the memory function position switches to stop the adjustment process.

Setting the easy entry and exit feature

Requirements

- The automatic seat adjustment has been activated (→ page 189).

Multimedia system:

→ Settings → Vehicle Easy entry and exit feature

Select Steering wheel and seat, Steering wheel only or Off.

If you are using an individual user profile, this information is used for the easy entry and exit feature. This will cause the driver's seat and steering wheel to move into the correct position automatically ( page 479).

Memory function

Function of the memory function

WARNING Risk of an accident if the memory function is used while driving

If you use the memory function on the driver's side while driving, you could lose control of the vehicle as a result of the adjustments being made.

Only use the memory function on the driver's side when the vehicle is stationary.

WARNING Risk of entrapment when adjusting the seat with the memory function

When the memory function adjusts the seat, you and other vehicle occupants – particularly children – could become trapped.

During the adjustment process of the memory function, make sure that no one

has any body parts in the sweep of the seat.

If someone becomes trapped, press a preset position button or seat adjustment switch immediately.

WARNING Danger of entrapment when memory function is activated by children

When children activate the memory function, they can get trapped, especially if they are unsupervised.

▶ Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle.

You can use the memory function when the ignition is switched off.

Seat adjustments for up to three people can be stored and called up using the memory function.

You can save settings for the following systems:

• Front seat

• Outside mirrors

• Head-up display

• Steering column
• Seat contour

Operating the memory function

WARNING Risk of an accident if the memory function is used while driving

If you use the memory function on the driver's side while driving, you could lose control of the vehicle as a result of the adjustments being made.

Only use the memory function on the driver's side when the vehicle is stationary.

WARNING Risk of entrapment when adjusting the seat with the memory function

When the memory function adjusts the seat, you and other vehicle occupants – particularly children – could become trapped.

During the adjustment process of the memory function, make sure that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the seat.
If someone becomes trapped, press a preset position button or seat adjustment switch immediately.

WARNING Danger of entrapment when memory function is activated by children

When children activate the memory function, they can get trapped, especially if they are unsupervised.

▶ Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle.

You can use the memory function when the vehicle is switched off.

Storing

M 1 2 3

Set the desired position for all systems.
Press the M memory button and then press the memory position button 1, 2 or 3 within three seconds. An acoustic signal sounds. The settings are stored.

To call up: press or briefly hold preset position button 1, 2 or 3. After releasing the button, all systems are moved into the stored position.

Stowage areas

Notes on loading the vehicle

DANGER Risk of poisoning from exhaust gases

Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases, such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the tailgate is open when the engine is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion.

Always switch off the engine before opening the tailgate.
▶ Never drive with the tailgate open.

Objects in the deployment area of an airbag may prevent the airbag from functioning correctly. Observe the notes on protection provided by the airbag.

WARNING Risk of injury from unsecured items in the vehicle

If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip over or be thrown around and thereby hit vehicle occupants.

There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction.

Always stow objects in such a way that they cannot be thrown around.
Before the journey, secure objects, luggage or loads against slipping or tipping over.

WARNING Risk of injury due to objects being stowed incorrectly

If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addition, cup holders, open stowage spaces and mobile phone brackets cannot always retain all objects they contain.

There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of braking manoeuvres or abrupt changes in direction.

Always stow objects so that they cannot be thrown around in such situations.
▶ Always make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage spaces, luggage nets or stowage nets.
▶ Close the lockable stowage spaces before starting a journey.
Stow and secure objects that are heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or too large in the load compartment.

A WARNING Risk of accident from objects in the driver's footwell and front-passenger footwell

Objects in the driver's footwell and front-passenger footwell may impede pedal travel or block a depressed pedal.

This jeopardises the operating and road safety of the vehicle.

Stow all objects in the vehicle securely so that they cannot get into the driver's footwell or front-passenger footwell.
Always fit the floor mats securely and as prescribed in order to ensure that there is always sufficient clearance for the pedals.
Do not use loose floor mats and do not lay multiple floor mats on top of one another.

Vehicles with automatic front-passenger airbag shutoff: objects trapped under the front-passenger seat may interfere with the function of the automatic front-passenger airbag shutoff or damage the system. Please observe the notes on the function of the automatic front-passenger airbag shutoff ( page 113).

WARNING Risk of burns from the tailpipe and tailpipe trims

The exhaust tailpipe and tailpipe trims can become very hot. If you come into contact

with these parts of the vehicle, you could burn yourself.

Always be particularly careful around the tailpipe and the tailpipe trims and supervise children especially closely in this area.
Allow vehicle parts to cool down before touching them.

Leather is a natural product. It exhibits natural surface properties such as differences in structure, marks caused by growth and injury or subtle colour differences. These surface properties are characteristics of leather and not material faults. Leather is also subject to a natural ageing process during which the surface properties change.

The handling characteristics of your vehicle are dependent on the distribution of the load within the vehicle. You should bear the following in mind when loading the vehicle:

- Do not exceed the permissible total mass or the permissible axle loads of the vehicle (including load and occupants).

information can be found on the vehicle identification plate ( page 784).

• The load must not protrude above the upper edge of the seat backrests.
• Always use the partition net when transporting objects in the load compartment.
  • Always place the load behind unoccupied seats if possible.
• Secure the load using the lashing eyelets and distribute the load evenly.

Notes on driving with a roof load

• Distribute the roof load and the load inside the vehicle evenly, placing heavy objects at the bottom. Also comply with the notes on loading the vehicle.
• Drive attentively, and avoid abrupt starts, braking and steering as well as rapid cornering.
• When transporting roof loads and when the vehicle is fully loaded or fully occupied, select drive programs E and C. These are designed to focus on stability ( page 292).

For more information on stowage compartments and stowage areas, please refer to the Digital Operator's Manual.

Stowage spaces in the vehicle interior

Overview of the front stowage compartments

WARNING Risk of injury due to objects being stowed incorrectly

If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addition, cup holders, open stowage spaces and mobile phone receptacles cannot always retain all objects within.

There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction.

Always stow objects so that they cannot be thrown around in such situations.

Always make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage spaces, luggage nets or stowage nets.
▶ Close the lockable stowage spaces before starting a journey.
Always stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects in the boot/load compartment.

Observe the notes on loading the vehicle.

Diagram of car interior with numbered compartments and dashboard controls

① Stowage spaces in the doors
2 Stowage compartment in the armrest with USB ports (depending on vehicle equipment)

3 Stowage/telephone compartment with cup holder in the front centre console
4 Glove compartment
Locking/unlocking the glove compartment

WARNING Risk of injury due to objects being stowed incorrectly

If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addition, cup holders, open stowage spaces and mobile phone receptacles cannot always retain all objects within.

There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction.

Always stow objects so that they cannot be thrown around in such situations.
Always make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage spaces, luggage nets or stowage nets.

▶ Close the lockable stowage spaces before starting a journey.
Always stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects in the boot/load compartment.

Observe the notes on loading the vehicle.

Diagram of a car interior with labeled control panel and directional arrows indicating movement or flow

Turn the emergency key a quarter turn clockwise 2 (to lock) or anti-clockwise 1 (to unlock).

Using the stowage compartment and MBUX rear tablet in the rear armrest

WARNING Risk of injury due to objects being stowed incorrectly

If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addition, cup holders, open stowage spaces and mobile phone brackets cannot always retain all objects they contain.

There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction.

Always stow objects in such a way that they cannot be thrown around in such situations.
Always make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage spaces, luggage nets or stowage nets.

▶ Close the lockable stowage spaces before starting a journey.
▶ Always stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects in the boot.

WARNING - Risk of accident or injury when using the cup holder while the vehicle is in motion

The cup holder cannot hold a container secure while the vehicle is in motion.

If you use a cup holder while the vehicle is in motion, the container may be flung around and liquids could be spilled. The vehicle occupants may come into contact with the liquid and if it is hot, they could be scalded. You could be distracted from traffic conditions and you may lose control of the vehicle.

▶ Only use the cup holder when the vehicle is stationary.
Only use the cup holder for containers of the right size.

Always close the container, particularly if the liquid is hot.

Observe the notes on loading the vehicle.

NOTE Damage to the rear armrest due to body weight

When folded out, the rear armrest can be damaged by body weight.

Do not sit or support yourself on the rear seat armrest.

In vehicles with a folding rear seat armrest, this can be folded down to allow the stowage compartments to be used. The available rear armrests and stowage compartments vary depending on the vehicle equipment.

Interior view of a car showing seatbelt and side panel with directional arrows (no text or symbols)

Pull handle ① and fold down the rear arm-rest.

Line drawing of a car interior showing seatbelt and seatbelt with a numbered marker (no text or symbols)

Depending on the vehicle equipment, use the MBUX rear tablet ② (→ page 606).

Through-loading facility to luggage compartment

Folding the rear seat backrest forwards

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when adjusting the seats

When you adjust a seat, you may trap yourself or a vehicle occupant.

When adjusting a seat, make sure that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the seat.

WARNING Risk of accident if the seat and seat backrest are not engaged

The seat and seat backrest can fold forwards. There is a risk of the following, in particular:

- The vehicle occupant may be pressed against the seat belt. The seat belt cannot protect as intended and could cause additional injury.

• A child restraint system will no longer be properly supported or positioned and will no longer fulfil its function as intended.
• The seat backrest will not be able to restrain objects or goods in the load compartment.

Always ensure that the seat and seat backrest are engaged, in particular:

• Before persons travel in the vehicle while sitting on a seat with the easy entry and exit feature
  • After the seat has been adjusted.
  • After the easy entry and exit feature has been used
  • After the load compartment enlargement has been folded forwards

Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have their seat belts fastened correctly and are sitting properly. Particular attention must be paid to children.

If you no longer require the folded-down rear seat backrest as a load area, fold the backrest back into place.

Make sure that the red marking of the lock verification indicator is no longer visible. Otherwise, the seat backrest is not locked.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, a message will be displayed on the instrument cluster instead of the red lock verification indicator.

Folding the rear seats forwards mechanically Depending on the vehicle equipment, you can fold the outer seat backrests forwards mechanically.

Interior view of a car showing a rear seat with a highlighted seatbelt (no text or symbols)

Move the driver's or front passenger seat forwards, if necessary.
To fold the left and right seat backrests forwards: if necessary, insert the head restraints for the seat backrests ( page 186).
Pull release lever 1.
Fold the corresponding seat backrest forwards.

Diagram showing car seatbelt insertion steps with numbered labels indicating key states of the seatbelt.

Fold the rear seat armrest back if necessary.
To fold the centre seat backrest forwards: press release catch ③.
Fold seat backrest ② forwards.

Observe the following recommendations:

• If you wish to fold only one of the outer seat backrests forwards, it is recommended that you fold the right seat backrest forwards.
• If you wish to fold one of the outer seat backrests forwards together with the centre seat backrest, it is recommended that you fold the left and centre seat backrests forwards.

Folding the rear seats forwards electrically If a seat in the second row of seats is not engaged and locked, this will be shown on the multifunction display on the instrument cluster.

Ensure that the centre seat backrest is in an upright position.

F167 0009 02

Diagram of car interior showing dashboard and seatbelt with labeled buttons and a numbered inset view

To fold the left or right seat backrest forwards: briefly press one of buttons ①. The head restraint in the rear will move into a suitable position. The rear seat will fold forwards. The centre seat backrest will fold forwards together with the left seat backrest.

Observe the following recommendations:

• If you wish to fold only one of the outer seat backrests forwards, it is recommended that you fold the right seat backrest forwards.
• If you wish to fold one of the outer seat backrests forwards together with the centre seat backrest, it is recommended that you fold the left and centre seat backrests forwards.

Folding back the rear seat backrest

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when adjusting the seats

When you adjust a seat, you may trap yourself or a vehicle occupant.

When adjusting a seat, make sure that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the seat.

WARNING Risk of accident if the rear bench seat, rear seat and seat backrest are not engaged

The rear bench seat, rear seat and seat back-rest may fold forwards, even while the vehicle is in motion.

• As a result, the vehicle occupant will be pressed into the seat belt with increased force. The seat belt will not be able to protect as intended and could cause additional injury.
• Objects or loads in the boot or load compartment cannot be restrained by the seat backrest.
  Make sure that the rear bench seat, the rear seat and the seat backrest are engaged before every trip.

! NOTE Damage caused by trapping the seat belt when folding back the seat back-rest

The seat belt could become trapped and thus be damaged when the seat backrest is folded back.

Make sure that the seat belt is not trapped when folding back the seat backrest.

Folding back the rear seat mechanically

Diagram showing car interior with directional arrows and numbered label '1' indicating a specific position or component.

Move the driver's or front passenger seat forwards, if necessary.
Swivel seat backrest ① back until it engages.

Make sure that the red marking of the lock verification indicator is no longer visible. Otherwise, the seat backrest is not locked.

Folding back the rear seat electrically

Interior view of a car showing the dashboard and seat area with a control panel (no text or symbols visible)

Left or right seat backrest: briefly pull one of buttons ①. The rear seat will fold back. The centre seat backrest will fold back together with the left-hand seat backrest. If a seat backrest is not engaged and locked, this will be shown on the multifunction display on the instrument cluster.
Folding the seat backrest on the third row of seats forwards

⚠ WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when adjusting the seats

When you adjust a seat, you may trap yourself or a vehicle occupant.

When adjusting a seat, make sure that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the seat.

WARNING Risk of accident if the seat and seat backrest are not engaged

The seat and seat backrest can fold forwards.

There is a risk of the following, in particular:

• The vehicle occupant may be pressed against the seat belt. The seat belt cannot protect as intended and could cause additional injury.
• A child restraint system will no longer be properly supported or positioned and will no longer fulfil its function as intended.
• The seat backrest will not be able to restrain objects or goods in the load compartment.

Always ensure that the seat and seat backrest are engaged, in particular:

• Before persons travel in the vehicle while sitting on a seat with the easy entry and exit feature
  • After the seat has been adjusted.
  • After the easy entry and exit feature has been used
  • After the load compartment enlargement has been folded forwards

Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have their seat belts fastened correctly and are sitting properly. Particular attention must be paid to children.

If you no longer require the folded-down seat backrest as a loading area, fold the backrest back into place.

Always make sure that the red marking of the lock verification indicator is no longer visible. Otherwise, the seat backrest is not locked.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, a message will be displayed on the instrument cluster instead of the red lock verification indicator.

Requirements:

- The seats and the seat backrests on the second row of seats have been moved forwards sufficiently.

Interior view of a car showing two rear seats with seatbelt covers, no visible text or symbols

Pull release catch ① for the seat backrest forwards.
▶ Fold the seat backrest forwards.
Folding back the seat backrest on the third row of seats

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when adjusting the seats

When you adjust a seat, you may trap yourself or a vehicle occupant.

When adjusting a seat, make sure that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the seat.

WARNING Risk of accident if the rear bench seat, rear seat and seat backrest are not engaged

The rear bench seat, rear seat and seat back-rest may fold forwards, even while the vehicle is in motion.

• As a result, the vehicle occupant will be pressed into the seat belt with increased force. The seat belt will not be able to protect as intended and could cause additional injury.
• Objects or loads in the boot or load compartment cannot be restrained by the seat backrest.
  Make sure that the rear bench seat, the rear seat and the seat backrest are engaged before every trip.

NOTE Damage caused by trapping the seat belt when folding back the seat back-rest

The seat belt could become trapped and thus be damaged when the seat backrest is folded back.

Make sure that the seat belt is not trapped when folding back the seat backrest.

Requirements:

• The seats and the seat backrests on the second row of seats have been moved forwards sufficiently.
  Swing the seat backrest back until it audibly engages.

EASY-PACK load compartment cover and partitioning net cassette

es on the load compartment cover

WARNING Risk of injury or death due to poorly secured objects

The load compartment cover alone cannot secure or restrain heavy objects, items of luggage or heavy loads.

You could be hit by an unsecured load, particularly in the event of abrupt changes in direction, sudden braking or an accident.

Always stow objects in such a way that they cannot be thrown around.
▶ Secure objects, luggage or loads against slipping or tipping over, e.g. by using lashing material, even if you are using the load compartment cover.

NOTE Damage to the load compartment cover when loading the vehicle

The load compartment cover may be damaged when the vehicle is being loaded.

Do not place any objects above the lower edge of the side windows or on the load compartment cover.

■ Extending/retracting the load compartment cover

WARNING Risk of injury or death due to poorly secured objects

The load compartment cover alone cannot secure or restrain heavy objects, items of luggage or heavy loads.

You could be hit by an unsecured load, particularly in the event of abrupt changes in direction, sudden braking or an accident.

Always stow objects in such a way that they cannot be thrown around.
▶ Secure objects, luggage or loads against slipping or tipping over, e.g. by using lashing material, even if you are using the load compartment cover.

NOTE Damage to the load compartment cover when loading the vehicle
The load compartment cover may be damaged when the vehicle is being loaded.
Do not place any objects above the lower edge of the side windows or on the load compartment cover.

Extending

Diagram of car interior showing labeled parts and a blue arrow indicating direction, with numbered annotations.

Pull the load compartment cover back by grab handle ① and hook it into brackets ② on the left and right.

Retracting

Diagram of car interior showing labeled parts with numbered annotations and directional arrows

Remove the load compartment cover from the brackets on the left and right.
Guide the load compartment cover forwards using grab handle ① until it is fully retracted.

The rolled-up load compartment cover can be used in two positions:

• Folded 45^ upwards for loading (fold down before commencing your journey)
• Horizontal position

Fitting/removing the load compartment cover

Requirements

• The load compartment cover is rolled up.

Removing the load compartment cover

Interior view of a car showing rearview and side profile with a numbered directional arrow (no text or symbols)

Press end cap ① on the left or right inwards.
Pull out the load compartment cover backwards.

Stowing the load compartment cover

Depending on the vehicle variant, the load compartment cover can be stowed under the load compartment floor.

Diagram of a car interior showing labeled parts with numbered annotations

Open the load compartment floor ( page 43).
To insert: place the load compartment cover in mountings ①, first on the left and then the right. Comply with the instructions on the vehicle to ensure it is seated correctly.
To remove: push the load compartment cover slightly to the left using grab handle ②.
Remove the load compartment cover from mountings ①, first on the right and then on the left.

Installing the load compartment cover

Depending on the vehicle variant, the load compartment cover can be stowed under the load compartment floor.

Line drawing of a car backrest with a highlighted rectangular panel and a magnified inset showing a hand holding the dashboard (no text or symbols)

Insert the load compartment cover in mountings ① on the left and right.
The end caps of the load compartment cover will engage audibly.

Fitting/removing the partitioning net cassette

Requirements:

• The partitioning net has been rolled up.

Removing

Diagram showing a car trunk with a highlighted internal component and an upward arrow indicating motion or force, labeled with number 1.

Press button Ⓤ on the left or right.
Remove the partitioning net cassette by lifting it upwards.

Installing

Diagram of car rearview showing internal components with labeled parts and a blue arrow indicating a location or operation.

With tab ① facing backwards, push the partitioning net cassette into brackets ②. The partitioning net cassette will engage.

Line drawing of a car trunk with a cargo box and labeled part (3), no text or symbols present

Ensure that red lock verification indicators on the left and right are no longer visible. Otherwise, the partitioning net cassette will not be locked.

Attaching the partitioning net

WARNING Risk of injury or death due to poorly secured objects

The partitioning net alone cannot secure or restrain heavy objects, items of luggage or heavy loads.

You could be hit by an unsecured load, particularly in the event of abrupt changes in direction, sudden braking or an accident.

Always stow objects in such a way that they cannot be thrown around.
▶ Secure objects, luggage or loads against slipping or tipping over, e.g. by using lashing material, even if you are using the partitioning net.

For safety reasons, always use a partitioning net when transporting a load.

Damaged partitioning nets can no longer fulfil their protective functions and must be replaced. Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Diagram showing car rearview structure with numbered components and a magnified inset highlighting the interior panel.

Guide the partition net upwards using tab 1.
Hook the partition net into holders ② on the left and right.

Attaching/removing the partitioning net

WARNING Risk of injury or death due to poorly secured objects

The partitioning net alone cannot secure or restrain heavy objects, items of luggage or heavy loads.

You could be hit by an unsecured load, particularly in the event of abrupt changes in direction, sudden braking or an accident.

Always stow objects in such a way that they cannot be thrown around.
▶ Secure objects, luggage or loads against slipping or tipping over, e.g. by using lashing material, even if you are using the partitioning net.

For safety reasons, always use a partitioning net when transporting a load.

Damaged partitioning nets can no longer fulfil their functions and must be replaced. Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Diagram of car interior and seatbelt assembly with numbered parts for safety inspection

Partitioning net without load compartment enlargement

Diagram showing car seatbelt insertion mechanism with labeled parts 1, 2, and 3

Partitioning net with load compartment enlargement

Diagram showing car seatbelt buckle assembly with numbered parts and a close-up of the seatbelt component.

Partitioning net in the rear position

Diagram showing car seatbelt buckle assembly with numbered parts for each step

Partitioning net in the front position

Diagram showing car seatbelt buckle assembly with labeled parts and instructions in Chinese

Partitioning net in the rear position

To attach: extend and unfold the partitioning net.
Attach the upper hooks of the partitioning net to holders ① on the roof lining.
Attach lower hooks ② in eyelets ③ on the left and right.

Pull on the loose ends of the lashing straps until the partitioning net is tight.
After driving a short distance, check the tension of the partitioning net and re-tension it if necessary.
To remove: pull the belt clamps until the lashing straps are loose.
Remove lower hooks ② from eyelets ③ on the left and right.
Detach upper hooks from holders ①.

Overview of the tie-down eyes in the load compartment

Observe the notes on loading the vehicle ( page 198).

Diagram of car interior with labeled ear and ear anatomy, showing anatomical parts and a magnified inset of the ear structure.

① Tie-down eyes

Overview of bag hooks

WARNING Risk of injury when using bag hooks with heavy objects

The bag hooks cannot restrain heavy objects or items of luggage.

Objects or items of luggage may be flung around and hit vehicle occupants.

▶ Only hang light objects on the bag hooks.
▶ Never hang hard, sharp-edged or fragile objects on the bag hooks.

Observe the notes on loading the vehicle ( page 198).

Subject the bag hooks to a maximum load of 3 kg and do not attach any goods to them.

Line drawing of a car trunk with open lid and internal compartments, showing no text or symbols

Bag hook

Coat hook on the tailgate

Top-down line drawing of a car showing the hood and vent, with no text or symbols present.

① Coat hook on the tailgate

Coat hooks are not suitable for heavy objects. Use the coat hooks only for light objects such as jackets.

EASY-PACK load-securing kit

Notes on the snap-in module for the load compartment (telescopic rods)

The EASY-PACK load-securing kit allows you to use your load compartment for a variety of purposes. The components are located in the stowage space under the load compartment floor.

Technical line drawing of a car rearview door with a numbered component (no text or symbols)

① Telescopic rod with mounting elements and holders

Installing a telescopic rod

WARNING Risk of injury due to an open load compartment floor

If you drive with the load compartment floor open, objects could be flung around and hit vehicle occupants as a result. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction.

Always close the load compartment floor before a journey.

Top-down view of a car interior showing the rear bumper and side panel with a labeled device (no text or symbols present)

Open the load compartment floor ( page 43).
Attach the holders ⓘ in the desired position to the side of the load compartment floor.
Close the load compartment floor.

Diagram of car interior showing seatbelt components with numbered labels and directional arrows indicating movement or force.

Turn the mounting elements ② to □.
Insert the mounting elements ② into the holders ①.
Extend the telescopic rod ③.
Insert the telescopic rod ③ into the mounting elements ②.
Turn both mounting elements ② to □ until you feel them engage.

Opening or closing the stowage space under the load compartment floor

WARNING Risk of injury due to an open load compartment floor

If you drive with the load compartment floor open, objects could be flung around and hit vehicle occupants as a result. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction.

Always close the load compartment floor before a journey.

Opening

Diagram of a car interior with labeled parts, showing front and rear views with numbered annotations.

Vehicles with a second row of seats

Line drawing of a car interior showing the rearview and side seats (no text or symbols)

Vehicles with a third row of seats

Pull handle 1 upwards.
Lift the load compartment floor up using handle ①.
Fold out the hook on the underside of the load compartment floor.
Clip hook onto drip rail ②.

Vehicles with a third row of seats

Pull handle ① upwards.
Lift the load compartment floor up using handle ①.

Closing

Unhook the hook from drip rail ② and fasten it to the holder on the underside of the load compartment floor.
Fold the load compartment floor down and then press handle ① down until it engages.

Vehicles with a third row of seats

Fold the load compartment floor down and then press handle ① down until it engages.

Locking and unlocking the load compartment floor

Diagram showing a car interior with labeled parts and a zoomed-in inset highlighting a key component.

Turn the emergency key a quarter turn clockwise 2 (to lock) or anti-clockwise 1 (to unlock).

Attaching a roof luggage rack

WARNING Risk of accident due to exceeding the maximum roof load

The vehicle centre of gravity and the usual driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking characteristics alter.

If you exceed the maximum roof load, the driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, will be greatly impaired.

▶ Never exceed the maximum roof load and adjust your driving style.

You will find information on the maximum roof load in the "Technical data" section in the printed Owner's Manual.

NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to not observing the maximum permitted headroom clearance

If the vehicle height is greater than the maximum permitted headroom clearance, the roof and other parts of the vehicle may be damaged.

Observe the signposted headroom clearance.

If the vehicle height is greater than the permitted headroom clearance, do not enter.

Observe the changed vehicle height with add-on roof equipment.

NOTE Damage to the panorama sliding sunroof due to non-approved roof luggage racks

The panorama sliding sunroof may be damaged by the roof luggage rack if you attempt to open it when using a roof luggage rack not tested and approved for Mercedes-Benz.

When a roof luggage rack is fitted, open the panorama sliding sunroof only if this has been tested and approved for Mercedes-Benz.

The panorama sliding sunroof may be raised to allow ventilation of the vehicle interior.

▶ Secure the roof rack to the roof railing.

Observe the manufacturer's installation instructions.

Cup holders

Using cup holders

WARNING - Risk of accident or injury when using the cup holder while the vehicle is in motion

The cup holder cannot hold a container secure while the vehicle is in motion.

If you use a cup holder while the vehicle is in motion, the container may be flung around and liquids could be spilled. The vehicle occupants may come into contact with the liquid and if it is hot, they could be scalded. You could be distracted from traffic conditions and you may lose control of the vehicle.

Only use the cup holder when the vehicle is stationary.
Only use the cup holder for containers of the right size.

Always close the container, particularly if the liquid is hot.

Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the following cup holders will be available:

• In the front stowage compartment of the centre console
• In the rear centre console
• In the rear armrest on the second row of seats
- Between the seats on the third row of seats

Diagram showing car interior with labeled parts, including a highlighted component and numbered annotations.

Vehicles without a temperature-controlled cup holder: the bracket arms of the front cup holder can be folded in or out.

To fold the bracket arm in: push bracket arm ① outwards to the side until it engages. When the bracket arm is folded in, the cup holder cannot fulfil its holding function.

To fold the bracket arm out: press release button 2.

Opening or closing the cup holders in the rear armrest

WARNING - Risk of accident or injury when using the cup holder while the vehicle is in motion

The cup holder cannot hold a container secure while the vehicle is in motion.

If you use a cup holder while the vehicle is in motion, the container may be flung around and liquids could be spilled. The vehicle occupants may come into contact with the liquid and if it is hot, they could be scalded. You could be distracted from traffic conditions and you may lose control of the vehicle.

Only use the cup holder when the vehicle is stationary.
Only use the cup holder for containers of the right size.
Always close the container, particularly if the liquid is hot.

NOTE Damage to the rear armrest due to body weight

When folded out, the rear armrest can be damaged by body weight.

Do not sit or support yourself on the rear seat armrest.

NOTE Damage to the cup holder

The cup holder can be damaged when folding back the rear seat armrest. When open, the cup holder can be damaged by body weight.

The rear seat armrest can only be folded back when the cup holder is closed.
Do not sit or support yourself on the cup holder when it is open.

Depending on the equipment, the shape of the rear armrest and cup holders may differ.
Depending on its equipment, your vehicle will have a rear armrest with a cup holder.

Diagram of car seatbelt with numbered labels pointing to specific seats

To open: press cup holder ① or ②. Cup holder ① or ② will extend automatically.
To close: push cup holder ① or ② back until it engages.

Switching the cooling or heating function for the temperature-controlled cup holder on or off

WARNING Risk of injury by touching the heating elements

The cup holder's heating elements may be very hot.

You can burn yourself on them.

Do not touch the cup holder's hot heating elements.
Ensure that no children can access the cup holder's hot heating elements.
▶ Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

WARNING - Risk of accident or injury when using the cup holder while the vehicle is in motion

The cup holder cannot hold a container secure while the vehicle is in motion.

If you use a cup holder while the vehicle is in motion, the container may be flung around and liquids could be spilled. The vehicle occupants may come into contact with the liquid and if it is hot, they could be scalded. You could be distracted from traffic conditions and you may lose control of the vehicle.

Only use the cup holder when the vehicle is stationary.

Only use the cup holder for containers of the right size.
Always close the container, particularly if the liquid is hot.

NOTE Damage to objects in the temperature-controlled cupholder

If you place objects into the temperature-controlled cup holder, they may become damaged.

Do not place objects into the temperature-controlled cup holder.

Diagram showing car interior with two labeled zones (1 and 2) and a circular icon of a drink inside.

Cup holder in the front centre console

To switch on: on cup holder ①, press button ② repeatedly until the blue (keep cool) or red (keep warm) indicator lamp on the button lights up.

If you use the heating function, the metal insert of the cup holder will be heated. Once a certain temperature has been reached, the warning lamp will light up. Do not reach into

the cup holder's metal insert when the warning lamp is lit.

To switch off: press button ② repeatedly until the indicator lamp on the button goes out.
i Clean the removable rubber mat only with clean, lukewarm water and the cup holder only with a soft cloth.

Ashtray and cigarette lighter

Using the ashtray

Interior view of a car dashboard with steering wheel and control panel, showing a close-up of the dashboard's rotary knob (no text or symbols visible)

Place the ashtray in one of the cup holders in the centre console or in the rear compartment.
▶ Check that it is seated firmly.
Comply with the notes on loading the vehicle ( page 198).

F167000902

To open the ashtray: fold lid ① upwards.
① You can remove the top part of the ashtray for cleaning or emptying by twisting it. Clean the ashtray, e.g. with clean, lukewarm water.

Using the cigarette lighter

WARNING Risk of fire and injury from hot cigarette lighter

You can suffer burns if you touch the hot heating element or the hot socket of the cigarette lighter.

In addition, flammable materials can catch fire if:

• you drop the hot cigarette lighter.
• children e.g. hold the hot cigarette lighter to objects.
  Always hold the cigarette lighter by the knob.
  Always make sure that the cigarette lighter is out of the reach of children.

▶ Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

Requirements

• The ignition is switched on.

Interior view of a car dashboard with steering wheel and passenger seat (no text or symbols visible)

Press in cigarette lighter ①. The cigarette lighter will pop out automatically when the heating element is red-hot.

Sockets

Using the 12 V socket

Requirements:

- Only connect devices up to a maximum of 240 W (20 A).

Depending on the vehicle equipment, the vehicle has the following 12 V sockets:

- In the stowage compartment in the front centre console - In the load compartment

Diagram of a car interior with labeled component '1' pointing to the door panel

Example: 12 V socket in the stowage compartment in the front centre console

Lift up cap ① of the socket and insert the plug of the device.

If you have connected a device to the 12 V socket, leave the cover of the stowage compartment open.

Overview of USB ports

Depending on the vehicle equipment, the vehicle has the following USB ports:

• in the stowage compartment of the cockpit armrest ( page 46)
• in the front centre console next to the mobile phone stowage compartment
• in the folding compartment in the centre console of the rear passenger compartment
• vehicles with Rear Comfort Package: in the centre armrest of the rear seat
• vehicles with three rows of seats: between the seats of the third row of seats

Wireless charging of the mobile phone and connection with the exterior aerial

Notes on wirelessly charging a mobile phone

WARNING Risk of injury due to objects being stowed incorrectly

If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addition, cup holders, open stowage spaces and mobile phone receptacles cannot always retain all objects within.

There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction.

Always stow objects so that they cannot be thrown around in such situations.
Always make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage spaces, luggage nets or stowage nets.
Close the lockable stowage spaces before starting a journey.

▶ Always stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects in the boot/load compartment.

Observe the notes on loading the vehicle.

WARNING Risk of fire from placing objects in the mobile phone stowage compartment

Placing other objects in the mobile phone stowage compartment could constitute a fire hazard.

Apart from a mobile phone, do not place any other objects in the mobile phone stowage compartment, especially those made of metal.

NOTE Damage to objects caused by plac- ing them in the mobile phone stowage compartment

If objects are placed in the mobile phone stowage compartment, these may be damaged by electromagnetic fields.

Do not place credit cards, storage media, ski passes or other objects sensitive to electromagnetic fields in the mobile phone stowage compartment.

NOTE Damage to the mobile phone stow-age compartment caused by liquids

If liquids enter the mobile phone stowage compartment, the compartment may be damaged.

▶ Ensure that no liquids enter the mobile phone stowage compartment.

Always observe the notes for persons with electronic medical aids ( page 101).

• Depending on the vehicle equipment, the mobile phone is connected to the vehicle's exterior aerial via the charging module.

• The charging function and wireless connection of the mobile phone to the vehicle's exterior aerial are only available if the vehicle is switched on.

• Small mobile phones may not be able to be charged in every position of the mobile phone stowage compartment.

• Large mobile phones which do not rest flat in the mobile phone stowage compartment may not be able to be charged or connected with the vehicle's exterior aerial.
• The mobile phone may heat up during the charging process. This may also depend on the applications (apps) currently open in the background.
• To ensure more efficient charging and connection with the vehicle's exterior aerial, remove the protective cover from the mobile phone. Protective covers which are necessary for wireless charging are an exception.

Wireless charging of a mobile phone in the cockpit

WARNING Risk of injury due to objects being stowed incorrectly

If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addition, cup holders, open stowage spaces and mobile phone brackets cannot always retain all objects they contain.

There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction.

Always stow objects so that they cannot be thrown around in such situations.
Always make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage spaces, stowage nets or ruffled pockets.
▶ Close the lockable stowage spaces before starting a journey.

Stow and secure objects that are heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or too large in the load areas.
▶ Use suitable accessories and lashing material for securing loads.

Observe the notes on loading the vehicle.

Requirements:

• The mobile phone is suitable for wireless charging.
  A list of compatible mobile phones can be found at: https://www.mercedes-benzmobile.com/

Interior view of a car dashboard with steering wheel and gear (no text or symbols visible)

Place the mobile phone as close to the centre of mat ① as possible with the display facing upwards.

When a message is shown in the multimedia system, the mobile phone is being charged. Malfunctions detected during the charging process are shown in the multimedia system display.

(i) The mat can be removed for cleaning, e.g. using clean, lukewarm water.

Radio equipment approval numbers for Brazil

This device operates on a secondary basis, that is to say it has no protection against harmful interference, not even from the same type of stations, and must not cause interference with systems operating on a primary basis.

This product is permitted in accordance with the procedure defined in Directive 242/2000 by the Brazilian telecommunications agency ANATEL and meets the applicable technical requirements.

Further information is available on the ANATEL website. www.anatel.gov.br

▶ Further information on the declaration of conformity for vehicle components which receive and/or transmit radio waves.

Wirelessly charging a mobile phone in the rear passenger compartment

WARNING Risk of injury due to objects being stowed incorrectly

If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addition, cup holders, open stowage spaces and mobile phone brackets cannot always retain all objects they contain.

There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction.

Always stow objects so that they cannot be thrown around in such situations.
▶ Always make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage spaces, stowage nets or ruffled pockets.

▶ Close the lockable stowage spaces before starting a journey.

Stow and secure objects that are heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or too large in the load areas.

Use suitable accessories and lashing material for securing loads.

Observe the notes on loading the vehicle.

NOTE Damage to the drawer in the centre console of the rear compartment due to body weight

When open, the drawer in the centre console of the rear compartment can be damaged by body weight.

Do not support yourself on the open drawer.

Requirements:

- The mobile phone must be suitable for wireless charging.

A list of compatible mobile phones can be found at: https://www.mercedes-benzmobile.com/

Line drawing of a car interior showing seatbelt and dashboard (no text or symbols)

Mat in front of the stowage compartment in the rear armrest

Place the mobile phone as close to the centre of mat ① as possible with the display facing upwards.
When the indicator lamp lights up, the mobile phone is being charged.
① The mat can be removed for cleaning, e.g. using clean, lukewarm water.

Fitting/removing the floor mats

WARNING Risk of accident due to objects in the driver's footwell

Objects in the driver's footwell may impede pedal travel or block a depressed pedal. This jeopardises the operating and road safety of the vehicle.

Stow all objects in the vehicle securely so that they cannot get into the driver's footwell.
Always fit the floor mats securely and as prescribed in order to ensure that there is always sufficient room for the pedals.
Do not use loose floor mats and do not place floor mats on top of one another.

Fitting floor mats

Diagram showing car seatbelt components with numbered labels and a close-up inset of the seatbelt detail

Move the corresponding seat backwards and lay the floor mat in the footwell.
Press studs ① onto holders ②.
Adjust the corresponding seat.

Vehicles with a third row of seats: To fit the floor mats on the third row of seats, slide the corresponding seat on the second row of seats forwards.

Removing floor mats

Pull the floor mat off holders ②.
Remove the floor mat.
Vehicles with a third row of seats: To remove the floor mats on the third row of seats, slide the corresponding seat on the second row of seats forwards.

Exterior lighting

Notes on adjusting the lights when driving abroad

Vehicles with static LED headlamps: it is not necessary to convert the headlamps. The legal requirements are also met in countries in which traffic drives on the other side of the road.

Vehicles with Intelligent Light System: The head-lamps are automatically adjusted when the vehicle enters countries in which traffic drives on the other side of the road.

In the following cases, check the headlamp setting and change it manually if necessary:

• If the Dipped-beam setting (left/right-side traffic) Manual adjustment only display message is displayed.
• If the Check dipped-beam setting (left/right-side traffic) display message is displayed.

Once the headlamps have been converted:

• Oncoming traffic will not be dazzled.
• The edge of the road will not be illuminated as far or as high.

- The "motorway mode" and "enhanced fog light" functions will not be available.

Information about lighting systems and your responsibility

The various lighting systems of the vehicle are only aids. The driver of the vehicle is responsible for correct vehicle illumination in accordance with the prevailing light and visibility conditions, legal requirements and traffic situation.

Light switch

Operating the light switch

1 2 3 3KG AUTO 8D Q4 4

1 ≥00≤ Standing lights and licence plate light- ing
2 AUTO Automatic driving lights (preferred light switch position)
3 Low beam/high beam
4 0# Switches the rear fog light on/off.

When low beam is activated, the 300 indicator lamp for the standing lights will be deactivated and replaced by the 5D low-beam indicator lamp.

Always park your vehicle safely using sufficient lighting, in accordance with the relevant legal stipulations.

NOTE Battery discharging by operating the standing lights

Do not have the standing lights switched on over a period of several hours.

If the battery is heavily discharged, the standing lights will be switched off automatically to facilitate the next vehicle start.

The exterior lighting (except standing lights) will switch off automatically when the driver's door is opened.

- Observe the notes on locator lighting ( page 239).

Switching on accident scene lighting

▶ Switch off the vehicle.

Switch on the hazard warning lights ( page 55).
Turn the light switch from the AUTO position to the D position. The low beam will be switched on despite the vehicle being switched off.

The accident scene lighting will be switched off if:

• you switch off the hazard warning lights.
• you turn the light switch back to AUTO.
  • the battery is insufficiently charged.

Automatic driving lights function

When the vehicle is switched on, the standing lights, low beam and daytime running lights will be switched on automatically depending on the light conditions.

WARNING Risk of accident when the dipped beam is switched off in poor visibility

When the light switch is set to AUTO, the dipped beam may not be switched on automatically if there is fog, snow or other causes of poor visibility such as spray.

In such cases, turn the light switch to 📋.

The automatic driving lights are only an aid. You are responsible for the vehicle lighting.

Switching the rear fog light on/off

Requirements

• The light switch is in the ☐ or AUTO position.
  Press button 0\$

Please observe the country-specific laws on the use of rear fog lamps.

Vehicles with AIRMATIC or E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL with off-road package: when the rear fog light is switched on, off-road level +3 will not be available. If the rear fog light is switched on and off-road level +3 is activated, the vehicle will be lowered to off-road level +2.

Operating the combination switch for the lights

Diagram illustrating car steering wheel and steering wheel with numbered directional arrows indicating motion or movement paths.

① High beam
② Turn signal light, right
3 Headlamp flashing
Turn signal light, left
Use the combination switch to select the desired function.

Switching on high beam

Turn the light switch to the ☐ or AUTO position.
Push the combination switch in the direction of arrow ①.

When high beam is activated, the indicator lamp for low beam will be deactivated and replaced by the indicator lamp for high beam .

Switching off high beam

Push the combination switch in the direction of arrow ① or pull it in the direction of arrow ③.

Headlamp flashing

Pull the combination switch in the direction of arrow 3.

Turn signal light

To indicate briefly: push the combination switch briefly to the point of resistance in the direction of arrow ② or ④. The corresponding turn signal light will flash three times.

To indicate permanently: push the combination switch beyond the point of resistance in the direction of arrow ② or ④.

Activating/deactivating the hazard warning lights

Diagram of car interior with a warning panel and control buttons, showing a vehicle's dashboard and steering wheel.

Press button ①

The hazard warning lights will switch on automatically if:

• the airbag has been deployed.
- the vehicle is braked heavily from a speed of more than 70 km/h to a standstill.

When you pull away again, the hazard warning light system will switch off automatically at approximately 10 km/h. You can also switch off the hazard warning light system using button ①.

When the turn signal indicator is activated, the hazard warning lights will be interrupted.

Intelligent Light System

Function of the dynamic low beam

You can watch an animation on this topic via the following link:

The MULTIBEAM LED headlamps adapt to the driving and weather situation and provide extended functions for improved illumination of the road.

The system comprises the following functions:

• Active headlamps ( page 233)

• Cornering light ( page 233)
• Motorway mode ( page 234)
• Enhanced fog light function ( page 234)
• Off-road light ( page 235)

The system is active only when it is dark.

Active headlamps function

Illustration of a road with vehicles and traffic signs, no readable text or symbols

• The headlamps follow the steering movements.
• Relevant areas are better illuminated during a journey.

The functions will be active when low beam is switched on.

Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the course of the lane in which you are driving will also be evaluated and the active headlamps function will adjust the light in advance.

Cornering light function

Illustration of a person walking on a crosswalk beside a road with trees and a car in the background (no text or symbols)

The cornering light improves the illumination of the carriageway over a wide angle in the turning direction, enabling better visibility on tight bends, for example. The cornering light will be activated only when low beam is switched on.

The function will be active in the following cases:

• At speeds below 40 km/h when the turn signal light is switched on or the steering wheel is turned
• At speeds between 40 km/h and 70 km/h when the steering wheel is turned

Roundabout and junction function: the cornering light will be activated on both sides based on an evaluation of the vehicle's current navigation position. It will remain active until after the vehicle has left the roundabout or junction.

Motorway mode function

Motorway mode increases the range and brightness of the cone of light, enabling better visibility.

Illustration of a multi-lane road with cars and trucks, no text or symbols present

The function will be active if a motorway journey is detected by means of:

• the vehicle's speed
  • the multifunction camera
• the GPS

The function will not be active at speeds below 80 km/h.

Enhanced fog light function

The enhanced fog light function reduces self-dazzling and improves the illumination of the edge of the carriageway.

Illustration of a car driving on a multi-lane road with trees and hills in the background (no text or symbols)

The function is automatically activated under the following conditions:

- At speeds below 70 km/h and when the rear fog light is switched on.

The function is automatically deactivated under the following conditions:

• When speeds greater than 100 km/h are reached.
• When the rear fog light is switched off.

You can activate the enhanced fog light function up to a speed of 100 km/h by switching on the rear fog light.

Function of the off-road light

The off-road light improves illumination during off-road driving. The low beam is distributed symmetrically and across a wide angle, and brightness is increased slightly. This makes it easier to find your way when driving off road and to detect obstacles at an early stage. The active headlamps will be deactivated during this time so that steering movements do not change the illumination.

The function is active when the low beam is switched on if you are not driving at a speed greater than 50 km/h and the (Offroad) drive program has been selected.

Activating or deactivating dynamic low beam

Requirements

• The vehicle is switched on.

Multimedia system:

▶ Activate or deactivate Dynamic low beam.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist

Adaptive Highbeam Assist function

WARNING Risk of accident despite Adaptive Highbeam Assist

Adaptive Highbeam Assist does not react to:

• road users without lights, e.g. pedestrians
• road users with poor lighting, e.g. cyclists
- road users whose lighting is obstructed, e.g. by a barrier

On very rare occasions, Adaptive Highbeam Assist may fail to recognise other road users with their own lighting, or may recognise them too late.

In these, or in similar situations, the automatic high beam will not be deactivated or will be activated despite the presence of other road users.

▶ Always observe the road and traffic conditions carefully and switch off the high beam in good time.

System limits

Adaptive Highbeam Assist cannot take into account road, weather or traffic conditions.

Detection may be restricted in the following cases:

• In poor visibility, e.g. fog, heavy rain or snow
- If there is dirt on the sensors or the sensors are obscured

Adaptive Highbeam Assist is only an aid. You are responsible for adjusting the vehicle's lighting to the prevailing light, visibility and traffic conditions.

Illustration of a road with trees and a car, no text or symbols present

Adaptive Highbeam Assist automatically switches between the following types of light:

• Low beam
• High beam

At speeds greater than 30 km/h:

- If no other road users are detected, high beam will switch on automatically.

The high beam will switch off automatically in the following cases:

• At speeds below 25 km/h
• If other road users are detected
• If street lighting is sufficient

At speeds greater than approximately 50 km/h:

- The headlamp range of the low beam will be regulated automatically based on the distance to other road users.

The system's optical sensor is located behind the windscreen near the overhead control panel.

Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist on/off

WARNING Risk of accident despite Adaptive Highbeam Assist

Adaptive Highbeam Assist does not react to:

• road users without lights, e.g. pedestrians
• road users with poor lighting, e.g. cyclists

- road users whose lighting is obstructed, e.g. by a barrier

On very rare occasions, Adaptive Highbeam Assist may fail to recognise other road users with their own lighting, or may recognise them too late.

In these, or in similar situations, the automatic high beam will not be deactivated or will be activated despite the presence of other road users.

▶ Always observe the road and traffic conditions carefully and switch off the high beam in good time.

Switching on

Turn the light switch to the AUTO position.
Switch on high beam using the combination switch.
If Adaptive Highbeam Assist is activated, the indicator lamp will light up on the driver's display.

Switching off

Switch off high beam using the combination switch.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus function

WARNING Risk of accident despite Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus does not react to:

• road users without lights, e.g. pedestrians
• road users with poor lighting, e.g. cyclists
- road users whose lighting is obstructed, e.g. by a barrier

On very rare occasions, Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus may fail to recognise other road users with their own lighting, or may recognise them too late.

In these, or in similar situations, the automatic high beam will not be deactivated or will be

activated despite the presence of other road users.

▶ Always observe the road and traffic conditions carefully and switch off the high beam in good time.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus cannot take into account road, weather or traffic conditions.

Detection may be restricted in the following cases:

• In poor visibility, e.g. fog, heavy rain or snow
- If there is dirt on the sensors or the sensors are obscured

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is only an aid. You are responsible for adjusting the vehicle's lighting to the prevailing light, visibility and traffic conditions.

Illustration of a road scene with cars, trees, and a road (no text or symbols)

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus automatically switches between the following types of light:

• Low beam
• Partial high beam
• High beam

Partial high beam uses the high beam to shine past other road users rather than dazzling them.

The vehicle in front will be illuminated by the low beam.

At speeds greater than 30 km/h:

• If no other road users are detected, high beam will switch on automatically.
• If other road users are detected, partial high beam will switch on automatically.

At speeds below 25 km/h or when there is sufficient street lighting:

• The partial high beam will switch off automatically.
  • The high beam will switch off automatically.

At speeds greater than approximately 50 km/h:

- The headlamp range of the low beam will be regulated automatically based on the distance to other road users.

The system's optical sensor is located behind the windscreen near the overhead control panel.

Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus on/off

WARNING Risk of accident despite Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus does not react to:

• road users without lights, e.g. pedestrians
• road users with poor lighting, e.g. cyclists
- road users whose lighting is obstructed, e.g. by a barrier

On very rare occasions, Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus may fail to recognise other road users with their own lighting, or may recognise them too late.

In these, or in similar situations, the automatic high beam will not be deactivated or will be activated despite the presence of other road users.

▶ Always observe the road and traffic conditions carefully and switch off the high beam in good time.

Switching on

▶ Turn the light switch to the AUTO position.
Switch on high beam using the combination switch.
When the high beam is switched on automatically in the dark, the indicator lamp will light up on the driver's display.

Switching off

Switch off high beam using the combination switch.

Setting low beam

Multimedia system:

→ Settings Lights
▶ Intelligent Light System ▶ Low beam

Select Right-side traffic, Left-side traffic or Automatic.

Setting low beam

Multimedia system:

Settings Lights

▶ DIGITAL LIGHT ▶ Low beam

Select Right-side traffic, Left-side traffic or Automatic.

Setting the exterior lighting switch-off delay time

Multimedia system:

Settings Lights

▶ Interior/exterior lighting

Exterior lighting delayed switch off

Set the switch-off delay time. When the vehicle's engine is switched off, the exterior lighting will be activated for the set time.

Activating/deactivating the locator lighting

Multimedia system:

→ Settings Lights

▶ Interior/exterior lighting

Activate or deactivate Locator lighting.

When the function is activated, the exterior lighting will light up for 40 seconds after the vehicle is unlocked or the driver's door is opened when the vehicle is parked and not locked. When you start the vehicle, the locator lighting will be deactivated and the automatic driving lights activated.

Interior lighting

Adjusting the interior lighting

Front overhead control panel

Bk Bk X Y Bk 1 2 3 4 5

1 Front left reading lamp

2 Automatic interior lighting control

3 Front interior lighting

4 Rear interior lighting

5 Front right reading lamp

To switch on or off: press button ① - ⑤ accordingly.

Control panel in the grab handle

Diagram of a car gear shift lever with a numbered component (no text or symbols)

Rear reading lamp

To switch on or off: press the ① button.

Adjusting the ambient lighting

Multimedia system:

Comfort

Ambient light

Setting the colour

Select Colour.
▶ Select Monochrome or Multi-colour.
Set the desired colour or colour scheme.

Adjusting the brightness

Select Brightness.
Adjust the brightness.
(i) Depending on the ambient light conditions, the ambient lighting will automatically switch between day and night modes.

Activating effects

Select Effects.
▶ Activate the desired effect.
(i) Depending on the vehicle equipment, different effects are available.

Multi-colour animation

• The chosen colour combination will change at predefined intervals.

Climate

- If changes are made to the temperature setting in the vehicle, the colour of the ambient lighting will change briefly.

Greeting

- When you get into the vehicle, a special colour animation will play.

F167 0009 02

Switching the interior lighting switch-off delay time on/off

Multimedia system:

Windscreen wipers and windscreen washer system

Switching the windscreen wipers on/off

Diagram illustrating car steering wheel and dashboard with numbered directional arrows indicating rotation or movement.

1 0 Windscreen wipers off
2 ⋯ Automatic wiping, normal
3 .... Automatic wiping, frequent

4 — Continuous wiping, slow
5 = Continuous wiping, fast

Turn the combination switch to the corresponding position 1 - 5.
Single wipe/washing: push the button on the combination switch in the direction of arrow

• Single wipe
  • Wipes with washer fluid

i Observe the notes on washing the vehicle in a car wash ( page 31).

Vehicles with MAGIC VISION CONTROL: in position 2 or 3, the windscreen washing process is automatically triggered if dirt is detected on the windscreen unless the Top up washer fluid message is being displayed.

Switching the rear window wiper on/off

Diagram showing car interior with steering wheel, dashboard, and touchscreen device labeled 1 and 2

Single wipe/washing
2 Intermittent wiping

Single wipe: press button Ⓞ as far as the point of resistance.

Wiping with washer fluid: press button beyond the point of resistance.

Switching intermittent wiping on/off: press button ②.

Vehicles with rain sensor: the wipe interval will automatically adapt to the driving conditions.

The ☐ symbol will appear on the driver's display when the rear window wiper is switched on.

Replacing the windscreen wiper blades

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the windscreen wipers are switched on while wiper blades are being replaced

If the windscreen wipers begin to move while you are changing the wiper blades, you can be trapped by the wiper arm.

Always switch off the windscreen wipers and vehicle before changing the wiper blades.

Moving the wiper arms into the replacement position

Switch the vehicle on and then off again immediately.
Within around 15 seconds, press and hold the button on the combination switch for approximately three seconds (→ page 241). The wiper arms will move into the replacement position.
Check the condition of the wiper blades regularly and replace them in the event of visible damage or ongoing smearing.
Observe the information about the maintenance display.

Maintenance display

Diagram showing car exterior and cable installation with labeled component 1

Remove protective film ① from the maintenance displays on the tips of the newly fitted wiper blades.

When the colour of the maintenance displays changes from black to yellow, replace the wiper blades.

(i) The duration until the colour changes varies depending on the usage conditions.

Replacing the windscreen wiper blades (MAGIC VISION CONTROL)

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the windscreen wipers are switched on while wiper blades are being replaced

If the windscreen wipers begin to move while you are changing the wiper blades, you can be trapped by the wiper arm.

▶ Always switch off the windscreen wipers and vehicle before changing the wiper blades.

Moving the wiper arms into the replacement position

▶ Switch off the vehicle.

Within around 15 seconds, press the button on the combination switch (→ page 241).

The wiper arms will move into the replacement position.

Removing the wiper blades

Diagram showing car interior with a brush and labeled parts, including numbered annotations and a warning symbol.

To bring the wiper blade into position to be removed: hold the wiper arm firmly with one hand. With the other hand, turn the wiper blade in the direction of arrow ① beyond the point of resistance. The wiper blade will engage in the removal position with a click.

To remove the wiper blade: press release knob ②, pull the wiper blade in the direction of arrow ③ and remove.

Fitting the wiper blades

Diagram showing car interior with a pen and tool, annotated with three steps: (1) ↓, (2) ↓, (3) ↓ with a 'SUCK' warning symbol.

Push the new wiper blade onto the wiper arm in the direction of arrow ① until release knob ② engages.

Press the wiper blade onto the wiper arm beyond the point of resistance in the direction of arrow ③.
The wiper blade will engage with a noticeable click and move freely again.
Fold the wiper arm back onto the windscreen.
Check the condition of the wiper blades regularly and replace them in the event of visible damage or ongoing smearing.

Replacing the rear window wiper blade

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the windscreen wipers are switched on while wiper blades are being replaced

If the windscreen wipers begin to move while you are changing the wiper blades, you can be trapped by the wiper arm.

Always switch off the windscreen wipers and vehicle before changing the wiper blades.

Removing the wiper blade

Diagram showing car body parts with numbered annotations highlighting structural features

Switch off the vehicle.
Fold wiper arm ② away from the rear window until it engages in the replacement position.
Unclip wiper blade ① from wiper arm ② and remove it in the direction of arrow ③.

Fitting the wiper blade

Diagram showing car body parts with numbered annotations pointing to specific features, including a highlighted section and directional arrows.

Position wiper blade ① with both lugs ③ on holder ② on the wiper arm.
Push wiper blade ① in the direction of arrow ④ until it engages in holder ②.
Make sure that wiper blade ① is seated correctly.

Fold the wiper arm from the replacement position back onto the rear window.

Mirrors

Operating the outside mirrors

A WARNING Risk of accident due to adjusting the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in motion

You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular:

• if you adjust the driver's seat, the head restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion
• if you fasten your seat belt while the vehicle is in motion

Before starting the vehicle: in particular, adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror, and fasten your seat belt.

WARNING Risk of accident due to misjudgement of distance when using the outside mirror

The outside mirrors reflect objects on a smaller scale. The objects in view are in fact closer than they appear.

Therefore, always look over your shoulder in order to ensure that you are aware of the actual distance between you and the road users driving behind you.

Folding the outside mirrors in/out

Diagram of car interior showing labeled buttons and a close-up of the door panel with numbered labels 1 to 4

① Selects the driver's outside mirror.
② Folds the outside mirrors in/out.
3 Selects the front-passenger outside mirror.
4 Adjusts the outside mirrors.
Briefly press button ②.

If the battery has been disconnected or has discharged, the outside mirrors must be moved briefly using button ②. Only then will the automatic mirror folding function work properly.

Adjusting the outside mirrors

Diagram showing car interior with labeled buttons and a close-up of the button panel with numbered labels 1 to 4.

① Selects the driver's outside mirror.

② Folds the outside mirrors in/out.

3 Selects the front-passenger outside mirror.
4 Adjusts the outside mirrors.
Press button ① or ③ to select the outside mirror to be adjusted.
Use button ④ to adjust the position of the mirror glass.

Engaging the outside mirrors

Diagram showing car interior with labeled buttons and a close-up of the door panel, likely for navigation or diagnostic reference.

1 Selects the driver's outside mirror.
② Folds the outside mirrors in/out.
3 Selects the front-passenger outside mirror.
4 Adjusts the outside mirrors.

If an outside mirror has been forcibly disengaged, proceed as follows.

Press and hold button 2

You will hear a click and the mirror will audibly click into place. The outside mirror will now be set to the correct position.

Automatic anti-dazzle mirrors function

WARNING Risk of acid burns and poisoning due to the anti-dazzle mirror electrolyte

Electrolyte may escape if the glass in an automatic anti-dazzle mirror breaks.

The electrolyte is hazardous to health and causes irritation. It must not come into contact with your skin, eyes, respiratory organs or clothing or be swallowed.

If you come into contact with electrolyte, observe the following:

- Immediately rinse the electrolyte from your skin with water and seek medical attention.

- If electrolyte comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse them

thoroughly with clean water and seek medical attention.

- If the electrolyte is swallowed, immediately rinse your mouth out thoroughly. Do not induce vomiting. Seek medical attention immediately.

- Immediately change out of clothing which has been contaminated with electrolyte.

- If an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical attention immediately.

When light from a headlamp hits the sensor on the inside rearview mirror, the inside rearview mirror automatically dims.

System limits

The system will not go into anti-dazzle mode if:

• The vehicle is switched off.

- Reverse gear is engaged.

• The interior lighting is switched on.

Front-passenger outside mirror parking position function

① The parking position is available only in vehicles with a memory function.

The parking position makes parking easier. In the following situations, the front-passenger outside mirror will swivel downwards in the direction of the rear wheel on the front passenger's side:

• the parking position is stored ( page 248)
• The front-passenger mirror is selected
- Reverse gear is engaged.

The front-passenger outside mirror will move back to its original position in the following situations:

• You shift the transmission to another transmission position
• You are travelling at speeds greater than 15 km/h
• You press the button for the outside mirror on the driver's side

Storing and calling up the parking position of the front-passenger outside mirror

Storing

Diagram showing car interior with labeled buttons and a close-up of the lock mechanism, likely illustrating a diagnostic or safety feature.

Select the front-passenger outside mirror using button ①.
Engage reverse gear.
Move the front-passenger outside mirror into the desired parking position using button 2.

Calling up

Select the front-passenger outside mirror using button ①.
Engage reverse gear. The front-passenger outside mirror will move into the stored parking position.

Activating/deactivating the automatic mirror folding function

Multimedia system:

→ Settings → Vehicle
▶ Open/close

Activate or deactivate Automatic mirror fold-in.

Area permeable to radio waves on the wind-screen

Line drawing of a car interior with two labeled components (1), no text or symbols present

Mount radio-controlled equipment such as toll systems only on areas ① of the windscreen that are permeable to radio waves.

Areas permeable to radio waves ① are best visible from outside the vehicle when the windscreen is illuminated with an external light source.

Note this position for vehicles with:

- Infrared-reflecting windscreen

Infrared-reflective windscreen function

The infrared-reflective windscreen is coated and reduces the build-up of heat in the vehicle interior. The coating shields the vehicle interior from radio waves.

Overview of climate control systems

Notes on climate control

An interior filter in combination with the prefilter in the engine compartment must always be used so that the air conditioning system, pollution level monitoring and the air filtration work correctly. Use filters recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Always have maintenance work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

Overview of the air conditioning control panel

The indicator lamps on the buttons indicate that the corresponding function is activated.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Vehicles with THERMATIC air conditioning control panel (without stationary heater)

Sets the temperature
2 Calls up the air conditioning menu
3 Sets the airflow or switches off climate control
4 AUTO Sets climate control to automatic mode (→ page 253)
5 Demists the windscreen
6 REAR Switches the rear window heater on/off
7 Switches air-recirculation mode on/off (→ page 255)

B A/C Switches the A/C function on/off (→ page 252) Switches residual heat on/off (→ page 255)
9 SYNC Activates/deactivates synchronisation(→ page 254)
Sets the temperature on the front passenger side

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Vehicles with THERMATIC air conditioning control panel (with stationary heater)

Sets the temperature
2 Calls up / exits the air conditioning menu

Pressing and holding the button

(approx. four seconds): resets climate control to the basic settings

3 Sets the airflow or switches off climate control

4 AUTO Sets climate control to automatic mode (→ page 253)

5 Demists the windscreen

6 REAR Switches the rear window heater on/off

7 Switches air-recirculation mode on/off (→ page 255)

B A/C Switches the A/C function on/off (→ page 252)

Switches residual heat on/off (→ page 255)

9 Switches the stationary heater on/off (→ page 54)

10 Sets the temperature on the front passenger side

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Vehicles with THERMOTRONIC air conditioning control panel (without stationary heater)

Sets the temperature on the driver's side

② 📋 Call up / exits the air conditioning menu

3 Sets the airflow or switches off climate control

4 AUTO Sets climate control to automatic mode (→ page 253)

5 Demists the windscreen

6 XLAR Switches the rear window heater on/off

7 Switches air-recirculation mode on/off (→ page 255)

B A/C Switches the A/C function on/off (→ page 252)

Switches residual heat on/off (→ page 255)

9 SYNC Activates/deactivates synchronisation(→ page 254)

10 Sets the temperature on the front passenger side

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Vehicles with THERMOTRONIC air conditioning control panel (with stationary heater)

Sets the temperature on the driver's side

② Calls up the air conditioning menu

3 Sets the airflow or switches off climate control
4 AUTO Sets climate control to automatic mode (→ page 253)
5 Demists the windscreen
6 REAR Switches the rear window heater on/off
⑦ Switches air-recirculation mode on/off (→ page 255)
B A/C Switches the A/C function on/off (→ page 252) Switches residual heat on/off (→ page 255)
Switches the stationary heater on/off (→ page 54)
10 Sets the temperature on the front passenger side

The settings for the second and third row of seats can be made via the rear operating unit, the multimedia system ( page 254) or the MBUX rear tablet ( page 606) depending on the vehicle's equipment.

Operating the climate control system

Switching climate control on/off

To switch on: set the airflow to level 1 or higher using the button.
To switch off: set the airflow to level 0 using the button.

If climate control is switched off, the windows may mist up more quickly. Switch climate control off only briefly.

Switching the climate control in the rear on/off

22℃ AUTO SYNC AUTO NEER AUTO 22℃ AUTO AUTO OFF

Press button 5

When climate control in the second seat row is switched off, the indicator lamp is activated and OFF is shown on the rear display.

Switching the A/C function on/off using the air conditioning control panel

The A/C function heats, cools and dehumidifies the vehicle's interior air.

Press the A/C button.

Switch off the A/C function only briefly; otherwise, the windows may mist up more quickly.

Condensation may drip from the underside of the vehicle when cooling mode is active. This is not indicative of a fault.

Calling up the air conditioning menu via the climate bar or the air conditioning control panel

The air conditioning menu can be called up via the climate bar. The climate bar is always shown on the lower edge of the media display.

Select the Climate menu entry in the air conditioning bar.

Activating/deactivating the A/C function via the air conditioning menu

Multimedia system:

Climate menu First row of seats

Depending on the external conditions, support for improved cooling and dehumidification of the interior air will be provided when the A/C function is activated. If it is not possible to operate the A/C function on the climate bar on the central display, switch the function on or off in the climate menu of the central display.

Select A/C (A/C).

Switch off the A/C function only briefly; otherwise, the windows may mist up more quickly.

Condensation may drip from the underside of the vehicle when cooling mode is active. This is not indicative of a fault.

Setting climate control to automatic mode

In automatic mode, the set temperature is controlled and maintained at a constant level by the air supply.

Press button AUTO.
To switch to manual mode: press the AUTO button.

In automatic mode, you can choose between five different air quantities using the button. Automatic mode is retained.

Automatically controlling the climate control in the rear

22℃ AUTO 3 AUTO 83 BEST 22℃ AUTO AUTO OFF AUTO AUTO 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

In automatic mode, the set temperature is regulated by the temperature of the dispensed air and the airflow.

Press button AUTO (→ page 250).

Overview of the air distribution settings

The symbols on the display indicate the vents through which the airflow is being directed:

Demister and side air vents
Centre and side air vents

Footwell and side air vents
Centre, side and footwell vents
Demister, footwell and side air vents
All vents
Demister, centre and side air vents
Automatic air distribution

Setting air distribution using the air conditioning menu

Multimedia system:

Climate menu

Select First row of seats or Second row of seats.
To set the air distribution: select 🎨, 🏠 or 📞.
Set the airflow.
When the air conditioning system is switched on, at least one zone is always active. However, several air distribution options can be selected at the same time, for example to set the climate control for the interior and the

footwells simultaneously. In doing so, the climate control for the windscreen can only be selected for the first seat row. When automatic mode is active, the buttons for setting the air distribution are automatically deactivated. When the air conditioning system is switched off, the buttons remain operable and the last setting is saved.

Setting rear climate control using the air conditioning menu

Multimedia system:

Climate menu

Setting the temperature

Set the temperature.
Setting the airflow
Set the airflow.
Controlling the rear climate control automatically
Select AUTO.
① When the defrost function is activated, some functions (e.g. the temperature setting) will be

deactivated automatically. To deactivate the defrost function, press either MAX, AUTO or set the air flow to level 0.

Deactivating rear climate control

Select REAR OFF.

Switching the synchronisation function on/off via the air conditioning control panel

Requirements

- The vehicle is not equipped with a stationary heater.

Climate control can be set centrally using the synchronisation function. The temperature and air distribution setting for the driver's side will be adopted automatically for all climate control zones.

Press the SYNC button.

The synchronisation function will switch off if the settings for one of the other climate zones are changed.

Switching the synchronisation function on/off via the air conditioning menu

Multimedia system:

Climate menu First row of seats

The synchronisation function controls the climate control centrally. The driver's settings for temperature, airflow and air distribution are automatically adopted for each climate zone.

Select SYNC (SYNC).

Demisting the windows

Windows misted up on the inside

Press the AUTO button.

If the windows remain misted up: press the MAX button.

Windows misted up on the outside

▶ Switch on the windscreen wipers.

Press the AUTO button.

Switching air-recirculation mode on/off

Press the button.

The interior air will be recirculated.

Air-recirculation mode automatically switches to fresh air mode after a while.

If air-recirculation mode is switched on, the windows may mist up more quickly. Switch on air-recirculation mode only briefly.

Switches the residual heat on/off

Requirements:

• the vehicle is parked.

It is possible to make use of the residual heat from the engine to continue heating or ventilating the front compartment of the vehicle for approximately 30 minutes, depending on the temperature set.

To activate: press button A/C

Residual heat will be switched off automatically.

Switching the residual heat in the rear on/off

Requirements:

• The vehicle is parked.

When the residual heat of the engine is activated in the rear compartment, you can heat or ventilate the rear compartment for approximately 30 minutes.

22℃ AUTO 83 OFF 22℃ 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Press button 5.

Activating/deactivating ionisation

Multimedia system:

Climate menu >> Air quality

When ionization is activated, the indoor air is enriched with negatively charged oxygen ions. These can promote the well-being of the occupants.

▶ Select Ionisation.

The function can only be performed if the AUTO mode is activated or the air distribution is set to the side air vent. The function is restricted if the side air vents on the driver's side are closed.

Fragrance system

Activating/deactivating the fragrance system using the multimedia system

Requirements

• Automatic climate control is activated.
• The glove compartment will close.
- A flacon is inserted.

Multimedia system:

Climate menu Air quality

The fragrance system distributes a pleasant fragrance throughout the vehicle interior from a flacon located in the glove box.

Navigate down until the climate control bar is active.
Select Air freshener.
▶ Activate or deactivate fragrancing.

Setting the fragrance system using the multi-media system

Requirements

• A flacon is inserted.
• The glove compartment will close.
• Climate control is activated.

Multimedia system:

Climate menu Air quality

The fragrance system distributes a pleasant fragrance throughout the vehicle interior from a flacon located in the glove compartment.

Select Air freshener.
Keep pressing until the desired intensity is reached.
- Inserting or removing the flacon of the fragrance system

WARNING Risk of injury from liquid perfume

If children open the flacon, they could drink the liquid perfume or it could come into contact with their eyes.

Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle.
Consult a doctor immediately if liquid perfume has been drunk.
If liquid perfume comes into contact with your eyes or skin, rinse your eyes with clean water.
If symptoms continue, consult a doctor.

ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage due to improper disposal of full flacons

: Full flacons may not be disposed of household waste.

Full flacons must be handed in ant collection point.

Diagram showing car interior with labeled parts and a magnified inset highlighting a component with numbered callouts.

1 Cap
2 Flacon
To insert: slide the flacon into the holder as far as it will go.
To remove: after opening the glove box, wait for approximately seven seconds and pull out the flacon.

If you do not use genuine Mercedes-Benz interior perfumes, observe the manufacturers' safety notices on the perfume packaging.

Dispose of the genuine Mercedes-Benz interior perfume flacon when it is empty and do not refill it.

Refillable flacon

Unscrew the cap of the empty flacon.
Fill the flacon with a maximum of 15 ml.
Screw the cap back onto the flacon.

Always refill the empty refillable flacon with the same perfume. Observe the separate information sheet with the flacon.

Pre-entry climate control via the key (plug-in hybrid)

Function of pre-entry climate control via the key (plug-in hybrid) Before you get into the vehicle, the driver's side or the whole vehicle interior can be briefly pre-warmed or pre-cooled.

For pre-cooling, the following functions are activated as needed:

• Automatic climate control
- Blower
- Seat ventilation

For pre-heating, the following functions are activated as needed:

• Automatic climate control
- Blower
- Seat heating
• Steering wheel heater
- Panel heating
- Mirror heater
- Rear window heater
• Wiper park position heater
- Fragrancing
- lonisation

Setting pre-entry climate control when the vehicle is unlocked in the multimedia system Multimedia system:
Climate menu ▶ Pre-entry climate ctrl
▶ Activate or deactivate the function.

Selecting seats

Select Driver, Passenger, Rear left or Rear right. The seat-specific functions of pre-entry climate control, such as seat heating, will be performed for the selected seats.

If pre-entry climate control is enabled, an LED on the climate bar of the media display will light up blue for a cooled vehicle and red for a heated vehicle.

Activating/deactivating pre-entry climate control via the key (plug-in hybrid)

Requirements:

• The high-voltage battery is charged sufficiently.
• The function has been activated via the multi-media system.

To switch on: unlock the vehicle. The climate control functions are activated for up to five minutes for pre-heating and pre-cooling.

Pre-entry climate control via the key cannot be activated more than twice when the vehicle is switched off.

To switch off: push the 📁 button up or down.

The following functions will remain active once the vehicle has been started:

• Seat heating
• Seat ventilation
• Panel heating
• Fragrancing
• Ionisation

Pre-entry climate control for departure time (plug-in hybrid)

Function of pre-entry climate control for departure time (plug-in hybrid)

WARNING Risk of fatal injury due to exposure to extreme heat or cold in the vehicle

If persons, particularly children, are subjected to prolonged exposure to intense heat or cold, there is a risk of severe injury or even death.

▶ Never leave persons, particularly children, unattended in the vehicle.

The vehicle interior can be air conditioned when the vehicle is parked.

When the vehicle is connected to power supply equipment, priority is given to charging the high-voltage battery to a specified minimum charge.

The running time of pre-entry climate control may be reduced under the following conditions:

- The vehicle is not connected to power supply equipment.

- The high-voltage battery is not charged sufficiently.

With active pre-entry climate control, the charge level of the high-voltage battery may be reduced, even if the charging cable connector is connected.

For cooling, the following functions are activated as needed:

• Automatic climate control
- Blower
- Seat ventilation

For heating, the following functions are activated as needed:

• Automatic climate control
- Blower
- Seat heating
• Steering wheel heater
- Panel heating
- Mirror heater
- Rear window heater
- Fragrancing

F167 0009 02

- Ionisation

Setting pre-entry climate control for departure time via the multimedia system Multimedia system:

Climate menu ▶ Pre-entry climate ctrl

Setting the departure time

Select Edit departure time ☐.
Select a departure time or set a new departure time.

Setting the repeat days

Select Edit departure time ☐.

Set the desired departure time and select the corresponding weekdays on which this departure time is to apply.

Press OK to confirm.

Selecting seats

Select Driver, Passenger, Rear left or Rear right. Pre-entry climate control will take place for the selected seats.

Activating/deactivating pre-entry climate control for departure time (plug-in hybrid)

WARNING Risk of fatal injury due to exposure to extreme heat or cold in the vehicle

If persons, particularly children, are subjected to prolonged exposure to intense heat or cold, there is a risk of severe injury or even death.

▶ Never leave persons, particularly children, unattended in the vehicle.

Requirements:

• The high-voltage battery is charged sufficiently.
• The function has been activated via the multi-media system.

To activate: set the departure time ( page 259).

Pre-entry climate control for departure time will switch on a maximum of 55 minutes before the selected departure time. It will remain active for another five minutes if departure is delayed.

To deactivate: press the button up or down.

The following functions will remain active once the vehicle has been started:

• Seat heating
• Seat ventilation
• Panel heating
• Fragrancing
• lonisation

Activating/deactivating immediate pre-entry climate control

WARNING Risk of fatal injury due to exposure to extreme heat or cold in the vehicle

If persons, particularly children, are subjected to prolonged exposure to intense heat or cold, there is a risk of severe injury or even death.

▶ Never leave persons, particularly children, unattended in the vehicle.

Air conditioning of the vehicle interior can continue for up to 50 minutes, e.g. if the journey is interrupted.

Interior view of a car dashboard and steering wheel, showing a close-up of the dashboard with a highlighted sensor or device (no text or symbols visible)

The colours of the indicator lamp have the following meanings:

• Blue: cooling is activated.
• Red: heating is activated.

• Yellow: the departure time has been preselected.
  Set the desired temperature using the button.
  Press button ①. The red or blue indicator lamp on button ① will light up or go out.

Stationary heater/ventilation

Stationary heater/ventilation function

The following function is equipment-dependent.

• The air inside the vehicle is heated or ventilated to the set temperature.
• The air inside the vehicle cannot be cooled down to temperatures below the outside temperature.
• If the outside temperature changes, ventilation mode will automatically switch to heating mode or heating mode will automatically switch to ventilation mode.

The stationary heater and the exhaust gas outlet are situated behind the right front wheel.

■ Switching the stationary heater/ventilation on/off via the operating unit

DANGER Risk of fatal injury due to poisonous exhaust gases

If the tailpipe is blocked or sufficient ventilation is not possible, poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide may enter the vehicle. This is the case in enclosed spaces or if the vehicle gets stuck in snow, for example.

▶ Always switch the stationary heater off in enclosed spaces without an air extraction system, e.g. in garages.
Keep the tailpipe and the area around the vehicle free from snow when the engine or the stationary heater is running.
Open a window on the side of the vehicle facing away from the wind to ensure an adequate supply of fresh air.

WARNING Risk of fire due to hot stationary heater components and exhaust gases

Flammable materials such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite.

When the stationary heater is switched on, make sure that:
- hot vehicle parts do not come into contact with flammable materials.
- the exhaust gas can flow out of the stationary heater exhaust pipe unhindered.
- the exhaust gas does not come into contact with flammable materials.

NOTE Battery discharge caused by stationary heater or stationary ventilation operation

Operating the stationary heater or stationary ventilation drains the battery.

After heating or ventilating the vehicle twice, drive for a longer period of time.

Requirements

• The fuel tank is sufficiently full.
i Please note that if the tank fill level is too low, it can result in function restrictions during auxiliary heating operation.

Interior view of a car dashboard with steering wheel and air conditioner panel (no text or symbols)

Set the desired temperature using the button.

Press button 1

The red or blue indicator lamp on button will light up or go out.

Indicator lamp colours:

• Blue: stationary ventilation is switched on.
- Red: the stationary heater is switched on.
- Yellow: the departure time has been preselected.

The stationary heater/ventilation will switch off automatically after 50 minutes.

Setting the stationary heater/ventilation via the multimedia system

Requirements

- The vehicle is fitted with the stationary heater equipment.

Multimedia system:

Climate menu ▶ Stationary heater

Selecting the departure time

Select Time A, Time B or Time C.

Setting the departure time

Select Time A, Time B or Time C.
Select the pen beside the time.
Set a time.

Air vents

djusting the front air vents

WARNING Risk of burns or frostbite due to being too close to the air vents

Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air vents.

Make sure that all vehicle occupants always maintain a sufficient distance from the air vents.
If necessary, direct the airflow to another area of the vehicle interior.

To guarantee the flow of fresh air through the air vents into the vehicle interior, note the following:

• Always keep the vents and ventilation grilles in the vehicle interior clear.

• Keep the air inlet free of residue build-up ( page 620).
• Optimum climate comfort is achieved with the air vents in the centre position.

Diagram of a car interior showing steering wheel, dashboard, and three labeled components with icons

To open or close centre air vents: turn controller ② up or down as far as it will go.
To open or close side air vents: turn controller ② to the left or right as far as it will go.
To adjust the air direction: hold air vent ① in the centre and move it up or down or to the left or right.

Adjusting the rear air vents

WARNING Risk of burns or frostbite due to being too close to the air vents

Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air vents.

Make sure that all vehicle occupants always maintain a sufficient distance from the air vents.
If necessary, direct the airflow to another area of the vehicle interior.

Diagram of car air intake panel with labeled components 1 and 2

To open or close: turn controller ② to the left or right as far as it will go.

To set the airflow direction: hold the centre of air vent Ⓞ and move it up or down or to the left or right.
Opening or closing the air vent in the glove box

WARNING Risk of burns or frostbite due to being too close to the air vents

Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air vents.

Make sure that all vehicle occupants always maintain a sufficient distance from the air vents.
If necessary, direct the airflow to another area of the vehicle interior.

NOTE Damage to temperature-sensitive objects in the glove box

Temperature-sensitive objects stored in the glove box may be damaged by the air vent located inside the glove compartment.

Close the air vent when you heat the vehicle.

At high outside temperatures, open the air vent and switch on the A/C function.

The automatic climate control must be switched on to cool the glove box.

Diagram showing car interior with labeled parts and directional arrows indicating rotation or movement

To open or close: turn controller ① of air vent ② clockwise or anticlockwise.

Driving

Notes on plug-in hybrids

Notes on plug-in hybrid operation

WARNING Risk of chemical burns and poisoning from damaged high-voltage battery

If the housing of the high-voltage battery has been damaged, electrolyte and gases may leak out.

Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing.
Immediately rinse electrolyte splashes off with water and seek medical attention straight away.

DANGER Risk of fire and explosion from excessive internal pressure of the high-voltage battery

In the event of a vehicle fire, flammable gas can escape and ignite.

▶ Stop the charging process immediately in case of unusual odours, smoke or burn marks.
Leave the danger zone immediately. Secure the danger zone at a sufficient distance.
▶ Call the fire service.

The hybrid system combines a combustion engine with an electric motor.

Characteristics when the vehicle is at a standstill:

• The combustion engine is generally switched off.
• Idle speed occurs only in certain instances.

Characteristics when the vehicle is started:

• If the high-voltage battery is sufficiently charged, the vehicle can be started with the electric drive system without the combustion engine (noiseless start).
• If the high-voltage battery for the electric drive system is not sufficiently charged or the vehicle conditions for a silent start are not met,

the vehicle will start with the combustion engine.

Depending on the system, it may be the case that even though the high-voltage battery is charged, electric mode has restricted or no availability. Once the combustion engine has been operated for long enough and ambient conditions permit, electric mode will be available again without restriction.

Characteristics with moderate power output requests:

• The combustion engine is switched off as often as possible during the journey.
• The vehicle can, depending on the drive program selected and the state of charge of the high-voltage battery, be accelerated electrically up to a speed of approximately 140 km/h.

Characteristics with high power output requests:

• The electric motor supports the combustion engine (boost effect), e.g. when you pull away or accelerate.
  • The high-voltage battery is discharging.

Characteristics when the accelerator pedal is released during the journey:

• The electric motor is operated as an alternator when in overrun mode and during braking.
  • The high-voltage battery is charging.

Notes on electric mode:

• Vehicles with hybrid systems generate significantly less noise when stationary and when being driven than vehicles with combustion engines.
• When you are driving in electric mode, the vehicle may not be heard by other road users due to the significantly lower noise generated.
  For this reason, the vehicle is equipped with a sound generator, which serves as an acoustic vehicle alerting system (AVAS). This safety device is prescribed by law.
  The external noise of the sound generator is perceptible in the vehicle interior at low speeds and does not represent a malfunction.

• If not all the vehicle conditions for electric mode are met, the combustion engine will be switched on.

• Performance restrictions in electric mode are possible as a result of the operating temperature of the high-voltage battery and drive system, the ambient temperature and ageing of the high-voltage battery.

• In electric mode, the maximum power will not be permanently available and may drop to continuous output.

Notes on the acoustic vehicle alerting system:

• The sound generator generates a stationary noise and speed-dependent vehicle noise emissions at speeds of up to around 30 km/h when the vehicle is driving both forwards and in reverse.
• This will help other road users, particularly pedestrians and cyclists, to hear your vehicle better.
• When you drive at speeds above 20 km/h, the acoustic vehicle alerting system will gradually switch off.
• The sound generator will be off when the vehicle is stationary.

Manually disconnecting the high-voltage on-board electrical system

DANGER Risk of death and fire due to modified and/or damaged components of the high-voltage on-board electrical system

The vehicle's high-voltage on-board electrical system is under high voltage. If you modify component parts in the vehicle's high-voltage on-board electrical system or touch damaged component parts, you may be electrocuted. In addition, modified and/or damaged components may cause a fire.

In the event of an accident or impact to the vehicle underbody, components of the high-voltage electrical system may be damaged although the damage is not visible.

▶ Never make any modifications to the high-voltage on-board electrical system.
Do not switch on or use the vehicle if its high-voltage on-board electrical system

components have been modified or damaged.
▶ Never touch damaged components of the high-voltage on-board electrical system.
After an accident, do not touch any components of the high-voltage on-board electrical system.
After an accident, have the vehicle transported away.
Have the components of the high-voltage on-board electrical system checked at a qualified specialist workshop and replaced if necessary.

Requirements

Only disconnect the high-voltage on-board electrical system manually in the following situations:

- The restraint system warning lamp lights up in the driver's display, e.g. after an accident.

- The vehicle is badly damaged, e.g. after an accident, and the restraint system components have not been triggered.

Operating the high-voltage disconnect device

Technical diagram of a car engine bay with labeled components and directional arrows indicating flow or movement.

▶ Switch off the vehicle.
▶ Switch the transmission to position P.
Apply the electric parking brake.

▶ Secure the vehicle against rolling away.

Open the bonnet.

Press release tab ① in the direction of the arrow and pull it out.

Pull high-voltage disconnect device ② in the direction of the arrow until it engages. The high-voltage on-board electrical system is switched off.

All work on the hybrid drive system (including after disconnecting the high-voltage on-board electrical system manually) may only be carried out in a qualified specialist workshop.

Switching on the power supply or the vehicle

WARNING Accident- and risk of injury with unsupervised children in the vehicle

If you leave children unattended in the vehicle, they can in particular

- Open doors and thereby endanger other persons or road users.

• get out of the car and are hit by traffic.
- Operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, forexample.

In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for exampleby:

• releasing the parking brake.
• change the gearbox setting.
- start the vehicle.
▶ Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
▶ Keep the key out of reach of children.

Requirements

• The key is in the vehicle and is recognised.
• The brake pedal is not depressed.

1 START ENGINE STOP

To switch on the power supply: press button once. You can, for example, switch on the wind-screen wipers.

The power supply will be switched off again if the following conditions are met:

• You open the driver's door.
• You press button ① twice more.

To switch on the vehicle: press button ① twice. Indicator and warning lamps will light up on the driver's display.

The vehicle will be switched off again if one of the following conditions is met:

• You do not start the vehicle within 15 minutes and the transmission is in position P or the electric parking brake is applied.
• You press button ① once.

Starting the vehicle

Starting the vehicle with the start/stop button

DANGER Risk of fatal injuries due to exhaust gases

Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Breathing in these exhaust gases is hazardous to health and results in poisoning.

▶ Never leave the engine and, if present, the stationary heater, running in an

enclosed space without sufficient ventilation.

A WARNING Risk of fire due to flammable materials in the engine compartment or on the exhaust system

Flammable materials may ignite.

Therefore, regularly check that there are no flammable foreign materials in the engine compartment or on the exhaust system.

WARNING Accident- and risk of injury with unsupervised children in the vehicle

If you leave children unattended in the vehicle, they can in particular

• Open doors and thereby endanger other persons or road users.
  • get out of the car and are hit by traffic.
• Operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, forexample.

In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for exampleby:

• releasing the parking brake.
- change the gearbox setting.
- start the vehicle.
▶ Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
▶ Keep the key out of reach of children.

Requirements

• The key is in the vehicle and is recognised.

START ENGINE STOP

Shift the transmission to position P or N.
Depress the brake pedal and press button once.
If the vehicle does not start: switch off non-essential consumer equipment and press button ① once.
If the vehicle still does not start and the Place the key in the marked space See Owner's

Manual display message appears on the driver's display: start the vehicle with the key in the marked space (emergency operation mode) (→ page 270).

You can switch off the vehicle while driving. To do this, press and hold button ① for about three seconds or press button ② three times within three seconds. Be sure to observe the safety notes concerning this under "Driving tips" (→ page 275).

Observe any information regarding display messages that may be shown on the driver's display.

Function of the Emotion Start (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)

Diagram of a car dashboard with labeled parts, showing two numbered components and a central brand logo.

Start the vehicle with the start/stop button and simultaneously pull one of steering wheel gearshift paddles ① or ②. The idle speed is briefly increased upon starting and the engine sound is reproduced in a sporty and powerful manner.

Follow the instructions for starting the vehicle in the Owner's Manual for the vehicle.

Starting the vehicle with the key in the marked space (emergency operation mode)

DANGER Risk of fatal injuries due to exhaust gases

Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Breathing in these exhaust gases is hazardous to health and results in poisoning.

▶ Never leave the engine and, if present, the stationary heater, running in an enclosed space without sufficient ventilation.

WARNING Risk of fire due to flammable materials in the engine compartment or on the exhaust system

Flammable materials may ignite.

Therefore, regularly check that there are no flammable foreign materials in the engine compartment or on the exhaust system.

WARNING Accident- and risk of injury with unsupervised children in the vehicle

If you leave children unattended in the vehicle, they can in particular

• Open doors and thereby endanger other persons or road users.
  • get out of the car and are hit by traffic.
• Operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, forexample.

In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for exampleby:

• releasing the parking brake.

• change the gearbox setting.
• start the vehicle.
  ▶ Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
  When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
  Keep the key out of reach of children.

If the vehicle does not start and the Place the key in the marked space See Owner's Manual message appears on the driver's display, you can start the vehicle in emergency mode.

Diagram of car seatbelt mechanism with numbered parts and highlighted keyway

Make sure that marked space ② is empty.
Remove key ① from the key ring.
Place key ① in marked space ② next to symbol ③.
The vehicle will start after a short time.
If you remove key ① from marked space ②, the vehicle can still be driven. For further engine starts, however, key ① must be loca-

ted in marked space ② next to symbol ③ during the entire journey.
Have key ① checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

If the vehicle does not start:

Place key ① in marked space ② and leave it there.
Depress the brake pedal and start the vehicle using the start/stop button.

① You can switch on the power supply or the vehicle with the start/stop button.

Observe any information regarding display messages that may be shown on the driver's display.

Starting the vehicle via Remote Online Services

Cooling or heating the vehicle interior before starting a journey

Ensure the following before starting the engine:

- The legal stipulations in the area where your vehicle is parked allow engine starting via smartphone.

• It is safe to start and run the engine where your vehicle is parked.
  • The fuel tank is sufficiently full.
• The starter battery is sufficiently charged.

Charging the starter battery before starting a journey

You can receive a message on your smartphone when the state of charge of the starter battery is low. You can then start the vehicle with the smartphone to charge the battery. The vehicle is automatically switched off after ten minutes.

Ensure the following before starting the engine:

• The legal stipulations in the area where your vehicle is parked allow engine starting via smartphone.
• It is safe to start and run the engine where your vehicle is parked.
  • The fuel tank is sufficiently full.

Starting the vehicle (Remote Online)

DANGER Risk of fatal injuries due to exhaust gases

Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Breathing in these exhaust gases is hazardous to health and results in poisoning.

Never leave the engine and, if present, the stationary healer, running in an enclosed space without sufficient ventilation.

WARNING Risk of fire due to flammable materials in the engine compartment or on the exhaust system

Flammable materials may ignite.

Therefore, regularly check that there are no flammable foreign materials in the engine compartment or on the exhaust system.

WARNING Risk of crushing or entrapment due to unintentional starting of the engine

Limbs could be crushed or trapped if the engine is started unintentionally during service or maintenance work.

Always secure the engine against unintentional starting before carrying out maintenance or repair work.

WARNING Accident- and risk of injury with unsupervised children in the vehicle

If you leave children unattended in the vehicle, they can in particular

• Open doors and thereby endanger other persons or road users.
  • get out of the car and are hit by traffic.
• Operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, forexample.

In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for exampleby:

• releasing the parking brake.

• change the gearbox setting.
- start the vehicle.
▶ Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
Keep the key out of reach of children.

Requirements

• Park position P is selected.
  • The anti-theft alarm system is not activated.
• The hazard warning light system is switched off.
  • The bonnet is closed.
  • The doors are closed and locked.
  • The windows and sliding sunroof are closed.

Start the vehicle using the smartphone. After every engine start, the engine runs for ten minutes.

You can carry out a maximum of two consecutive starting attempts. You must start the engine with

the key before trying to start the vehicle again with the smartphone.

You can switch off the vehicle at any time as follows:

• Via the Smartphone App
- By pressing the ☑ or ☑ button on the key

i Further information can be found in the smartphone app.

Securing the vehicle against starting before carrying out maintenance or repair work:

Switch on the hazard warning light system or unlock the doors.
Open a side window or the sliding sunroof.

Running-in notes

To preserve the engine during the first 1500 km:

• Drive at varying road speeds and engine speeds.
  • No faster than 140 km/h.

• Drive the vehicle in drive mode [C] or [E].

• Shift to the next higher gear at the very latest when the needle reaches the last third before the red area in the rev counter.

• Do not shift down manually in order to brake.
• Avoid overstraining the vehicle, e.g. driving at full throttle.
• Do not depress the accelerator pedal past the pressure point (kickdown).
• Only increase the engine speed gradually and accelerate the vehicle to full speed after 1500 km.

This also applies when the engine or parts of the drivetrain have been replaced.

Please also observe the following running-in notes:

• In certain handling and driving safety systems, the sensors adjust automatically while a certain distance is being driven after the vehicle has been delivered or after repairs. Full system effectiveness is only reached when this teaching-in process has concluded.
• Brake pads, brake disks and tyres that are either new or have been replaced only achieve

optimum braking effect and grip after driving several hundred kilometres. Compensate the reduced braking effect by applying greater force to the brake pedal.

Engine output and engine torque (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)

The actual (maximum) values that can be achieved for engine output and engine torque may deviate from the certified values within the permissible tolerances according to country-specific guidelines (basis: UN-ECE No. 85 or country-specific guidelines).
Variables that can influence this are, for example:
- Location above sea level
- Fuel quality
- Outside temperature
- Operating temperature of the engine
The availability of the engine operating temperature warning lamp depends on the model.

Until the engine has reached its operating temperature, the engine operating temperature warning lamp is lit.

Engine output and engine torque have been reduced. Take this into account in your driving style.

When the engine operating temperature warning lamp 🙏 goes out, full engine output and engine torque are available to you.

Notes on optimised acceleration

If all necessary requirements and activation conditions are fulfilled, the best possible acceleration can be achieved from a standstill.

Do not use optimised acceleration on public roads. Individual wheels could spin and you could lose control of the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and/or accident.

Be sure to observe the safety notes and information on ESP ^® (→ page 346).

Pulling away with optimised acceleration

WARNING Risk of skidding and accidents due to wheelspin

If you pull away with optimised acceleration, individual wheels could spin and you could lose control of the vehicle.

There is a higher risk of skidding and accidents when ESP ^® is deactivated in particular.

Make sure that there are no persons or obstacles in the vicinity of the vehicle.

Requirements

• the vehicle is run in (→ page 273).
• the vehicle and tyres are in good condition.
• the road surface is high-grip.
- the engine and transmission are at normal operating temperature.

NOTE Increased wear due to optimised acceleration

When pulling away with optimised acceleration, all components of the drivetrain are subjected to a very high load.

This can lead to increased component wear.

Do not always pull away with optimised acceleration.

Engage drive position D ( page 305).
Move the steering wheel to the straight-ahead position.
Select drive program S (→ page 297, 296).
Deactivate ESP ^® (→ page 350).
Depress and hold the brake pedal firmly with your left foot.
With your right foot, fully depress the accelerator pedal.

After no more than five seconds, take your left foot quickly off the brake, but keep the accelerator pedal depressed. The vehicle will pull away at maximum acceleration. Switch on ESP® once the acceleration procedure is complete.

Ending optimised acceleration

Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.
Reactivate ESP®.
i After you pull away with optimised acceleration, components of the drivetrain can become very hot, which means that optimised acceleration values may be reached again only after a few minutes.

Notes on driving

WARNING Risk of accident due to objects in the driver's footwell

Objects in the driver's footwell may impede pedal travel or block a depressed pedal.

This jeopardises the operating and road safety of the vehicle.

Stow all objects in the vehicle securely so that they cannot get into the driver's footwell.

▶ Always fit the floor mats securely and as prescribed in order to ensure that there is always sufficient room for the pedals.

Do not use loose floor mats and do not place floor mats on top of one another.

WARNING Risk of accident due to incorrect footwear

Incorrect footwear includes, for example:

• shoes with platform soles
• shoes with high heels
- slippers

There is a risk of an accident.

Always wear suitable footwear so that you can operate the pedals safely.

WARNING Risk of accident if the vehicle is switched off while driving

If you switch off the vehicle while driving, safety functions are restricted or no longer available.

This may affect the power steering system and the brake force boosting, for example.

You will need to use considerably more force to steer and brake, for example.

Do not switch off the vehicle while driving.

DANGER Risk of fatal injuries due to exhaust gases

Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Breathing in these exhaust gases is hazardous to health and results in poisoning.

▶ Never leave the engine and, if present, the stationary heater, running in an enclosed space without sufficient ventilation.

WARNING Risk of skidding and of an accident due to shifting down on slippery road surfaces

If you shift down on slippery road surfaces to increase the engine braking effect, the drive wheels may lose traction.

Do not shift down on slippery road surfaces to increase the engine braking effect.

A DANGER Risk of fatal injury due to poisonous exhaust gases

If the tailpipe is blocked or sufficient ventilation is not possible, poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide may enter the vehicle. This is the case, for example, if the vehicle gets stuck in the snow.

Keep the tailpipe and the area around the vehicle free from snow when the engine or the stationary heater is running.

Open a window on the side of the vehicle facing away from the wind to ensure an adequate supply of fresh air.

WARNING Risk of accident due to the brake system overheating

If you leave your foot on the brake pedal when driving, the brake system may overheat.

This increases the braking distance and the brake system can even fail.

▶ Never use the brake pedal as a footrest.

Do not depress the brake pedal and the accelerator pedal at the same time while driving.

! NOTE Engine damage due to excessively high engine speeds

The engine will be damaged if you drive with the engine in the overrevving range.

Do not drive with the engine in the over-revving range.

NOTE Causing wear to the brake linings by permanently depressing the brake pedal
Do not permanently depress the brake pedal while driving.
To use braking effect of the engine, shift to a lower gear in good time.
NOTE Damage to the drivetrain and engine when pulling away
Do not warm up the engine while the vehicle is stationary. Pull away immediately.
Avoid high engine speeds and driving at full throttle until the engine has reached its operating temperature.
NOTE Damage to the catalytic converter due to non-combusted fuel
The engine is not running smoothly and is mis-firing.
Non-combusted fuel may get into the catalytic converter.

▶ Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly.
Have the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

NOTE Reduced battery life due to frequent short-distance trips

The 12 V battery may not be sufficiently charged when the vehicle is used only for short-distance trips. This reduces the life of the battery.

▶ Drive longer distances regularly to charge the battery.

NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to not observing the maximum permitted head-room clearance

If the vehicle height is greater than the maximum permitted headroom clearance, the roof and other parts of the vehicle may be damaged.

Observe the signposted headroom clearance.
If the vehicle height is greater than the permitted headroom clearance, do not enter.
▶ Observe the changed vehicle height with add-on roof equipment.

Please bear in mind that all the speed values stated in this Operator's Manual are approximate and are subject to a certain tolerance.

Notes on driving with a roof load, trailer or fully laden vehicle

When driving with a loaded roof luggage rack or trailer as well as with a fully laden or fully occupied vehicle, the vehicle's driving and steering characteristics change.

You should bear the following in mind:

• Do not exceed the permissible roof load and towing capacity. Also observe the information in the Technical Data.
• Distribute the roof load and the load inside the vehicle evenly, placing heavy objects at the

bottom. Also comply with the notes on loading the vehicle ( page 198).

- Drive attentively, and avoid abrupt starts, braking and steering as well as rapid cornering.

Advice on driving on salt-strewn roads

The braking effect is limited on salt-strewn road surfaces.

Therefore, observe the following notes:

• Due to salt build-up on the brake disks and brake pads, the braking distance can increase considerably or result in one-sided braking.
• Maintain a much greater safety distance to the vehicle travelling ahead.

Remove salt build-up as follows:

• Brake occasionally, paying attention to the traffic conditions
• Carefully depress the brake pedal at the end of the journey and when starting the next journey

Notes on aquaplaning

Aquaplaning can take place if a certain depth of water has built up on the road surface.

Observe the following notes during heavy precipitation or in conditions in which aquaplaning may occur:

• Reduce speed
• Avoid tyre ruts
• Avoid sudden steering movements
• Brake carefully

Also observe the notes on regularly checking wheels and tyres ( page 33).

Notes on driving through water on the road

Water ingress can damage the engine, electrics and transmission.

Water can also enter the air intake of the engine and cause engine damage.

Observe the following if you have to drive through water:

• Observe the maximum permissible depth for driving through water ( page 806, 804).
• Drive at walking speed at most; water can otherwise enter the vehicle interior or the engine compartment.

- Vehicles travelling ahead, or oncoming vehicles, can create waves which may exceed the maximum permissible depth of the water.

The braking effect of the brakes is reduced after fording. Brake carefully, paying attention to the traffic conditions until braking power has been fully restored.

Notes on off-road driving

WARNING Risk of accident if you do not keep to line of fall on inclines

If you drive at an angle or turn on an incline, the vehicle could slip sideways, tip and roll-over.

Always drive on inclines in the line of fall (straight up or down) and do not turn.

A WARNING Risk of fire due to flammable material coming into contact with hot parts of the exhaust system

If combustible materials, e.g. leaves, grass or twigs, come into contact with hot parts of the exhaust system, they may ignite.

When driving off-road or on unpaved surfaces, check the underside of the vehicle at regular intervals.
In particular, remove any trapped parts of plants or other flammable material.
If damage should occur, immediately inform a qualified specialist workshop.

When driving off-road, sand, mud and water or water mixed with oil, etc., may get into the brakes. This may lead to a reduction in braking effect or even a total brake failure as a result of increased wear. The braking characteristics will vary depending on the material that has entered the system. Clean the brakes after driving off-road. If you then notice reduced braking effect or hear scraping noises, have the brake system checked

at a qualified specialist workshop. Adapt your driving style to the changed braking characteristics.

NOTE Damage caused by driving over obstacles

The vehicle can be damaged by:

• driving onto high kerbs or unpaved roads.
• quickly driving over obstacles such as kerbs, speed bumps or potholes.
• heavy objects hitting the underbody or chassis components.

Do not drive over obstacles that could damage the vehicle.

▶ Check the vehicle regularly for damage during off-road driving.

Adjust the vehicle speed to suit the road surface conditions.

If there is damage, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage due to non-observance of prohibition signs

Environmental protection has priority. Treat nature with respect.

Be sure to observe prohibition signs.

Check-list before driving off-road

Check the following points before driving off-road:

• Fuel level
  • Vehicles with a diesel engine: AdBlue® level
  • Engine oil level: fill engine oil to the maximum level to ensure full gradeability ( page 30)
• Tyre-change tool kit and spare wheel
• tyres and wheels

Further information about special all-terrain tyres for retrofitting can be obtained from a qualified specialist workshop.

The off-road menu in the multimedia system can support you when driving off-road. Familiarise yourself with its displays and equipment-depend-

ent setting options before going off-road ( page 505).

Off-road driving

Read this section before driving your vehicle off-road. Practise by driving over gentler off-road terrain first.

• Observe the notes on the cross-country ABS ( page 346).
• Select the 📄 (→ page 297, 296) drive program before driving off-road.
• Select a vehicle level suitable for off-road terrain ( page 391). To avoid damaging the vehicle, make sure there is always sufficient ground clearance.
  The high-voltage battery in particular can be damaged by bottoming out or by impacts against the underbody. Please also observe the notes on operating safety ( page 90).

• Always keep the engine running and in gear when driving on downhill gradients and slopes. Observe the notes on driving in mountainous terrain.

• Do not drive on unknown terrain that is not easily visible and stay on marked paths.
  • Always keep the doors and windows closed while the vehicle is in motion.

• Deactivate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC, cruise control and the variable limiter.
• Adapt your driving style to the terrain.
• Do not use the HOLD function on steep downhill or uphill gradients with slippery or loose surfaces.

Driving on sand

When driving on sand, also observe the following instructions:

• Select the drive program.
• Select a higher vehicle level.
• Shift to a lower gear.
• Drive quickly to overcome the rolling resistance; the vehicle may otherwise dig itself in.
• Drive in the tracks of other vehicles if possible. Make sure that the following prerequisites are met:

- the tyre ruts are not too deep.

F167 0009 02

• the sand is firm enough.
• there is sufficient ground clearance.

Fording

Also observe the following information when fording:

• Vehicles with AIRMATIC: select the highest possible vehicle level ( page 391).
  Vehicles with E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL: select the highest possible vehicle level ( page 404).
• Drive no faster than 10 km/h.
• Observe the maximum permissible depth for driving through water ( page 806, 804).
• Switch off automatic climate control (→ page 253).
• Vehicles with auxiliary heater/ventilation: switch the auxiliary heater/ventilation off ( page 54).
• Ensure that a bow wave does not form as you drive.

- Do not stop in the water and do not switch off the engine. Ensure the ECO start/stop function is switched off ( page 283).

Driving in mountainous terrain

Also observe the following information when driving in mountainous terrain:

• Observe the values of the approach/departure angle and the maximum gradient-climbing ability ( page 806, 804).
• Avoid high engine speeds.
• Use the braking power of the engine when driving downhill.
• Shift to a lower gear on uphill gradients and on long, steep downhill gradients.
• Activate DSR before driving downhill, if necessary ( page 368).

Check-list after driving off-road

Driving off-road places greater demands on your vehicle than driving on normal roads. Check the entire vehicle for damage and foreign bodies every time after driving off-road. Foreign bodies in the wheels or drivetrain can lead to imbalances and therefore vibrations.

• If the driving mode is selected: select another driving mode.
• Deactivate DSR.
• Lower the vehicle level again to a level suitable to the road conditions, e.g. to the normal level.
• Apply the brakes to dry them after fording.
• Check that the service brake is working normally after a long downhill stretch.
• Clean the following components every time after driving off-road:
• licence plate number
  headlamps and tail lamps
• tyres, wheels and wheel arches
  underbody
  • After driving through sand, mud, water or gravel, have the following components checked and cleaned:
• brake disks and brake pads
  tyres and wheels
• axle joints

Information on the AMG ceramic high-performance composite brake system

The brake system is designed for heavy loads. This may lead to noise when braking. This effect can also occur after washing the vehicle.

The noise depends on the following factors:

• speed
• brake force
  • environmental conditions, e.g. temperature and air humidity

i Have the brake system checked at a qualified specialist workshop after it has been subjected to extreme loads.

ECO start/stop function

ECO start/stop function

i Plug-in hybrid: this function is not available.
(i) Depending on the engine, the ECO start/stop function is not available in all drive programs. Observe the status display on the driver's display concerning this.

The engine will be switched off automatically in the following situations if all vehicle conditions for an automatic engine stop are met:

• You brake the vehicle to a standstill in transmission position [D] or [N].
• You depress the brake pedal when travelling at a low speed.

If the system has detected one of the following situations, the engine will not stop:

• You stop at a stop sign and there is no vehicle in front of you.
• The vehicle that stopped in front of you pulls away again.
• You manoeuvre, turn the steering wheel sharply or engage reverse gear.

If the system detects an intelligent stop inhibitor, e.g. a stop sign, the engine will not stop. If you activate the HOLD function or engage the park position , the engine can be switched off in spite of an intelligent stop inhibitor.

The engine will restart automatically in the following cases:

• You engage transmission position D or R.
• You depress the accelerator pedal.
• The vehicle requires an automatic engine start.
  • You release the brake pedal.
• You release the brake pedal on a downhill gradient and the vehicle does not roll.
• The vehicle rolls on a downhill gradient and does not automatically enter glide mode at 20 km/h.

ECO start/stop function symbols on the driver's display:

• The Ⓐ symbol (green) appears when the vehicle is at a standstill: the engine was switched off by the ECO start/stop function.
• The symbol (yellow) appears when the vehicle is at a standstill: not all vehicle conditions for an engine stop have been met.
• Neither the Ⓐ symbol nor the Ⓐ symbol appears when the vehicle is at a standstill: an

intelligent stop inhibitor, e.g. a stop sign, has been detected.

- The ^out symbol appears: the ECO start/stop function is deactivated or there is a malfunction.

If the engine was switched off by the ECO start/stop function and you leave the vehicle, a warning tone will sound and the engine will not be restarted. In addition, the following display message will appear on the driver's display:

Vehicle is operational Switch off vehicle before exiting

If you do not switch off the vehicle, it will automatically be switched off after three minutes.

Switching the ECO start/stop function on/off

START ENGINE STOP

Press the ① button. A display will appear on the driver's display when you switch the ECO start/stop function on/off.

i [A^n-1] will be continuously shown on the driver's display while the ECO start/stop function is deactivated.

Switching the ECO start/stop function on or off using the steering wheel button (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)

Observe the notes on the ECO start/stop function in the vehicle Owner's Manual.

You can also switch the ECO start/stop function on or off via the multimedia system.

Diagram of a car interior with numbered components, likely indicating parts of the engine or fan.

Press upper or lower display button ① repeatedly, until it displays the Ⓐ symbol.

If the display button does not show the symbol, then it is hidden. How functions are displayed and the order in which they are displayed can be set in the multimedia system ( page 291).

F167 0009 02

Press corresponding button ②.

The symbol indicates the current status of the ECO start/stop function:

- ⒶOFF (red): deactivated

• (green): activated

- (yellow): inactive

ECO display function

Depending on the model and equipment, your vehicle will have one of the following representations of the ECO display.

The ECO display summarises your driving characteristics from the start of the journey to its completion and assists you in achieving the most economical driving style.

The ECO display assesses the following criteria for an economical driving style:

• coasting at the right times
- consistent speed
• moderate acceleration

CONSTANT 1 Bonus 242 km From start 3 ACCELERATION 4 CONSTANT

The lettering in the segment will light up brightly, the outer edge will light up and the segment will fill up when the following driving style is adopted:

• ① Steady speed
  • ② Gentle deceleration and rolling
  • ③ Moderate acceleration

The lettering in the segment will be grey, the outer edge will be dark and the segment will empty when the following driving style is adopted:

• ① Fluctuations in speed
• Heavy braking
• ③ Sporty acceleration

The ECO display will show you when you have driven economically:

• The three segments will fill up completely at the same time
• The edges around all three segments will light up

The additional range achieved as a result of your driving style in comparison with a driver with a very sporty driving style will be shown in the centre of display ④. The range displayed does not indicate a fixed reduction in consumption.

ECO display 1 2 3

The ECO display shows an evaluation of your driving style on the driver's display depending on the

situation. This enables you to check the efficiency of your driving style and adjust it if necessary. The ECO display menu shows a ball ② that will roll forwards or backwards on a stylised road in the direction of travel according to the driving characteristics.

Above and below the road, lines mark the area for an efficient driving style ③. Ball ② will light up in green if it is rolling within these lines. Outside the lines, the ball will light up in orange.

The overall assessment of your driving style "from start" is indicated using stars ①. It starts with five empty stars, which you can fill one after the other if you drive efficiently. When all five stars are filled, a glow will appear in the background.

① You can call up the ECO display function via the Classic menu (→ page 442).

ECO Assist function (vehicles with 48 V on-board electrical system)

For plug-in hybrids, note the ECO Assist information ( page 288).

i ECO Assist will be active only in drive programs E and C.

ECO Assist analyses data for the vehicle's expected route. This allows the system to optimise the driving style for the route ahead, save fuel and recuperate. If the system detects an event ahead and the vehicle nears the event, ECO Assist will calculate the optimum speed for maximum fuel economy and recuperative energy based on the distance, speed and downhill gradient.

If the deceleration provided by ECO Assist is not sufficient, you must also brake with the service brake. This will be the case particularly if, for example, you pull away again in slow-moving traffic and the distance to the vehicle in front is very short.

125.3 km 24967 ① ② #

① "Foot off the accelerator" recommendation
② Route event ahead

If a route event ahead or vehicle in front is detected that requires an adjustment of your driving style for improved efficiency, symbol ② and the symbol will be displayed in grey.

If you release the accelerator pedal, the symbol will turn green and recuperation in overrun mode will be initiated. If the deceleration is not sufficient, also apply the service brake. If ECO Assist intervenes for a route event ahead (not for a vehicle in front) and you then press the accelerator pedal again, you will end control by ECO Assist.

The ECO Assist display will be hidden again in the following cases:

• You do not react to the ECO Assist recommendation for a long time.
• You depress the accelerator pedal while ECO Assist is intervening for a route event ahead (not for a vehicle in front).
  • ECO Assist cannot identify any further recommendations from the route ahead.

In addition to a vehicle in front 📄, ECO Assist can detect the following route events ② depending on the vehicle's equipment:

Roundabout
T-junction
Downhill gradient
km/h Speed limit

In drive program C, ECO Assist will react only to the "vehicle in front" route event without displaying the route event or recommendation.

System limits

If the calculated route is adhered to when route guidance is active, ECO Assist will operate with greater accuracy. The basic function is also available without active route guidance. Not all information and traffic situations can be foreseen. The quality depends on the map data.

ECO Assist is only an aid. The driver is responsible for keeping a safe distance from the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed and for braking in good time.

The system may be impaired or may not function in the following situations:

• If there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient illumination of the road, highly variable shade conditions, rain, snow, fog or heavy spray.
• If there is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, direct sunlight or reflections.
• If the windscreen is dirty in the vicinity of the multifunction camera.

• If the multifunction camera is misted up, damaged or obscured.

• If road signs are hard to detect, e.g. due to dirt, snow or insufficient lighting, or because they are obscured.

• If the information in the navigation system's digital map is incorrect or out of date.
• If signs are ambiguous, e.g. road signs in road-works or in adjacent lanes.
  • If the radar sensors are dirty or obscured.
• When you drive on roads with steep gradients.
• If there are narrow vehicles in front, such as bicycles or motorcycles.

Recuperative brake system (plug-in hybrid)

Function of the recuperative brake system

The function is only available for plug-in hybrids.

Depending on the selected recuperation level, the electric motor is operated as an alternator when in overrun mode and during braking in order to charge the high-voltage battery while driving. As soon as you take your foot off the accelerator pedal when the vehicle is in motion and in trans-

mission position D, recuperation in overrun mode is initiated.

The higher the recuperation, the more sharply the vehicle is braked when coasting and the more electrical energy is fed into the high-voltage battery.

The deceleration in overrun mode may not be sufficient depending on the driving conditions. Decelerating to a standstill is not possible. Also brake with the service brake if necessary. Always adapt your speed to the driving conditions and keep a sufficient distance.

The recuperative brake system has the following characteristics:

• supports braking with electronically controlled brake force boosting
- converts the kinetic energy of the vehicle into electric energy

If you brake hard, the mechanical brake is also used. This means that the maximum recuperative energy cannot be recovered. The more you drive and brake in an anticipatory manner, the more efficiently energy can be recuperated.

System limits

The braking effect of the electric motor during recuperation in overrun mode may be reduced or may not be available at all in the following situations:

• when the high-voltage battery charge level increases
• if the high-voltage battery is not yet at a normal operating temperature

In these cases, the desired deceleration is set by the brake control system.

Manually setting recuperative deceleration

This function is only available for a plug-in hybrid.

You can use the steering wheel gearshift paddles to adjust the intensity of recuperation in drive programs H, B and EL.

Diagram of a car steering wheel with labeled components 1 and 2, showing dashboard and steering wheel layout.

The following recuperation levels are available:

• D AUTO Intelligent and anticipatory recuperation with ECO Assist (→ page 288)
• D + No recuperation: the vehicle rolls freely
• D Normal recuperation
- D - Increased recuperation: strong deceleration in overrun mode, e.g. for driving on downhill gradients

Standard setting:

• D AUTO: if the ECO Assist function is activated in the multimedia system ( page 289).
• D: if the ECO Assist function is deactivated in the multimedia system.

i D AUTO is only available if the ECO Assist function is activated in the multimedia system and if the function of the radar sensors is not impaired. Also observe the information on vehicle sensors and cameras ( page 343).

To increase recuperation: briefly pull gearshift paddle ①.
To reduce recuperation: briefly pull gearshift paddle 2.
Standard setting: pull and hold gearshift paddle ① or ②, or engage transmission position D again.
When the vehicle is started again, the standard setting is also set.

The driver's display shows the currently selected recuperation level next to the transmission position display.

ECO Assist (plug-in hybrid)

ECO Assist function

The following function depends on the equipment and the country and is available only for plug-in hybrids.

ECO Assist analyses data for the vehicle's expected route. This allows the system to optimally adjust the driving style for the route ahead, save fuel and recuperate. If the system detects an event ahead and the vehicle nears the event, ECO Assist will calculate the optimum speed for maximum fuel economy and recuperative energy based on the distance, speed and downhill gradient.

If the deceleration provided by ECO Assist is not sufficient, you must also brake with the service brake. This will be the case particularly if, for example, you pull away again in slow-moving traffic and the distance to the vehicle in front is very short.

The function will be active in the following circumstances:

• The function is activated in the multimedia system ( page 289).
• The D AUTO recuperation level is selected (→ page 287).
  • M manual gearshifting is not activated.
• Drive program S or is not selected.

125.3 km 24967 ① ② #

① "Foot off the accelerator" recommendation
Route event ahead

If a route event that you can deal with more efficiently by adjusting your driving style is detected

ahead, corresponding symbol ② and the symbol will be displayed in grey.

If you release the accelerator pedal, the symbol will turn green and recuperation in overrun mode will be initiated. If the deceleration is not sufficient, also apply the service brake.

If ECO Assist intervenes for a route event ahead and you press the accelerator pedal, you will end control by ECO Assist. This does not apply in the case of a vehicle in front.

The ECO Assist display will be hidden again in the following cases:

• You do not react to the ECO Assist recommendation for a long time.
• You press the accelerator pedal while ECO Assist is intervening because of a route event ahead. This does not apply in the case of a vehicle in front.
  • ECO Assist cannot identify any further recommendations from the route ahead.

In addition to a vehicle in front 📄, ECO Assist can detect the following route events ② depending on the vehicle's equipment:

Roundabout

S-bend

Sharp bend

T-junction

Downhill gradient

Speed limit

System limits

If the calculated route is adhered to when route guidance is active, ECO Assist will operate with greater accuracy. The basic function is also available without active route guidance. Not all information and traffic situations can be foreseen. The quality depends on the map data.

ECO Assist is only an aid. The driver is responsible for keeping a safe distance from the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed and for braking in good time.

The system may be impaired or may not function in the following situations:

• If there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient illumination of the road, highly variable shade conditions, rain, snow, fog or heavy spray.
• If there is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, direct sunlight or reflections.
• If the windscreen is dirty in the vicinity of the multifunction camera.
• If the multifunction camera is misted up, damaged or obscured.
• If road signs are hard to detect, e.g. due to dirt, snow or insufficient lighting, or because they are obscured.
• If the information in the navigation system's digital map is incorrect or out of date.
• If signs are ambiguous, e.g. road signs in road-works or in adjacent lanes.
  • If the radar sensors are dirty or obscured.
• When you drive on roads with steep gradients.
• If there are narrow vehicles in front, such as bicycles or motorcycles.

Activating and deactivating ECO Assist Multimedia system:

Settings

Assistance

iving

Activate or deactivate the function.

Function of the route-based operating-mode strategy (plug-in hybrid)

The following function is country-dependent and available only in conjunction with an integrated navigation system.

The route-based operating-mode strategy is active under the following conditions:

• Drive program H is selected.
• The "route based" option ( page 298) is selected for drive program H in the DYNAMIC SELECT menu.
• Route guidance is active.
• The state of charge of the high-voltage battery is sufficient.

If the function is active, data on the further course of the route is evaluated. This includes e.g. road type, speed limits and altitude data.

The hybrid system then adapts the operating strategy to the further course of the route:

• Use of electrical energy and the combustion engine is adapted.
• The state of charge of the high-voltage battery is controlled accordingly.
• Electrical energy is reserved especially for electric mode, e.g. in urban route sections or areas with low emission zones.
• The vehicle automatically selects the operating mode.

Function of the haptic accelerator pedal (plug-in hybrid)

The haptic accelerator pedal has an additional point of resistance followed by increased pedal resistance to help you drive in all-electric mode.

Characteristics of the additional point of resistance:

• Available only in drive program
- Is used when the electric motor power availability display (POWER) is full
- Indicates the maximum available electric performance

The subsequent increased pedal resistance indicates that the journey is being continued with the combustion engine.

AMG Real Performance Sound

Selecting a sound characteristic with the steering-wheel button

You can select a comfortable (Balanced) or a sporty (Powerful) sound characteristic using the steering-wheel button or the multimedia system ( page 300).

Diagram of a car intake manifold with numbered parts indicating specific components or parts in the intake.

Press upper or lower display button ① repeatedly, until it displays the symbol.
If the display button does not show the symbol, then it is hidden. How functions are displayed and the order in which they are displayed can be set in the multimedia system ( page 291).
Press corresponding button ②. The colour of the button symbol indicates the currently selected sound characteristic:

• Blue: Balanced - comfortable
- Red: Powerful - sporty

Function of the AMG steering-wheel buttons

Diagram of a car interior showing labeled parts with numbered annotations

The AMG steering-wheel buttons are an additional control element with two buttons on the steering wheel.

You can assign two vehicle functions of your choice to the control element. You can change between the available functions for the corresponding button ② by pressing the upper or lower part of the display button ① repeatedly. The display buttons ① show each function selected.

The following functions are available depending on the equipment:

ESP ^ (→ page 347)
AMG RIDE CONTROL + (→ page 396)
AMG ACTIVE RIDE CONTROL (→ page 397)

Manual gearshifting ( page 306)

ECO start/stop function (→ page 283)

AMG Real Performance Sound (→ page 290)

Camera views ( page 410)

AMG DYNAMICS ( page 295)

In addition, all functions that you have created as favourites in the multimedia system are available for selection. Information about favourites

i Individual functions may not be shown. How functions are displayed and the order in which they are displayed can be set in the multimedia system ( page 291).

If you have assigned a function to one of the display buttons ①, you can operate this function with the corresponding button ②.

F167 0009 02

The assignment of the display buttons Ⓞ remains stored even after the vehicle is started again. The operating status of the respective function is, however, reset to the basic setting.

Setting the AMG steering wheel buttons

Multimedia system:

→ Settings ▶ System

▶ Control elements

▶ AMG steering-wheel buttons

The SETTINGS SELECT menu can also be called up using the DYNAMIC SELECT button or by a long press on the respective display button.

The left display buttons on the steering wheel can be set in the SETTINGS SELECT menu.

In the media display, select the upper or lower display button and switch to the editing mode by means of a long press.

Press + and select the desired function from the list.
The selected function is assigned to the corresponding display button and can now be called up directly by simply pressing it.

Deleting button assignment

Select the upper or lower display button and switch to editing mode by pressing and holding it.
Press ☒ to delete the selected display button assignment.

DYNAMIC SELECT

Function of DYNAMIC SELECT

DYNAMIC SELECT allows a drive program to be selected quickly according to the current driving situation or the desired vehicle characteristics. You can select the following drive programs.

(i) Depending on the engine and equipment, the vehicle has different drive programs.

The drive program selected will appear on the driver's display.

I\* Individual

• Individual settings ( page 298)
- Individual settings (plug-in hybrid) ( page 298)

Sport

• Maximum output is available
- Sporty driving
- Sporty, but with an emphasis on stability
- Enables a sporty driver to adopt a more active driving style
- Driving with the combustion engine and reinforced boost effect (plug-in hybrid)
- Suitable only for good road conditions, a dry surface and a clear stretch of road

- Vehicles with AIRMATIC or E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL: lowers the vehicle to low level -1

- Plug-in hybrids with AIRMATIC: - Adjusts the vehicle to normal level - From 140 km/h: lowers the vehicle to low level -1

- Below 40 km/h: raises the vehicle to normal level

Hybrid (plug-in hybrid)

• Comfortable and economical driving
• Balance between traction and stability
• Recommended for all road conditions
• Full development of all intelligent hybrid functions
- Adjustable recuperation in overrun mode
- The selection of the appropriate drive type by the hybrid system depends on the driving situation and the route
• Vehicles with AIRMATIC:
- Adjusts the vehicle to normal level
- From 140 km/h: lowers the vehicle to low level -1
Below 40 km/h: raises the vehicle to normal level

Comfort

• Comfortable and economical driving

• Balance between traction and stability

• Recommended for all road conditions
• Vehicles with AIRMATIC or E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL:

• Adjusts the vehicle to normal level
  From 140 km/h: lowers the vehicle to low level -1
  Below 40 km/h: raises the vehicle to normal level

cv Curve

• Available only for vehicles with E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL
• Comfortable driving with curve tilting function
• Balance between traction and stability
• Recommended for all road conditions
- Adjusts the vehicle to normal level
- From a speed of approx. 140 km/h: lowers the vehicle to low level -1
- Below a speed of approx. 40 km/h: raises the vehicle to normal level

EL Electric (plug-in hybrid)

• Electric mode - driving without the combustion engine is possible up to approximately 140 km/h
• Adjustable recuperation in overrun mode
• Adaptation of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC for electric mode
• Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the maximum set speed for cruise control, the limiter and Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC can be limited to the maximum speed possible in electric mode

• Activation of the combustion engine via the point of resistance of the accelerator pedal (kickdown)
  • Vehicles with AIRMATIC:

• Adjusts the vehicle to normal level
  From 140 km/h: lowers the vehicle to low level -1

• Below 40 km/h: raises the vehicle to normal level

B Hold battery (plug-in hybrid)

• Prioritises maintaining the state of charge of the high-voltage battery, e.g. for subsequent journeys in inner-city/low-emission zones
• The selection of the appropriate drive type by the hybrid system depends on the driving situation and the route

• Adjustable recuperation in overrun mode
  • Vehicles with AIRMATIC:

• Adjusts the vehicle to normal level

• From 140 km/h: lowers the vehicle to low level -1
  Below 40 km/h: raises the vehicle to normal level

E Eco

• Particularly economical driving
• Balance between traction and stability
• Recommended for all road conditions
- Vehicles with AIRMATIC or E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL:

- Adjusts the vehicle to normal level

• From 140 km/h: lowers the vehicle to low level -1
• Below 40 km/h: raises the vehicle to normal level

Offroad

• For driving off-road, e.g. on dirt tracks, loose surfaces, gravel or sand, as well as on difficult, uneven terrain, where there are no firm road surfaces and over rocky terrain
• Intervenes later if there is oversteer or understeer, thus improving traction
  • Not suitable for use on public roads
• Can be selected up to a maximum of 100 km/h
  • From 110 km/h: switches to C
  • Vehicles with AIRMATIC or E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL:
  Below 60 km/h: raises the vehicle to off-road level +1
• From a speed of approx. 80 km/h: lowers the vehicle to normal level and

Below a speed of approx. 45 km/h: raises the vehicle to off-road level +1 again

- When the system switches to C: lowers the vehicle to normal level

• Vehicles with Offroad package:

• Below 90 km/h: raises the vehicle to off-road level +1
• When the system switches to Ⓗ: lowers the vehicle to normal level and Below a speed of approx. 75 km/h, it is possible to select 📄 again

Below a speed of approx. 60 km/h, you can also manually raise the vehicle to an off-road level, depending on the vehicle's equipment ( page 391).

- Plug-in hybrid:

• From 110 km/h: switches to [H] and lowers the vehicle to normal level
• Driving in hybrid or electric mode, depending on a sufficient charge status of the high-voltage battery and the setting in the multimedia system ( page 298)

Depending on the situation, cylinders can be briefly deactivated in the E and C drive programs, depending on the engine.
The ESP ^® settings in drive programs E and C are designed for stability. Therefore, choose one of these drive programs especially when transporting roof loads, in trailer operation and when the vehicle is fully loaded or fully occupied. Plug-in hybrid: This also applies for drive programs H, EL and B.

Depending on the drive program, the following systems will change their characteristics:

- Drive

• Engine and transmission management
• Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
• Availability of glide mode

- ESP®

- Vehicles with AIRMATIC or E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL: Suspension

• Suspension and damping
• Vehicle level (speed-dependent)

- Steering

Function of DYNAMIC SELECT (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)

DYNAMIC SELECT allows a drive program to be selected quickly according to the current driving situation or the desired vehicle characteristics.

Depending on the engine and equipment, the vehicle has different drive programs.

You can select the following drive programs:

Sand

- Improved traction thanks to late intervention in the event of understeer or oversteer

- Optimised handling for driving on sand

- Not suitable for use on public roads

- Trail

- Improved traction thanks to late intervention in the event of understeer or oversteer

- Optimised handling for driving on easily negotiable off-road terrain with a loose surface, e.g. on dirt roads, gravel or sand

- Not suitable for use on public roads

• Slippery

- Optimised pulling away and driving characteristics in wintry and slippery road conditions

• C Comfort

- Comfortable and economical driving

- Balance between traction and stability

- Individual

- Customised settings for drive, suspension, steering and ESP®

• S Sport

- Sporty driving

Balance between stability and sportiness

- Suitable only for good road conditions, a dry surface and a clear stretch of road

• S+ Sport+

- Particularly sporty driving

- Emphasises the vehicle's own oversteer and understeer characteristics

- Suitable only for good road conditions, a dry surface and a clear stretch of road

F167 0009 02

- Race

- Maximum sportiness

- Particularly firm suspension tuning

- Sporty sound from the exhaust system

The drive program is only available for the Mercedes-AMG GLE 63 S 4MATIC+ model.

The drive program offers driving characteristics suited to the racetrack and must not be used on normal roads. The drive program may be activated and used only on dedicated race circuits, not on public roads.

Mercedes-AMG recommends selecting drive program C when in city traffic or stop-and-go traffic.

Depending on the drive program selected, the following vehicle characteristics will change:

- Drive

- AMG DYNAMICS

The four agility functions, Basic, Advanced, Pro and Master, as well as the two agility functions for the off-road drive program,

Slide and Traction, will be selected automatically depending on the drive program.

• The steering, shift timing point, all-wheel drive and stabilisation functions will be adapted to the selected drive program.
• When ESP ^ is activated, the Pro agility function will be selected in the [icon] drive program. The Master function will be selected automatically when ESP ^ is deactivated.
• When ESP ^ is activated, the Basic agility function will be selected in drive programs and. When ESP ^ is switched to SPORT ESP _SPDR or is switched off ESP OFF, the Slide and Traction functions will be selected automatically.

• Real Performance Sound
- Suspension
- Steering
• Availability of glide mode
• 4MATIC+ all-wheel drive

① You can set the drive program characteristics using the multimedia system ( page 300).
You can adjust certain agility functions of AMG DYNAMICS using the AMG steering-wheel buttons.

Notes on the roof load display

Certain drive programs and ESP® settings are unsuitable for transporting a roof load.
If one of these drive programs is set or selected, the symbol is shown as a warning. When this symbol is shown, the selected drive program is not suitable for transporting a load on the roof. The following drive programs are affected:

• Drive program [S] Sport
• Drive program 📄 Individual with the ESP® Sport setting

Selecting a drive program

DYNAMIC ①

Push DYNAMIC SELECT switch ① forwards or backwards. The drive program selected will appear on the driver's display.

In the drive program, some driving systems are restricted in their function or not available. When selecting the drive program, a confirmation prompt therefore appears on the central display before the drive program is activated. Plug-in hybrid: in the drive program, you can switch between hybrid and electric mode via the multimedia system (→ page 298).

Selecting a drive program (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)

Selection with right-hand steering-wheel button

Diagram of a car interior with labeled parts, showing a circular component and numbered annotations.

Turn rotary switch ②. The selected drive program will appear on display button ① and on the driver's display.
i Individual drive programs may not be shown. How drive programs are displayed and the order in which they are displayed can be set in the multimedia system ( page 300).
To select the drive program directly: press display button 1.

Selection via the central display (multimedia system)

DYNAMIC 3

Push DYNAMIC SELECT switch ③ forwards or backwards and select the drive program via the central display and set its properties ( page 300).

Configuring DYNAMIC SELECT in the multimedia system

Multimedia system:

→ Settings → Vehicle → DYNAMIC SELECT

Setting drive program I

Select Individual.
▶ Select and set a category.
i A sporty ESP mode can be set in conjunction with a sporty suspension mode.

Switching the reset display on/off

▶ Activate or deactivate Ask when starting.
This function must be activated for each user profile separately. Only when this function is activated will the drive program and ECO start/stop setting for the previous journey be saved for the respective user profile.

Function on: the next time the vehicle is started a prompt appears asking whether the last active drive program should be restored. If the ECO start/stop function was deactivated, an additional prompt appears asking if the function should remain deactivated.

The prompt only appears if the previously active settings deviate from the standard settings.

Function off: the next time the vehicle is started the C drive program is set automatically. The ECO start/stop function is activated automatically.

Configuring DYNAMIC SELECT in the MMS (plug-in hybrid and electric vehicles)

Multimedia system:

→ Settings → Vehicle → DYNAMIC SELECT

Setting drive program I

Select Individual. Select and set a category.
Setting the H drive program
Select Hybrid.

Select Route-based or Standard. If route guidance is active and the Route-based option has been activated, the electrical energy is distributed intelligently over the entire route. In built-up areas, electric mode is preferred, while on the motorway the combustion engine is used. With the Standard option, the vehicle drives in its standard drive program (EL Electric or H Hybrid). There is no distribution of electrical energy over the entire route. The high-voltage battery is exhausted and the vehicle is then driven by the combustion engine.

Switching the reset display on/off

▶ Activate or deactivate Ask when starting.
This function must be activated for each user profile separately. The drive program for the respective user profile of the last driver is only stored if this function is activated.

Function on: the next time the vehicle is started a prompt appears asking whether the last active drive program should be restored.

The prompt only appears if the previously active settings deviate from the standard settings.

Function off: if the EL drive program was the last one active, and all requirements for the drive program are fulfilled, this will be automatically selected the next time the vehicle is started. If another drive program was active, then the H drive program is set automatically.

Function off: the next time the vehicle is started the C drive program is set automatically.

Displaying vehicle data

Multimedia system:

Select Vehicle.

The vehicle data is displayed.

Displaying engine data

Multimedia system:

Info

Select Engine.

The engine data is displayed.

The actual maximum values that can be achieved for engine output and engine torque may deviate from the certified values within the country-specific guidelines for permissible tolerances (basis: UN-ECE No. 85 or country-specific guidelines).

Variables that can influence this are, for example:

• Sea level
• Fuel quality
• Outside temperature
• Operating temperature of the engine

Adjust your driving style accordingly.

The warning lamp in the driver's display is on until the engine has reached operating temperature.

(i) The values displayed serve only as orientation. The values for engine output and engine torque shown in the media display may deviate from the actual values.
The warning lamp to show the power output limitation after starting the vehicle is not available in all vehicle models.

Calling up the fuel consumption indicator

Multimedia system:

Select Consumption.
The current and average fuel consumption will be displayed.

Setting AMG DYNAMIC SELECT in the MBUX multimedia system

Multimedia system:

Settings Vehicle

DYNAMIC SELECT

Overview of the AMG DYNAMIC SELECT menu

1 C I S S* 2 3 RECOISE UNICRAFT SPORT DYNAMIC RUNOFF SPORT SPORT ON-CLOSES SPORT TENDERSON

① AMG drive program settings
2 Drive programs
③ ESP ^® (→ page 347)
The AMG DYNAMIC SELECT menu can also be called up using the DYNAMIC SELECT button.

Select the appropriate drive program.
The settings of the drive programs can be adjusted individually.
Select the desired tab on the left and make the relevant setting.

Setting options for the drive programs

- AMG DYNAMICS:

Basic/Advanced/Pro/Master

- Suspension:

Comfort/Sport/Sport+

- Sound:

Balanced/Powerful

- Drive (can only be set in the ☐ drive program):

Reduced/Moderate/Sport/Dynamic

Automatic transmission

DIRECT SELECT lever

Function of the DIRECT SELECT lever

WARNING Risk of accident due to incorrect gearshifting

If the engine speed is higher than the idle speed and you engage the transmission position [D] or [R], the vehicle may accelerate sharply.

If you engage the transmission position D or R when the vehicle is at a standstill, always depress the brake pedal firmly and do not accelerate at the same time.

WARNING Accident- and risk of injury with unsupervised children in the vehicle

If you leave children unattended in the vehicle, they can in particular

• Open doors and thereby endanger other persons or road users.
  • get out of the car and are hit by traffic.
• Operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, forexample.

In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for exampleby:

• releasing the parking brake.
- change the gearbox setting.
- start the vehicle.

▶ Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
▶ Keep the key out of reach of children.

Use the DIRECT SELECT lever to switch the transmission position. The current transmission position will be shown on the driver's display.

Diagram showing car steering wheel and dashboard with directional arrows and labeled components (R, N, P, D)

P Park position
R Reverse gear
N Neutral
D Drive position

Engaging reverse gear R

WARNING Risk of accident due to incorrect gearshifting

If the engine speed is higher than the idle speed and you engage the transmission position [D] or [R], the vehicle may accelerate sharply.

If you engage the transmission position D or R when the vehicle is at a standstill, always depress the brake pedal firmly and do not accelerate at the same time.

Diagram showing car steering wheel and internal gear shift with directional arrows and a labeled sensor device (R)

Depress the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT lever upwards past the first point of resistance.

Engaging neutral N

WARNING Risk of accident due to incorrect gearshifting

If the engine speed is higher than the idle speed and you engage the transmission position [D] or [R], the vehicle may accelerate sharply.

If you engage the transmission position D or R when the vehicle is at a standstill, always depress the brake pedal firmly and do not accelerate at the same time.

Diagram showing car steering wheel and internal valve mechanism with directional arrows and labeled components

Depress the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down to the first point of resistance.
To shift into neutral N with the vehicle switched on, push the selector lever up or down for several seconds to the first point of resistance.

Subsequently releasing the brake pedal will allow you to move the vehicle freely, e.g. to push it or low it away.

Proceed as follows if you want the automatic transmission to remain in neutral N, even if the vehicle is switched off or the driver's door is opened:

Depress the brake pedal and engage neutral N when the vehicle is at a standstill.
Release the brake pedal.
▶ Switch off the vehicle.

The Risk of vehicle rolling away N activated manually No automatic switch to P message appears in the driver's display.

If you then exit the vehicle leaving the key in the vehicle, the automatic transmission remains in neutral N.

The park position [P] is automatically re-engaged as soon as one of the following conditions is met:

• You switch to transmission position D or R.
• You press the button P.

Engaging park position P

WARNING Accident- and risk of injury with unsupervised children in the vehicle

If you leave children unattended in the vehicle, they can in particular

• Open doors and thereby endanger other persons or road users.
  • get out of the car and are hit by traffic.
• Operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, forexample.

In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for exampleby:

• releasing the parking brake.
• change the gearbox setting.
- start the vehicle.
▶ Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
Keep the key out of reach of children.

! NOTE Damage due to engaging park position [P] while the vehicle is rolling

If you shift the transmission into park position P while the vehicle is rolling, the transmission may be damaged.

If the vehicle is rolling, do not open a door.
Only engage the park position P when the vehicle is stationary.

Diagram showing car interior with steering wheel, dashboard, and close-up of a battery plug labeled '1'

Observe the notes on parking the vehicle ( page 336).
Depress the brake pedal until the vehicle comes to a standstill.
When the vehicle is stationary, press button ①.

When the transmission position display shows , the park position is engaged. If the transmission position display does not appear,

apply the parking brake and secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away.

Depending on the situation, it may take a short time until is engaged. Therefore, always pay attention to the transmission position display.

Park position [P] will be engaged automatically if one of the following conditions is met:

• You switch the stationary vehicle off in transmission position D or R.
• You open the driver's door when the vehicle is stationary in transmission position D or R.
• When the vehicle is rolling, you switch if off in transmission position D or R and bring it to a standstill.
• When the vehicle is rolling, you shift to transmission position N, bring the vehicle to a standstill and open the driver's door when the vehicle is stationary.
• Engaging park position P automatically is required by the vehicle.

To manoeuvre with an open driver's door, open the driver's door while the vehicle is stationary and engage transmission position [D] or again.

Engaging drive position D

WARNING Risk of accident due to incorrect gearshifting

If the engine speed is higher than the idle speed and you engage the transmission position D or R, the vehicle may accelerate sharply.

If you engage the transmission position D or R when the vehicle is at a standstill, always depress the brake pedal firmly and do not accelerate at the same time.

Diagram showing car steering wheel and dashboard with directional arrows and a labeled sensor or device component

Depress the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT lever down past the first point of resistance.

When the automatic transmission is in transmission position , it will shift gears automatically. This depends, among other things, on the following factors:

• The selected drive program
• The position of the accelerator pedal

F167 0009 02

- The driving speed

Rocking the vehicle free

Rocking the vehicle free may help to free the vehicle if it has become stuck in slush or snow. To rock the vehicle free, move the DIRECT SELECT lever upwards and downwards past the point of resistance to switch between transmission positions D and R.

① The maximum design speed for switching between D and R is approx. 9 km/h.

Manual gearshifting

Permanent setting (vehicles with Off-Road package or E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL)

For vehicles without an Offroad package or E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL, activate or deactivate the permanent setting via the multimedia system ( page 307).

Diagram showing car interior with a highlighted switch labeled 'M' and number 1, alongside an inset of the switch mechanism.

To activate/deactivate: pull rocker switch ① If the indicator lamp is lit, manual shifting is activated. The driver's display shows the current gear.

Temporary setting

For plug-in hybrids, observe the information regarding the regenerative brake system ( page 286).

Diagram of a car steering wheel with labeled components 1 and 2, showing dashboard and steering wheel layout.

To activate: pull steering wheel gearshift paddle ① or ②.

Manual shifting will be activated for a short time. Transmission position M and the current gear will appear on the instrument display.

To deactivate: pull and hold steering wheel gearshift paddle ②.

Transmission position D will appear on the instrument display.

To permanently shift the gears manually in drive program using the steering wheel gearshift paddles, select the M setting for the transmission.

Shifting

Diagram of a car steering wheel with labeled components 1 and 2

To shift up: pull steering wheel gearshift paddle ②.
To shift down: pull steering wheel gearshift paddle ①.

Manual shifting (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)

You can also activate and deactivate manual gearshifting via the multimedia system ( page 307).

Technical diagram showing a mechanical component with numbered parts labeled 1 and 2

Press upper or lower display button ① repeatedly, until it displays the symbol.
If the display button does not show the symbol, then it is hidden. How functions are displayed and the order in which they are displayed can be set in the multimedia system (→ page 291).
To activate/deactivate: press the corresponding button 2.

The symbol indicates the currently selected transmission position:

• M (red): manual gearshifting
• D (blue): automatic transmission

Shifting up and down

! NOTE Damage to the engine due to shifting up too late

The automatic transmission does not shift up in manual mode even when the engine's limiting speed is reached.

The fuel supply is interrupted in order to prevent the engine from overrevving.

Shift up before the engine speed reaches the red area in the rev counter.

Diagram of a car dashboard with labeled parts, showing two numbered components and a central brand emblem.

To shift up: pull steering wheel paddle shifters ②.

To shift down: pull steering wheel paddle shifters ①.

1 210 240 270 300 330 2 1 0

If the engine speed is too high or too low, you will not be able to change gear using the steering wheel paddle shifters. In this case, segments will light up red on the driver display.

Permanently activating or deactivating manual shifting

Multimedia system:

Settings Vehicle Driving
▶ Permanently switch the function on or off.

Gearshift recommendation

The gearshift recommendation assists you in adopting an economical driving style.

8 100% 50 R N P ① C M9↓8

If gearshift recommendation ① appears next to the transmission position display, shift to the recommended gear.

Using kickdown

▶ Maximum acceleration: depress the accelerator pedal beyond the point of resistance.

To protect against engine overrev, the automatic transmission will shift up to the next gear when maximum engine speed has been reached.

Glide mode function

With an anticipatory driving style, Glide mode helps you to reduce fuel consumption.

Glide mode is characterised by the following:

• The combustion engine is disconnected from the drivetrain and continues to run in neutral.
• The transmission position display D is shown in green.
• Vehicles with 48 V on-board electrical system: The combustion engine can be switched off. All of the vehicle functions remain active.

Glide mode will be activated if the following conditions are met:

• Drive program E is selected.
  • The speed is within a suitable range.

• The road's course is suitable, e.g. no steep uphill or downhill gradients or tight bends.

• There is no trailer hitched up to the trailer hitch, and no bicycle rack fitted.

• You do not depress the accelerator or brake pedal (except for light brake applications).

Glide mode can also be activated if you have selected the "Eco" setting for the drive in the drive program [1].

Glide mode will be deactivated again if one of the conditions is no longer met.

Glide mode can also be prevented by the following parameters:

• Incline
• Downhill gradient
• Temperature
• Height
• speed
  • Operating status of the engine
• Traffic situation

Function of glide mode (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)

With an anticipatory driving style, glide mode helps you to reduce fuel consumption.

When you drive in glide mode, the ▲ symbol will appear on the driver's display and the combustion engine will be switched off. All of the vehicle functions remain active.

Glide mode will be activated if the following conditions are met:

• The ECO start/stop function is switched on.
- Drive program 📋 is selected with the drive setting "Moderate" or "Reduced".
• The speed is within a suitable range.
- The road's course is suitable, e.g. no steep uphill or downhill gradients or tight bends.
• The state of charge of the battery is sufficient.
- You are no longer depressing the accelerator or brake pedal.

Glide mode will be deactivated again if one of the conditions is no longer met.

Function of 4MATIC

4MATIC ensures that all four wheels are driven. Together with ESP® and 4ETS, 4MATIC improves the traction of your vehicle whenever a driven wheel spins due to insufficient traction.

If you fail to adapt your driving style, 4MATIC can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics. 4MATIC cannot take account of road, weather and traffic conditions. 4MATIC is only an aid. You are responsible especially for maintaining a safe distance from the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in lane.

In wintry road conditions, the maximum effect of 4MATIC can be achieved only if you use winter tyres (M+S tyres), with snow chains if necessary.

Refuelling

Refuelling the vehicle

WARNING Risk of fire or explosion from fuel

Fuels are highly flammable.

▶ Fire, naked flames, smoking and creating sparks must be avoided.
Before refuelling, switch off the vehicle and, if fitted, the stationary heater and keep switched off during filling.

WARNING Risk of injury from fuels

Fuels are poisonous and hazardous to your health.

Do not swallow fuel or let it come into contact with skin, eyes or clothing.
Do not inhale fuel vapour.
Keep children away from fuel.
Keep doors and windows closed during the refuelling process.

If you or other people come into contact with fuel, observe the following:

Immediately rinse fuel off your skin with soap and water.
If fuel comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse them thoroughly with clean water. Seek medical attention immediately.
If you swallow fuel, seek medical attention immediately. Do not induce vomiting.
Change immediately out of clothing that has come into contact with fuel.

WARNING Risk of fire and explosion due to electrostatic charge

Electrostatic charge can ignite fuel vapour.

Before you open the fuel filler cap or take hold of the pump nozzle, touch the metallic vehicle body.

To avoid creating another electrostatic charge, do not get into the vehicle again during the refuelling process.

WARNING Risk of fire from fuel mixture

Vehicles with a diesel engine:

If you mix diesel fuel with petrol, the flash point of the fuel mixture is lower than that of pure diesel fuel.

While the vehicle is running, component parts in the exhaust system may overheat without warning.

▶ Never refuel using petrol.
▶ Never mix petrol with diesel fuel.

NOTE Damage caused by the wrong fuel

Vehicles with a petrol engine:

Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system, the engine and the emission control system.

▶ Only refuel using unleaded, sulphur-free spark-ignition engine fuel that conforms

to European EN 228, or an equivalent specification.

Fuel of this specification may contain up to 10% ethanol. Your vehicle is suitable for use with E10 fuel.

Never refuel with one of the following fuels:

• Diesel
• Regular petrol with an octane number lower than 91 RON
- Petrol with more than 10% ethanol by volume, e.g. E15, E20, E85, E100
- Petrol with more than 3% methanol by volume, e.g. M15, M30
• Petrol with additives containing metal

If you have accidentally refuelled with the wrong fuel:

▶ Do not switch on the vehicle.
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

NOTE Damage caused by the wrong fuel

Vehicles with a diesel engine:

Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system, the engine and the emission control system.

Only refuel using sulphur-free diesel fuel that conforms to European standard EN 590, or an equivalent specification. In countries without sulphur-free diesel fuel, refuel using only low-sulphur diesel fuel with a sulphur content less than 50 ppm.

Never refuel with one of the following fuels:

• Petrol
• Marine diesel
• Heating oil
  • Pure bio-diesel or vegetable oil
• Paraffin or kerosene

If you have accidentally refuelled with the wrong fuel:

Do not switch on the vehicle.
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

! NOTE Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a petrol engine

If you have accidentally refuelled with the wrong fuel:

- Do not switch on the vehicle. Otherwise fuel can enter the engine. Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system and the engine. The repair costs are high.

Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained completely.

NOTE Do not use petrol to refuel vehicles with a diesel engine

If you have accidentally refuelled with the wrong fuel:

• Do not switch on the vehicle. Otherwise, fuel can enter the fuel system. Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system and the engine. The repair costs are high.
  Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
  Have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained completely.

NOTE Damage to the fuel system due to overfilling the fuel tank

Only fill the fuel tank until the pump nozzle switches off.
If too much fuel has been added due, for example, to a faulty filling pump:
Do not switch on the vehicle.

Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

NOTE Fuel may spray out when you remove the fuel pump nozzle

Only fill the fuel tank until the pump nozzle switches off.

Requirements

• The vehicle is unlocked.
- Plug-in hybrid with petrol engine: The fuel tank was vented before refuelling ( page 313). This function is country-dependent.

Observe the notes on service fluids and fuel. The recommended octane number for your vehicle can be found on the information label in the fuel filler flap.

Diagram showing car interior components with numbered labels and directional arrows indicating movement or change.

① Fuel filler flap
2 Bracket for fuel filler cap
3 Fuel type
QR code for rescue card
5 Tyre pressure table
Plug-in hybrid with a petrol engine: The fuel filler flap opens automatically after the fuel tank has been vented ( page 313).

Press on the rear part of fuel filler flap ①.
Turn the fuel filler cap anti-clockwise and remove it.
Insert fuel filler cap from above into bracket 2.
Completely insert the pump nozzle into the tank filler neck, hook in place and refuel.
Only fill the fuel tank until the pump nozzle switches off.

Vehicles with a diesel engine: The tank filler neck is designed for refuelling at diesel filling pumps.

Your vehicle is equipped with an incorrect fuel protection system to prevent filling up with the wrong fuel. This function may be deactivated in some countries due to local circumstances. For more information, consult a Mercedes-Benz service centre.

Vehicles with a diesel engine: Refuel with at least 5 litres of diesel if the fuel tank has been run dry completely.

① Vehicles with a diesel engine: Use a filler neck with a large diameter for vehicles with a diesel engine when topping up fuel from a fuel can. Otherwise, the filler neck cannot be pushed into the tank shaft.

Replace the cap on the filler neck and turn clockwise until it engages audibly.
Close fuel filler flap ①.

Depressurising the fuel tank (plug-in hybrid with petrol engine)

Diagram showing car interior with labeled parts including lock, battery, and door panel

Pull switch ① once briefly. Indicator lamp ② will flash and the Please wait Depressurising fuel tank message will appear on the driver's display. When the fuel tank is depressurised, indicator lamp ② will light up continuously.

The Fuel tank is depressurised Ready for refuelling message will appear on the driver's display and the fuel filler flap will open automatically.

(i) Depressurising the fuel tank may take several minutes.

The fuel tank can be depressurised only if the conditions described above are fulfilled. Otherwise, drive the vehicle at least 0.5 km and repeat the process.

① In the following situations, there is a malfunction:

• Indicator lamp ② flashes initially and then goes out.
• The yellow engine diagnostics warning lamp lights up.

NOTE Damage to the fuel filler flap when opening it

If an attempt is made to open a fuel filler flap that is not unlocked, the fuel filler flap or the opening mechanism may be damaged.

▶ Only refuel when the fuel filler flap has opened automatically.

You can watch an animation on this topic via the following link:

AdBlue® (vehicles with a diesel engine only)

Notes on topping up AdBlue®

AdBlue ^® is a water-soluble fluid for the NOx exhaust gas aftertreatment of diesel engines. In order for the exhaust gas aftertreatment to function properly, only use AdBlue ^® in accordance with ISO 22241.

AdBlue ^® is characterised by the following:

• non-toxic
  • colourless and odourless
• non-flammable

If you open the AdBlue ^® tank, small amounts of ammonia vapour may be released. Only fill the AdBlue ^® tank in well-ventilated areas.

Do not let AdBlue ^® come into contact with skin, eyes or clothes. Keep AdBlue ^® away from children.

Do not ingest AdBlue®. If AdBlue® is swallowed, immediately rinse your mouth out thoroughly. Drink plenty of water. Seek medical attention at once.

Observe the notes on operating fluids ( page 786).

AdBlue ^® is available here:

• AdBlue® can be topped up by fast service at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
• AdBlue ^ is available at many filling stations from AdBlue ^ filling pumps.
• Alternatively, AdBlue ^ is available at qualified specialist workshops, e.g. Mercedes-Benz Service Centres, and at many filling stations in AdBlue ^ refill canisters or AdBlue ^ refill bottles.

i Ensure the connection between the refill container and vehicle filler neck does not drip.

Refilling AdBlue®

NOTE Engine damage due to AdBlue® being in the fuel
AdBlue ^® must not be used to fill the fuel tank.
Only use AdBlue ^® to fill the AdBlue ^® tank.
Do not overfill the AdBlue ^® tank.

NOTE Contamination of the vehicle interior due to AdBlue® leakage

After topping up, carefully close the AdBlue ^® refill container.
Avoid carrying AdBlue ^® refill containers permanently in the vehicle.

Requirements

• The vehicle is unlocked.

The following messages appear in order in the driver's display when the AdBlue ^® tank requires refilling:

• Refill AdBlue See Owner's Manual. The AdBlue® level has fallen into the reserve range. Refill with at least 5 l of AdBlue®.
• Top up AdBlue Emergency op. in XXX km See Owner's Manual. The low AdBlue® level will lead to limited performance after the remaining distance displayed has been covered. Refill with at least 5 l of AdBlue®.
• Top up AdBlue XX,X | Emerg. op.: max. XXX km/h Start not poss. in XXX km. The low AdBlue® level will lead to an output restriction from the speed displayed. After the remaining distance displayed has been covered, it will no longer be possible to start the vehicle. Refill at least the indicated amount of AdBlue®.
• Top up AdBlue XX,X | Switch vehicle on, wait 60 sec. or engine start not poss.. The AdBlue® tank is empty. You can no longer start the vehicle. Refill at least the indicated amount of AdBlue®. Switch on the vehicle and

wait for approximately 60 seconds. Start the vehicle.

You can see the AdBlue ^® range and level in the Service menu in the driver's display.

The AdBlue ^® range shown depends strongly on the driving style and operating conditions. The actual range can therefore deviate from the calculated range.

Opening the AdBlue ^® filler cap

Diagram showing car interior components with numbered labels and a magnified inset highlighting a specific area.

Press on the rear part of fuel filler flap ①.

Turn AdBlue® filler cap ② anti-clockwise and remove it.

Refilling AdBlue®

Mercedes-Benz recommends refilling AdBlue ^® at a filling pump. If no AdBlue ^® filling pump is available, you can also top up AdBlue ^® using a canister.

Diagram showing car charging station with labeled parts 3 and 4, including a battery icon and plug.

Screw on the fastener of AdBlue ^® refill canister 4.
Screw the disposable hose ③ onto the opening of AdBlue® refill canister ④ until hand-tight.
Screw the disposable hose ③ onto the filler neck of the vehicle until hand-tight.

Lift up and tip AdBlue ^® refill canister ④. The filling process stops when the AdBlue ^® tank is completely full.
AdBlue ^® refill canister ④ can be removed when it has been only partially emptied.
Unscrew and close the disposable hose ③ and AdBlue® refill canister ④ in reverse order.
Replace AdBlue ^® filler cap ② and turn it clockwise until it audibly engages.
Close fuel filler flap ①.
▶ Switch on the vehicle for at least 60 seconds.

If the vehicle could not be started as the AdBlue® tank was empty, it can take up to 60 seconds for the refill to be detected.
Start the vehicle.
(i) Avoid storing AdBlue® refill containers permanently in the vehicle.

Charging the high-voltage battery (plug-in hybrid)

Notes on charging the high-voltage battery

NOTE High-voltage battery damage due to leaving the vehicle idle for lengthy periods of time

Lithium-ion batteries experience a natural self-discharge.

Exhaustive discharging can therefore occur if the vehicle is idle for several months. This can damage the high-voltage battery.

To avoid damage, please observe the following recommendations when handling the high-voltage battery.

NOTE Accelerated ageing of the high-voltage battery due to not observing the following recommendations

As a result of its basic characteristics, the storage capacity of and the amount of energy available from the high-voltage battery decrea-

ses over the course of its life. Due to this, both the maximum electrical range that can be achieved by the vehicle and its maximum electrical output can be impaired.

The following factors could accelerate the ageing of the high-voltage battery:

• a high level of charge, especially if the vehicle is idle for a lengthy period of time
• frequent rapid charging with direct current (mode 4)
  • leaving the vehicle idle for lengthy periods at high ambient temperatures

To avoid accelerated ageing, please observe the following recommendations when handling the high-voltage battery.

Recommendations when handling the high-voltage battery:

• Only charge the high-voltage battery with direct current (mode 4) if necessary.
• If leaving the vehicle idle for lengthy periods, park up the vehicle with a high-voltage battery charge level between 25% and 30%. Do not

keep the high-voltage battery continuously connected to power supply equipment.

• If leaving the vehicle idle for lengthy periods of time avoid, if possible, high ambient temperatures.
• Check the high-voltage battery's charge level every six weeks ( page 336).
• Charge the high-voltage battery if the charge level is below 15%.
• Do not disconnect the 12 V battery even if the vehicle is left idle for a lengthy period. Otherwise, the condition of the vehicle's high-voltage battery cannot be monitored.
• If the high-voltage battery is only used with low charge levels, fully charge the high-voltage battery every six months.

Depending on the equipment and national version, your vehicle is equipped with one of the following vehicle sockets:

- Type 1 for charging with alternating current (mode 2/3)

• Type Combo 1 for charging with alternating current (mode 2/3) and charging with direct current (mode 4)
• Type 2 for charging with alternating current (mode 2/3)
• Type Combo 2 for charging with alternating current (mode 2/3) and charging with direct current (mode 4)

Diagram showing car electrical plug connections with labeled parts and a magnified inset view of the plug's internal structure.

Combo 1 vehicle socket Combo 2 vehicle socket

Diagram showing car electrical plug connections with labeled parts and a magnified inset highlighting the internal structure.

① Type 1 or type 2 connection for charging with alternating current
② Socket extension for charging with direct current
When using a CCS (Combined Charging System) charging cable to charge with direct current at a combo vehicle socket, both vehicle

socket connections ① and ② are used for charging.

Charging options for the high-voltage battery (mode 2, 3 or 4):

• Charging through recuperation while the vehicle is in motion
• Charging with alternating current when stationary:

- at a mains socket (mode 2)

- at a wallbox or charging station (mode 3)

- Charging with direct current when stationary (vehicles with combo vehicle sockets):

- at a rapid charging station (mode 4)

Depending on the country-specific vehicle equipment and your vehicle's charging cable, single phase AC charging is also possible.

Observe the different grid requirements of your current location when charging. Only use charging cables which conform to the grid requirements.

Consult a qualified electrician or your local grid operator if you have any questions.

It is recommended that you charge the high-voltage battery at a wallbox or charging station due to the improved charging performance and better charging efficiency offered.

System limits

The power output of the high-voltage battery may be impaired by the following:

• High or low outside temperatures
- Electrical auxiliary consumers in the vehicle being switched on, e.g. operating the air conditioning system
• Extended periods without charging

The charging time or the charging capacity of the high-voltage battery may be increased in particular by the following:

• High or low outside temperatures
- A low or high state of charge on the high-voltage battery
- The maximum available charge current of the charging facility

Stowing the charging cable

Always stow the vehicle's charging cable in the charging cable bag provided, and secure the charging cable bag in the boot or load compartment with the included retaining strap. Otherwise, the charging cable bag with the charging cable is not sufficiently secured.

Diagram of a device with labeled parts including a strap and connector, alongside a technical schematic.

Example: charging cable bag in the boot/load compartment
F167 0009 02

As delivered, charging cable bag ① with retaining strap ② is located in the boot or load compartment. To secure the charging cable bag, the retaining strap must be attached to tie-down eye ③. Do not use bag hooks to attach the retaining strap.

Diagram illustrating a cable or cable clamp mechanism with numbered components and directional arrows indicating motion.

▶ Feed the loop end of retaining strap ② through tie-down eye ③ into the boot or load compartment.
▶ Feed the end with the snap hook through the loop of retaining strap ②.

Diagram showing a car seatbelt buckle being attached to a wallet, with labeled parts and instructional arrows.

Tighten retaining strap ② so that the knot around tie-down eye ③ is tight and secure.
Hook the snap hook of retaining strap ② in a tie-down eye of charging cable bag ①.

Notes on charging the high-voltage battery at the mains socket (mode 2)

DANGER Risk of fatal injury from incorrectly installed component parts

Connecting the charging cable to a mains socket using incorrectly installed component parts could cause a fire or an electric shock, for example.

Only connect the charging cable to a mains socket that:
• Has been properly installed and
- Has been inspected by a qualified electrician
For safety reasons, only use the charging cable supplied with the vehicle or an original Mercedes-Benz charging cable.
Purchase these parts at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre and obtain advice there.

Mercedes-Benz thoroughly tests these original charging cables for their suitability for high-voltage charging of your vehicle.

▶ Never use a damaged charging cable.
Do not use:
- Extension cables
- Extension reels
- Multiple sockets
▶ Never use socket adapters to connect the charging cable to the mains socket. The only exception being if the adapter has been tested and approved by the manufacturer for charging the high-voltage battery of an electric vehicle.
Observe the safety notes in the operating instructions for the socket adapter.

Only the following charging cables may be used:

• The charging cable supplied with the vehicle.
• A charging cable that has been approved for the vehicle.

The charging process can vary depending on the power supply equipment. The charging times when charging the high-voltage battery at the mains socket are considerably longer than when charging at a wallbox or charging station.

When doing so, always observe the local information.

Do not leave the charging cable controls hanging loose from a mains socket.

Do not lift the controls by the following component parts:

• the charging cable connector
- the mains plug

When charging, protect the charging cable control element from excessive heat such as direct sunlight. Otherwise, the charging process may be cancelled.

Notes on charging the high-voltage battery at a wallbox or charging station (mode 3)

DANGER Risk of fatal injury from incorrectly installed component parts

Connecting the charging cable to a wallbox using incorrectly installed component parts could cause a fire or an electric shock, for example.

Only connect the charging cable to a wallbox that:
- Has been properly installed and
- Has been inspected by a qualified electrician
For safety reasons, only use charging cables that have been tested and approved by the manufacturer for charging the high-voltage battery in an electric vehicle.
▶ Never use damaged charging cables.
Do not extend the charging cable.
Do not use adapters.

Observe the safety notes in the operating instructions for the wallbox.

If charging at a wallbox without pre-installed cable, use the optionally available charging cable for wallbox and charging station (mode 3). The charging cable is stowed in a bag in the boot/luggage compartment.

Only use charging cables that have been tested and approved by the manufacturer for charging the high-voltage battery in an electric vehicle.

DANGER Risk of fatal injuries due to damaged components

If you use a damaged component to connect the vehicle to the charging station, this can result in fire or an electric shock, for example.

Perform a visual inspection of the charging station for obvious defects, e.g. damage to the housing or on the charging cable connection.
At charging stations without a pre-installed cable, for safety reasons, only use charging cables that have been tested

and approved by the manufacturer for charging the high-voltage battery in an electric vehicle.

▶ Do not use a damaged charging cable.
Do not use an extension for the charging cable.
Do not use an adapter.
Always observe the safety information on the charging station.

Most charging stations must be activated before the charging process, e.g. using an RFID card. Observe the on-site operator's instructions for the charging station.

The amount of energy dispensed for the charging process, shown by the charging station, may be higher than the amount of energy actually absorbed by the high-voltage battery. This is the result of different levels of charging losses and is described as recharge efficiency. Charging losses occur, for example, due to heat that builds up when the vehicle is charging or from auxiliary consumers that are switched on. Further information on

recharge efficiency can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop.

Notes on charging the high-voltage battery at a rapid charging station (mode 4)

DANGER Risk of fatal injuries due to damaged components

If you use a damaged component to connect the vehicle to the charging station, this can result in fire or an electric shock, for example.

Perform a visual inspection of the charging station for obvious defects, e.g. damage to the housing or on the charging cable connection.
At charging stations without a pre-installed cable, for safety reasons, only use charging cables that have been tested and approved by the manufacturer for charging the high-voltage battery in an electric vehicle.
Do not use a damaged charging cable.

Do not use an extension for the charging cable.
Do not use an adapter.
Always observe the safety information on the charging station.

A DANGER Risk of fatal injuries when carrying out maintenance work during the charging process

During the charging process, the high-voltage on-board electrical system is under high voltage.

Do not perform any maintenance work during the charging process.

Most charging stations must be activated before the charging process, e.g. using an RFID card. Observe the on-site operator's instructions for the charging station.

The charging cable for the vehicle must not be longer than 30 m due to the legal requirements in some countries. This is to prevent the interference of signals being received by radio communi-

cation devices in the vehicle or in close proximity to the charging station. Be aware that parts of the charging cable may be routed underground. If in doubt, ask the charging station operator if this is the case before charging the high-voltage battery. The amount of energy dispensed for the charging process, shown by the charging station, may be higher than the amount of energy actually absorbed by the high-voltage battery. This is the result of different levels of charging losses and is described as recharge efficiency. Charging losses occur, for example, due to heat that builds up when the vehicle is charging or from auxiliary consumers that are switched on. Further information on recharge efficiency can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop.

Setting the maximum permissible charging current for charging at a mains socket

NOTE Overloading the mains socket due to excessive charging current

If the charging current is too high, the fuse could be tripped or the external mains supply could overheat.

Make sure that the external mains supply has been designed to handle the set charging current.
If necessary, reduce the set charging current or use a different mains socket.
For safety reasons, only use the charging cable supplied with the vehicle or an original Mercedes-Benz charging cable. Mercedes-Benz thoroughly tests these original charging cables for their suitability for high-voltage charging of your vehicle. Purchase these parts at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre and obtain advice there.

Before charging at a mains socket, have the maximum permissible charging current for the relevant mains socket or the building inspected by a qualified electrician. The charging cable supplied is set to a country-specific maximum charging current value. When charging abroad, the maximum value may exceed the permitted value for that country. When abroad, observe the country-specific laws when charging. If you have questions concerning setting the charging current or if there is a malfunction, please contact a qualified specialist workshop.

Overview of the charging cable control panel

The charging cable control panel shows the current status of the charging process.

① ② ③ ④

Supply voltage indicator
② Charging process indicator
3 Temperature monitor indicator
4 Safety system indicator

Supply voltage indicator ①

Display Meaning

Lights up white The supply voltage is connected.

Charging process indicator ②

Display Meaning

Flashes green The high-voltage battery is charging.

Temperature control indicator ③

Display Meaning

Lights up red The green LED flashes simultaneously: over-temperature - the charging performance is reduced. The green LED does not flash: overtemperature - the charging process is stopped.

Flashes red Overtemperature at the mains plug - the charging process is stopped.

Safety system indicator 4

Display Meaning

Flashes red Charging cable mal-

function - cannot carry out the charging process, reset the charging cable operating unit.

Lights up red White LED is off:

power supply malfunction - cannot carry out the charging process, replace the mains socket.

White LED is on: vehicle malfunction – cannot carry out the charging process, reset the charging cable operating unit.

When all four displays light up, the charging cable operating unit performs a self-test.

If temperature monitor ③ indicates a malfunction, it may help to protect the charging cable from direct sunlight.

To reset the charging cable operating unit: if safety system ④ indicates a charging cable malfunction or a vehicle malfunction, first reset the charging cable operating unit. To do this, disconnect the charging cable from the vehicle and from the mains socket and wait for approximately five seconds. If the malfunction persists after the charging cable is reconnected, charging at the mains socket is not possible. The charging cable must be replaced or the vehicle plug must be checked at a qualified specialist workshop, depending on the indicator.

Functions of the indicator lamps on the vehicle socket

Depending on the national version, your vehicle is equipped with one of the following vehicle sockets.

The socket flap is centrally locked and unlocked together with the vehicle.

Technical diagram showing car electrical plug and connector with numbered parts labeled 1, 2, and 3

Combo 1 vehicle socket

1 Socket lamp
② Charging process indicator lamp
3 Locking status indicator lamp

Diagram of car electrical plug with labeled components and a close-up view showing internal wiring connections

Combo 2 vehicle socket

① Socket lamp
② Charging process indicator lamp
3 Locking status indicator lamp

Socket lamp ① flashes or lights up as with indicator lamps ② and ③.

Overview of the locking status

Locking sta- tus 3	Display Meaning
	Lights up white	Vehicle socket unlocked, insert or remove charging cable
	Flashes white Malfunction	during locking or unlocking

Overview of the charging process status

Status of the charging process	Display Meaning
	orange	Connection is being estab-lished
	green Active energy flow

Status of the charging process	Display Meaning
Lights up	orange (for approx. 60 s)	Interruption in charging
Lights up	green (for approx. 60 s)	Charging process com- pleted
Flashes red (for approx. 90 s)		Vehicle mal- function; charging is not possible

Starting the alternating current charging process (mode 2/3)

▲ DANGER Risk of death when charging at a damaged socket

The charging process uses high voltage.

If the charging cable, the vehicle socket or the mains socket are damaged, you could receive an electric shock.

▶ Only use an undamaged charging cable.
Avoid mechanical damage such as crushing, abrading or driving over the cable.
Have a damaged vehicle socket replaced at a qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible.
▶ Never connect the charging cable to a damaged vehicle socket.

NOTE Damage due to overheating of charging cable and charge port

During the charging process, the charging cable and charge port can heat up within the permissible limits.

The permissible limit values are influenced by the following factors:

- the power supply system and the charging cable are not damaged

• the instructions for handling the charging cable and the control element on the charging cable have been observed
  If the charging cable or charge port becomes too hot, have the power supply system checked.

NOTE Damaged or dirty vehicle socket when the socket flap is open

Always keep the socket cover and the socket flap closed when there is no charging cable connected. This protects the vehicle socket from dirt and damage.
Make sure that the socket cover is closed properly before closing the socket flap. This can otherwise result in damage which may prevent the socket flap from being opened again.

NOTE Damage to the vehicle socket or the charging cable connector due to incorrect handling

Do not use excessive force (maximum 300 N) to insert the charging cable connector into the vehicle socket to the stop. You may otherwise damage the vehicle socket, the charging cable connector or their contacts.

If you feel there is increased resistance, pull the charging cable connector out of the socket and reinsert it.

Requirements

• The transmission is in position P.
- The vehicle is unlocked or the distance between the key and the vehicle does not exceed 1 m.
• The charging cable is not taut.

Depending on the vehicle's equipment and on the national version, your vehicle is equipped with one of the following vehicle sockets:

- Type 1 for charging with alternating current (mode 2 or 3)

F167 0009 02

• Combo 1 for charging with alternating current (mode 2 or 3) and charging with direct current (mode 4)
• Type 2 for charging with alternating current (mode 2 or 3)
• Combo 2 for charging with alternating current (mode 2 or 3) and charging with direct current (mode 4)

Diagram of car electrical plug with numbered parts and a close-up inset showing internal components

Combo 1 vehicle socket Combo 2 vehicle socket

Diagram of car electrical plug with numbered components and a close-up view of the plug's internal structure

Press the centre rear section of socket flap ① and swing the socket flap forwards and open. The indicator lamp ③ and upper status display ④ light up white. If socket flap ① cannot be opened despite the vehicle being unlocked, the charge socket

flap can be opened by emergency release ( page 335).

Press catch ⑦ to the right and fold up socket cover ②.
① Vehicles with a vehicle socket combo require only connection ⑥ for the charging cable connector. Open only the upper part of socket cover ②.
To charge at a mains socket, insert the mains plug into the mains socket of the external power source as far as it will go.
Insert the charging cable connector into vehicle socket connection ⑥ to the stop. If the wallbox/charging station is not equipped with a charging cable, insert the plug of the vehicle's charging cable into the wallbox/charging station socket to the stop.

Make sure that the charging cable is not taut when inserted.

The indicator lamp 5 and lower status display 4 flash orange and, as soon as the high-voltage battery is charged, green.

When the charging cable is connected to the vehicle, the vehicle cannot be started or moved.

At the start of the charging process, the charge level display is shown in the driver's display with a charging prediction. The charging prediction refers to the time at which the high-voltage battery will be fully charged.

(i) Depending on the temperature, the fan and battery cooling system may audibly switch on during the charging process.

If the vehicle is idle for lengthy periods and connected to the mains supply, the high-voltage battery will be recharged automatically as needed or when electrical consumers are activated (e.g. the pre-entry climate control).

The vehicle is equipped with an electrical fuse which protects it against overvoltage in the mains supply. This electrical fuse may trip during severe thunderstorms, for example, and may cause the fuse in the building to trip or may interrupt the charging process. These functions protect the vehicle.

After the fuse in the building is switched on again, the charging process resumes automat-

ically. Following an interruption in the power supply without the fuse in the building being tripped, it may take up to ten minutes for charging to resume automatically.

Ending the alternating current charging process (mode 2/3)

DANGER Risk of death when charging at a damaged socket

The charging process uses high voltage. If the charging cable, the vehicle socket or the mains socket are damaged, you could receive an electric shock.

▶ Only use an undamaged charging cable.
Avoid mechanical damage such as crushing, abrading or driving over the cable.
Have a damaged vehicle socket replaced at a qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible.
▶ Never connect the charging cable to a damaged vehicle socket.

NOTE Damage due to overheating of charging cable and charge port

During the charging process, the charging cable and charge port can heat up within the permissible limits.

The permissible limit values are influenced by the following factors:

• the power supply system and the charging cable are not damaged
• the instructions for handling the charging cable and the control element on the charging cable have been observed
  If the charging cable or charge port becomes too hot, have the power supply system checked.

NOTE Damaged or dirty vehicle socket when the socket flap is open

Always keep the socket cover and the socket flap closed when there is no charging cable connected. This protects the vehicle socket from dirt and damage.

Make sure that the socket cover is closed properly before closing the socket flap. This can otherwise result in damage which may prevent the socket flap from being opened again.

Requirements

- The distance between the key and the vehicle does not exceed 1 m.

Depending on the vehicle's equipment and on the national version, your vehicle is equipped with one of the following vehicle sockets:

• Type 1 for charging with alternating current (mode 2 or 3)
• Combo 1 for charging with alternating current (mode 2 or 3) and charging with direct current (mode 4)
• Type 2 for charging with alternating current (mode 2 or 3)
• Combo 2 for charging with alternating current (mode 2 or 3) and charging with direct current (mode 4)

Combo 1 vehicle socket

Diagram showing car plug installation with numbered components and a close-up of the plug's internal structure.

Vehicles equipped with a type 1 vehicle socket for AC charging have no charging interruption button 3.

Combo 1 vehicle socket: press charging interruption button ③.
The charging process is ended. The indicator lamp lights up white. The vehicle socket is unlocked.
Type 1 vehicle socket: unlock the vehicle. The charging process is ended. The indicator lamp lights up white. The vehicle socket is unlocked.
Press and hold button ② on the charging cable connector and remove the charging cable connector from the vehicle socket.
If you cannot remove the charging cable connector, repeat the unlocking procedure. If the charging cable connector is still locked, contact a qualified specialist workshop.
▶ Close the socket cover and the socket flap.
Remove the charging cable connector from the mains socket, or from the socket on the wallbox/charging station, and stow the vehicle's charging cable safely in the vehicle (→ page 319).

Combo 2 vehicle socket

Diagram showing car electrical plug connections with labeled parts 1 and 2

① Vehicles only equipped with a type 2 vehicle socket for AC charging have no charging interruption button ②.

Combo 2 vehicle socket: press charging interruption button ②.
The charging process is ended. The indicator lamp lights up white. The vehicle socket is unlocked.
Type 2 vehicle socket: unlock the vehicle. The charging process is ended. The indicator lamp lights up white. The vehicle socket is unlocked.
Remove the charging cable connector from the vehicle socket within 30 seconds. After the 30 seconds have elapsed, the vehicle socket will be locked again.
If you cannot remove the charging cable connector, repeat the unlocking procedure. If the charging cable connector is still locked, contact a qualified specialist workshop.
Close the socket cover and the socket flap.
Remove the charging cable connector from the mains socket, or from the socket on the wallbox/charging station, and stow the vehicle's charging cable safely in the vehicle ( page 319).

After the charging cable connector has been disconnected, the 📋 indicator lamp ① on the vehicle socket remains lit for some time before switching off.

Starting the direct current charging process (mode 4)

DANGER Risk of death when charging at a damaged socket

The charging process uses high voltage. If the charging cable, the vehicle socket or the mains socket are damaged, you could receive an electric shock.

▶ Only use an undamaged charging cable.
Avoid mechanical damage such as crushing, abrading or driving over the cable.
Have a damaged vehicle socket replaced at a qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible.
▶ Never connect the charging cable to a damaged vehicle socket.

NOTE Damage due to overheating of charging cable and charge port

During the charging process, the charging cable and charge port can heat up within the permissible limits.

The permissible limit values are influenced by the following factors:

• the power supply system and the charging cable are not damaged
• the instructions for handling the charging cable and the control element on the charging cable have been observed
  If the charging cable or charge port becomes too hot, have the power supply system checked.

NOTE Damaged or dirty vehicle socket when the socket flap is open
▶ Always keep the socket cover and the socket flap closed when there is no charging cable connected. This protects the vehicle socket from dirt and damage.

Make sure that the socket cover is closed properly before closing the socket flap. This can otherwise result in damage which may prevent the socket flap from being opened again.

NOTE Damage to the vehicle socket or the charging cable connector due to incorrect handling

Do not use excessive force (maximum 300 N) to insert the charging cable connector into the vehicle socket to the stop. You may otherwise damage the vehicle socket, the charging cable connector or their contacts.

If you feel there is increased resistance, pull the charging cable connector out of the socket and reinsert it.

Requirements

• The transmission is in position P.
- The vehicle is unlocked or the distance between the key and the vehicle does not exceed 1 m.

• The vehicle is not switched on. The READY display in the driver's display is off.
  • The charging cable is not taut.
  Depending on the national version, the vehicle is equipped with one of the following vehicle sockets.

Diagram of car electrical connector with numbered parts and a magnified inset showing the connector's internal structure.

Combo 1 vehicle socket

Diagram of car electrical plug with numbered parts and a close-up view of the internal component

Combo 2 vehicle socket

Press the centre rear section of socket flap ① and swing the socket flap forwards and open. The indicator lamp ③ and upper status display ④ light up white.

When the vehicle is switched on (the READY display is lit in the Instrument Display), socket flap ① cannot be opened. If socket flap ① cannot be opened despite the vehicle being unlocked, the socket flap can be opened by emergency release (→ page 335).
Press catch ⑦ to the right and fold up socket cover ②.
The CCS charging cable connector requires connections ⑥ and ⑧. Therefore, it is necessary to open both parts of socket cover ②.
Insert the CCS charging cable connector into the vehicle socket to the stop. Make sure that the charging cable is not taut when inserted.

The indicator lamp ⑤ and lower status display ④ flash orange and, as soon as the high-voltage battery is charged, green.

When the charging cable is connected to the vehicle, the vehicle cannot be started or moved. At the start of the charging process, the charge level display is shown in the driver's display with a

charging prediction. The charging prediction refers to the time at which the high-voltage battery will be fully charged.

Depending on the temperature, the fan and battery cooling system may audibly switch on during the charging process.
If the vehicle is idle for lengthy periods and connected to the mains supply, the high-voltage battery will be recharged automatically as needed or when electrical consumers are activated (e.g. the pre-entry climate control).

Ending the direct current charging process (mode 4)

DANGER Risk of death when charging at a damaged socket

The charging process uses high voltage. If the charging cable, the vehicle socket or the mains socket are damaged, you could receive an electric shock.

▶ Only use an undamaged charging cable.

Avoid mechanical damage such as crushing, abrading or driving over the cable.
Have a damaged vehicle socket replaced at a qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible.
▶ Never connect the charging cable to a damaged vehicle socket.

NOTE Damage due to overheating of charging cable and charge port

During the charging process, the charging cable and charge port can heat up within the permissible limits.

The permissible limit values are influenced by the following factors:

• the power supply system and the charging cable are not damaged
• the instructions for handling the charging cable and the control element on the charging cable have been observed

If the charging cable or charge port becomes too hot, have the power supply system checked.

NOTE Damaged or dirty vehicle socket when the socket flap is open

Always keep the socket cover and the socket flap closed when there is no charging cable connected. This protects the vehicle socket from dirt and damage.
Make sure that the socket cover is closed properly before closing the socket flap. This can otherwise result in damage which may prevent the socket flap from being opened again.

Requirements

• The distance between the key and the vehicle does not exceed 1 m.
  Depending on the national version, the vehicle is equipped with one of the following vehicle sockets.

Combo 1 vehicle socket

Diagram showing car charging plug with labeled parts and a magnified inset of the plug's internal structure

Press charging interruption button ③. The charging process is ended. The indicator lamp ① lights up white. The vehicle socket is unlocked.
Press and hold button ② on the charging cable connector and remove the charging cable connector from the vehicle socket.

If you cannot remove the charging cable connector, unlock the vehicle and repeat the procedure. If the charging cable connector is still locked, contact a qualified specialist workshop.
▶ Close the socket cover and the socket flap.

Combo 2 vehicle socket

Diagram showing car electrical plug with labeled components and a magnified inset highlighting the internal structure.

Press charging interruption button ②. The charging process is ended. The indicator lamp ① lights up white. The vehicle socket is unlocked.
Remove the charging cable connector from the vehicle socket.
If you cannot remove the charging cable connector, unlock the vehicle and repeat the procedure. If the charging cable connector is still locked, contact a qualified specialist workshop.
Close the socket cover and the socket flap.
After the charging cable connector has been disconnected, the left 📋 indicator lamp on the vehicle socket remains lit for some time before switching off.

Emergency release of the socket flap

If the socket flap cannot be opened due to a malfunction, an emergency release of the socket flap can be performed for the charging process.

Diagram showing a car interior with a device panel and a blue arrow indicating direction, labeled with number 1.

Remove cover ① of the emergency release from the load compartment trim on the side.
Pull the emergency release by cover ① in the direction of the arrow.
The socket flap of the vehicle socket swings open.
The socket flap of the vehicle socket swings open.
Insert cover ① back into the load compartment trim.

Start the alternating current charging process ( page 326).
or
Start the direct current charging process ( page 331).

Function of the charge level display in the Instrument Display

When the vehicle is connected to the mains supply and is switched off, the Instrument Display shows the charge level display for approximately two minutes.

Parking

Parking the vehicle

WARNING Risk of accident and injury caused by an insufficiently secured vehicle rolling away

If the vehicle is not securely parked sufficiently, it can roll away in an uncontrolled way even at a slight downhill gradient.

On uphill or downhill gradients, turn the front wheels so that the vehicle rolls towards the kerb if it starts moving.
apply the parking brake.
Switch the transmission to position P.

WARNING Risk of fire caused by hot exhaust system parts

Flammable materials such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite.

Park the vehicle so that no flammable material can come into contact with hot vehicle components.

In particular, do not park on dry grassland or harvested grain fields.

WARNING Accident- and risk of injury with unsupervised children in the vehicle

If you leave children unattended in the vehicle, they can in particular

• Open doors and thereby endanger other persons or road users.
  • get out of the car and are hit by traffic.
• Operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, forexample.

In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for exampleby:

• releasing the parking brake.
• change the gearbox setting.
- start the vehicle.
▶ Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
▶ Keep the key out of reach of children.

NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to it rolling away
Always secure the vehicle against rolling away.
NOTE Damage due to the vehicle lowering Vehicles with AIRMATIC or E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL: The vehicle can lower because of temperature differences or longer non-operational times. This can cause damage to parts of the body.
When stopping the vehicle and when driving off, make sure that there are no obstacles such as curbs under or in the immediate vicinity of the body.

START ENGINE STOP

Bring the vehicle to a standstill by depressing the brake pedal.
On gradients, turn the front wheels so that the vehicle will roll towards the kerb if it starts moving.
Apply the electric parking brake.

While the vehicle is stationary, engage transmission position P with the brake pedal depressed ( page 303).
Switch off the vehicle by pressing button ①.
Release the service brake slowly.
▶ Get out of the vehicle and lock it.

When you park the vehicle, you will still be able to operate the side windows and the panoramic sliding sunroof for approximately four minutes if the driver's door is closed.

Automatic vehicle shut-off during locking

Your vehicle is equipped with automatic engine shut-off.

When you leave the vehicle ready to drive, the vehicle will be turned off when locked under the following conditions:

• The ignition is switched on or the engine is running.
  • Transmission position P is engaged.
  • The driver's door is closed.

• In addition, one of the following conditions must be fulfilled:

• The vehicle is locked using the vehicle key.

• Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: The vehicle is locked via the locking button on the tailgate.

The engine will continue to run if the vehicle is not locked as described after it has been left. In this case, switch off the vehicle manually.

Automatic vehicle shut-off after a period of time (equipment-dependent)

When the engine is running, the following display message will appear on the driver display when you leave the vehicle or after a certain holding time in transmission position P : Vehicle is ready to drive Shutdown occurs when locked or automatically in XX mins

The vehicle will then switch off automatically after a total of 20 minutes of holding time.

To avoid automatic switch-off after a period of time, acknowledge the corresponding message on the central display of the multimedia system.

The engine will continue to run in the following cases:

• if the vehicle is not locked as described after it has been left
• if automatic shut-off is not indicated by the display message
• if automatic shut-off has been deactivated after a period of time via the corresponding message on the central display

In this case, switch off the vehicle manually.

Electric parking brake

■ Function of the electric parking brake (applying automatically)

WARNING Accident- and risk of injury with unsupervised children in the vehicle

If you leave children unattended in the vehicle, they can in particular

- Open doors and thereby endanger other persons or road users.

• get out of the car and are hit by traffic.
- Operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, forexample.

In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for exampleby:

• releasing the parking brake.
• change the gearbox setting.
- start the vehicle.

▶ Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
▶ Keep the key out of reach of children.

The electric parking brake is applied if the transmission is in position and one of the following conditions is fulfilled:

• The vehicle is switched off.
- The seat belt tongue is not inserted in the seat belt buckle of the driver's seat and the driver's door is opened.

To prevent application: pull the handle of the electric parking brake ( page 339).

In the following situations, the electric parking brake is also applied:

• The HOLD function is keeping the vehicle stationary.
  • Active Parking Assist is keeping the vehicle stationary.
  • Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is bringing the vehicle to a standstill.
• In addition, one of the following conditions must be fulfilled:
  The vehicle is switched off.
• The seat belt tongue is not inserted in the seat belt buckle of the driver's seat and the driver's door is opened.
• There is a system malfunction.
  The power supply is insufficient.
• The vehicle is stationary for a lengthy period.

When the electric parking brake is applied, the red (P) indicator lamp lights up in the driver's display.

The electric parking brake is not automatically applied if the vehicle is switched off by the ECO start/stop function.

Function of the electric parking brake (releasing automatically)

The electric parking brake is released when the following conditions are fulfilled:

• The driver's door is closed.
• The vehicle has been started.
- The transmission is in position D or R and you depress the accelerator pedal or you shift from transmission position P to D or R when on level ground.
- If the transmission is in position , the tailgate must be closed.
- The seat belt tongue is inserted into the seat belt buckle of the driver's seat.

If the seat belt tongue is not inserted into the seat belt buckle of the driver's seat, one of the following conditions must be fulfilled:

• You shift from transmission position P. or
• You have previously driven at speeds greater than 3 km/h.

When the electric parking brake is released, the red (P) indicator lamp in the driver's display goes out.

■ Applying/releasing the electric parking brake manually

WARNING Accident- and risk of injury with unsupervised children in the vehicle

If you leave children unattended in the vehicle, they can in particular

• Open doors and thereby endanger other persons or road users.
  • get out of the car and are hit by traffic.

- Operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, forexample.

In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for exampleby:

• releasing the parking brake.
• change the gearbox setting.
- start the vehicle.
▶ Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
▶ Keep the key out of reach of children.

Applying

Diagram showing car interior with steering wheel, camera, and parking door labeled with number 1

Releasing

Diagram showing car interior with steering wheel, battery pack, and parking slot labeled 'P' (no text or symbols beyond label)

Push handle ①. The red Ⓓ indicator lamp lights up in the driver's display.
The electric parking brake is only securely applied if the red (P) indicator lamp is lit continuously.

Switch on the vehicle.
Pull handle ①. The red Ⓓ indicator lamp in the driver's display goes out.

Emergency braking

Diagram showing car interior with steering wheel, seatbelt, and parking pad labeled 'P' (no text or symbols on main diagram)

Press and hold handle ①.

As long as the vehicle is in motion, the Release parking brake message is displayed and the red indicator lamp flashes.

When the vehicle has been braked to a standstill, the electric parking brake is applied. The

red (P) indicator lamp lights up in the driver's display.

Information on collision detection on a parked vehicle

If a collision is detected on the locked vehicle when towing protection is switched on, and the collision detection is switched on, when the vehicle is switched on, you will receive a message in the multimedia system.

You will receive information about the following points:

• The area of the vehicle that may have been damaged.
  • The force of the impact.

The following situation can lead to inadvertent activation:

- Forexample, the parked vehicle is moved to a two-storey garage.

i Deactivate tow-away protection to prevent accidental activation. If you deactivate tow-

away protection, collision detection will also be deactivated.

You can permanently deactivate collision detection via the multimedia system ( page 342).

System limits

Detection may be restricted in the following situations:

• the vehicle is damaged without impact, forexample, if an outside mirror is torn off or the paint is damaged by a key
  • an impact occurs at low speed
  • the electric parking brake is not applied

① You are responsible for your vehicle. Convince yourself that your vehicle is free of damage and roadworthy.

Setting collision detection on a parked vehicle

Multimedia system:

→ ▶ Settings ▶ Vehicle ▶ Open/close ▶ Vehicle protection

Activate or deactivate the function via Collision notification.

A maximum of three incidents can be registered. Up to 15 photos are taken for every incident. In the event of another incident, the photos of the first incident will be overwritten if they have not been deleted already.

Activating or deactivating the collision photos function

Note possible legal restrictions in some countries regarding automatic recording of the vehicle surroundings.

▶ Activate or deactivate Collision photos.

Transferring the collision photos with the Mercedes me App

▶ Select Upload collision photos.

▶ Select Upload automatically.

Scan the generated QR code on the media display with the Mercedes me app. The encrypted collision photos will then be uploaded to Mercedes me.
① Any device that can scan QR codes can be used to view the collision photos in the Mercedes me App.

Copying the collision photos to a USB flash drive

Connect a USB flash drive ( page 597).
Select Manage collision photos.
Select Copy (USB). All collision photos are copied to the USB flash drive.
Only use FAT32 or exFAT formatted USB storage devices to ensure secure operation.

Deleting collision photos

▶ Select Manage collision photos.
Select Delete. All collision photos will be deleted.

Notes on parking up the vehicle

If you leave the vehicle parked up for longer than six weeks, it may suffer damage through disuse.

The 12 V battery may also be impaired or damaged by heavy discharging.

i Further information can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop.

Standby mode (extension of the starter battery's period out of use)

Standby mode function

This function is not available for all models. If standby mode is activated, energy loss will be minimised during extended periods of non-operation.
Standby mode is characterised by the following:

• The starter battery is preserved.
- The maximum non-operational time appears on the driver's display.
- The connection to online services is interrupted.

• The ATA (anti-theft alarm system) is not available.
• The interior protection and tow-away protection functions are not available.
• The function for detecting collisions on a parked vehicle is not available.

If the following conditions are fulfilled, standby mode can be activated or deactivated using the multimedia system:

• The vehicle is switched on.
• The vehicle has not been started.

Exceeding the vehicle's displayed non-operational time may cause inconvenience; i.e. it cannot be guaranteed that the starter battery will reliably start the vehicle.

Charge the starter battery in the following situations:

• If the vehicle's non-operational time needs to be extended.
• If the starter battery charge level is insufficient for standby mode.

(i) Standby mode is automatically deactivated when the vehicle is switched on.

Activating/deactivating standby mode (parking up the vehicle)

Requirements:

• The power supply is switched on.
• The vehicle is not switched on.

Multimedia system:

Settings Vehicle
▶ Other functions

▶ Activate or deactivate Standby mode.

Driving and driving safety systems

Driving systems and your responsibility

Your vehicle is equipped with driving systems which assist you in driving, parking and manoeuvring the vehicle. The driving systems are only aids. They are not a substitute for you paying attention to your surroundings and do not relieve you of your responsibility pertaining to road traffic law. The driver is always responsible for maintain-

ing a safe distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in lane. Pay attention to the traffic conditions at all times and intervene when necessary. Be aware of the limitations regarding the safe use of these systems.

Driving systems can neither reduce the risk of accident if you fail to adapt your driving style nor override the laws of physics. They cannot always take into account road, weather or traffic conditions.

Some driving systems can regulate or limit the speed to a previously set value. Draw attention to the stored speed when changing drivers.

Information on vehicle sensors and cameras

Some driving and driving safety systems use cameras as well as radar or ultrasonic sensors to monitor the area in front of, behind or next to the vehicle.

Diagram of car front and rear assembly with numbered components for identification

① Multifunction camera
② Cameras in the outside mirrors
3 Front radar
4 Front camera
5 Corner radars
6 Ultrasonic sensors
7 Reversing camera

WARNING Risk of accident due to restricted detection performance of vehicle sensors and cameras

If the area around vehicle sensors or cameras is covered, damaged or dirty, certain driving and safety systems cannot function correctly. There is a risk of an accident.

Keep the area around vehicle sensors or cameras clear of any obstructions and clean.
Have damage to the bumper, radiator grille or stone chipping in the area of the front and rear windows repaired at a qualified specialist workshop.

Particularly, keep the areas around the sensors and cameras free of dirt, ice or slush ( page 625). The sensors and cameras must not be covered and the detection ranges around them must be kept free. Do not attach additional licence plate brackets, advertisements, stickers, foils or foils to protect against stone chippings in the detection range of the sensors and cameras.

Make sure that there are no overhanging loads protruding into the detection range. If there is damage to a bumper or the radiator grille, or after an impact, have the function of the sensors checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Have damage or stone chipping in the area of the cameras on the front and rear windows repaired at a qualified specialist workshop.

Overview of driving systems and driving safety systems

• ABS (→ page 345)
• Off-road ABS ( page 346)
• BAS (→ page 346)
- ESP® (→ page 346)
- ESP® (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) (→ page 347)
- ESP® Crosswind Assist (→ page 349)
- ESP® trailer stabilisation (→ page 349)
• EBD ( page 352)
• STEER CONTROL (→ page 352)

• HOLD function ( page 352)
• Hill Start Assist (→ page 354)
• Adaptive Brake Lights (→ page 354)
• ATTENTION ASSIST (→ page 354)
• Cruise control ( page 356)
- Limiter (→ page 356)
- Speed Limit Assist (country-dependent) (→ page 378)
• Traffic Sign Assist ( page 380)
• AIRMATIC ( page 389)
• AMG RIDE CONTROL + (→ page 396)
• AMG ACTIVE RIDE CONTROL (→ page 396)
• E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL ( page 400)
• Trailer Manoeuvring Assist (→ page 428)

Driving Assistance Package

The following functions are part of the Driving Assistance Package. Certain functions are only available in some countries. Some functions are also available without the Driving Assistance Package, albeit with restricted functionality.

• Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC ( page 359)
• Active Speed Limit Assist (country-dependent) ( page 365)
- Route-based speed adaptation (country-dependent) ( page 366)
• DSR ( page 368)
• Active Brake Assist (→ page 373)
• Active Steering Assist (country-dependent) ( page 370)
• Active Emergency Stop Assist (country-dependent) ( page 372)
• Active Stop-and-Go Assist (country-dependent) ( page 367)
- Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist with exit warning ( page 383)
• Active Lane Keeping Assist (→ page 386)

Parking Package

• Reversing camera ( page 408)
• 360° Camera (→ page 410)
• Parking Assist PARKTRONIC (→ page 416)

• Active Parking Assist (→ page 420)

Function of ABS

The Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) regulates the brake pressure in critical driving situations:

• During braking, for instance, at maximum full-stop braking or if there is insufficient tyre traction, the wheels are prevented from locking.
  • Vehicle steerability while braking is ensured.

If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel a pulsing in the brake pedal. The pulsating brake pedal can be an indication of hazardous road conditions and can serve as a reminder to take extra care while driving.

System limits

• ABS is active from speeds of approximately 5 km/h.
• ABS may be impaired or may not function if a malfunction has occurred and the yellow ☑ ABS warning lamp lights up continuously after the vehicle is started.

Function of off-road ABS

(i) Off-road ABS is activated automatically when you select the drive program.

Off-road ABS is specially adapted for driving off-road:

• The front wheels lock cyclically during braking.
- The braking distance is shortened due to the digging-in effect.

System limits

• Off-road ABS functions at speeds below 40 km/h.
• If Off-road ABS intervenes, the ability to steer may be restricted.

Function of BAS

WARNING Risk of an accident caused by a malfunction in BAS (Brake Assist System)

If BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distance in an emergency braking situation is increased.

▶ Depress the brake pedal with full force in emergency braking situations. ABS prevents the wheels from locking.

The Brake Assist System (BAS) supports your emergency braking situation with additional brake force.

If you depress the brake pedal quickly, BAS is activated:

• BAS automatically boosts the brake pressure.
- BAS can shorten the braking distance.
• ABS prevents the wheels from locking.

The brakes will function as usual once you release the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated.

Function of ESP ^®

WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP® is deactivated

If you deactivate ESP ^ , ESP ^ cannot carry out vehicle stabilisation.

ESP® should only be deactivated in the following situations.

The Electronic Stability Program (ESP ^® ) can monitor and improve driving stability and traction in the following situations within physical limits:

• When pulling away on wet or slippery carriageways.
• When braking.

If the vehicle deviates from the direction desired by the driver, ESP ^ can stabilise the vehicle by intervening in the following ways:

• One or more wheels are braked.
- The engine output is adapted according to the situation.

When ESP® is deactivated, the OFF warning lamp lights up continuously:

• Driving stability will no longer be improved.
  • The drive wheels could spin.
  • ETS/4ETS traction control is still active.

When ESP ^ is deactivated, you are still assisted by ESP ^ when braking.

When the warning lamp flashes, one or several wheels has reached its grip limit:

• Adapt your driving style to suit the current road and weather conditions.
• Do not deactivate ESP ^ .
• Only depress the accelerator pedal as far as is necessary when pulling away.

Deactivate ESP® in the following situations to improve traction:

• When using snow chains.
• In deep snow.
• On sand or gravel.

i Spinning the wheels results in a cutting action, which enhances traction.

If the warning lamp lights up continuously, ESP® is not available due to a malfunction.

Observe the following information:

• Warning and indicator lamps (→ page 909)
• Display messages (→ page 817)

ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System)

ETS/4ETS traction control is part of ESP® and makes it possible to pull away and accelerate on a slippery carriageway.

If you select drive program 📄, a special ETS system specifically suited to off-road terrain is automatically activated.

ETS/4ETS can improve the vehicle's traction by intervening in the following ways:

• The drive wheels are braked individually if they spin.
• More drive torque is transferred to the wheel or wheels with traction.

Influence of drive programs on ESP®

The drive programs enable ESP ^® to adapt to different weather and road conditions as well as the driver's preferred driving style. Depending on the selected drive program, the appropriate ESP ^® mode will be activated ( page 297, 296).

Function of ESP® (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)

You can select between the following modes of the Electronic Stability Program (ESP®):

• ESP® ON
• ESP® SPORT
• ESP® OFF

Characteristics when ESP® is activated

ESP ^® monitors and improves driving stability and traction, particularly in the following situations:

• When pulling away on wet or slippery carriageways.
• When braking.
• Vehicles with trailer hitch: in trailer operation from speeds of 65 km/h, if the vehicle/trailer combination begins to sway from side to side.
• When there is a strong crosswind and a driving speed of approximately 80 km/h to 200 km/h.

ESP ^® can stabilise the vehicle by intervening in the following ways:

• One or more wheels are braked.

- The engine output is adapted according to the situation.

ESP ^® is activated every time the vehicle is started regardless of whether ESP ^® was in ESP ^® SPORT or deactivated before the vehicle was switched off.

When the warning lamp flashes, one or several wheels has reached its grip limit:

• Adapt the driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions.
• Do not deactivate ESP® under any circumstances.
• Only depress the accelerator pedal as far as necessary.

Characteristics of ESP® SPORT

WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP® SPORT is used incorrectly

When you activate ESP ^® SPORT, there is an increased risk of skidding and having an accident.

Activate ESP® SPORT only in the circumstances described below.

When ESP® SPORT is selected, the OFF and warning lamps light up continuously.

Select ESP® SPORT when the vehicle's own oversteering and understeering characteristics are desired, e.g. on cordoned-off roads.

Driving with ESP® SPORT or with ESP® deactivated requires an extremely qualified and experienced driver.

If ESP ^ SPORT is activated and one or more wheels start to spin, the warning lamp flashes. ESP ^ then only stabilises the vehicle to a limited degree.

ESP® SPORT also has the following characteristics:

• ESP® only improves driving stability to a limited degree.
  • ETS/4ETS traction control is still active.
• The engine's torque is only restricted to a limited degree and the drive wheels can spin.

The spinning of the wheels results in a cutting action for better traction on loose surfaces.

• ESP ^ continues to provide assistance when the brakes are firmly applied.
• Vehicles with trailer hitch: stabilisation of the vehicle/trailer combination is no longer active.
  • Crosswind Assist is no longer active.

Characteristics when ESP ^® is deactivated

WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP® is deactivated

If you deactivate ESP ^® , ESP ^® cannot carry out vehicle stabilisation.

▶ ESP® should only be deactivated in the following situations.

When ESP® is deactivated, the OFF and ESPOFF warning lamps light up continuously.

Deactivating ESP ^® has the following effects:

• Driving stability will no longer be improved.
  • The drive wheels could spin.

• ETS/4ETS traction control is still active.
- Vehicles with trailer hitch: stabilisation of the vehicle/trailer combination is no longer active.
• Crosswind Assist is no longer active.

Even when ESP ^ is deactivated, you are still assisted by ESP ^ when braking hard.

It may be best to activate ESP® SPORT or deactivate ESP® in the following situations:

• When using snow chains.
• In deep snow.
• On sand or gravel.

i Spinning the wheels results in a cutting action, which enhances traction.
① Activate ESP ^® as soon as the situations described above no longer apply. ESP ^® will otherwise not be able to stabilise the vehicle if the vehicle starts to skid or a wheel starts to spin.

If the warning lamp lights up continuously, ESP® is not available due to a malfunction.

Observe the display messages, warning lamps and indicator lamps, which are shown.

• Indicator and warning lamps (→ page 909)
• Display messages (→ page 817)

ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System) ETS/4ETS traction control is part of ESP®.

ETS/4ETS can improve the vehicle's traction by intervening in the following ways:

• The drive wheels are braked individually if they spin.
• More drive torque is transferred to the wheel or wheels with traction.

Function of ESP® Crosswind Assist

ESP® Crosswind Assist detects sudden gusts of side wind and helps the driver to keep the vehicle in the lane:

- ESP® Crosswind Assist is active at vehicle speeds between approx. 80 km/h and 200 km/h when driving straight ahead or cornering slightly.

- The vehicle is stabilised by means of individual brake application on one side.

Function of ESP ^® trailer stabilisation

⚠ WARNING Risk of accident in poor road and weather conditions

In poor road and weather conditions, the trailer stabilisation cannot prevent lurching of the vehicle/trailer combination. Trailers with a high centre of gravity may tip over before ESP ^® detects this.

▶ Always adapt your driving style to suit the current road and weather conditions.

When driving with a trailer, ESP ^® can stabilise your vehicle if the trailer begins to swerve from side to side:

• ESP® trailer stabilisation is active above speeds of 65 km/h.
• Slight swerving is reduced by means of a targeted, individual brake application on one side.

- In the event of severe swerving, the operating energy output is also reduced and all wheels are braked.

ESP ^® trailer stabilisation may be impaired or may not function if:

- The trailer is not connected correctly or is not detected properly by the vehicle.

Activating or deactivating ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)

Multimedia system:

i ESP® can only be activated/deactivated using quick access when at least one other function is available in quick access. ESP® can otherwise be found in the Assistance menu.

Select ESP.
Select On or Off.

ESP® is deactivated if the OFF ESP® OFF warning lamp lights up continuously in the driver's display.

Observe any information on warning lamps and display messages which may be shown in the driver's display.

Setting ESP ^® with the steering-wheel button

① You can also adjust ESP® via the multimedia system (→ page 351).

Diagram of a car interior with numbered components, likely illustrating a steering wheel or steering wheel assembly.

To set ESP®: press upper or lower display button ① repeatedly, until it displays the symbol.
If the display button does not show the symbol, then it is hidden. How functions are displayed and the order in which they are dis-

played can be set in the multimedia sys-tem(→ page 291).

The lane colour of the button symbol indicates the current setting:

• (blue): ESP® ON
- (yellow): ESP® SPORT
- (red): ESP ^ OFF

To set ESP® SPORT: briefly press button ② when ESP® is activated.

The road in the OFF button symbol lights up yellow.

The OFF and ESP SPORT warning lamps appear in the driver's display.

If, in drive programs and , you switch ESP® to SPORT ESP SPORT, AMG Dynamics automatically switches to the Slide or Traction level.
To deactivate ESP®: select ESP® SPORT and then press and hold button ②.

The road in the ☐ button symbol lights up red.

The OFF and ESPOFF warning lamps appear in the driver's display.

When you deactivate ESP ^ ESPOFF in drive program [icon], AMG Dynamics automatically switches to the Master level. If, in drive programs and [icon], you deactivate ESP ^ ESPOFF, AMG Dynamics automatically switches to the Slide or Traction level.
To activate ESP®: briefly press button ② when ESP® SPORT is selected or ESP® is deactivated. The road in the OFF button symbol lights up blue. The OFF and ESP SPORT or ESP OFF warning lamps go out.

If the symbol is shown with a red! on the display button, ESP ^ is malfunctioning. Observe the information on warning lamps and display messages which are shown in the driver's display.

Setting ESP ^® in the multimedia system

Multimedia system:

Settings Vehicle DYNAMIC SELECT

The AMG DYNAMIC SELECT menu can also be called up using the DYNAMIC SELECT button.

ESP® is always activated when the vehicle is started. The road in the OFF button symbol lights up blue.

To set ESP SPORT: when ESP is activated, briefly press OFF to change to the Sport program. The road in the OFF button symbol lights up yellow.
To deactivate ESP®: set the ESP® SPORT program and press and hold [OFF] to deactivate ESP®. The road in the [OFF] button symbol lights up red. The [OFF] and [ESPOFF] warning lamps appear in the driver's display.

To activate ESP®: briefly press in ESP® SPORT or if ESP® is deactivated. The road in the button symbol lights up blue.
The OFF and ESP/ST/OFF or ESP/OFF warning lamps go out.
① You can also adjust ESP via the steering-wheel button ( page 350).

Activating/deactivating ESP ^® (with Off-road package or E-Active Body Control)

NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles

▶ Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognise dangers.

Diagram showing a car interior with a highlighted switch labeled 'OFF' and a numbered annotation '1'

Pull rocker switch

ESP ^ is deactivated if the ☐ ESP ^ OFF warning lamp lights up continuously in the driver's display.

Please note the information on the warning lamps and display messages.

Function of EBD

Electronic Brakeforce Distribution (EBD) is characterised by the following:

• Monitoring and regulating the brake pressure on the rear wheels.
- Improved driving stability when braking, especially on bends.

Function of STEER CONTROL

STEER CONTROL assists you by transmitting a noticeable steering force to the steering wheel in the direction required for vehicle stabilisation.

If you brake and both right wheels or both left wheels are on a wet or slippery road surface, you will receive a steering recommendation.

This steering recommendation is given in the following situations:

• both right wheels or both left wheels are on a wet or slippery road surface when you brake
  • the vehicle starts to skid

System limits

STEER CONTROL may be impaired or may not function in the following situations:

• ESP ^ is deactivated.
• ESP® is malfunctioning.
  • The steering is malfunctioning.

If ESP ^® is malfunctioning, you will be assisted further by the electric power steering.

HOLD function

HOLD function

The HOLD function holds the vehicle at a standstill without requiring you to depress the brake pedal, e.g. while waiting in traffic.

The HOLD function is only an aid. The responsibility for the vehicle safely standing still remains with the driver.

System limits

The HOLD function is only intended to provide assistance when driving and is not a sufficient means of safeguarding the vehicle against rolling away when stationary.

• The incline must not be greater than 30%.

Activating/deactivating the HOLD function

WARNING Risk of an accident due to the HOLD function being active when you leave the vehicle

If the vehicle is only braked with the HOLD function it could, in the following situations, roll away:

• If there is a malfunction in the system or in the power supply.
• If the HOLD function is deactivated by depressing the accelerator pedal or brake pedal, e.g. by a vehicle occupant.

Always secure the vehicle against rolling away before you leave it.

Requirements

• The vehicle is stationary.
- The driver's door is closed or the seat belt on the driver's side is fastened.

• The vehicle has been started or has been automatically switched off by the ECO start/stop function.
  • The electric parking brake is released.
  • Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is deactivated.
• The transmission is in position D, R or N.

Activating the HOLD function

Depress the brake pedal, and after a short time quickly depress further until the HOLD display appears in the driver's display.
Release the brake pedal.

Deactivating the HOLD function

Depress the accelerator pedal to pull away. or
Depress the brake pedal until the HOLD display disappears from the driver's display.

The HOLD function is deactivated in the following situations:

• Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activated.

• The transmission is shifted to position P.
- The vehicle is secured with the electric parking brake.

In the following situations, the vehicle is held by transmission position [P] and/or by the electric parking brake:

• The seat belt is unfastened and the driver's door is opened.
  • The vehicle is switched off.
  • There is a system malfunction.
  • The power supply is insufficient.

In addition, the Brake immediately message may appear in the driver's display and a horn tone may sound at regular intervals.

Immediately depress the brake pedal firmly until the warning message disappears. The HOLD function is deactivated.
Additionally secure the vehicle against rolling away.

Function of Hill Start Assist

Hill Start Assist holds the vehicle for a short time when pulling away on a hill under the following conditions:

• The transmission is in position D or R.
• The electric parking brake is released.

This gives you enough time to move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal and depress it before the vehicle begins to roll away.

WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to the vehicle rolling away

After a short time, Hill Start Assist no longer holds the vehicle.

Swiftly move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Do not leave the vehicle when it is being held by Hill Start Assist.

Function of Adaptive Brake Lights

Adaptive Brake Lights warn following traffic in an emergency braking situation with the following actions:

• flashing the brake lamps
• activating the hazard warning lights (→ page 55)

If the vehicle is braked sharply from speeds above 50 km/h, the brake lamps flash rapidly. This provides traffic travelling behind you with an even more noticeable warning.

ATTENTION ASSIST

Function of ATTENTION ASSIST

ATTENTION ASSIST assists you on long, monotonous journeys, e.g. on motorways and trunk roads. If indicators of fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration on the part of the driver are detected, the system suggests taking a break.

ATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid. It cannot always detect fatigue or lapses in concentration in time. The system is not a substitute for a well-res-

ted and attentive driver. On long journeys, take regular breaks in good time that allow for adequate recuperation.

You can choose between two settings:

• Standard: normal system sensitivity.
- Sensitive: higher system sensitivity. The driver is warned earlier and the attention level detected by ATTENTION ASSIST is adapted accordingly.

If drowsiness or increasing lapses in concentration are detected, the ATTENTION ASSIST: Take a break! warning appears in the driver's display. You can acknowledge the message and take a break where necessary. If you do not take a break and ATTENTION ASSIST continues to detect increasing lapses in concentration, you will be warned again after a minimum of 15 minutes.

ATTENTION ASSIST 1

The following information is displayed in the driver's display:

• The length of the journey since the last break
- The attention level determined by ATTENTION ASSIST.

The more segments ① of the circle displayed, the higher the detected attention level. Fewer segments ② are displayed in the circle as the attention level decreases.

If ATTENTION ASSIST is unable to calculate the attention level and cannot issue a warning, the System suspended message appears.

If a warning is given in the driver's display, the multimedia system offers to search for a rest area. You can select a rest area and start navigation to this rest area.

When you restart the vehicle, ATTENTION ASSIST is automatically switched on. The last selected sensitivity level remains stored.

System limits

ATTENTION ASSIST is active in the 60 km/h to 200 km/h speed range.

If the system is not available due to an error, the ATTENTION ASSIST warning light lights up continuously in the driver display.

Particularly in the following situations, ATTENTION ASSIST only functions in a restricted manner and warnings may be delayed or not occur:

• If you have been driving for less than approximately 30 minutes.
• If the road condition is poor (uneven road surface or potholes).
  • If there is a strong side wind.

• If you adopt a sporty driving style (high cornering speeds or high rates of acceleration).

• If the Steering Assist function of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is active.

• If the clock is set to the incorrect time.
• If you change lanes and vary your speed frequently in active driving situations.

Also observe any information regarding display messages that can be displayed in the driver's display.

The ATTENTION ASSIST drowsiness or alertness assessment is reset and restarted when continuing the journey in the following situations:

• You switch off the vehicle.
• If you unfasten your seat belt and open the driver's door (e.g. to change drivers or take a break).

Setting ATTENTION ASSIST

Multimedia system:

Settings Assistance
▶ Assistance ▶ ATTENTION ASSIST

Setting the sensitivity

Select next to ATTENTION ASSIST.

Select Standard or Sensitive.

Cruise control and limiter

Function of cruise control

Cruise control regulates the speed to the value selected by the driver.

If you accelerate to overtake, forexample, the stored speed is not deleted. If you remove your foot from the accelerator pedal after overtaking, cruise control will resume speed regulation back to the stored speed.

You can store any speed above 20 km/h up to the maximum design speed or up to the set winter tyre limit.

Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognise dangers ( page 343).

Mercedes-AMG vehicles: cruise control is available up to a maximum speed of 250 km/h.

Displays in the driver's display

- (grey): cruise control is selected but not yet active, or temporarily passive.

• (green): cruise control is active.

A stored speed appears under the ☑ display and is indicated in the speedometer.

System limits

Cruise control may be unable to maintain the stored speed on uphill gradients. The stored speed is resumed when the gradient evens out.

Change into a lower gear in good time on long and steep downhill gradients. Take particular note of this when driving a laden vehicle. By doing so, you will make use of the engine's braking effect. This relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly.

Do not use cruise control in the following situations:

• in traffic situations which require frequent changes of speed, e.g. in heavy traffic, on winding roads
• on slippery roads. Accelerating can cause the drive wheels to lose traction and the vehicle could then skid.
• when visibility is poor

F167 0009 02

Function of the limiter

The limiter restricts the speed of the vehicle. To reduce the speed to the set speed, the limiter applies the brakes automatically.

You can limit the speed as follows:

• Variable: for a short-term speed restriction, e.g. in built-up areas
• Permanent: for a longer-term speed restriction, e.g. in winter tyre mode

You can store any speed above 20 km/h up to the maximum design speed or up to the set winter tyre limit. You can also perform settings while the vehicle is stationary if the vehicle has been started.

Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognise dangers ( page 343).

Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the limiter is available up to a maximum speed of 250 km/h.

Displays in the driver's display

- LIM (grey): variable limiter is selected but not yet activated.

• LIM (flashes grey): variable limiter is temporarily passive.
  • LIM (green): variable limiter is activated.

A stored speed appears under the LIM display and is indicated in the speedometer.

If you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point (kickdown), the variable limiter switches to passive mode. The message LIM passive appears in the driver's display and the display LIM flashes.

The variable limiter is reactivated in the following situations:

• If the vehicle speed drops below the stored speed.
  • If the stored speed is called up.
  • If you store a new speed.

Operating cruise control or the variable limiter

⚠ WARNING Risk of accident due to stored speed

If you call up the stored speed and this is lower than your current speed, the vehicle decelerates.

Take into account the traffic situation before calling up the stored speed.

Requirements

Cruise control

• Cruise control is selected.
- ESP® must be activated, but not intervening.
• The vehicle speed is at least 20 km/h.
• The transmission is in position [D].

Variable limiter

• The variable limiter is selected.

Diagram showing car dashboard with steering wheel, dashboard panel with 'NEW' and 'CANCEL' buttons, and a control interface labeled '1'

Steering wheel control panel for cruise control and variable limiter

RES® Adopts the stored/detected speed
CANCEI Deactivates cruise control/the variable limiter

Selects cruise control

LIM Selects the variable limiter

Control panel to increase/decrease speed

Operating cruise control and the variable limiter

Press the corresponding button with only one finger or swipe on the control panel.

Switching between cruise control and the variable limiter

To select cruise control: press 📞.
To select the variable limiter: press LIM.

① Vehicles with Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC: the variable limiter is selected by a different button ( page 362).

Activating cruise control or the variable limiter

Press SET/+ or SET/- on control panel ①. The current vehicle speed is stored and the vehicle maintains this speed (cruise control) or does not exceed it (variable limiter).

or

Press RES/9. The last stored speed is recalled and held by the vehicle (TEMPOMAT) or limited (variable limiter).
If the last stored speed has previously been deleted, the current vehicle speed is stored.

When you switch off the vehicle, the last speed stored is deleted. When you activate cruise control or Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC, the last speed stored for the variable limiter is deleted.

Increasing/decreasing the stored speed

To increase the stored speed: swipe upwards from the bottom of control panel ①.
• The stored speed is increased by 1 km/h.
To decrease the stored speed: swipe downwards from the top of control panel ①. The stored speed is decreased by 1 km/h.

or

Briefly press SET/+ or SET/- on control panel The stored speed is increased or decreased to the next increment of ten (e.g. at 50 km/h or 60 km/h).

or

Press and hold SET/+ or SET/- on control panel ①. The stored speed is increased or decreased to the next increment of ten and afterwards by increments of 10 km/h.

or

Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed.

Press SET/+ on control panel ①.

When the variable limiter is switched to passive mode, you cannot increase or decrease its stored speed in increments of 1 km/h.

Adopting a detected speed

If cruise control/variable limiter is activated and Traffic Sign Assist has detected a speed restriction sign with a maximum permissible speed and this is displayed in the driver's display:

Press RESJ ^ . The maximum permissible speed shown by the traffic sign is stored and the vehicle maintains or does not exceed this speed.

Deactivating cruise control or the variable limiter

Press CANCEL.

If you brake, deactivate ESP ^ or if ESP ^ intervenes, cruise control is deactivated. The variable limiter is not deactivated.

When you switch off the vehicle, the last speed stored is deleted. When you select cruise control or Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC, the last speed stored for the variable limiter is cleared.

Information on the permanent limiter If the vehicle should never exceed a specific speed (e.g. for driving in winter tyre mode), you can set this speed with the permanent limiter.

You do this by limiting the speed between 160 km/h and 240 km/h in the multimedia system ( page 49).

Shortly before the set speed is reached, it appears in the driver's display. When you confirm the message, display messages no longer appear until you switch off the vehicle. The speed will only be displayed again once the vehicle has been restarted or if the set speed is changed.

The permanent limiter does not switch to passive mode even during kickdown and the driven speed remains below the set speed.

Setting the speed limit for winter tyres Multimedia system:

Settings Vehicle Winter tyre limit

▶ Activate or deactivate Winter tyre limit.

Setting a speed

Select Winter tyre limit.

Select a speed.

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

Function of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC DISTRONIC Active Distance Assist maintains the set speed when driving freely. If vehicles are detected ahead, the set distance is maintained, if necessary until the vehicle comes to a standstill. The vehicle accelerates or brakes depending on the distance to the vehicle in front and the set speed. The speed and distance to the vehicle in front are set and saved using the steering wheel. Available speed range:

• Vehicles without Driving Assistance Package: 20 km/h - 160 km/h

F167 0009 02

• Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package: 20 km/h - 210 km/h

Other features of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC:

• Adjusts the driving style depending on the selected drive program (fuel-saving, comfortable or dynamic)

• Initiates acceleration to the stored speed if the turn signal indicator is switched on to change to the overtaking lane
  • Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package:

• Reacts to stationary vehicles detected in urban speed ranges (except bicycles and motorcycles)

• Takes one-sided overtaking restrictions into account on motorways or on multi-lane roads with separate carriageways (country-dependent)

Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package and Parking Package: if the vehicle has been braked to a standstill on multi-lane, separate carriageways by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC, it can automatically follow the vehicle in front when driving

off again within 30 seconds. If a critical situation is detected when driving off, a visual and acoustic warning is given indicating that the driver must now take control of the vehicle. The vehicle is not accelerated any further.

Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognise dangers ( page 343).

Display in the driver's display in the Assistance menu

100m 50m 25m 0m 3

① Vehicle in front
2 Distance indicator
Set specified distance

Vehicle detected in front ① is highlighted in green. It may also be in the lane to the left of your vehicle in situations where it is not permitted to overtake on the right, for example on motorways.

Permanent status display

• (grey): Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC selected but not yet active
• (green speedometer, grey vehicle): Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC active, speed set
  • (green): Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC active and vehicle detected

The stored speed is shown under the permanent status display and highlighted on the speedometer. When Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is passive, the status display is greyed out.

If the speed of the vehicle in front or the speed adjustment is less than the stored speed due to the route event ahead, the segments in the speedometer light up.

The display appears briefly if you increase or decrease the set target distance 📄.

On motorways or high-speed major roads, the green vehicle symbol is displayed cyclically when the vehicle is ready to pull away.
If you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the setting of the Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC, the system is switched to passive mode. The following message appears briefly in the driver's display suspended.

System limits

The system may be impaired or may not function in the following situations, for example:

• In snow, rain, fog, heavy spray, if there is glare, in direct sunlight or in greatly varying light conditions.
• If there is swirling dust, e.g. when driving off-road or on sandy surfaces.
• The windscreen in the area of the camera is dirty, misted up, damaged or covered.
  • If the radar sensors are dirty or covered.
• In multi-storey car parks or on roads with steep uphill or downhill gradients.
• If there are narrow vehicles in front, such as bicycles or motorcycles.

In addition, on slippery roads, braking or accelerating can cause one or several wheels to lose traction and the vehicle could then skid.

Do not use Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC in these situations.

WARNING Risk of accident from acceleration or braking by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC may accelerate or brake in the following cases, for example:

• If the vehicle pulls away using Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC.
• If the stored speed is called up and is considerably faster or slower than the currently driven speed.
• If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC no longer detects a vehicle in front or does not react to relevant objects.
  ▶ Always carefully observe the traffic conditions and be ready to brake at all times.

Take into account the traffic situation before calling up the stored speed.

A WARNING Risk of accident due to insufficient deceleration by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC brakes your vehicle with up to 50% of the possible deceleration. If this deceleration is not sufficient, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC alerts you with a visual and acoustic warning.

Adjust your speed and maintain a suitable distance from the vehicle in front.
Brake the vehicle yourself and/or take evasive action.

WARNING Risk of accident if detection function of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is impaired

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC does not react or has a limited reaction:

• when driving on a different lane or when changing lanes
  • to pedestrians, animals, bicycles or stationary vehicles, or unexpected obstacles
  • to complex traffic conditions
  • to oncoming vehicles and crossing traffic

As a result, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC may neither give warnings nor intervene in such situations.

Always observe the traffic conditions carefully and react accordingly.

You can watch an animation on this topic via the following link:

Operating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and the variable limiter

WARNING Risk of accident if detection function of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is impaired

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC does not react or has a limited reaction:

• when driving on a different lane or when changing lanes
  • to pedestrians, animals, bicycles or stationary vehicles, or unexpected obstacles
  • to complex traffic conditions
  • to oncoming vehicles and crossing traffic

As a result, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC may neither give warnings nor intervene in such situations.

▶ Always observe the traffic conditions carefully and react accordingly.

WARNING Risk of accident from acceleration or braking by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC may accelerate or brake in the following cases, for example:

• If the vehicle pulls away using Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC.
• If the stored speed is called up and is considerably faster or slower than the currently driven speed.
• If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC no longer detects a vehicle in front or does not react to relevant objects.
  ▶ Always carefully observe the traffic conditions and be ready to brake at all times.
  ▶ Take into account the traffic situation before calling up the stored speed.

WARNING Risk of accident due to insufficient deceleration by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC brakes your vehicle with up to 50% of the possible deceleration. If this deceleration is not sufficient, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC alerts you with a visual and acoustic warning.

Adjust your speed and maintain a suitable distance from the vehicle in front.
Brake the vehicle yourself and/or take evasive action.

WARNING Risk of accident due to Active Speed Limit Assist adapting the vehicle's speed

The speed adopted by Active Speed Limit Assist may be too high or incorrect in some individual cases, such as:

• at speed limits below 20 km/h
- in wet conditions or in fog

• when towing a trailer
  ▶ Ensure that the driven speed complies with traffic regulations.
  Adjust the driving speed to suit current traffic and weather conditions.

Requirements

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC:

• The electric parking brake is released.
- ESP ^ is activated and is not intervening.
• The transmission is in position D.
• All the doors are closed.
- Check of the radar sensor system has been successfully completed.

Variable limiter:

• The variable limiter is selected.

Diagram showing car dashboard and dashboard controls with a highlighted 'CANCEL' function panel and numbered annotation.

RES® Adopts the stored/detected speed CANCEL Deactivates Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC/ the variable limiter Increases/decreases the speed Increases/decreases the specified distance Switches between the variable limiter and Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

To operate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC or the variable limiter: press the respective button with only one finger or swipe on the control panel.

Switches between the variable limiter and Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

Press

Activating the variable limiter or Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

To activate without a stored speed: press SET/+, SET/- or RES/#. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC: remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. The current vehicle speed is stored and maintained (Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC) or limited (variable limiter) by the vehicle.

or

To activate with a stored speed: press RES/9. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC: remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. The last stored speed is called up and the vehicle maintains this speed (Active Distance

Assist DISTRONIC) or does not exceed it (variable limiter).

If the stored speed has been deleted, the current vehicle speed is stored.

When you switch off the vehicle, the stored speed is deleted. When you activate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC, the last speed stored for the variable limiter is deleted.

Increasing or reducing the speed

To increase the stored speed: swipe upwards from the bottom of control panel ①.

• The stored speed is increased by 1 km/h.

To decrease the stored speed: swipe downwards from the top of control panel ①.

• The stored speed is decreased by 1 km/h.

or

Briefly press SET/+ on the upper section or SET/- on the lower section of control panel

The stored speed is increased or reduced by 10 km/h.

or

Press and hold SET/+ on the upper section or SET/- on the lower section of control panel ①.

The stored speed is increased or reduced in increments of 10 km/h.

or

▶ Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed.

Press SET/+ on the upper section of control panel ①.

Adopting the limit speed shown in the driver's display

Activate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC or the variable limiter: press SET/+ , SET/- or RES/1.

Accept the displayed speed limit: press RES/1. The limit speed displayed in the driver's display is adopted as the stored speed. The vehicle adapts its speed to that of the vehicle in front, but only up to the stored speed, or limits its speed accordingly.

A speed limit shown in the driver display is only adopted while driving, not when stationary.

Pulling away with Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

Activate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and remove your foot from the brake pedal.

Press RES/☐.

or

Depress the accelerator pedal briefly and firmly.

The functions of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC continue to be carried out.

Reducing or increasing the specified distance from the vehicle in front

Press

The display appears. The specified distance is reduced by one level.

If the lowest level is already selected, the selection jumps to the highest level.

Deactivating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC or the variable limiter

WARNING Risk of an accident due to Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC being active when you leave the driver's seat

If you leave the driver's seat while the vehicle is being braked by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC only, the vehicle can roll away.

Always deactivate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away before you leave the driver's seat.

Press CANCEL.

If you brake, deactivate ESP® or if ESP® intervenes, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is deactivated. The variable limiter is not deactivated.

Function of Active Speed Limit Assist

If a change in the speed limit of 20 km/h or more is detected and automatic adoption of speed limits is activated, the new speed limit is automatically adopted as the stored speed ( page 382).

The driven speed is adjusted when the vehicle is level with the traffic sign at the latest. In the case of signs indicating entry into an urban area, the speed is adapted according to the speed permitted within the urban area. The speed limit display in the driver's display is always updated when the vehicle is level with the traffic sign.

If there is no speed restriction on an unlimited stretch of road (e.g. on a motorway), the recommended speed is automatically adopted as the stored speed. The system uses the speed stored on an unlimited stretch of road as the recommended speed. If you do not alter the stored speed on an unlimited stretch of road, the recommended speed is 130 km/h.

If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC has been put into passive mode by pressing the accelerator pedal, only speed limits which are higher than the set speed are adopted.

Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognise dangers ( page 343).

System limits

The system limits of Traffic Sign Assist apply to the detection of traffic signs ( page 380).

Speed limits below 20 km/h are not automatically adopted by the system as the stored speed. Temporary speed restrictions (e.g. for a certain time or due to weather conditions) cannot be properly detected by the system. The maximum permissible speed applying to a vehicle with a trailer is not detected by the system.

Adjust the speed in these situations.

WARNING Risk of accident due to Active Speed Limit Assist adapting the vehicle's speed

The speed adopted by Active Speed Limit Assist may be too high or incorrect in some individual cases, such as:

• at speed limits below 20 km/h
• in wet conditions or in fog
- when towing a trailer

▶ Ensure that the driven speed complies with traffic regulations.
Adjust the driving speed to suit current traffic and weather conditions.

You can watch an animation on this topic via the following link:

Function of route-based speed adaptation

When Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activated, the vehicle speed will be adapted accordingly to the route events ahead. Depending on the drive program selected, the vehicle negotiates a route event ahead in an economical, comfortable or dynamic manner. When the route event has been passed, the vehicle accelerates again to the stored speed. The set distance to the vehicle in front, vehicles detected ahead and speed restrictions ahead are taken into account.

You can activate and deactivate route-based speed adaptation in the multimedia system ( page 367).

The following route events are taken into account:

- Bends

• T-junctions, roundabouts and toll stations
- Turns and exits
- Traffic jams ahead (only with Live Traffic Information (→ page 533))

When the toll station is reached, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC adopts the speed as the stored speed.

Also, the speed is reduced if the turn signal indicator to change lanes is switched on and one of the following situations is detected:

• Turning at junctions
• Driving on slowing-down lanes
• Driving on lanes adjacent to slowing-down lanes

The driver is responsible for choosing the right speed and observing other road users. This applies in particular to junctions, roundabouts and traffic lights, as route-based speed adaptation does not brake the vehicle to a standstill.

When route guidance is active, the first speed adjustment is carried out automatically. If the turn signal indicator is switched on, the selected route is confirmed and further speed adjustment is activated.

Speed adaptation is cancelled in the following cases:

• If the turn signal indicator is switched off before the route event.
• If the driver depresses the accelerator or brake pedal during the process.

System limits

Route-based speed adaptation does not take right of way regulations into account. The driver is responsible for complying with road traffic regulations and driving at a suitable speed.

The speed adaptation made by the system may not always be suitable, particularly in the following situations:

• the road's course not clearly visible
- Road narrowing
• varying maximum permissible speeds in individual lanes, forexample at toll stations
• wet road surfaces, snow or ice
- when towing a trailer

In these situations the driver must intervene accordingly.

WARNING Risk of accident in spite of route-based speed adaptation

Route-based speed adaptation can malfunction or be temporarily unavailable in the following situations:

• If the driver does not follow the calculated route
  • If map data is not up-to-date or available
  • In the event of roadworks
  • In bad weather or road conditions
  • If the accelerator pedal is depressed
• In the event of electronically displayed speed limitations

Adapt the speed to the traffic situation.

Setting Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC driving styles

Requirements

• Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activated.

Multimedia system:

Settings ▶ Assistance

▶ Driving ▶ Active Distance Assist

Setting speed adaptation

▶ Select Adopt speed limit or Route-based speed adjustment. When these functions are active, the vehicle speed is adjusted depending on the route events ahead.

When one of the following systems is active, the detected speed can be manually adopted as the speed limit:

• Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

- Variable limiter

i Further information on Speed Adjustment ( page 366).

Function of Active Stop-and-Go Assist

Active Stop-and-Go Assist helps you when in traffic jams on multi-lane roads with separate carriageways by automatically pulling away within up to 60 seconds and with moderate steering manoeuvres. It orients itself using the vehicle in front and lane markings. Active Stop-and-Go Assist automatically maintains a safe distance from the vehicle in front and vehicles cutting in.

Active Stop-and-Go Assist requires you, as the driver, to keep your hands on the steering wheel at all times so that you are able to intervene at any time to correct the course of the vehicle and keep it in lane. Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognise dangers ( page 343).

Active Traffic Jam Assist activates automatically as soon as all of the requirements are met: The status display [icon] appears in the driver's display when the function is active.

Requirements:

- You are in a traffic jam on a motorway or high-speed major road.

• Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activated and active ( page 362).
  • Active Brake Assist is available ( page 373).
  • Active Steering Assist is activated and active( page 372).
  • You are travelling no faster than 60 km/h.

System limits

The system limitations of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and Active Steering Assist apply to Active Traffic Jam Assist.

DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation)

Function of the DSR system

DSR is an aid to assist you when driving downhill. It keeps the speed of travel at the selected target speed. The steeper the downhill gradient, the greater the D S R braking effect on the vehicle. On flat stretches of road and uphill gradients, the DSR brakes the vehicle minimally or not at all.

When DSR is activated and the transmission is in position D, R or N, DSR controls the driving speed. The target speed can be set to a value between 2 km/h and 18 km/h. By braking or

accelerating, you can drive at a higher or lower speed than the target speed at any time. If you drive faster than 45 km/h or change the driving programme (except in /), DSR switches off automatically. The off message appears in the driver's display. The status indicator in the driver's display goes out. You also hear a warning tone.

Information on DSR

WARNING Risk of skidding and accident when DSR is activated on slippery road surfaces

If the driven speed and the target speed differ, the wheels may lose traction.

Take into account the road surface and the difference between the driving speed and target speed before activating DSR.

Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognise dangers ( page 343).

You are always responsible for keeping control of the vehicle and for assessing whether the downhill

F167 0009 02

gradient can be negotiated. Depending on road surface and tyres, DSR may not always be able to keep to the target speed. Select a target speed suitable for the environmental conditions and also apply the brakes yourself if required.

Switching DSR on/off (with Offroad package or E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL)

Requirements:

• You are driving at 40 km/h or slower.
If the speed driven is too high, the message Max. speed 40 km/h appears in the driver's display.
- You have not selected the driving programme S.
• Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is deactivated.

Diagram showing car interior with labeled parts and a zoomed-in view of the switch mechanism

To activate: pull rocker switch ①. Indicator lamp ② will light up.

The symbol 📄 appears in the driver's display.

To deactivate: pull rocker switch ①. Indicator lamp ② and the symbol go out.

Activating or deactivating DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation)

Requirements

• You are driving at 40 km/h or slower. If the vehicle speed is too high, the Max. speed 40 km/h message appears in the driver's display.
  • Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC, TEMPO-MAT and variable limiter are switched off.

Multimedia system:

Settings Assistance

Select . A status display appears in the driver's display when the function is activated.

Changing the target speed

When DSR is activated, you can change the target speed to a value between 2 km/h and 18 km/h.

Diagram showing car steering wheel and dashboard with a digital display showing navigation controls and a numbered step indicator.

Increase/decrease the target speed: Press ① or SET/+ in the control panel SET/-. The target speed is increased or decreased by 1 km/h and shown next to the status indicator in the driver's display.

Active Steering Assist

Function of Active Steering Assist

Active Steering Assist is only available up to a speed of 210 km/h. The system helps you to stay in the centre of the lane by means of moderate steering interventions. Depending on the speed driven, Active Steering Assist uses the vehicles ahead and lane markings as a reference.

Depending on the country, in the lower speed range Active Steering Assist can use the surrounding traffic as a reference. If necessary, Active Steering Assist can then also provide assistance when driving outside the centre of the lane, forexample, to form a rescue lane.

If the detection of lane markings and vehicles ahead is impaired, Active Steering Assist switches to passive mode. The system provides no support in this case.

Status display of the active steering assistant

• (grey): activated and passive
• (green): activated and active
• (red): system limits detected

• (white, red hands): "hands on the steering wheel" prompt
  During the transition from active to passive status, the symbol is shown as enlarged and flashing. When the passive state is reached, the symbol is displayed in grey.
  (i) Depending on the selected vehicle settings, Active Steering Assist may be unavailable.

Steering and touch detection

The driver is required to keep their hands on the steering wheel at all times and be able to intervene at any time to correct the course of the vehicle and keep it in lane. The driver must expect a change from active to passive mode or vice versa at any time.

Top-down view of a car steering wheel with hands, no visible text or symbols

If the system detects that the driver has not steered the vehicle for a considerable period of time or has removed their hands from the steering wheel, display ① appears. If the driver still does not steer the vehicle, a warning tone sounds in addition to the visual warning message.

If the driver does not react to the warning for a considerable period, the system can initiate an emergency stop ( page 372).

The warning does not occur or stops as soon as the system detects that the driver is touching or steering the steering wheel.

The touch detection may be limited or without function if there is no direct contact between the

hand and the steering wheel, e.g. when wearing gloves or if there is a steering wheel cover on the steering wheel.

If Active Steering Assist detects that a system limit has been reached, a visual warning is issued and a warning tone sounds.

Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognise dangers ( page 343).

System limits

Active Steering Assist has a limited steering torque for lateral guidance. In some cases, the steering intervention is not sufficient to keep the vehicle in the lane or to drive through exits.

The system may be impaired or may not function in the following instances:

• There is poor visibility, e.g. due to snow, rain, fog, heavy spray, greatly varying light conditions or strong shadows on the carriageway.

• There is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, direct sunlight or reflections.
  • Insufficient road illumination.

• The windscreen is dirty, misted up, damaged or covered in the vicinity of the camera, e.g. by a sticker.

• No, or several, unclear lane markings are present for one lane, or the markings change quickly, forexample, in a construction area or junctions.
• The lane markings are worn away, dark or covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow.
• If the distance to the vehicle in front is too short and thus the lane markings cannot be detected.
  • The road is narrow and winding.
• There are obstacles on the lane or projecting out into the lane, such as object markers.

The system does not provide assistance in the following conditions:

• On tight bends and when turning.
- When crossing junctions.
- At roundabouts or toll stations.
- When towing a trailer.
- When the tyre pressure is too low.

- Vehicles with E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL: in driving programme CV and in inclination level 2 and 3

⚠ WARNING Risk of accident if Active Steering Assist unexpectedly stops functioning

If the system limits of Active Steering Assist are reached there is no guarantee that the system will remain active or will keep the vehicle in lane.

Always keep your hands on the steering wheel and observe the traffic carefully.
▶ Always steer the vehicle paying attention to traffic conditions.

⚠ WARNING Risk of accident if Active Steering Assist unexpectedly intervenes

The detection of lane markings and objects may malfunction and cause unexpected steering interventions.

▶ Steer according to traffic conditions.

You can watch an animation on this topic via the following link:

Activating/deactivating Active Steering Assist

Requirements:

• ESP ^ is activated, but is not intervening.
  • Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activated.

Multimedia system:

→ Settings ▶ Assistance

Driving

▶ Activate or deactivate Active Steering Assist.

Function of Active Emergency Stop Assist

Front view of a Mercedes-Benz car dashboard with hands and steering wheel (no visible text or symbols)

If the system detects that the driver has not steered the vehicle for a considerable period of time or has removed their hands from the steering wheel, display ① appears. If the driver still does not steer the vehicle, or gives no confirmation to the system, a warning tone sounds in addition to the visual warning message.

If the driver still does not respond to the warning, the message Beginning emergency stop appears in the driver display. If the driver still does not respond, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC reduces the speed. The vehicle is decelerated in stages to a standstill.

Depending on the country, at speeds below 60 km/h the hazard warning lights switch on automatically.

When the vehicle is stationary, the following actions are carried out:

• The vehicle is secured with the electric parking brake.
  • Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is ended.
  • The vehicle is unlocked.
• If possible, an emergency call is placed to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre.

The driver can cancel the deceleration at any time by performing one of the following actions:

• Steering
• Braking or accelerating
  • Deactivating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

Active Brake Assist

Function of Active Brake Assist

Active Brake Assist consists of the following functions:

• Distance warning function
- Collision warning
• Autonomous braking function
• Situation-dependent brake force boosting
- Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package: Evasive Steering Assist and cornering function

Active Brake Assist can help you to minimise the risk of a collision with vehicles, cyclists or pedestrians or to reduce the effects of such a collision. If Active Brake Assist has detected a risk of collision, a warning tone sounds and the △ Active Brake Assist warning lamp lights up.

Side-by-side comparison of a car on a road, showing two views with numbered annotations (1 and 2) highlighting the lane and side profile.

In the Assistance menu, an insufficient distance ① to the vehicle in front is displayed in red. If you further reduce the distance, the vehicle in front is also highlighted in red. When the system detects a risk of collision, red radar waves ② appear in front of the vehicle.

Vehicles with PRE-SAFE®: depending on the country, an additional haptic warning occurs in the form of slight, repeated tensioning of the seat belt.

If you do not react to the warning, autonomous braking can be initiated in critical situations. In especially critical situations, Active Brake Assist can initiate autonomous braking directly. In this

case, the warning lamp and warning tone occur simultaneously with the braking application. If you apply the brake yourself in a critical situation or apply the brake during autonomous braking, situation-dependent brake force boosting occurs. The brake pressure increases up to maximum full-stop braking if necessary.

Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognise dangers ( page 343).

1 i 50 30 130 p

If autonomous braking or situation-dependent brake force boosting has occurred, pop up ① appears in the driver's display and then automatically goes out after a short time.

If the autonomous braking function or situation-dependent brake force boosting is triggered, additional preventive measures for occupant protection (PRE-SAFE ^® ) may also be initiated.

WARNING Risk of an accident caused by limited detection performance of Active Brake Assist

Active Brake Assist cannot always clearly identify objects and complex traffic situations. In such cases, Active Brake Assist might:

• Give a warning or brake without reason
• Not give a warning or not brake

Active Brake Assist is only an aid. The driver is responsible for maintaining a sufficiently safe distance to the vehicle in front, vehicle speed and for braking in good time.

Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation; do not rely on Active Brake Assist alone.
Be prepared to brake or swerve if necessary.

If Active Brake Assist is deactivated or the functions are restricted, e.g. due to activation of another driving system, the OFF display message appears in the driver's display.

If the system is unavailable due to dirty or damaged sensors or due to a fault, or if the functions are restricted, the warning lamp appears in the driver's display.

Also observe the system limits of Active Brake Assist.

The individual subfunctions are available in various speed ranges

The distance warning function can issue a warning in the following situations:

• From approximately 30 km/h, if over several seconds the distance maintained to the vehicle travelling in front is too close for the driven speed, the △ distance warning lamp lights up in the driver's display.
• From approximately 7 km/h, if your vehicle is critically close to a vehicle, cyclist or pedestrian, you will hear an intermittent warning

tone and the △ distance warning lamp lights up in the driver's display.

Vehicles with PRE-SAFE®: depending on the country, an additional haptic warning occurs in the form of slight, repeated tensioning of the seat belt.

Brake immediately or take evasive action, provided it is safe to do so and the traffic situation allows this.

Collision warning (vehicles without Driving Assistance Package)

The collision warning can aid you in the following situations with an intermittent warning tone and a warning lamp:

- From approximately 7 km/h, if your vehicle is critically close to a vehicle, cyclist or pedestrian, you will hear an intermittent warning tone and the △ distance warning lamp lights up in the driver's display.

Vehicles with PRE-SAFE®: depending on the country, an additional haptic warning occurs in the form of slight, repeated tensioning of the seat belt.

• at speeds up to approximately 250 km/h when approaching vehicles ahead
• at speeds up to approximately 80 km/h when approaching stationary vehicles, moving pedestrians, and cyclists ahead
• at speeds up to approximately 60 km/h when approaching crossing cyclists

Collision warning (vehicles with Driving Assistance Package)

The collision warning can aid you in the following situations with an intermittent warning tone and a warning lamp:

• at speeds up to approximately 250 km/h when approaching vehicles ahead
• at speeds up to approximately 100 km/h when approaching stationary vehicles
• at speeds up to approximately 80 km/h when approaching moving pedestrians and cyclists ahead
• at speeds up to approximately 70 km/h when approaching stationary pedestrians, crossing vehicles and stationary and crossing cyclists

Autonomous braking function (vehicles without Driving Assistance Package)

If the vehicle is travelling at speeds above approximately 7 km/h, the autonomous braking function may intervene in the following situations:

• at speeds up to approximately 200 km/h when approaching vehicles ahead
• at speeds up to approximately 80 km/h when approaching cyclists ahead
• at speeds up to approximately 60 km/h when approaching moving pedestrians, crossing cyclists, and stationary vehicles

Autonomous braking function (vehicles with Driving Assistance Package)

If the vehicle is travelling at speeds above approximately 7 km/h, the autonomous braking function may intervene in the following situations:

• at speeds up to approximately 250 km/h when approaching vehicles ahead
• at speeds up to approximately 100 km/h when approaching stationary vehicles
• at speeds up to approximately 80 km/h when approaching cyclists ahead

F167 0009 02

- at speeds up to approximately 70 km/h when approaching stationary and moving pedestrians, crossing vehicles and stationary and crossing cyclists

Situation-dependent brake force boosting (vehicles without Driving Assistance Package)

Situation-dependent brake force boosting can intervene from a speed of approximately 7 km/h in the following situations:

• at speeds up to approximately 250 km/h when approaching vehicles ahead
• at speeds up to approximately 80 km/h when approaching stationary vehicles and cyclists ahead
• at speeds up to approximately 60 km/h when approaching moving pedestrians and crossing cyclists

Situation-dependent brake force boosting (vehicles with Driving Assistance Package)

Situation-dependent brake force boosting can intervene from a speed of approximately 7 km/h in the following situations:

• at speeds up to approximately 250 km/h when approaching vehicles ahead
• at speeds up to approximately 100 km/h when approaching stationary vehicles
• at speeds up to approximately 80 km/h when approaching cyclists ahead
• at speeds up to approximately 60 km/h when approaching stationary and moving pedestrians, crossing vehicles, and stationary and crossing cyclists

Cancelling a brake application of Active Brake Assist

You can cancel a brake application of Active Brake Assist at any time by:

• sharply depressing the accelerator pedal or with kickdown
• releasing the brake pedal

Active Brake Assist may cancel the brake application when one of the following conditions is fulfilled:

• you manoeuvre to avoid the obstacle
  • there is no longer a risk of collision
• an obstacle is no longer detected in front of your vehicle

You can watch an animation on this topic via the following link:

Evasive Steering Assist (only vehicles with Driving Assistance Package)

Evasive Steering Assist has the following characteristics:

• The ability to detect stationary or moving pedestrians.
• Assistance through power-assisted steering if it detects a swerving manoeuvre.
• Activation by an abrupt steering movement during a swerving manoeuvre.
• Assistance during swerving and straightening of the vehicle.

- Reaction from a speed of approximately 20 km/h up to a speed of approximately 70 km/h.

You can prevent the assistance at any time by actively steering.

Cornering function (only vehicles with Driving Assistance Package)

If the system detects a risk of a collision with an oncoming vehicle when turning across an oncoming lane, autonomous braking can be initiated at speeds below 15 km/h before you have left the lane in which you are driving.

WARNING Risk of accident despite Evasive Steering Assist

Evasive Steering Assist cannot always recognise objects or complex traffic situations clearly.

Moreover, the steering support provided by Evasive Steering Assist is not sufficient to avoid a collision.

▶ Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation; do not rely on Evasive Steering Assist alone.
Be prepared to brake or swerve if necessary.
End the support by actively steering in non-critical situations.
▶ Drive at an appropriate speed if there are pedestrians close to the path of your vehicle.

System limits

Full system performance is not available for a short time after switching on the vehicle or after driving off. Depending on the environmental conditions, it may take a few minutes before full system performance is available.

The system may be impaired or may not function, particularly in the following situations:

• In snow, rain, fog, heavy spray, if there is glare, in direct sunlight or in greatly varying light conditions.

• If the sensors are dirty, misted up, damaged or covered.

• If the sensors are impaired due to interference from other radar sources, e.g. strong radar reflections in multi-storey car parks.

• If a loss of tyre pressure or a defective tyre has been detected and displayed.
• If DSR is active.
• In complex traffic situations where objects cannot always be clearly identified.
• If pedestrians or vehicles move quickly into the sensor detection range.
  • If pedestrians are hidden by other objects.
• If the typical outline of a pedestrian cannot be distinguished from the background.
• If a pedestrian is not detected as such, e.g. due to special clothing or other objects.
  • If the driver's seat belt is not fastened.
• On bends with a tight radius.
  The Active Brake Assist sensors adjust automatically while a certain distance is being driven after the vehicle has been delivered. Active Brake Assist is unavailable or only partially available during the teach-in process.

Setting Active Brake Assist

Requirements

• The vehicle is switched on.

Multimedia system:

→ Settings → Assistance

▶ Collision avoidance

▶ Activate or deactivate the function.

i It is recommended that you always leave Active Brake Assist activated.

When Active Brake Assist is deactivated, the distance warning function, the collision warning, the autonomous braking function and Evasive Steering Assist are deactivated.

If Active Brake Assist is deactivated, the symbol appears in the status bar of the driver's display, and the system is reactivated the next time the vehicle is started.

Setting the time of the warnings

Select next to Active Brake Assist.

Select Early, Medium or Late.

If ATTENTION ASSIST has detected indications of fatigue or a microsleep, the system can issue a warning earlier than the set time (country-dependent). Further information about ATTENTION ASSIST ( page 354).

Speed Limit Assist

Function of Speed Limit Assist

Speed Limit Assist uses OpenStreetMap data, which is made available under the conditions of the Open Database License (OBbL). For more information, see: https://www.osmfoundation.org/wiki/licence.

Speed Limit Assist detects speed limits with multifunction camera and displays them in the driver's display and optionally in the head-up display. The camera also detects speed limits with a restriction indicated by an additional sign (e.g. when wet).

The system detects stop signs, thereby preventing the engine from being switched off by the ECO start/stop function.

Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognise dangers ( page 343).

Warning when the maximum permissible speed is exceeded

The system can warn you if you unintentionally exceed the maximum permissible speed. Depending on the country, you can set in the multimedia system by how much the maximum permitted speed may be exceeded before a warning is given. You can specify whether the warning is to be just a visual warning or an acoustic one as well.

Display in the driver's display

120 80 120 km/h

1 Permissible speed
2 Permissible speed when there is a restriction
3 Additional sign with restriction
Traffic signs which have an impact on the maximum permissible speed, e.g. signs indicating the beginning or end of dual carriageways, can also be detected.

The system can show up to two traffic signs in the driver's display simultaneously. The system always prioritises displaying speed limits. Up to one traffic sign with a maximum permissible speed can be shown in the head-up display. If two speed signs

are shown in the driver's display, forexample when speed limits are detected, the value of left-hand speed limit is transmitted to the limiter, cruise control or Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC for adoption and is shown in the head-up display. If Speed Limit Assist cannot determine the current maximum permissible speed (e.g. due to missing signs), the following display appears in the driver's display:

This is displayed continuously if the vehicle is in a country where Speed Limit Assist is not supported. Speed Limit Assist is not available in all countries.

i Please also note the information on the display messages ( page 817).

System limits

The system may be impaired or may not function particularly in the following situations:

• If visibility is poor, e.g. due to insufficient illumination of the road, highly variable shade conditions, rain, snow, fog, swirling dust or heavy spray.
• If there is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, direct sunlight or reflections.
• If there is dirt on the windscreen in the vicinity of the multifunction camera or if the camera is misted up, damaged or obscured.
• if the traffic signs are difficult to see because, forexample, they are dirty, obscured, faded, iced over, damaged, inconveniently positioned, insufficiently illuminated or distorted.
• Active traffic signs with LED displays may not be detected correctly or at all due to technical factors, such as transmission frequency.
• if the signs, road markings or road layout are ambiguous, e.g. in the case of traffic signs in construction sites, at exits and driveways, in the case of adjacent lanes or parallel roads, in

the case of pedestrian crossing markings at traffic lights

• if the signage or road markings do not comply with the standard
• if the signage, road markings or road guidance is country-specific and deviates from the route guidance of the navigation system, e.g. in or after road works
• After sharp turns and tight bends, when traffic signs are outside the camera's field of vision.
• If you overtake vehicles with traffic signs which are affixed or attached to them.
• If you are using transport equipment secured with a trailer coupling, such as a bicycle rack, the system may react to restrictions for car/trailer combinations.

Setting Speed Limit Assist

Multimedia system:

→ Settings ▶ Assistance

▶ Assistance ▶ Speed Limit Assist

Activating or deactivating the speed warning

① The speed warning is switched on by default (depending on the country).

Switch off Speed limit warning. The speed warning remains off according to country-specific legislation until the next time the vehicle is switched on or off and (depending on the equipment) the driver's door is opened.

The audible speed warning can also be switched off and on via quick access, by pressing and holding the mute button on the steering wheel, by pressing the speed icon in the status bar of the media display or via a voice command (functions are available depending on the country).

Change the type of speed warning

Change the warning to Visual or Visual & audible.

Switching the advisory tone for a new speed limit on or off

The advisory tone for a new speed limit is switched off at the factory.

The function determines whether each change of the displayed speed in the driver's display is supported with a subtle, non-intrusive sound.

▶ Activate or deactivate the function.

The availability of the function is dependent on the country.

Setting the warning threshold

This value determines the speed at which a warning is issued when exceeded.

Set the desired speed under Warning Threshold.

The availability of the function is subject to country-specific legislation.

When one of the following systems is active, the detected speed can be manually adopted as the speed limit:

• Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

- Cruise control

- Variable limiter

i Further information about Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC ( page 362).

Traffic Sign Assist

Function of Traffic Sign Assist

Traffic Sign Assist detects traffic signs with the multifunction camera ( page 343). It supports you by showing detected speed limits and overtaking bans in the driver's display.

Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognise dangers ( page 343).

Since Traffic Sign Assist also uses the data stored in the navigation system, it can update the display in the following situations without detecting traffic signs.

If the system detects that you are driving onto a section of road in the wrong direction of travel, it triggers a warning.

The camera also detects traffic signs with a restriction indicated by an additional sign (e.g. when wet). These are only displayed if a restric-

tion applies or if the system cannot clearly determine whether the restriction applies.

Warning when the maximum permissible speed is exceeded

The system can warn you if you unintentionally exceed the maximum permissible speed. Depending on the country, you can set in the multimedia system by how much the maximum permitted speed may be exceeded before a warning is given. You can specify whether the warning is to be just a visual warning or an acoustic one as well.

Displays in the driver's display

120 80 120 km/h

1 Permissible speed
2 Permissible speed when there is a restriction
3 Additional sign with restriction

The system can show up to two traffic signs in the driver's display simultaneously. The system always prioritises displaying speed limits. Up to one traffic sign with a maximum permissible speed can be shown in the head-up display. If two speed signs are shown in the driver's display, forexample when speed limits are detected, the value of left-hand speed limit is transmitted to the limiter, cruise control or Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC for adoption and is shown in the head-up display.

F167 0009 02

Traffic Sign Assist also uses data from the digital street map in the navigation system. When you leave or enter a municipality or change roads, on a motorway exit or slip road forexample, or after you turn at a junction, the display in the driver's display can thus be updated without a traffic sign having been detected.

If Traffic Sign Assist cannot determine the currently applicable maximum permissible speed (e.g. due to missing signs), the following display appears in the driver's display:

Traffic Sign Assist is not available in all countries. If the vehicle is in a country where Traffic Sign Assist is not supported, this is displayed continuously.

Warning when approaching pedestrian crossings The system can warn you if you approach a pedestrian crossing with your vehicle. The

Watch for pedestrians message appears in the driver's display.

The warning occurs only if appropriate traffic signs or lane markings are detected and pedestrians are present in the danger zone.

System limits

The system may be impaired or may not function particularly in the following situations:

• If there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient illumination of the road, highly variable shade conditions, rain, snow, fog or heavy spray.
• If there is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, direct sunlight or reflections.
• If there is dirt on the windscreen in the vicinity of the multifunction camera or if the camera is misted up, damaged or obscured.
• If the traffic signs are hard to detect, e.g. due to dirt, snow or insufficient lighting, or because they are obscured.
• If the information on the navigation system's digital map is incorrect or out of date.
• If signs are ambiguous, e.g. road signs in road-works or in adjacent lanes.
• If you turn sharply when passing traffic signs outside the camera's field of vision.

Setting Traffic Sign Assist

Multimedia system:

Settings ▶ Assistance

▶ Assistance ▶ Traffic Sign Assist

Activating or deactivating the speed warning

① The speed warning is switched on by default (depending on the country).

Switch off Speed limit warning. In accordance with country-specific legislation, the speed warning remains switched off until the next time the vehicle is switched on or off and the driver's door is opened (depending on equipment).

The audible speed warning can also be switched off and on via quick access, by pressing and holding the mute button on the steering wheel, by pressing the speed icon in the status bar of the media display or via a voice command (functions are available depending on the country).

Change the type of speed warning

Change the warning to Visual or Visual & audible.

Setting the warning threshold

This value determines the speed at which a warning is issued when exceeded.

Set the desired speed under Warning Threshold.
The availability of the function is subject to country-specific legislation.

Switching the advisory tone for a new speed limit on or off

The advisory tone for a new speed limit is switched off at the factory.

The function determines whether each change of the displayed speed in the driver's display is supported with a subtle, non-intrusive sound.

▶ Activate or deactivate the function.

(i) The availability of the function is dependent on the country.

Traffic light view

Information about the traffic light view

The traffic light view supports the driver when waiting in front of a red light by displaying the

camera image on the central display. The camera image is displayed when the driver is the first vehicle in front of the red light and faded out when the vehicle drives off.

Displaying traffic light view

Requirements:

• The Traffic light view option is switched on.
• A traffic light view is available.

Multimedia system:

Settings Assistance
▶ Assistance ▶ Traffic light view

① This function is not available in all countries.

If the vehicle is in first position at a traffic light, the camera image with traffic light view is shown on the central display.

When the vehicle pulls away, the camera image is faded out.

Activate or deactivate Traffic light view.

Using other available functions

Select
▶ Select On request or Automatic.

If On request is set and a traffic light view is available, the Please tap here for traffic light view. message is displayed. The camera image is shown after confirmation of the message.

When Automatic is set, the camera image is automatically displayed when the traffic light view is available.

Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist with exit warning

Function of Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist with exit warning

Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist use two lateral, rear-facing radar sensors to monitor the area up to 40 m behind and 3 m next to your vehicle.

If a vehicle is detected at speeds above approximately 12 km/h and this vehicle subsequently enters the monitoring range directly next to your

vehicle, the warning lamp in the outside mirror lights up red.

Status display:

• (grey): system is activated but inoperative
- (green): system is activated and operational

If a vehicle is detected close to your vehicle and you switch on the turn signal indicator in the corresponding direction, a double warning tone sounds and the red warning lamp in the outside mirror flashes. If the turn signal indicator remains switched on, all other detected vehicles are indicated only by the flashing of the red warning lamp.

If you overtake a vehicle quickly, no warning is given.

WARNING Risk of accident despite Active Blind Spot Assist

Active Blind Spot Assist does not react to the following:

• if you overtake a vehicle too closely so that it is in the blind spot area
• if vehicles travelling at a much faster speed approach and then overtake

Active Blind Spot Assist may not give warnings or intervene in such situations.

Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and maintain a safe distance at the side of the vehicle.

Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognise dangers ( page 343).

Exit warning

The exit warning is an additional function of Blind Spot Assist and can warn vehicle occupants about approaching vehicles when leaving the vehicle when stationary.

WARNING Risk of accident despite exit warning

The exit warning neither reacts to stationary objects nor to persons or road users approaching you at a greatly differing speed.

The exit warning cannot warn drivers in these situations.

▶ Always pay particular attention to the traffic situation when opening the doors and make sure there is sufficient clearance.

If there is a vehicle in the monitoring range, this is indicated in the outside mirror. If a vehicle occupant opens the door on the side with the warning, a warning tone sounds and the warning lamp in the outside mirror starts to flash.

This additional function is only available when Blind Spot Assist is active. When the exit warning is activated, it can warn vehicle occupants for up to three minutes after switching the vehicle off. The exit warning is no longer available once the warning lamp in the outside mirror flashes three times.

The exit warning is only an aid and not a substitute for the attention of vehicle occupants. The responsibility for opening and closing the doors and for leaving the vehicle remains with the vehicle occupants.

System limits

Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist may be limited in the following situations, in particular:

• if there is dirt on the sensors or the sensors are obscured
• in poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or snow
• if there are narrow vehicles, e.g. bicycles or motorbikes
  • if the road has very wide or narrow lanes
• if vehicles are not driving in the middle of their lane

Warnings may be issued in error when driving close to crash barriers or similar continuous lane borders. Always make sure that there is sufficient distance to the side for other traffic or obstacles.

Warnings may be interrupted when driving alongside long vehicles, for example lorries, for a prolonged time.

Blind Spot Assist is not operational when reverse gear is engaged.

Blind Spot Assist and the exit warning are not operational when a trailer is coupled to the vehicle and the electrical connection has been correctly established.

The exit warning may be limited in the following situations:

• when the sensors are covered by adjacent vehicles in narrow parking spaces
• when people approach the vehicle
• in the event of stationary or slowly moving objects

Function of brake application (Active Blind Spot Assist)

If Active Blind Spot Assist detects a risk of a side impact in the monitoring range, a course-correcting brake application is carried out. This is designed to help you avoid a collision.

The course-correcting brake application is available in the speed range between approximately 30 km/h and 200 km/h.

WARNING Risk of accident despite brake application of Active Blind Spot Assist

A course-correcting brake application cannot always prevent a collision.

Always steer, brake or accelerate yourself, especially if Active Blind Spot Assist warns you or makes a course-correcting brake application.
Always maintain a safe distance at the sides.

WARNING Risk of accident despite Active Blind Spot Assist

Active Blind Spot Assist does not react to the following:

• if you overtake a vehicle too closely so that it is in the blind spot area
• if vehicles travelling at a much faster speed approach and then overtake

Active Blind Spot Assist may not give warnings or intervene in such situations.

Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and maintain a safe distance at the side of the vehicle.

Top-down view of a car detection interface showing two cars with signal waves and a numbered callout (no readable text or symbols)

If a course-correcting brake application occurs, the red warning lamp flashes in the outside mirror and a warning tone sounds. In addition, a display

① indicating the danger of a side collision appears in the driver's display. In rare cases, the system may make an inappropriate brake application. This brake application

may be interrupted at any time if you steer slightly in the opposite direction or accelerate.

System limits

Note the system limitations of Active Blind Spot Assist; you may otherwise not recognise the dangers (/ page 383).

Either a course-correcting brake application appropriate to the driving situation, or none at all, may occur in the following situations:

R Vehicles or obstacles, e.g. crash barriers, are located on both sides of your vehicle.
R A vehicle approaches too closely on the side.
R You have adopted a sporty driving style with high cornering speeds.
R You brake or accelerate significantly.
R A driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP or Active Brake Assist.
R ESP ^® is deactivated.
R A loss of tyre pressure or a defective tyre is detected.

R You are driving with a trailer and the electrical connection to the trailer hitch has been correctly established.

Activating/deactivating Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist Multimedia system:

4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance
^5 Collision avoidance

Activate or deactivate Active Blind Spot Assist.

Active Lane Keeping Assist

Function of Active Lane Keeping Assist

Active Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in front of your vehicle by means of the multifunction camera (/ page 343) and can warn you before you leave your lane unintentionally. The system can guide you back into your lane through a course-correcting steering intervention and additionally warns you with vibration pulses in the steering wheel. Active Lane Keeping Assist is available in the speed range between approximately 60 km/h and 210 km/h.

The system can intervene in the following situations:

R Active Lane Keeping Assist detects a lane marking.
R One of your front wheels goes over a lane marking.

If you activate the turn signal indicator, a steering intervention does not occur on the corresponding side.

If you leave the lane without activating the turn signal indicator, but danger of a collision with a moving obstacle is detected in your lane, a steering intervention does not occur.

Vehicles with Blind Spot Assist or Driving Assistance Package: if the system detects an obstacle, such as another vehicle in the adjacent lane, a steering intervention will occur regardless of the turn signal indicator.

Top-down view of a car steering wheel with hands, no visible text or symbols

Display ① will appear in the driver's display and a warning tone will sound in the following situations:

• A steering intervention by Active Lane Keeping Assist lasts longer than approximately ten seconds.
• The system carries out two or more steering interventions within approximately three minutes without any steering intervention from the driver.

In the Active Lane Keeping Assist settings, you can set the sensitivity of the system and set the level of support. Additionally, you can set whether the system should react to discontinuous lane

markings or only continuous lane markings ( page 388).

Status displays for Active Lane Keeping Assist

White: Active Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated.

If ESP® is deactivated or a tyre pressure loss warning is displayed, Active Lane Keeping Assist is automatically deactivated.

Yellow: there is a malfunction. Please also observe the display messages.
7: Grey: Active Lane Keeping Assist is activated, but not operating.
7: Green: Active Lane Keeping Assist is activated and operating.
Red: Active Lane Keeping Assist has guided you back into your lane with a course-correcting steering intervention. The status display will flash if there is also a haptic warning in the steering wheel. The lane marking is shown in red only on the side for which there is a warning.

Active Lane Change Assist display in the "Assistance" menu

Top-down view of a car driving on a curved road (no visible text or symbols)

If the front wheel of the vehicle drives over a detected lane marking, this will be highlighted red in the Assistance menu in the driver's display.

System limits

In the following situations, a lane-correcting steering intervention may not occur but rather a warning may be given on the steering wheel, depending on the situation:

- You clearly and actively steer, brake or accelerate.

• If a driving safety system intervenes, such as ESP®, Active Brake Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist.
• You have adopted a sporty driving style with high cornering speeds or high rates of acceleration.
• If transport equipment, for example a trailer or bicycle rack, is attached to the trailer hitch and the electrical connection has been correctly established.

The system may be impaired or may not function particularly in the following situations:

• If there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient illumination of the road, highly variable shade conditions, rain, snow, fog or heavy spray.
• If there is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, the sun or reflections.
• If there is dirt on the windscreen in the vicinity of the multifunction camera or if the camera is misted up, damaged or obscured.

• If there is dirt on the bumper in the area of the radar sensors, or if they are damaged or covered.

• If there are no lane markings, or several unclear lane markings are present for one lane, e.g. around roadworks.

• If the lane markings are worn, dark or covered.
• If the distance to the vehicle in front is too short and thus the lane markings cannot be detected.
• If the lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes branch off, cross one another or merge.
• If the carriageway is very narrow and winding.

Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognise dangers ( page 343).

Activating/deactivating Active Lane Keeping Assist

Multimedia system:

Settings ▶ Assistance
▶ Collision avoidance
▶ Active Lane Keeping Assist
▶ Activate or deactivate the function.

Alternatively, Active Lane Keeping Assist can be activated and deactivated via the ☐ quick vehicle access.

i After starting the vehicle, the settings are country-specific.

Setting Active Lane Keeping Assist Multimedia system:

→ Settings ▶ Assistance
Collision avoidance
▶ Active Lane Keeping Assist

Setting the sensitivity

Select

▶ Select Early, Med. or Late.

The last selected setting will be adopted the next time the vehicle is started.

The standard setting for this function is dependent on the country.

The function is not available on vehicles with the Driving Assistance Package.

Activating or deactivating assistance on discontinuous lane markings

▶ Select Advanced support.

The last selected setting will be adopted the next time the vehicle is started.

The standard setting for this function is dependent on the country.

AIRMATIC

Function of AIRMATIC

AIRMATIC is an air suspension system with variable damping for improved driving comfort. The all-round level control system ensures the best possible suspension and constant ground clearance, even with a laden vehicle. When driving at speed, the vehicle is lowered automatically to improve driving safety and to reduce energy consumption. You also have the option of manually adjusting the vehicle level.

AIRMATIC includes the following components and functions:

- air suspension with automatic all-round level control

• speed-dependent lowering of the vehicle level
- a higher vehicle level can be selected for greater ground clearance using the vehicle level button (boxed) rocker switch)
- ADS PLUS (Adaptive Damping System with constant adjustment of damping characteristics)

Suspension setting and vehicle level per drive program

Drive programs C and E:

• comfortable suspension setting
• adjusting the vehicle to normal level
- lowering the vehicle to low level -1 at speeds above approx. 140 km/h
- raising the vehicle to normal level at speeds below approx. 40 km/h

Drive program [B], [H] and [EL] (plug-in hybrid):

• comfortable suspension setting
• adjusting the vehicle to normal level

• lowering the vehicle to low level -1 at speeds above approx. 140 km/h
• raising the vehicle to normal level at speeds below approx. 40 km/h

Drive program S:

• firmer suspension setting
• setting the vehicle to low level -1 and no speed-dependent lowering of the vehicle

- Plug-in hybrid:

• adjusting the vehicle to normal level
• lowering the vehicle to low level -1 at speeds above approx. 140 km/h
• raising the vehicle to normal level at speeds below approx. 40 km/h

Drive program

• suspension setting for off-road
  • Vehicles without Off-road package:

• raising the vehicle to off-road level +1 at speeds below approx. 60 km/h

• lowering the vehicle to normal level at speeds above approx. 80 km/h and raising the vehicle to off-road level +1 again at speeds below approx. 45 km/h

• above a speed of approx. 110 km/h, switching to C
  Plug-in hybrid: above a speed of approx. 110 km/h, switching to H

• Vehicles with Off-road package:

- raising the vehicle to off-road level +1 at speeds below approx. 90 km/h

- at speeds above approx. 110 km/h, lowering the vehicle to normal level and switching to C

at speeds below approx. 75 km/h, it is possible to select 📄 again

Individual suspension settings can be called up in drive program (→ page 298).

When the entry/exit level is activated, the vehicle is lowered to low level -2 to facilitate entering/ exiting the vehicle. When driving at speeds of approximately 30 km/h or above, the entry/exit

level is deactivated and the vehicle is raised ( page 394).

When car wash mode is activated, the vehicle is raised to a noticeably higher level for automatic car washes. When driving at speeds above approximately 20 km/h car wash mode is deactivated and the vehicle is lowered to the previously set vehicle level ( page 622).

At speeds below approx. 60 km/h, and depending on the vehicle equipment level, the vehicle can be raised manually to an off-road level ( page 391)

Operation with a trailer or bicycle rack: if transport equipment, such as a trailer or a bicycle rack, is attached to the trailer hitch and the electrical connection has been correctly established, the vehicle always remains at normal level in all drive programs with the exception of 📄. In drive program 📄, the vehicle is lowered above speeds of approx. 30 km/hto normal level.

Differences between different vehicle levels compared to the normal level:

Vehicles without Off-road package

• Car wash level:
  Approx. +90 mm

- Off-road level +1: - Approx. +60 mm

- Low level -1: - Approx. -15 mm

- Low level -2 or entry/exit level: Approx. -25 mm

Vehicles with Off-road package

- Off-road level +3 or car wash level: - Approx. +90 mm

- Off-road level +2: Approx. +60 mm

- Off-road level +1: - Approx. +30 mm

- Low level -1: - Approx. -15 mm

- Low level -2 or entry/exit level:

- Approx. -25 mm

Car wash level is 30 mm higher than the maximum vehicle level (off-road level). Observe the increased height of the vehicle in car wash mode particularly when driving into underground car parks in order to avoid potential damage.

System limits

AIRMATIC may not be available or have only limited availability in the following cases:

- The overheating protection has been activated due to frequent level changes within a short time. The warning lamp appears in the driver's display.

After the cooling phase, the system is again available without restriction.

Setting the vehicle level (vehicles with AIR-MATIC)

WARNING Risk of accident because vehicle level is too high

Driving characteristics may be impaired.

The vehicle can drift outwards, for example, when steering or cornering.

▶ Choose a vehicle level which is suited to the driving style and the road surface conditions.

WARNING Risk of entrapment from vehicle lowering

When lowering the vehicle, other people could become trapped if their limbs are between the vehicle body and the tyres or underneath the vehicle.

Make sure no one is underneath the vehicle or in the immediate vicinity of the wheel arches when the vehicle is being lowered.

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped due to the vehicle lowering

Vehicles with AIRMATIC or level control: when you unload luggage or leave the vehicle, the vehicle first rises slightly and then returns to the set level shortly afterwards.

You or anyone else in the vicinity of the wheel arches or the underbody could thus become trapped.

The vehicle can also be lowered after being locked.

When leaving the vehicle, make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the wheel arches or the underbody.

NOTE Damage due to vehicle lowering

Parts of the body could be damaged when the vehicle is lowered.

Make sure that there are no obstacles such as kerbs underneath or in the immediate vicinity of the body when the vehicle is being lowered.

Requirements

• The vehicle has been started.

• Vehicles without Off-road package:

The vehicle is not moving faster than 60 km/h.

• Vehicles with Off-road package:

Off-road level +1: the vehicle is not moving faster than 90 km/h.

Off-road level +2: the vehicle is not moving faster than 60 km/hin.

Off-road level +3: the vehicle is not moving faster than 20 km/h in and the rear fog lamp is not switched on.

• Operation with trailer or bicycle rack when the trailer socket is connected correctly:

- The vehicle is travelling no faster than 30 km/h.

Use the normal level in trailer operation. High-level driving is not permitted in trailer operation on public roads.

Raising the vehicle (vehicles without Off-road package)

Diagram showing car interior with a device labeled '1' and '2' pointing to a device, including a zoomed-in inset of the device's internal structure.

Push rocker switch ① forwards. Indicator lamp ② flashes while the vehicle is being raised to off-road level +1 and lights up continuously when it has finished rising.

Off-road level +1 set remains stored even after the vehicle has been switched off.

The vehicle is lowered again to the vehicle level of the selected drive program in the following situations:

• When driving faster than 80 km/h.
• When driving briefly between 65 km/h and 80 km/h.
  • You select another drive program.

Lowering the vehicle (vehicles without Off-road package)

Diagram showing car interior with a device slot and two labeled buttons (1 and 2) pointing to a device.

Pull rocker switch ①.

The vehicle is lowered to the height of the selected drive program. Indicator lamp ② flashes when lowering and goes out when the lowering process is complete.

Raising the vehicle (vehicles with Off-road package)

Diagram showing car seatbelt insertion into a vehicle's seatbelt, with labeled parts 1 and 2

▶ Push rocker switch ① forwards.

The vehicle is raised to the next highest off-road level.

Following indicator lamps ② flash when raising and remain lit when the raising process is complete.

• Off-road level +1: one indicator lamp
  • Off-road level +2: two indicator lamps
• Off-road level +3: three indicator lamps

The off-road level set remains stored even after the vehicle has been switched off.

The vehicle is lowered to the next lowest vehicle level in the following situations:

• In off-road level +3:
• When driving faster than 20 km/h.
• The rear fog lamp is switched on.

- In off-road level +2:

- When driving faster than 80 km/h.

- When driving briefly between 65 km/h and 80 km/h.

- In off-road level +1:

- When driving faster than 110 km/h.

- When driving briefly between 100 km/h and 110 km/h.

When you select another drive program, the vehicle is lowered to the vehicle level of the selected drive program.

Lowering the vehicle (vehicles with Off-road package)

Diagram showing car seatbelt insertion into a vehicle's seatbelt, with labeled parts 1 and 2

Pull rocker switch ①

The vehicle is lowered to the next lowest vehicle level. Indicator lamps ② of the current off-road program flash when lowering.

Following indicator lamps ② remain lit when the vehicle has finished lowering.

• Off-road level +2: two indicator lamps
• Off-road level +1: one indicator lamp
• Normal level: no indicator lamp

The vehicle level set remains stored even after the vehicle has been switched off.

Setting the entry/exit level (AIRMATIC)

Requirements

• The vehicle has been started.
- The vehicle is moving at speeds below 30 km/h.

Multimedia system:

Settings

Select Lower when entering On. The vehicle is lowered to low level -2 to facilitate entering and exiting. The selection is stored and the set level for entering and exiting remains stored even after the vehicle has been switched off.

The vehicle is raised to the current vehicle level in the following situations:

• Lower when entering OFF is selected.
- The vehicle is moving faster than 30 km/h after restart.

(i) The availability of this function depends on the vehicle equipment.
i Further information on AIRMATIC ( page 389).

Lowering and raising the rear of the vehicle

WARNING Risk of entrapment from vehicle lowering

When lowering the vehicle, other people could become trapped if their limbs are between the vehicle body and the tyres or underneath the vehicle.

Make sure no one is underneath the vehicle or in the immediate vicinity of the wheel arches when the vehicle is being lowered.

Requirements:

• all vehicle doors are closed
• there is no trailer coupled
• there is no bicycle rack fitted
- the battery is sufficiently charged (if necessary, start the engine)

Lowering the rear of the vehicle

Diagram of car interior showing seatbelt and door panel with numbered labels

Apply the electric parking brake.
Shift the transmission to position [P] (→ page 303).
Pull switch ① in the load compartment trim briefly. Indicator lamp ② flashes until the vehicle has been lowered.

The vehicle is lowered at the rear axle by approx. 40 mm. When the vehicle has been lowered, indicator lamp ② remains lit.

Lowering is interrupted in the following situations:

• a vehicle door is opened.
- switch ① is pulled again.
• the vehicle is being driven faster than 2 km/h.

The vehicle is automatically set to the level of the drive program selected if you drive at speeds greater than 2 km/h.

If indicator lamp ② flashes twice and the rear of the vehicle does not lower:

Make sure that the requirements are met.

i Lowering the rear of the vehicle allows the vehicle to be loaded more easily. Observe the notes on loading the vehicle when doing this ( page 198).

Raising the rear of the vehicle

Check if the battery is sufficiently charged. If necessary, start the engine.

Diagram of car interior showing seatbelt and door panel with numbered labels pointing to key components

Pull switch ① briefly.

Indicator lamp ② goes out.

The vehicle will be raised to the currently selected level.

The vehicle is automatically set to the level of the drive program selected if you drive at speeds greater than 2 km/h.

If the vehicle cannot be raised:

Ensure that the battery is sufficiently charged; if necessary, start the engine. The raising process continues.

AMG RIDE CONTROL +

Function of AMG RIDE CONTROL +

AMG RIDE CONTROL + is an air suspension system with variable damping for improved driving characteristics. The all-round level control system ensures the best possible suspension and constant ground clearance, even with a laden vehicle. When driving at speed, the vehicle is lowered automatically to improve driving safety and to reduce fuel consumption. You also have the option of manually adjusting the vehicle level.

The damping is set individually for each wheel and is affected by the following factors:

• The drive program selected
- Driving style, e.g. sporty
- Road condition, e.g. bumps
• The individual selection of SPORT, SPORT + or COMFORT

AMG RIDE CONTROL + includes the following components and functions:

• Air suspension with variable spring rate and automatic level control
- Speed-dependent lowering to reduce fuel consumption
- Manually selectable raised vehicle level for greater ground clearance
- Adaptive Damping System with constant damping force adjustment
- Rocker switch for suspension settings

Suspension setting and vehicle level per drive program

ive programs 6-0 and 2-0:

• The suspension setting and the all-wheel drive 4MATIC+ are adapted for sporty performance on fine, loose surfaces (☐).

• The suspension setting and the all-wheel drive 4MATIC+ are adapted for driving in areas with no firm road surfaces (☐).
  • The vehicle is set to the high level.

• When driving at speeds above 70 km/h, the vehicle is lowered to the normal level.
  Drive programs ☐ and Ⓗ:
  • The suspension setting is comfortable.
  • The vehicle is set to the normal level.

• The vehicle is lowered to low level while you are driving in the following cases:

- When driving faster than 120 km/h for at least 20 seconds.

- When driving faster than 140 km/h.

- The vehicle is raised to the normal level again in the following cases:

- When driving slower than 120 km/h for at least one minute.

- When driving slower than 80 km/h.

• 4MATIC+ is dynamically synchronised.

Drive programs S, S+ and :
- The suspension setting is firm (S).
- The suspension setting is even firmer (S),
• The vehicle is set to low level.

• The vehicle is not lowered any further if you are travelling at higher speeds.
  • 4MATIC+ is more dynamically synchronised.

Differences between different vehicle levels compared to the normal level:

• High level: approx. +55 mm
• Low level: approx. -10 mm

When the vehicle is started again, the COMFORT setting is activated automatically.

AMG ACTIVE RIDE CONTROL

Function of AMG ACTIVE RIDE CONTROL AMG ACTIVE RIDE CONTROL additionally supplements the functions of AMG RIDE CONTROL + with an active roll stabilisation system. Depending on the selected driving program, the suspension setting is adapted to the driving situation by influencing the vehicle's roll behaviour with active stabilisers. As a result, the driving comfort and safety of the vehicle are noticeably improved. The stabilisers on the front and rear axle can also be con-

trolled separately to influence more dynamic handling.

Suspension setting per driving program

Drive program

• Roll movements are significantly reduced.
- Traction is improved for driving on sand.

Drive program :

• Roll movements are reduced.
- The suspension setting is designed for improved off-road performance.
- Traction is improved for driving off-road and on loose surfaces.

Drive programs and c:

• The lean is reduced during cornering.
- Roll movements caused by uneven road surfaces are compensated for.

Drive programs S, S+ and :

- The lean is significantly reduced during cornering.

• Roll movements caused by uneven road surfaces are compensated for.
• S ^+ and 📋: the driving characteristics become even more agile through targeted interventions.

Drive program

• Individual settings of the suspension setting via AMG Dynamics
  Basic: reduction of lean during cornering
• Advanced: increased reduction of lean during cornering
• Pro: significantly increased reduction of lean during cornering
• Master: significantly increased reduction of lean during cornering and increased agility of the vehicle's handling through targeted interventions by the system

Selecting the suspension setting

① You can also adjust the suspension setting via the multimedia system ( page 300).

In drive programs and, the suspension setting is permanently assigned and cannot be selected.

You can select from three different suspension settings:

• COMFORT ensures a comfortable suspension setting. Select this suspension setting if you prefer a comfortable driving style.
• SPORT lowers the vehicle to the lowest level and ensures a firmer suspension setting. Select this suspension setting when employing a sporty driving style, e.g. on winding country roads.
• SPORT + lowers the vehicle to the lowest level and ensures a very firm suspension setting.

Diagram of a car interior showing labeled parts with numbered annotations

Press upper or lower display button repeatedly, until it displays the symbol.
If the display button does not show the symbol, then it is hidden. How functions are displayed and the order in which they are displayed can be set in the multimedia system (→ page 291).
Press corresponding button 2. The selected suspension setting is shown in the driver's display as a message.

The symbol indicates the currently selected mode:

• (blue): COMFORT

• (yellow): SPORT
• (red): SPORT +

Setting the vehicle level

WARNING Risk of accident because vehicle level is too high

Driving characteristics may be impaired.

The vehicle can drift outwards, for example, when steering or cornering.

Choose a vehicle level which is suited to the driving style and the road surface conditions.
WARNING Risk of entrapment from vehicle lowering

When lowering the vehicle, other people could become trapped if their limbs are between the vehicle body and the tyres or underneath the vehicle.

Make sure no one is underneath the vehicle or in the immediate vicinity of the

wheel arches when the vehicle is being lowered.

⚠ WARNING Risk of becoming trapped due to the vehicle lowering

Vehicles with AMG RIDE CONTROL+ or level control system: when you unload luggage or leave the vehicle, the vehicle first rises slightly and then returns to the set level shortly afterwards.

You or anyone else in the vicinity of the wheel arches or the underbody could thus become trapped.

The vehicle can also be lowered after being locked.

When leaving the vehicle, make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the wheel arches or the underbody.

Requirements

• The vehicle has been started.
- The vehicle must not be moving faster than 65 km/h.

Diagram showing car interior with a device labeled '1' and '2' pointing to a device, likely indicating a component or connection.

To raise the vehicle: push rocker switch ① forwards. Indicator lamp ② flashes while the vehicle is being raised and remains lit when the raising process to high or off-road level is complete. The central display shows the selected vehicle level.

Your selection is saved. The high level set remains stored even after the ignition has been switched off.

The vehicle is lowered again to the level of the active drive program in the following situations:

• When driving faster than 80 km/h.
• When driving briefly between 65 km/h and 80 km/h.
• You select another drive program.

To lower the vehicle: pull rocker switch ①. Indicator lamp ② flashes when lowering and goes out when the lowering process to the level of the active drive program is complete. The central display shows the selected vehicle level.

The vehicle sets itself to the standard level of the selected drive program when you switch drive programs.

Operation with a trailer or bicycle rack

If the electrical connection has been correctly established to the trailer or bicycle rack:

• Up to approx. 30 km/h: the high or off-road level can be selected regardless of drive program.
• From approx. 30 km/h: the vehicle is set to normal level regardless of drive program.

E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL

Function of E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL is an electrohydraulic suspension system with variable damping for improved driving comfort. The all-round level control system ensures the best possible suspension and constant ground clearance, even with a laden vehicle. When driving at speed, the vehicle is lowered automatically to improve driving safety and to reduce energy consumption. The suspension setting is adjusted depending on the road condition, vehicle load and the drive program selected. You also have the option of manually adjusting the vehicle level.

The ROAD SURFACE SCAN function detects areas of unevenness in the road before you drive over

F167 0009 02

them by means of a multifunction camera. This reduces chassis movements.

The damping is adjusted individually to each wheel and depends on the following factors:

• Driving style, e.g. sporty
  • Road condition, e.g. bumps
• Drive program

E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL is comprised of the following functions and components:

• Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package: ROAD SURFACE SCAN
• Curve inclination function CURVE
- Recovery mode
• Individual wheel control
• Air suspension with automatic level control
• Speed-dependent lowering of the vehicle level
- A higher vehicle level can be selected for greater ground clearance using the vehicle level button (☐ rocker switch)

- ADS PLUS (Adaptive Damping System with constant adjustment of damping characteristics)

Suspension setting and vehicle level per drive program

Drive program S

• firmer suspension setting
  • adjusting the vehicle to low level -1
  • no speed-dependent lowering of the vehicle
  • ROAD SURFACE SCAN deactivated
  • curve inclination function deactivated

Drive programs C, CV and E

• comfortable suspension setting
• adjusting the vehicle to normal level
- lowering the vehicle to low level -1 at speeds above approx. 140 km/h
- raising the vehicle to normal level at speeds below approx. 40 km/h
• ROAD SURFACE SCAN deactivated (E)
• ROAD SURFACE SCAN active (C, CV)

• curve inclination function deactivated ([C], [E])
  • curve inclination function active (CV)

Drive program :

• suspension setting for off-road
• Vehicles without Off-road package:

• raising the vehicle to off-road level +1 at speeds below approx. 60 km/h
• lowering the vehicle to normal level at speeds above approx. 80 km/h and raising the vehicle to off-road level +1 again at speeds below approx. 45 km/h
• above a speed of approx. 110 km/h, switching to [C]
• ROAD SURFACE SCAN deactivated
• curve inclination function deactivated
• recovery mode and individual wheel control possible

• Vehicles with Off-road package:

- raising the vehicle to off-road level +1 at speeds below approx. 90 km/h

F167 0009 02

• at speeds above approx. 110 km/h, lowering the vehicle to normal level and switching to C at speeds below approx. 75 km/h, it is possible to select again
• ROAD SURFACE SCAN deactivated
• curve inclination function deactivated
• recovery mode and individual wheel control possible

Individual suspension settings can be called up in drive program 1 ( page 298).

When the entry/exit level is activated, the vehicle is lowered to low level -2 to facilitate entering/ exiting the vehicle. When driving at speeds of approximately 30 km/h or above, the entry/exit level is deactivated and the vehicle is raised ( page 394).

When car wash mode is activated, the vehicle is raised to a noticeably higher level for automatic car washes. When driving at speeds above approximately 20 km/h car wash mode is deactivated and the vehicle is lowered to the previously set vehicle level ( page 622).

At speeds below approx. 60 km/h, and depending on the vehicle equipment level, the vehicle can be raised manually to an off-road level ( page 391)

Operation with a trailer or bicycle rack: if transport equipment, such as a trailer or a bicycle rack, is attached to the trailer hitch and the electrical connection has been correctly established, the curve inclination function is deactivated and the vehicle always remains at normal level in all drive programs with the exception of [icon]. In drive program [icon], the vehicle is lowered above speeds of approx. 30 km/hto normal level.

Differences between different vehicle levels compared to the normal level: Vehicles without Off-road package

• Car wash level:
• Approx. +90 mm
• Off-road level +1:
  +60 mm
• Low level -1:
• Approx. -15 mm

- Low level -2 or entry/exit level:

- Approx. -25 mm

Vehicles with Off-road package

• Off-road level +3 or car wash level:
• Approx. +90 mm
• Off-road level +2:
• Approx. +60 mm
• Off-road level +1:
• Approx. +30 mm
• Low level -1:
• Approx. -15 mm
• Low level -2 or entry/exit level:
• Approx. -25 mm

Car wash level is 30 mm higher than the maximum vehicle level (off-road level). Observe the increased height of the vehicle in car wash mode particularly when driving into underground car parks in order to avoid potential damage.

System limits

E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL may not be available or have only limited availability in the following cases:

- The overheating protection has been activated due to frequent level changes within a short time. The warning lamp appears in the driver's display.

After the cooling phase, the system is again available without restriction.

Function of ROAD SURFACE SCAN

This function is not available in all countries. The ROAD SURFACE SCAN function monitors the road in front of your vehicle using a multifunction camera ( page 343). ROAD SURFACE SCAN detects unevenness in the road surface, e.g. bumps, before the vehicle drives over them. Chassis movements are reduced and driving comfort is increased.

ROAD SURFACE SCAN is automatically activated if the following conditions are met:

- Drive program [C] or [CV] is selected.

• The vehicle is set to the normal level.
- You are driving at a speed between 7 km/h and 180 km/h.

System limits

ROAD SURFACE SCAN can be impaired in the following situations or can stop functioning:

• If the carriageway is insufficiently lit, e.g. at night.
• In snow, rain, fog, heavy spray, if there is glare, in direct sunlight or in greatly varying light conditions.
• If the windscreen in the area of multifunction camera is dirty, misted up, damaged or covered.
• If the road surface has no optic structure or reflects light.
• If you are driving too close to the vehicle in front.
• If sections of the route have a very small radius of curvature.
• During abrupt driving manoeuvres, e.g. heavy braking or sudden acceleration.

Observe the notes on cleaning the multifunction camera ( page 625).

Function of recovery mode

WARNING Risk of injury due to the vehicle moving up and down

During recovery mode, the vehicle moves up and down and can cause injuries.

When activating recovery mode, make certain that no one is in the vicinity of the vehicle.

NOTE Risk of damage due to the vehicle moving up and down

When recovery mode is activated, the vehicle suspension automatically moves in and out thus moving the vehicle up and down. Bottoming out can damage the underbody.

Make sure there is sufficient ground clearance when activating recovery mode.

Recovery mode is a function of the suspension which can assist the driver on loose surfaces (e.g. sand, snow) when freeing a vehicle which has become stuck.

The vehicle body rocks in slow, vertical motions when recovery mode has been activated. This temporarily puts the wheels under greater load, which means they have increased traction and the vehicle is freed.

You can activate free driving mode via Off-road Assist ( page 407).

Function of individual wheel control

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped due to the vehicle lowering

The vehicle can be lowered when the individual wheel control function has been activated. Body parts could become trapped if they are between the vehicle body and the tyres or underneath the vehicle.

Make sure that nobody is under the vehicle or in the immediate vicinity of the

wheel arches when individual wheel control is activated.

NOTE Risk of damage due to the vehicle moving up and down

The vehicle can be lowered or raised on one or more wheels when the individual wheel control function has been activated. Vehicle parts could be damaged due to contact with objects.

▶ Make sure that the vehicle has sufficient room to move when the individual wheel control function has been activated.

Individual wheel control is a function of the suspension, which can be used to set the vehicle level for each wheel individually. This can help to improve alignment of the body when driving off-road.

You can activate individual wheel control via Off-road Assist ( page 407).

Adjusting the vehicle level (vehicles with E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL)

WARNING Risk of accident because vehicle level is too high

Driving characteristics may be impaired.

The vehicle can drift outwards, for example, when steering or cornering.

▶ Choose a vehicle level which is suited to the driving style and the road surface conditions.

WARNING Risk of entrapment from vehicle lowering

When lowering the vehicle, other people could become trapped if their limbs are between the vehicle body and the tyres or underneath the vehicle.

Make sure no one is underneath the vehicle or in the immediate vicinity of the wheel arches when the vehicle is being lowered.

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped due to the vehicle lowering

Vehicles with AIRMATIC or level control: when you unload luggage or leave the vehicle, the vehicle first rises slightly and then returns to the set level shortly afterwards.

You or anyone else in the vicinity of the wheel arches or the underbody could thus become trapped.

The vehicle can also be lowered after being locked.

When leaving the vehicle, make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the wheel arches or the underbody.

NOTE Damage due to vehicle lowering

Parts of the body could be damaged when the vehicle is lowered.

Make sure that there are no obstacles such as kerbs underneath or in the immediate vicinity of the body when the vehicle is being lowered.

Requirements

• The vehicle has been started.
• Vehicles without Off-road package:

- The vehicle is not moving faster than 60 km/h.

• Vehicles with Off-road package:

Off-road level +1: the vehicle is not moving faster than 90 km/h.
Off-road level +2: the vehicle is not moving faster than 60 km/h in 📄.
Off-road level +3; the vehicle is not moving faster than 20 km/h in 📞 and the rear fog lamp is not switched on.

• Operation with trailer or bicycle rack when the trailer socket is connected correctly:

- The vehicle is being driven no faster than 30 km/h.

Use the normal level in trailer operation. High-level driving is not permitted in trailer operation on public roads.

Raising the vehicle (vehicles without Off-road package)

Diagram showing car seatbelt insertion into a vehicle's side panel, with labeled parts ① and ②

Push rocker switch ① forwards. Indicator lamp ② flashes while the vehicle is being raised to off-road level +1 and lights up continuously when the raising process is complete.

Off-road level+1 set remains stored even after the vehicle has been switched off.

The vehicle is lowered again to the vehicle level of the selected drive program in the following situations:

• When driving faster than 80 km/h.
• When driving briefly between 65 km/h and 80 km/h.
  • You select another drive program.

Lowering the vehicle (vehicles without Off-road package)

Diagram of car seatbelt showing connector placement and internal structure with labeled parts ① and ②

Pull rocker switch ①.

The vehicle is lowered to the height of the selected drive program. Indicator lamp ② flashes when lowering and goes out when the lowering process is complete.

Raising the vehicle (vehicles with Off-road package)

Diagram showing car seatbelt insertion into a vehicle compartment with labeled parts 1 and 2

Push rocker switch ① forwards.

The vehicle is raised to the next highest off-road level.

Following indicator lamps ② flash when raising and remain lit when the raising process is complete.

• Off-road level +1: one indicator lamp
• Off-road level +2: two indicator lamps
• Off-road level +3: three indicator lamps

The off-road level set remains stored even after the vehicle has been switched off.

The vehicle is lowered to the next lowest vehicle level in the following situations:

- In off-road level +3:

• When driving faster than 20 km/h.
  The rear fog lamp is switched on.

• In off-road level +2:

• When driving faster than 80 km/h.
• When driving briefly between 65 km/h and 80 km/h.

- In off-road level +1:

• When driving faster than 110 km/h.
• When driving briefly between 100 km/h and 110 km/h.

When you select another drive program, the vehicle is lowered to the vehicle level of the selected drive program.

Lowering the vehicle (vehicles with Off-road package)

Diagram showing car seatbelt insertion into a vehicle's seatbelt, with labeled parts 1 and 2

Pull rocker switch 1.

The vehicle is lowered to the next lowest vehicle level. Indicator lamps ② of the current off-road program flash when lowering.

Following indicator lamps ② remain lit when the lowering process is complete.

• Off-road level +2: two indicator lamps
• Off-road level +1: one indicator lamp
  • Normal level: no indicator lamp

The vehicle level set remains stored even after the vehicle has been switched off.

Setting Off-road Assist

Requirements

• the vehicle is stationary
- off-road level is set
- off-road drive program is selected
• the vehicle is switched on
• all doors and the bonnet are closed
• the transmission is not engaged in position P
• there is no trailer coupled

• the vehicle is outdoors
- the detected lateral inclination of the vehicle must not exceed approx. 15°
• the system is within its operating temperature
• the on-board voltage is sufficiently high

Multimedia system:

→ Offroad ▶ Assistance

Recovery mode

Recovery mode assists the driver when pulling away on rough terrain, such as sand or snow.

▶ Select Free driving mode.
Select Start.

Recovery mode is activated.

▶ Select Stop to stop recovery mode.

Recovery mode is automatically deactivated in the following situations:

• you are actually travelling faster than 15 km/h
• after a running time of 30 seconds
- it is detected that an object has hit the under-body of the vehicle hard
• not all conditions are met

(i) Further information on recovery mode ( page 403).

Individual wheel control

Individual wheel control enables the vehicle level to be set separately for each wheel.

▶ Select Individual wheel control.
▶ Set the vehicle level for the desired wheel.
You can also use the touchscreen to set the level for two or more wheels at the same time.
Select Reset to set all wheels to the default setting.

Individual wheel control is automatically deactivated in the following situations:

• you are travelling faster than 15 km/h
- it is detected that an object has hit the under-body of the vehicle hard
• not all conditions are met

(i) Further information on individual wheel control ( page 403).

Reversing camera

Function of the reversing camera

The reversing camera is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and parking remains with you. Make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects etc., in the manoeuvring area while manoeuvring and parking.

① The area behind the vehicle is displayed as a mirror image, as in the inside rear view mirror.

Vehicles with Parking Package

Diagram of a car interior with numbered components and a camera view, likely for navigation or tracking purposes.

Menu Camera views

Lane marking the course the tyres will take with the current steering angle (dynamic)
② Driven surface depending on the current steering angle (dynamic)
Menu Parking Assistance
4 Reversing camera with top view
⑤ Wide-angle view
6 Trailer view
⑦ Activating/deactivating Parking Assist PARKTRONIC ( page 419)

8 Guide line at a distance of approximately 0.3 m from the rear area
9 Guide lines at a distance of approximately 0.5 m, 1.0 m, 1.5 m and 3.0 m from the rear area
10 Warning display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC (→ page 416, 428)
When Active Parking Assist is active, lanes are displayed in green ( page 420).

10

Wide-angle view

Diagram showing a car on a road with numbered annotations pointing to specific points 11, 12, and 13.

Trailer view

⑪ Yellow guide line, locating aid
12 Red guide line at a distance of approximately 0.3 m from the ball head of the trailer hitch
13 Ball head of the trailer hitch

System limits

If the system is not ready for operation, the System inoperative message appears in the central display.

The reversing camera will not function or will only partially function in the following situations:

- You are driving forwards at a speed greater than approximately 16 km/h.

• The tailgate is open.
- The weather conditions are poor, e.g. heavy rain, snow, fog, storm or spray.
- The light conditions are poor, e.g. at night or if light is shining into the camera.
- The camera lens is obstructed, dirty or misted up. Observe the notes on cleaning the reversing camera ( page 625).
- The camera or rear of your vehicle is damaged. In this case, have the camera and its position and setting checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
- The detection range is limited by additional vehicle attachments at the rear, such as a licence plate bracket or bicycle rack.

Also observe the information on vehicle sensors and cameras ( page 343).

Do not use the reversing camera in these types of situations. You could otherwise injure others or collide with objects when parking the vehicle.

The contrast of the display may be impaired by direct sunlight or by other light sources, e.g. when driving out of a garage. In this case, pay particular attention.
i Have the display repaired or replaced if, forexample, pixel errors considerably restrict its use.

360° Camera

Function of the 360° Camera

The 360° Camera is a system that consists of four cameras which cover the immediate surroundings of the vehicle. The cameras assist you when you are parking, forexample, or at exits with reduced visibility.

The 360° Camera includes the following cameras and evaluates their images:

• Reversing camera
• Front camera
• Two side cameras in the outside mirrors

The cameras are only an aid and may show a distorted view of obstacles, show them incorrectly or not show them at all. They are not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and parking remains with you. Make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects etc., in the manoeuvring area while manoeuvring and parking.

Menu overview Camera views

Camera navigation interface screenshot showing a car on a road with numbered annotations pointing to different lanes.

① Menu Parking Assistance
② Top view with image from the front camera
3 Panorama View
4 Top view with image from the reversing camera
5 3D view, left-hand side of the vehicle

6 3D view, right-hand side of the vehicle
7 3D auto view
Trailer View (depending on equipment)
● Activating/deactivating Parking Assist PARKTRONIC (→ page 419)
To set the GPS activation point
① In all views, the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC warning display is shown ( page 416).

Function of the guide lines

Diagram showing a triangular structure with numbered annotations pointing to different regions or features.

① Guide lines at a distance of approximately 0.5 m, 1.0 m, 1.5 m and 3.0 m Distance from the rear area
② Lane marking the course the tyres will take with the current steering angle (dynamic)
3 Driven surface depending on the current steering angle (dynamic)
Guide line at a distance of approximately 0.3 m from the rear area
When Active Parking Assist is active, lanes and guide lines are displayed in green instead of yellow ( page 420).

Top view with image from the front or reversing camera

Diagram showing a car on a road with three labeled parts, likely for navigation or safety guidance.

① Warning display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC (→ page 416)

2 Your vehicle from above

3 Lane indicating the route the vehicle will take at the current steering angle

3D view, left/right-hand side of the vehicle

NOTE Risk of accident due to objects being severely distorted in the display or not displayed at all

Due to the projection of the cameras, objects in the 3D views may be severely distorted when displayed or not displayed at all.

Make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects etc. in the manoeuvring area while manoeuvring and parking.

Two grayscale images showing a car on a road surface, with circular markers and a magnified inset (no text or symbols)

In the 3D view, left-/right-hand side of the vehicle, the virtual camera moves to the respective side of the vehicle ②. When you change the transmission position, the view is automatically adapted. In addition, Top View ① is displayed with the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC warning indicator.

3D auto view

① The area behind the vehicle is not displayed as a mirror image as is usual in the 3D views.

Security camera image of a car on a paved road with numbered annotations pointing to the lanes.

① Display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC (→ page 416)

2 Guide lines

In the 3D auto view, the virtual camera moves to the standard perspective, facing forward from the rear above the roof. The view changes automatically when approaching obstacles.

If you touch the touchscreen, the view changes to 3D view with free rotation. You can turn, tilt and zoom the views by touch.

Wide-angle view

Camera navigation interface showing a road scene with numbered annotations pointing to the camera.

① Display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC ( page 416)
② Top view with image from the reversing camera
③ Wide-angle view

If the Top View with image of the rear camera is displayed, switch to the Wide Angle View with the icon ② indented to the left. When the wide-angle view is displayed, switch back to the respective top view.

Trailer view

① In trailer mode, the guide lines are shown at the level of the trailer hitch.

If you select trailer view and no trailer is coupled to the vehicle, the following display appears:

Camera navigation interface screenshot showing a car on the road with numbered annotations pointing to key points.

Trailer view: locating aid

To switch between standard and trailer view
② Yellow locating aid

3 Ball head of the trailer hitch
4 Red guide line at a distance of approximately 0.3 m from the ball head of the trailer hitch

When the electrical connection is established between the vehicle and the trailer, the display changes to the side camera view.

Top-down view of a car on a road with a digital camera interface overlay (no readable text or symbols)

Trailer view: side view of the mirror cameras To switch between standard and trailer view

System limits

If the system is not ready for operation, the System inoperative message appears in the central display.

The 360° Camera will not function or will only partially function in the following situations:

• You are driving forwards at a speed greater than approximately 16 km/h.
  • The doors are open.
  • An outside mirror is not completely folded out.
  • The tailgate is open.
• The weather conditions are poor, e.g. heavy rain, snow, fog, storm or spray.
• The light conditions are poor, e.g. at night or if light is shining into the camera.
• The camera lens is obstructed, dirty or misted up.
• If cameras or vehicle components in which the cameras are fitted are damaged. In this event, have the cameras, their positions and their setting checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Do not use the 360° Camera under such circumstances. You could otherwise injure others or collide with objects when parking the vehicle.

For technical reasons, the standard height of the vehicle may be altered if the vehicle is carrying a heavy load and can result in inaccuracies in the guide lines and in the display of the generated images.

The field of vision and other functions of the camera system may be restricted due to additional attachments on the vehicle (e.g. licence plate bracket, bicycle rack).

The contrast of the display may be impaired by abrupt, direct sunlight or by other light sources, e.g. when driving out of a garage. In this case, pay particular attention.
i Have the display repaired or replaced if, forexample, pixel errors considerably restrict its use.

See the notes on cleaning the 360° Camera (→ page 625).

Off-road function of the 360° camera

The 360° camera can support you with different views when driving off-road.

The following views are available:

- Transparent bonnet

• Front view
• Rear view

To call up the function, call up the off-road menu in the multimedia system ( page 505).

Active Parking Assist and the manoeuvring assistance functions are not available in the driving programme. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is available in all driving programmes when it is switched on. Please also note the system limits of the respective functions.

Transparent bonnet

1 15.0 km 2 3 4 5 6 7 70 m Pre M

Display of the transparent bonnet (example)

① Point of the compass
② Switch camera view on/off
③ Activating/deactivating PARKTRONIC ( page 416)
4 Position of the wheels
⑤ Area under the bonnet

6 Lane indicating the route the vehicle will take at the current steering angle
⑦ Altitude above sea level

If the off-road menu is open in the central display and the button ② is switched on, the Transparent bonnet view is automatically displayed in gearbox position D.

The Transparent Bonnet view shows a virtual image of the area directly in front of the bumper, in front of the tyres and under the bonnet. In addition, the current lane is displayed. The Transparent Bonnet can assist you when driving in difficult terrain, e.g. on rocky or uneven ground.

The hatched area under the bonnet ⑤ was captured and recorded by the front camera. As soon as the area has been crossed by the vehicle, it is faded in. If the vehicle has not been moved for some time, the recorded area is displayed in grey-scale and faded out.

Front and rear view

Diagram showing a vehicle navigation system with numbered points and a control panel below displaying icons for parking, driving, and car.

Front and rear view display (example)

① Point of the compass
2 Switch camera view on/off
③ Activating/deactivating PARKTRONIC ( page 416)
4 Pitch display

⑤ Lane indicating the route the vehicle will take at the current steering angle
6 Roll display
7 Altitude above sea level
① Note that the area between the vehicle and up to approx. 1 m in front of the vehicle is not displayed.

The slope and inclination indicators are only shown in the front view.

If the vehicle is travelling faster than approx.

8 km/h the view automatically changes from Transparent Bonnet to Front View. If the vehicle is travelling faster than approx.. 20 km/h - 30 km/h (depending on the driving programme), the camera image is closed.

When you engage reverse gear, the image from the reversing camera is automatically displayed.

System limits

The area under the bonnet may not be displayed correctly in the following situations:

• in the rain
• Driving in the dark

- When shadows fall on the area recorded by the camera

Observe the instructions on the function of the 360° camera as well as its system limits, otherwise you will not be able to recognise dangers ( page 410).

Calling up the 360° Camera views using the button

Diagram showing car interior with a parking pad icon and labeled location marker '1'

Press button①.
▶ Select Camera views menu.
Select the desired view in the multimedia system ( page 410).
Selecting a view for the 360° Camera (reverse gear)

Requirements

• The Activation in R setting is activated in the multimedia system (→ page 416).
  Engage reverse gear.
  Select the desired view in the multimedia system ( page 410).

Setting the reversing camera or 360° Camera The reversing camera is only an aid. It is not a substitute for you paying full attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and parking remains with you. Make sure that no persons, animals or objects etc. are in the manoeuvring range. Pay attention to your surroundings and be ready to brake at all times.

Multimedia system:

→ Settings ▶ Assistance
▶▶ Camera
▶ Activate or deactivate Activation in R.
The settings for deactivating the reversing camera are not available in every country.
Opening the camera cover
Multimedia system:
→ Settings ▶ Assistance
▶▶ Camera
▶ Select Open camera cover.
The camera cover closes automatically after some time or after the vehicle is switched on or off.

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC

Function of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is an electronic parking assistance system which monitors the area surrounding your vehicle and shows you the distance between the vehicle and a detected obstacle visually and audibly.

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and parking remains with you. Make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects in the manoeuvring area while manoeuvring and parking in/exit-ing parking spaces.

The passive side impact protection also warns you of obstacles to the side. During the parking procedure or manoeuvring, objects are detected as the vehicle drives past. If you steer in the direction of a detected obstacle and there is a risk of a lateral collision, a warning is issued. In order for an object on the side to be detected, the sensors in the front and rear bumper must first detect the object while you are driving past it.

In order for front or rear obstacles to the side to be displayed, the vehicle must first travel a distance of at least half a vehicle length. Once the vehicle has travelled one vehicle length, obstacles on all sides can be shown.

Displays in the driver's display

Three sequential images of a car viewed from different angles, showing front, side, and perspective views (no text or symbols)

Vehicles with 360° Camera

Three-down diagram of a car parking lot with three views (no text or symbols)

Vehicles without 360° Camera

As soon as Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is ready for display, the respective areas of the display are shown in blue.

1 Front and rear display ready
2 All-round display ready
3 Obstacles detected at the front left and on the right-hand side

The colour of the display changes depending on the distance to the detected obstacle:

• Blue: > 1 m (no obstacles detected)
• Yellow: approximately 1 m - 0.7 m
• Orange: approximately 0.7 m - 0.4 m
- Red: < 0.4 m

Vehicles with 360° Camera: the boundary line shifts dynamically depending on the position and distance of the obstacles detected.

Depending on the distance to the obstacle detected, an intermittent warning tone also sounds. You can set the timing of the warnings in the multimedia system(→ page 419)

Standard setting:

• Front and sides: < 0.4 m
- Rear: < 1 m

Warn early all-round:

• Front: < 1 m
• Sides: < 0.7 m
• Rear: < 1 m

A continuous warning tone sounds from a distance of approximately 0.2 m, regardless of the selected setting.

Screenshot of a car navigation interface with app icons and a highlighted location pin labeled '1'

Vehicles with 360° Camera

Piv slowth USB Mercedes Music Sound 1

Vehicles without 360° Camera

If an obstacle is detected in the travel path and the menu Camera & parking is not open in the driver display, the pop-up window appears ①:

• vehicles without Active Parking Assist: at speeds below 12 km/h
• vehicles with Active Parking Assist: at speeds below 18 km/h

Diagram of a car under load with numbered parts labeled 2 and 3

Optionally, obstacles detected by Parking Assist PARKTRONIC from a distance of approximately 1.0 m in front ② and 0.7 m on the side ③ can also be displayed in the head-up display.

System limits

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC does not necessarily take into account the following obstacles:

• Obstacles below the detection range, e.g. persons, animals or objects.

• Obstacles above the detection range, e.g. overhanging loads, overhangs or loading ramps of lorries.

• Pedestrians or animals approaching the vehicle from the side.

• Objects placed next to the vehicle

Obstacles on the sides are not shown in the following situations, for example:

• You park the vehicle and switch it off.
• You open the doors.

After an engine start, obstacles must be detected again by driving past them before a warning can be issued.

Observe the information on vehicle sensors and cameras. Otherwise, the system cannot function properly ( page 343).

Vehicles with trailer hitch: Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated for the rear zone when you establish an electrical connection between your vehicle and a trailer.

Problems with Parking Assist PARKTRONIC

Two identical car illustrations shown in top-down views, each enclosed within a rounded rectangular frame (no text or symbols)

① Vehicles with 360° Camera
2 Vehicles without 360° Camera

If the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC display lights up red for approximately three seconds then goes out, and the [P_0^off] symbol appears, the system may have been deactivated due to signal interference. Start the vehicle again and check if Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is working at a different location.

If the _ijjA^(k) symbol appears and a warning tone sounds, it may be due to one of the following causes:

• The sensors are dirty: clean the sensors and observe the notes on care of vehicle parts (→ page 625).
• Parking Assist PARKTRONIC has been deactivated due to a malfunction: restart the vehicle. If the problem persists, consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Activating/deactivating Parking Assist PARKTRONIC

NOTE Risk of an accident from objects at close range

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC may not detect certain objects at close range.

When parking or manoeuvring the vehicle, pay particular attention to any objects which are above or below the sensors, e.g. flowerpots or drawbars. The vehicle or other objects could otherwise be damaged.

Requirements:

• The camera menu is open.
• Or: Active Parking Assist is active.
• Or: the PARKTRONIC pop-up window appears.

Press P in the central display.

If the indicator lamp is lit, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is active. If the indicator lamp does not light up or the symbol _off^off is displayed, PARKTRONIC Parking Assist is not active.

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is automatically activated when the vehicle is started.

Alternatively, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC can be activated or deactivated in the quick access menu.

Setting the warning tones of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC

Multimedia system:

→ Settings → Assistance → Parking

Setting warning tones

Select Set warning tones.

Set the desired level under Volume or Tone pitch.

Activating/deactivating audio fadeout

Select Audio fadeout and switch Audio fade for warnings on or off. The volume of the currently playing media source is reduced during a Parking Assist PARKTRONIC warning tone.

or

Select Audio fadeout and switch Audio fade-out in trans. position R on or off. The volume of the currently playing media source is reduced when reverse gear is engaged.

Setting the time of the warnings

▶ Select Time of warning.
▶ Activate or deactivate Side warning.
Set the desired warning time for Front or Rear.

Active Parking Assist

Function of Active Parking Assist

Active Parking Assist is an electronic parking assistance system, which uses ultrasound with the assistance of the reversing camera and 360° Camera. When you are driving forwards up to approximately 35 km/h, the system automatically measures parking spaces on both sides of the vehicle.

Active Parking Assist offers the following functions:

Vehicles with reversing camera

- Parking in parking spaces parallel to the road

Vehicles with 360° Camera

• Parking in parking spaces parallel to the road
• Parking in parking spaces perpendicular to the road (optionally either forwards or reverse)
• Parking in parking spaces that can only be detected as such due to markings (forexample at the roadside)
• Exiting parking spaces if you have parked using Active Parking Assist

As soon as all requirements for the search of parking spaces are fulfilled, the message 📄 appears in the driver's display.

When Active Parking Assist has detected parking spaces, the indicator appears in the driver's display. The arrows indicate on which side of the lane there are detected parking spaces, these are then shown in the central display.

Vehicles with reversing camera: the parking space can be selected as desired. The vehicle is parked in reverse.

Vehicles with 360° Camera: the parking space can be selected as desired. Depending on the location of the parking space, the parking direction (rearwards or forwards) can also be selected as desired.

When Active Parking Assist is activated, the turn signal indicators are activated based on the calculated path of your vehicle.

The parking procedure is assisted by accelerating, braking, steering and gear changes.

Active Parking Assist is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe Manoeuvering and parking

remains with you. Make sure that no persons, animals or objects etc. are in the manoeuvring range.

Active Parking Assist will be cancelled in the following situations:

• You begin steering.
  • You set the electric parking brake.
• You engage park position P.
• ESP® intervenes.
• You open the doors or the tailgate while driving.

System limits

If the exterior lighting is faulty, the active parking assistant may be out of function, depending on the defect.

Also observe the system limits of the following systems:

• Reversing camera ( page 408)
• 360° Camera (→ page 410)

Objects located above or below the detection range of the sensors, e.g. overhanging loads, overhangs or loading ramps of goods vehicles, or

the borders of parking spaces, are not detected during measurement of the parking space. These are also then not taken into account when calculating the parking procedure. In some circumstances, Active Parking Assist may therefore guide you into the parking space incorrectly.

WARNING Risk of accident due to objects located above or below the detection range of Active Parking Assist

If there are objects above or below the detection range, the following situations may arise:

• Active Parking Assist may steer too early.
- The vehicle may not stop in front of these objects.

There is a danger of collision!

In these situations, do not use Active Parking Assist.

Extreme weather conditions, such as snow or heavy rain, may lead to a parking space being measured inaccurately. Parking spaces that are partially occupied by trailer drawbars might not be identified as such or be measured incorrectly.

Only use Active Parking Assist on level, high-grip ground.

Do not use Active Parking Assist in the following situations:

• In extreme weather conditions such as ice, packed snow or in heavy rain.
• When transporting a load that protrudes beyond the vehicle.
• On steep uphill or downhill gradients of more than approximately 15%.
• When snow chains are fitted.
• When a trailer or bicycle rack is attached.
• Directly after a tyre change or when spare tyres are fitted.
  • If the tyre pressure is too low or too high.
• If the suspension is out of alignment, e.g. after bottoming out on a kerb.

Active Parking Assist may also display parking spaces that are not suitable for parking, such as:

• Parking spaces where parking is prohibited.
• Parking spaces on unsuitable surfaces.

You can watch an animation on this topic via the following link:

Parking with Active Parking Assist

WARNING Risk of accident due to objects located above or below the detection range of Active Parking Assist

If there are objects above or below the detection range, the following situations may arise:

• Active Parking Assist may steer too early.
- The vehicle may not stop in front of these objects.

There is a danger of collision!

In these situations, do not use Active Parking Assist.

Diagram showing a car interior with a video camera icon labeled 'P' and a numbered annotation '1'

Depending on the vehicle's equipment, button may also be located at a different position in the centre console.

Press button ①.

Screenshot of a car navigation system interface with numbered annotations pointing to vehicle positions and camera controls

Parking assistance menu (example)

Select ② Parking Assistance menu.

Parking spaces ③ detected by the system are shown in the central display.

4 5 P P P

Parking assistance menu (example)

When the vehicle is stationary, indicated vehicle path ④ into currently selected parking space ⑤ also appears.

If a parking space is displayed: stop the vehicle.
If necessary, select another parking space.
▶ Vehicles with 360° Camera: to change the parking direction, tap the selected parking space again.

To start the parking procedure: press button ① again.
The vehicle drives into the selected parking space.

The turn signal indicator is switched on automatically when the parking procedure begins. You are responsible for selecting the turn signal indicator in accordance with the traffic conditions. If necessary, select the turn signal indicator accordingly.

WARNING Risk of accident due to vehicle swinging out while parking or pulling out of a parking space

While parking or exiting a parking space, the vehicle swings out and can drive onto areas of the oncoming lane.

This could cause you to collide with objects or other road users.

Pay attention to objects and other road users.
Where necessary, stop the vehicle or cancel the parking procedure with Active Parking Assist.

On completion of the parking procedure, the Active Parking Assist finished display message appears.

Secure the vehicle against rolling away. When required by legal requirements or local conditions: turn the wheels towards the kerb.
You can stop the vehicle and change the transmission position during the parking procedure. The system then calculates a new vehicle path. If no new vehicle path is available, the transmission position can be changed again, or the process can be cancelled.

■ Exiting a parking space with Active Parking Assist

A WARNING Risk of accident due to objects located above or below the detection range of Active Parking Assist

If there are objects above or below the detection range, the following situations may arise:

• Active Parking Assist may steer too early.
- The vehicle may not stop in front of these objects.

There is a danger of collision!

In these situations, do not use Active Parking Assist.

Requirements

• The vehicle has been parked with Active Parking Assist.
  Start the vehicle.

Diagram showing a car interior with a parking pad icon and a numbered annotation pointing to the left panel.

Press button ①.

Screenshot of a mobile phone interface with labeled UI elements and device components

Parking assistance menu (example)

Select Parking Assistance ② menu.
If necessary, change direction of exit
To start exiting the parking space: press button ① again.
If necessary, change the gearbox setting. Observe any messages displayed in the driver's display and central display. The vehicle moves out of the parking space.

The turn signal indicator is automatically switched on when exiting a parking space begins and

switched off when it is completed. You are responsible for selecting the turn signal indicator in accordance with the traffic conditions. If necessary, select the turn signal indicator accordingly.

WARNING Risk of accident due to vehicle swinging out while parking or pulling out of a parking space

While parking or exiting a parking space, the vehicle swings out and can drive onto areas of the oncoming lane.

This could cause you to collide with objects or other road users.

Pay attention to objects and other road users.
Where necessary, stop the vehicle or cancel the parking procedure with Active Parking Assist.

After the parking space has been exited, a warning tone and the message [ ] Active Parking Assist finished, take control of vehicle prompt you to take control of the vehicle. You have to

accelerate, brake, steer and change gear yourself again.

If you do not react to the prompt to take control of the vehicle, the system will brake the vehicle to a standstill.

Pausing Active Parking Assist

WARNING Risk of accident due to objects located above or below the detection range of Active Parking Assist

If there are objects above or below the detection range, the following situations may arise:

• Active Parking Assist may steer too early.
- The vehicle may not stop in front of these objects.

There is a danger of collision!

In these situations, do not use Active Parking Assist.

You can interrupt the parking or exiting procedure of Active Parking Assist by performing one of the following actions, forexample:

Depress the brake pedal.
Open the passenger door, a rear door, the tailgate or the bonnet.
Apply the electric parking brake or activating the HOLD function.
To resume the parking or exiting procedure: gently depress the accelerator pedal.
If the electric parking brake was applied before Active Parking Assist was activated, depress the accelerator pedal lightly to start the parking or exiting procedure.

Check the area around your vehicle again before resuming a paused parking procedure. Make sure that persons, animals or objects are no longer in the manoeuvring range. Also observe the system limitations of Active Parking Assist.

Automatic braking function of Active Parking Assist

A WARNING Risk of accident due to objects located above or below the detection range of Active Parking Assist

If there are objects above or below the detection range, the following situations may arise:

• Active Parking Assist may steer too early.
- The vehicle may not stop in front of these objects.

There is a danger of collision!

In these situations, do not use Active Parking Assist.

Persons or objects detected in the manoeuvring range could cause the vehicle to brake sharply and interrupt the parking or exiting procedure. The vehicle will then be held at a standstill. If you depress the accelerator pedal, the parking or exiting procedure is resumed.

Check the area around your vehicle again before resuming the parking or exiting procedure. Make

sure that persons, animals or objects are no longer in the manoeuvring range. Also observe the system limitations of Active Parking Assist.

Manoeuvring assistant

Function of Drive Away Assist

Drive Away Assist can reduce the severity of an impact when pulling away. If an obstacle is detected in the direction of travel, the vehicle's speed is briefly reduced to approx. 2 km/h. The symbol

appears in the central display when a critical situation is detected.

Drive Away Assist can be switched off or on in the menu Manoeuvring assistance.

You can cancel an intervention by Drive Away Assist at any time by deactivating Parking Assist PARKTRONIC.

WARNING Risk of accident caused by limited detection performance of Drive Away Assist

Drive Away Assist cannot always clearly identify objects and traffic situations.

Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation; do not rely on Drive Away Assist alone.
Be prepared to brake or swerve as necessary, provided the traffic situation permits and that it is safe to take evasive action.

Drive Away Assist is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and parking remains with you. Make sure that no persons, animals or objects etc. are in the manoeuvring range.

A risk of collision may occur in the following situations, forexample:

• If the accelerator and brake pedals are interchanged.
• If an incorrect transmission position is engaged.

Drive Away Assist is active under the following conditions:

• If Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is activated.

• If you shift the transmission position to R or D when the vehicle is stationary.
• If the detected obstacle is less than approx. 1.0 m away.
• If the manoeuvring assistance function is activated in the multimedia system.

System limits

Drive Away Assist is not available in driving programme.

The performance of Drive Away Assist is limited on inclines.

When driving with a trailer, Drive Away Assist is not available.

Also observe the system limits of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC ( page 416).

Function of Cross Traffic Alert

Cross Traffic Alert is only available for vehicles with Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist.

Cross Traffic Alert can warn drivers of any crossing traffic when reversing and manoeuvring out of a parking space. The radar sensors in the bumper

also monitor the area adjacent to the vehicle. If a critical situation is detected, the symbol 📐 appears in the central display, and the vehicle can be braked automatically.

If the radar sensors are obstructed by vehicles or other objects, detection is not possible.

Depending on the country, the cross traffic alert can be switched off or on in the menu Manoeuvring assistance ( page 428).

Cross Traffic Alert is active under the following conditions:

• if the vehicle is reversing at a walking pace.
- manoeuvring assistance is activated (→ page 428).

Also observe the instructions on Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist ( page 383).

System limits

The Cross Traffic Alert function is not available in the driving programme.

Cross Traffic Alert is not available on inclines.

Cross Traffic Alert is not available when driving with a trailer.

Manoeuvring brake function

The manoeuvring brake function can prevent collisions with pedestrians when the vehicle is reversing at slow speeds. If the reversing camera detects a person in the vehicle path, the vehicle can be braked to a standstill.

The manoeuvring brake function can intervene under the following conditions:

• The vehicle is reversing at a speed slower than 10 km/h.
• The camera image is shown in the central display ( page 415).

You can activate and deactivate the manoeuvring brake function in the Manoeuvring assistance menu ( page 428).

If the manoeuvring brake function is triggered, the symbol appears in red in the selected view in the menuCamera & parking.

If the manoeuvring brake function is not available, the same symbol appears in grey.

The manoeuvring brake function is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and parking remains with you. Make sure that no persons, animals or objects etc. are in the manoeuvring range.

WARNING Risk of accident caused by limited detection by the manoeuvring brake function

The manoeuvring brake function cannot always clearly detect people. Other obstacles are not detected by the function.

In these cases, the function may brake unnecessarily or not brake at all.

Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation; do not rely on the manoeuvring brake function alone.
Be ready to brake.

System limits

In the driving programme, the shunt braking is not available.

Observe the system limits of the following functions:

• Active Parking Assist (→ page 420)
- 360° Camera (→ page 410)
• Reversing camera ( page 408)

The manoeuvring brake function is not available in the following situations:

• on inclines
• If transport equipment, forexample a trailer or bicycle rack, is attached to the trailer hitch and the electrical connection has been correctly established.

Activating/deactivating manoeuvring assistance

Multimedia system:

Settings ▶ Assistance

Parking

(i) This function is an on-demand feature ( page 89).

The function for switching Manoeuvring Assist on and off is not available in all countries.

▶ Select Manoeuvring assistance.
Activate or deactivate the desired manoeuvring assistance.

Trailer Manoeuvring Assist

Function of Trailer Maneuvering Assist

(i) This function is an on-demand feature ( page 89).

⚠ WARNING Risk of accident due to unsuitable trailers

Trailers with a steered axle or a fifth wheel cannot be used with Trailer Manoeuvring Assist.

Due to this, the trailer cannot be manoeuvred in the desired direction and you can cause a collision or the trailer can overturn.

Only use Trailer Manoeuvring Assist with trailers with fixed drawbars and axles.

NOTE Damage due to overhanging loads in front or drawbar installations

The vehicle and the trailer may be damaged during manoeuvring due to overhanging loads at the front of the trailer or drawbar installations.

Pay attention to overhanging loads or drawbar installations while manoeuvring.

Trailer Maneuvering Assist assists you when reversing with a trailer. Using the reversing camera, it monitors the articulation angle between the vehicle and trailer and adjusts it to a specified value. Trailer Maneuvering Assist also limits your speed.

Trailer Maneuvering Assist is only an aid. It is not a substitute for you paying full attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and parking remains with you. Make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects in the manoeuvring area while manoeuvring and parking in/exiting parking spaces.

You can either enter the articulation angle value directly via the multimedia system, or use a

straightening manoeuvre or the 90° manoeuvre. When carrying out a straightening manoeuvre, the system calculates the articulation angle automatically and straightens the vehicle/trailer combination to the trailer's current direction.

Observe the notes on towing a trailer ( page 430).

System limits

Observe the system limits of the following functions:

• Active Parking Assist ( page 420)
• 360° Camera ( page 410)
• Reversing camera ( page 408)

The system may be impaired or may not function in the following situations:

- The gradient is greater than approximately 15%.

You can watch an animation on this topic via the following link:

Using Trailer Manoeuvring Assist

Requirements

• The vehicle has been started and is stationary.
• A trailer has been detected.
• The gradient is less than approximately 15%.
• The tailgate is closed.
• The electric parking brake is not applied.
• The driver's seat belt is fastened.

Using Trailer Manoeuvring Assist

Diagram showing a car interior with a labeled camera icon and a numbered annotation '1' pointing to the camera.

Engage reverse R gear.
Press button①. The camera image is shown in the central display.

Diagram showing a car on a road with numbered points and directional arrows, likely illustrating a navigation or traffic flow system.

① The picture is exemplary and shown without trailer.

You can select various manoeuvres in the Trailer Manoeuvring Assist menu. The manoeuvres available depend on the current articulation angle and length of the trailer.

To adjust the articulation angle: select ③. In the central display, swipe the entire area of the camera image to the left or right to change the bend angle.

or

To activate the straightening manoeuvre: select ①.

The system calculates the articulation angle in such a way that the direction of the trailer at the time of activation is maintained. There is a short countersteering movement of the trailer while the vehicle is reversed, which then guides it back to the desired line. In this way, the vehicle is aligned straight with the trailer and, at the same time, the direction of the trailer is maintained.

or

To activate the 90° manoeuvre:

• Align the vehicle in the same direction (line) as the trailer.
• Select (left or right) ②.

The system calculates the articulation angle so that the trailer can be manoeuvred into a space perpendicular to the vehicle using the smallest possible angle. After the manoeuvre, the vehicle is aligned again in the direction of the trailer.

▶ Accelerate and brake as required.

The maximum articulation angle depends on the length of the trailer. This is calculated by the system by driving the vehicle forwards, including cornering. Before the length of the trailer has been calculated, the maximum articulation angle is approximately 23°. The longer the trailer is, the higher the maximum articulation angle (max. approximately 60°).
Pay attention to your surroundings and be ready to brake at all times.

Trailer hitch

Notes on trailer operation

NOTE The operating permit may be invalidated due to the illegal installation of trailer hitches

The installation - including retrofitting - of a non-folding or non-removable trailer hitch that even partially conceals the license plate or the lighting system is prohibited.

Observe the applicable legal regulations for the installation of trailer hitches.

WARNING Risk of accident due to car/trailer combination swerving

If you drive too fast in trailer operation, the car/trailer combination may start to swerve. This could cause you to lose control of the car/trailer combination. The car/trailer combination may even overturn.

▶ Under no circumstances should you try to straighten the car/trailer combination by increasing your speed.
▶ Reduce the speed and do not counter-steer.
Brake if necessary.

! NOTE Damage to the engine due to overheating

If you have a trailer hitch retrofitted, modifications to the engine cooling system may be necessary depending on the vehicle type.

If you have a trailer tow hitch retrofitted, observe the fastening points on the vehicle frame.

Retrofitting a trailer hitch is permissible only if a trailer load is specified in your vehicle documents. If this is not the case, the vehicle is not approved for trailer operation.

Further information can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop.

Observe the following notes on the tongue weight:

• Do not use a tongue weight that exceeds or falls below the permissible tongue weight
• Use a tongue weight as close as possible to the maximum tongue weight

Do not exceed the following values:

• Permissible towing capacity
- Permissible rear axle load of the towing vehicle
• Permissible gross weight of the towing vehicle
• Permissible gross weight of the trailer
• Maximum permissible speed of the trailer

F167 0009 02

Ensure the following before starting a journey:

• The tyre pressure on the rear axle of the towing vehicle is set for a maximum load
• The lighting of the connected trailer is operational

In the event of increased rear axle load, the car/trailer combination must not exceed a maximum speed of 100 km/h for reasons concerning the operating permit. This also applies in countries in which the permissible maximum speed for car/trailer combinations is above 100 km/h.

Vehicles with AIRMATIC or E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL: if the socket of the trailer hitch is occupied, e.g. by a trailer or rear bicycle rack, the vehicle is set to the normal level at speeds greater than 30 km/h, regardless of the drive program.

When you are reversing with a trailer, remember to use the Trailer Manoeuvring Assist function ( page 428).

Extending and retracting the ball neck fully electrically

WARNING Risk of accident due to the ball neck not being engaged

If the ball neck is not engaged, the trailer may come loose.

Make sure that the ball neck securely engages and locks into place.

NOTE Damage to the all-electric trailer hitch due to additional pressure

The all-electric trailer hitch could be mechanically damaged by applying additional pressure when the ball neck is being extended or retracted.

Do not make the ball neck extend/retract faster by applying additional pressure.

NOTE Increased risk of damage to property due to folded-out ball neck

When the trailer is not coupled or the bicycle rack is attached, fold in the ball neck or, in the case of a fully electric trailer hitch, retract the ball neck.

NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to incorrect use of the trailer hitch

If a trailer hitch is used to recover the vehicle, the vehicle or the trailer hitch itself may be damaged in the process.

▶ Use the trailer hitch only for pulling a trailer or attaching approved carrier systems (e.g. a bicycle rack).

Exception: Since vehicles with a trailer hitch do not have a fixture for a towing eye at the rear, towing or tow-starting is permitted.

When towing or tow-starting with the trailer hitch, observe the information in the section "Fitting and removing the towing eye."

Extending the ball neck fully electrically

Diagram of car rearview showing camera placement and interior compartments with numbered labels

Secure the vehicle against rolling away.

Keep the swivel range clear.

Pull button 1

Indicator lamp ② will flash and a message reading Trailer coupling in motion will appear on the driver's display.

The ball neck will extend fully electrically.

Wait until the ball neck has locked in place. When indicator lamp ② is continuously lit, the ball neck is securely locked in place. If the ball neck is not securely locked in place, indicator lamp ② will flash and a message reading Trailer coupling Check lock will appear on the driver's display.

Top-down line drawing of a car's rear bumper with a mechanical component inset showing a lever mechanism (no text or symbols)

Retracting the ball neck fully electrically

Remove the trailer cable or adapter plug.
Pull button 1.
Indicator lamp ② will flash and a message reading Trailer coupling in motion will appear on the driver's display.
The ball neck will retract fully electrically.
Wait until the ball neck has locked in place. When indicator lamp ② goes out, the ball neck is securely locked in place.
If the ball neck is not securely locked in place, indicator lamp ② will flash and a message reading Trailer coupling Check lock will appear on the driver's display.

Observe the information about the displays on the driver's display:

• Indicator and warning lamps (→ page 909)
• Display messages (→ page 817)

Extending and retracting the ball neck fully electrically (multimedia system)

WARNING Risk of accident due to the ball neck not being engaged

If the ball neck is not engaged, the trailer may come loose.

Always engage the ball neck as described.

NOTE Damage to the all-electric trailer hitch due to additional pressure

The all-electric trailer hitch could be mechanically damaged by applying additional pressure when the ball neck is being extended or retracted.

Do not make the ball neck extend/retract faster by applying additional pressure.

Requirements

• The vehicle is secured against rolling away.
• The swivel range is clear.

- The trailer cables or adapter plugs have been removed.

Multimedia system:

Extending the ball neck fully electrically

Select 📄. The Trailer coupling in motion message will appear on the driver's display.
The ball neck will extend fully electrically.
▶ Wait until the ball neck has locked in place.

If the ball neck is not securely locked in place, the Trailer coupling Check lock message will appear on the driver's display.

Retracting the ball neck fully electrically

Select . The Trailer coupling in motion message will appear on the driver's display.
The ball neck will retract fully electrically.
▶ Wait until the ball neck has locked in place.

If the ball neck is not securely locked in place, the Trailer coupling Check lock message will appear on the driver's display.

Observe the information about the displays on the instrument cluster:

• Indicator and warning lamps ( page 909)
• Display messages ( page 817)

Coupling up/uncoupling a trailer

WARNING Risk of injury due to a change in vehicle level

Vehicles with level control system: the vehicle level may be changed unintentionally, e.g. by other persons. If you couple or uncouple the trailer during this time, you may become trapped. In addition, other people could become trapped if their limbs are between the vehicle body and the tyres or underneath the vehicle.

Observe the following when coupling or uncoupling:

Do not open or close any doors or the tailgate.
Do not initiate the level control system and do not operate DYNAMIC SELECT.
Do not lock or unlock the vehicle.

The trailer will be correctly detected by the vehicle only if the following conditions are met:

• The ball neck is extended and engaged in a securely locked position.
• Vehicles with level control system: ensure the vehicle is at the normal level ( page 391). Use the normal level in trailer operation. High-level driving is not permitted in trailer operation on public roads.

Trailers with a 7-pin plug can be connected to the vehicle with the following adapters:

• Adapter plug
• Adapter cable

The trailer will be correctly detected by the vehicle only if the following conditions are met:

• The trailer is connected correctly.

• The trailer lighting system is in working order.
A correctly connected trailer influences, among other things, the functions of the following systems:
- ESP® trailer stabilisation
• Trailer Manoeuvring Assist
• Active Lane Keeping Assist
- Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
• Active Parking Assist
• Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist
- Drive Away Assist
• Cross traffic warning
• Manoeuvring brake function
- Reversing camera
- 360^ camera
- AIRMATIC
• E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL

Coupling up a trailer

NOTE Damage to the starter battery due to full discharge

Charging the trailer battery using the power supply of the trailer can damage the starter battery.

Do not use the vehicle's power supply to charge the trailer battery.

▶ Secure the vehicle against rolling away.
Remove the cover cap from the ball head and store it in a safe place.
Position the trailer on a level surface behind the vehicle and couple it up to the vehicle.

Technical diagram of a connected electrical plug with labeled parts 1, 2, and 3

Open the socket cap.
Insert the plug with lug ① into groove ③ on the socket.
Turn bayonet coupling ② to the right as far as it will go.
Let the cap engage.
Secure the cable to the trailer with cable ties (only if you are using an adapter cable).
Make sure that the cable is always slack for ease of movement during cornering.

In the following circumstances, a message may appear on the driver's display even if the trailer has been connected correctly:

• LEDs have been installed in the trailer lighting system.
- The current has fallen below the trailer lighting system's minimum current (50 mA).

① Accessories can be connected to the permanent power supply up to 180 W and to the power supply that is switched on via the ignition lock.

Uncoupling a trailer

WARNING Risk of being crushed and becoming trapped when uncoupling a trailer

When uncoupling a trailer with an engaged inertia-activated brake, your hand may become trapped between the vehicle and the trailer drawbar.

Do not uncouple trailers with an engaged overrun brake.

NOTE Damage during uncoupling with an engaged overrun brake

The vehicle may be damaged if you uncouple with an engaged overrun brake.

Do not uncouple trailers with an engaged overrun brake.

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when disconnecting the trailer cable

Vehicles with level control system: the vehicle may lower when you disconnect the trailer cable.

This could result in other people becoming trapped if their limbs are between the vehicle body and the tyres or underneath the vehicle.

Make sure nobody is underneath the vehicle or in the immediate vicinity of the wheel arches when you disconnect the trailer cable.

NOTE Damage to the rear bumper from installing adapter cables or adapter plugs

The following parts could be damaged when swiveling the ball neck fully electrically:

• Bumper
• Adapter cable
• Adapter plug

Always remove the adapter cable or adapter plug before swiveling the ball neck fully electrically.

▶ Secure the vehicle against rolling away.
Disconnect the electrical connection between the vehicle and the trailer.
Uncouple the trailer.
Place the cover cap on the ball head.
① Trailers with LED lighting: after uncoupling the trailer, switch the vehicle on and then off again.

Making settings for trailer operation

Multimedia system:

Settings Vehicle Driving
▶ Trailer settings

Making settings for a trailer

The settings in this menu enable the calculation of a route suitable for the selected trailer and optimise the calculated arrival time.

▶ Select the desired trailer type.
Enter the maximum permissible speed of the selected trailer.
To save changes: select Confirm.

Bicycle rack function

WARNING Risk of an accident if the bicycle rack is used incorrectly

The bicycle rack may become detached from the vehicle in the following cases:

• the permissible load capacity of the trailer hitch is exceeded.
  • the bicycle rack is used incorrectly.
• the bicycle rack is secured to the ball neck beneath the ball head.

Observe the following for your own safety and that of other road users:

• always adhere to the permissible load capacity of the trailer hitch.
- always observe the permissible rear axle load of the towing vehicle.
- use the bicycle rack only to transport bicycles.

• always mount the bicycle rack properly by attaching to the ball head and the ball neck guide pin, if possible.
• when transporting four bicycles, always use bicycle racks that have additional support on the ball neck guide pin.
  • use only bicycle racks approved by Mercedes-Benz.
  • always observe the bicycle rack operating instructions.

NOTE Damage to or breakage of the trailer hitch due to unsuitable or improperly used bicycle rack.
Only use bicycle racks approved by Mercedes-Benz properly as described below.
NOTE Increased risk of damage to property due to folded-out ball neck
When the trailer is not coupled or the bicycle rack is attached, fold in the ball

neck or, in the case of a fully electric trailer hitch, retract the ball neck.

NOTE The operating permit may be invalidated due to the illegal installation of trailer hitches

The installation - including retrofitting - of a non-folding or non-removable trailer hitch that even partially conceals the license plate or the lighting system is prohibited.

Observe the applicable legal regulations for the installation of trailer hitches.

Diagram of a car rearview showing the seatbelt and keyway, with numbered annotations pointing to the seatbelt component.

Trailer hitch with additional guide pin

Depending on the bicycle rack's design, different numbers of bicycles can be transported.

The following bicycle rack designs are possible:

- When mounted by attachment to ball head Ⓐ, the maximum load capacity is 75 kg. You can transport up to three bicycles.

- When mounted on ball head ① and guide pin ②, the maximum load capacity is 100 kg. You can transport up to four bicycles.

The maximum load capacity is calculated from the weight of the bicycle rack and the bicycle rack load.

Observe the notes on driving with a roof load, trailer or fully laden vehicle ( page 275).

When using a bicycle rack, set the tyre pressure for increased load on the rear axle of the vehicle.

Further information on the tyre pressure can be found in the tyre pressure table ( page 658).

Notes on loading

The larger the distance between the load's centre of gravity and the ball head, the greater the load on the trailer hitch.

Observe the following notes:

• mount heavy bicycles as close to the vehicle as possible
• always distribute the load on the bicycle rack as evenly as possible across the vehicle's longitudinal axis

Mercedes-Benz recommends removing all detachable parts from bicycles (e.g. baskets, child seats, rechargeable batteries) before loading them onto the bicycle rack. This will improve the aerodynamic resistance and centre of gravity of the bicycle rack.

Always secure the bicycles to prevent them from moving around and check them at regular intervals to ensure that they are secure.

Do not use tarpaulins or other covers. The driving characteristics and rear view may be impaired. In addition, aerodynamic resistance and the load on the trailer hitch will increase.

Diagram illustrating three stages of bicycle lane installation: top view, front view, and side view with labeled components.

Load distribution on the bicycle rack

1 Vertical distance between centre of gravity and ball head
2 Horizontal distance between centre of gravity and ball head
③ The centre of gravity is on the vehicle's centre axis.

Observe the following information when loading the bicycle rack:

Loading the bicycle rack

3 bicycles 4 bicycles
Total weight of bicycle rack and load	Up to 75 kg Up to 100 kg
Max. distance1	420 mm 420 mm
Max. distance2	300 mm 400 mm

When transporting four bicycles or a total weight between 75 kg and 100 kg, always use bicycle racks with additional support on both trailer hitch guide pins.

Vehicle towing instructions

The vehicle is not suitable for the use of tow bar systems that are used for flat towing or dinghy towing, for example. Attaching and using tow bar systems may result in damage to the vehicle. When you are towing a vehicle with tow bar systems, safe driving characteristics cannot be guar-

anteed for the towing vehicle or the towed vehicle. The vehicle-trailer combination may swerve from side to side.

Observe the following information:

• Permitted towing methods ( page 646)
- Plug-in hybrid: permitted towing methods ( page 647)
- The notes on towing the vehicle with both axles on the ground ( page 63)

Notes on the driver's display

WARNING Risk of accident if the driver display fails

If the driver display has failed or is malfunctioning, function restrictions in systems relevant to safety cannot be detected.

The operating safety of your vehicle may be impaired.

Drive on carefully.
Have the vehicle checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

If the operating safety of your vehicle is impaired, park the vehicle immediately and safely. Contact a qualified specialist workshop.

The driver's display shows basic information such as speed, engine speed, fuel level, coolant temperature as well as indicator and warning lamps.

Additional functions available include the following:

- Different menus, e.g. for assistance and navigation

• Status displays for the driving systems
- Display messages
• Information on speed, Consumption and range
• Power meter level and state of charge of the high-voltage battery
• Indicator and warning lamps

Additional notes for plug-in hybrid vehicles:

• Further displays on the driver's display:

• READY Drive is activated
• "Foot off the accelerator" (→ page 290)

Some menu content and settings can be customised ( page 443).

Operating the driver's display

WARNING Risk of distraction from information systems and communications equipment

If you operate information systems and communication devices integrated in the vehicle when driving, you could be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle.

Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits.
If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary.

Observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the driver's display.

Scrolling on the menu bar

Diagram showing car interior with directional control buttons and a highlighted navigation panel labeled 'CANCEL' in Chinese.

① Back button
2 Main menu button
3 Touch Control

The content on the driver's display is controlled using the control elements on the left side of the steering wheel. You can use Touch Control ③ to navigate vertically and horizontally by swiping with

one finger. Confirm your selection by pressing the Touch Control.

To operate Touch Control 3 in the most effective way, use the tip of your thumb if possible. You can also set the sensitivity of the Touch Control on the central display (→ page 470).
Briefly press main menu button 2.
Select a menu by swiping to the left or right on Touch Control ③.
To confirm: press Touch Control 3.

You can watch an animation on this topic via the following link:

Driver display menus

Notes on menus on the driver's display

WARNING Risk of distraction from information systems and communications equipment

If you operate information systems and communication devices integrated in the vehicle when driving, you could be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle.

Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits.
If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary.

Observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the driver's display.

The following menus can be called up via the menu bar on the driver's display:

• Understated
• Sport
• Classic
• Navigation
• Assistance
  • Offroad (vehicles with 4MATIC)
  • Service
  • Mercedes-AMG vehicles: TRACK PACE

On some of these menus, you can choose between different display content on the centre display area.

On most of the menus, you can use Options to configure further settings for the menu-specific display content.

You can watch an animation on this topic via the following link:

Calling up and operating menus on the driver's display

Calling up a menu via the driver's display menu bar

Diagram showing car interior with labeled navigation keys and a highlighted directional control panel with 'CANCEL' button

① Back button
② Main menu button
3 Touch Control

Press main menu button ② on the steering wheel. The driver's display menu bar will open.

80 +80 80 RPA 7.1°C Class 12:00 16:50 0

Swipe to the left or right on left-hand Touch Control ③ and select a menu (e.g. the Classic menu) on the menu bar.
To confirm: press left-hand Touch Control 3.

Calling up or exiting the Options submenu

To call up: press left-hand Touch Control 3.
To exit: press back button ①.

Browsing through display content or lists

Swipe up, down, left or right on left-hand Touch Control 3.

① Within different menus, icons will also appear at the right edge of the centre display section to indicate the current position on a list.

Setting display content as the standard display You can set custom-configured menu display content as the standard display.

Press and hold left-hand Touch Control until the bar display is completely filled. The Set direct entry? prompt will appear.
Swipe left on left-hand Touch Control ③ and select Yes.
To confirm: press left-hand Touch Control ③.
To call up standard displays: press back button ① on the upper level of a menu.
i Pressing back button ① on the standard display will call up the previous menu.

Resetting values

To call up the Options submenu: press left-hand Touch Control 3.
Select Yes.
To confirm: press left-hand Touch Control ③.

Configuring settings on the Classic or Understa-ted menus

Driver's display:

→ Classic

Selecting display content in the centre display area of the Classic menu

Call up the Classic menu via the driver's display menu bar.
To select display content: swipe upwards or downwards on the left-hand Touch Control and select the desired display content.

120 140 60 180 220 260 300 340 380 420 460 500 540 580 620 660 700 740 780 820 860 900 940 980 1020 1060 1100 1140 1180 1220 1260 1300 1340 1380 1420 1460 1500 1540 1580 1620 1660 1700 1740 1780 1820 1860 1900 1940 1980 2020 2060 2100 2140 2180 2220 2260 2300 2340 2380 2420 2460 2500 2540 2580 2620 2660 2700 2740 2780 2820 2860 2900 2940 2980 3020 3060 3100 3140 3180 3220 3260 3300 3340 3380 3420 3460 3500 3540 3580 3620 3660 3700 3740 3780 3820 3860 3900 3940 3980 4020 4060 4100 4140 4180 4220 4260 4300 4340 4380 4420 4460 4500

Speedometer
2 Rev counter or clock
3 Transmission position
4 Coolant temperature display
5 Outside temperature
6 Display content, centre on the Classic menu (example: trip distance)

7 Time
8 Fuel level and fuel filler flap location indicator

The following display content of the Classic menu can be shown in centre display area ⑥:

• Trip and total distance
• Trip computer From start and From reset
• ECO display
• Consumption
• ATTENTION ASSIST
• Audio
• Navigation

2.8 l/100km 53 km/h 184 km 3:27 h 143 km 2:53 h 16.6 kWh/100km

Trip computer (example)
① Driving time and distance covered in electric mode

Information about the range

• The actual range achieved may differ from the range displayed. Your previous driving style will be taken into account when the range is being calculated.
• Factors such as outside temperature or climate control settings have a direct influence on the achievable range.
• While the navigation system or commuter route is active, additional information about

the route ahead can be included in the range calculation.

Information on electric energy consumption

- The From start and From reset consumption figures take into account all active consumer equipment when it comes to the drive system's operational readiness [READY].

Selecting the radio station or track on the station or track list

You can select radio stations or tracks on the station or track list in the audio display content of the Classic menu.

The following adjustments can be made in the MBUX multimedia system:

• Configuring the station or track list
  • Switching between media sources
• Setting the frequency band

1 Can't wait to go Lost Revenues

Track list for the audio display content in the centre display area (example)
To change radio stations or tracks: swipe left or right on the left-hand Touch Control and select a radio station or track on station or track list ①.
If you do not carry out any operations immediately after opening station or track list, the

view will return to the radio station or track selected.

The radio station or title displayed when the vehicle is restarted depends on the user profile used for the previous trip.

Calling up or exiting the Options submenu on the Classic menu

Depending on the selected display content, you can make changes in the centre display area on the Options submenu.

To call up the Options submenu: press the left-hand Touch Control.
To exit the Options submenu: press the back button ↩.

The following functions may be available on the Options submenu, for example:

• Navigation: selecting and adjusting zoom, route guidance and map settings
• Resetting the trip odometer
• Resetting the trip computer From start
• Resetting the trip computer From reset
• Resetting the ECO display values

Changing colour settings on the Understated menu

▶ Call up the Understated menu via the driver's display menu bar.
To call up the colour list: press the left-hand Touch Control. The colour list on the Understated menu will appear.
To select colour settings: swipe upwards or downwards on the left-hand Touch Control and select the desired colour setting.

If you do not carry out any operations within a limited time after opening the colour list, the view will switch back to the default view of the Understated menu.

To exit the colour list: press the back button

Depending on the equipment, the selected colour setting will be adopted for the ambient lighting and the MBUX multimedia system. If you select the Understated menu on the driver's display, the content in the MBUX multimedia system will also be made smaller.

Calling up the Service menu

Driver's display:

Service

The current status of the vehicle is shown on the Service menu.

To call up the menu: press the left-hand Touch Control.

The following display content is available on the Service menu (equipment-dependent):

• Information about how many messages are in the message memory
- AdBlue: AdBlue® range and fill level
- Tyre pressure:

- Checking the tyre pressure with the tyre pressure monitoring system ( page 659)

- Restarting the tyre pressure monitoring system ( page 660)

• ASSYST PLUS: calling up the service due date ( page 610)
- Engine oil level: checking the engine oil level (→ page 30)

• Coolant indicator
• Mercedes-AMG vehicles: temperature display (transmission oil, engine oil and coolant)

The following functions are available on the Options submenu:

• Tyre pressure ( page 659)
• Message memory (→ page 817)

Calling up the assistant display (Assistance menu)

Driver's display:

→ Assistance

Various driver assistance systems and navigation instructions are shown on the assistant display.

To call up the display: select Assistance on the driver's display.

La Prairie Gasse 200 m

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC display on the assistant display (example)

The following displays may vary depending on the driving situation:

• The navigation instructions in the left-hand display section
• The traffic light view in the right-hand display section
  • The display of the driver assistance systems
  • The level of detail on the assistant display

The following status displays are available on the assistant display:

• Green: pedestrian detection active
- Grey: pedestrian detection enabled
- Green radar waves next to vehicle: Active Blind Spot Assist is enabled and ready for operation
- Grey radar waves next to vehicle: Active Blind Spot Assist is enabled but not ready for operation

The content on the assistant display will adapt to the following situations:

• Number of lanes detected
- Change of direction, e.g. lane change
- Current road conditions
- Road users detected

The assistant display does not display other detected obstacles with the exception of road users.

The following functions are available on the Options submenu:

• Starting route guidance
• With active route guidance: end route guidance
  • Call up previous destinations and favourites
• Start new route guidance to a recent destination
  • Start new route guidance to a favourite

Calling up displays on the Sport menu

Driver's display:

→ Sport

The Sport menu provides information about the engine data of the vehicle.

When you call up the Sport menu on the menu bar of the driver's display, the menu colour setting will automatically be applied to the MBUX multimedia system.

To call up the menu: press the left-hand Touch Control.

2 3 4 1 6 5 6900

Current torque
② G-meter
3 Current power output
4 Boost pressure
⑤ Engine oil temperature
6 Engine speed

Calling up displays on the Sport menu (plug-in hybrid)

Driver's display:

→ Sport

The Sport menu provides additional information about the operating energy as well as the recuperated output of the vehicle.

When you call up the Sport menu on the menu bar of the driver's display, the menu colour setting will automatically be applied to the MBUX multimedia system.

To call up the menu: press the left-hand Touch Control.

750 500 250 0 -500 3600 41.180 1 2 3 250 180 -120

① Display range of recuperated power (recuperation)

② Display range of the output

3 Additional display range of the output

Configuring settings on the Supersport menu

Requirements

• For Mercedes-AMG vehicles only.

Driver's display:

Supersport

To select display content: swipe upwards or downwards on the left-hand Touch Control.

1 2 47 3 46.8 km/h 1300 km Power 350°C POWER STORAGE

① Current torque
② Centre display content (example: setup)
3 Current power output
The displays for the current torque ① and current power ③ vary depending on the display content in the centre display area.

The centre display section ② of the Supersport menu shows the following display contents:

• Gear display
• Temperature display (transmission oil, engine oil, coolant)
• Engine data
• Setup

• G-force
- Trip and total distance
• Distance From start and From reset
- Consumption
- Audio
- Navigation

Depending on the vehicle equipment, AMG-specific content regarding temperature, setup and engine data will be displayed. The settings for the setup display content can be configured either via the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel or via the MBUX multimedia system ( page 300).

Calling up the Track Pace menu

Requirements

• For Mercedes-AMG vehicles only.

Driver's display:

TRACK PACE

The Track Pace function is intended for use on designated race tracks. Do not use this function

on public roads, and adapt your driving style to your personal capabilities and the ambient conditions.

The following options will be displayed on the TRACK PACE menu:

G-meter
- Race track selected
• Braking and acceleration procedure
• Gear currently selected

1 2 3 100 2 3 4 A5000 ACM1G POWER CHARGE 1760µm 220°C

Displays on the Track Pace menu (example) G-meter

2 Centre display content (example: gear display)
3 Telemetry display (example: selected race track)
To call up the menu: press the left-hand Touch Control.

The display content of the TRACK PACE menu will adapt to the selected settings on the central display:

• Gear display
• Braking points
• Acceleration
• Quarter-miles
  • Race track selected on the central display
• Current race
• Record route

While the vehicle is in motion, the G-meter shows the forces that are exerted on the vehicle occupants both laterally and in the direction of travel. The maximum values appear in red in the coordinate system.

Calling up the off-road menu

Driver's display:

Offroad

To call up the menu: press the left-hand Touch Control.

16° 48 N M E 2015/11/1 1300 167°

Among other things, the menu contains the following information:

• Steering angle
• Chassis height
  • Elevation above sea level
• Compass with direction of travel
• Coordinates

Calling up navigation instructions on the driver's display

Driver's display:

Navigation

To call up the menu: press the left-hand Touch Control.

Changing the scale of the selected map view

Map image with labeled locations and a central device, showing geographic features and marked points of interest.

① Distance to the change of direction
2 Road to which the change of direction leads
③ Display of traffic incident
4 Currently selected route
5 Indicator showing vehicle's current position
6 Change-of-direction symbol
7 Recommended lane (white)
B Lane not recommended (grey)
9 Current lane

① The level of detail in the navigation instructions in the left-hand display section may vary.
To zoom in and out on the map directly: swipe upwards or downwards on the left-hand Touch Control.
If no operation is performed within a short time of the autozoom being activated, the set map scale of the map view already selected will appear. You can set the permanent map scale display in the MBUX multimedia system ( page 541).

The following functions are available on the Options submenu:

• With active route guidance: end route guidance
• Select route guidance
• Map settings

If the current route guidance is ended on the Navigation menu of the driver's display, it will also be ended in the MBUX multimedia system.

On the Options submenu, you can use other functions in the Destinations and Map settings categories.

You can use the following functions in the Destinations category:

• Call up previous destinations and favourites
• Start new route guidance to a favourite

The two options Work and Home will be displayed in Favourites even if no address is stored.

You can use the following functions in the Map settings category:

• Activate auto zoom
• Set the map view, satellite view and route overview.

The following map views are available on the Navigation menu:

• Entire route
  • 2D direction of travel
• 2D north-up
• 3D map

Head-up display

Function of the head-up display

The head-up display projects various content into the driver's field of vision, for example.

You can use the head-up display menu bar to select various contexts, e.g.:

• Mercedes-AMG vehicles: Supersport
• Mercedes-AMG vehicles: TRACK PACE
- Mercedes-AMG vehicles: RACE START
• Mercedes-AMG vehicles: Race
- Minimal
- Sport
- Standard
• Offroad (vehicles with 4MATIC)
• ECO display (depending on model and equipment) ( page 283)
- Settings
- Head-up display on/off

Head-up display content with navigation (6x2°)

1 2 3 4 5 100 220

① Detected instructions and traffic signs
2 Navigation instructions (distance to the next route event)
3 Steer Assist status
4 Current speed
5 Set speed in the driving system (e.g. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC)

System limits

Visibility is particularly influenced by the following conditions:

- Seat position

• Image position setting
- Light conditions
- Wet road surfaces
- Objects on the display cover
• Polarisation in sunglasses

You can watch an animation on this topic via the following link:

Operating the head-up display

Selecting display content of the head-up display via the menu bar of the driver's display

Press the main menu button on the left.
To select the menu bar of the head-up display: swipe upwards on the left-hand Touch Control.

Image 120 7.1V Speed Standard EVI tuning Baseline 120 120 81:30am 16.1°C 1.50

Switching between display content on the head-up display

Swipe to the left or right on the left-hand Touch Control.
A preview of the selected display content will appear on the head-up display.
To confirm: press the OK button.

Switching back to the driver's display

Press the ↩ or ↩ button.

Setting the position and brightness

Swipe to the left or right on the left-hand Touch Control and select Settings on the menu bar of the head-up display.
Press the left-hand Touch Control. The current position and brightness settings will be displayed as graphics on the head-up display as well as on the driver's display.
To adjust the position: swipe upwards or downwards on the left-hand Touch Control.
To adjust the brightness: swipe to the left or right on the left-hand Touch Control. The settings configured for position and brightness will be saved automatically.
Press the ↩ or OK button to exit the settings.

Switching the head-up display on/off

Driver's display:

Switching on

Swipe upwards on the left-hand Touch Control.
Press left-hand Touch Control OK.
Switching off
Swipe upwards on the left-hand Touch Control.
Swipe on the left-hand Touch Control and select Head-up display.
Press left-hand Touch Control OK.

Vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical system

Electric drive support
② Recuperation behaviour of the electric motor
Due to various system limits, the values displayed may temporarily differ slightly from the actual value.

Function of the power meter

Powers EQ chased ±1000/min 46 km 100% 50

① Start of the POWER display range
② End of the POWER display range
3 Current state of charge of the high-voltage battery
4 Maximum recuperated energy
5 Start of the display range of recuperated energy

The power meter has the following functions:

• In electric mode, the area ① - ② shows what percentage of the electric drive is currently being used. The combustion engine is switched on at 100%. In boost mode, the electrical power assistance of the drive is displayed.
• The area ④ - ⑤ shows the recuperation and charging behaviour using the combustion engine.
  Due to various system limits, displayed value may temporarily differ slightly from the actual value.

Overview of status displays on the driver's display

The status displays for the driving and driving safety systems can be found in display sections ① to ④.

120 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80

Pedestrian detection (on assistant display only)
Active Parking Assist is available ( page 422)
Active Parking Assist has recognised a parking space ( page 422)
P _41 OFF Parking Assist PARKTRONIC deactivated (→ page 419)

Cruise control (→ page 356)
LIM Limiter (→ page 356)
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC ( page 359)
Specified distance for Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC ( page 359)
Active Brake Assist switched off (→ page 377)
Active Brake Assist impaired or not functioning ( page 377)
Active Steering Assist ( page 370)
Active Lane Keeping Assist (→ page 386)
Active Blind Spot Assist (on assistant display only) (→ page 385)
READY Plug-in hybrid operation activated
Haptic accelerator pedal (→ page 288, 284, 290)
A ECO start/stop function (→ page 281)
HOLD HOLD function (→ page 352)
Adaptive Highbeam Assist ( page 235)

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus ( page 237)

120km/h! Maximum permissible speed exceeded (for certain countries only)
Active Stop and Go Assist ( page 367)
Slippery road surface warning

Vehicles with Speed Limit Assist: detected instructions and traffic signs ( page 378)

Vehicles with Traffic Sign Assist: detected instructions and traffic signs ( page 380)

Overview of status displays on the driver's display (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)

The status displays for the driving and driving safety systems can be found in display sections ① to ⑥.

1 2 3 4 5 6 120 150 180 210 240 270 300 330 360 390 420 450 480 510 540 570 600 630 660 690 720 750 780 810 840 870 900 930 960 990 1020

The number, positions and presentation of the status indicators on the driver's display depend on which systems are activated or deactivated.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, Mercedes-AMG vehicles may have the following status indicators:

Pedestrian detection (on assistant display only)

Active Parking Assist is available (→ page 422)
Active Parking Assist has detected a parking space ( page 422)
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC deactivated (→ page 419)
Cruise control (→ page 356)
LIM Limiter ( page 356)
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC ( page 359)
Specified distance for Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC ( page 359)
Active Brake Assist switched off (→ page 377)
Active Brake Assist impaired or not functioning ( page 377)
Active Steering Assist ( page 370)
Active Lane Keeping Assist (→ page 386)
Active Blind Spot Assist (on assistant display only) (→ page 385)
READY Plug-in hybrid operation activated

Haptic accelerator pedal (→ page 288, 284, 290)
(A) ECO start/stop function ( page 281)
HOLD HOLD function ( page 352)
Adaptive Highbeam Assist ( page 235) Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus ( page 237)
120mmol Maximum permissible speed exceeded (for certain countries only)
Active Stop-and-Go Assist ( page 367)
Slippery road surface warning
Engine operating temperature warning lamp ( page 274)
Display flashes: the vehicle level is being raised or lowered.
Display lit up: the vehicle is at high level.

Vehicles with Speed Limit Assist: detected instructions and traffic signs ( page 378)

Vehicles with Traffic Sign Assist: detected instructions and traffic signs ( page 380)

Notes on operating safety

For your own safety, always observe the following points when operating mobile communications equipment and especially your voice control system:

• Observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are driving.
• If you use the voice control system in an emergency your voice can change and your telephone call, e.g. an emergency call, can thereby be delayed.
• Familiarise yourself with the voice control system functions before starting the journey.

The voice control system does not replace the Owner's Manual.

The answers from the voice control system do not provide the complete scope of information contained in the Owner's Manual. The voice control system also does not give detailed warning or damage information. Therefore read the Owner's Manual so that you are fully informed about the functions and the safe operation of the vehicle.

Notes on operating safety

For your own safety, always observe the following points when operating mobile communications equipment and especially your voice control system:

• Observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are driving.
• If you use the voice control system in an emergency your voice can change and your telephone call, e.g. an emergency call, can thereby be delayed.
• Familiarise yourself with the voice control system functions before starting the journey.

Operation

Function of the MBUX voice assistant

You can watch an animation on this topic via the following link:

Using the MBUX voice assistant, vehicle functions and various areas of the MBUX multimedia system can be operated by voice input, e.g. Navigation or Telephone. The MBUX voice assistant is opera-

tional about half a minute after switching on the vehicle and can be operated from all seats (depending on the special equipment).

Conducting a dialogue

Requirements:

• Voice activation is activated in the multimedia system ( page 459).
• For corrections during output, the Voice barge-in option must be activated in the multi-media system ( page 459).

Starting a dialogue

Say Hey Mercedes to activate the MBUX voice assistant.

or

Press the button on the multifunction steering wheel. A wave appears in the MBUX multimedia system. The dialogue can be started.

For the dialogue with the MBUX voice assistant, you can use complete sentences of colloquial language as voice commands. Voice activation can

also be combined directly with a voice command, e.g. Hey Mercedes, how warm is it outside?

Interrupting the dialogue

During the dialogue say Pause.
The dialogue is interrupted.
Say Hey Mercedes to continue the dialogue.

Correcting an entry

During the dialogue say Correction.

or

Interrupt the system's voice output.

Changing dialogue level

During the dialogue, say Back. The MBUX voice assistant jumps back to the previous dialogue step.
During the dialogue, say From the beginning again. The MBUX voice assistant jumps to the highest dialogue level.

Navigating in the selection list

If a voice command does not achieve a clear result, a selection list is shown.

Say the line number or the content to select an entry or to have further details shown.
Say Next page or Previous page to browse the selection list.

Calling up help

For information about the MBUX voice assistant: say Hey Mercedes, what can you do?
Current application: say Help. You will receive suggestions and information about operation of the MBUX voice assistant for the current application.
▶ Specific function: call up the voice command for the required function, for example with Hey Mercedes, I need help with the radio.
Digital Owner's Manual: say Show me the Owner's Manual. The full extent of the Digital Owner's Manual is available on the media display when the vehicle is stationary.

Overview of the operable functions of the MBUX voice assistant

You can use the MBUX voice assistant to operate the following functions depending on the vehicle equipment:

• Telephone
  • Text message and e-mail
• Navigation
• Radio and media
• Vehicle functions
  • Online functions

Full functionality of the voice control system is only available for you with activation of online voice control ( page 459).

Information on the language setting

You can change the language of the MBUX voice assistant via the system language settings ( page 494). If the set system language is not supported by the MBUX voice assistant, English will be selected.

Setting functions of MBUX voice assistant using the multimedia system

Multimedia system:

→ Settings ▶ System

Voice assistant

Switching voice activation of MBUX voice assistant on or off

Select Hey Mercedes. When the function is active, the Hey Mercedes voice command can activate the dialogue.

Switching direct commands on or off

Select

Activate or deactivate the function. If the function is active, some commands can be used without Hey Mercedes, for example Next track.

Switching voice activation for individual seats on or off

Select

Switch the function for the desired seats on or off.

Switching voice interruption on or off

Select Further settings.

Select Voice barge-in. If the function is active, a command can be interjected during voice output of the system.

Switching proactivity on or off

Select Further settings.

Select the desired situation, e.g. Activate your profile or Don't forget your phone. When the function is active, the voice assistant proactively provides information in specific situations.

Activating or deactivating online voice control

① Online voice control is activated at the factory.

Select Online recognition.

Activate or deactivate the function. If the function is activated and a Mercedes me user account is linked to the vehicle, additional results are available through the provi-

F167 0009 02

sion of external information, e.g. information on POIs. By clicking the symbol in the wave, more information about the online voice control can be displayed.

Activating or deactivating contacts for online use

Select Contact upload for online recognition. When the function is active, contacts will be found more easily and accurately using voice input.

Using LINGUATRONIC effectively

Notes on optimum use of MBUX voice assistant

- The MBUX voice assistant is operational half a minute after switching on the vehicle and can be operated from all seats, depending on the equipment installed. The system recognises from which seat the command was spoken and performs actions according to the seat position.

- When a dialogue is ended, the MBUX voice assistant continues to be active for as long as the wave is displayed in the multimedia sys-

tem. You can say another voice command without saying Hey Mercedes.

• Using the direct command Change language to English, the system language can be changed to English without Hey Mercedes. Direct commands must be activated for this.
• If a user profile has been stored and is active, the MBUX voice assistant can make suggestions based on the habits of the user. If the voice commands are not clear, the system selects an action. The action can be corrected with a new voice command.

Say Hey Mercedes, load my personal profile, to activate the profile. The user's voice must first be learned by the system and assigned to a profile.

Further information on user profiles ( page 480).

- With the MBUX voice assistant, incoming calls can be accepted or rejected without the keyword Hey Mercedes.

Information on the MBUX online voice assistant

The online voice control facilitates recognition and thanks to external information makes additional results available.

Therefore, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you activate online voice control ( page 459).

You will need a Mercedes me user account for this. If you do not yet have a user account you have to create one and connect it with your vehicle ( page 578).

Then call up your Mercedes me user account. The Mercedes me services are shown and can be activated ( page 578).

By clicking on the symbols displayed in the wave, further information on the online status is displayed.

When online voice control is active, additional functions are available such as:

• Weather
• General knowledge
  • Public holidays and school holidays

• Smarthorne

• Messages
  • Time, date and time zones

• Pocket and currency calculator
  • Football results and fixture lists
• Share prices
• Calendar
• ChitChat
• Horoscope
• Geo Quiz

The availability of these functions is country and equipment-dependent.

① Text content is taken from Wikipedia in accordance with the CC BY-SA 3.0 licence.

Essential voice commands

Notes on voice commands

You can watch an animation on this topic via the following link:

It is not necessary to use exact voice commands to call up a specific function. The MBUX voice

assistant also understands you when you use your colloquial speech. Some examples are listed below. For some languages however these examples are only available to a limited extent.

Examples of voice commands:

• Navigation ( page 461)
• Telephone (→ page 461)
• Radio and TV ( page 461)
• Media player ( page 461)
- Messages (→ page 462)
• Vehicle functions (→ page 462)
• Online functions (→ page 463)

Examples of navigation voice commands

You can operate the navigation system using the MBUX voice assistant. The following list offers just a small selection of the possible navigation commands. You will receive additional suggestions if you say Help for navigation.

• Drive me home.
  • Where is the nearest service station?

• Is there a service area along the route?
- Set Central Park as intermediate destination.
- Cancel the route guidance.
• Show my last destination.
• I want to buy juice.
• Search for a French restaurant in Manhattan.

Examples of telephone voice commands

You can operate phones connected with MBUX multimedia system the using the MBUX voice assistant. The following list offers just a small selection of the possible telephone commands. You will receive additional suggestions if you say Help for phone.

• Call Peter Miller on the mobile phone.
- Dial 0711 17 0.
- Call my father.
- Accept call
- Reject call
• Search for the contact Peter Miller.
- Switch to address book

• Show me the incoming calls.
- Switch the phone

Examples of radio and TV voice commands

Depending on the vehicle equipment, you can operate the radio and TV using the MBUX voice assistant. The following list offers just a small selection of the possible radio or TV voice commands. You will receive additional suggestions if you say Help for radio or Help for TV.

• Play the radio station Heart FM.
• Next station.
• Previous station.
  • Show me the list of radio stations
• Save the station
  • What am I listening to?

Examples of media voice commands

You can operate connected media sources and online music using the MBUX voice assistant. The following list offers just a small selection of the

possible media voice commands. You will receive additional suggestions if you say Help for media or Help for player.

• Play Michael Jackson.
• Play "Yellow Submarine" by the Beatles.
• Next track.
• Previous track.
• Play similar track.
• Repeat this track.
• Switch on random playback.
• Mute the music.
• Switch to USB.

Examples of message voice commands

Messages can be created, edited and listened to using the MBUX voice assistant. The following list offers just a small selection of the possible message commands. You will receive additional suggestions if you say Help for messaging.

- Write a text message to Jane Doe: When will the next meeting take place?

• Show me my new e-mails.
• Write an e-mail to Jane Doe.
- Read me my new text messages.
• Show all new text messages.
• Write an e-mail to John Doe in English

Examples of vehicle voice commands

You can operate vehicle settings and vehicle functions using the MBUX voice assistant. The following list offers just a small selection of the possible vehicle voice commands.

If no seat is mentioned for commands, the action is carried out automatically for the seat from which the command was spoken or for the function which is closest to that seat.

• Switch the seat heating to level 2.
• My feet are cold.
• Start the Refresh programme.
• Switch the relaxation function on.
  • I would like to set the ambient light to blue

• Switch on the reading lamp.

• Turn off the rear light.

• Open all the windows.
• Switch the driver's display to 3D.
  • How fast can I drive here?
  • Tell me my next service appointment
  • How warm is it outside?

Information about the vehicle can also be requested:

• Information about individual items of the vehicle equipment
Hey Mercedes, which massage programmes do you have?
Hey Mercedes, do I have Blind Spot Assist?
Hey Mercedes, where is the warning triangle?
• Information about functioning of the systems and components installed in the vehicle
- Hey Mercedes, what is DISTRONIC?
- Hey Mercedes, what do I need ESP for?
- Hey Mercedes, what is MBUX?

• Information about operating the systems and components installed in the vehicle
- Hey Mercedes, how do I connect my smartphone?
- Hey Mercedes, how can I turn on the high-beam headlamps?
- Hey Mercedes, how do I stop the ionization function?

You can also use the vehicle voice commands to directly call up the menus for the plug-in hybrid settings and operate the corresponding vehicle functions.

• "Display the energy flow."
- "Switch to charging settings."
- "Activate pre-entry climate control."
- "Where is the nearest charging station?"
• "How far can I still drive?"
- "Set the departure time to tomorrow morning at 8 am."

Examples of online functions

Depending on the country, language and vehicle equipment, additional functions are available when online voice control is active. The system accesses external information and can, as a result, answer general knowledge questions and make calculations, for example.

• Is the sun shining in Manchester?
• Is it raining at my location?
- What are the skiing conditions on the Zugspitze?
• What's the time in Sydney now?
• In which country do you pay with dollars?
• How many Swiss franks make 25 euros?
• How long now until the holidays?
• What day is it tomorrow?

• What is 20% of 29?

• What does my horoscope say?

• What is the price of Mercedes-Benz Group shares?

- Let's play Geo Quiz.

• I'm bored.
  • Who is the current prime minister?
• What do you know about the Globe Theatre in London?
  • Who painted the picture "The Scream"?
  • What's the status in the Premier League?
  • Create a calendar entry tomorrow at 9 am.
  • What's my next task?
• Tell me a joke.
  • How many languages do you speak?
  • What is your favourite animal?
• Are there any updates?
  • Is the light still on in the kitchen?
• Switch off all the devices in my house.
• Please set the temperature in the living room to 24 degrees.

Direct command examples

With direct commands, some functions can be operated without first saying the voice command Hey Mercedes. To use direct commands, the

function must be activated in the multimedia system ( page 459).

• Next TV channel
• Previous TV channel
• Next radio station
  • Previous radio station
• Next station
• Previous station
• Next track
• Previous track
• Start dashcam recording
• Stop dashcam recording
• Show the map
• 3D map
• 2D map
• Align map to north
• Align map in direction of travel
  • Show all routes
• Show traffic

• Navigate to work

• Navigate home

• Repeat driving instruction
• Cancel route guidance
  • Change language to English

Overview and operation

Overview of the MBUX multimedia system

WARNING Risk of distraction from information systems and communications equipment

If you operate information systems and communication devices integrated in the vehicle when driving, you could be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle.

Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits.
If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary.

You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the multimedia system.

NOTE Increased surface temperature due to direct sunlight on the central display

The surface of the central display is very dark. If the display is exposed to direct sunlight, the surface can become very hot.

If the central display has been exposed to direct sunlight, allow it to cool down before touching it for a long time.

Diagram of a car interior with numbered components, likely for navigation or diagnostic purposes.

① Touch Control and control panel for the MBUX multimedia system MBUX stands for Mercedes-Benz User Experience.

- Operates Touch Control (→ page 469)

② Media display with touch functionality

• Home screen overview (→ page 468)
- Operates the touchscreen (→ page 470)

3 Touchpad
Operates the touchpad (→ page 471)
4 Controller
Turn: adjusts the volume
Press briefly: switches the mute function on/off
Press and hold: switches the MBUX multimedia system or media display on or off
5 Buttons for navigation , radio/media
RADIO and telephone TEL
(→ page 472, 471)
6 Button for vehicle functions 📄 and fingerprint sensor 📋
Alternatively, the MBUX voice assistant allows voice dialogue. Operation with natural speech starts after the wake-up call "Hey Mercedes" (→ page 457). You can start voice navigation, for example, with the input of a three-word address from what3words.
If the vehicle is fitted with the MBUX Interior Assistant, selected functions of the multimedia system can be operated contact-free. In

addition, the reading light or search light can be switched on or off contact-free.

Numerous application, online services, services and apps are available for you. These can be called up via the home screen.

You can conveniently call up your favourites using the ★ button on the steering wheel. Quick-access in the home screen and in the applications serve to select functions more quickly.

If you use the learning function of the multimedia system, you will receive suggestions during operation of the most probable navigation destinations, media sources, radio stations and contacts. The configuration of the suggestions is completed in the system settings. You can compile your user profile from various vehicle settings and settings of the multimedia system. Some functions and services are protected by a PIN. You can teach in biometric procedures to identify yourself with these instead of the four-digit Mercedes me PIN.

The Notifications Centre collects incoming notifications, e.g. about an available software update. Depending on the type of notification it offers var-

ious actions. The call is made via the Control Centre.

With the global search, you can search on the home screen via categories, e.g. in the navigation system, and on the Internet.

Anti-theft protection

This device is equipped with technical provisions to protect it against theft. More detailed information about anti-theft protection can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop.

You can watch an animation on this topic via the following link:

Overview of the MBUX multimedia system (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)

WARNING Risk of distraction from information systems and communications equipment

If you operate information systems and communication devices integrated in the vehicle when driving, you could be distracted from the

traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle.

Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits.
If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary.

You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the multimedia system.

NOTE Increased surface temperature due to direct sunlight on the central display

The surface of the central display is very dark. If the display is exposed to direct sunlight, the surface can become very hot.

If the central display has been exposed to direct sunlight, allow it to cool down before touching it for a long time.

Diagram of car interior with numbered components for driving or testing, showing dashboard, steering wheel, and dashboard controls.

① Touch Control and control panel for the MBUX multimedia system MBUX stands for Mercedes-Benz User Experience.
- Operating Touch Control (→ page 469)
② Media display with touch functionality • Home screen overview (→ page 468) • Operating the touchscreen (→ page 470)

③ Touchpad Operating the touchpad ( page 471)
Controller Turn: adjusts the volume Press briefly: switches the sound on/off Press and hold: switches the MBUX multi-media system or media display on or off
Buttons for navigation, radio/media and telephone Calling up applications (→ page 472, 471)
Button for vehicle functions and the fingerprint sensor
Alternatively, the MBUX voice assistant allows voice dialogue. Operation with natural speech starts after the wake-up call "Hey Mercedes" (→ page 457). You can start voice navigation, for example, with the input of a 3-word address from what3words.

If the vehicle is equipped with the MBUX Interior Assistant, vehicle and infotainment functions can be used. The interaction then follows intelligently, reactively or with hand or head movements.

Numerous applications, online services, services and apps are available for you. These can be called up via the home screen.

You can conveniently call up your favourites using the ★ button on the steering wheel. Quick-access in the home screen and in the applications serve to select functions more quickly.

If you use the learning function of the multimedia system, you will receive suggestions during operation of the most probable navigation destinations, media sources, radio stations and contacts. The configuration of the suggestions is completed in the system settings. You can compile your user profile from various vehicle settings and settings of the multimedia system. Some functions and services are protected by a PIN. You can teach in biometric procedures to identify yourself with these instead of the four-digit Mercedes me PIN.

The Notifications Centre collects incoming notifications, e.g. about an available software update. Depending on the type of notification it offers various actions. The call is made in the home screen via the Control Center.

With the global search, you can search on the home screen via categories, e.g. in the navigation system, and on the internet.

Anti-theft protection

This device is equipped with technical provisions to protect it against theft. More detailed information about anti-theft protection can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop.

Home screen overview

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Settings Navigation Phone [phone]W 12/0W

① On the home screen: displays the first three applications

In other displays: calls up the home screen

2 Calls up user profile settings and switches user

3 Uses the global search

④ Calls up the Control Centre: pull the bar down

6 Calls up favourites
6 Displays in the status line
⑦ Calls up an application
8 Quick-access to application
9 Index points for selected display area
⑩ Calls up the air conditioning menu

The following functions are called up in the Control Centre:

• Notifications Centre
• Favourites
  • Vehicle quick-access

In the image, the applications are arranged as a carousel. Pressing and holding on 📋 arranges the applications in a grid. This view is also used by a smartphone, for example.

Touch Control

Operating Touch Control (MBUX multimedia system)

Diagram of a car interior with numbered components and a Mercedes-Benz logo, likely for automotive hub or steering system.

Diagram of a car's internal components with numbered labels pointing to different parts of the dashboard.

Mercedes-AMG vehicles

① Shows the home screen
② Touch Control

◀ ▲ ▶ ▼ Swipe in the direction of the arrow (navigate)

OK Press (confirm)

Returns to the previous display
4 Makes or accepts a call
6 Rejects or ends a call
To increase volume: swipe upwards

To reduce volume: swipe down

To switch off the sound: press

Calls up favourites

Starts the MBUX voice assistant

To operate Touch Control ② in the most effective way, use the tip of your thumb if possible.

You can navigate through menus and lists via the touch-sensitive surface of Touch Control using a single-finger swipe, for example:

To enter a character: select a character using the keyboard and press on Touch Control 2.
To select a menu option: scroll in a list and press Touch Control 2.
To move the digital map: swipe in any direction.

Setting the sensitivity for Touch Control Multimedia system:

→ Settings ▶ System
▶ Control elements
▶ Touch Control sensitivity
▶ Select Fast, Medium or Slow.

Setting acoustic operational feedback for all control elements

Multimedia system:

Settings

System

Control elements

Acoustic feedback

The function is supported by the selection in a list.

Set Off, Unleaded or Loud.

If the function is activated you will hear a clicking sound when selecting control elements or when scrolling in a list. When the beginning or end of the list is reached you will hear another clicking sound.

Touchscreen

Operating the touchscreen

Tapping

To select a menu item or entry: tap on a symbol or an entry.
To increase the map scale: tap twice quickly with one finger.
To reduce the map scale: tap with two fingers.

To enter characters with the keypad: tap on a button.

Single-finger swipe

To navigate in menus: swipe up, down, left or right.
To move the digital map: swipe in any direction.
To use handwriting to enter characters: write the character with one finger on the touchscreen.

Two-finger swipe

To zoom in and out of the map: move two fingers together or apart.
To enlarge or reduce the size of a section of a website: move two fingers together or apart.
To turn the map: turn anti-clockwise or clockwise using two fingers.

Three-finger swipe

To call up the home screen: swipe up with three fingers in an application.

Touching, holding and moving

To move the map: touch the touchscreen and move your finger in any direction.
To set the volume on a scale: touch the touchscreen and move the finger to the left or right.

Touching and holding

To save the destination in the map: touch the touchscreen and hold until a message is shown.
To call up a global menu in the applications: touch the touchscreen and hold until the Options menu appears.

Touchpad

Operating the touchpad

1 2 3 DYNAMIC VOLUME 4 9 8 NAVI MAP 5 RADIO MEDIA 6 TEL 7

① button
Returns to the previous display
2 button
Calls up the control menu of the last active audio source

3 button
Shows the home screen and calls up applications
4 Turn: adjusts the volume
Press briefly: switches the sound on/off Press and hold: switches the MBUX multimedia system or media display on or off
⑤ Calls up the navigation system or map
6 Calls up radio or media
⑦ Calls up the telephone
8 Fingerprint sensor
Overview ( page 473)
Setting up fingerprint recognition ( page 480)
9 Calls up vehicle functions
To enter a character: enter a character using the keyboard.
or
Write a character on the touch-sensitive surface of the touchpad.

Selecting a menu item or entry with one-finger swipes

Swipe up, down, left or right.
Press the touchpad.

Moving the digital map

Swipe in all directions.

Use the following functions with a two-finger swipe:

To call up the Notifications Centre: swipe down with two fingers.
To close the Notifications Centre: swipe up with two fingers.
To call up the control menu of the last active audio source: swipe up with two fingers.
To zoom in and out of the map: move two fingers together or apart.
To enlarge or reduce the size of a section of a website: move two fingers together or apart.

Setting the sensitivity for the touchpad Multimedia system:

→ Settings ▶ System ▶ Control elements

Select Sensitivity.
▶ Select Fast, Medium or Slow.
To set the pressure sensitivity: switch Touchpad tap on or off. If the function is switched on, a tap on the touchpad is enough to select a menu item.

■ Activating or deactivating haptic operating feedback for the touchpad Multimedia system:

→ Settings ▶ System ▶ Control elements

The function supports you when making entries on the touchpad and when selecting menus.
▶ Switch Haptic feedback on or off. When the function is activated, a tactile feedback in the form of a vibration is effected when the touchpad is operated.

Selecting a station and track using the touch-pad

Press the ◀ button on the touchpad. The control menu appears for the audio source that was last selected.
Swipe left or right using one finger. Radio: the previous or next station is set. Media source: the previous or next track is selected.
To hide the control menu: press the ◀▶ button on the touchpad.

Overview of the fingerprint sensor

Diagram showing car interior with a highlighted component and an inset highlighting a specific object labeled '①'

Fingerprint sensor ① allows you to conveniently access protected MBUX multimedia system functions and services. Compared to protection provided by the Mercedes me PIN, the entry of a four-digit number is not required to activate services and functions with personal content.

The fingerprint sensor must be set up before use ( page 480).

The fingerprint sensor stores only a data model and no image of the fingerprint. The data model is only processed in the vehicle and is not transmitted from the vehicle.

MBUX Interior Assistant

Notes on lasers and laser classification

WARNING Risk of injury from the camera's laser radiation

This product uses a classification 1 laser system. If the housing is opened or damaged, laser radiation may damage your retina.

Do not open the housing.
▶ Always have maintenance work and repairs carried out by a qualified specialist workshop.

This device is a class 1 laser product in accordance with IEC 60825-1:2014 and DIN EN 60825-1:2014.

A WARNING Risk of distraction from information systems and communications equipment

If you operate information systems and communication devices integrated in the vehicle when driving, you could be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle.

Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits.
If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary.

You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the multimedia system.

Overview of the MBUX Interior Assistant If the vehicle is fitted with the MBUX Interior Assistant, selected functions of the multimedia system can be operated contact-free. In addition, the reading light or search light can be switched on or off contact-free.

The MBUX Interior Assistant can differentiate between driver and front passenger interactions. The MBUX Interior Assistant recognises specific hand movements and a pose.

Diagram of a car interior with labeled component (no text or symbols beyond the number 1)

Example of camera location

Camera ① is located in the overhead control panel.

System limits, display messages and notes for rectification

The system may be impaired or may not function in the following situations:

- The camera in the overhead control panel may heat up due to operating conditions. As a result the camera may switch off temporarily, particularly during longer periods of operation and at high outside temperatures.

Do not touch or cover the camera and wait until the camera has cooled down and is available again.

- The camera is covered, dirty, misted up or scratched.

Wait until the camera has cooled down before cleaning the camera lens.

Clean the outside of the camera lens with a dry or damp cotton cloth. Do not use microfibre cloths. Do not remove the cover when cleaning.

- Recognition can be impaired by reflective clothing, an unfavourable colour of clothing or by accessories, for example.

- Clothing being worn (hat, shawl, scarf) may be limiting the detection area of the camera. Keep the camera's field of vision clear.

- The camera is not operational. Consult a Mercedes-Benz service centre.

Supported interactions

Interaction area Interaction Description
In front of the media display or above the touch-pad	Proximity to the control element The MBUX Interior Assistant recognises a hand approaching a control element.Depending on the active application, the display will be adjusted in the media display. Some functions differentiate between driver and front passenger.No specific hand position is required.
Above the centre console	Defined pose	A favourite is called up with a defined pose.
Below the inside rearview mirror Brief up and down movements With brief up and down movements below the inside rearview mirror the reading light for the driver or the front passenger is switched on and off.
Above the front passenger seat Stretching out a hand above the front passenger seat	By stretching out a hand above the front passenger seat the search light is switched on. If you withdraw a hand from this area, the search light is switched off again.

You can watch an animation on this topic via the following link:

Operating functions by bringing your hand closer to the multimedia system

Requirements

• One of the following applications appears in the media display:

- Seat settings with displays for the driver and front passenger seat, e.g. Seat

• Home screen
• Radio menu or media menu
  Map in the navigation
• Active Parking Assist

- Recognition occurs as your hand approaches to approximately 10 cm from the touchscreen or the touchpad.

Seat adjustments by the driver or front passenger In the seat settings menu, the MBUX Interior Assistant detects proximity to various control elements of the multimedia system. In addition, the MBUX Interior Assistant detects from which seat the action emanates.

When the seat settings are shown, move your hand towards the touchscreen or touchpad. The seat of the person operating, driver's seat or front passenger seat, is enlarged in the media display.
The appropriate control elements are pre-selected automatically.
Either switch the function on and off directly or make further settings (depending on function).

Highlighting an application on the home screen The MBUX Interior Assistant detects in which area your hand is in front of the touchscreen. The display of objects shown is adjusted to improve orientation.

Move your hand towards the touchscreen. The symbol for the application is enlarged. The quick-access applications will be highlighted.
Continue operation and select a quick-access application, for example.
(i) Further information about the home screen ( page 468).

Activating cover change in the radio menu and media menu

The MBUX Interior Assistant reduces the number of operating steps.

Move your hand towards the touchscreen or touchpad.
The current information, e.g. about the radio station, track and artist is hidden. Cover change is activated.
Continue operation and select a cover.

To show current information again: move your hand away from the touchscreen or touchpad.
① More information on the radio menu ( page 601) and the media menu ( page 597).

Showing the navigation menu on the map The MBUX Interior Assistant shows the navigation menu.

Move your hand towards the touchscreen or touchpad. The navigation menu is shown.
Continue operation and select a symbol.
To hide the navigation menu again: move your hand away from the touchscreen or touchpad.
(i) Further information on the navigation menu ( page 510).

Showing operating symbols in the Active Parking Assist camera image (only from driver's seat) The MBUX Interior Assistant facilitates quick-access for the driver to various camera views.

When Active Parking Assist is shown, move your hand towards the touchscreen. The camera operation symbols are displayed.
Continue operation and display the desired front, rear, left and right camera views.
i Further information on the Active Parking Assist function ( page 420).

Calling up favourites with the V pose

Requirements

• There is at least one favourite.
- The favourite has been connected with the MBUX Interior Assistant.
- The area for recognition of the favourite's pose (V pose) is above the centre console at the height of the climate control vents and the media display. Your hand should be at least 10 cm from the media display.
• The V pose is held for a brief time.

Calling up favourites

The driver and front passenger can connect two different favourites with the V pose.

If a favourite has not yet been saved and connected with the MBUX Interior Assistant, the multimedia system will assist you.
Position a hand above the centre console in the direction of the media display. The back of your hand is facing upwards. In doing so the index and middle finger are spread to form a V with the other fingers bent inwards. Briefly hold the V pose. The favourite is called up.

Contactless switching on or off of the reading light for driver and front passenger

Requirements

• The function is available when it is dark.
- The hand movement takes place in the interaction area below the inside rearview mirror.

Briefly moving a hand up and down under the inside rearview mirror switches the reading light specifically for the driver or front passenger on or off.

Move your hand up and down under the inside rearview mirror.
The reading light is switched on or off.

Switching the search light for the driver on or off with a hand movement

Requirements

• The function is available when it is dark.
- The hand movement takes place in the interaction area above the front passenger seat.
- The seat belt on the front passenger seat must not be inserted in the seat belt buckle.

Stretching out a hand over the front passenger seat switches a search light on for the driver when it is dark. Pulling the hand back switches the search light off again.

To switch on: reach across the front passenger seat with a hand.
The search light is switched on for the driver.

To switch off: take a hand back away from the front passenger seat. The search light is switched off again.

Selecting settings for the MBUX Interior Assistant

Multimedia system:

Settings

System

▶ Interior assistant

To switch on full functionality of the MBUX Interior Assistant: select On.

The option is activated #.

To activate additional functions for reading and search lights: select Including search and reading light.

When the option is switched on, the display button is activated.

The functions for the reading and search lights are activated in addition to the proximity functions.

To switch off the MBUX Interior Assistant: select Off.

The option is activated #.

User

Notes on user profiles

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped during adjustment of the driver's seat after calling up a driver profile

Selecting a user profile may trigger an adjustment of the driver's seat to the position saved under the user profile. You or other vehicle occupants could be injured in the process.

Make sure that when the position of driver's seat is being adjusted using the multimedia system, no people or body parts are in the seat's range of movement.

If there is a risk of someone becoming trapped, immediately stop the adjustment process by:

a) Pressing the warning message on the central display.

or

b) Pressing a position button of the memory function or a seat adjustment switch in the driver's door. The adjustment process is stopped.

The driver's seat is equipped with an anti-entrapment feature.

If the driver's door is open, the driver's seat will not be set after calling up the driver's profile.

Overview of user profiles

Requirements for use

• You have a Mercedes me user account.
• You have a Mercedes me PIN.
• You have agreed to the terms of use.
- The vehicle is linked to a Mercedes me user account.

If one of the pre-requisites listed is missing or if no user profile has been selected, the data described in the following section will be saved in the vehicle as the standard setting. Standard settings can be changed by all vehicle users.

User profiles save personal settings. If the vehicle is used by several people, a person can change their profile settings without changing the settings of other users.

You can individualise a user profile in the vehicle using the set-up assistant or using the settings in your user profile. Some settings, e.g. the

Mercedes me PIN and a profile photo are made in the Mercedes me App or in the Mercedes me Portal.

If the user profile is downloaded while travelling, user profiles are not set up using the setup assistant.

User-specific content and applications with personal data are protected by different levels of security ( page 480).

To access protected content, the Mercedes me PIN and, depending on the vehicle equipment, biometric sensors are used.

The security level is set by the multimedia system and calculated from the combination of all sensor inputs. Some security levels cannot be turned off.

When a user profile is activated, the following personalised comfort systems, for example, can be adjusted or their settings loaded:

• Seat
• Ambient light
• Outside mirrors
  • Climate control settings

If the user profile is activated when driving, the driver's seat position will not be adjusted.

User-specific content

Depending on the vehicle equipment you can, as a user, save the following settings, for example:

• Driver's seat, steering wheel and mirror settings
• Climate control
• Ambient light
  • Radio (including station list)
  • Suggestions and favourites

You can watch an animation on this topic via the following link:

Adding a user

Requirements

• The vehicle is stationary.

Multimedia system:

Select + Add user. A QR code is loaded.
▶ Scan the displayed QR code with the Mercedes me App or any QR code scanner on a mobile device. If the Mercedes me App is not yet installed on your mobile device, you will be directed to the store of your mobile device.
Follow the steps in the Mercedes me App. The vehicle is connected with your Mercedes me user account. This automatically creates your user profile in the vehicle. You will be informed when your user profile is available.

When the vehicle is stationary, the set-up assistant starts automatically after user selection.

(i) When the user has been added, they can be selected ( page 481).

Selecting user options

Multimedia system:

Protecting user-specific content and applications If you add a new user, access protection is already activated for the user profile. The Mercedes me PIN and, depending on the vehicle equipment, biometric sensors are available for access. Biometric sensors in the vehicle must be taught in. The authentication process then takes all taught-in and available sensors into account. The following user-specific content and applications are protected, for example:

• User selection and user profile settings

- Biometric sensors

The teaching-in of biometric sensors

For teaching in and editing biometric recognition see the following section.

- Suggestions

The data and determination of the most probable navigation destinations, media sources, radio stations, contacts and messages.

- ENERGIZING COACH

The recorded health data and its evaluation.

- In-Car Office

The calendar, the tasks and the e-mails.

- Parking service

The payment transactions.

- Mercedes me Store

The purchase of services.

• System activations of paid vehicle functions

In the following cases you will be prompted for authentication or re-authentication using a sensor or the Mercedes me PIN:

- When selecting a protected user profile

- When calling a function requiring special protection

• If biometric sensors provide insufficient or contradictory information

• If the multimedia system no longer trusts a sensor
• If the seat belt buckle and the door are opened at the same seat and a function requiring special protection is called up
• When the vehicle is locked from outside
  Select Protect content.
  ▶ Switch Access protection on or off.
  When access protection is switched off, your user profile can be viewed from any seat and changes can be made.
  Access protection is switched on or off on a vehicle-specific basis.
  i Please note that authentication is necessary for several functions such as In-Car Office and cannot therefore be completely switched off.

Setting up and editing biometric recognition

The biometric data models are saved in the sensors in the vehicle. If recognition has been set up, this sensor serves as a contributory factor for authentication on the multimedia system.

Select Protect content.

Select Fingerprint recognition or Voice recognition.

If necessary, authenticate yourself on the multimedia system.

Setting up fingerprint recognition

Place and lift your finger several times on the fingerprint sensor on the touch-pad(→ page 473). The finger is scanned. If the scanning procedure is successful, a message appears on the media display. You can unlock your user profile and protected applications with your finger print.

Setting up voice recognition

Speak the sentence shown on the media display and follow the voice assistant's instructions. If voice recognition was successful, a message appears on the media display. You can unlock your user profile.

① Avoid background or disturbing noises during voice recognition.

Deleting biometric data

Tap on ☐, for example, behind Fingerprint recognition.
Select Yes.

Calling up the set-up assistant

Select Profile.
▶ Select Set-up assistant.
Follow the directions from the set-up assistant.

Changing user name or profile photo

Select Profile.
Select Change user name.

or

Select Profile picture.
Enter the user name or select a user image.
Select Finished.

You can store your photo in the Mercedes me user account using the app or in the portal. The photo will then be shown in the vehicle. In the vehicle itself, you can select other sample images instead of the photo.

Deleting a user profile

Select Profile.
Select Remove.
Select Remove user profile.
Your Mercedes me user account and your personal data will remain within the Mercedes me ecosystem.

Resetting the user profile to factory settings

Select Profile.
Select Reset.
Select Yes.
① This resets the contents of the user profile to factory settings, but not the vehicle.

You can watch an animation on this topic via the following link:

Selecting a user

Multimedia system:

When you call up your driver profile, the driver's seat and the steering wheel can be set.

You can cancel the setting process with the following actions:

• Tap on the Tap here to cancel. message on the media display.
• Press one of the seat operating buttons in the driver's door.

▶ Select Select user.
Select a user.
When requested to do so, authenticate with the Mercedes me PIN or a taught-in biometric characteristic. The user profile is loaded and activated.
If you select Continue without selecting user, no specific settings for the user profile are loaded.

Synchronising user profiles

Requirements:

• You have a Mercedes me user account.
- The vehicle is connected with your Mercedes me user account.

Multimedia system:

Synchronisation

Allow synchronisation. When the vehicle is switched on or off, the data stored in the vehicle is automatically synchronised with the Mercedes me user accounts. This synchronization is done for all user profiles and is not profile-specific.

or

▶ Select Synchronise now. After selecting this option, the data stored in the vehicle is synchronised with the Mercedes me user accounts.

① Not all user profile functions are available during synchronization.
If the personalisation service in the vehicle is deactivated, only the following user profile master data is synchronised:

- Profile name

- Profile image

- Mercedes me PIN

Favourites

Overview of favourites

Favourites offer you quick access to frequently used applications. 100 favourites are available in total.

You can select favourites from categories or you add favourites directly from an application.

Calling up favourites

Multimedia system:

Alternatively, in the home screen pull down bar ④ in the centre of the status line (→ page 468).
Select ★ in the Control Center.

Adding favourites

Multimedia system:

Selecting favourites from categories

Select ▷.
Select + Create new favourite.

Select the category.
Select a favourite. The favourite is stored at the next available position.
All positions in the favourites are taken: confirm the message shown. A list shows all the favourites.
▶ Select a favourite to be overwritten.

Adding a favourite from an application

You can, for example, save a contact (example), or add an ENERGIZING COMFORT programme.

To save a contact as a global favourite: select a contact ( page 559).
Press on a telephone number until a menu is shown.
Select Save as favourite. The contact is added as a favourite.

Linking favourites with the MBUX Interior Assistant V pose

i If a favourite is linked to the V pose, you can call it up (→ page 477).
Select ▷.

▶ Select Driver or Passenger.
Select the category.
Select a favourite. If the favourite is linked with the V pose, a notification appears.
The linked favourite pose can be activated or deactivated for the driver or front passenger.

Renaming favourites

Multimedia system:

Press on a favourite until a menu is shown.
Select Rename.
Enter the name.
Save the names.

Moving favourites

Multimedia system:

Press on a favourite until a menu is shown.
Select Move.
Move the favourite to the new position.

Tap on

Deleting favourites

Multimedia system:

Press on a favourite until a menu is shown.
Select Delete.
Select Yes.

Resetting favourites

In the menu, select Reset all favourites.
Select Yes.

Notifications Centre

Overview of the Notifications Centre

The following communications are collected in the Notifications Centre:

• Communications which are generated by the vehicle or from the multimedia system.
  • Communications which are received through the use of services.

The following notification types are available for you:

• Navigable destinations and routes
• Messages (text messages)
  • Calendar entries and reminders, e.g. from In-Car Office
  This function is not available in all countries.
• System information, e.g. Important software update available. Confirm to start the update.
• Other notifications, e.g. from additional online services that can be subscribed to or emergency reports (e.g. tornado)

The Notifications Centre is in the Control Center. Depending on the style set, newly received notifications are shown using a coloured dot.

Notifications are normally briefly shown as they are received. If you take no action, these are stored for future access in the Notifications Centre.

The notifications are sorted chronologically. The most recent notifications are at the top.

Notifications Today, 08.04.2022 Test Notification New: Map update, Europe Tap here to start

Example of a message

① Calls up the Notifications Centre
① Calls up the Notifications Centre
② Time message received
③ Calls up the settings
④ Display for available actions
⑤ Description of the notification and the issuing service
6 Symbol for notifications
7 Date of the received notifications

Depending on the type of notification, up to four different actions are available.

Examples of actions include:

- Reading aloud

• Placing a call
• Replying
• Calling up a web page
• Navigation

Some notifications, e.g. a navigation destination, are stored longer. Therefore, it is not necessary to carry out available actions directly upon receipt of the notifications. A route guidance can be started at a later time.

You can pin a notification so that this is not deleted automatically after a certain time ( page 485).

Calling up notifications

Opening the Notifications Centre

In the home screen pull down bar ④ in the centre of the status line (→ page 468). The Control Centre opens.
Select in the Control Center.

Selecting a notification

If several messages are available swipe up or down.

Select an action.

Closing the Notifications Centre

Select

Selecting actions for a notification

The following options are available:

• Select the action directly after a notification is received and shown.
• Select the action later after calling up in the Notifications Centre.

Up to two actions available: select the action.

More than two actions available: select

Select the action. The notification is still available.

▶ Close the actions with ▶.

Editing notifications

Call up the Notifications Centre ( page 484).

Configuring settings

Select Settings.

Select the service.
Switch the options on or off. The following options are available depending on the service:

• Allow notifications
  • Display in notification centre
  • Show notifications
  • Switching Acoustic signals on or off
• External access

The option allows an external service access to specific data, e.g. the current vehicle position. The detailed, approved information is shown with ⓘ.

If Allow notifications is switched off, the options cannot be selected with the exception of External access.

Pinning a notification

Drag a notification to the right on the touchscreen.

A pin appears.

Tap on the pin.
The notification is marked with a pin.

Deleting notifications

Drag a notification to the left on the touchscreen.

or

Select
Select Yes.
All messages are deleted.

Global search

Global search overview

You can call up the global search on the home screen. You can input characters using the keyboard or the handwriting recognition. Alternatively, the MBUX voice assistant allows voice input.

The global search provides search results for the following categories:

• Navigation
• Entertainment
  • Phone, In-Car Office

In-Car Office is not available in all countries.

• Digital Owner's Manual
- Internet

The global search enables you to search for towns, roads and tourist attractions in the navigation category, for example.

The global search makes it possible to enter a three-word address ( page 515).

If the search field is empty, you will first see smart suggestions in the Suggestions category.

As soon as a letter is entered, you will be shown the best hits in the All category. You will find further search results in the individual categories. Next to the category is the number of results.

After selecting a category you can select the search results within the category. When you select a search result, a detailed view is opened depending on the category.

Using the global search

Multimedia system:

In the Suggestions category up to six smart suggestions are displayed, even if no search entry has been entered yet.

Enter the search term into the search field. As soon as a character is entered the All category is marked. Up to ten search results per category are displayed there. In the other categories suitable search results for the entered search item are displayed.
Alternatively, the MBUX Voice Assistant allows voice input using 📋 or you switch to the handwriting recognition 📋 (→ page 487).
To end the search: select OK.
To show search results for a category: select a category.
To accept the search result: select the search result.

An action starts, e.g. a radio station is set or a detailed view is displayed, e.g. for a contact.

Entering characters

Using the character input function

Requirements:

• For the handwriting recognition read-aloud function: the MBUX multimedia system is equipped with the MBUX voice assistant.
• The read-aloud function is available for the selected system language.
• The handwriting recognition read-aloud function is activated.

Enter the characters on the Touch Control or on the touchscreen. Character input can be started with a control element and resumed with another.

When the keypad is shown, enter the characters by swiping and pressing on the Touch Control or by tapping on the touchscreen.
or
If handwriting recognition has been selected, write the characters on the touchscreen.

Examples for character input include the global search, entering a navigation destination or the renaming of a favourite, for example.

The touchscreen supports character input with the following functions:

• Handwriting recognition offers character suggestions.
• If the read aloud function is activated for handwriting recognition then the entered characters are read aloud.

Entering characters on the touchscreen

Requirements

• If you wish to have the character input read aloud: the read aloud function of the handwriting recognition is switched on (→ page 489).
• An online connection is required for some functions.

1 2 3 4 Previous destinations 1061 499 cm Netherlak St. Maria 2.0 cm Sindeftag... St. Bonfara... 2.7 cm Boodirne... 123 12 OK 8 9 10 11

Character input with the keypad (destination entry)

① Input line with current entry
② Deletes an entry
② Search result
3 Selects previous destinations
4 Displays and selects additional destination searches

Adopts the search result in the input line and continues the search
6 Search result
⑦ Deletes the last character entered
Hides the keypad
⑨ Switches to handwriting recognition ( page 487)
10 Sets the written language
⑪ Switches to digits and special characters
12 Switches to upper-case or lower-case letters

If available, selecting the symbol starts the MBUX voice assistant.

Example: call up the navigation and enter a destination address ( page 37).

Briefly press on a character. The character is entered in input line ①.

Resume character input.

The available editing functions depend on the editing task, the language set and the character level.

Entering alternative characters

▶ Press and hold on a character.
Select the character.
Hide keypad 8.

Ending character input

1 2 3 4 Previous destinations 5 1107 G_ 6 S-BaR Si_ 7 S-BaR Si_ 8 S-R S-Ba_ 9 OK 1.3 Sindelfing_ 10 11

Example: entering characters with handwriting recognition

① Input line
② Shows suggestions during input
3 Accepts search result
④ Search result
⑤ Displays additional suggestions
6 Deletes the last characters entered

Pressing and holding deletes the entry

⑦ Enters a space

8 Switches to keypad entry

9 Accepts an entry

10 Shows suggestions during input

⑪ Writing area

If available, the symbol allows you to change to voice input.

When the keyboard is displayed, select 📄.
Write the character with one finger on the touchscreen. The letters can be written next to each other or above each other. The character is entered in input line ①. Suggestions are shown in ⑩.
Select one of the suggestions.
If available, display additional suggestions with < or >.
To end character entry: press briefly on ↗.

Setting the keyboard and handwriting recognition for character entry

Requirements:

- The read-aloud function is available for the selected system language.

Multimedia system:

Settings System

▶ Keyboards and handwriting

Setting the keyboard language

▶ Select Keyboard languages.

Select one or more keyboard languages.

Setting the writing speed

▶ Select Handwriting recognition.

▶ Select an option, e.g. Medium.

Activating the read-aloud function

▶ Select Handwriting recognition.

Activate ☐ Read out. The letter that your write on the touchscreen is read aloud.

Activating handwriting recognition on the keyboard

▶ Select Handwriting recognition.

Activate Handwriting recognition. You can write characters directly on the keyboard.

Deleting the user dictionary

The user dictionary learns from your inputs and offers suggestions during character input. You can reset the user dictionary.

▶ Select Reset my dictionary.

Select Yes.

System settings

Display

Configuring display settings

Multimedia system:

→ Settings ▶ System ▶ Display

Adjusting the brightness

Select Display brightness.

Vehicles with a driver's display and media display: adjust the display brightness of the driver's display or media display.

Time and date

Setting the time zone

Multimedia system:

→ Settings ▶ System

Time and date

Select Time zone.

The list of countries is displayed.

If there are several time zones available in a country, these will be shown after the country is selected.

Select a country and, if required, a time zone. The time zone set is displayed after Time zone.

or

Select the Automatic time zone entry from the country list.

The time zone will be set automatically according to the vehicle location.

① The Automatic time zone option is available for vehicles with satellite reception.

Setting the time and date format Multimedia system:

→ Settings ▶ System

▶ Time and date ▶ Set format

▶ Select a time and date format.

Setting the time and date manually

Requirements:

• The vehicle does not have satellite reception.

Multimedia system:

→ Settings ▶ System

Time and date

Setting the time

Select Set time.

Set a time.

Press OK to confirm.

Setting the date

Select Set date.

Select a date.

Press OK to confirm.

On vehicles with satellite reception, the time and date settings are determined automatically based on the vehicle location and cannot be set manually.

Adjusting the time

Select Adjust time.

Set a value.

▶ Press OK to confirm.

The function is only available in vehicles with satellite reception.

Switching voice amplification on/off (vehicles with long wheelbase)

Requirements:

- Your vehicle is equipped with the Burmester® 3D surround sound system or the Burmester® high-end 4D surround sound system.

• The ignition is switched on.

• The doors, side windows and the panoramic sliding sunroof are closed.
• At least one seat belt is fastened on the rear bench seat.

Multimedia system:

→ Settings ▶ System ▶ Audio ▶ Voice amplification volume

Voice amplification supports communication between the driver/front passenger with vehicle occupants in the rear passenger compartment. When voice amplification is activated, the signals picked up by the microphone are amplified depending upon vehicle noise levels and played back over the speakers in the rear area of the vehicle. In order to improve speech intelligibility and maintain the naturalness of speech an automatic adjustment occurs based on speaker volume and ambient noise.

▶ Switch voice amplification on or off.

Setting the intensity of the voice amplification

Set the desired intensity on the control. Depending on the intensity set, voice amplification is increased or reduced.

Vehicle position

■ Switching transmission of the vehicle position on or off

Requirements:

• A Mercedes me user account is available.
- At least one service is activated in the Mercedes me user account which has access to the transmitted position data.

The function is country-dependent. For more information, consult a Mercedes-Benz service centre.

Multimedia system:

→ Settings → System Data protection

Activate or deactivate theTransmit veh. position function.
① Alternatively, you can also switch the function on or off in the status line via 📄.

Setting permissions

Multimedia system:

→ Settings ▶ System ▶ Data protection ▶ Permissions

In the Permissions menu, you can set access authorisations for various data points (such as microphone, camera) used in an application. You can change permissions that have already been granted here. You can set permissions either for individual data points or for certain applications or websites.

Select Requests or Apps/websites.
Make the required settings for the permissions.

Bluetooth®

Information about Bluetooth®

Bluetooth ^® technology is a standard for short-range wireless data transfer up to approximately 10 m.

You can use Bluetooth ^® to connect your mobile phone to the multimedia system and use the following functions, for example:

• Hands-free system with access to the following options:
• Contacts (→ page 558)
  Call lists (→ page 560)
• Text messages (→ page 561)
  • Internet connection (→ page 586)

Bluetooth ^® is a registered trademark of Bluetooth Special Interest Group (SIG) Inc.

i Internet connection via Bluetooth® is not available in all countries.

Activating/deactivating Bluetooth® Multimedia system:

→ Settings ▶ System ▶ Internet and Bluetooth

▶ Activate or deactivate Bluetooth.

Near Field Communication (NFC)

Information on Near Field Communication (NFC)

NFC enables short-range wireless data transfer or connection of a mobile phone with the multimedia system.

Further information can be found at: https://www.mercedes-benz-mobile.com/

■ Switching near-field communication on or off Multimedia system:

→ ▶ Settings ▶ System ▶ Internet and Bluetooth

▶ Activate or deactivate NFC.

i Further information on connecting a mobile phone via the NFC interface ( page 555).

Wi-Fi

Wi-Fi connection overview

You can use Wi-Fi to set up a connection to the Internet or to external network devices.

The availability of the function is dependent on the country.

Generally, two types of Wi-Fi connection are available:

- Using the multimedia system as a Wi-Fi hotspot ( page 492) The vehicle's multimedia system serves as a Wi-Fi hotspot for mobile communication devices, such as smartphones or tablet PCs, for example.

- Using a mobile communication device as a Wi-Fi hotspot (tethering) (→ page 588) An external Wi-Fi hotspot is accessed for the Internet connection of the vehicle's multimedia system.

Switching Wi-Fi on or off

Multimedia system:

→ Settings ▶ System

▶ Internet and Bluetooth

Select Wi-Fi. The controller is to the right: Wi-Fi is switched on.

When Wi-Fi is switched on, you can connect the multimedia system with external hotspots or make it available as a hotspot for external devices.

When Wi-Fi is switched off, it is not possible to establish a hotspot connection.

When Wi-Fi is switched off, no connection can be established with the MBUX rear tablet.

The availability of the function is dependent on the country.

Using the multimedia system as a Wi-Fi hotspot

Requirements:

- The device to be connected supports at least one of the types of connection described. The connection types shown depend on the device to be connected. The function must be supported by the multimedia system and by the device to be connected. The type of connection must be selected on the multimedia system and on the device to be connected.

The data volume of the vehicle or an already connected tethering device is used for the data connection.

Vehicle data volumes: depending on the vehicle equipment, you can purchase a data package directly from a mobile phone network provider via the Mercedes me Store. To be able to use the data package, you conclude a separate contract with a mobile phone network provider via the Mercedes me Store, which can be terminated at any time and for which there are no costs. This contract is a prerequisite for using the services from the previously purchased package. The availability of this option is dependent on the country. If the data package option is not available or can be upgraded, you can purchase data volume directly from the mobile phone network provider for a fee.

Some functions may first need to be activated on the device being connected. More detailed information can be found in the manufacturer's operating instructions.
The use of the vehicle data tariff by external devices is not available in all countries.

Multimedia system:

→ Settings ▶ System

▶ Internet and Bluetooth

Select MBUX hotspot.
Select one of the following connection options.

Connecting using a QR code

Requirement: an app for scanning the QR code is installed on the device being connected.

Alternatively: the device being connected has an integrated QR code scanner (see manufacturer's operating instructions).

Scan the QR code shown. The Wi-Fi connection is established.

Connecting using NFC

▶ Activate NFC on the device to be connected.
When the NFC symbol is displayed in the MBUX hotspot menu, hold the device to be connected to the NFC interface.
Follow the instructions on the device. The Wi-Fi connection is established.

Connecting using a security key

Select the vehicle from the device to be connected. The vehicle is displayed with the MBUX XXXXX network name.
Enter the security key which is shown in the media display on the device to be connected.
Confirm the entry.

Generating a new security key

▶ Select the Generate new security key option in the MBUX hotspot menu.
Confirm the prompt with Yes. A new security key is generated.

A connection will be established with the newly created security key.

When a new security key is generated, all existing Wi-Fi connections are then disconnected. If the Wi-Fi connections are being re-established, the new security key must be entered.

Switching the child safety lock for the MBUX rear tablet on/off

Multimedia system:

→ Settings ▶ System
Displays & display messages

In vehicles with front passenger display or rear displays, the child safety lock for the MBUX rear tablet can be switched on or off via the Control Center. Further information on the Control Center.

Select MBUX rear tablet.

Select Lock.

: the lock is active. The MBUX rear tablet is locked and cannot be operated.

: the lock is deactivated. The MBUX rear tablet is unlocked and can be operated.

System language

Notes on the system language

This function allows you to determine the language for the menu displays and the navigation announcements. The selected language affects

the characters available for entry. The navigation announcements are not available in all languages. If a language is not available, the navigation announcements will be in English.

Setting the language

Multimedia system:

Settings System
Language

Setting the system language

A list of the available system languages is shown.

Select a language.
The system language is switched to the selected language.

Setting the distance unit

Multimedia system:

Settings ▶ System ▶ Displays

① This function is not available in all countries.

Select Units.

Select a unit for the distance.

Settings ▶ System ▶ Displays This function is not available in all countries. Select Units. Select a unit for the distance.

For an additional display in the driver's display of the instrument cluster, switch Additional speedometer on.

Activating/deactivating system PIN protection

Multimedia system:

Settings ▶ System Data protection ▶ PIN protection

Setting the system PIN

Select Set PIN.
Enter a four-digit system PIN.
Enter the four-digit system PIN again. If both system PINs match, then the system PIN protection is active.

Changing the system PIN

▶ Select Change settings.
Enter the current system PIN.
Select Change PIN.
Set a new system PIN.

Activating system PIN protection for software updates

▶ Select Protect software updates.
▶ Activate or deactivate the function.

Configuring suggestions

Multimedia system:

Settings System
Suggestions
Select
Switch the options on or off individually. If an option is switched on and sufficient data has been gathered, personalised suggestions based on your user behaviour will be offered to you. These are, for example, navigation destinations visited, phone numbers dialled as well as suggestions based on your music preferences.

Navigation

When Allow destination suggestions is switched on, the vehicle makes suggestions based on your visited navigation destinations.

If Activate commuter route is switched on, the navigation automatically detects that the vehicle is on a commuter route.

Calls & messages

Suggestions are offered for numbers dialled and messages sent.

Comfort

The vehicle makes suggestions based on the use of your comfort functions, e.g. which massage programme should be started at what time.

Entertainment

Suggestions are offered for the currently played media source. Suggestions are also made for online digital services, e.g. Spotify, TuneIn Radio and streaming services, and for categories, e.g. genre, artist and mood.

Vehicle

The suggestions for vehicle functions are displayed, e.g. for Parking Assist PARKTRONIC.

Online voice services

The suggestions are made available online based on your voice input and are offered on the zero layer.

① The suggestions offered depend on the equipment.

Deleting collected suggestions

Multimedia system:

Settings System
Suggestions
Select
Select Yes.
The suggestions are reset.

Software update

Information on software updates

Software updates keep your vehicle and the related systems up-to-date and prevent security flaws.

Software updates are available online for vehicle components such as control units, convenience systems, locking and safety systems, driver assistance systems, suspension and drive systems as

well as for the MBUX multimedia system. Software updates are available via the communication module or a Wi-Fi connection to an external hotspot.

The navigation maps are also updated via updates from external storage media (e.g. USB flash drive). Install available software updates regularly. Otherwise the security of your MBUX multimedia system and individual vehicle components cannot be ensured.

① Software updates can be protected with a system PIN. Further information about the system PIN ( page 494).

Further information about software updates can be found at https://me.secure.mercedes-benz.com.

Carrying out software updates

Requirements:

For software updates via the communication module and Wi-Fi:

- Your vehicle is linked to a Mercedes me user account (→ page 578).

• Software updates without Mercedes me user account: The Allow software updates option is activated in the Software update menu.
• For software updates via the communication module: an Internet connection exists via the communication module ( page 586).
• For software updates via Wi-Fi: a connection to an external Wi-Fi hotspot exists (→ page 588).
  Depending on the software update, this is started via the communication module, Wi-Fi or external storage medium.
  Online software updates cannot be performed via external Wi-Fi hotspots that are encrypted via TKIP.
  If the Wi-Fi hotspot requires logging in via the browser, once the connection is successfully established the browser will open in order to start the update. Follow the instructions in the browser in order to start the download.

Multimedia system:

Settings System

Software update

Starting a map update from an external storage medium

Connect the storage medium with the vehicle via a media interface. A message about an available map update appears on the media display.
Select the message.
Select Start. The map update is started.

Starting the software update via the communication module

If the Automatic online update option is active, available software updates are downloaded and installed automatically. Activate the option in order to always keep your vehicle up-to-date and avoid security flaws.

Select Automatic online update. The software update is downloaded and installed automatically.

If the option is deactivated, you will be informed of new software updates once. The updates are available for downloading for a limited period of time.

Select an update from the list of available updates.
Start the update. The software update is downloaded and installed automatically.

Starting a software update via Wi-Fi

Some software updates require an additional connection to a Wi-Fi hotspot. The connection to an external hotspot can be established when the software update is started.

Select an update from the list of available updates.
Start the update.
Establish the connection to a Wi-Fi hotspot. The update is downloaded and installed automatically.

For software updates requiring a safe vehicle status: when the last installation step is reached, a message appears on the media display after the

vehicle is switched off. Follow the step-by-step instructions on the media display to complete the installation.

There are software updates that can only be installed when the vehicle is safely parked, there are no more people in the vehicle and the vehicle is locked.

Installing software updates

Software updates are installed automatically after they are downloaded. As soon as the software update has been completed, a message appears on the media display. It may be necessary to restart the MBUX multimedia system.

Software updates are installed automatically after they are downloaded. As soon as the software update has been completed, a message appears on the media display. It may be necessary to restart the MBUX multimedia system.

Some software updates require a safe vehicle status for the installation to be completed. They can only be carried out in a safely parked vehicle with the vehicle switched off. If this is necessary, a message appears on the media display after the vehicle is switched off.

▶ Follow the instructions on the media display.

For some software updates, you can set a time for installation. The installation is carried out automatically at the scheduled time. You do not need to be in the vehicle during installation. Note that the planned installation is cancelled as soon as the vehicle door is opened.

If an installation is available where you can set the time, a message appears on the media display after the vehicle is switched off.

▶ Follow the instructions on the media display.

The vehicle cannot be used while these software updates are being installed. Make sure that no persons or animals are in the path of your vehicle. Events stored in the vehicle's control units can be overwritten.

Availability of the driver's and media display During the installation of software updates, it is not possible to use the vehicle, driver's display and media display. You may receive the following display message when an installation is running:

Four-panel image showing car and battery icons with warning labels, likely representing safety or monitoring concepts.

The display message does not appear every time a software update is installed.

In rare cases, an error can occur during the installation. The multimedia system automatically attempts to restore the previous version.

If it is not possible to restore the previous version, the display message shown above appears every time the vehicle is started.

Failure of the driver's display:

If the driver's display fails or there is a malfunction, you may not recognise limitations in the functions of systems relevant to safety or the speed display, for example. The operating safety of the vehicle may be impaired. Drive on carefully

and have the vehicle checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately ( page 848).

Further information about software updates can be found at https://me.secure.mercedes-benz.com

Failure of the media display:

If the media display fails or the display message shown above is shown continuously, several systems such as the reversing camera, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC or climate control are no longer available. Drive on carefully and consult a specialist workshop as soon as possible.

Resetting the multimedia system (reset function)

WARNING Risk of accident due to failure of central display functions

While the multimedia system is reset, its functions, such as the reversing camera, are not available.

▶ Only reset the multimedia system when the vehicle is stationary.

Requirements:

• The vehicle is switched on.
- Some settings can only be reset when the vehicle is stationary.

Multimedia system:

When resetting the system, personal data and settings are deleted, for example:

• Connected devices
• Individual user profiles
• Biometric data
• Vehicles with rear telephony: handset connection

The data used and saved in the multimedia system by the driver assistance systems is deleted.
① Vehicles with rear telephony: The handset must be in the cradle while the system is reset.

Select Reset. A query appears asking if the system should really be reset.
Select Yes. The multimedia system is reset to the factory settings. The multimedia system is restarted after the system reset.
Due to data protection, as well as the function of individual driving systems and driving safety systems, it is a requirement to carry out a complete system reset before selling the vehicle or transferring it to a third party, or after use as a hire car.

AMG TRACK PACE

Function of AMG TRACK PACE

(i) This function is an on-demand feature ( page 89).

With AMG TRACK PACE, the driving characteristics on race tracks can be analysed and optimised. You can drive previously saved race tracks (e.g. Hockenheimring), or record and save new tracks. The driven lap times are stored for every

track. These can be analysed and compared to other lap times to achieve the best possible race results. Additionally, acceleration and braking procedures can be measured and stored.

Note: Use AMG TRACK PACE only on closed-off routes outside the public traffic area. Adapt your driving style to your personal performance and environmental conditions. As the driver, you are solely responsible for driving your vehicle. Park your vehicle safely before operating the application.

Setting Track Race

Multimedia system: → TRACK PACE ▶ Track Race

Recording a new track

Select New track.
Select ▶ Start Record. at the desired starting point. The track recording starts at this point.

During track recording, sectors can be set to divide up the track.

F167 0009 02

Select Set Sector.
Select ■ Stop Recording to end track recording or cross the starting line again.
▶ Confirm the prompt with Yes.
Select the weather.
The temperature is determined automatically.
Enter a name.
Press OK to confirm. The track is saved under the name entered.

Searching by track name

Select Search.

Enter the track name. Tracks with the searched name are displayed.

Measuring time on a saved track

Select All tracks.

Select the desired track.

Select

Select Start timing if you are already at the starting line.

or

Select Navigate to for navigation to the starting line.
Timing begins automatically when the starting line has been crossed.
When AR is selected, the track display can be switched to AR. In addition, it is possible to switch to the telemetry display by selecting
Select Stop timekeeping to end timekeeping.
▶ Confirm the prompt with OK.
▶ Select the weather.
Select Yes to save the times driven for this track.

Showing readings during Track Race

The following readings can be shown:

• Tyre temperature
• Miniature map
• Sector overview
• Engine data

• G-force display

• Lap overview
  Select Start timing.
  Select
  ▶ Pull the desired display from the grid on the left or right edge of the media display. The readings are shown during the Track Race.

By selecting ☒ on the active display, you can deactivate this.

Displaying the analysis

Select All tracks. An overview of all the driven tracks appears.
Select a track.
Select a session. The following data are displayed:

• Lap and sector times
  • Average and top speed
• Driver
• Vehicle
• Date

- Weather

Select Add recording to use a different session as a reference value.
Select → to return to the overview.
Select Diagram.
Set the desired parameters. The analysis is displayed.

Hockenheiming GP 1 Rundenveriten Diagramm 2 3 4 5

① Lap overview

2 Parameter overview

3 Editing parameters

4 Deleting parameters

5 Adding new parameters

The following values can be set for the parameters, for example:

- speed

• Longitudinal/lateral acceleration
- Steering angle
- Engine speed
• Engine oil/tyre temperature

Based on the analysis, you can check and optimise the driving behaviour for any position on the track.

Exporting tracks (USB)

Select Tracks. An overview of all stored tracks appears.
Select the desired track.
Select options ••• for the desired track.
Select Export track to.... The selected track can be exported to a USB storage device connected to the vehicle.

Editing tracks and recordings

Select Tracks.
▶ Select the desired track.
Select options ●●● for the desired track.
▶ Select Rename or Delete.

or

Select a track.
▶ Highlight the desired recording.
Select options.
Select Exporting to... or Delete.

Setting Drag Race

Multimedia system:

→ TRACK PACE ▶ Drag Race

Measuring acceleration

Select Drag race options.
Select Acceleration.
Set a starting speed or select Automatic. Measurement begins as soon as the specified starting speed has been reached.
Set a target speed. Measurement stops as soon as the specified target speed has been reached.
Start off and begin the measurement. Measurement begins when the vehicle accelerates.

Measurement can be stopped early by interrupting the acceleration procedure.

Quarter mile race

Select Drag race options.
Select Quarter-mile.
Set a target distance. Measurement stops as soon as the specified target distance has been reached.
Start off and begin the measurement. Measurement begins when the vehicle accelerates. Timing runs until the target distance or a maximum of one mile has been travelled.

Measurement can be stopped early by interrupting the acceleration procedure.

Measuring braking

Drag Race options
Select Braking.
Set a starting speed or select Automatic.
▶ Start off and begin the measurement.

Brake to a stop. Measurement is incremental, in steps of 10 km/h to a stop. If the braking procedure is started e.g. at a speed of 157 km/h, measurement starts as soon as 150 km/h has been reached

Storing and calling up measured values If measurement is completed or cancelled, a prompt appears asking whether the measurement should be saved.

▶ Confirm the prompt with OK to save.

Calling up saved measurements

Select History.
▶ Select Acceleration, Quarter-mile or Braking.
Select a measurement. The desired measurement is displayed in detail.

or

▶ Delete a measurement.

Calling up the telemetry display

Multimedia system:

→ TRACK PACE ▶ Telemetry

The telemetry display shows current vehicle data as a digital value and as a diagram. Up to four parameters can be selected to be shown on the display.

For example:

• Engine speed
• Wheel angle
• speed
• Steering angle

Set the desired parameters.

Set the time. The set parameters are evaluated in the diagram for the selected time.

Configuring AMG TRACK PACE

Requirements

To connect a mobile device to the TRACK PACE app:

• The TRACK PACE app is installed on the mobile end device.
• The mobile end device is connected to the multimedia system via Wi-Fi ( page 492).

Multimedia system:

Connect mobile device via the TRACK PACE app The TRACK PACE app makes it possible to record videos and to synchronise them with stored tracks.

Select TRACK PACE App.
▶ Select Authorise new device.
Start the TRACK PACE app on the device to be connected.
▶ Select Continue and confirm the authorisation prompt. A four-digit code is shown on the media display.
Enter the code on the smartphone. The device is authorised.

De-authorising the mobile device

Select TRACK PACE App.

Select a device.

Confirm the prompt with Yes. The device is de-authorised.

Setting the TRACK PACE display on the head-up display and driver's display

Select IC and HUD contents.

Activate or deactivate the desired contents. The contents on the head-up display and the driver's display are adapted.

For further information on the Head-up Display ( page 452).

(i) Further information about the driver's display ( page 441).

Setting acoustic feedback

Select Acoustic feedback. A scale with values from 0 to 10 is shown.
Select a setting.

Displaying statistics

Select TRACK PACE statistics. Statistics on the current user profile are displayed.
The following data are displayed:
- Driving time
- Track driven
- Recorded tracks
- Recorded Track Races
- Laps recorded
- Recorded Drag Races
• Maximum design speed

Activating the ambient light

If this function is active, the vehicle interior is lit in red or green depending on delta time.

Select Ambient light.

▶ Activate or deactivate the function.

Adjusting the dashcam

If the vehicle is equipped with a dashcam, it can be used in AMG TRACK PACE.

Select Dashcam.
Select Track Race or Drag Race and activate Activate recording.
You can set which overlay is to be used in the recorded video under Video overlay contents.

Plug-in hybrid settings

Configuring the charging settings

Multimedia system:

Hybrid Charging

Setting the charging program

▶ Select Home, Work or Standard.

Unlocking the charging cable (mode 3 or 4)

When the function is active, the charging cable is unlocked when the maximum charge level is reached.

▶ Select Home or Work.

▶ Activate or deactivate Unlock charging cable.

Activating or deactivating location-based charging

Select Charging program, home or Charging program, work.
Activate or deactivate Select based on location.

When the function is activated, the vehicle's current position is saved as one of the selected options. When the address is reached again, a brief query appears as to whether the respective charging program should be selected.

Activating or deactivating rapid charging

Activate or deactivate the Quick charge function.

The Quick charge function increases the maximum possible charging capacity at charging stations up to 60 kW in order to charge the vehicle's high-voltage battery faster. After the charging process is complete, the charging capacity in the "Standard" charging program is again limited to 20 kW in order to protect the high-voltage battery.

Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the Quick charge function is not available for Mercedes-AMG vehicles.

Setting the departure time

The set departure times are used for the pre-entry climate control of the vehicle.

▶ Select Next departure time.

The following charging times can be selected:

• individual charging times

- a Week profile

Setting an individual departure time

Select Add new time and set the time.

or

Select ☐ and adapt an existing departure time.

Setting the repeat days

▶ Select Add new time and set the time.

Mark the relevant weekdays for which the departure time will apply and confirm with OK.

or

Select ☐ and edit existing repeat days.

Setting the maximum charge level

▶ Select Maximum charge state.
Set the desired percentage. The high-voltage battery is charged up to the set percentage as a maximum.
The percentage can be set in increments of 10%.
As soon as the full charge level is reached, a notification is shown in the media display that the charging process is completed and the journey may be continued.

Functions of the energy flow display

The active components of the hybrid system are highlighted on the energy flow display. The energy flow between the individual components is shown in colour.

The energy flow is shown in different colours depending on the operating status:

• White: constant energy flow
• Red: high energy flow (boost effect)

- Green: low-emission energy flow in the case of recuperation, electric mode and charging the high-voltage battery

Calling up the energy flow display

Multimedia system:

Select Energy flow.

The energy flow in the vehicle will be displayed.

Information on the status of the hybrid system and the current state of charge of the high-voltage battery will be displayed in addition to the energy flow.

Off-road menu

Off-road menu overview in the multimedia system

The Off-road menu provides an overview of the most important, relevant data for off-road driving. The content is displayed in different tiles that can be changed with directional arrows or swipes. In addition, this menu contains buttons for quick-

F167 0009 02

access to certain vehicle functions that are relevant to off-road operation.

Displayed data are, for example:

• Artificial horizon
• Compass
• Altitude
  • Steering angle of the front and rear wheels
• Torque and power
  • Tyre pressure and temperature
• Transparent bonnet

Further settings for Offroad Assist and Offroad Score can be made in the Offroad menu.

i Further information on Offroad Assist(→ page 407).
i Further information on Offroad Score.

Setting the off-road menu in the multimedia system

Multimedia system:

→ Offroad Cockpit

Setting displays in the central display

Press ◀, ▶ or on the display itself to jump to the next display.

Quick-access: activating/deactivating Parking Assist PARKTRONIC

Press P _yy to switch the function on or off.

i Further information on Parking Assist PARKTRONIC ( page 416).

Quick-access: activating/deactivating ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)

Press ☐ to switch the function on or off.

① Further information on ESP ( page 346).

Quick-access: activating or deactivating manual gear changing

Press M to switch the function on or off.

(i) Additional information on manual shifting ( page 305).

Quick-access: activating or deactivating DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation)

Press ☐ to switch the function on or off.

i Further information on DSR ( page 368).

Fit & Healthy

Setting ENERGIZING seat kinetics

Requirements

(i) These functions are available only for fully electric seats with a memory function.

Multimedia system:

→ ▶ Comfort ▶ Seat

Select Seat kinetics.

ENERGIZING seat kinetics can support back health by changing the seat position during a journey. This involves repeatedly stressing and relieving the muscles and joints by means of minor movements of the cushion and backrest.

Starting seat kinetics

Select ▶ for the desired seat. The programme will run for the set duration.

Configuring seat kinetics

Select ☐ for the desired seat.
Select Backrest, Backrest & seat surface or Seat surface.
Select the desired duration for the selected seat.

Vehicles with a multicontour seat:

In addition to the seat backrest and seat cushion, the lumbar region can be activated for the function.

▶ Activate or deactivate Including lumbar.

ENERGIZING COMFORT

Overview of ENERGIZING COMFORT programmes

You can watch an animation on this topic via the following link:

Note that the available programmes and the associated functions depend on your vehicle equipment. Depending on your equipment, fewer functions may be available.

Programme overview

• Refresh: Can have a refreshing effect with short, cool puffs of air. The seat is ventilated, the vehicle interior is illuminated with cool colours and the programme is completed with appropriate sound.
• Warmth: Can increase the comfort level for the vehicle occupants. Seat, surface and steering wheel heating provide soothing warmth. The programme is completed with unobtrusive sound and warm colours.
• Vitality: Can counteract diminishing attentiveness in monotonous driving situations. The activating stimulation of the vehicle occupants is carried out with invigorating sound, activating light and a vitalising movement.
• Joy: Can promote a positive mood in the vehicle occupants as well as mental regeneration. This results from the activation of a massage

programme, friendly sound and illumination with suitable colours.

• Well-being: Can help relax the vehicle occupants. This is achieved through relaxing movement, friendly light and calming sound.
• Forest Glade: Can have a calming and soothing effect on the vehicle occupants thanks to the acoustics of the forest. The ambience is supported by a suitable animation, colours and sound.
• Sounds of the Sea: Can contribute to calming the vehicle occupants. The acoustics of the sound of waves and seagulls in combination with other vehicle functions create a relaxing seashore atmosphere.
• Summer Rain: Can help relax the vehicle occupants. The relaxing effect of a rain shower can be experienced via acoustics and other vehicle functions inside the vehicle.
• Power Nap: The programme consists of three phases.

• Falling asleep phase: here relaxing music is played and the air is cleaned by ionisation.

• Sleep phase: the active functions are deactivated or restricted as much as possible.

• Waking phase: slightly stimulating music is played, and the air is purified with ionisation. Additionally, functions such as fragrancing, seat ventilation and massage are activated.
• Training: Can counteract the onset of muscle tension, limbs falling asleep or stress with targeted relaxation or stimulation exercises. The exercises are demonstrated in short videos. The training consists of audio content and a brief animation. The audio content is conceived so that it can also be played back when you are driving. Animations are only shown when the vehicle is stationary. Always observe the traffic conditions if you are training when driving.
• Tips: The system gives auditory tips for possible exercises or measures for improving the comfort level of the vehicle occupants. By selecting the desired area of the body you can

receive targeted tips for the comfort level of this area.

Most programs that have been started for one seat can also be transferred simultaneously to another seat.

Starting the ENERGIZING COMFORT programme

A WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when using the ENERGIZING COMFORT programme Power Nap

The following systems may be automatically moved when using the ENERGIZING COM-FORT programme Power Nap:

• Side windows
• Sliding sunroof
• Roller sunblinds

As a result you or other vehicle occupants may become entrapped.

Make sure that there is sufficient space behind the front seats.

Make sure that no body parts are in the area of movement.

Requirements

• The vehicle is switched on.

For the start of Power Nap:

• Only the power supply is on.
• The doors are closed.
• The vehicle is secured against rolling away.
- The state of charge of the high-voltage battery is sufficient for the use of the auxiliary climate control.

Multimedia system:

→ ▶ Comfort ▶ ENERGIZING COMFORT

Starting and stopping a programme

Select a programme.
Select ▶ for the desired seat.
Select □ to stop the program.

If, during an active programme, a function requirement is no longer met, a correspond-

F167 0009 02

ing message appears. The active programme is cancelled.

Configuring the programme

Select a programme.
Select Settings.
Switch the functions included in the programme on or off.

Setting the duration

Select a programme.
Select Settings.
▶ Select the desired duration.

Starting a Power Nap

Select Power Nap.
Select ▶ for the desired seat.

When the vehicle is stationary, the following actions are carried out when Power Nap is started:

• The roller sunblinds are extended.
• The doors are locked.
• The windows and sliding sunroof are closed.

• The parking brake is applied.
Select ■ to stop the program.
The programme is available for the rear seats while the vehicle is in motion. The above-mentioned functions may only have limited availability.

ENERGIZING COACH

Function of the ENERGIZING COACH

Requirements:

• The ENERGIZING COACH service is activated in the Mercedes me portal or the Mercedes me App.
• The Mercedes me ENERGIZING App is installed on the mobile phone to use the service.

With ENERGIZING COACH you can evaluate the driving and driver situation. Depending on the situation, it offers recommendations for the start of an appropriate ENERGIZING COMFORT programme.

The following programmes could be suggested:

• Vitality
  As an activating programme in monotonous driving situations or for long journey times, for example
  Information on the vitality programme see ( page 506).

- Joy

As a balancing programme in demanding driving situations Information on the Joy programme see ( page 506).

- Refresh

As a refreshing programme when temperatures rise

Information on the Refresh programme; see ( page 506).

- Warmth

As a warming programme when temperatures drop

Information on the Warmth programme; see ( page 506).

By connecting a Garmin fitness tracker, for example the Garmin vivoactive ^® 3, additional information can be entered into the evaluation for the recommendation of an ENERGIZING COMFORT programme. The additional information includes the stress level, that is calculated by the fitness tracker. The stress level is based primarily on the pulse rate.

Requirements for the integration of additional information via a Garmin fitness tracker:

• Your fitness tracker is connected with your Garmin account.
• Your Garmin account is connected with your Mercedes me user account.

If you wear your Garmin fitness tracker at night also, the sleep data is included in the evaluation of the ENERGIZING COACH.

Requirement for the integration of the sleep data:

- The Garmin fitness tracker is synchronised with the Garmin account before the beginning of the journey.

Calling up the ENERGIZING COACH display

Requirements:

• The fitness tracker is connected with your Garmin account.
• Your Garmin account is connected with your Mercedes me user account in the Mercedes me ENERGIZING App.
• The mobile phone is connected to the multi-media system ( page 552).
• You are logged in with your Mercedes me profile both in the vehicle and in the Mercedes me ENERGIZING App.

Multimedia system:

→ Apps ➤ ENERGIZING COACH

Your current pulse as well as an evaluation of your pulse for the last 30 minutes driving time are shown.

A corresponding fault message is shown if there is no mobile phone connected or no pulse can be sent to the system for an extended period.

① Only pulse values which fall into the range from 30 - 140 (possibly also 150) bpm will be

shown on the media display. The pulse values have no medical validity but are only informative in nature and are therefore also not required to be accurate.

Navigation and traffic

Switching navigation on

Multimedia system:

Navigation

Alternatively, switch on the MBUX voice assistant ( page 457).
Switches to navigation. The map appears.

Navigation overview

Digital map

Screenshot of a mobile app interface with numbered annotations pointing to location markers and navigation controls

Navigation module (reduced view) Route guidance active:

The navigation module shows the information relevant to the route in the zoomed-out view, e.g. the destination or a traffic delay

Ends the current route guidance

Tapping opens the navigation module and displays the route overview ( page 524)

② Map orientation Ⓔ and set map type
③ Calls up the telephone menu
4 Current vehicle position (vehicle symbol or arrow)
⑤ Calls up entertainment applications
6 Elevation and map scale ( page 541)
⑦ Navigation window shows the next driving manoeuvre (zoomed out view) or the route monitor (zoomed in view)

Route guidance active: route monitor shows, e.g. route sections, upcoming driving manoeuvres with lane recommendations, destination, traffic delays, 3D images at motor-way exits, online content

Pressing ② several times changes the map orientation in this order:

• 2D and to the north
  • 2D and direction of travel
  • 3D and direction of travel
• Map with complete route

If the map is moved, the map switches between 3D direction of travel and 2D north orientation.
The following map types ② are available:

- Daytime display

- Night-time display

- Satellite map

If you notice a problem with the digital map you can report this under https://mapfeedback.here.com/#/report.

Destination entry

Notes on destination entry

WARNING Risk of distraction from operating integrated communication equipment while the vehicle is in motion

If you operate communication equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you could be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle.

Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits.
If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary.

You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the multimedia system.

Entering a POI or address

Requirements

• For the online search:

• There is an Internet connection.
• Mercedes me connect is available.
• You have set up a user account in the Mercedes me Portal.
• The vehicle is connected with the user account and you have accepted the terms of use.
• Further information can be found at: https://www.mercedes.me

The service is available and has been activated.

① If Online Search is not available, the search is performed using the data of the digital map.

Multimedia system:

Navigation 1 2 3 4 5 Previous destinations 1061 499 St. Maria 2.0m Sindelfing... St. Bonida 2.7m Boeslino 123 OK 8 9 10 11

Example: entering a POI or address

① Input line with current entry
② Deletes an entry
3 Selects previous destinations
4 Displays and selects additional destination searches

Adopts the search result in the input line and continues the search

6 Search result
⑦ Deletes the last character entered
Hides the keypad
9 Switches to handwriting recognition ( page 487)
Sets the written language
Switches to digits and special characters
12 Switches to upper-case or lower-case letters

If available, selecting the symbol starts the MBUX voice assistant.

Enter a destination. The entries can be made in any order. The search results are displayed in a list.
i Online search results for POIs may contain additional information, for example opening times and ratings. The information is provided by an online map service.

This online function is not available in all countries.

The following entries can be made, for example in

1

- Town, street, house number or street, town

- Postcode

• POI name or POI category, e.g. Restaurants

- Town, POI name

- Contact name

• Geo-coordinates (→ page 515)

- Three-word addresses from what3words ( page 515)

Entering three-word addresses is possible in the online search.

▶

Hide the keyboard with OK

Select the destination in the list. The following menu shows the selected destination with the address information and a corresponding map section.

The menu enables the route to be calculated.

Selecting a destination suggestion

Requirements

• The Allow destination suggestions option is switched on (→ page 495).
• The multimedia system has gathered sufficient data in order to show destination suggestions.

Multimedia system:

▶

Select Suggestions.

or

Select a destination suggestion directly on the Zero Layer. The route is calculated in the following menu.

If Suggestions has been selected, a menu is available via ⋯. The menu offers settings for the suggestions and memory functions.
i Managing destination suggestions ( page 533).

Selecting previous destinations

Multimedia system:

Select Previous destinations.

Select the destination. The following menu enables the route to be calculated.

You can save a destination as a favourite ( page 533).

Selecting a POI

Requirements:

• For use of personal POIs: a USB device is connected with the multimedia system.
• Personal POIs with the GPS Exchange format (.gpx) have been saved in the PersonalPOI folder on the USB device.

Multimedia system:

Select POIs.
Select one of the displayed quick-access categories, e.g. P.

Select the POI. The following menu enables the route to be calculated.

or

Select All categories or Personal POIs (see requirements).

Select the category.

Select the POI. The following menu enables the route to be calculated.

Setting a search filter after selecting a POI category

The preset search position depends on the status of the route guidance:

- If route guidance is not active, In the vicinity is searched.

- If route guidance is active, Along the route is searched.

When the search results are displayed, select Filter.

Select the search position, e.g. In the vicinity.

If a route with intermediate destinations already exists and Near destination has been selected in the search filters, the destination is selected for the search.

or

Select the desired travelling time to the point of interest.

Select Search results.

Configuring categories for quick access

The categories are displayed:

- As symbols after calling up the destination entry via 🔒

• As a list after calling up All categories

In the POI menu, select All categories.

Select ☆ or ★ for a category. Tapping on ☆ adds the category. Tapping on ★ removes the category.

Use → to change back. The new categories are shown after the destination entry is called up the next time.

If all available quick-access positions are full, select the category to be replaced.

Changing the order of quick-access categories

In the POI menu, press and hold a category for quick access.

Tap on the arrows next to the selected category. The arrows for the other categories are greyed out.

Drag the category up or down.

Select

Deleting quick-access categories

In the POI menu, press and hold a category for quick access.

Select ★ for the chosen category.

Select Delete.

Select

Changing categories for personal POIs

Select Personal POIs.

Press on a category as long as is necessary until a menu appears.
▶ Select Change name and enter a name.
▶ Select Change icon and select a symbol.
Select Delete and confirm the prompt with Yes.

Selecting a contact for destination entry

Requirements

• A mobile phone is connected to the multimedia system ( page 552).
• The contacts from the mobile phone have been downloaded.
  • The contact has a navigable address.
• The address data can be located on the digital map.

Multimedia system:

Enter a contact in the entry line.
Select the address. The following menu enables the route to be calculated.

Alternatively, you can enter the name of a contact in the search field after calling up the destination entry.

Entering geo-coordinates

Multimedia system:

Enter the geo-coordinates as latitude and longitude.

Examples of input formats:

• 47°58'11"N 7°57'25"E (degrees, minutes and seconds)
  • 47.969722 7.956944 (decimal degrees)
  Confirm the entry. The following menu enables the route to be calculated.

Entering the destination as a three-word address

Requirements

- An active Internet connection is indicated in the status line on the media display with the symbol.

• The online search is active.

Multimedia system:

Enter the destination as a three-word address from what3words. The entry can be made with spaces between the words instead of dots. The search results are displayed.
Select the destination in the list. The following menu enables the route to be calculated.

The Brandenburg Gate has this language-dependent three-word address:

i Searching for a destination using three-word addresses is not possible in all countries and in all languages.

Alternatively, use the following entry options:

• Entry in the global search ( page 486)
• Voice navigation ( page 457)

Example: during a telephone call you are given a three-word address. After activating the MBUX voice assistant, say one of the following two voice commands:

Three-word addresses from what3words are an alternative addressing system for multilingual georeferencing of global locations with a resolution of three metres. Using this grid, locations on the Earth's surface are included which do not have a building address such as a street and house number, for example.

Three-word addresses are unique, easy to remember and suffice for most routine applications.

You can convert addresses to three-word addresses and back again:

• At the website https://what3words.com
• In the what3words apps

Selecting a destination on the map Multimedia system:

If necessary, move the map ( page 540).
Press and hold on the map. Available destinations are displayed.

or

Tap on a POI symbol. The POI is selected. If there are several POIs at this map position, a list will appear.
Select the destination in the Selected objects list.

The following menu enables the route to be calculated.

Selecting a destination from favourites

Requirements

- Destinations are saved as favourites. Save a previous destination or a destination suggestion as a favourite (→ page 533).

Multimedia system:

Select Favourites.
Select a favourite.
The route is calculated in the following menu.

Addresses for home and work are already set

Select Home or Work.
The following menu enables the route to be calculated.

Addresses for home and work are not yet set

Select Home or Work.
The prompt No "Home" address available. Set address now? appears, for example.
Select Yes.
▶ Search for or select the address.

Select Save.

Deleting favourites

Select ⋯ for a favourite.
Select Delete.

or

Select Delete all.
Confirm the prompt. When all the favourites have been deleted, Add favourite is available, for example.

Selecting received destinations

Requirements

• There is an Internet connection for receiving external destinations.
  • A destination has been sent to the vehicle.
• Destinations have been shared from another seat in the vehicle.

Multimedia system:

The vehicle can receive destinations from services or apps. You will be informed when a destination is received.

▶ Select Received destinations.
Select a destination. The route is calculated in the following menu.
(i) You can save a received destination in favourites (→ page 533).

Deleting received addresses

Delete a destination with ☐.
or
Select Delete all.

Route

Calculating a route

70XXX Stuttgart Routes Lets go! In vicinity 70XXX Stuttgart Germany Favourite Share

Example: detailed display

① Calls up alternative routes
② Calculates the route and starts route guidance
③ Selects a point of interest in the vicinity of the destination
4 Destination address

The detailed display can contain additional entries, such as a three-word address from what3words, online content

If the destination is located in a multi-storey car park, for example, and corresponding data is available, the parking levels are displayed.

After selection of a destination the route is be calculated.

Select one of the options.

Calling up alternative routes

Select Routes.

Select an alternative route ( page 526).

Starting route guidance

Select Let's go!.

Calling up the detailed display with destination address

Pull the bar above ② upwards. Depending on the destination selection and availability, online content, for example ratings and weather information, is shown. If the destination is in a different time zone, a message is displayed.

To share a destination: select Share. This option allows you to scan the displayed QR code.
To save a destination as a favourite: select ★ Favourite and then an option.
To call up an Internet address: if a web address is available, select www.
To call the destination: if a telephone number is available, select Call.

Searching for POIs in the vicinity of the destination shown

Select In the vicinity.
Search using categories, enter a search entry or search for a personal POI ( page 513).

Adding an intermediate destination to the existing route or starting a new route guidance

Select Add.
The selected destination address is set as the next intermediate destination. Route guidance begins.
There are already four intermediate destinations: confirm the prompt with Yes and select

an intermediate destination in the route overview ( page 524), that should be overwritten with the new intermediate destination.

or

Select Replace.

The selected destination address is set as a new destination. Route guidance begins.

If you call up the menu during route guidance, more options are available:

• To change the order of destinations, select Move ( page 525).
• To delete the destination, select Delete (→ page 525).
• To cancel route guidance, select Cancel route guidance.

Paying for the charging process on a route with Mercedes me Charge (plug-in hybrid)

Requirements

- The Mercedes me Charge service is available and subscribed to in the Mercedes me Portal.

• The services "Navigation system with Electric Intelligence", "Display of charging stations" and "Mercedes me Charge" are activated.
• To select a charging station: the Schedule charging stops option is switched on in the multimedia system.
• For authentication at the charging station: after activation in the Mercedes me Portal, you have concluded a charging contract with your payment details with the respective contractual partners.
• For authentication using the app: the Mercedes me App is installed on the external device, e.g. a tablet or smartphone.
• For charging stations without remote access, you have purchased an RFID card for the contracting partner.

This function is not available in all countries.

Multimedia system:

Navigation

i Observe the following information:

- Read the notes on charging the high-voltage battery ( page 316).

• Read the notes on charging the high-voltage battery at the charging station ( page 321) and ( page 322).
• Before selection of a charging station: the data for the charging stations is based on the online content available from the respective third-party provider.
• Observe the local information and conditions.

With the Plug-and-Charge charging function of Mercedes me Charge, you can charge the vehicle at public Plug-and-Charge enabled charging stations. The charging process starts immediately when the charging cable is plugged into the charging station. No further authentication is required. Communication between the vehicle and the charging station takes place directly via the charging cable. This charging function is not available in all countries.

To select a charging station: tap on a symbol on the map for a charging station or on a group of symbols for several charging stations.

If a group of symbols is selected, select the charging station from the list.

The following information is displayed (if available):

• Name of the charging station operator
- Address of the charging station
- Plug with availability and information about charging capacity
- Opening times
• Name of the charging station
- Travel time and distance of the charging station from the vehicle
- Authentication method
- Contact information of the charging station operator
• General costs and charging costs
• Estimated charging costs and your available energy volumes
- Display of available reviews and the ability to review with up to five stars
• Availability prognosis

• Information on green charging
Mercedes-Benz provides high-quality certificates of origin to ensure that an equivalent amount of electricity from renewable sources is fed into the grid for charging processes carried out via Mercedes me Charge.
Calculate the route ( page 517).
If the function is available, the start/stop of the charging process can be selected.
To access a charging station remotely (start/stop): select a charging station in the map menu of the app or the MBUX multimedia system.
▶ Display the details using the widget (programme symbol).
Select Start charging process. The charging process starts. In addition, the payment agreement saved with the third-party provider is authorised.
Remote access is not available for some charging stations. In this case use your RFID card to activate the charging process (if available).

If required, enter the PIN for personalisation.
Confirm the action.
If required, select the connector ID from the list shown. The selected charging cable connector is unlocked.
Start the charging process. The start of the charging process is shown.
Select the Stop charging process display switch in the app. The charging process is ended.
Payment is processed automatically. If data for third-party providers is available, you will receive this information:
• Overview of the charging process
• Estimated cost
There may be differences between the costs listed and the costs billed.

You can watch an animation on this topic via the following link:

Switching low-emission zones for the route on or off

Requirements

• Mercedes me connect is available.
- You have a Mercedes me connect user account and the vehicle is connected with the account.
- The "Traffic Restriction Zones" service is available and activated in the Mercedes me Portal. The service is free of charge for three years after registration.

Multimedia system:

→ ↗ Navigation ↗ ↗ View

Activate Low emission zones. The low emission zones along the route are shown on the digital map and in the route overview. Before you enter a low emission zone, you will be shown a notification in the central display. Plug-in hybrid: the vehicle takes zones with traffic restrictions into account and drives electrically in these zones. These are low

emission zones and in future also zero emission zones.

Route guidance is active:

- When the vehicle enters a low emission zone, it switches to the Electric drive program. Electrical energy is reserved for low emission zones ahead. Thus the vehicle can switch to the Hybrid drive program when it exits a zone.

Route guidance is not active:

- When the vehicle enters a low emission zone, it switches to the Electric drive program.

① The Low emission zones function is switched off:

• No low emission zones are shown on the map.
• Plug-in hybrid: when the vehicle enters a low emission zone, there is no switch to another drive program.

Overview of the Range on Map service (plug-in hybrid)

The function is available under the following conditions:

• The "Range on Map" service, which is subject to a charge, is available and activated in the Mercedes me Portal.
• The Range option is switched on (→ page 544).

The fuel range (purple) and the electric range (white) are shown on the map as a closed line around the current vehicle position.

In the following cases, there is no display on the map:

• The overall range is very large.
• If the fuel level is less than 10%.
- If the electric range of the vehicle is less than 6 km.

Selecting a route type

Multimedia system:

→ ↗ Navigation ↗ ↗ Route

Using trailer mode and online routes

The route is calculated as a fast route with a short journey time.

Trailer mode is available if a trailer has been coupled with the vehicle. If available, you can select online routes.

(i) Trailer mode and online routes are not available in all countries or for all vehicles.

Select Trailer mode
A prompt is shown in the multimedia system.
Confirm the prompt.
The arrival time at the destination takes into account a reduced driving speed with trailer.
To use online routes: switch on the option.

Taking traffic information for the route into account

Select Dynamic route guidance ▷.

Select one of the options.

Explanation of the options:

• Automatic

Traffic reports via Live Traffic Information are taken into account ( page 533).

Live Traffic Information and FM home screen are not available in all countries.

• After asking

A prompt appears when a new route is detected with a shorter journey time based on traffic reports. You can continue to use the current route or use the dynamic route instead ( page 522).

- Off

No traffic reports are taken into account for the route.

Calculating alternative routes

Multimedia system:

Switch on Overview of route after start. Alternative routes are calculated for every route.

■ Accepting a detour recommendation after a prompt

Requirements:

• After asking is switched on ( page 521) in the Dynamic route guidance menu.
- Route guidance is active.
• There are traffic reports for the current route.

If a new route with a shorter driving time is determined, the current and new routes will be shown. If another application is active, a notification is hidden.

▶ Confirm the notification.
To accept the new route: select Accept.
To maintain the current route: select Keep to current route.

Selecting route options

Multimedia system:

▶ Avoid options

Avoiding or using route sections, e.g. motorways or ferries

Activate or deactivate the avoid option. Avoid: the option is activated. The route avoids motorways, for example. Use: the option is deactivated. The route takes motorways into consideration, for example.
The selected route options cannot always be taken into account. Therefore, a route may include a ferry, for instance, even though the Avoid ferries avoid option is enabled. A message then appears and you will hear a corresponding message.

Avoiding or using toll roads

The use of toll roads requires a usage fee (toll).

Select Toll roads ▷.
Activate or deactivate Avoid all. If the option is activated, the route avoids toll roads.

If the option is deactivated, the route takes toll roads into account.

or

Select an option for Payment by cash or card or Electronic billing.

Avoid: the route avoids toll roads with the selected method of payment.

Use: the route takes into account roads that require a toll corresponding with the payment type selected.

Avoiding or using roads requiring a special toll sticker

A vignette allows for the use of a route network for a limited time period.

Select Avoid vignette roads ▶.

▶ Activate or deactivate Avoid all.

or

Switch individual countries on or off in the list. Avoid: the option is activated. The route avoids roads requiring a special toll sticker in the selected countries.

Use: the option is deactivated. The route takes into account roads in the selected country

which require you to pay a time-based fee (vignette).

① These route options are not available in every country.

Avoiding or using areas with low emission zones

The function is available when there is an active internet connection.

Activate or deactivate Area with low emission zones.

Avoid: the option is activated. The route avoids all low emission zones restricted for the vehicle. These are displayed in red on the map.

Use: the option is deactivated. The restricted low emission zones for the vehicle are passed through on the route. A warning is displayed before you drive into a low emission zone.

Avoiding areas

Select Avoid areas ≥ ( page 541).

Selecting notifications for the route

Requirements

• For an audible indication when approaching a personal POI: the USB device contains personal POIs.
• The USB device is connected with the multi-media system.
• The category in which the personal POI belongs is activated.

Multimedia system:

Navigation

Messages & tones

Switching navigation announcements on or off

Activate Reduced messages. If a driving instruction is available for a simple change in direction, you hear a brief announcement, e.g. "turn right in 200 m". The number of driving instructions along the route is minimised.
Activate Detailed messages. If a driving instruction is available and there is a complex driving situation, you hear supple-

mentary information, e.g. "In 200 m turn right and continue to follow the major road". Additional driving instructions are issued for the route, for example on turning major roads.
▶ Activate Announce street names. The name of the street into which the vehicle should turn is announced.
① This option is not available in all countries and languages.

Switching traffic announcements on or off

Activate or deactivate Announce traffic warnings. If available, traffic warnings are announced, e.g. before the end of traffic jams that pose a risk.

Audible indication when approaching a personal POI

▶ Select Personal POIs.
Activate a category. When approaching a personal POI in the selected category an audible indication will be issued.

Displaying a route overview

Requirements:

• A destination is entered.

Multimedia system:

Navigation

1 No delays along your route 2 11.08 | 70176 Stuttgart Levsherrstraße 51 Germany 3 4 5 6 19 pm Other routes

Example: route guidance is active

① Enters an address or POI
Destination and time of arrival beneath that the current distance to the destination and the chequered flag
3 Alternative routes
4 Searches for a parking space

5 Switches traffic information display on or off
6 Makes settings for View, Messages & tones and Route

When route guidance is active, the destination and entered intermediate destinations are shown.

Depending on the route, traffic situation and available data, further information is displayed:

• Name, destination address
- Symbols for intermediate destination and destination
• Phone number (if available)
• Web address (if available)
- Traffic information

The route can include up to four intermediate destinations.

▶ Select one of the options.

Planning routes

Multimedia system:

Navigation

Enter the intermediate destination ( page 37).

After entering the destination and new calculation of the route, the route overview is shown again. The route contains a new intermediate destination.

If there are already four intermediate destinations, delete an intermediate destination ( page 525).

Editing a route with intermediate destinations

Requirements:

- The destination and at least one intermediate destination have been entered.

Multimedia system:

Navigation

Changing the order of the destinations

In the route overview, press and hold on a destination.

Move the destination with ◀ or ▶.

Tap on ▼. The editing mode is ended.

Deleting a destination

In the route overview, press and hold on a destination.

Tap on 📄. The editing mode is ended.

Displaying the route list

Multimedia system:

Navigation

Tap on navigation window ⑦ on the digital map (→ page 510).

13m Tilhagen, Böbingen 17m Tilhagen, Böbingen 26m Stuttgart Munchen 8.8m Stadtfänger 011 1:0W 10:15 30 cm 09:56 1 2 Caten 10x

Example: route list

① Upcoming manoeuvre with turning arrow, distance to manoeuvre, street number, street name

Switches on navigation announcements Switches off navigation announcements Including the following route sections on the route to the destination

② Current vehicle position

The route sections are displayed in the navigation window. The route list is updated during the journey.

Motorway information shows the available service facilities. After selecting symbols, e.g. for car parks, service areas or motorway exits, the POI is adopted as an intermediate destination or destination.

Press the arrow at the bottom of the navigation window briefly.
Swipe up or down.
Select a route section. The map section is displayed.
To return to vehicle position: select Current position.
Selecting an alternative route

Requirements:

• A route has already been created.
- The Overview of route after start option is switched on (→ page 522).

Multimedia system:

Navigation Other routes

Filter 10:33, 12 min, 14 km Start 10:33 18 mm 2

Example: alternative routes

Original route is highlighted
2 Alternative routes with indication of the difference in driving time
In ② a faster route may also be shown that is considerably longer.

The following route information is displayed:

• Driving time

• Time of arrival
  • Distance to the destination

• Avoid options based on the set route options

• Driving time saved or lost compared with the original route
  When the alternative routes have been calculated, display the route in the navigation window by swiping to the right or left.

Changing route type

Select Filter.
Switching the route type on or off.

Avoiding or using route options

Select Filter.
Switch the route options on or off ( page 522).
▶ Confirm the settings with Finished.
To start route guidance to the alternative route: select Start.
To select an alternative route on the map: touch any point on the alternative route. The alternative route is highlighted.

Activating a commuter route

Requirements:

• You have created a profile ( page 479).
- The Allow destination suggestions option is switched on (→ page 480).
- The Activate commuter route option is switched on.
- The multimedia system has gathered sufficient data in order to show destination suggestions.
- Routes have been learned for these destination suggestions.
- Route guidance is not active.

① This commuter route is not available in all countries.

Multimedia system:

→ → Navigation → Route

Switch on Activate commuter route. The navigation system automatically detects that the vehicle is on a commuter route. For the daily commuter route, traffic events on the route are also reported when driving without active route guidance.

To select commuter route: select Start. Route guidance begins without spoken driving instructions.
i A commuter route is suggested even with delays on the route.
To delete a commuter route: select ×.
Starting the automatic service station search

Requirements

• ATTENTION ASSIST is activated (→ page 355).
  • You are driving on a motorway.
• There are service stations along the route section ahead.

Driving situation

The following notification is shown on the media display ATTENTION ASSIST Tap here to search for rest areas..

Confirm the notification. The service station search starts. The available service stations along the route or in the vicinity of the vehicle's current position are displayed.

▶ Select a service station.
Calculate the route with the service station as an □ intermediate destination or as a ▲ destination (→ page 517).
If there are already four intermediate destinations: select Yes in the prompt. The selected service station is entered in the route overview at position 1. Intermediate destination 4 is deleted. Route guidance begins.

Starting and editing a stored route

Requirements

• A USB device with stored routes is connected with the multimedia system ( page 597)
• The route is stored in the "Routes" folder with the GPS Exchange format (.gpx).

Multimedia system:

Navigation

Press the double arrow in the destination input line until Stored routes is displayed.
Select Stored routes.

Starting a saved route

Select a route.
Select Start: route guidance at start or Start: current location. Route guidance begins.

Renaming a route

▶ Press on a route until a menu is shown.
Select Rename.
Enter the name.
Select OK.

Recording and storing a route

Requirements

- A USB device is connected with the multimedia system ( page 597).

Multimedia system:

Press the double arrow in the destination input line until Stored routes is displayed.
Select Stored routes

Starting recording

Select Start recording A white rectangle is displayed. The route is stored on the USB device.

Stopping recording

Press the white rectangle.
Select End recording

Route guidance

Notes on route guidance

WARNING Risk of distraction from operating integrated communication equipment while the vehicle is in motion

If you operate communication equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you could be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. ▶ Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits.

If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary.

You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the multimedia system. Route guidance begins once a route has been calculated. The road and traffic rules and regulations always have priority over multimedia system driving instructions. Driving instructions are, for example navigation announcements, changes in direction and lane recommendations.

Changes in direction and lane recommendations are shown in the navigation window.

The following displays and functions are also available in the navigation window, for example:

• Route list
• Destination information
• Traffic information, e.g. length of traffic jam, delay

• Motorway facilities

• Car park search
  • Emergency corridors

If you do not follow the driving instructions or if you leave the calculated route, a new route is calculated automatically.

If, for example, the route is diverted or the direction of a one-way road has been reversed, driving instructions may deviate from the actual traffic situation.

Alternatives may be offered during route guidance, e.g. before passing a motorway exit road. The additional driving time for the journey along the motorway exit is shown.

For this reason, you must always observe road and traffic rules and regulations during your journey as well as the prevailing traffic conditions.

The route can differ from the ideal route, for example in the event of roadworks or incomplete digital map data.

Notes on satellite reception

The correct function of the navigation system depends amongst other things on reception of the satellite system used. In certain situations satel-

lite reception can be impaired, malfunction or even not be possible, e.g. in tunnels or in multi-storey car parks.

Changing direction overview

Changes of direction are shown in the following displays:

• Detailed image of the junction
The display appears when you drive into a junction.
- 3D image

The display appears when driving on junction-free, multi-lane roads, for example at motorway exits and motorway interchanges.

Screenshot of a map interface with numbered annotations pointing to specific locations such as Laufengabe, Norsberg, and 100% speed.

Example: detailed image of the crossing with upcoming changes of direction

① Name of the street to turn into
② Change of direction arrow (also on the map)
3 Current vehicle position
4 Current distance to the change of direction

1 Würzburg Heilmann 30 2 3 4 LOW 42 km FLOW

Example: 3D image of the upcoming change of direction

① Manoeuvre point
2 Change of direction arrow (also on the map) Larger map scales show change of direction points instead of change of direction arrows.
3 Current distance to the change of direction
4 Current vehicle position

There are three phases when changing direction:

- Preparation phase

If there is enough time between the changes of direction, the multimedia system prepares you for the upcoming change of direction. A

navigation announcement is issued, e.g. "Prepare to turn right".

The navigation window shows: the direction information or the name of the road which is to be turned into as well as the distance to the change of direction.

- Announcement phase

The multimedia system announces the upcoming change of direction, e.g. by announcing "Turn right in 300 m".

When the Auto zoom map orientation is switched off ( page 544), a detailed representation of the junction or a 3D image of the upcoming change in direction appears in the navigation window.

• Change-of-direction phase

The multimedia system announces the imminent change of direction, e.g. by announcing "Now turn right".

Example of 3D image: when the distance to manoeuvre point ① is shown with 0 m and the symbol for current vehicle position ④ has

reached manoeuvre point ① the change in direction is carried out.

Changes in direction are also displayed on the driver's display and head-up display.
Lane recommendations overview

1.1 m Volkswagen (Evt), 5-2m 1 2 3 Phone LOW

Example: lane recommendations

Lane not recommended (grey arrow)
2 Possible lane (white arrow)
3 Recommended lane (white arrow, blue background)

This display appears for multi-lane roads.

If the digital map contains the relevant data, lane recommendations are displayed in the navigation window.

Explanation of the displayed lanes:

• Recommended lane
  In this lane, you will be able to complete both the next change of direction and the one after that.
• Possible lane
  In this lane, you will only be able to complete the next change of direction.
  • Non-recommended lane
  In this lane, you will not be able to complete the next change of direction without changing lane.

During the change of direction, new lanes may be added. Bus lanes are also shown.

① Lane recommendations are also displayed on the driver's display and head-up display.

Using motorway information

When driving on the motorway, upcoming motorway facilities and available service facilities are

shown in the route list. These include car parks, service stations or motorway exits with service POIs, for example.

The entries are sorted according to increasing distance from the current vehicle position.

Select an entry.
If several service facilities are available, select a service facility from the list.
The destination address and the map position are shown.
Calculate the route ( page 517).

or

▶ Search for a POI in the vicinity.

or

Use other functions, e.g. store the destination address of the service facility.

Destination reached

Once the destination is reached, you will see the chequered flag. Route guidance will now be complete. The navigation menu is shown.

When an intermediate destination has been reached, you will see the intermediate destination

flag with the number of your □ intermediate destination. Route guidance is continued.

Switches navigation announcements on or off

Switching off

During a navigation announcement, press the button on the steering wheel or controller in the centre console. The Spoken driving recommendations have been deactivated. message appears.

or

Show the navigation menu.

Select

The symbol changes to ☑.

Switching on

Press the button on the steering wheel or on the controller in the centre console again.

or

In the navigation window, select ☑ for an upcoming driving manoeuvre.

The current navigation announcement is played.

The symbol changes to 📄.

Switching navigation announcements on or off during a phone call

Press the button on the steering wheel on the right.

or

Tap on in the media display.

Select Settings.

Select System.

Select Audio.

Select Navigation & traffic announcements.

▶ Activate or deactivate Driving recommendations during call.

To leave the menu: select ↩.

Adjusting the volume of navigation announcements

Multimedia system:

Settings ▶ System ▶ Audio

▶ Navigation & traffic announcements

▶ Select Driving recommendation vol..

Set the volume.

To leave the menu: select ↗.

Route guidance is active

During a navigation announcement, adjust the volume on the steering wheel or on the controller in the centre console.

Switching audio fadeout on or off during navigation announcements

Press the button on the steering wheel on the right.

or

Tap on in the media display.

Select Settings.

Select System.

Select Audio.

▶ Select Navigation & traffic announcements.

Activate or deactivate Audio fadeout during navigation announcements.

To leave the menu: select ↗.

■ Repeating navigation announcements

Requirements:

• A route has already been created.

- Route guidance is active.

Multimedia system:

In the navigation window, select 📄 for an upcoming driving manoeuvre.

Select ☐. The current navigation announcement is repeated.

Cancelling route guidance

Requirements:

• A route has already been created.

- Route guidance is active.

Show the navigation menu.

Select ☐ in the navigation menu (→ page 510).

Overview of off-road status during route guidance

Due to roadworks, for example, there may be differences between the data on the digital map and the actual course of the road. In such cases, the multimedia system will temporarily be unable to locate the vehicle's current position on the digital

map. The vehicle is off-road. Road not mapped will be shown. Route guidance may be restricted. When the vehicle is back on a road known to the multimedia system, route guidance continues as normal.

Destination

Saving the current vehicle position Multimedia system:

Navigation

When the map is shown, tap on the current vehicle position.

▶ Select Store position.

To save as a favourite: select Save as favourite.

To save as "Home" address: select Home.

To save as "Work" address: select Work.

■ Managing previous destinations Multimedia system:

Navigation

For a previous destination, select ⋯.

Saving the last destination as a favourite

Press and hold on one of the previous destinations. A menu appears.
To save as a favourite: select Save as favourite.
To save as "Home" address: select Home.
To save as "Work" address: select Work.

Deleting a previous destination

For a last destination, select ⋯.
Select Delete.

or

Select Delete all.

Confirm the prompt. When all the favourites have been deleted, Add favourite is available, for example.

Editing destination suggestions

Requirements:

- The Allow destination suggestions option is switched on (→ page 495).

- For the display of destination suggestions: the multimedia system has gathered sufficient data.

Multimedia system:

→ ↗ Navigation ↗

Press and hold on a destination suggestion. A menu appears.
To cancel a destination suggestion: select Do not suggest now or Do not suggest.
To save a destination suggestion: select Save as favourite, Home or Work.

i Delete a destination suggestion from the favourites ( page 516).

Route guidance with current traffic reports

Traffic information overview

Current traffic reports are received with the Live Traffic Information subscription service.

If the subscription has expired, then FM RDS-TMC is available in selected countries.

i Live Traffic Information is not available in all countries.

The service must be registered in the Mercedes me user account ( page 534). This secures the free-of-charge period of three years.

The service updates the traffic situation via the Internet connection at short, regular intervals.

Information on the vehicle's position is regularly sent to Mercedes-Benz AG. The data is immediately rendered anonymous by Mercedes-Benz AG and forwarded to the traffic data provider. Using this data, traffic reports relevant to the vehicle's position are sent to the vehicle. The vehicle acts as a sensor for the flow of traffic and helps to improve the quality of the traffic reports.

There may be differences between the traffic reports received and the actual road and traffic conditions.

If you do not want to transmit the vehicle position, you have the following options:

• You deactivate the service in the Mercedes me user account.
• You have the service deactivated at a Mercedes-Benz service centre.

(i) Further hazard warnings are received using the Car-to-X service ( page 537).

■ Showing information from the service provider for Live Traffic Information

Requirements:

- The vehicle is equipped with Live Traffic Information.

Multimedia system:

→ ➤ Apps ➤ Mercedes me
My services
Select Live Traffic.

When the subscription for Live Traffic Information has expired then in selected countries FM RDS-TMC is available.

Registering Live Traffic Information

Requirements:

• The vehicle is equipped with Live Traffic Information.
  • You have a Mercedes me user account.

Create a Mercedes me user account at: https://www.mercedes.me. A valid email address is required for this.
Register the vehicle using the vehicle identification number (VIN).
Connect the vehicle with your Mercedes me user account.
A code is sent to the multimedia system.
Enter the code into the multimedia system.
Accept the general and specific terms of use.
Alternatively, you can have the connection completed at a Mercedes-Benz service centre.

■ Extending a Live Traffic Information subscription

Requirements:

• The vehicle is equipped with Live Traffic Information.
  • You have a Mercedes me user account.
  Call up the Mercedes me website.
  Call up the Mercedes me user account.

Switch to the Mercedes me Store via the linked vehicle.
Select Live Traffic Information.
▶ Select the renewal period.
Add the product to the shopping basket.
Accept the general and specific terms of use. Live Traffic Information remains activated for the selected extension period. Activation begins on the date of extension.

■ Displaying traffic information on the map

Requirements

- Traffic incidents and Free-flowing traffic are switched on (→ page 537).

Multimedia system:

If necessary, move the map ( page 540).

The map shows the following traffic information depending on the activated settings:

- Traffic incidents

These are roadworks, road blocks and warning messages, for example.

When route guidance is active, the symbols for traffic incidents will be shown in colour on the route. Off the route they are grey.

- Warning messages

Warning messages are shown as the symbol.

Traffic safety information can be shown, e.g. if there are people on the carriageway.

If the vehicle approaches a danger area, for example the end of a traffic jam in a dangerous position, the △ symbol is shown on the map. If Announce traffic warnings is switched on and a message has been issued, an additional announcement is made.

• Traffic flow information:

• Traffic jam (red line)
• Slow-moving traffic (orange line)
• Heavy traffic (yellow line)
• Free-flowing traffic (green line)

- Display for traffic delays on the current route The smallest value for the display for traffic delays is a minute.

Showing traffic events on the route

Requirements

- The Traffic incidents display is switched on (→ page 537).

Multimedia system:

Navigation

If there are traffic events on the route, these are shown on the map and in the route overview.

With the MBUX Voice Assistant you can inform yourself about traffic events on your route. Ask, for example How is the traffic on my route? or How is the traffic at home?. A voice output is given.

No delays along your route Route 1 11:06 | 70176 Stuttgart Leuchnerstoffe 51 Germany 2 19 am 3 Other routes

Example: traffic events on the map

① Total delay or message that there are no delays along the route
② Switches traffic information display on or off
3 Calls up settings for View, Messages & tones and Route

If there are any delays along the route, these are shown in the route overview together with the following information:

• Traffic jam: red bar
• Slow-moving traffic: orange bar
  • Heavy traffic: yellow bar

• For each section:

• The delay

• The length
  The street name or the street number

During active route guidance, the total delay on the route is also displayed here:

• in the navigation system in the navigation module
• in other applications in the status line at the top

Traffic incident symbols are shown in the route overview and in the map. A traffic incident symbol is, for example △ for road-works.

In the map several traffic events may be shown on top of each other. The traffic event symbol shows a plus sign.

If available, the street number can be replaced by a street name or both the name and number.

If a message about forming an emergency corridor has been issued, Emergency corridor is shown in the navigation window.

To see all of the traffic events on the route, swipe to the right or left. The route section is highlighted on the map
To show detailed information in the route overview: tap on a display in the route overview. The detailed information is shown, for example the road section and the direction.

Calling up detailed information on the map

Tap on traffic flow information on the map, e.g. a red line for a traffic jam section. The detail information is displayed.
If several lines are shown on top of the other, then select an item of traffic flow information from the list.

Showing traffic events on the map

Tap on a traffic event symbol. The detail information is displayed.
Several traffic events are in the immediate vicinity: tap on the top traffic event symbol and select from the list of traffic events.

Switching the traffic information display on Multimedia system:

Navigation

Select View.
Traffic.
▶ Activate Traffic incidents and Free-flowing traffic. Traffic incidents, for example roadworks, local area reports (e.g. fog) and warning messages, are shown on the route.

Car-to-X-Communication

Car-to-X-Communication overview

The following requirements apply for the Car-to-X-Communication service:

• The vehicle is equipped with an MBUX multi-media system with navigation function.
• There is a subscription for the Live Traffic Information service.
• The Car-to-X-Communication service is activated in your Mercedes me user account.

① Car-to-X-Communication is available in selected countries.

The communication module automatically establishes an Internet connection once the vehicle is switched on. If there are any hazard warnings, they will be provided shortly thereafter. Depending on the mobile phone connection, provision takes place from within a second up to about a minute.

Benefits of Car-to-X-Communication:

• Dangers are automatically detected by the vehicle or can be reported by the driver. These are then sent to vehicles with Car-to-X-Communication in the immediate vicinity.
• If available, current details relating to hazard spots near the vehicle's current position are received.
  This gives you sufficient time to adapt your driving style to the traffic conditions.

The use of Car-to-X-Communication requires the regular transmission of vehicle data to Mercedes-Benz AG. The data is then immediately pseudonymised by Mercedes-Benz AG. The vehicle data is deleted after an appropriate amount of time has

F167 0009 02

elapsed (several weeks) and is not stored permanently.

① Data which serves as identification is replaced during the pseudonymisation process. In this way, your identity is protected against access by unauthorised third parties.

Displaying hazard warnings

Multimedia system:

Navigation

If hazard warnings are available these can be shown as symbols on the map. The display depends on the settings for the Traffic incidents option.

Set the option via ⏻ (→ page 537). If the option is activated, all of the symbols are shown. If the option is deactivated, the symbols are only shown when there is a hazard warning.

The following hazards may be shown on the map:

• Accidents and breakdowns
- Slippery roads, fog, crosswinds and heavy rain
• Hazards reported manually

• Vehicle with active hazard warning light
- Roadworks
• Additional hazards (if available)
① If Announce traffic warnings is switched off (→ page 523), voice output can indicate a danger area.

Sending hazard warnings

Reporting hazards manually

Automatically detected hazard warnings are sent by the vehicle.

When the map is shown, tap on the current vehicle position.
The Position menu is shown.
Select Report traffic incident. A prompt is shown.
Select Yes. The Thank you for supporting accident prevention! message appears.

Route guidance with augmented reality

Overview of route guidance with augmented reality
① This function is an on-demand feature ( page 89).

WARNING Risk of accident and injury as a result of distraction, incorrect depiction or wrong interpretation of the display

The camera image of the augmented reality display is not suitable as a guide for driving.

Always keep an eye on the actual traffic situation.
Avoid extended observation of the camera image.

During route guidance with augmented reality a camera image with the real traffic scene is shown in the media display before a turning manoeuvre. The camera image includes additional information, for example arrows indicating a change of direction.

If the options are switched on and this additional information is available, road names and house numbers are displayed ( page 539).

Street photo with numbered location markers on a road, showing houses and a vehicle ahead

House number
2 Street name
③ Change of direction arrow

Route guidance with augmented reality will not be available in some situations, e.g. in the event of poor satellite reception or roads that have not been digitised.

Route guidance with augmented reality is not available in all countries.

You can watch an animation on this topic via the following link:

Activating route guidance with augmented reality

WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to imprecise positioning of additional information

The additional information from the augmented reality display may be inaccurate and is not a substitute for observing and assessing the actual driving situation.

Always keep an eye on the actual traffic situation when carrying out all driving manoeuvres.

Multimedia system:

→ ↗ Navigation ↗

Select View.

▶ Select Augmented reality video.

Activate or deactivate Augmented reality video. The camera's video image is shown on the media display before a turning manoeuvre. The video image includes additional information.

■ Showing property information for route guidance with augmented reality

Requirements:

• Augmented reality is activated ( page 539).

Multimedia system:

Navigation

Select View.

Select Augmented reality video.

Activate Street names and House numbers. During route guidance, the activated options are shown as additional information in the camera image.

Map and compass

Setting the map scale

Multimedia system:

Navigation

Zooming in

When the map is shown, tap twice quickly with one finger on the media display.

or

Move two fingers apart on the media display.

Zooming out

Tap with two fingers on the media display.

or

Move two fingers together on the media display.

(i) You can set the unit of measurement of the map scale ( page 494).

Moving the map

Multimedia system:

When the map is displayed, swipe in any direction with one finger on the media display.

The following functions are available:

• Select a destination on the map (→ page 516).
• Select a POI (→ page 513).
  • Show traffic incidents on the map ( page 535).

To reset the map to the current vehicle position: select ● Centre .

Switching the route overview after start on or off

Multimedia system:

Select View.

Activate or deactivate Overview of route after start. If the option is enabled, the map shows the full route after route guidance is started and, if available, all alternative routes.

Selecting POI symbols for the map display multimedia system:

Navigation

POIs include restaurants and hotels, for example. These are displayed as symbols on the map. Not all POIs are available in all countries.

Personal POIs are destinations which you have saved on a USB device, for example.

① The display of POI symbols on the map can be activated or deactivated as a favourite.

Select View.
Select POI symbols on map ▶.
Switch on Hide all points of interest. When the option is switched on, the POI symbols for all categories are shown on the map according to the settings in the POI categories.

If the conditions are fulfilled, the POI symbols are shown with current online information ( page 545).

Switching display of categories for quick-access on or off

▶ Switch a category on or off in the menu.

Selecting categories

In the menu, select Other categories ▶. Activate or deactivate Show all. When the option is switched on, the POI symbols for all categories are shown on the map.

or

Select ▶ the categories.
Activate or deactivate the categories. The POI symbols for the selected categories are shown on the map.

Selecting personal POI categories

In the menu, select Personal POIs
Select ▶ a category.
▶ Activate or deactivate Display on the map.

To issue a signal when approaching: activate Visual warning and Acoustic notification.

Resetting the POI symbol display

In the menu, select Reset POIs. The settings are reset to the standard settings.

Selecting the display of additional information on the map

Multimedia system:

Select View.

▶ Select Show additional information.

▶ Switch the options on or off.

The following options are available:

- Current street

If the option is enabled, it will be displayed in the navigation window.

- Scale

If the option is switched off, the map scale is only displayed on the map when zooming.

If the option is enabled, the map scale is permanently displayed on the map.

The option also influences the display on the driver's display.

- Altitude

- Next junction

If the option is switched on and the journey continues without route guidance, the name of the next intersecting street will be displayed in the navigation window.

Displaying the map version

Multimedia system:

Select View.

▶ Select Map data version.

The detail information is displayed.

The online map update service from Mercedes me connect can be used to update the map data ( page 36).

A message is shown in the media display when a new map version is available.

i Information about new versions of the digital map can be obtained from a Mercedes-Benz service centre.

Overview of area avoidance on the route You can define areas along a route that you would like to avoid.

Motorways or multi-lane expressways that pass through an area to be avoided may be included in the route despite being blocked.

Avoiding a new area for the route Multimedia system:

▶ Avoid areas

▶ Select Avoid new area.

Starting using the map

Select Using map.

A red rectangle appears. This designates the area that should be avoided.

Move the map ( page 540).

Set the map scale ( page 539).

Select OK. The area is entered into the list.

Starting using destination search

- Select Via address entry. - Enter the address (→ page 37). - Select the destination in the list. The map appears. The area is saved.

Changing an area to be avoided Multimedia system:

→ ↗ Navigation ↗ ↗ Route ▶ Avoid areas

- Select an area in the list. - Select Edit. - To move an area on the map: swipe in any direction on the media display.

Changing the size of the area

Move two fingers apart or together on the media display. Select OK. The area is entered into the list.

Taking the area for the route into account

▶ Select the area in the list. ▶ Switch on Avoid area. If route guidance is active, a new route is calculated. If there is no route yet, the setting is carried over to the next route guidance. The route can include an area that is to be avoided in the following cases:

- The destination is located in an area that is to be avoided. - The route includes motorways or multi-lane expressways which pass through an area to be avoided. - There is no practical alternative route.

Deleting an area to be avoided

Multimedia system: → ↗ Navigation ↗ ↗ Route ▶ Avoid areas

Deleting an area to be avoided

Select an area in the list.

- Select Delete. - Confirm the prompt with Yes.

Deleting all areas to be avoided

If at least two areas to be avoided are set, select Delete all. Confirm the prompt with Yes.

Map data update overview

As the content of a digital road map has a short life, outdated data may have a negative effect on all navigation functions. For the best MBUX navigation experience, you should install all of the map updates offered by Mercedes-Benz.

The following options are available for the update of map data:

- Online map update - Updates from the Mercedes me Portal - Update at a Mercedes-Benz service centre Additional costs can be incurred in this process.

Online map update

Requirements:

• Mercedes me connect is available.
• You have a Mercedes me user account.
- The Online Map Update service is available for your region.
• The service has been activated.

The Online Map Update service is only available in certain countries.

Installation takes place in the background as an automatic map update.

The MBUX multimedia system installs all of the available map updates for the European regions in which the vehicle is located or is moved.

The online map update is activated at the latest after the next time the vehicle is switched on.

Updates from the Mercedes me Portal

The map data for several regions can also be updated manually. Log in with your Mercedes me user account at: https://www.mercedes-benz.de/

Follow the menu path My Mercedes Me account > My vehicles > Selection of car > Online Map Update. Select the regions to be downloaded to a storage medium.

After the map data has been copied, connect the storage medium with your vehicle. Select the notification with information about a new version of the map data and start the installation. After the MBUX multimedia system has been restarted, the updated map data is used.

Overview of map data

If map data is reinstalled in a vehicle, no activation code needs to be entered.

For map data purchased as data media, the enclosed activation code must be entered after starting the installation.

Activation codes are only ever valid for one vehicle.

In the event of the following problems, please contact a Mercedes-Benz service centre:

• The multimedia system does not accept the activation code.
  • You have lost the activation code.

Displaying the compass

Multimedia system:

Navigation

When the map is shown, tap on the current vehicle position until the Position menu is shown.
Select Compass. The compass display shows the following information:

- The current direction of travel with bearing (360° format) and compass direction

- Longitude and latitude coordinates in degrees, minutes and seconds

• Number of satellites from which a signal can be received

The information is not available in every country.

Displaying Qibla

Multimedia system:

Navigation

When the map is shown, tap on the current vehicle position until the Position menu is shown.
Select Alerts. The arrow on the compass shows the direction to Mecca in relation to the current direction of travel.

The number of satellites received is shown.

This function is not available in all countries.

Setting the map scale automatically

Multimedia system:

Navigation

Select View.
Activate Auto zoom. When the option is switched on, the map scale is set automatically depending on your driving speed and the type of road.

The automatically selected map scale can be changed manually. After a few seconds, this is automatically reset.

When the option is activated, no detailed display of the junction or a 3D image is shown in the navigation window during an upcoming driving manoeuvre.

Displaying the satellite map

Multimedia system:

→ ↗ Navigation ↗

Select View.

Activate or deactivate Satellite map.

When Satellite map is selected, they are displayed at the following map scales:

• On-board maps
  The satellite maps are displayed in map scales from 2 km.
• Online maps

The satellite maps are displayed in high-resolution map scales from 10 m.

When Satellite map is not selected, no satellite maps are displayed.

The satellite maps for these map scales are not available in all countries.

Displaying the range

Requirements:

• There is an Internet connection.
• Mercedes me connect is available.
• You have a Mercedes me user account.
- The vehicle is connected with the user account and you have accepted the Mercedes me connect terms of use.
Further information can be found at: https://www.mercedes.me
- The service is available and has been activated.

Multimedia system:

Metzingen Piezha 1 27 Archtal 313 312 1/2 1/2 Wulfen Mürgen

① Display of the total range
Select View.
Range.

The range is shown on the map with the following displays:

• For petrol and diesel vehicles: green display
- For hybrid vehicles:

Total range: green display

Electrical range: blue display

When the lower reserve capacity is reached then the range display on the map is switched off.

① The range display on the map is not available in all countries.

Displaying online map contents

Requirements:

• There is an Internet connection.
• Mercedes me connect is available.
• You have a Mercedes me user account.
- The vehicle is connected with the user account and you have accepted the Mercedes me connect terms of use.
Further information can be found at: https://www.mercedes.me
- The service is available and has been activated.

Multimedia system:

Select View.

Switch on an online service, e.g. Weather. Current weather information is displayed on the navigation map, e.g. temperature or cloud cover.
The service information is not shown in all map scales, e.g. weather symbols.
The display of online map content is not available in all countries.

Parking service

Notes on the parking service

NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to not observing the maximum permitted head-room clearance

If the vehicle height is greater than the maximum permitted headroom clearance, the roof and other parts of the vehicle may be damaged.

Observe the signposted headroom clearance.

If the vehicle height is greater than the permitted headroom clearance, do not enter.
Observe the changed vehicle height with add-on roof equipment.

① This service is not available in all countries.

Selecting parking options

NOTE Vehicle damage due to failure to observe local information and parking conditions

The data is based on the information provided by the respective service providers.

Mercedes-Benz does not guarantee the accuracy of the information provided in relation to the car park or parking area.

Always observe the local information and conditions.

Requirements:

- Navigation Services is activated in your Mercedes me user account.

• The parking service is part of the scope of the Navigation Services.
• Parking is activated (→ page 547).

Multimedia system:

Navigation

Tap on [P] the map.

or

In the route overview, select P Parking spaces ( page 524).

Select the search position and search filter, e.g. Near destination and Multi-storey car parks.

The map shows car parks suited to the selected settings.

▶ Select a parking option.

The following information is displayed (if available):

• Destination address, distance from current vehicle position and arrival time
  • Information on the car park, e.g.
• Opening times
  Parking charges

F167 0009 02

• Current occupancy
• Maximum parking time
  Maximum access height

The maximum access height shown by the parking service does not replace the need for observation of the actual circumstances.

• Available payment options (Mercedes pay, coins, bank notes, cards)
• Details on parking tariffs
• Number of available parking spaces
• Payment method (e.g. at parking meters)
• Services/facilities at the parking option
- Telephone number

Calculate the route ( page 517).

The following functions can be used (if available):

• Searching for POIs in the vicinity.
- Saving the destination.
- Placing a call at the destination.
• Sharing the destination via the QR code.

• Calling up the web address.
  • Showing the destination on the map.

Displaying parking options on the map

Requirements:

• Navigation Services is activated in your Mercedes me user account.
• The parking service is part of the scope of the Navigation Services.

Multimedia system:

Switch on Parking. The parking options within the vicinity of the current vehicle position are shown.

Prior booking of a parking space

Requirements:

• Navigation Services is activated in your Mercedes me user account.
• The parking service is part of the scope of the Navigation Services.
• You have registered with your payment details for the payment of parking in the Mercedes

me Portal with Mercedes pay and the respective contract partner.

- Parking is activated (→ page 547).

① This option is not available in all countries.

Multimedia system:

Select a parking option on the map.
If a parking space available to book has been selected, select Book parking space.
Select the desired booking period. Take note of the cancellation conditions. If the parking space is available for the selected period, the price will be shown.
Press OK to confirm.
In the booking overview, confirm with Book.
If required, enter the Mercedes me PIN. The parking space will be booked in the background.
A booking confirmation including a car park ticket will be sent to your registered e-mail address.

Making use of or cancelling the booking

Start the Mercedes me App on your smartphone.
Open Menu.
Select My transactions.
Select Parking transactions.
▶ Select the desired booking.
To make use of the booking: select Show car park ticket.

or

To cancel the booking: select Cancel booking.

If possible, a parking space booking can be cancelled up to the stated time. If a booking cannot be cancelled, this will already be shown to you during the booking procedure.

Paying parking charges

Requirements:

• Navigation Services is activated in your Mercedes me user account.

• The parking service is part of the scope of the Navigation Services.

• You have registered with your payment details for the payment of parking in the Mercedes me Portal with Mercedes pay and the respective contract partner.

• Parking is activated (→ page 547).

① This option is not available in all countries.

Multimedia system:

Select a parking option on the map.
If a car park that can be paid for has been selected, scroll down in the parking details.
Select Payment. Once the vehicle has reached a parking position with payment function and the vehicle is switched off, a message appears. Using this message you can pay from the vehicle and start the payment process.

Starting a payment procedure

▶ Acknowledge the message.
Please note the maximum parking period displayed and any existing additional limitations. If required, a message will inform you about

the necessity of displaying information confirming the online payment for the parking space.

▶ Select Start the payment process.
If required, enter the Mercedes me PIN.
Press OK to confirm. The successful start of your parking transaction is shown.
Complete the booking with OK.
To cancel a parking transaction: after receiving the confirmation request, select Cancel. Minimum charges may be incurred.

Ending a parking transaction

▶ Stop the active transaction using the Mercedes me app. You receive a summary of the procedure and the costs.
If an uncompleted parking transaction is detected for your vehicle as you continue your journey, a message will appear asking whether you would like to end it.

▶ Acknowledge the message.
When the parking transaction is stopped successfully, another message appears with the details about your completed parking.

Dashcam

Notes on the dashcam

NOTE Risk of legal consequences due to violation of legal regulations and data protection provisions

You are legally responsible for operation and use of the dashcam functions.

The legal requirements relating to operation and use of the dashcam can vary depending on the country in which the dashcam is operated.

This function is not permitted in all countries.

Before using the dashcam, read up on the content of the legal regulations, in particular the data protection requirements in the respective country of use.

Observe the legal regulations, in particular the data protection requirements.

i Observe the following instructions for safe operation:

• Only use FAT32 or exFAT formatted USB storage devices.
• Use USB-IF certified USB storage devices. USB-IF is a non-profit corporation and stands for USB Implementers Forum. Based on the USB specification, USB-IF certifies, for example, USB versions, corresponding cables and plugs as well as energy supply processes via the USB interface.
• USB storage devices may be damaged if often or permanently overwritten at high speed. Mercedes-Benz recommends a high-quality external SSD drive.
  The abbreviation SSD stands for Solid State Drive.

The file size and therefore the duration of single recording is limited by the limitations of the USB flash drive format. So FAT32 format-

ted USB flash drives do not allow files larger than 4 GB, for example. When the file size is reached, the recording stops and you receive a notification.

The following functions are available in the Gallery app:

• Switching write protection on or off
• Deleting video files

Additional information about the Gallery app.

Selecting a USB device for a video recording with the dashcam

Requirements:

- At least one USB device is connected with the multimedia system ( page 597).

Multimedia system:

→ ➤ Apps ➤ Dashcam
Select the USB symbol.
Select the USB device.
When USB devices contain multiple partitions, recorded video files are not always displayed in the recording list.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use USB devices with one partition.

Starting or stopping video recording with the dashcam

Requirements

• For recording and saving a video file: a USB device is connected with the multimedia system ( page 597).
  • The ignition is switched on.

Multimedia system:

→ ➤ Apps ➤ Dashcam

If several USB devices are connected with the multimedia system, select a USB device ( page 549).
If no USB device is selected, a selection is made automatically when recording starts.
To select a recording mode: select Loop recording or Individual recording. Loop recording records several short video files. When the memory is full, recording is continued automatically. In doing so, other

files will be overwritten starting with the oldest file.

Individual recording stops recording when the memory limit is reached. An individual recording is automatically protected against being overwritten.

To start: select Start recording.

The length of the recording is shown. The Do not remove the storage medium during recording. Before removing the storage medium, eject it first. message appears. The video file is stored on the USB device.

To end: select End recording.

In some countries, geo-coordinates (longitude and latitude) are shown in the video image. For technical reasons, the geo-coordinates may show greater inaccuracies.

A report may appear in the following cases:

- Individual recording: the memory is full or there are only a few minutes recording time available. The video recording stops or will be stopped imminently.

Change the USB device or delete a video file.

• The camera is not functional, the Camera unavailable message appears.
  Have the camera checked in a Mercedes-Benz service centre.
• If the country border indication has been switched on (→ page 550).

Configuring dashcam settings

Requirements:

- A USB device is connected with the multimedia system (→ page 597).

Multimedia system:

Receiving notifications after passing a border crossing

▶ Switch on National border alert. A message is shown if video is being recorded and the vehicle passes a border.
① This function is not available in all countries.

Starting automatic video recording

▶ Select Automatic loop recording.
Switch on Automatic loop recording. When the vehicle is started, video recording starts automatically.
① This function is not available in all countries.

Telephone

Telephony

Notes on telephony

WARNING Risk of distraction from operating integrated communication equipment while the vehicle is in motion

If you operate communication equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you could be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle.

Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits.

If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary.

A WARNING Risk of accident from operating mobile communication equipment while the vehicle is in motion

Mobile communication devices distract the driver from the traffic situation. This can also cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.

As a driver, only operate mobile communication devices when the vehicle is stationary.
As a vehicle occupant, use mobile communication devices only in the designated area, e.g. in the rear passenger compartment.

You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the multimedia system and mobile communication equipment in the vehicle.

WARNING Risk of injury due to objects being stowed incorrectly

If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addition, cup holders, open stowage spaces and mobile phone receptacles cannot always retain all objects within.

There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction.

Always stow objects so that they cannot be thrown around in such situations.
▶ Always make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage spaces, luggage nets or stowage nets.
▶ Close the lockable stowage spaces before starting a journey.
▶ Always stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects in the boot/load compartment.

Observe the additional information on stowing mobile communications devices correctly:

- Loading the vehicle (→ page 198) Further information can be obtained from a Mercedes-Benz service centre or at: https://www.mercedes-benz-mobile.com/

Telephone menu overview

iPhone SE (SISC) Phone 2 1 2 3 4 9 8 7 6 5 Search 甲 O $LOW $LOW

Bluetooth® device name of the currently connected mobile phone/of the mobile phone
② Bluetooth ^® device name of the other currently connected mobile phone/of the mobile phone
3 Signal strength of the mobile phone network

④ Battery status of the connected mobile phone
5 Options
6 Messages
⑦ Calls up devices
8 Numerical pad
9 Starts contact search

Bluetooth ^® profile overview

Bluetooth® profile of the mobile phone	Function
PBAP (Phone Book Access Profile)	Contacts are automatically displayed in the multimedia system
MAP (Message Access Profile)	Message functions can be used
HFP (Hands Free Profile)	Wireless telephony is available

Telephony operating modes overview

Depending on your equipment, the following telephony operating modes are available:

• A mobile phone is connected to the multimedia system via Bluetooth® (→ page 552).
• Two mobile phones are connected with the multimedia system via Bluetooth® (two phone mode) (→ page 553).

- You can use all the functions of the multi-media system with both mobile phones.

Irrespective of this, Bluetooth ^® audio functionality can be used with any mobile phone ( page 597).

Information on telephony

The following situations can lead to the call being disconnected while the vehicle is in motion:

• There is insufficient network coverage in the area

• You move from one transmission/reception station to another and no communication channels are free

• The SIM card used is not compatible with the network available

• A mobile phone with "Twincard" is logged into the network with the second SIM card at the same time

The multimedia system supports calls in HD Voice ^® for improved speech quality. A requirement for this is that the mobile phone and the mobile phone network provider of the person you are calling support HD Voice ^® .

Depending on the quality of the connection, the voice quality may fluctuate.

Connecting a mobile phone

Requirements

• Bluetooth ^ is activated on the mobile phone (see the manufacturer's Owner's Manual).
• Bluetooth ^ is activated on the multimedia system (→ page 491).

Multimedia system:

→ ▶ Phone ▶ Devices

▶ Devices

Searching for a mobile phone

▶ Select Connect new device.

Authorising a mobile phone

• Select a mobile phone. A code is displayed in the multimedia system and on the mobile phone.
• If the codes match: confirm the code on the mobile phone.
  For older mobile phone models, enter a one to sixteen-digit number code on the mobile phone and on the multimedia system for authorisation.
  i Up to 15 mobile phones can be authorised on the multimedia system. Authorised mobile phones are reconnected automatically.
  The connected mobile phone can also be used as a Bluetooth® audio device (→ page 597).

You can watch an animation on this topic via the following link:

■ Connecting a second mobile phone (two phone mode)

Requirements

- At least one mobile phone is already connected to the multimedia system via Bluetooth®.

Multimedia system:

▶ Select Connect new device.
▶ Select the mobile phone.
In some cases, if the query appears, confirm the selection of the mobile phone pair with the Device name 1 + Device name 2 option. The selected mobile phone is connected to the multimedia system.

Interchanging mobile phones (two phone mode) Multimedia system:

Phone

Both mobile phones are shown individually in separate tabs.

▶ Select the tab with the desired mobile phone. Selecting the tab of a specific mobile phone displays the associated telephone contents. Selecting the other tab switches the view to the other telephone.

The submenus in the telephone menu (e.g. contacts, call lists, messages) relate to the currently selected mobile phone with the exception of the telephone settings. In the telephone settings, settings can be made for both mobile phones.

Changing the function of a mobile phone Multimedia system:

Activating a function

Select a grey symbol in the line of a mobile phone. The corresponding function is activated.

Deactivating a function

One function is active: select the coloured symbol in the line of a mobile phone. The mobile phone is disconnected from the multimedia system. Several functions are active: de-select an active function in the line of one of the mobile phones. The corresponding function is deactivated.

Replacing mobile phones Multimedia system:

No authorised mobile phone available:

- Select Connect new device. - Select a mobile phone. - Newly authorised mobile phone: confirm the numerical code on the mobile phone.

Using in single telephone mode

Select Device name. A newly authorised mobile phone is connected in single telephone mode. If the mobile phone has already been authorised and connected in single telephone mode, it is connected again in single telephone mode. If a mobile phone is already authorised and has been connected in two phone mode with another mobile phone, a query may come, whether the mobile phone should in future be operated in single telephone mode or connec-

ted with another mobile phone in two phone mode. If required, confirm the query about operating mode (single telephone or two phone mode) by confirming the Device name option.

Using in two phone mode

Select Device name 1 + Device name 2. A newly authorised mobile phone is connected with the selected mobile phone in two phone mode. If the mobile phone has already been authorised and connected in single telephone mode, it will be connected in future with the selected mobile phone in two phone mode. If the mobile phone was previously connected with another mobile phone, this connection is cancelled.

■ Disconnecting or deleting a mobile phone Multimedia system:

Disconnecting a mobile phone

Select Disconnect. If applicable, the mobile phone will be automatically reconnected when the vehicle is next started.

Deleting a mobile phone

Select Devices.
Select ⋯ in the line of the mobile phone.
▶ Select Delete device.
The mobile phone is deleted from the system.

■ Using a mobile phone with near-field communication (NFC)

Requirements

• NFC is activated on the mobile phone (see the manufacturer's operating instructions)
• The mobile phone's screen is switched on and unlocked (see the manufacturer's operating instructions)

Connecting a mobile phone

Interior view of a car dashboard and steering wheel (no text or symbols visible)

Hold the NFC interface of the mobile phone (see manufacturer's operating instructions) on mat ① or place the mobile phone on mat ① with the display facing upwards.
Follow the additional prompts on the media display to connect the mobile phone. Connect the mobile phone in single telephone mode ( page 552). Connect the mobile phone in two phone mode ( page 553).

Replacing a mobile phone

Hold the NFC interface of the mobile phone (see the manufacturer's operating instruc-

tions) against NFC interface ① in the front stowage compartment.

Follow the additional prompts on the media display to replace the mobile phone in single or two phone mode ( page 553).
If required, confirm the prompts on your mobile phone (see the manufacturer's operating instructions).
① If your mobile phone supports wireless charging, it can be charged on the mat ( page 226).

If the mobile phone is not charging, switch off NFC on the mobile phone (see the manufacturer's operating instructions).

Further information can be found at: https://www.mercedes-benz-mobile.com/

Setting the reception and transmission volume

Requirements:

• A mobile phone is connected ( page 552).

Multimedia system:

→ ▶ Phone ▶ Devices

▶ Devices

This function ensures optimal language quality.

Please note that the respective mobile phone must be selected for adjustment of the reception and transmission volume.

Select ⋯ in the line of the mobile phone.
Select Volume.
▶ Set the reception and transmission volume using Reception volume and Transmission volume.

Further information on the recommended reception and transmission volume: https://www.mercedes-benz-mobile.com/

Setting the ringtone

Multimedia system:

→ ▶ Phone ▶ Ringtones
Set the ringtone.
If the mobile phone supports the transfer of the ringtone, you will hear the ringtone of the

mobile phone instead of that of the vehicle audio system.

Starting or stopping mobile phone voice recognition

Requirements

• At least one mobile phone is connected to the multimedia system ( page 552).
• The tab with the mobile phone for which voice recognition should be started is selected ( page 553).

Starting mobile phone voice recognition

Press and hold the □ button on the multifunction steering wheel for more than one second.
Voice recognition is started for the currently selected mobile phone.

Stopping mobile phone voice recognition

Press the 📁 or 📞 button on the multifunction steering wheel.
If a mobile phone is connected via Smartphone Integration, the voice recognition of

this mobile phone is always started or stopped.

Note about contact suggestions

The multimedia system can show contact suggestions based on frequently used contacts, outgoing calls and text messages. For this, the Allow contact suggestions option must be switched on ( page 495).

When you open the call list or the message menu, contacts which you can call or write to will be suggested to you. Suggestions will be shown in the Suggestionstab.

The multimedia system does not use the content of messages for suggestions.

Selecting options for contact suggestions

Requirements

• The Allow contact suggestions option is switched on ( page 495).
• The multimedia system has gathered sufficient data in order to show contact suggestions.

Multimedia system:

Phone

Select Call list or Contacts.

Select Suggestions.

Select ⋯ in the line of the suggested contact.

The following option is available for selection:

- Do not suggest now

Calls

Telephone operation

Multimedia system:

Phone

Making a call by entering the numbers

Select

Enter a number.

Select 📊. The call is made.

Accepting a call

Select Accept.

Rejecting a call

Select Reject.

Answering a call with a message

Select = Reply.

Ending a call

Select

Putting a call on In-Car Office's to-do list

Select ☐ Put call on In-Car Office's to-do list.

Activating functions during a call

The following functions are available during a call:

• End call

- Micro. off

• Keypad (show to send DTMF tones)

- Add call

- Hands-free

Transfer the call, e.g. to Front, Rear or All seats.

- Private mode

Transfer the call to the telephone or headphones, for example.

Select a function.

① Observe that the functions and symbols can vary depending on the vehicle equipment.

Conducting calls with several participants

Requirements

• There is an active call ( page 557).

• Another call is being made.

Switching between calls

Select the contact.

The selected call is active. The other call is on hold.

Activating a call on hold

▶ Select the contact of the call on hold.

Conducting a conference call

Select Conference.

The new participant is included in the conference call.

Ending an active call

Select End call.

① On some mobile phones, the call on hold is activated as soon as the active call is ended.

Accepting or rejecting a waiting call

Requirements:

• There is an active call ( page 557).

If you receive a call while already in a call, a message is displayed.

Depending on the mobile phone and mobile phone network provider you will hear a call waiting signal.

Alternatively, in two phone mode you will hear an acoustic signal when the call goes through to the other (not yet active) mobile phone.

Select Accept.

The incoming call is active.

If only one mobile phone is connected with the multimedia system, the previous call will be put on hold.

If during a call you accept a call with the other mobile phone when in two phone mode then the existing call is ended.

or

Select Reply.

The incoming call is not accepted.

You answer with a message.

or

Select Reject.

This function and behaviour depends on your mobile phone network provider and the mobile phone (see the manufacturer's operating instructions).

Using the international dialling code

Multimedia system:

Phone

Press and "0" until a "+" appears in the selection field.

Enter the numbers of the country code, regional code and the telephone number.

Select ▶. The call is made.

Contacts

Information about the contacts menu

The contacts menu contains all contacts from existing data sources, e.g. mobile phone or data storage medium.

Depending on the data source, it is possible to save/load the following number of contacts:

• Permanently saved contacts: 3,000 entries

- Contacts loaded from the mobile phone: 5,000 entries per mobile phone

From the contacts menu, you can perform the following actions:

• Make a call, for example call a contact ( page 560)

- Navigation (→ page 515)

• Compose messages (→ page 561)

• Additional options (→ page 560)

Mobile phone contacts are automatically displayed when a mobile phone is connected to the multimedia system ( page 552).

Downloading mobile phone favourite contacts If the mobile phone supports the function, the favourites of the mobile phone are automatically loaded and appear in the overview of the phone menu.

Calling up contacts

Multimedia system:

Phone Contacts

The following options can be used to search for contacts:

• Searching by initials
• Searching by name
  • Searching by phone number
  Enter characters into the search field.
  Select the contact.

A contact can contain the following details:

• Phone numbers
• Navigation addresses
• Internet address
• Email addresses
• Relationship (if set)

Managing the format of a contact's name Multimedia system:

Phone

Select Contacts.
Select Name format.
Select an option.

Overview of importing contacts

Importing contacts into the contacts menu

Source Requirements

USB device The USB device is connected with the USB port.

Mobile phone A mobile phone is connected to the multimedia system via Bluetooth®. Contacts are available.

① Note that the imported contacts remain in the vehicle and can be accessed at any time regardless of the connected mobile phones.

Importing contacts into the contacts menu Multimedia system:

Select a mobile phone , from which the contacts should be imported.
Select an option.

Saving a mobile phone contact Multimedia system:

Phone Contacts

Select ➤ in the line of the mobile phone contact.
Select
Select Save.
Select Yes.

The contact saved in the multimedia system is identified by the MBUX symbol.

Calling a contact

Multimedia system:

Phone Contacts

Select Search contacts.

Enter characters into the search field.

▶ Select the contact.

Select the telephone number. The number is dialled.

Selecting further options in the contacts menu Multimedia system:

Phone Contacts

Select > in the line of the contact.

Select

Select an option.

1 Deleting contacts

Requirements

• The contacts are saved in the vehicle.

• To delete an individual contact, this has been imported manually into the vehicle.

Multimedia system:

Phone

Deleting all contacts

Select
Select Contacts.
Select Delete all MBUX contacts.
Select an option.

Deleting a contact

Select Contacts.
Select ▶ in the line of the contact.
Select
Select Delete contact.
Select Yes.

Call list

Overview of the call list

Depending on whether your mobile phone supports the PBAP Bluetooth ^® profile or not, this can have different effects on the presentation and functions of the call list.

If the PBAP Bluetooth ^® profile is supported, the effects are as follows:

• The call lists from the mobile phone are displayed in the multimedia system.
• When connecting the mobile phone, you may have to confirm the connection for the PBAP Bluetooth® profile.

If the PBAP Bluetooth® profile is not supported, the effects are as follows:

• The multimedia system generates a call list independently as soon as calls are made in the vehicle.
• The call list is not synchronised with the call lists in the mobile phone.

Making a call from the call list

Multimedia system:

Phone
Select Call list.
Select an entry.
The call is made.

Selecting additional options in the call list Multimedia system:

Phone
Select Call list.
For contacts that are in the address book: select options. The contact details are called up.
For contacts where only one number is shown (not in the address book): select ☐.
Deleting the call list
Multimedia system:
→ Phone ▶ ▶ Devices
▶ Select Delete call list.
Select Yes.
This function is only available if your mobile does not support the PBAP Bluetooth® profile.

Text messages

Overview of message functions

In the message menu you can receive text messages and create and send them with the help of the MBUX voice assistant.

If the connected mobile phone supports the Bluetooth ^® MAP profile, the message functions can be used on the multimedia system.

You can obtain further information about settings and supported functions of Bluetooth®-capable mobile phones at a Mercedes-Benz service centre or at: https://www.mercedes-benz-mobile.com/ Some mobile phones require further settings after being connected to the multimedia system to activate the messaging functionality (see manufacturer's operating instructions).

Setting message displays

Multimedia system:

→ Phone ▶ ▶ Devices

Select Message display.
Select On or Off.

Reading messages

Multimedia system:

Phone

Using the read-aloud function

A message list is shown.

To read aloud, select the ☐ symbol at a conversation. The message is read aloud.

Creating and sending a new message

Requirements

• There is an Internet connection.
- At least one mobile phone with reception is connected.
- If applicable, the message function must be activated on the mobile phone.

Multimedia system:

Using the MBUX voice assistant, speak the voice command Send a message to, and name the desired contact ( page 457).

Dictating text

Say the message. You are guided by the voice dialogue.

Replying to a message in the messaging history Multimedia system:

A message list is shown.

Select ▷ next to a contact. The messaging history with this contact is shown. You will be guided through the steps with the help of a voice dialogue. Say the message.

Forwarding messages

Multimedia system:

A message list is shown.

Speak the voice command Forward message. You are guided by the voice dialogue.

Calling a message sender

Multimedia system:

A message list is shown.

- Select > next to a contact. The messaging history with this contact is shown. - Select ... - Select Call.

Using telephone numbers, URLs or email addresses from a text message

Requirements

- An Internet connection is available to call up a URL.

Multimedia system:

A message list is shown.

- Select > next to a contact. The messaging history with this contact is shown. - Select a telephone number or a URL in the message. If a URL is selected the web browser opens. If a telephone number is selected the following options are available: - Call - New message

or

If In-Car Office and the email function are available: select an email address. In-Car Office opens.

① The availability of In-Car Office is country-dependent.

Select an option.

Deleting a message

Multimedia system:

A message list is shown.

Select a contact.

Press and hold on a message.

To delete the message: select Delete.

In-Car Office

In-Car Office functions

Using In-Car Office, you can connect your online services to the multimedia system.

The following functions are available:

- Calendar

Showing appointments and triggering actions, e.g. reading aloud, placing a call, navigating

- E-mail

Reading, reading aloud, creating, answering and forwarding e-mails

- Tasks and calls

Managing tasks and pre-booked calls

- Voice input

Creating appointments/reminders and tasks

Alternatively, you can record text contents via the MBUX voice assistant or via the dictation function.

Further information on the MBUX voice assistant ( page 458).

The zero layer displays notifications or reminders from In-Car Office, such as birthdays or calls due.

(i) Please note that certain functions are only available when the vehicle is stationary.

Calling up In-Car Office

Requirements:

• You have a Mercedes me user account.
- The In-Car Office service is activated in your Mercedes me user account.
- You have a user account with an online service, for example Office 365 or Gmail. In this way, appointments, e-mails and tasks can be synchronised and facilitated.

Multimedia system:

Select In-Car Office. Individual functions from In-Car Office can be called up.

Linking a user account

▶ Select the desired online service.
Scan the QR code.
▶ Follow the instructions on the device.

Selecting calendar functions in In-Car Office Multimedia system:

→ Apps In-Car Office ▶ Calendar

Select an appointment.

The following functions are available:

Read aloud

Call

- Navigate

Delete

Select a function.

i Functions are available if corresponding appointment information is saved.

Examples of this are:

- If a telephone number has been saved for the appointment, Call is available.

- If a navigable address has been saved in the Online Account for the appointment, Navigate is available.

Selecting functions of Tasks & Calls in "In-Car Office"

Multimedia system:

→ ➤ Apps ➤ In-Car Office ▶ Tasks & calls

Select a function for an entry.

The following functions are available:

- Reading aloud 📄 - Placing a call 🔍 This task function requires a telephone number. - Marking as completed √ In the current edit, an entry that has been marked as completed can be marked as open again by removing the tick.

- Deleting - Displaying details

■ Marking an entry as completed in Tasks & Calls Multimedia system:

→ ➤ Apps ➤ In-Car Office ▶ Tasks & calls

▶ Select Tasks & calls. An overview appears. ▶ Select √.

Reading and managing e-mails Multimedia system:

→ ➤ Apps ➤ In-Car Office ➤ E-mail ▶ Select an e-mail. The e-mail is opened.

Additional functions are available:

- Reading e-mails - Answering e-mails (→ page 565) - Forwarding e-mails (→ page 565) - Deleting e-mails

Creating new e-mails

Multimedia system:

→ Apps In-Car Office E-mail

Select + Create e-mail.

Select ⊕.

Enter an e-mail address directly via the keyboard.

or

▶ Select an e-mail address from the contacts.

Contacts can be used from the contacts menu or from linked online services such as Office 365 or Gmail. Further information about the contacts menu ( page 558).

i Please note that e-mails can only be written when the vehicle is stationary.

Enter the subject and text of the e-mail in the corresponding fields with the keypad.

Select Send.

Answering e-mails

Multimedia system:

→ ➤ Apps ➤ In-Car Office ➤ E-mail

Select an e-mail.

Select Reply.

Enter the e-mail text in the corresponding field using the keypad.

Select Send.

(i) Please note that e-mails can only be written when the vehicle is stationary.

Forwarding e-mails

Multimedia system:

→ Apps In-Car Office E-mail

Select an e-mail.

Select Forward.

To forward with attachment: select Forward with attachment.

Contacts can be used from the contacts menu or from linked online services such as Office 365 or Gmail. Further information about the contacts menu ( page 558).

(i) Forwarding with an attachment is only possible if an attachment is available.

To forward without attachment: select Forward without attachment.

Enter the e-mail text in the corresponding field using the keypad.

Select Send.

Operating In-Car Office using the MBUX Voice Assistant and dictation function Multimedia system:

→ ➤ Apps ➤ In-Car Office ➤ E-mail

Operating In-Car Office using the dictation function

The dictation function allows you to dictate text content, such as the subject or text of an e-mail, instead of typing the content using the keyboard

The dictation function is not available everywhere with the full range of functions. For the first-time activation of the function it may be necessary to accept the Mercedes me connect terms of use in your Mercedes me user account.

The following is an example of how you can dictate the subject and text of an e-mail.

Select + Create e-mail.
▶ Add recipients using ⭕.
Select . The dictation function is started.
▶ Dictate the subject and text of the e-mail. After the voice input has been processed, it is shown as text.
Select Send.

Operating In-Car Office using the MBUX Voice Assistant

With the voice control of the MBUX Voice Assistant you can operate various functions of In-Car Office and speak in text contents.

(i) Further information on operating the MBUX Voice Assistant ( page 457).

The following are examples of some voice commands that you can use to operate In-Car Office.

To write new e-mail: say the voice command I want to send an e-mail to John Doe. You are guided by the dialogue.

To reply to an e-mail: say the voice command Reply to e-mail. You are guided by the dialogue.
To forward an e-mail: say the voice command Forward e-mail. Dictate the text of the e-mail.
To show tasks: say the voice command Show my tasks. The tasks are shown.
To create a calendar entry: say the voice command Create a calendar entry tomorrow at 9 a.m.. You are guided by the dialogue.

Apple CarPlay®

Overview of Apple CarPlay®

WARNING Risk of distraction from information systems and communications equipment

If you operate information systems and communication devices integrated in the vehicle

when driving, you could be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle.

Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits.
If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary.

You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the multimedia system.

iPhone ^® functions can be used via the multimedia system using Apple CarPlay ^® . They are operated using the touchscreen, Touch Control or the Siri ^® voice control system. You can activate the voice control system by pressing and holding the button on the multifunction steering wheel.

① By briefly pressing the button on the multifunction steering wheel you can continue to operate the multimedia system using the MBUX voice assistant (→ page 457).

Only one iPhone ^® at a time can be connected via Apple CarPlay ^® with the multimedia system.

Also for use of Apple CarPlay ^® with two phone mode, only one additional mobile phone can be connected using Bluetooth ^® with the multimedia system.

As access to the iPhone ^® is restricted by MBUX when an Apple CarPlay ^® session is active, not all MBUX functions (e.g. dialling from the address book) can be fully provided for the connected device. In this case use Apple CarPlay ^® .

The full range of functions for Apple CarPlay ^® is only available with an Internet connection.

The availability of Apple CarPlay ^® may vary according to the country.

The service provider is responsible for this application and the services and content connected to it.

Apple CarPlay ^® is a registered trademark of Apple Inc.

You can watch an animation on this topic via the following link:

Information on Apple CarPlay®

The Apple CarPlay ^® symbol in the status line switches within Apple CarPlay ^® to the last active display.

If route guidance is active on the multimedia system, it is closed when route guidance is started on the mobile phone.

Connecting an iPhone® via Apple CarPlay® (wired)

Requirements:

- The current version of your device's operating system is being used (see the manufacturer's operating instructions).

For safety reasons, the first activation of Apple CarPlay® on the multimedia system must be carried out when the vehicle is stationary and the parking brake applied.

Connect the iPhone ^® to a USB port on the multimedia system using a suitable cable ( page 597). When the application is connected for the first time, a message about data protection regulations appears.
Select Accept & start if the application should be started.

or

▶ Open the device manager (→ page 553).

Start Apple CarPlay ^® using the relevant symbol next to the device name.

① If applicable, a message about data protection regulations appears.

If required confirm the use of Apple CarPlay® on your iPhone®.

Exiting Apple CarPlay®

Select

or

Press the button on the multifunction steering wheel (MBUX multimedia system).

If Apple CarPlay ^® was not displayed in the foreground before disconnecting, the application starts in the background when reconnected. You can call up Apple CarPlay ^® using the Apple CarPlay ^® symbol in the status line.

Connecting an iPhone ^® via Apple CarPlay ^® (wireless)

Requirements:

• The current version of your device's operating system is being used (see the manufacturer's operating instructions).
• Bluetooth ^ is activated on the device (see the manufacturer's operating instructions).
  • The device is "visible" for other devices.

For safety reasons, the first activation of Apple CarPlay® on the multimedia system must be carried out when the vehicle is stationary and the parking brake applied.

Multimedia system:

→ Phone ▶ Devices
Connect the mobile phone using Bluetooth® (→ page 552). When the application is connected for the first time, a message about data protection regulations appears.
Select Accept & start Apple CarPlay if the application should be started.
If required confirm the use of Apple CarPlay® on your iPhone®.
It is possible at any time to switch between connection via Bluetooth® or Apple CarPlay® (wireless) in the device list.
If you have already connected a mobile phone via Bluetooth ^® , you can connect another iPhone ^® via Bluetooth ^® to use Apple CarPlay ^® via the device manager.

Exiting Apple CarPlay®

Select

or

Press the button on the Touch Control (MBUX multimedia system).
If Apple CarPlay ^® was not displayed in the foreground before disconnecting, the application starts in the background when reconnected. You can call up Apple CarPlay ^® using the Apple CarPlay ^® symbol in the status line.
Calling up Apple CarPlay® sound settings Multimedia system:
Settings ▶ System ▶ Audio
Select the sound settings.
Ending Apple CarPlay®
Select the Apple CarPlay® symbol in the device manager (telephone, media) that is next to the device name of the iPhone®.
i Select the Apple CarPlay® symbol in the device manager in the telephone or media applications if Apple CarPlay® should be restarted.

If Apple CarPlay ^® was not displayed in the foreground before disconnecting, the application starts in the background the next time it is started automatically. You can call up Apple CarPlay ^® using the relevant symbol in the status line.

Android Auto

Android Auto overview

A WARNING Risk of distraction from information systems and communications equipment

If you operate information systems and communication devices integrated in the vehicle when driving, you could be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle.

▶ Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits.
If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road

and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary.

You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the multimedia system.

Mobile phone functions can be used with Android Auto using the Android operating system on the multimedia system. It is operated using the touchscreen, Touch Control or voice control. You can activate the voice control system by pressing and holding the button on the multifunction steering wheel.

By briefly pressing the button on the multifunction steering wheel you can continue to operate the multimedia system using the MBUX voice assistant ( page 457).

Only one mobile phone at a time can be connected via Android Auto with the multimedia system. Also for use of Android Auto with two phone mode, only one additional mobile phone can be connected using Bluetooth ^® with the multimedia system.

The full range of functions for Android Auto is only possible with an Internet connection.

The availability of Android Auto and Android Auto apps may vary according to the country.

The service provider is responsible for this application and the services and content connected to it.

You can watch an animation on this topic via the following link:

Information on Android Auto

The Android Auto symbol in the status line switches within Android Auto to the last active display.

If route guidance is active on the multimedia system, it is closed when route guidance is started on the mobile phone.

■ Connecting a mobile phone via Android Auto (wired)

Requirements:

- The mobile phone supports Android Auto from Android 5.0.

• The current version of the Android Auto app is installed on the mobile phone.
• In order to use the telephone functions, the mobile phone must be connected to the multimedia system via Bluetooth® (→ page 552). If there was no prior Internet connection, this is established with the use of the mobile phone with Android Auto.
  For safety reasons, the first activation of Android Auto on the multimedia system must be carried out when the vehicle is stationary with the parking brake.
  Connect the mobile phone to a USB port on the multimedia system using a suitable cable ( page 597). When the application is connected for the first time, a message about data protection regulations appears.
  Select Accept & start if the application should be started.
  or
  ▶ Open the device manager ( page 553).

Start Android Auto using the relevant symbol next to the device name.

Exiting Android Auto

Select

or

Press the button on the Touch Control (MBUX multimedia system).

If Android Auto was not displayed in the foreground before disconnecting, the application starts in the background when reconnected. You can call up Android Auto using the Android Auto symbol in the status line.

■ Connecting a mobile phone via Android Auto (wireless)

Requirements:

• The current version of your device's operating system is being used (see the manufacturer's operating instructions).
• The device supports the Android Auto function (wireless).
• Bluetooth® is activated on the device (see the manufacturer's operating instructions).

• The device is "visible" for other devices.
- Bluetooth ^® is activated on the multimedia system (→ page 491)
① For safety reasons, the first activation of Android Auto on the multimedia system must be carried out when the vehicle is stationary with the parking brake.
The Android Auto function (wireless) is not available in all countries.

Multimedia system:

Connect the mobile phone using Bluetooth® (→ page 552).
Depending on the device configuration, the query whether Android Auto should be started appears in the media display after connecting the mobile phone via Bluetooth®. In this case, the query must be answered with Yes.
▶ Select Start Android Auto. When the application is connected for the first time, a message about data protection regulations appears.

Select Accept & start.
It is possible at any time to switch between connection via Bluetooth® or Android Auto (wireless) in the device list.
If you have already connected a mobile phone via Bluetooth®, you can connect another mobile phone via Bluetooth® to use Android Auto via the device manager.

Exiting Android Auto

Select .

or

Press the button on the Touch Control (MBUX multimedia system).
If Android Auto was not displayed in the foreground before disconnecting, the application starts in the background when reconnected. You can call up Android Auto using the Android Auto symbol in the status line.
Calling up the Android Auto sound settings Multimedia system:

Select the sound settings.

Ending Android Auto

Select the Android Auto symbol in the device manager (telephone, media) that is next to the device name of the mobile phone.
i Select the Android Auto symbol in the device manager if Android Auto should be restarted.
If Android Auto was not displayed in the foreground before disconnecting, the application starts in the background the next time it is started automatically. You can call up Android Auto using the Android Auto symbol in the status line.

Transferred vehicle data with Android Auto and Apple CarPlay®

Overview of transferred vehicle data

When using Smartphone Integration, certain vehicle data is transferred to the mobile phone. This enables you to get the best out of selected mobile phone services. Vehicle data is not directly accessible.

The following system information is transmitted:

- Software release of the multimedia system

• System ID (anonymised)

The transfer of this data is used to optimise communication between the vehicle and the mobile phone.

To do this, and to assign several vehicles to the mobile phone, a vehicle identifier is randomly generated.

This has no connection to the vehicle identification number (VIN) and is deleted when the multimedia system is reset ( page 498).

The following driving status data is transmitted:

• Transmission position engaged
• Distinction between parked, standstill, rolling and driving
• Day/night mode of the driver's display
- Drive type

The transfer of this data is used to alter how content is displayed to correspond to the driving situation.

The following position data is transmitted:

- Coordinates

• Speed
• Compass direction
  • Acceleration direction

This data is used by the mobile phone to improve the accuracy of the navigation (e.g. for continuation in a tunnel).

Mercedes me calls

Making a call via the overhead control panel

Mercedes me calls are not possible in every country. Find out at a Mercedes-Benz service centre if these functions are available in your country.

Diagram showing a device inside a car's air vent with labeled components and an inset close-up of the internal component.

me button for service or information calls
② SOS button cover
③ SOS button (emergency call system)

Making a Mercedes me call

Press me button ①.

F167 0009 02

Making an emergency call

To open the cover of SOS button ②, press it briefly.
Press and hold SOS button ③ for at least one second.

If a Mercedes me call is active, an emergency call can still be triggered. This has priority over all other active calls.

Information about the Mercedes me call using the me button

A call to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre has been initiated via the me button in the overhead control panel or the multimedia system ( page 572).

Using the voice dialogue system you access the desired service:

• Accident and Breakdown Management
- Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre for general information about the vehicle

You can find information on the following topics:

• Activation of Mercedes me connect
- Operating the vehicle

• Nearest Mercedes-Benz service centre
• Other products and services from Mercedes-Benz

Data is transferred during the connection to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre ( page 575).

Calling the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre using the multimedia system

Requirements

• Access to a GSM network is available.
• The contract partner's GSM network coverage is available in the respective region.
• The vehicle must be switched on so that vehicle data can be transferred automatically.

Multimedia system:

▶ Call Mercedes me connect. After confirmation, the multimedia system sends the required vehicle data. The data transfer is shown in the display.

Then you can select a service and be connected to a specialist at the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre.

Calling the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre after automatic accident or breakdown detection

Requirements:

• The vehicle has detected an accident or breakdown situation.
  • The vehicle is stationary.
  • The hazard warning lights are switched on.

① This function is not available in all countries.

The vehicle can detect accident or breakdown situations under certain circumstances.

Requirements for collision detection in the context of accident management:

• The vehicle is equipped with an anti-theft alarm system (ATA) (code 551).
• The vehicle is equipped with the interior protection (code 882).
• The vehicle is equipped with the Anti-Theft Protection Package (code P54).

- The collision detection service with theft notification has been activated on Mercedes me connect.

If a collision is detected when the tow-away protection is primed on a locked vehicle, you will receive a notification in the multimedia system when you switch the vehicle on.

Find out at a Mercedes-Benz service centre if this functions is available in your country.

In the event an accident or breakdown is detected, the emergency guide shows safety notes in the multimedia system display. This may take a few seconds.

The availability of collision detection depends on the vehicle.

After quitting the emergency guide display on the multimedia system, a prompt appears asking whether you would like to get support from the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre.

Select Call.

- After your agreement, or if the Mercedes me connect service "Accident and Breakdown Management" is active, the vehicle

data is transferred automatically ( page 577).

- The Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre takes your call and organises the breakdown and accident assistance.

You may be charged for these services.

① Depending on the severity of the accident, an automatic emergency call can be initiated. This has priority over all other active calls ( page 582).

In addition, if the Mercedes me connect service "Telediagnostics" is active, a similar prompt can appear after a delay in the event of a breakdown. If you are already in contact with the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre or have already received support, this prompt can be ignored or declined.

If you answer the prompt for support from the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre with Call later, the message will be hidden and appear again later.

The prompt triggered by the Mercedes me connect service "Telediagnostics", can either

be confirmed or declined. After being declined, this will not be shown again.

Arranging a service appointment via a Mercedes me call

If you have activated the maintenance management service, relevant vehicle data is transferred automatically to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre. You will then receive individual recommendations regarding the maintenance of your vehicle.

Regardless of whether you have consented to the maintenance management service, the multimedia system reminds you after a certain amount of time that a service is due. A prompt appears asking if you would like to make an appointment.

To arrange a service appointment: select Call. After your consent, the vehicle data is transferred and the Mercedes-Benz customer centre takes your preferred appointment date. The information is then sent to your desired service outlet.

This will contact you to confirm the appointment and if necessary consult about the details.

If you select Call later after the service message appears, the message is hidden and reappears at a later time.

Giving consent to data transfer during a Mercedes me call

Requirements

- There is an active Mercedes me call via the multimedia system or the me button in the overhead control panel (→ page 572).

The prompt to confirm data transfer does not appear in all countries.

If the Accident and Breakdown Management services are not activated on Mercedes me, the Do you want to transfer your vehicle data and the vehicle's position to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre to improve the processing of your request? message is shown.

The exact phrase may differ depending on the multimedia system installed.

Select Yes.

- The relevant vehicle data is sent automatically ( page 575).

or

▶ Select No and confirm.

- Only call control data is transmitted (→ page 575).

More information on Mercedes me: https://www.mercedes.me

Data transferred during a Mercedes me call

If you initiate a service call using Mercedes me, data is transferred to enable targeted advice and an efficient service.

The following requirements must be fulfilled for the transfer of the data:

• The vehicle is switched on.
- The required data transfer technology is supported by the mobile phone network provider.
- The quality of the mobile connection is sufficient.

Multi-stage transfer depends on the following factors:

• Reason for the initiation of the call
- The available mobile phone transmission technology

• The activated Mercedes me connect services
- The service selected in the voice control system
A prompt for consent to the data transfer only occurs if the corresponding Mercedes me connect service is not activated.
The scope of the data transmitted depends on the vehicle model and vehicle equipment. For technical reasons, not all data is available at all times.

Data transfer if Mercedes me connect services are not activated

If no Mercedes me connect services are activated and the data protection prompt has been confirmed the following data is transmitted:

• Vehicle identification number
• Time of the call
• Reason for the initiation of the call
• Confirmation of the data protection prompt
• Country indicator of the vehicle
- Set language for the multimedia system

- Telephone number of the communication platform installed in the vehicle

If a call is made for a service appointment via the service reminder, the following data is also transmitted:

• Current mileage and maintenance data

If a call is made after automatic accident or breakdown detection using the multimedia system, the following data is also transmitted:

• Current mileage and maintenance data
• Current vehicle location

If Accident and Breakdown Management is called via the voice control system and no service has been activated, but the data protection query has been confirmed, the following data can also be called up from the vehicle by the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre:

• Current vehicle location

If the data protection prompt has been rejected, the following data is transmitted to enable targeted advice and an efficient service:

• Reason for the initiation of the call

• Rejection of the data protection prompt
  • Country indicator of the vehicle
• Set language for the multimedia system
• Telephone number of the communication platform installed in the vehicle

Data transfer if Mercedes me connect services are activated

Only if the respective service is activated will additional incident-specific data be transmitted in the second stage to enable an optimal service.

An overview of the data transferred is contained in the data protection information for the Mercedes me connect services. You can find these in your Mercedes me user account.

Data processing

The data transmitted within the scope of the call is deleted from the processing system after the call is finished, in so far as this data is not being used for other activated Mercedes me connect services.

The incident-specific data is processed and stored in the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre and, if required to process the incident, forwarded to the service partner authorised by the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre. Take note of the data protection information on the Mercedes me Internet page https://www.mercedes.me or in the recorded message immediately after calling the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre.

The recorded message is not available in every country.

Mercedes me connect

Information on Mercedes me connect

Mercedes me connect or individual Mercedes me connect services are not available in every country. Find out at a Mercedes-Benz service centre if these functions are available in your country.

Mercedes me connect consists of multiple services.

You can use the following services via the multi-media system and the overhead control panel, for example:

• Accident and Breakdown Management (me button or situation-dependent display in the multimedia system)
  • Mercedes-Benz Emergency Call System (automatic emergency call and SOS button)

The Mercedes me connect Accident and Breakdown Management and the Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre are available to you around the clock.

The me button and the SOS button can be found on the vehicle's overhead control panel ( page 572).

You can also call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre using the multimedia system ( page 573).

Please note that Mercedes me connect is a Mercedes-Benz service. In emergencies, first call the national emergency services using the standard national emergency service telephone numbers. In emergencies, you can also use the

Mercedes-Benz emergency call system ( page 68).

Please note the Mercedes me connect terms of use and the data protection information for Mercedes me connect. You can find these in your Mercedes me user account.

Information on Mercedes me connect Accident and Breakdown Management

(i) Accident and Breakdown Management is not available in every country. Contact a Mercedes-Benz service centre to find out whether this function is available in your country.

The Accident and Breakdown Management can include the following functions:

• Supplement to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system (→ page 68)
  If necessary, the contact person at the Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre forwards the call to Mercedes me connect Accident and Breakdown Management. Forwarding the call is however not possible in all countries.

• Breakdown assistance by a technician on location and/or the towing away of the vehicle to the nearest Mercedes-Benz service centre You may be charged for these services.

• Addition to the emergency guide after automatic accident or breakdown detection ( page 573)

In the event of a breakdown or accident, further vehicle data is sent which enables optimal support by the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre and the authorised service partner or breakdown assistance.

- Addition to the Mercedes me connect service Telediagnostics

With the Telediagnostics function, specific wear and failure reports are recorded by the service provider, in so far as these can be clearly interpreted and are available through the monitoring of components that are subject to diagnostics.

If your vehicle detects a breakdown or threat of a breakdown, you may be prompted via the multimedia system to contact the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre for further help. This

prompt in the multimedia system only appears when the vehicle is stationary.

These services are subject to technical restrictions such as the mobile phone coverage, mobile network quality and the ability of the processing systems to interpret the transferred data. In some circumstances, this can result in delays or the failure of the information to appear in the multimedia system.

Please note that the service and breakdown call is a Mercedes-Benz service. In emergencies, be sure to contact the usual national emergency number first or use the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system ( page 579).

More information about Mercedes me connect services can be obtained in the Mercedes me Portal: https://me.secure.mercedes-benz.com

Data transferred during Mercedes me connect call services

The data transferred during a Mercedes me connect call depends on:

• The reason for initiation of the call

• The service that is selected in the voice control system
  • The activated Mercedes me connect services

You can find out which data is transferred when using the services in the currently valid Mercedes me connect terms of use and the data protection information for Mercedes me connect. You can find these in your Mercedes me user account.

Mercedes me Apps

Information about Mercedes me

With a Mercedes me user account you have access to Mercedes-Benz services and offers. Availability is dependent both on the country and equipment.

You can obtain further information at a Mercedes-Benz service centre or in the Mercedes me Portal: https://me.secure.mercedes-benz.com

Further information about on-demand features via Mercedes me can be found in the "General notes" section ( page 89).

① Make sure you always keep the Mercedes me. Apps updated.
Calling up the Mercedes me user account
Multimedia system:

→ ➤ Apps ➤ Mercedes me

Vehicle is linked to user account and Mercedes me is available

Select Mercedes me ID. Information about the linked user account appears.

Your vehicle is not linked to the user account

If you do not yet have a Mercedes me user account, you can create one at: https://www.mercedes.me or in the Mercedes me App. A valid email address or phone number is required for this.

Select
Select Apps.
Select Mercedes me.
Follow the instructions on the display to link the user account with the vehicle.

If the Mercedes me App is available on a mobile phone, the vehicle connection can be accomplished using the QR code shown.

Calling up the Mercedes me services

Requirements

- The vehicle is connected with the user account.

Multimedia system:

→ Apps ▶ Mercedes me

Select My services.

The Mercedes me connect services for which you have a valid licence are displayed in alphabetical order.

Ordering or extending Mercedes me connect services

To order or renew Mercedes me connect services, use the Store.

Select
Select Store.

■ Deleting a connection between a user account and the vehicle

Requirements

• The user profile of the user account that was first linked to the vehicle is selected.
• The user profile is synchronised (→ page 482).
  • A Mercedes me PIN has been set.

Multimedia system:

→ Apps ▶ Mercedes me

Select Mercedes me ID.
▶ Select Delete vehicle connection.
① Only the user, whose user account was first connected with the vehicle can delete the connection between all user accounts and the vehicle.
Selecting apps

Requirements:

- Depending on the app, the general terms and conditions are confirmed.

Multimedia system:

→ Apps

Select an app.

The following apps are available, for example:

• Weather
• Browser
  • Additional apps, which are purchased or installed subsequently

① You can also access both of the first two apps via the quick access at Apps.
The available features are country-dependent. Licence fees may be applicable.

The following functions are available for apps, for example:

• Search function
• Filter function, for displaying search results at the current vehicle position or at the destination
  • Display of detailed information
• Read-aloud function
• Setting functions

Mercedes-Benz emergency call system

Information on available emergency call systems

Two types of emergency call system are available to you in the vehicle:

• Mercedes-Benz emergency call system
• 112 emergency call system (EU eCall)

The Mercedes-Benz Emergency Call System is not available in all countries. You can find more information on the regional availability of the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system at: https://www.mercedes-benz-mobile.com/extra/ecall/

The following applies for both emergency call systems:

• The transfer of specific data is required for the intended function of both emergency call systems. This will be explained in the "Data transfer" section ( page 583).

• Both emergency call systems are included as standard equipment in your vehicle and are activated at the factory.

• The use of both emergency call systems is exempt from charges.

• Both emergency call systems only function in areas in which the mobile phone network providers offer mobile phone coverage.

For both systems, insufficient network coverage from the mobile phone network providers can result in an emergency call not being transmitted.

Differences between the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system and the 112 emergency call system (EU eCall)

Mercedes-Benz emergency call system 112 emergency call system (EU eCall)

• The Mercedes-Benz emergency call system is permanently logged in to the mobile phone network.
• Automatic and manual Mercedes-Benz emergency calls are transmitted to a Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre.

In the event that the emergency call centre of the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system cannot be reached (e.g. due to a lack of network coverage), the 112 emergency call is carried out automatically.

• If you decide on the 112 emergency call system (EU eCall) only, then the system only logs in to the mobile phone network after the triggering of a manual or automatic emergency call.
• The 112 emergency call system (EU eCall) transmits automatic and manual emergency calls directly to public coordination centres.

The 112 emergency call system (EU eCall) in your vehicle meets the delegated regulation EU 2017/79. Proper and full functionality of the 112 emergency call system (EU eCall) depends on circumstances beyond the influence of Mercedes-Benz AG. This includes

mobile network coverage and the technical infrastructure of the public reception centres in the respective countries.

Please observe that in the event of a repair genuine Mercedes-Benz batteries must be used which have been certified pursuant to

the delegated regulation EU 2017/79 (Appendix I). Other manufacturers are also permitted provided their batteries are certified according to the delegated regulation EU 2017/79. There is the option of deactivating the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system and using only the

112 emergency call system (EU eCall). Contact address for carrying out deactivation of the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system are the local dealers.

Mercedes-Benz recommends the activation of the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system for the following reasons:

• In emergency situations when abroad, you can also get support in a language you speak.
• Several transmission technologies are used to accelerate the transfer of the accident data and improve reliability of the transmission.
• The Mercedes-Benz emergency call system is permanently logged in to the mobile phone network, which ensures faster placement of the emergency call and faster transfer of the accident data.
  Measures for rescue, recovery or towing away can then be initiated in quickly.
• With a Mercedes-Benz emergency call, the accident data is only transferred to the public coordination centre with the approval of the customer.

In the event of an automatically triggered emergency call in which there is no voice contact, the accident data is transmitted immediately to the public emergency call centre.

- If the Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre is not available, the 112 emergency call is carried out automatically.

Overview of emergency call systems

Both the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system as well as the 112 emergency call system (EU eCall) can help to reduce the time between an accident and the arrival of emergency services at the site of the accident. They help locate an accident site in places that are difficult to access.

Both emergency call systems can initiate an emergency call automatically ( page 582) or manually ( page 582).

Only make emergency calls if you or others are in need of rescue. Do not make an emergency call in the event of a breakdown or a similar situation.

Indicators in the displays

The following messages appear on the central display or the media display of both emergency call systems:

• SOS NOT READY: the vehicle is not switched on or the emergency call system is malfunctioning. This does not necessarily indicate complete failure of the emergency call system. Emergency calls can still be transmitted.
  The display only refers to the vehicle and does not take account of the availability of mobile phone networks and the Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre.

The functional readiness of the emergency call system on the vehicle can be seen when the SOS NOT READY display disappears once the vehicle is switched on.

- SOS: the icon appears in the display during an active emergency call.

If there is a malfunction of the emergency call system, the loudspeakers, microphone, airbag or the SOS button, for example, are faulty.

You can recognise a fault in the emergency call system by the following displays:

• A corresponding message will also appear in the driver's display.
  • The SOS button lights up red continuously.

Triggering an automatic emergency call

Requirements

• The vehicle is switched on.
• The starter battery is sufficiently charged.

Both the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system as well as the 112 emergency call system (EU eCall) automatically initiate an emergency call:

- After activation of the restraint systems such as airbags or seat belt tensioners after an accident

The emergency call has been made:

• A voice connection is established with the emergency call centre.
- A message with accident data is transmitted to the emergency call centre.

The SOS button in the overhead control panel flashes until the emergency call is finished. If no connection can be made to the public emergency services, a corresponding message appears in the display.

▶ Dial the emergency number 112 or the appropriate local emergency call number on your mobile phone.

If an emergency call has been initiated:

• Remain in the vehicle if the road and traffic conditions permit you to do so until a voice connection is established with the emergency call centre.
• On the basis of the call, the emergency call centre decides whether it is necessary to call rescue teams and/or the police to the accident site.
• If no vehicle occupant answers, an ambulance is sent to the vehicle immediately.

Triggering a manual emergency call

To use the SOS button in the overhead control panel: press the SOS button at least one second long ( page 572).

or

To use voice control: use the voice commands of the MBUX voice assistant ( page 461).

The emergency call has been made:

• A voice connection is established with an emergency call centre.
- Remain in the vehicle if the road and traffic conditions permit you to do so until a voice connection is established with the emergency call centre.
- On the basis of the call, the emergency call centre decides whether it is necessary to call rescue teams and the police to the accident site.
- A message with accident data is transmitted to the emergency call centre.

If no connection can be made to the public emergency services, a corresponding message appears in the display.

Dial the emergency number 112 or the appropriate local emergency call number on your mobile phone.

Emergency call system data transfer For both the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system as well as the 112 emergency call system (EU

eCall) data is transferred to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre or the public emergency services call centre.

Depending on the emergency call system ( page 579) activated different data is transmitted to the appropriate emergency call centre.

Transmitted data according to activated emergency call system:

Mercedes-Benz emergency call 112 emergency call

Position data of the vehiclePosition data on the route (a few 100 m before the incident)Direction of travelVehicle identification numberDrive type of the vehicle (e.g. petrol, diesel, CNG, LPG, electric or hydrogen)Number of people detected in the vehicleWhether the emergency call was initiated manually or automaticallyTime of the accidentLanguage setting on the multimedia systemWhether Mercedes me connect is available or notThis is a requirement for the option of forwarding the call to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre if necessary.

Position data of the vehiclePosition data on the route (a few 100 m before the incident)Direction of travelVehicle identification numberDrive type of the vehicle (e.g. petrol, diesel, CNG, LPG, electric or hydrogen)Number of people detected in the vehicleWhether the emergency call was initiated manually or automaticallyTime of the accident

If only the 112 emergency call system (EU eCall) is activated in the vehicle, the accident data is transmitted directly to the public emergency call centre.

For accident clarification purposes, the following measures can be taken up to an hour after the emergency call has been initiated:

• The current vehicle position can be determined.
• A voice connection to the vehicle occupants can be established.
  • Emergency call data can be called up.

For Russia: various functions, e.g. receiving traffic information, cannot be performed for up to two hours after sending an emergency call.

Self-diagnosis function of the emergency call system

Your vehicle checks the functionality of the emergency call system every time the vehicle is switched on. During this time, the SOS button lights up red continuously for five seconds. In the event of a system failure, you will be informed via a text message on the driver's display and the red SOS NOT READY indicator on the central display or media display.

Please, make sure, that during 30 seconds after switching vehicle ON the red indicator SOS NOT READY in the upper right corner of display is switched OFF, this means the emergency call system passed diagnostics successfully.

Starting/ending ERA-GLONASS test mode

Requirements

• The starter battery is sufficiently charged.
• The vehicle is switched on.
- The vehicle has been stationary for at least one minute.

The test mode is currently available in the following countries, for example:

• Russia
• Belarus
• Kazakhstan
• Armenia
• Kyrgyzstan

To start the test mode: press and hold the button on the multifunction steering wheel for at least five seconds.
The test mode is started and automatically ends after the language test has been performed.
To stop manual test mode: switch off the vehicle. The test mode is ended.

Information on data processing

Processing of personal data via the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system All processing of personal data via the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system corresponds with the specifications in the EU Regulation 2016/679 "on the protection of natural entities with regard to the processing of personal data (GDPR)".

The data is solely used by the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system for rescue and recovery in the event of an accident.

The owner of a vehicle, that is equipped with a Mercedes-Benz emergency call system in addition to the 112 emergency call system (EU eCall), has

the right to use the 112 emergency call system instead of the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system.

Contact address for carrying out deactivation of the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system are the local dealers.

Processing of personal data via the 112 emergency call system (EU eCall)

All processing of personal data via the 112 emergency call system (EU eCall) corresponds with the specifications in the EU Regulation 2016/679 "on the protection of natural entities with regard to the processing of personal data (GDPR)" and is based particularly on the necessity of upholding the vital interests of the affected person in accordance with Article 6, Clause 1, Letter d of the GDPR.

The processing of this type of data is strictly limited to the purpose of operating the emergency calls to the standard European emergency call number 112.

Data recipient

The recipients of data that is processed using the 112 emergency call system (EU eCall) are the relevant emergency call inquiry terminals that are specified to first receive and handle emergency calls to the standard European emergency call number 112 by the respective country authorities in whose territory you are located.

Arrangements for data processing

Both emergency call systems are designed so that the following requirements are fulfilled:

• The data contained in the system memory is not accessible outside the system prior to the initiation of an emergency call.
• Both emergency call systems cannot be traced and there is no continuous tracking in normal operation.
• The data in the system's internal memory is automatically and continuously deleted.
• The location data of the vehicle is continuously overwritten in the system's internal memory, so that no more than the last three current locations required for the normal function of the system are available.
• The record of the activity data of both emergency call systems is only kept for as long as

is required to fulfil the purpose of handling the emergency call, and under no circumstances for more than 13 hours after the time that an emergency call is initiated.

Rights of persons affected by the data processing The person affected by the data processing (the vehicle owner) has the right to access the data and if applicable can demand the correction, deletion or barring of data that affects him or her and that the processing of which does not correspond with the GDPR regulations. Each correction, deletion or barring carried out according to this regulation must be shared with the third party to which the data has been transmitted, provided this does not prove to be infeasible and does not incur disproportionate expenditure.

The person affected by the data processing has the right to complain to the appropriate data protection authority should they be of the opinion that their rights have been infringed by the processing of their personal data.

Online and Internet functions

Internet connection

Information on connecting to the Internet

WARNING Risk of distraction from information systems and communications equipment

If you operate information systems and communication devices integrated in the vehicle when driving, you could be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle.

Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits.
If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary.

You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the multimedia system.

WARNING Risk of accident from operating mobile communication equipment while the vehicle is in motion

Mobile communication devices distract the driver from the traffic situation. This can also cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.

As a driver, only operate mobile communication devices when the vehicle is stationary.
As a vehicle occupant, use mobile communication devices only in the designated area, e.g. in the rear passenger compartment.

You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating mobile communication equipment in the vehicle.

Depending on the vehicle's equipment and availability in the country, you can establish an Internet connection in the following ways:

• Vehicles with a communication module:
- Using the communication module including data roaming ( page 586)
- Using Bluetooth ^® or Wi-Fi with a data-enabled mobile phone
• Vehicles without a communication module:
- Using Bluetooth ^® with a data-enabled mobile phone
- Using Wi-Fi with a data-enabled mobile phone

The Internet functions can only be used to a limited degree whilst driving.

Setting up an Internet connection using the communication module

Requirements:

• The vehicle is equipped with a permanently installed communication module.
  • A Mercedes me user account is available.

• The vehicle is linked to a Mercedes me user account.
  • The Entertainment Package is active.
  • The Comfort Data Volume service is active.

Multimedia system:

→ ▶ Settings ▶ System

▶▶ Internet and Bluetooth

▶ Manage Internet access

▶ Select Acquired data package.

For most Mercedes me connect services, data volume is available when purchasing the services. Additional data volume is required to use some functions, e.g. web browser or Wi-Fi hotspot. If the data volume limit is reached, the availability of Mercedes me connect services is limited.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, you can purchase a data package directly from a mobile phone network provider via the Mercedes me Store. To be able to use the data package, you conclude a separate contract with a mobile phone network provider via the Mercedes me Store, which can be terminated at any time and for

which there are no costs. This contract is a prerequisite for using the services from the previously purchased package. The availability of this option is dependent on the country.

If the data package option is not available or can be upgraded, you can purchase data volume directly from the mobile phone network provider for a fee.

Visit a Mercedes-Benz service centre to find out whether it is possible to purchase data volume in your country directly from a mobile phone network provider.
Alternatively, and if available, you can utilise the tethering function of a mobile phone via Wi-Fi or Bluetooth® to use the web browser or Wi-Fi hotspot.
With external Wi-Fi hotspots, which are encrypted via TKIP, online software updates cannot be carried out via the external Wi-Fi hotspot.

■ Disconnecting the automatic Internet connection via communication module

Requirements:

- Wi-Fi or Bluetooth ^ tethering are available in the vehicle.

Multimedia system:

→ Settings ▶ System
▶ Internet and Bluetooth
▶ Manage Internet access
Select the ⋯ settings in the line of Acquired data package.
To disconnect the automatic connection: select the Delete entry option.
The communication module is removed from the list of known hotspots, but can be reconnected manually at any time ( page 586).

The Delete entry option permits the use of purchased data volume to be limited. The system is prevented from automatically establishing a connection to the communication module after this option has been activated.

Setting up an Internet connection via Wi-Fi

Requirements:

• The Wi-Fi function is activated on the multimedia system (→ page 492).
• The Wi-Fi hotspot function is activated on the mobile phone (see the manufacturer's operating instructions).
• Internet access via Wi-Fi is activated (see the manufacturer's operating instructions).

Multimedia system:

Settings System

▶ Internet and Bluetooth

▶ Manage Internet access

① This function is country-dependent.

The mobile phone is listed in the Internet device manager

Select the mobile phone with the Wi-Fi symbol.

The mobile phone is not listed in the Internet device manager

▶ Select Search for access.

Select the mobile phone with the Wi-Fi symbol. It may take a few seconds until the device is found by the Wi-Fi search.
Log in to the Wi-Fi network ( page 492).

The Internet connection via Wi-Fi is restricted or does not function in the following cases:

• The mobile phone is switched off
- Mobile data use is deactivated on the mobile phone
- The Wi-Fi function is deactivated on the multi-media system
- The Wi-Fi function is deactivated on the mobile phone
- Internet access via Wi-Fi is deactivated on the mobile phone

Setting up an internet connection via Bluetooth®

Requirements:

- The mobile phone supports the Bluetooth® profile PAN (Personal Area Network).

• The mobile phone is connected to the multimedia system via Bluetooth ^ (→ page 552).
• Internet access via Bluetooth® is activated (see the manufacturer's operating instructions).

Multimedia system:

Settings System

▶ Internet and Bluetooth
▶ Manage Internet access

This function is country-dependent.

The mobile phone is listed in the Internet device manager

Select the mobile phone with the Bluetooth® symbol.
The mobile phone is not listed in the Internet device manager
▶ Select Search for access.

In the list displayed, all mobile phones already known to the multimedia system are shown. New devices can be set up using the phone application.

Connect the mobile phone using Bluetooth® (→ page 552).
If a new mobile phone is connected using Bluetooth ^® , this is also used for the telephone application.
The Internet connection via Bluetooth ^® is restricted or does not function in the following cases:
• The mobile phone is switched off
- The mobile phone network coverage is insufficient
- Mobile data use is deactivated on the mobile phone
- The Bluetooth ^ function on the multimedia system is switched off and the mobile phone is to be connected via Bluetooth ^
- The Bluetooth ^ function is switched off on the mobile phone and the mobile phone is to be connected via Bluetooth ^
- Neither the mobile phone network nor the mobile phone allow simultaneous use of a telephone and an Internet connection

- The mobile phone has not been enabled for Internet access via Bluetooth®

■ Cancelling Internet access permission for a mobile phone Multimedia system:

Settings System

Internet and Bluetooth

Manage Internet access

Select options ⋯ next to the name of the mobile phone.
▶ Select Delete configuration.
Select Yes.
■ Establishing an Internet connection Multimedia system:
→ Apps
For example, select Browser.

If you select a function that requires an Internet connection and the system is currently offline, a menu opens with a selection of possible Internet accesses as well as all tethering devices that are within range.

Select an Internet access from the list. The Internet connection is established.
Depending on the vehicle equipment and country availability, you can establish an Internet connection via the communication module or connected mobile phones.
The availability of the web browser depends on the country.

Connection status

■ Connection status overview

Depending on the connection status, the following symbols can appear on the media display in the status line:

• Wi-Fi device is selected as Internet access.
• ※ : a Bluetooth ^ device is selected as Internet access.
• Mobile communications standard (e.g. 4G + double arrow symbol): the communication module is selected as the hotspot.

Displaying the connection status

Multimedia system:

Briefly press the status line. The extended status line is displayed.
Briefly press the Internet symbol in the symbol overview. The current connection status is displayed.

Notes on displaying the connection status

• When connecting via Wi-Fi, the connection status and device name are displayed.
• When connecting via a Bluetooth ^ device, the connection status, device name, and network type are displayed.

• In the case of a connection via the communication module the following status information can be shown:

• Type of network

• Status (online, offline, data volumes available or used, limited service)

- For vehicles with a communication module, the connection data of non-user paid services can be displayed via Mercedes me connect.

Web browsers

Calling up a web page

WARNING Risk of distraction from information systems and communications equipment

If you operate information systems and communication devices integrated in the vehicle when driving, you could be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle.

Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits.
If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary.

You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the multimedia system.

Multimedia system:

Browser

Calling up a new web page

Select Search.
Entering a web address.
Select OK.
The function is country-dependent.
No web pages can be displayed on the multimedia system while driving.

Calling up a website from the browser history

To call up the previous page from the history: select <.

Web browser overview

http://mbx.mercedes.mobi/ 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

1 Previous website
2 Next website
3 Update
4 URL
5 Adds/removes bookmarks
6 Options
⑦ Settings
i Under ⋯ you have the following options:

• Tabs
  • Bookmarks & history

• Reading mode

• Share link

• Share content
• Request mobile website

Calling up web browser options Multimedia system:

The following functions are available:

• Bookmarks
• Browsing history
• Entered URLs

Select an option.
Change the settings.

Calling up the web browser settings Multimedia system:

The following functions are available:

• Block popups

• Enable cookies

• Enable Javascript
  Switch a function on ☐ or off ☐.

Deleting browser data Multimedia system:

The following specific browser data can be deleted:

• Cache
• Cookies
• Form data
  Select one of the options shown.

Managing bookmarks Multimedia system:

Select Bookmarks & history.
Select ⋯ after the bookmark. A menu with options opens.

The following options are available:

- Delete entry

- Delete all

Edit

- Share

▶ Select one of the options shown.

Managing tabs

Multimedia system:

Opening a new tab

Select New tab.

Changing tab

▶ Select the icon for the desired tab.

Closing a tab

Press and hold the icon of the tab to be closed until a menu appears.

Select Close. The tab is closed.

Private mode

Switch private mode on ☐ or off ☐. If the private mode is switched on, an icon appears in the input line of the web browser.

① In private mode, neither the history nor cookies are saved. Bookmarks can also be created in private mode.

Sharing URLs from the web browser

Requirements:

- To share via QR code: an app for scanning the QR code is installed on the mobile device.

Multimedia system:

Sharing URLs via QR code

- Select Share link. A QR code appears. - Scan the displayed QR code with a mobile device.

Sharing URLs with another display

Select Share content.

In the menu drag and drop a display to another display. The displayed web page opens on the other display.

① More information on sharing display content:

Setting the web browser in the background Multimedia system:

Tuneln Radio

Calling up TuneIn Radio

Requirements:

• There is a user account at https://www.mercedes.me.
- The vehicle is linked to the Mercedes me user account.
• The TuneIn radio service is activated.

• The data volume is available.
Depending on the country, data volume may need to be purchased.
- A fast Internet connection for data transmission free of interference.

The functions and services are country-dependent. For more information, consult a Mercedes-Benz service centre.

Multimedia system:

Select TuneIn Radio.
The Tuneln Radio menu appears. The last station set starts playing.
The connection quality depends on the local mobile phone reception.

Overview of TuneIn Radio

1 2 3 3 Search 9 8 6 5 4 7 Tunein Radio

① Internet Radio provider
2 Additional information on the current station selection
3 Previous or next station
4 Settings
5 Additional options
6 Favourites

7 Controls playback
8 Station list
Search
Selecting and connecting Tuneln Radio stations Multimedia system:
Select
Select a category.
Select a station.
The connection is established automatically.

or

▶ Select the search field.

Enter a station name.

A relatively large volume of data can be transmitted when using Internet Radio.

Saving/deleting a TuneIn Radio station as a favourite

Multimedia system:

Saving favourites

Select a station.

Deleting favourites

Select a station.

Setting Internet Radio options

Multimedia system:

The following options are available:

• Select Stream: select the stream quality
• Login to Tuneln Account: log in to your Tuneln user account
• Log Out of Account: log out of your TuneIn user account

Select an option.

Media

Information about media mode

Information about supported formats and data storage media

WARNING Risk of distraction when handling data storage media

If you handle a data storage medium while driving, your attention is diverted from the traffic conditions. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle.

Only handle a data storage medium when the vehicle is stationary.

Supported formats and data storage media:

Permissible file systems	FAT32, exFAT, NTFS
Permissible data storage media	USB devices, iPod®/iPhone®, MTP devices, Bluetooth® audio equipment

F167 0009 02

Supported audio formats	MP3, WMA, AAC, WAV, FLAC, ALAC
Supported video formats	MPEG, AVI, MKV, MP4, M4V, WMV

i Observe the following notes:

• The multimedia system supports a total of up to 50,000 files.
• Data storage media up to 2 TB are supported (32-bit address space).
• Due to the large variety of available music and video files regarding encoders, sampling frequency and data transfer rates, playback cannot be guaranteed.
• Due to the wide range of USB devices available on the market, playback cannot be guaranteed for all USB devices.
• Videos up to FullHD (1920x1080) are supported.
• Copy-protected music and video files or DRM (Digital Rights Management) encrypted files cannot be played back.

- MP3 players must support Media Transfer Protocol (MTP).

Information on copyright protection and trademarks

Audio files which you create yourself (e.g. copies of data storage media you make yourself) are generally subject to copyright protection. In many countries, reproductions are not permitted without the prior consent of the copyright holder, even for private use. Make sure that you know about the applicable copyright regulations and that you comply with these.

DO DOLBY AUDIO

Manufactured under licence from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Dolby Audio and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

dts® LISTEN

For DTS Patents, see https://patents.dts.com. Manufactured under licence from DTS Licensing Limited. DTS, the Symbol, & DTS and the Symbol together are registered trademarks, and DTS Tru-Volume is a trademark of DTS, Inc.©. DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

dts®

DTS ^® Connected Radio ^TM

For DTS Patents, see http://patents.dts.com. Manufactured under licence from DTS Licensing Limited. DTS, DTS Connected Radio, and the DTS logo are registered trademarks or trademarks of DTS, Inc. in the United States and other countries.

© 2020 DTS, Inc. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. Lyrics licensed and provided by Lyric Find™. Content licensed and sourced from Radioplayer™.

gracenote. A NIELSEN COMPANY

Gracenote, the Gracenote logo and logotype, "Powered by Gracenote", MusicID and Playlist Plus are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Gracenote, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries.

This product incorporates Spotify software which is subject to 3rd party licences found here: https://www.spotify.com/connect/third-party-licenses

TIDAL

TIDAL and TIDAL logo are registered trademark of Aspiro AB in the European Union and other countries.

Overview of the media menu

1 2 Bluetooth USB Rolling In The Deep Adoption 3 4 LOW 10.00 BUSB 12 Sucher 10 9 8 7 6 5 14 13 12 11 15

Album cover
② Active media source
3 Track and artist
4 Active data storage medium and current track number/track in playback list
5 Repeat
6 Random playback

7 Settings
8 Additional options
9 Additional categories
10 Playlists and categories
⑪ Timeline
12 Media search
13 Next track or fast forward
14 Controls playback
15 Previous track or fast rewind

Connecting the data storage medium to the multi-media system

Connecting USB devices

NOTE Damage caused by high temperatures

High temperatures can damage USB devices.

Remove the USB device after use and take it out of the vehicle.

Connect the USB device to the USB port.

Searching for and authorising a Bluetooth® audio device

Requirements:

• Bluetooth ^ is activated on the multimedia system and audio equipment.
• The audio equipment supports the Bluetooth® audio profiles A2DP and AVRCP.
• The audio equipment is "visible" for other devices.

Multimedia system:

→ Media → Bluetooth

Authorising a new Bluetooth® audio device

▶ Select Connect device.
Detected equipment is displayed in the device list.
Select an audio device.
Authorisation starts. A code is displayed on the multimedia system and on the mobile phone.
If the codes are identical, confirm on the audio equipment.

Select No, only music. The Bluetooth ^® audio equipment is connected with the multimedia system.

Connecting previously authorised Bluetooth® audio equipment

Select a Bluetooth ^® audio device from the list. The connection is being established.

Starting media playback

Requirements:

- A data storage medium is connected to the multimedia system.

Multimedia system:

Select a media source.

Controlling media playback

Multimedia system:

To pause playback: select

To continue playback: select ▶.

To repeat a track: select ↩.

For the repeat function there are the following settings:

- Select once: the active playlist is repeated. - Select twice: the current track is repeated. - Select three times: the repeat function is deactivated.

To play back tracks in random order: select ✗.

To rewind or fast-forward a track: tap on the desired point on the timeline.

To select the next track: select ▷.

To select the previous track: select □.

To scroll through tracks quickly: press and hold ▶ or ▶.

To show the current track list: select 📄.

Additional options for setting media playback

Multimedia system:

Calling up additional options

Select ⋯. The additional options are shown. Select an option.

Media search

Notes about the search function in categories Under 📊 you can search through all available media files. There are several categories available for selection. The categories shown depend on the connected device and data format.

The categories are available as soon as the entire media content has been read in and analysed. Availability of the media search with Android devices may be limited.

Starting a search in categories Multimedia system:

Select a category.

Using the keyword search

Multimedia system:

Media

You can look for content using the keyword search with free text input.

Select 🔒. A keyboard for character entry appears.

Enter the term searched for.

The search begins with the first character entered. The more characters entered the more concrete the search results become.

Select the desired entry from the result list. If a list with several tracks is selected, then this is opened in the search.

To playback all of the tracks in the list, select and then Play now.

Music online

Requirements

• There is an account for the music streaming service.
• A subscription for the music streaming service has been obtained.
• The data volume is available. Depending on the country, data volume may need to be purchased.
• A fast Internet connection for data transmission free of interference.

The functions and services are country-dependent. For more information, consult a Mercedes-Benz service centre.

Multimedia system:

Media

Adding a streaming provider the first time you start the application

▶ Select Online music. The overview of all supported streaming providers appears.

▶ Select a streaming provider.
A QR code is shown on the display.
▶ Scan the QR code with the mobile phone.
Confirm the connection request on the mobile phone.

Adding more streaming providers

Select Online music. The last active streaming provider is active.
Select
Select Music services. The overview of all supported streaming providers appears.
Select a streaming provider. A QR code is shown on the display.
▶ Scan the QR code with the mobile phone.
Confirm the connection request on the mobile phone.

Logging out from a streaming provider

Select Online music. The last active streaming provider is active.
Select

▶ Select Music services.
The overview of all supported streaming providers appears.
Tap on Log out.

Calling up music online

Multimedia system:

Select Online music.

Music playback can be controlled with the Touch Control or by using the media application.

Searching for music in online music

Multimedia system:

Searching for categories in online music

The media content of the streaming provider can be scanned through in the category search. The available categories and the symbol for the category search depend on the streaming provider.

Start the category search.
The list of available categories appears.
Select a category.

Keyword search in online music

You can look for content using the keyword search with free text input.

Select
A keyboard for character entry appears.
Enter the term searched for.

The more characters entered when using the keyword search, the more concrete the search results are.

Select the desired entry from the result list. Depending on the selected hit, playback is started or a lower level in the search is opened.

Calling up online music settings

Multimedia system:

Select
Select Music services.
Select ☐ next to a streaming provider.
Select a setting.

Radio

Switching on the radio

Multimedia system:

Start the application on the multimedia system home screen. The radio menu appears. You will hear the last station played on the last frequency band selected.

Radio overview

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 $LOW $Uschen $LOW $Low Favorite FM/DAB AM 87.5 MHz

Preview image
② Active frequency band
3 Station name or set frequency
4 Next station
5 Settings
6 Sound settings
7 Switches on traffic reports

8 Station list
Search
10 Previous station

Setting the frequency band

Multimedia system:

Select a frequency band or a favourite.

Selecting a radio station

Multimedia system:

Swipe to the left or right on the control element or select a radio station.

Calling up the radio station list

Multimedia system:

Select :≡.

The station list appears.

Swipe the station list up or down.
Select a station.

Searching for radio stations using station names or frequency entry

Multimedia system:

Select
Enter a station name or frequency.
Select a station.

Selecting a recommended radio station

Requirements:

• The multimedia system has gathered sufficient data in order to show station suggestions.
  Multimedia system:

Select
The recommended stations are shown.

Select a suggested station. The selected station is played.

Storing radio stations

Multimedia system:

Select a radio station.

Select □.

Managing favourites

Multimedia system:

Moving stations

Press ⚠★. The list of favourites appears.
Press ⋯ to the far right of the station name.
Select Move.
Move the station to the new position.

Setting station tracking via Internet radio

Requirements:

- A fast Internet connection for data transmission free of interference.

Multimedia system:

Select
Select Internet radio.
Activate or deactivate the Service Following function.

When the function is on, the station is searched for via Internet Radio.

If you are driving out of the station's coverage area and the station is available via Internet radio, the Poor reception. Tap here to switch to Internet radio. message appears on the central display.

Calling up a slide show (FM/DAB radio mode)

Multimedia system:

The slide show displays additional information provided by the station as an image. This can include logos, album covers, music tracks, programmes, news or service information, for example.

The slide show is available for DAB+ channels that broadcast additional information.

Press the station picture on the central display.
The image is enlarged.

Switching the slideshow on or off (FM/DAB radio mode)

Multimedia system:

Switch DAB Slideshow or Expanded Radio Slideshow on ☐ or off ☐. When both slideshows are switched on, the contents of both slideshows alternate.

Activating/deactivating the frequency fix function

Multimedia system:

Activate or deactivate Frequency fix. If the function is activated, the set frequency is kept even if the reception is poor.

Activating/deactivating traffic announcements

Multimedia system:

Select TA. The traffic information is switched on or off.

Activating/deactivating radio announcements

Multimedia system:

Switch on Radio announcements. The selected radio announcements are played.

When Radio announcements are first switched on, Traffic information service (TA), Travel and Warning are preset.

or

Switch off Radio announcements. No radio announcements are played.

Selecting radio announcements

Multimedia system:

Radio announcements

Switch an announcement on √ or off. For example, Traffic information service (TA), Travel or Warning can be selected.

i The radio announcements are not station-dependent.

Setting the traffic information service volume increase

Multimedia system:

Select Navigation & traffic announcements.

Set a value for Traffic announc. vol. increase.

Displaying radio text

Multimedia system:

▶ Active frequency band

▶ Activate or deactivate Radio text information.

Showing or hiding lyrics

① The function is equipment-dependent.

Multimedia system:

Showing lyrics

▶ Select Show lyrics.
The lyrics, album cover, title and artist of the song currently playing on the radio are displayed.
Swipe up or down to go to the bottom or top section of the lyrics.
If no lyrics are available for the song currently playing on the radio, Show lyrics is greyed out.

Hiding lyrics

Select the cross at the top of the lyrics display.

or

Select ↩. The radio menu appears.

Sound

Sound settings

Information about the sound system
The sound system has a total output of 125 W and is equipped with seven speakers. It is available for all functions in the radio and media modes.
The call can also be made from other audio sources. Replace Media with, for example, Radio in the menu path.

Calling up the sound menu

Multimedia system:

Select one of the functions shown to make settings.

■ Adjusting treble, mid-range and bass settings Multimedia system:

Set Treble, Mid or Bass.

Switching loudness normalisation on or off Multimedia system:

▶ Loudness normalisation

The function compensates for differing loudness when changing between audio sources and within an audio source. Several levels are available for this purpose. The currently set level is displayed.

Loudness normalisation can also be switched off.

Switch on one level.

or

▶ Switch off loudness normalisation.

Setting the balance and fader Multimedia system:

Balance and Fader

Adjusting the balance

In the grid shown, move the volume distribution between the right and left speakers in the vehicle. The volume is distributed between the right and left-hand speakers.

Adjusting the fader

In the grid shown, move the volume distribution between the front and rear speakers in the vehicle. The volume is distributed between the front and rear speakers.

Burmester ^® surround sound system

Information about the Burmester® surround sound system

The Burmester ^® surround sound system has a total output of 590 W and is equipped with 13 speakers. It is available for all functions in the radio and media modes.

The call can also be made from other audio sources. Replace Media with, for example, Radio in the menu path.

Calling up the sound menu in the Burmester® surround sound system

Multimedia system:

Select one of the functions shown to make settings.

Adjusting the treble, mid and bass settings on the Burmester® surround sound system Multimedia system:

Set Treble, Mid or Bass.

Switching loudness normalisation in the Burmester® surround sound system on or off Multimedia system:

The function compensates for differing loudness when changing between audio sources and within an audio source. Several levels are available for this purpose. The currently set level is displayed. Switch off the loudness normalisation as follows:

Switch on one level.

or

Switch off the loudness normalisation.

Adjusting the balance and fader in the Burmester® surround sound system Multimedia system:

Balance and Fader

Adjusting the balance

Move the volume distribution between the right and left sides of the vehicle in the grid shown. The volume is distributed between the speakers on the left and right sides in the vehicle.

Adjusting the fader

Move the volume distribution between the front and rear of the vehicle in the grid shown. The volume is distributed between the speakers in the front and rear of the vehicle.

(i) Setting 0 is recommended for high quality music and voice reproduction.

Selecting a sound profile in the Burmester®

surround sound system

Multimedia system:

▶ M

edia

Setting an existing sound profile

Select a sound profile.

Setting up a personal sound profile

Select Personal sound profile and select 📄. Select Reconfigure and restart the setup assistant.

Setting up a personal sound profile for the first time:

▶ Select Personal sound profile.
▶ Open the set-up assistant with Start.
Observe the messages on the display and select the preferred settings. The personal sound profile is created with the selected settings and can be selected in the Sound profiles menu.

Changing individual settings of the personal sound profile at a later date:

Select Personal sound profile, then select and adjust the desired settings.
The availability of a Personal sound profile is dependent on the equipment. The set-up assistant is available when the vehicle is stationary.

Adjusting the sound focus in the Burmester®
surround sound system
Multimedia system:

Select a seat or row of seats for the sound focus. The sound focus is activated.
or
Select the seat or row of seats again. The sound focus is deactivated.

MBUX rear tablet

Information on the MBUX rear tablet

WARNING Risk of accident from operating mobile communication equipment while the vehicle is in motion

Mobile communication devices distract the driver from the traffic situation. This can also cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.

As a driver, only operate mobile communication devices when the vehicle is stationary.
As a vehicle occupant, use mobile communication devices only in the designated area, e.g. in the rear passenger compartment.

You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating mobile communication equipment in the vehicle.

A WARNING Risk of distraction from operating the multimedia system with the MBUX rear tablet

Other vehicle occupants can make changes to the multimedia system with the MBUX rear tablet.

Unwanted changes may distract from traffic conditions and cause an accident.

▶ Block use of the MBUX rear tablet if required.
▶ Activate the child safety lock in the multi-media system.

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped through operation of the MBUX rear tablet

When the MBUX rear tablet is used, seats can be adjusted using the seat control. Vehicle occupants and animals could become trapped.

Make sure that nothing is located within the radius of movement.

A WARNING Risk of injury as a result of the MBUX rear tablet not being secured in the vehicle

If the MBUX rear tablet is loose in the vehicle interior, it could be thrown around and thereby hit vehicle occupants.

▶ Always securely lock the MBUX rear tablet in the bracket intended for that purpose.

The MBUX rear tablet consists of a tablet ( page 607) and a bracket integrated in the rear armrest ( page 608). Comply with the loading guidelines ( page 198).

If the tablet has been paired with the multimedia system, settings can be made on the multimedia system in the rear using the MBUX rear tablet.

The function of operating the multimedia system with the paired tablet, can be blocked in the multimedia system.

You can also use the MBUX rear tablet outside the vehicle.

Overview of the MBUX rear tablet

1 2 3 4 5

① Main menu button
② On/off button
③ Louder/quieter button
4 SD card slot
5 USB port

You can operate the vehicle's multimedia system with the MBUX rear tablet. Operation of the tablet is carried out using the touchscreen (see the manufacturer's operating instructions).

You can also use the MBUX rear tablet independently of the vehicle.

Do not make any changes to the seat settings or multimedia system with the MBUX rear tablet when outside the vehicle.

Updating the software of the MBUX rear tablet

Requirements:

• The MBUX rear tablet is configured via the assistant (Android).
• A Wi-Fi hotspot with unrestricted or sufficient data volume is available.

i Software updates can vary in size and thus lead to additional costs for limited data volumes. Therefore, make sure that you are connected to a Wi-Fi hotspot that has unlimited or sufficient data volume, e.g. the private network at home.

① The use of the vehicle data tariff by external devices is not available in all countries.

Quit the MBUX App.
Open the system settings of the MBUX rear tablet (Android).

In the system settings (Android) you will find among other things the settings for Wi-Fi and software updates.

Connect to the Wi-Fi hotspot. The MBUX rear tablet is connected to the Wi-Fi.
▶ Search for software updates.
Start the software update manually. The MBUX rear tablet is up to date.
You can also have the software of your MBUX rear tablet updated at a Mercedes-Benz service centre.
For more information about software updates for the MBUX rear tablet, please refer to the manufacturer's operating instructions.

Overview of the MBUX rear tablet bracket

Diagram showing a car interior with two labeled switches (1 and 2) and a highlighted button, likely illustrating vehicle control or navigation.

① Releases the MBUX rear tablet from the bracket
② Press and hold the button: switches the MBUX rear tablet on or off Press the button briefly: activates or deactivates the screen of the MBUX rear tablet

The MBUX rear tablet is charged when it is locked into the bracket.

If it is not being used during the journey, make sure the MBUX rear tablet is locked in the bracket designed for this purpose.
If the MBUX rear tablet is not being used during the journey, lock it in the bracket designed for this purpose.

ASSYST PLUS service interval display

Function of the ASSYST PLUS service interval display

The ASSYST PLUS service interval display on the driver's display provides information on the remaining time or distance before the next service due date.

You can hide this service display using the back button ↩ on the steering wheel.

Depending on how the vehicle is used, the ASSYST PLUS service interval display may shorten the service interval, e.g. in the following cases:

• Mainly short-distance driving
• When the engine is often left idling for long periods
  • In the event of frequent cold start phases
• Vehicles with diesel particulate filters: in the event of frequently interrupted regeneration of the diesel particulate filter

Mercedes-Benz recommends avoiding such operating conditions.

You can obtain information concerning the servicing of your vehicle from a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

Displaying the service due date

Driver's display:

Service

The next service due date is displayed.

To exit the display: press the back button on the steering wheel.

Information on regular maintenance work

NOTE Premature wear through failure to observe service due dates

Maintenance work which is not carried out at the right time or incompletely can lead to increased wear and damage to the vehicle.

Adhere to the prescribed service intervals.

Always have the prescribed maintenance work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

Notes on special service requirements

The prescribed service interval is based on normal operation of the vehicle. Have the maintenance work carried out more often than prescribed if operating conditions are difficult or the vehicle is subject to increased stress.

The ASSYST PLUS service interval display is only an aid. It is the responsibility of the driver of the vehicle to have maintenance work carried out more often than prescribed due to actual operating conditions and/or stresses.

Examples of arduous operating conditions:

• Regular city driving with frequent intermediate stops
- Mainly short-distance driving
- Frequent operation in mountainous terrain or on poor road surfaces

• When the engine is often left idling for long periods
  • Operation in particularly dusty conditions and/or if air-recirculation mode is frequently used

In these or similar operating conditions, have the interior air filter, air filter, engine oil and oil filter, for example, changed more frequently. Check the tyres more frequently if the vehicle is operated under increased stress. Further information can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop.

Battery disconnection periods

The ASSYST PLUS service interval display can calculate the service due date only when the battery is connected.

Display and note down the service due date on the driver display before disconnecting the battery ( page 610).

Maintenance Management

Notes about Maintenance Management

If the Maintenance Management service is activated, relevant data is automatically transferred to the Mercedes-Benz customer centre.

The customer centre transmits the data to the service partner that you have entered on the Mercedes me website at: http://www.mercedes.me. You will then receive individual recommendations regarding the maintenance of your vehicle.

The calculation of the optimal transmission time of the maintenance request to the service partner is subject to technical limitations that may cause the maintenance recommendation to be perceived as too early or too late or not to be made at all. In this case, you can conveniently arrange a maintenance appointment with the customer centre via the maintenance reminder in the multimedia system.

① Maintenance Management and the maintenance reminder in the multimedia system are not available in every country. Contact a

F167 0009 02

Mercedes-Benz service centre to find out whether this function is available in your country.

Data transferred when using Maintenance Management

When the service is activated, relevant data is automatically transferred to determine the required scope of maintenance as well as fault detection and fault rectification.

Details on data transfer can be found in the data protection information for the Mercedes me connect services. These can be found at: https://www.mercedes.me under "My Mercedes me account", "Terms of use".

① Maintenance Management and the maintenance reminder in the multimedia system are not available in every country.

Telediagnostics

Notes about Telediagnostics

① This service is not available in all countries.

The vehicle can detect if certain wear parts need to be replaced or if malfunctions have occurred in vehicle systems. If the Telediagnostics service is activated, relevant data is automatically transmitted to the manufacturer. If fault conditions are detected by the vehicle system self-diagnosis, the system transmits recommendations for action to the Mercedes-Benz customer centre depending on the fault detected. The customer centre transmits the data to the service partner that you have entered on the Mercedes me website at: http://www.mercedes.me.

For selected faults, the notification that a malfunction has been detected may appear in the multimedia system with a request to contact the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre. From this message, a call can be made directly to the customer centre for assistance.

The transmission of a notification to the multimedia system depends on the country, vehicle model and equipment and requires a fast data connection, over which the service provider has no influence.
① Reliable fault detection is subject to technical limitations. Therefore, only a limited selection

of faults can be detected and recommendations for action transmitted to the customer centre and the service partners. Mercedes-Benz AG is continuously working on the expansion of this service. The fault detection depends on the country, vehicle model and equipment.

Data transferred when using Telediagnostics

When the service is activated, relevant data is automatically transferred to determine the required scope of maintenance as well as fault detection and fault rectification.

Details on data transfer can be found in the data protection information for the Mercedes me connect services. These can be found at: https://www.mercedes.me under "My Mercedes me account", "Terms of use".

The scope of the data transmitted depends on the vehicle model and equipment. For technical reasons, not all data is available at all times.

Engine compartment

Opening and closing the bonnet

DANGER Risk of fatal injuries when carrying out maintenance work during the charging process

During the charging process, the high-voltage on-board electrical system is under high voltage.

Do not perform any maintenance work during the charging process.

WARNING Risk of accident due to driving with the bonnet unlocked

The bonnet may open and block your view.

▶ Never release the bonnet when driving.
Before every trip, ensure that the engine bonnet is locked.

WARNING Risk of accident and injury when opening and closing the bonnet

The bonnet may suddenly drop into the end position.

There is a risk of injury for anyone in the engine bonnet's range of movement.

Do not open or close the bonnet if there is a person in the bonnet's range of movement.

WARNING Risk of burns when opening the bonnet

If you open the bonnet in the event of an overheated engine or fire in the engine compartment, the following situations may occur:

• You may come into contact with hot gases.
- You may come into contact with other escaping hot operating fluids.
Before opening the bonnet, allow the engine to cool down.

In the event of a fire in the engine compartment, keep the bonnet closed and call the fire service.

WARNING Risk of injury due to moving parts

Components in the engine compartment may continue to run or start unexpectedly even when the drive system is switched off.

Observe the following if you must open the bonnet:

▶ Switch off the vehicle.
▶ Never touch the danger zones surrounding moving components, e.g. the rotation area of the fan.
Remove jewellery and watches.
Keep items of clothing and hair away from moving parts.

WARNING Risk of injury from touching components under voltage

The ignition system and the fuel injection system operate at high voltage. You could receive an electric shock.

▶ Never touch ignition system or fuel injection system components when the vehicle is switched on.

The live components include the following, for example:

• Ignition coils
• Fuel injectors
  • Electric lines to the ignition coils and the fuel injectors

WARNING Risk of burns from hot component parts in the engine compartment

Certain component parts in the engine compartment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the cooler and parts of the exhaust system.

Allow the engine to cool down and only touch component parts described in the following.

WARNING Risk of injury from using the windscreen wipers when the bonnet is open

If the windscreen wipers start moving when the bonnet is open, you could be trapped by the wiper linkage.

Always switch off the windscreen wipers and the vehicle first if you need to open the bonnet.

Opening the bonnet

Interior view of a car showing the steering wheel and dashboard, with an inset highlighting a component (no text or symbols present)

To release the bonnet, pull on handle ①.

Illustration of a car hood with an inset showing a mechanical component (no text or symbols)

Push handle ② of the bonnet catch upwards and lift the bonnet until it opens automatically.

Closing the bonnet

NOTE Damage to the bonnet

If the bonnet is closed manually, there is a risk of dents.

Do not close the bonnet manually.

Lower the bonnet to a height of around 20 cm and then allow it to fall, applying a little force as you let it go.
If the bonnet can still be lifted slightly, open the bonnet again and close it with a little more force until it engages correctly.

Engine oil

- Checking the engine oil level using the driver's display

Requirements

• The engine has been warmed up.
• The vehicle is parked on a level surface.
• The engine is running at idle speed.
• The bonnet is closed.

Determining the engine oil level can take up to 30 minutes with a normal driving style and even longer with an active driving style.

Driver's display:

Service

The engine oil level is shown.

One of the following messages will appear on the driver's display:

• Engine oil level Measuring now...: the engine oil level cannot be determined yet.
Repeat the request after a maximum of 30 minutes' driving.
- Engine oil level OK and the bar display for indicating the engine oil level on the driver's display is green and is between "min" and "max": the engine oil level is correct.
- Engine oil level Top up 1,0 l and the bar display for indicating the engine oil level on the driver's display is yellow and is below "min":
Add 1 l of engine oil.
- Engine oil level Reduce and the bar display for indicating the engine oil level on the driver's display is yellow and is above "max":
Drain off any excess engine oil that has been added. To do so, consult a qualified specialist workshop.
• For engine oil level, switch on vehicle

Switch on the vehicle to check the engine oil level.
• Engine oil level System inoperative: The oil level sensor is defective or not connected.
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
• Engine oil level System currently inoperative
Close the bonnet.
Topping up engine oil

A DANGER Risk of fatal injuries when carrying out maintenance work during the charging process

During the charging process, the high-voltage on-board electrical system is under high voltage.

Do not perform any maintenance work during the charging process.

WARNING Risk of burns when opening the bonnet

If you open the bonnet in the event of an overheated engine or fire in the engine compartment, the following situations may occur:

• You may come into contact with hot gases.
- You may come into contact with other escaping hot operating fluids.
Before opening the bonnet, allow the engine to cool down.
In the event of a fire in the engine compartment, keep the bonnet closed and call the fire service.

⚠ WARNING Risk of injury due to moving parts

Components in the engine compartment may continue to run or start unexpectedly even when the drive system is switched off.

Observe the following if you must open the bonnet:

▶ Switch off the vehicle.
▶ Never touch the danger zones surrounding moving components, e.g. the rotation area of the fan.
Remove jewellery and watches.
Keep items of clothing and hair away from moving parts.

WARNING Risk of burns from hot component parts in the engine compartment

Certain component parts in the engine compartment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the cooler and parts of the exhaust system.

Allow the engine to cool down and only touch component parts described in the following.

WARNING Risk of fire and injury from engine oil

If engine oil comes into contact with hot component parts in the engine compartment, it may ignite.

Make sure that no engine oil is spilled next to the filler opening.
▶ Allow the engine to cool off and thoroughly clean the engine oil from component parts before starting the vehicle.

NOTE Engine damage caused by an incorrect oil filter, incorrect oil or additives

Do not use engine oils or oil filters which do not correspond to the specifications explicitly prescribed for the service intervals.
▶ Follow the instructions on the service interval display for changing the engine oil and observe the prescribed change intervals.
Do not use additives.

NOTE Damage caused by topping up too much engine oil

Excess engine oil can damage the engine or catalytic converter.

Have excess engine oil removed at a qualified specialist workshop.

Depending on driving style, the vehicle consumes up to 0.8 litres of oil per 1000 km. The oil consumption may also be higher than this when the vehicle is new or if you frequently drive at high engine speeds.
Depending on the engine, the cap may be located in different positions in the engine compartment.

Diagram of a car engine with labeled control knob and component details, including Chinese text annotations.

▶ Turn cap ① anti-clockwise and remove it.
Top up the engine oil.
Replace cap ① and turn it clockwise until it engages.
▶ Check the oil level again ( page 30).

Checking the coolant level

A DANGER Risk of fatal injuries when carrying out maintenance work during the charging process

During the charging process, the high-voltage on-board electrical system is under high voltage.

Do not perform any maintenance work during the charging process.

WARNING Risk of burns when opening the bonnet

If you open the bonnet in the event of an overheated engine or fire in the engine compartment, the following situations may occur:

• You may come into contact with hot gases.
- You may come into contact with other escaping hot operating fluids.
Before opening the bonnet, allow the engine to cool down.

In the event of a fire in the engine compartment, keep the bonnet closed and call the fire service.

WARNING Risk of injury due to moving parts

Components in the engine compartment may continue to run or start unexpectedly even when the drive system is switched off.

Observe the following if you must open the bonnet:

▶ Switch off the vehicle.
▶ Never touch the danger zones surrounding moving components, e.g. the rotation area of the fan.
Remove jewellery and watches.
Keep items of clothing and hair away from moving parts.

WARNING Risk of burns from hot component parts in the engine compartment

Certain component parts in the engine compartment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the cooler and parts of the exhaust system.

Allow the engine to cool down and only touch component parts described in the following.

WARNING Risk of scalding from hot coolant

If you open the cap, you could be scalded.

Let the motor cool down before opening the cap.
When opening the cap, wear protective gloves and safety glasses.
▶ Open the cap slowly to release pressure.

Park the vehicle on a level surface.
Check the coolant temperature display on the driver's display.
The coolant temperature must be below 70°C.
Slowly turn cap ① anti-clockwise to release overpressure.
Continue turning cap ① anti-clockwise and remove it.

The coolant level is correct in the following cases:

• If the engine is cold, the coolant is up to marker bar ②.
• If the engine is warm, the coolant is up to 1.5 cm over the marker bar ②.
  If necessary, refill with coolant that has been approved for Mercedes-Benz.

Topping up the windscreen washer system

DANGER Risk of fatal injuries when carrying out maintenance work during the charging process

During the charging process, the high-voltage on-board electrical system is under high voltage.

Do not perform any maintenance work during the charging process.

WARNING Risk of burns when opening the bonnet

If you open the bonnet in the event of an overheated engine or fire in the engine compartment, the following situations may occur:

• You may come into contact with hot gases.
• You may come into contact with other escaping hot operating fluids.
  Before opening the bonnet, allow the engine to cool down.
  In the event of a fire in the engine compartment, keep the bonnet closed and call the fire service.

⚠ WARNING Risk of injury due to moving parts

Components in the engine compartment may continue to run or start unexpectedly even when the drive system is switched off.

Observe the following if you must open the bonnet:

▶ Switch off the vehicle.
▶ Never touch the danger zones surrounding moving components, e.g. the rotation area of the fan.
Remove jewellery and watches.
Keep items of clothing and hair away from moving parts.

WARNING Risk of burns from hot component parts in the engine compartment

Certain component parts in the engine compartment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the cooler and parts of the exhaust system.

Allow the engine to cool down and only touch component parts described in the following.

WARNING - Risk of fire and injury due to windscreen washer concentrate

Windscreen washer concentrate is highly flammable. It could ignite if it comes into contact

with hot engine component parts or the exhaust system.

Make sure that no windscreen washer concentrate spills out next to the filler opening.

Diagram of car interior with labeled components and a numbered inset showing a gear-like device component.

Remove cap ① by the tab.
Top up the washer fluid.

Keeping the air/water duct free

Keep the area between the bonnet and the windscreen free of deposits, e.g. ice, snow or leaves.

Cleaning and care

Information on washing the vehicle in a car wash

WARNING Risk of an accident due to reduced braking power after washing the vehicle

Braking efficiency is reduced after washing the vehicle.
After the vehicle has been washed, brake carefully while paying attention to the traffic conditions until braking power has been fully restored.

! NOTE Damage from automatic braking

If one of the following functions is activated, the vehicle will brake automatically in certain situations:

• Active Brake Assist
• Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
- HOLD function
• Active Parking Assist

To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate these systems in the following or similar situations:

When towing.
In a car wash.

NOTE Damage due to unsuitable car wash

Before driving into a car wash make sure that the car wash is suitable for the vehicle dimensions.

▶ Ensure there is sufficient ground clearance between the underbody and the guide rails of the car wash.
▶ Ensure that the clearance width of the car wash, in particular the width of the guide rails, is sufficient.

To avoid damage to your vehicle when using a car wash, ensure the following beforehand:

• Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is deactivated.
  • The HOLD function is switched off.
• The 360° camera or the reversing camera is switched off.
• The side windows and sliding sunroof are completely closed.
  • The outside mirrors are folded in.
• The blower for the ventilation and heating is switched off.
• The windscreen wiper switch is in position 0.
• The key is at a minimum distance of 3 m from the vehicle. Otherwise, the tailgate could open unintentionally.

• For car washes with a conveyor system:
- Neutral N is engaged.
If you would like to leave the vehicle while it is being washed, make sure the key is located in the vehicle. Park position P will otherwise be engaged automatically.
To prevent damage to the tyres or rims, drive straight and in to the centre of the guide rails of the car wash.
If, after the car wash, you remove the wax from the windscreen and wiper rubbers, this will prevent smearing and reduce wiper noise.

Car wash mode

In car wash mode, the vehicle is prepared for driving into an automatic car wash. Car wash mode can be activated at a speed of up to 20 km/h ( page 622).

The following settings are adjusted when car wash mode is activated:

• The outside mirrors will be folded in.
- To prevent the windscreen washer system from starting up automatically, the rain sensor will be deactivated.

F167 0009 02

• The rear window wiper will be deactivated.
- The windows and the sliding sunroof will be closed, if necessary.
- The air conditioning system will be set to air-recirculation mode.
- Parking Assist PARKTRONIC will be deactivated.
- Vehicles with 360° camera: The front image will be activated after approximately eight seconds.
- Vehicles with AIRMATIC: The vehicle will be raised to the maximum possible chassis level(→ page 391).
If raising takes longer than 25 seconds, the following message will appear on the driver's display:
Preparation for car wash incomplete See central display. After some time, the vehicle will automatically continue being raised.
- Vehicles with E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL: The vehicle will be raised to the maximum possible chassis level(→ page 404).

If raising takes longer than 25 seconds, the following message will appear on the driver's display:

Preparation for car wash incomplete See central display. After some time, the vehicle will automatically continue being raised.

If one of the settings cannot be selected, this will be shown by the X symbol next to the respective setting.

Above a speed of 20 km/h, car wash mode will be deactivated automatically.

The following settings will be reset when car wash mode is deactivated:

• The outside mirrors will be folded out.
• The rain sensor will be activated.
• The rear window wiper will be activated.
- The air conditioning system will be set to fresh air mode.
- Parking Assist PARKTRONIC will be reset to the previously selected setting.
- The windows and the sliding sunroof will remain closed.

• Vehicles with 360° camera: The front image will be deactivated at speeds above 18 km/h.
  • Vehicles with AIRMATIC: The vehicle will be lowered to the previously set chassis level.
• Vehicles with E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL: The vehicle will be lowered to the previously set chassis level.

Activating/deactivating car wash mode

Requirements

• The vehicle is stationary.
• The vehicle is switched on.

Multimedia system:

Activating car wash mode

▶ Select Car wash mode.
Select Activate.

If one of the settings cannot be selected, this is shown by an X next to the respective setting.

① For an overview of the settings made when you activate car wash mode ( page 31).

Deactivating car wash mode

▶ Select Switch off.
The settings for car wash mode will be reset.
Car wash mode is automatically deactivated as soon as a speed of 20 km/h is exceeded.

Notes on using a high-pressure cleaner

WARNING Risk of an accident when using high-pressure cleaners with round-spray nozzles

The water jet can cause externally invisible damage.

Components damaged in this way may unexpectedly fail.

Do not use a high-pressure cleaner with round-spray nozzles.
Have damaged tyres or chassis parts replaced immediately.

To avoid damage to your vehicle, observe the following when using a high-pressure cleaner:

• The key is at a minimum distance of 3 m from the vehicle. Otherwise, the tailgate could open unintentionally.
• Maintain a distance of at least 30 cm to the vehicle.
• Vehicles with decorative foils: Parts of your vehicle are covered with a decorative foil. Maintain a distance of at least 70 cm between the foil-covered parts of the vehicle and the nozzle of the high-pressure cleaner. Move the nozzle of the high-pressure cleaner around whilst cleaning. The water temperature of the high-pressure cleaner must not exceed 60°C.
• Observe the information on the correct distance in the equipment manufacturer's operating instructions.
• Do not direct the nozzle of the high-pressure cleaner directly at sensitive parts, e.g. tyres, gaps, electrical components, batteries, illuminants or louvres.

Washing the vehicle by hand

NOTE Engine damage due to water ingress
Take care not to point the water jet directly towards the air inlet grille below the bonnet.

Observe the relevant legal requirements (e.g. in some countries, washing by hand is permitted only in specially designated wash bays).

▶ Use a mild cleaning agent (e.g. car shampoo).
Wash the vehicle with lukewarm water using a soft car sponge. When doing so, do not expose the vehicle to direct sunlight.
Carefully hose the vehicle off with water and dry using a chamois.
i Observe the notes on the care of car parts ( page 625).

Notes on paintwork/matt finish paintwork care

To avoid damaging the paintwork and interfering with the driving assistance systems, please observe the following notes:

F167 0009 02

Paint

• Insect remains: Soak with insect remover and rinse off the treated areas afterwards.
  • Bird droppings: Soak with water and rinse off afterwards.
• Tree resin, oils, fuels and greases: remove by rubbing gently with a cloth soaked in petroleum ether or lighter fluid.
• Coolant and brake fluid: remove with a damp cloth and clean water.
  • Tar stains: use tar remover.
• Wax: use silicone remover.
• Do not attach stickers, films or similar materials. Only have film attached to the bumper at a qualified specialist workshop.
• Remove dirt immediately, where possible.

Matt finish

• Only use care products approved for Mercedes-Benz.

• Do not attach stickers, films or similar materials. Only have film attached to the bumper at a qualified specialist workshop.

• Do not polish the vehicle and light-alloy wheels.

• Only use car washes that correspond to the latest engineering standards.
• Do not use car wash programmes with a final hot wax treatment.
• Do not use paint cleaners, buffing or polishing products, gloss preservers, e.g. wax.

In the event of paintwork damage:

• Always have paintwork repairs carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
• Make sure the radar sensors function ( page 343).

Notes on cleaning decorative films

Observe the "Notes on paintwork/matt finish paintwork care" ( page 623). They also apply to matt decorative films.

Observe the notes on cleaning decorative films to avoid damage.

Cleaning

• For cleaning, use plenty of water and a mild cleaning agent without additives or abrasive substances (e.g. a car shampoo approved for Mercedes-Benz).
• Remove dirt as soon as possible. Avoid rubbing too hard in order not to damage the decorative film irreparably.
• If there is dirt on the finish or if the decorative film is dull: use the paint cleaner recommended and approved for Mercedes-Benz.
• Insect remains: soak with insect remover and rinse off the treated areas afterwards.
• Bird droppings: soak with water and rinse off afterwards.
• To prevent water stains, dry a film-wrapped vehicle with a soft, absorbent cloth after every car wash.

Avoiding damage to the decorative film

• The service life and colouring of decorative films are impaired by:
• Sunlight

• Temperature (e.g. hot air blower)

• Weather conditions

• Stone chippings and dirt
  Chemical cleaning agents
• Oily products
• Do not use polish on matt decorative film. Polishing will have the effect of shining the film-wrapped surface.
• Do not treat matt or structured decorative films with wax. Permanent stains may occur.

Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affected by corrosion and damage caused by incorrect care cannot always be completely repaired. In this case, contact a qualified specialist workshop. You can obtain more information on care and cleaning agents from the manufacturer.

In the case of film-wrapped surfaces, visual differences may occur between the surfaces that were not protected by a decorative film after a decorative film has been removed.

i Have work or repairs to decorative films carried out at a qualified specialist workshop (e.g. at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre).

Notes on care of car parts

WARNING Risk of entrapment if the wind-screen wipers are switched on while the windscreen is being cleaned

If the windscreen wipers are set in motion while you are cleaning the windscreen or wiper blades, you can be trapped by the wiper arm.

Always switch off the windscreen wipers and the vehicle before cleaning the windscreen or wiper blades.

To avoid damage to the vehicle, observe the notes on cleaning and care of the following car parts:

Wheels and rims

• Use water and acid-free alloy wheel cleaners.
- Do not use acidic alloy wheel cleaners to remove brake dust. This could damage wheel bolts and brake components.
- To avoid corrosion of the brake discs and pads, drive the vehicle for a few minutes after cleaning before parking it. The brake discs and pads will warm up and dry out.

Windows

NOTE Damage to electronic components due to excess fluids

When cleaning the windows from the inside, fluids such as cleaning agents or water may run down and get behind trim parts of the vehicle interior and cause damage to electronic components.

Use cleaning agents as sparingly as possible.
▶ Immediately absorb any excess fluids.

• Clean the windows inside and outside with a damp cloth and with a cleaning agent recommended for Mercedes-Benz.
• Do not use dry cloths or abrasive or solvent-based cleaning agents to clean the insides of windows.
  ① After changing the wiper blades or treating the vehicle with wax, clean the windscreen thoroughly with cleaning agents recommended for Mercedes-Benz. Failure to observe the

application instructions may result in damage, smear marks or dazzling spots.

Remove external fogging or dirt on the windscreen in front of the multifunction camera. Otherwise, driving systems and driving safety systems may be impaired or unavailable ( page 343).

Wiper blades

• Move the wiper arms into the replacement position ( page 29).
• With the wiper arms folded out, clean the wiper blades with a damp cloth.
  ① Make sure that the wiper blades are coated. The coating may leave residue on a cloth. Do not rub the wiper blades excessively or clean them too often.

Exterior lighting

• Clean the lenses with a wet sponge and mild cleaning agent (e.g. car shampoo).
• Use only cleaning agents or cleaning cloths that are suitable for plastic lenses.

Vehicle socket (high-voltage battery)

• Use clean water and a soft cloth to clean the vehicle socket.
• Do not use high-pressure cleaners or cleaning agents such as soap.

Sensors

• Clean the sensors in the front and rear bumpers with a soft cloth and car shampoo (→ page 343).
• When using a high-pressure cleaner, maintain a minimum distance of 30 cm.

Running boards

• Use water and acid-free cleaning agents.
- Do not clean the aluminium trim inserts of the running board with alkaline or acidic cleaning agents such as wheel cleaners. Do not use acidic alloy wheel cleaners to remove brake dust. The aluminium trim inserts could otherwise be damaged.

Reversing camera and 360° camera

- Open the camera cover with the multimedia system ( page 416).

• Use clean water and a soft cloth to clean the camera lens.
• Do not use a high-pressure cleaner.

Trailer hitch

• Observe the notes on care in the trailer hitch manufacturer's operating instructions.
• Do not clean the ball neck with a high-pressure cleaner or solvent.
• Remove traces of rust on the ball (e.g. using a wire brush).
• Remove dirt with a lint-free cloth.
  • After cleaning, lightly oil or grease the ball head.

Before using trailers with anti-torsional coupling, observe the manufacturer's operating instructions.

Notes on care of the interior

WARNING Risk of injury from plastic parts breaking off after the use of solvent-based care products

Care and cleaning products containing solvents can cause surfaces in the cockpit to become porous. When the airbags are deployed, plastic parts may break away.

Do not use any care or cleaning products containing solvents to clean the cockpit.

WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injuries from bleached seat belts

Bleaching or dyeing seat belts can severely weaken them.

This can, for example, cause seat belts to tear or fail in an accident.

▶ Never bleach or dye seat belts.

To avoid damage to the vehicle, observe the following notes on cleaning and care:

Seat belts

• Clean with lukewarm soapy water.
• Do not use chemical cleaning agents.
• Do not dry by heating them to over 80^ C or exposing them to direct sunlight.

Display

• Switch off the display and let it cool down.
• Clean the surface carefully with a microfibre cloth and a suitable display care product (TFT-LCD).
• Do not use any other agents.

Head-up display

- Clean with a soft, non-static, lint-free cloth.

- Do not use cleaning agents.

Plastic trim

• Clean with a damp microfibre cloth.
• For heavy soiling: use a cleaning agent recommended for Mercedes-Benz.
• Do not attach stickers, films or similar materials.

- Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellent or sun cream to come into contact with the plastic trim.

Real wood and trim elements

• Clean with a microfibre cloth.
• Black piano-lacquer look: clean with a damp cloth and soapy water.
• For heavy soiling: use a cleaning agent recommended for Mercedes-Benz.
• Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents, polishes or waxes.

Roof lining

- Clean with a brush or dry shampoo.

Carpet

- Use a carpet and textile cleaning agent recommended for Mercedes-Benz.

Steering wheel made of genuine leather or DINA-MICA

NOTE Damage caused by wrong cleaners

Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents such as tar remover or wheel

cleaner; neither should you use polishes or waxes. Otherwise you may damage the finish.

• Clean with a damp cloth and 1% soapy water solution and then wipe with a dry cloth.
• For heavy soiling: use a cleaning agent recommended for Mercedes-Benz.
  • Leather care: use a leather care agent that has been recommended for Mercedes-Benz.
• Do not allow the leather to become too damp.
• Do not use a microfibre cloth.

Leather is a natural product. It exhibits natural surface properties such as differences in structure, marks caused by growth and injury or subtle colour differences. These surface properties are characteristics of leather and not material faults. Leather is also subject to a natural ageing process during which the surface properties change.

Genuine leather seat covers

• Vacuum up dirt such as crumbs or dust and then clean the seat covers with a damp cotton

cloth and wipe down with a dry cloth. Regularly clean the seat covers.

• For heavy soiling: use a leather care agent recommended for Mercedes-Benz aftercare.
  • Leather care: use a leather care agent that has been recommended for Mercedes-Benz.
• Do not use a microfibre cloth.
• Do not allow the leather to become too damp.
• Do not use oil-based cleaning and care products.

Leather is a natural product. It exhibits natural surface properties such as differences in structure, marks caused by growth and injury or subtle colour differences. These surface properties are characteristics of leather and not material faults. Leather is also subject to a natural ageing process during which the surface properties change.

Waves or wrinkling in the seat cover may occur due to the stress on the seat; this is caused by the natural leather material. Regular cleaning and care of the leather reduces soiling, wear marks and ageing damage and thus significantly extends its life

span. Clothing that can leave stains (e.g. jeans) may discolour the leather.

DINAMICA seat covers

• Vacuum up dirt such as crumbs or dust and then use a damp cloth to clean.
• Do not use a microfibre cloth.

Imitation leather seat covers

• Vacuum up dirt such as crumbs or dust and then use a damp cotton cloth and a 1% soap solution to clean the entire seat cover. Do not spot clean.
• Use cleaning and care products recommended for Mercedes-Benz.
• Do not use a microfibre cloth.
• Do not use oil-based cleaning and care products.

Fabric seat covers

- Vacuum up dirt such as crumbs or dust and then use a damp microfibre cloth and a 1% soap solution to clean the entire seat cover. Do not spot clean.

• Use cleaning and care products recommended for Mercedes-Benz.
• Do not use oil-based cleaning and care products.

Emergency

Removing the safety vest

Diagram of car interior showing two labeled parts with numbered annotations, likely illustrating a component or location.

There are safety vest compartments in the door compartments of all doors where safety vests can be stored.

To remove: pull out the safety vest bag ① by the loop ②.

Open the safety vest bag ① and pull out the safety vest.
Put back: Fold up the safety vest, roll it up and stow it in the safety vest bag ^① .
Slide the safety vest bag ① along the lower edge of the armrest into the warning vest compartment. Make sure that the loop ② hangs out to be easy to reach.

For a new safety vest, remove the packaging film before sliding it into the safety vest compartment. Otherwise, it may cause unintentional slipping out or make it difficult to remove.

Observe the legal requirements in the individual countries.

1 Max. 15 x 2 40° 3 6 7 2

① Maximum number of washes
2 Maximum wash temperature
Do not bleach
Do not iron
Do not tumble dry
6 Do not dry clean
⑦ Class 2 safety vest

The requirements defined by the legal standard are only fulfilled if the safety vest is the correct size and is fully closed.

Replace the safety vest in the following cases:

• The reflective strips are damaged or dirty

• The maximum permissible number of washes is exceeded
• The fluorescence property decreases, e.g. due to permanent exposure to sunlight.

Dispose of the safety vest in an environmentally friendly way:

- Please contact your local waste disposal company.

Warning triangle

■ Removing the warning triangle (not plug-in hybrid)

Vehicles with two rows of seats

Top-down view of a car engine bay with a highlighted internal component (no text or symbols)

Remove warning triangle 1.

Vehicles with three rows of seats

Line drawing of a car backrest with a circular traffic sign indicating '1' (no text or symbols on the diagram itself)

Remove warning triangle ①.
■ Removing the warning triangle (plug-in hybrid)

Line drawing of a car interior showing the backrest and side panel, with no text or symbols present.

The warning triangle is located in the load compartment on the right behind service flap ①.
Setting up the warning triangle

graph TD
    A["1"] --> B["2"]
    B --> C["3"]
    C --> D["3"]
    style A fill:#000,stroke:#fff,color:#fff
    style B fill:#000,stroke:#fff,color:#fff
    style C fill:#000,stroke:#fff,color:#fff
    style D fill:#000,stroke:#fff,color:#fff

Fold side reflectors ① upwards to form a triangle and attach at the top using upper press-stud ②.
Fold legs ③ down and out to the side.

First-aid kit (soft sided) overview

Line drawing of a car backrest with a highlighted internal component (no text or symbols)

Depending on the vehicle equipment, the first-aid kit (soft-sided) may be located in the following places in the vehicle:

• The first-aid bag ① is in the stowage net in the load compartment on the left or right.
• Plug-in-Hybrid: The first-aid kit is in the door tray of the driver's door. (→ page 46)

Removing the fire extinguisher

A WARNING Risk of accident due to an incorrectly secured fire extinguisher in the driver's footwell

A fire extinguisher may impede pedal travel or block a depressed pedal.

This jeopardises the operating and road safety of the vehicle.

The fire extinguisher can be flung around and injure the driver or other vehicle occupants.

Always store and secure the fire extinguisher in the bracket.
Do not remove the fire extinguisher while driving.

Diagram of car seatbelt mechanism with numbered labels pointing to key components

Left-hand drive vehicle: pull tab 1 upwards.
Right-hand drive vehicle: pull tab ① downwards.
Remove fire extinguisher ②.

Flat tyre

Notes on flat tyres

WARNING Risk of accident due to a flat tyre

A flat tyre severely affects the driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking of the vehicle.

Tyres without run-flat characteristics:

Do not drive with a flat tyre.
Change the flat tyre immediately with an emergency spare wheel or spare wheel. Alternatively, consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Tyres with run-flat characteristics:

Observe the information and warning notes on MOExtended tyres (run-flat tyres).

In the event of a flat tyre, the following options are available depending on your vehicle's equipment:

• Vehicles with MOExtended tyres: it is possible to continue the journey for a short period of time. Make sure you observe the notes on MOExtended tyres (run-flat tyres) (→ page 632).

• Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit: you can seal the tyre so that it is possible to continue the journey for a short period of time. To do this, use the TIREFIT kit (→ page 634).

• Vehicles with Mercedes me connect: you can make a call for breakdown assistance via the overhead control panel in the case of a breakdown (→ page 572).
  • All vehicles: change the wheel ( page 665).

Notes on MOExtended tyres (run-flat tyres)

WARNING Risk of accident when driving in limp-home mode

Driving in emergency mode impairs the handling characteristics of the vehicle.

Do not exceed the permissible maximum speed of the MOExtended tyres.
Avoid any abrupt steering and driving manoeuvres as well as driving over obstacles (kerbs, pot holes, off-road). This applies, in particular, to a loaded vehicle.
▶ Stop driving in the emergency mode if you notice:
- banging noise

• vehicle vibration
  • smoke which smells like rubber
  • continuous ESP ^® intervention
  • cracks in the tyre sidewalls
  After driving in emergency mode, have the rims checked by a qualified specialist workshop with regard to their further use.
  The defective tyre must be replaced in every case.

With MOExtended tyres (run-flat tyres), you can continue to drive your vehicle even if there is a total loss of pressure in one or more tyres. However, the tyre affected must not show any clearly visible damage.

You can recognise MOExtended tyres by the MOExtended marking which appears on the side wall of the tyre.

Vehicles with tyre pressure monitoring system: MOExtended tyres may only be used in conjunction with an activated tyre pressure monitoring system.

If a pressure loss warning message appears in the driver's display, proceed as follows:

• Check the tyre for damage.
  • If driving on, observe the following notes.

Driving distance possible in emergency mode after the pressure loss warning:

Load condition Driving distance possible in emergency mode
Partially laden 80 km
Fully laden 30 km

The driving distance possible in emergency mode may vary depending on the driving style. Observe the maximum permissible speed of 80 km/h.

If a tyre has gone flat and cannot be replaced with an MOExtended tyre, you can use a standard tyre as a temporary measure.

Storage location of the TREFIT kit (not plug-in hybrid)

The TREFIT kit is located under the load compartment floor.

Vehicles with two rows of seats

Technical diagram of a vehicle engine compartment with labeled parts 1 and 2

① Tyre sealant bottle
② Tyre inflation compressor

Vehicles with three rows of seats

Diagram of a car backrest with labeled parts, showing two numbered components for identification.

① Tyre sealant bottle
② Tyre inflation compressor

Depending on the vehicle version, the TREFIT kit may also be located in other places under the load compartment floor.

You can find information on the power category (LK) and/or electrical data on the back of the tyre inflation compressor:

• LK3 - 12 V/20 A, 240 W, 1 kg

At a distance of approximately 1 m to the tyre inflation compressor and approximately 1.6 m above the ground, the following sound pressure levels apply:

• Emission sound pressure level L_PA 84 dB(A)
  • Sound power level L_WA 92 dB(A)

The tyre inflation compressor is maintenance-free. If there is a malfunction, please contact a qualified specialist workshop.

Storage location of the TREFIT Kit (plug-in hybrid)

1

F167 0009 02

TIREFIT kit ① is located on the left-hand side of the load compartment. Observe the loading guidelines in the vehicle Owner's Manual.

You can find information on the power category (LK) and/or electrical data on the back of the tyre inflation compressor:

• LK2 - 12 V/15 A, 180 W, 0.8 kg

At a distance of approximately 1 m to the tyre inflation compressor and approximately 1.6 m above the ground, the following sound pressure levels apply:

• Emission sound pressure level L_PA 83 dB (A)
  • Sound power level L_WA 91 dB (A)

The tyre inflation compressor is maintenance-free. If there is a malfunction, please contact a qualified specialist workshop.

Using the TREFIT kit

Requirements:

- Tyre sealant bottle and tyre inflator compressor are ready for use ( page 62, 63).

• TREFIT sticker is present.
- Gloves are present.

You can use TIREFIT tyre sealant to seal perforation damage of up to 4 mm, particularly those in the tyre contact surface. You can use TIREFIT in outside temperatures down to -20 °C.

WARNING Risk of accident when using tyre sealant

The tyre sealant may be unable to seal the tyre properly, especially in the following cases:

• there are large cuts or punctures in the tyre (larger than damage previously mentioned)
  • the wheel rims have been damaged
  • after journeys with very low tyre pressure or with flat tyres
  Do not continue driving.
  Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

WARNING Risk of injury and poisoning from tyre sealant

Tyre sealant is hazardous to health and causes irritation. Do not allow it to come into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing, and do not swallow it. Do not inhale any vapours. Keep the tyre sealant away from children.

Observe the following if you come into contact with the tyre sealant:

Rinse off the tyre sealant from your skin using water immediately.
If tyre sealant gets into your eyes, thoroughly rinse them using clean water immediately.
If tyre sealant has been swallowed, thoroughly rinse out your mouth immediately and drink plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting and seek medical attention immediately.
Change out of clothing which has come into contact with tyre sealant immediately.

If an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical attention immediately.

NOTE Overheating due to the tyre inflation compressor running too long

Do not run the tyre inflation compressor for longer than ten minutes without interruption.

Comply with the manufacturer's safety notes on the sticker on the tyre inflation compressor.

Have the tyre sealant bottle replaced in a qualified specialist workshop every five years.

Do not remove any foreign objects which have entered the tyre.

MAX 80 50 Km/h Mph TIR/REFI ① ②

Affix part ① of the TIREFIT sticker to the instrument cluster within the driver's field of vision.
Affix part ② of the TREFIT sticker near the valve on the wheel with the defective tyre.

Diagram of a medical or electrical device with numbered components and labeled parts

Pull plug ④ with the cable and hose ⑤ out of the tyre inflation compressor housing.
Push the plug of hose ⑤ into flange ⑥ of tyre sealant bottle ① until the plug engages.
Place tyre sealant bottle ① head downwards into recess ② of the tyre inflation compressor.

7 8

Remove the valve cap from valve ⑦ on the faulty tyre.
Screw filling hose ⑧ onto valve ⑦.

Diagram of an electrical testing device with numbered components for identification and assembly steps

Insert plug ④ into a 12-V-socket in your vehicle.
Switch on the vehicle.
Switch on the tyre inflation compressor using On/Off switch ③.

The tyre is inflated. First, tyre sealant is pumped into the tyre. The pressure may briefly rise to approximately 500 kPa (5.0 bar/73 psi).

Do not switch off the tyre inflation compressor during this phase!

Let the tyre inflation compressor run for a maximum of ten minutes. The tyre should then have attained a tyre pressure of at least 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi).

If tyre sealant leaks out, make sure you clean the affected area as quickly as possible. It is preferable to use clean water.

If you get tyre sealant on your clothing, have it cleaned as soon as possible with perchloroethylene.

If, after ten minutes, a tyre pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has not been attained:

• Switch off the tyre inflation compressor.
• Unscrew the filling hose from the valve of the defective tyre.
  Please note that tyre sealant may leak out when unscrewing the filling hose.
  Drive forwards or in reverse very slowly for approximately 10 m.

Pump up the tyre again. After a maximum of ten minutes the tyre pressure must be at least 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi).

⚠ WARNING Risk of accident due to the specified tyre pressure not being attained

If the specified tyre pressure is not attained after the specified time, the tyre is too badly damaged. The tyre sealant cannot repair the tyre in this instance.

The braking and driving characteristics may be greatly impaired.

Do not continue driving.
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

If, after ten minutes, a tyre pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has been attained:

▶ Switch off the tyre inflation compressor.
Unscrew the filling hose from the valve of the defective tyre.

WARNING Risk of accident from driving with sealed tyres

A tyre temporarily sealed with tyre sealant impairs the handling characteristics and is not suitable for higher speeds.

Adapt your driving style accordingly and drive carefully.
Do not exceed the maximum speed limit with a tyre that has been repaired using tyre sealant.

Observe the maximum permissible speed of 80 km/h for a tyre sealed with tyre sealant.

NOTE Staining from leaking tyre sealant

After use, excess tyre sealant may leak out from the filling hose.

Therefore, place the filling hose in the plastic bag that contained the TREFIT kit.

ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental pollution caused by environmentally irresponsible disposal

Tyre sealant contains pollutants.

Have the tyre sealant bottle disposed of professionally, e.g. at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

Stow the tyre sealant bottle and the tyre inflation compressor.
▶ Pull away immediately.
Stop driving after approximately ten minutes and check the tyre pressure using the tyre inflation compressor. The tyre pressure must now be at least 130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi).

WARNING Risk of accident due to the specified tyre pressure not being attained

If the specified tyre pressure is not reached, the tyre is too badly damaged. The tyre sealant cannot repair the tyre in this instance.

The braking and driving characteristics may be greatly impaired.

Do not continue driving.
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Countries that have Mercedes-Benz Service24h: you will find a sticker with the telephone number, e.g. on the B-pillar on the driver's side.

To increase the tyre pressure: switch on the tyre inflation compressor.

Diagram showing two labeled components (1 and 2) of a device with gauges and tool icons, likely illustrating a measurement or testing setup.

To reduce the tyre pressure: press pressure release button ① next to manometer ②.

When the tyre pressure is correct, unscrew the filling hose from the valve of the sealed tyre.
Screw the valve cap onto the valve of the sealed tyre.
Pull the tyre sealant bottle out of the tyre inflation compressor.
The filling hose stays on the tyre sealant bottle.
Drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop and have the tyre, tyre sealant bottle and filling hose replaced there.

Battery (vehicle)

Notes on the 12 V battery

WARNING Risk of an accident due to work carried out incorrectly on the battery

Work carried out incorrectly on the battery can, for example, lead to a short circuit. This can restrict functions relevant for safety systems and impair the operating safety of your vehicle.

You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular:

• when braking
• in the event of abrupt steering manoeuvres and/or when the vehicle's speed is not adapted to the road conditions
  In the event of a short circuit or a similar incident, contact a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
  Do not drive on.
  Always have work on the battery carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

• Further information on ABS ( page 345)
• Further information on ESP®(→ page 346)

For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use batteries which have been approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.

All vehicles except vehicles with a lithium-ion battery

WARNING Risk of explosion due to electrostatic charge

Electrostatic charge can ignite the highly explosive gas mixture in the battery.

To discharge any electrostatic charge that may have built up, touch the metal vehicle body before handling the battery.

The highly flammable gas mixture is created while the battery is charging and during starting assistance.

WARNING Danger of chemical burns from the battery acid

Battery acid is caustic.

Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing.
Do not lean over the battery.
Do not inhale battery gases.
▶ Keep children away from the battery.

Immediately rinse battery acid off thoroughly with plenty of clean water and seek medical attention immediately.

All vehicles

ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage due to improper disposal of batteries

Batteries contain pollutants. It is illegal pose of them with the household rub-

Dispose of batteries in an entally responsible manner. narged batteries to a qualified workshop or to a collection used batteries.

If you have to disconnect the 12 V battery, contact a qualified specialist workshop.

Comply with safety notes and take protective measures when handling batteries.

Risk of explosion if the 12 V battery is used improperly.

Fire, naked flames and smoking are prohibited when handling the battery. Avoid creating sparks.

Electrolyte or battery acid is corrosive. Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Wear suitable protective clothing, in particular gloves, an apron and a face mask. Immediately rinse electrolyte or acid splashes off with clean water. Consult a doctor immediately.

Do not place heavy objects on the surface of the battery or use the battery to support a person in any way.

Wear safety glasses.

Observe this Owner's Manual.

Observe the following if you do not intend to use the vehicle over an extended period of time:

• Non-plug-in hybrid: switch to standby mode (→ page 342, 343).
• Alternatively: connect the battery to a battery charger approved by Mercedes-Benz or consult a qualified specialist workshop to disconnect the battery.

Notes on the 48 V battery

WARNING Risk of an accident due to work carried out incorrectly on the battery

Work carried out incorrectly on the battery can, for example, lead to a short circuit. This can restrict functions relevant for safety systems and impair the operating safety of your vehicle.

You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular:

• when braking
• in the event of abrupt steering manoeuvres and/or when the vehicle's speed is not adapted to the road conditions
  In the event of a short circuit or a similar incident, contact a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
  Do not drive on.
  Always have work on the battery carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

• Further information on ABS ( page 345)
• Further information on ESP®(→ page 346)

For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use batteries which have been approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.

ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage due to improper disposal of batteries

Batteries contain pollutants. It is illegal, pose of them with the household rub-

Li-ion Dispose of batteries in an environmentally responsible manner. Take discharged batteries to a qualified specialist workshop or to a collection point for used batteries.

If you have to disconnect the 48 V battery, contact a qualified specialist workshop.

Comply with safety notes and take protective measures when handling batteries.

Risk of explosion if the 48 V battery is used improperly.

The surface of the 48 V battery may be hot.

Fire, naked flames and smoking are prohibited when handling the battery. Avoid creating sparks.

Electrolyte or battery acid is corrosive. Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Wear suitable protective clothing, in particular gloves, an apron and a face mask. Immediately rinse off splashes of electrolyte or acid with plenty of clean water. Consult a doctor immediately.

Do not place heavy objects on the surface of the battery or use the battery to support a person in any way.

Do not perform any work on the battery. Always have any work on the battery carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Do not disconnect the battery yourself. Do not remove the battery yourself. Do not attempt to open the battery.

Keep children away.

Wear safety glasses.

Observe this Owner's Manual.

Observe the following if you do not intend to use the vehicle over an extended period of time:

- Non-plug-in hybrid: switch to standby mode (→ page 342, 343).

Notes on the high-voltage battery

DANGER Risk of fire and explosion from excessive internal pressure of the high-voltage battery

In the event of a vehicle fire, flammable gas can escape and ignite.

▶ Stop the charging process immediately in case of unusual odours, smoke or burn marks.

• Leave the danger zone immediately. Secure the danger zone at a sufficient distance.
• Call the fire service.

Observe the notes on charging the high-voltage battery ( page 316).

Risk of explosion.

Fire, naked flames and smoking are prohibited when handling the battery. Avoid creating sparks.

Electrolyte or battery acid is corrosive. Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Wear suitable protective clothing, in particular gloves, an apron and a face mask. Immediately rinse electrolyte or acid splashes off with clean water. Consult a doctor immediately.

Wear safety glasses.

Keep children away.

Observe this Owner's Manual.

Notes on starting assistance and charging the 12 V battery

All vehicles

When charging the battery and during starting assistance, always use the jump-start connection point in the engine compartment.

NOTE Damage to the battery due to over-voltage

When charging using a battery charger without a maximum charging voltage, the battery or the on-board electronics may be damaged.

Only use battery chargers with a maximum charging voltage of 14.8 V.

WARNING Risk of explosion due to the ignition of hydrogen gas

If there is a short circuit or sparks are created, there is a danger of hydrogen gas igniting when you charge the battery.

Make sure that the POSITIVE terminal of a connected battery does not come into contact with vehicle parts.
▶ Never place metal objects or tools on a battery.
When connecting and disconnecting the battery, always observe the sequence of battery terminals described.
During starting assistance, always take care to connect only battery terminals of identical polarity.
During starting assistance, observe the sequence described for connecting and disconnecting the jump leads.
Do not connect or disconnect the battery terminals with the engine running.

WARNING Risk of explosion due to explosive mixture of gases

An explosive mixture of gases can escape from the battery during charging and starting assistance.

▶ Fire, naked flames, smoking and creating sparks must be avoided.
▶ Make sure there is adequate ventilation.
Do not stand over the battery.

WARNING Risk of explosion from a frozen battery

A discharged battery may freeze at temperatures slightly above or below freezing point. During starting assistance or battery charging, battery gas can be released.

▶ Always allow a battery to thaw before charging it or performing starting assistance.

If the indicator/warning lamps in the instrument cluster do not light up at low temperatures, it is very likely that the discharged battery has frozen.

F167000902

In this case you may neither jump-start the vehicle nor charge the battery.

The service life of a battery that has been thawed may be dramatically shortened. The starting characteristics may be impaired, especially at low temperatures.

It is recommended that you have a thawed battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Plug-in hybrid

If your vehicle has been started with starting assistance, it may not be possible to use the electric drive for approximately 30 minutes.

Starting assistance is not considered to be a normal operating condition.

All vehicles

NOTE Damage caused by numerous or extended attempts to start the engine

Numerous or extended attempts to start the engine may damage the catalytic converter due to non-combusted fuel.

Avoid numerous and extended attempts to start the engine.

Observe the following points during starting assistance and when charging the battery:

• Only use undamaged jump lead/charging cables with a sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps.
• Non-insulated parts of the terminal clamps must not come into contact with other metal parts while the jump lead/charging cable is connected to the battery/jump-start connection point.
• The jump lead/charging cable must not come into contact with any parts which may move when the engine is running.
  • Always make sure that neither you nor the battery is electrostatically charged.
• Keep away from fire and naked flames.
• Do not lean over the battery.

Observe the additional following points when charging the battery:

• Only use battery chargers tested and approved for Mercedes-Benz.
• Read the battery charger's operating instructions before charging the battery.

Observe the additional following points during starting assistance:

• Starting assistance may only be provided using vehicles, batteries or other jump start devices with a nominal voltage of 12 V.
  • The vehicles must not touch.
• Vehicles with a petrol engine: jump-start the vehicle only when the engine and exhaust system are cold.

Starting assistance and charging the 12 V battery

Requirements

• The vehicle is secured with the electric parking brake.
• Vehicles with automatic transmission: the transmission is in position P.

F167 0009 02

• The vehicle and all electrical consumers are switched off.
  • The bonnet is open.

Diagram showing car engine components with labeled parts and a Mercedes-Benz logo, likely illustrating engine wiring or repair instructions.

Example: engine compartment

Slide cover ① of POSITIVE contact ② on the jump-starting connection point in the direction of the arrow.

Connect POSITIVE contact ② on your vehicle to the positive terminal of the donor battery using the jump lead/charging cable. Always begin with POSITIVE contact ② on your own vehicle first.
During starting assistance: start the engine of the donor vehicle and run at idle speed.
Connect the negative terminal of the donor battery and earth point ③ of your own vehicle by using the jump lead/charging cable. Begin with the donor battery first.
During starting assistance: start the engine of your own vehicle.
During the charging process: start the charging process.
During starting assistance: let the engines run for several minutes.
During starting assistance: before disconnecting the jump lead, switch on an electrical consumer on your own vehicle, e.g. the rear window heater or lighting.

When the starting assistance/charging process is complete, perform the following steps:

First, remove the jump lead/charging cable from earth point ③ and the negative terminal of the donor battery, then POSITIVE contact ② and the positive terminal of the donor battery. Begin each time with the contacts on your own vehicle first.
After removing the jump lead/charging cable, close cover ① of POSITIVE contact ②.

Plug-in hybrid: if your vehicle has been started with starting assistance, it may not be possible to use the electric drive for approximately 30 minutes.

Further information can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop.

Replacing the 12 V battery

Observe the notes on the 12 V battery ( page 639).

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the 12 V battery replaced at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

Observe the following notes if you want to replace the battery yourself:

• Always replace a faulty battery with a battery which meets the specific vehicle requirements.
  The vehicle is equipped with an AGM (Absorbent Glass Mat) technology battery or a lithium-ion battery. Full vehicle functionality is only guaranteed with an AGM battery or lithium-ion battery. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use batteries which have been tested and approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.
• Carry over detachable parts, such as vent hoses, elbow fittings or terminal covers from the battery being replaced.
• Make sure that the vent hose is always connected to the original opening on the side of the battery.
  Fit any existing or supplied cell caps.
  Otherwise, gases or battery acid could escape.
• Make sure that detachable parts are reconnected in the same way.

Tow-starting or towing away

Overview of the permitted towing methods (not plug-in hybrid)

NOTE Damage from automatic braking

If one of the following functions is activated, the vehicle will brake automatically in certain situations:

• Active Brake Assist

• Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
- HOLD function
• Active Parking Assist

To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate these systems in the following or similar situations:

When towing.
In a car wash.

Mercedes-Benz recommends transporting your vehicle in the case of a breakdown, rather than towing it away.

For towing with both axles on the ground, use a tow rope or tow rod. Do not use tow bar systems.

NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to towing away incorrectly

Observe the instructions and notes on towing away.

Permitted towing methods

Vehicle equipment/towing method
	Both axles on the ground Front axle raised Rear axle raised
4MATIC vehicles Yes, for a maximum of 50 km at 50 km/h		No No
Vehicles with rear wheel drive Yes, for a maximum of 50 km at 50 km/h		No Yes, if the steering wheel is secured in the centre position with a steering wheel lock

F167 0009 02

Mercedes-Benz recommends transporting your vehicle in the case of a breakdown, rather than towing it away.

NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to towing away incorrectly

Observe the instructions and notes on towing away.

Observe the information on towing and transporting the vehicle in the vehicle Operator's Manual.

Permitted towing methods

Vehicle equipment/towing method
	Both axles on the ground Front axle raised Rear axle raised
Plug-in hybrid vehicles Yes, for a maximum of 50 km at 50 km/h		No Yes, if the steering wheel is secured	in the centre position with a steering wheel lock

If the multifunction display is not working or the Towing not permitted See Owner's Manual display message appears, only transporting is permitted.

If the vehicle is located in a danger zone, it can be recovered from the danger zone despite the display message or the display not working.

It must not be towed further than 50 m with both axles on the ground. A towing speed of 10 km/h must not be exceeded. Beyond these limits, only transporting is permitted.

Permitted towing methods (plug-in hybrid)

Mercedes-Benz recommends transporting your vehicle in the case of a breakdown, rather than towing it away.

For towing with both axles on the ground, use a tow rope or tow rod. Do not use tow bar systems.

NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to towing away incorrectly

Observe the instructions and notes on owing away.

In the following situations, only transporting the vehicle is permitted:

• the driver's display is not working
- the Towing not permitted See Owner's Manual display message appears in the driver's display

Permitted towing methods

Both axles on the ground	Front axle raised	Rear axle raised
Yes, for a maximum of 50 km at 50 km/h	No No

Exception: if the vehicle is located in a danger zone, it can be recovered from the danger zone despite the display message or the display not working.

It must not be towed further than 50 m with both axles on the ground. A towing speed of 10 km/h must not be exceeded. Beyond these limits, only transporting is permitted.

Towing away the vehicle with both axles on the ground

Observe the notes on the permitted towing methods ( page 646).
Plug-in hybrid: observe the notes on the permitted towing methods ( page 647).
Make sure that the battery is connected and charged.

A discharged battery has the following effects:

• the vehicle cannot be switched on

• the electric parking brake cannot be released or applied

• The transmission cannot be shifted to position N or P
  If the transmission cannot be shifted to position [N], or the multifunction display in the instrument cluster does not show anything, the vehicle must be transported away (→ page 650). A towing vehicle with lifting equipment is required for vehicle transportation.

NOTE Damage due to towing away at excessively high speeds or over long distances

The drivetrain could be damaged when towing at excessively high speeds or over long distances.

A towing speed of 50 km/h must not be exceeded.
A towing distance of 50 km must not be exceeded.

WARNING Risk of accident when towing a vehicle which is too heavy

If the vehicle to be tow-started or towed away is heavier than the permissible gross mass of your vehicle, the following situations can occur:

• the towing eye may become detached.
- the vehicle/trailer combination may swerve or overturn.
Before tow-starting or towing away, check if the vehicle to be tow-started or towed away exceeds the permissible gross mass.

Information on the permissible gross mass of the vehicle can be found on the vehicle identification plate ( page 784).
Do not open the driver's door or front passenger door as the transmission could otherwise shift to position P automatically.
Fit the towing eye ( page 652).
Fasten the towing device.

NOTE Damage due to incorrect connection of the tow bar

Only connect the tow rope or tow bar to the towing eyes.

① You can also attach the tow bar to the trailer hitch.

Deactivate the automatic locking mechanism ( page 156).
Do not activate the HOLD function.
Deactivate tow-away protection ( page 174).
Deactivate Active Brake Assist ( page 377).
Shift the transmission to position N (→ page 302).
Release the electric parking brake.

A WARNING Risk of accident due to limited safety-related functions during the towing process

Safety-related functions are limited or no longer available in the following situations:

• the vehicle is switched off.
- the brake system or power steering system is malfunctioning.
- the energy supply or the on-board electrical system is malfunctioning.

When your vehicle is towed away, significantly more effort may be required to steer and brake than is normally required.

Use a tow bar.
Make sure that the steering wheel can move freely before towing the vehicle away.

NOTE Damage due to excessive tractive power

If you pull away sharply, the tractive power may be too high and the vehicles could be damaged.

▶ Pull away slowly and smoothly.

Loading the vehicle for transport

Hybrid vehicles: Transport of vehicles should only be carried out by professional towing companies.

Observe the notes on towing away ( page 63).
Connect the towing device to the towing eye in order to load the vehicle.
i You can also attach the tow bar to the trailer hitch.
Shift the automatic transmission to position N.
① The automatic transmission may be locked in position P in the event of damage to the

electrics. To shift to N, provide the on-board electrical system with power ( page 58).

Load the vehicle onto the transporter.
Shift the automatic transmission to position P.
Use the electric parking brake to secure the vehicle against rolling away.
▶ Only secure the vehicle by the wheels.

Vehicles with ADS PLUS (Adaptive Damping System PLUS)

A WARNING Risk of an accident when transporting vehicles with Adaptive Damping System PLUS

When transporting vehicles with Adaptive Damping System PLUS, the vehicle/trailer combination may begin to rock and start to skid.

Load the vehicle correctly onto the transporter.
Secure the vehicle on all four wheels with suitable tensioning straps.

Do not exceed the maximum permissible speed of 60 km/h when transporting.

NOTE Damage to the vehicle from securing it incorrectly

After loading, the vehicle must be secured on all four wheels. Otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged.
A minimum distance of 20 cm upwards and 10 cm downwards must be kept to the transport platform.

Secure the vehicle on all four wheels after loading.

4MATIC vehicles/vehicles with automatic transmission

Line drawing of two cars on a rail platform with a blue X mark indicating the intersection (no text or symbols)

Make sure that the front and rear axles come to rest on the same transportation vehicle.

NOTE Damage to the drive train due to incorrect positioning of the vehicle

Do not position the vehicle above the connection point of the transport vehicle.

Towing eye storage location

Plug-in hybrid

Line drawing of a car backrest with a highlighted rectangular component (no text or symbols)

The towing eye is located in the load compartment on the right behind service flap ①.

Not plug-in hybrid

Vehicles with two rows of seats

Top-down technical sketch of a car engine bay with no visible text or symbols

Towing eye ① is located under the load compartment floor by the tyre-change tool kit.

Vehicles with three rows of seats

Line drawing of a car backrest with a numbered component (1) highlighted in blue, no text or symbols present.

Towing eye ① is located under the load compartment floor.

Fitting and removing the towing eye

Technical line drawing of a Mercedes-Benz car showing front and side views with numbered annotations

Press the mark on cover ① inwards and remove.

Screw in the towing eye at least 7 turns to the right as far as it will go, then tighten it. The thread may be dirty or similar if the towing eye cannot be screwed in as described. Towing cannot be performed.

Vehicles with a trailer hitch: vehicles with a trailer hitch do not have a rear bracket for the towing eye. Fasten the tow bar to the trailer hitch.

After removing the towing eye, engage the cover ① in the bumper.

NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to incorrect use of the towing eye or trailer hitch

When a towing eye or trailer hitch is used to recover a vehicle, the vehicle may be damaged in the process.

Only use the towing eye or trailer hitch to tow away or tow start the vehicle.
Do not use the towing eye or trailer hitch to tow the vehicle during recovery.

Tow-starting the vehicle

Vehicles with automatic transmission

NOTE Damage to the automatic transmission due to tow-starting

The automatic transmission may be damaged in the process of tow-starting vehicles with automatic transmission.

▶ Vehicles with automatic transmission must not be tow-started.

▶ Vehicles with an automatic transmission must not be tow-started.

Electrical fuses

Notes on electrical fuses

WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to overloaded lines

If you manipulate or bridge a faulty fuse or if you replace it with a fuse with a higher amperage, the electric line could be overloaded.

This could result in a fire.

Always replace faulty fuses with specified new fuses containing the correct amperage.

NOTE Damage due to incorrect fuses

Using incorrect fuses can result in damage to electrical components or systems or their functions being considerably restricted.

Use only fuses approved for Mercedes-Benz with the respective specified fuse rating.

Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of the same rating, which you can recognise by the colour and the label. The fuse ratings and further information to be observed can be found in the fuse assignment diagram.

Fuse assignment diagram: on the fuse box in the load compartment ( page 654).

NOTE Damage or malfunctions caused by moisture

Moisture may cause damage to the electrical system or cause it to malfunction.

When the fuse box is open, make sure that no moisture can enter the fuse box.
When closing the fuse box, make sure that the seal of the lid is positioned correctly on the fuse box.

If the newly inserted fuse also blows, have the cause traced and rectified at a qualified specialist workshop.

Ensure the following before replacing a fuse:

• The vehicle is secured against rolling away.
• All electrical consumers are switched off.
• The vehicle is switched off.

The electrical fuses are located in various fuse boxes:

- Fuse box in the engine compartment on the left-hand side of the vehicle, when viewed in the direction of travel ( page 653)

• Fuse box on the driver's side of the cockpit (→ page 654)
• Fuse box in the front passenger footwell (→ page 654)
• Fuse box in the load compartment on the right-hand side of the vehicle, when viewed in the direction of travel ( page 654)

Opening and closing the fuse box in the engine compartment

Requirement:

• You need a dry cloth and a screwdriver.

Observe the notes on electrical fuses ( page 59).

Open

WARNING Risk of injury from using the windscreen wipers when the bonnet is open

If the windscreen wipers start moving when the bonnet is open, you could be trapped by the wiper linkage.

▶ Always switch off the windscreen wipers and vehicle before opening the engine bonnet.

Diagram showing car interior with labeled parts and a magnified inset highlighting a key component

Remove any existing moisture from the fuse box using a dry cloth.
Loosen screws ② and remove fuse box lid ① from the top.

Closing

Check whether the seal is positioned correctly in the lid.
Insert the lid into the bracket at the rear of the fuse box.
Fold down the lid of the fuse box and tighten screws ②.
Close the bonnet.

Opening and closing the fuse box in the cockpit

- Observe the notes on electrical fuses (→ page 59).

The fuse box is on the driver's side on the side of the cockpit under a cover.

Mercedes-Benz recommends you have the fuse box opened at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

Opening and closing the fuse box in the front passenger footwell

Contact a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for further information.

Opening and closing the fuse box in the load compartment

Observe the notes on electrical fuses ( page 59).

Open the side cover.

Line drawing of a car interior showing the rearview and side view with a directional arrow indicating flow or movement (no text or symbols present)

Remove cover ①.

The fuse assignment diagram is on the side of the fuse box.

Notes on noise or unusual handling characteristics

Make sure there are no vibrations, noises or unusual handling characteristics when the vehicle is in motion. This may indicate that the wheels or tyres are damaged. Hidden tyre damage could also be causing the unusual handling characteristics.

If you suspect that a tyre is defective, reduce your speed immediately and have the tyres and wheels checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Notes on regularly inspecting wheels and tyres

WARNING Risk of injury due to damaged tyres

Damaged tyres can cause tyre pressure loss.

▶ Check the tyres regularly for signs of damage and replace any damaged tyres immediately.

WARNING Risk of aquaplaning due to insufficient tyre tread

Insufficient tyre tread will result in reduced tyre grip.

The risk of aquaplaning is increased on wet roads, especially when the speed of the vehicle is not adapted to suit the conditions.

Thus, you should regularly check the tread depth and the condition of the tread across the entire width of all tyres.

Minimum tread depth for:

• Summer tyres: 3 mm
- M+S tyres: 4 mm
For safety reasons, replace the tyres before the legally-prescribed limit for the minimum tread depth is reached.

Carry out the following checks on all wheels regularly, at least once a month or as required, for example, prior to a long journey or driving off-road:

- Check the tyre pressure (→ page 657).

• Visually inspect wheels and tyres for damage.
- Check the valve caps.
- Visual check of the tyre tread depth and the tyre contact surface across the entire width. The minimum tread depth for summer tyres is 3 mm and for winter tyres 4 mm.

Notes on snow chains

WARNING Risk of accident due to incorrectly fitted snow chains

If you have fitted snow chains to the front wheels, they may drag against the vehicle body or chassis components.

▶ Never fit snow chains to the front wheels.
Only fit snow chains on the rear wheels in pairs.

NOTE Damage to components of the vehicle body or chassis due to fitted snow chains

If you fit snow chains to the front wheels of 4MATIC vehicles, you may damage components of the vehicle body or chassis.

Only fit snow chains to the rear wheels of 4MATIC vehicles.

• Snow chains are only permissible for certain wheel/tyre combinations. You can obtain information about this from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
• For safety reasons, only use snow chains that have been specifically approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or snow chains with the same quality standard.
• Comply with the installation instructions of the snow chain manufacturer.

• If snow chains are fitted, the maximum permissible speed is 50 km/h.

• Vehicles with Active Parking Assist: do not use Active Parking Assist when snow chains are fitted.
  (i) You can permanently limit the maximum speed for driving with winter tyres ( page 359).
  ① You can deactivate ESP ^® to pull away ( page 350). This allows the wheels to spin, achieving an increased driving force.

Tyre pressure

Notes on tyre pressure

WARNING Risk of accident due to insufficient or excessive tyre pressure

Underinflated or overinflated tyres pose in particular the following risks:

• The tyres can burst.
- The tyres can wear excessively and/or unevenly.

• The driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking characteristics may be greatly impaired.
  Comply with the recommended tyre pressure and check the tyre pressure of all tyres, including the spare wheel, regularly:
• monthly
• when the load changes
  • before embarking on a longer journey
• if operating conditions change, e.g. off-road driving
  Adjust the tyre pressure, if necessary.

Tyre pressure which is too high or too low can:

• Shorten the service life of the tyres.
• Cause increased tyre damage.
• Adversely affect driving characteristics and thus driving safety, e.g. due to aquaplaning.

WARNING Risk of accident due to repeated pressure drop in the tyres

The wheels, valves or tyres could be damaged. Too low a tyre pressure can lead to the tyres bursting.

▶ Examine the tyres for foreign objects.
▶ Check whether the tyre has a puncture or the valve has a leak.
If you are unable to rectify the damage, contact a qualified specialist workshop.

Information on the recommended tyre pressure for the vehicle's factory-fitted tyres can be found on the tyre pressure table on the inside of the fuel filler flap ( page 658).

Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the tyre pressure. The outer appearance of a tyre does not permit any reliable conclusion about the tyre pressure.

Only correct tyre pressures when the tyres are cold. Conditions for cold tyres:

- The vehicle has been parked with the tyres out of direct sunlight for at least three hours.

• The vehicle has travelled less than 1.6 km.

The vehicle's tyres heat up when driving. As the temperature of the tyres increases, so too does the tyre pressure.

Vehicles with a tyre pressure monitoring system: you can also see the tyre pressure in the driver's display ( page 659).

Notes on trailer operation

Always inflate the rear axle tyres to the recommended tyre pressures on the tyre pressure table for increased load.

Tyre pressure table

The tyre pressure table is on the inside of the fuel filler flap.

100 kPa = 1 bar 风道桥 风道桥 风道桥 A 213 584 37 03 kPa psi kPa psi 风道桥 风道桥 风道桥 1234567

The tyre pressure table shows the recommended tyre pressure for all tyres approved for this vehicle. The recommended tyre pressures apply for cold tyres under various operating conditions, i.e. loading and/or speed of the vehicle.

If one or more tyre sizes precede a tyre pressure, the following tyre pressure information is only valid for those tyre sizes and their respective load condition.

If the preceding tyre sizes are complemented by the [icon] symbol, the tyre pressure information following shows alternative tyre pressures. Fuel consumption may then increase slightly.

The load conditions "partially laden" and "fully laden" are defined in the table for different numbers of passengers and amounts of luggage. The actual number of seats may differ from this.

Tyre pressure monitoring system

Function of the tyre pressure monitoring system

The system checks the tyre pressure and the tyre temperature of the tyres fitted to the vehicle by means of a tyre pressure sensor.

The tyre pressure and the tyre temperature appear in the driver's display.

If there is a substantial pressure loss or if the tyre temperature is excessive, you will be warned with display messages (→ page 898) or the warning lamp in the driver's display (→ page 927).

The tyre pressure monitoring system is only an aid. It is the driver's responsibility to set the tyre pressure to the recommended cold tyre pressure suitable for the operating situation.

In most cases, the tyre pressure monitoring system will automatically update the new reference values after you have changed the tyre pressure. You can, however, also update the reference values by restarting the tyre pressure monitoring system manually ( page 660).

System limits

The system may be impaired or may not function particularly in the following situations:

• incorrect reference values were taught in
• sudden pressure loss caused by a foreign object penetrating the tyre, for example
• there is a malfunction caused by another radio signal source

- Checking the tyre pressure with the tyre pressure monitoring system

Requirements

• The vehicle is switched on.

F167 0009 02

Driver's display:

Service

Press OK to confirm.

One of the following displays appears:

• Current tyre pressure of each wheel:

2.5 59°C 2.5 59°C 2.5 59°C 2.5 59°C

• Tyre pressures will be displayed after a few minutes of driving: current values are not yet known to the system. The pressure/temperature values of each tyre are displayed as soon as they are known to the system.
• Tyre pressure monitor active: the teach-in process of the system is not yet complete. The tyre pressures are already being monitored.

Compare the current tyre pressure with the recommended tyre pressure for the current operating condition ( page 658). Additionally, observe the notes on cold tyres ( page 657).

The values displayed in the driver's display may deviate from those of the tyre pressure gauge as they refer to sea level. At high elevations, the tyre pressure values indicated by a tyre pressure gauge are higher than those shown in the driver's display.

Restarting the tyre pressure monitoring system

Requirements

- The recommended tyre pressure is correctly set for the respective operating status on each of the four wheels ( page 657).

Restart the tyre pressure monitoring system in the following situations:

• The tyre pressure has changed.

- The wheels or tyres have been changed or newly fitted.

Driver's display:

Service

Select Tyre pressure and confirm with OK.

Swipe downwards on Touch Control on the steering wheel. The Use current tyre pressures as new reference values? message is shown in the driver's display.

Select Yes and confirm the restart with OK. The Tyre pressure monitor restarted message is shown in the driver's display.

Current warning messages are deleted and the yellow ⏻ warning lamp goes out.

After you have been driving for a few minutes, the system checks whether the current tyre pressures are within the specified range. The current tyre pressures are then accepted as reference values and monitored.

If the tyre pressure levels are not within the specified range, the Please correct tyre pressure message appears.

Wheel change

Notes on selecting, fitting and replacing tyres

WARNING Risk of accident due to incorrect wheel and tyre dimensions

If wheels and tyres of the wrong size are fitted, the service brakes or components in the brake system and in the wheel suspension may be damaged.

Always replace wheels and tyres with those that fulfil the specifications of the original part.

For wheels, pay attention to the following:

• Designation
• Type

For tyres, pay attention to the following:

• Designation
• Manufacturer
• Type

A WARNING Risk of injury through exceeding the specified tyre load-bearing capacity or the permissible speed rating

Exceeding the load-bearing capacity of the tyres can lead to tyre damage and could cause the tyres to explode.

Therefore, only use tyre types and sizes approved for your vehicle model.
Observe the tyre load-bearing capacity rating and speed rating required for your vehicle.

NOTE Vehicle and tyre damage caused by non-approved tyre types and sizes

For safety reasons, only use tyres, wheels and accessories which have been specially approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle. These tyres are specially adapted to the active safety systems, such as ABS, ESP® and 4MATIC, and marked as follows:

• MO = Mercedes-Benz Original

• MOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended (run-flat tyres only for certain wheels)
- MO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (only certain AMG tyres)

Otherwise, certain properties, such as handling characteristics, vehicle noise emissions, consumption, etc. could be adversely affected. Furthermore, other tyre sizes could result in the tyres rubbing against the body and axle components when loaded. This could result in damage to the tyre or the vehicle.

Only use tyres, wheels and accessories that have been checked and recommended by Mercedes-Benz.

NOTE Risk to driving safety from retrea- ded tyres

Retreaded tyres are neither tested nor recommended by Mercedes-Benz, since previous damage cannot always be detected on retreaded tyres.

For this reason driving safety cannot be guaranteed.

Do not use used tyres if you have no information about their previous usage.

NOTE Possible wheel and tyre damage when driving over obstacles

Large wheels have a smaller section width. As the section width decreases, the risk of wheels and tyres being damaged when driving over obstacles increases.

Avoid obstacles or drive especially carefully.
▶ Reduce your speed when driving over kerbs, speed bumps, manhole covers and potholes.
Avoid particularly high kerbs.

NOTE Possible wheel and tyre damage when parking on kerbs or in potholes

Parking on kerbs or in potholes can damage the wheels and tyres.

▶ Only park on level surfaces if possible.
▶ Avoid kerbs and potholes when parking.

NOTE Damage to electronic component parts due to the use of tyre-fitting tools

Vehicles with tyre pressure monitoring system: there are electronic component parts in the wheel.

If tyre-fitting tools are positioned in the area of the valve, the electronic components could be damaged.

▶ Tyre-fitting tools should not be applied in the area of the valve.
Always have tyres changed at a qualified specialist workshop.

NOTE Damage to summer tyres at low ambient temperatures

At low ambient temperatures, tears could form when driving with summer tyres, causing permanent damage to the tyre.

At temperatures below 7 °C use M+S tyres.

Accessory parts which are not approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or which are not used correctly, can impair the operating safety.

Before purchasing and using non-approved accessories, visit a qualified specialist workshop and enquire about:

• Suitability
• Legal stipulations
  • Factory recommendations

WARNING Risk of accident with high performance tyres

The special tyre tread in combination with the optimised tyre compound means that the risk of skidding and hydroplaning on wet roads is increased.

In addition, the tyre grip is greatly reduced at a low outside temperature and tyre running temperature.

Switch on the ESP® and adapt your driving style accordingly.

Use M+S tyres at outside temperatures of less than 10 °C.
Only use the tyres for their intended purpose.

Observe the following when selecting, fitting and replacing tyres:

• Country-specific requirements for tyre approval that define a specific tyre type for your vehicle.
• Furthermore, the use of certain tyre types in certain regions and areas of operation can be highly beneficial.
• Only use tyres and wheels of the same type (summer tyres, winter tyres, MOExtended tyres) and the same make.
• Only fit wheels of the same size on one axle (left and right).
  It is only permissible to fit a different wheel size in the event of a flat tyre in order to drive to the specialist workshop.
• Do not make any modifications to the brake system, the wheels or the tyres.

The use of shims or brake dust shields is not permitted and may invalidate the vehicle's general operating permit.

• Vehicles with a tyre pressure monitoring system: all fitted wheels must be equipped with functioning sensors for the tyre pressure monitoring system.
• At temperatures below 7^ C use winter tyres or all-season tyres marked M+S for all wheels.

Winter tyres provide the best possible grip in wintry road conditions.

• For M+S tyres, only use tyres with the same tread.
• Observe the maximum permissible speed for the M+S tyres fitted.

If the tyre's maximum speed is below that of the vehicle, this must be indicated by an appropriate label in the driver's field of vision.

• Run in new tyres at moderate speeds for the first 100 km.
• Replace the tyres after six years at the latest, regardless of wear.

- When replacing with tyres that do not feature run-flat characteristics: vehicles with MOExtended tyres are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. Equip the vehicle with a TIREFIT kit after replacing with tyres that do not feature run-flat characteristics, e.g. winter tyres.

(i) You can permanently limit the maximum speed for driving with winter tyres ( page 359).

For more information on wheels and tyres, contact a qualified specialist workshop.

Vehicles with AMG Driver's Package

WARNING Risk of accident caused by non-approved tyre types

If you use tyre types that have not been adapted to changes made to the factory speed limit, this can have the following consequences:

- The tyres are not suitable for high speeds and the corresponding driving dynamics.

• The tyres wear unevenly and affect the roadworthiness of the vehicle.
• ABS, ESP® and cruise control operation are restricted.

This can jeopardise road safety.

Only use tyre types that have been approved for the maximum permissible speed set and the vehicle.

Notes on interchanging wheels

WARNING Risk of injury through different wheel sizes

Interchanging the front and rear wheels can severely impair the driving characteristics.

The disk brakes or wheel suspension components may also be damaged.

Only interchange the front and rear wheels if the wheels and tyres have the same dimensions.

Interchanging the front and rear wheels if the wheels or tyres have different dimensions can render the general operating permit invalid.

Observe the instructions and safety notes on "Changing a wheel" ( page 660)

The wear patterns on the front and rear wheels differ:

• front wheels wear more on the tyre shoulder
- rear wheels wear more in the centre of the tyre

Do not drive with tyres that have too little tread depth. This significantly reduces traction on wet roads (aquaplaning).

On vehicles with the same front and rear wheel size, you can interchange the wheels every 5,000 to 10,000 km, depending on the wear. Ensure the direction of rotation is maintained for the wheels.

Notes on storing wheels

When storing wheels, observe the following notes:

• After removing wheels, store them in a cool, dry and preferably dark place.
- Protect the tyres from contact with oil, grease or fuel.

Overview of the tyre-change tool kit

Apart from some country-specific variants, vehicles are not equipped with a tyre-change tool kit. For more information on which tools are required and approved to perform a wheel change on your vehicle, consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Required tyre-changing tools may include, forexample:

• Jack
• Chock
• Wheel wrench

The jack weighs approximately 3.4 kg. The maximum load capacity of the jack can be found on the sticker affixed to the jack.

The jack is maintenance-free. If there is a malfunction, please contact a qualified specialist workshop.

Tyre-change tool kit ① is located under the load compartment floor.

Depending on the model, the tyre change tool kit may be located in other positions under the load compartment floor.

Interior view of a car showing the hood and engine compartment with a numbered marker (1), no visible text or symbols.

The tyre-change tool kit includes the following:

• Jack
• Wheel wrench

• Wheel studs

• Extension attachment for wheel studs, if necessary (depending on vehicle version)

• Folding chock
• Ratchet ring spanner

Plug-in hybrid

The tyre-change tool kit is located in breakdown bag 1.

Depending on the vehicle version, the breakdown bag is located in the load compartment or under the load compartment floor.

When stowing the breakdown bag, ensure that it is adequately secured.

1

Preparing the vehicle for a wheel change

Requirements:

• The vehicle is not on a slope.
- The vehicle is on solid, non-slippery and level ground.
• The required tyre-change tool kit is available.

If your vehicle is not equipped with the tyre-change tool kit, consult a qualified specialist workshop to find out about suitable tools.

Apply the electric parking brake manually.
Move the front wheels to the straight-ahead position.
Shift the transmission to position P.
▶ Vehicles with level control system: set the normal vehicle level ( page 391).
Switch off the vehicle.
Make sure that the vehicle cannot be started.
Place chocks or other suitable items under the front and rear of the wheel that is diagonally opposite the wheel you wish to change.

▶ Raise the vehicle ( page 666).

Removing and fitting the wheel trim/hub caps

Requirements

- The vehicle is prepared for a wheel change (→ page 665).

Plastic hub cap

To remove:

Turn the centre cover of the hub cap anticlockwise and remove the hub cap.

To fit:

Make sure that the centre cover of the hub cap is turned anti-clockwise.
▶ Position the hub cap and turn the centre cover clockwise until the hub cap engages physically and audibly.

Aluminium hub cap

Diagram of a car wheel with numbered components and directional arrows indicating motion or flow

To remove:

Position socket ② from the tyre-change tool kit on hub cap ①.
▶ Position wheel spanner ③ on socket ②.
Using wheel spanner ③, turn hub cap ① anti-clockwise and remove it.

To fit:

▶ Follow the instructions above in reverse order.
i Specified tightening torque: 25 Nm.

Raising the vehicle when changing a wheel

Requirements:

• There are no persons in the vehicle.
- The vehicle has been prepared for a wheel change ( page 665).

Important notes on using the jack:

• Use only a vehicle-specific jack that has been approved by Mercedes-Benz to raise the vehicle.
• The jack is only designed for raising and holding the vehicle for a short time while a wheel is being changed and not for maintenance work under the vehicle.
• The jack must be placed on a firm, flat and non-slip surface. If necessary, use a large, flat, load-bearing, non-slip underlay.
• The foot of the jack must be positioned vertically under the jack support point.

Diagram showing two mechanical linkage configurations with blue X marks indicating joint points (no text or symbols present)

Line drawing of a car with a blue 'X' symbol and a small figure lying on the ground (no text or symbols present)

Rules of conduct when the vehicle is raised:

• Never place your hands or feet under the vehicle.
  • Never lie under the vehicle.

• Do not start the vehicle and do not release the electric parking brake.

• Do not open or close any doors or the tailgate.

Diagram of a car wheel with a blue arrow indicating clockwise motion (no text or symbols)

Using the wheel wrench, loosen the wheel bolts on the wheel you wish to change by about one full turn. Do not unscrew the screws completely.

Line drawing of a car with two blue arrows pointing upward, indicating motion or force direction (no text or symbols)

Position of the jack support points

WARNING Risk of injury from incorrect positioning of the jack

If you do not position the jack correctly at the appropriate jacking point of the vehicle, the jack could tip with the vehicle raised.

Only position the jack at the appropriate jacking point of the vehicle. The base of the jack must be positioned vertically under the jacking point of the vehicle.

! NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to the jack

If you do not position the jack at the jack support points provided for this purpose, you could damage your vehicle.

Only position the jack at the jack support points provided for this purpose.

Take the ratchet ring spanner out of the tyre-change tool kit and place it on the hexagon nut of the jack so that the letters "AUF" are visible.

Diagram illustrating bicycle wheel assembly with numbered components and a magnified detail showing the mechanism.

Position support ② of jack ④ on jack support point ①.
Turn ratchet ring spanner ③ clockwise until jack support ② sits completely on jack support point ① and the base of the jack lies evenly on the ground.

Continue to turn ratchet ring spanner ③ until the tyre is raised a maximum of 3 cm off the ground.
Loosen and remove the wheel ( page 668).

Removing a wheel

Requirements

• The vehicle is raised ( page 666).

Note on AMG vehicles:

NOTE Damage to the ceramic brake disc when changing a wheel

Mercedes-AMG vehicles with ceramic brake discs: during removal and repositioning of the wheel, the wheel rim can strike the ceramic-brake disc and damage it.

▶ Take particular care.
▶ Ask another person for assistance or use a second centring pin.

When changing a wheel, avoid applying any force to the brake discs, as this could impair the level of comfort when braking.

NOTE Damage to threading from dirt on wheel bolts

Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on a dirty surface.

▶ Completely unscrew the wheel bolts.
Remove the wheel.

Fitting a new wheel

Requirements

- The wheel that is to be replaced is removed ( page 668).

WARNING Risk of accident from losing a wheel

Oiled or greased wheel bolts can cause the wheel bolts to come loose, as too can damaged wheel bolts or wheel hub threads.

▶ Never oil or grease the threads.
In the event of damage to the threads, contact a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Have the damaged wheel bolts or damaged hub threads replaced.
Do not continue driving.

Observe the information on the choice of tyres ( page 660).

For tyres with a specified direction of rotation, an arrow on the side wall of the tyre indicates the correct direction of rotation. Observe the direction of rotation when fitting.

Note on AMG vehicles:

! NOTE Damage to the ceramic brake disc when changing a wheel

Mercedes-AMG vehicles with ceramic brake discs: during removal and repositioning of the wheel, the wheel rim can strike the ceramic-brake disc and damage it.

Take particular care.
▶ Ask another person for assistance or use a second centring pin.
Place the wheel to be fitted on the wheel hub and push it on.
WARNING Risk of injury from tightening wheel bolts and nuts
If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts when the vehicle is raised, the jack could tip.
Only tighten wheel bolts or wheel nuts when the vehicle is on the ground.
Observe the instructions and safety notes on "Changing a wheel" (→ page 660).
For safety reasons, only use wheel bolts which have been approved by Mercedes-Benz and for the wheel in question.
Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a diagonal pattern in the order indicated until they are finger-tight.

If the collapsible emergency spare wheel has been fitted, inflate the collapsible emergency spare wheel ( page 674).
▶ Lower the vehicle ( page 669).

Lowering the vehicle after a wheel change

Requirements:

• The new wheel has been fitted ( page 668).

Observe the information on tyre pressure ( page 657).

Place the ratchet ring spanner onto the hexagon nut of the jack so that the lettering "AB" is visible.
To lower the vehicle: Turn the ratchet ring spanner of the jack anti-clockwise.

Diagram showing a circular mechanical or electrical component with numbered components and an arrow indicating direction or force.

Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a diagonal pattern in the order indicated ① to ⑤ with a maximum of 80 Nm.
Then tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a diagonal pattern in the order indicated ① to ⑤ to the specified tightening torque of 150 Nm.

WARNING Risk of accident due to incorrect tightening torque

The wheels could come loose if the wheel bolts or wheel nuts are not tightened to the prescribed torque.

▶ Ensure that the wheel bolts or wheel nuts are tightened to the prescribed tightening torque.
If you are not sure, do not move the vehicle. Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have the tightening torque checked immediately.
Check the tyre pressure of the newly mounted wheel and adjust accordingly.
① The following does not apply if the new wheel is an emergency spare wheel.
▶ Vehicles with a tyre pressure monitoring system: restart the tyre pressure monitoring system ( page 660).

Emergency spare wheel

Notes on the emergency spare wheel

WARNING Risk of accident caused by incorrect wheel and tyre dimensions

The wheel or tyre size and the tyre type of the emergency spare wheel or spare wheel and the wheel to be replaced may differ. The emergency spare wheel or spare wheel can significantly impair driving characteristics of the vehicle.

To prevent hazardous situations:

Drive carefully.
▶ Never fit more than one emergency spare wheel or spare wheel that differs in size.
Only use an emergency spare wheel or spare wheel briefly.
Do not deactivate ESP®.
Have the emergency spare wheel or spare wheel of a different size replaced at the nearest qualified specialist work-

shop. The new wheel must have the correct dimensions.

The emergency spare wheel is fastened in the load compartment under the load compartment floor.

Observe the following notes on fitting an emergency spare wheel:

• The maximum permissible speed with an emergency spare wheel fitted is 80 km/h.
• Do not fit the emergency spare wheel with snow chains.
• Replace the emergency spare wheel after six years at the latest, regardless of wear.
• Use the wheel bolts that are included with the emergency spare wheel.
• Check the tyre pressure of the emergency spare wheel fitted. Correct the pressure as necessary.

The specified tyre pressure is stated on the label of the emergency spare wheel.

① Vehicles with a tyre pressure monitoring system: if an emergency spare wheel is fitted, the

tyre pressure monitoring system cannot function reliably. For a few minutes after an emergency spare wheel is fitted, the system may still display the tyre pressure of the removed wheel. Only restart the system again when the emergency spare wheel has been replaced with a new wheel.

Be sure to also observe the following further related subjects:

• Notes on tyre pressure (→ page 657)
• Tyre pressure table ( page 658)
• Notes on fitting tyres (→ page 660)
- Fitting an emergency spare wheel (→ page 665)

Inflating the emergency spare wheel

NOTE Overheating due to the tyre inflation compressor running too long
Do not run the tyre inflation compressor for longer than ten minutes without interruption.

Requirements:

• The emergency spare wheel has been fitted correctly. (→ page 665)
  Comply with the manufacturer's safety notes on the sticker of the emergency spare wheel and on the tyre inflation compressor.
  Remove the sticker with the label 80 km/h from the tyre inflation compressor housing and affix it to the instrument cluster within the driver's field of vision.
  Remove the tyre inflation compressor from the stowage space under the luggage compartment floor. (→ page 62, 63)

Diagram of an electrical testing device with numbered parts labeled 1 through 7

Pull filler hose ① and plug ③ out of the tyre inflation compressor housing.
Insert plug ⑦ of filler hose ① in the socket on the tyre inflation compressor and then turn it until plug ⑦ engages.
Unscrew the cap from the valve on the emergency spare wheel.
Screw union nut ② of filler hose ① onto the valve.
Make sure on and off switch ④ of the tyre inflation compressor is set to 0.
Insert plug ③ in a socket in your vehicle.
- Cigarette lighter socket
• 12 V socket: (→ page 224)
- Observe the notes on the cigarette lighter in the Digital Owner's Manual
- Observe the notes on sockets: (→ page 224)
Press the start/stop button once to switch on the power supply ( page 267).

Press On/Off switch ④ on the tyre inflation compressor to I.
The tyre inflation compressor is switched on. The tyre is inflated. The tyre pressure appears on manometer 5.
Pump the tyre to the specified tyre pressure.
The specified tyre pressure is stated on the label of the emergency spare wheel.
When the specified tyre pressure has been reached, press on and off switch ④ on the tyre inflation compressor to 0. The tyre inflation compressor is switched off.
Press the start/stop button to switch off the power supply.
If the tyre pressure is higher than the specified pressure, press pressure release valve button until the correct tyre pressure has been reached.
Unscrew union nut ② of filler hose ① from the valve.
Screw the valve cap of the emergency spare wheel onto the valve again.

Stow filler hose ① and plug ③ in the lower section of the tyre inflation compressor housing.
Stow the tyre inflation compressor in the vehicle.

Collapsible spare wheel

Notes on the collapsible spare wheel

WARNING Risk of accident caused by incorrect wheel and tyre dimensions

The wheel or tyre size and the tyre type of the emergency spare wheel or spare wheel and the wheel to be replaced may differ. The emergency spare wheel or spare wheel can significantly impair driving characteristics of the vehicle.

To prevent hazardous situations:

Drive carefully.
▶ Never fit more than one emergency spare wheel or spare wheel that differs in size.

Only use an emergency spare wheel or spare wheel briefly.
Do not deactivate ESP®.
Have the emergency spare wheel or spare wheel of a different size replaced at the nearest qualified specialist workshop. The new wheel must have the correct dimensions.

The collapsible spare wheel is an emergency spare wheel which is only suitable for use for a limited period of time and in a restricted manner in the event of a flat tyre (e.g. until the nearest workshop).

The tyre sidewalls are folded when in transport mode. Before use, the collapsible spare wheel has to be inflated with the accompanying compressor.

Check the tyre pressure of the collapsible spare wheel once fitted. Correct the pressure as necessary.

The maximum permissible speed with a collapsible spare wheel fitted is 80 km/h.

Do not fit the collapsible spare wheel with snow chains.

Replace the collapsible spare wheel after six years at the latest, regardless of wear.

Vehicles with a tyre pressure monitoring system: if a collapsible spare wheel is fitted the tyre pressure monitoring system cannot function reliably. For a few minutes after an emergency spare wheel is fitted, the system may still display the tyre pressure of the removed wheel. Only restart the system again when the collapsible spare wheel has been replaced with a new wheel.

Be sure to also observe the following further related subjects:

• Notes on tyre pressure (→ page 657)
• Tyre pressure table ( page 658)

Notes on vehicles with a Burmester sound system

WARNING Risk of injury or death due to an unsecured collapsible spare wheel

If the collapsible spare wheel is not secured correctly, it can slip, tip over or be thrown around.

This can seriously injure vehicle occupants.

Always store the collapsible spare wheel in the emergency spare wheel bag and attach it to the bracket in the load compartment.
Always ensure that the lashing straps on the emergency spare wheel bag are safely secured on the rear tie-down eyes on the load compartment floor.

Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the collapsible spare wheel is located in an emergency spare wheel bag on a bracket in the load compartment. The collapsible spare wheel in the emergency spare wheel bag and the bracket are lashed with straps and secured using the rear tie-down eyes on the load compartment floor.

Removing the collapsible spare wheel

Vehicles without a Burmester sound system The collapsible spare wheel is located under the load compartment floor.

Observe the information on mounting tyres ( page 660).
Open the tailgate.
▶ Open the load compartment floor.
Remove the collapsible spare wheel.

Vehicles with a Burmester sound system The collapsible spare wheel is secured in the collapsible spare wheel bag in the load compartment.

Observe the information on mounting tyres ( page 660).
▶ Open the load compartment.
Loosen the lashing straps.
Unhook the retaining spring hooks of the lashing straps from the brackets.
Remove the collapsible spare wheel bag together with the collapsible spare wheel.

Open the collapsible spare wheel bag and remove the collapsible spare wheel.

Inflating the collapsible spare wheel

Requirements:

• Mount the collapsible spare wheel as described (→ page 668).
• Remove the tyre inflation compressor from the stowage space under the luggage compartment floor ( page 62, 63).

NOTE Damage to the collapsible spare wheel when lowering the vehicle

Lowering the vehicle without previously inflating the collapsible spare wheel can damage its rim.

▶ Inflate the collapsible spare wheel using the tyre inflation compressor before lowering the vehicle.

NOTE Overheating due to the tyre inflation compressor running too long
Do not run the tyre inflation compressor for longer than ten minutes without interruption.

Diagram of a handheld electronic device with numbered components labeled 1 to 5

Pull connector ④ and the hose out of the housing.
Unscrew the cap from the valve on the collapsible spare wheel.
Screw union nut ① of the hose onto the valve.

Make sure on and off switch ③ of the tyre inflation compressor is set to 0.
Insert connector ④ into the cigarette lighter socket (→ page 223) or into a 12 V socket (→ page 224) in your vehicle.
▶ Switch on the power supply ( page 267).
Press on and off switch ③ on the tyre inflation compressor to I. The tyre inflation compressor is switched on. The tyre is inflated. The tyre pressure is shown on manometer ②.
Pump the tyre to the specified tyre pressure.
① The specified tyre pressure is printed on the yellow label of the collapsible spare wheel.
When the specified tyre pressure has been reached, press on and off switch ③ on the tyre inflation compressor to 0.
If the tyre pressure is higher than the specified pressure, press pressure release valve button ⑤ until the correct tyre pressure has been reached.

Notes on technical data

The technical data was determined in accordance with EU Directives. The data stated only applies to vehicles with standard equipment. You can obtain further information from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

Only for certain countries: you can find vehicle-specific vehicle data in the COC documents (CERTIFICATE OF CONFORMITY). These documents are supplied when the vehicle is delivered.

On-board electronics

Notes on tampering with the engine electronics

NOTE Premature wear through improper maintenance

Improper maintenance may cause vehicle components to wear more quickly and the vehicle's operating permit may be invalidated.

Always have work on the engine electronics and related components carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

Two-way radios

Notes on fitting two-way radios

WARNING Risk of accident due to improper work on two-way radios

If two-way radios are manipulated or retrofitted incorrectly, the electromagnetic radiation from the two-way radios can interfere with the vehicle electronics and jeopardise the operating safety of the vehicle.

You should have all work on electrical and electronic components carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

WARNING Risk of accident due to improper operation of two-way radios

If you use two-way radios in the vehicle improperly, their electromagnetic radiation can disrupt the vehicle's electronics. This is the case in the following situations, in particular:

• The two-way radio is not connected to an exterior aerial.
• The exterior aerial is fitted incorrectly or is not a low-reflection aerial.

This could jeopardise the operating safety of the vehicle.

Have the low-reflection exterior aerial fitted at a qualified specialist workshop.
When operating two-way radios in the vehicle, always connect them to the low-reflection exterior aerial.

NOTE Invalidation of the operating permit due to failure to comply with the instructions for installation and use

The operating permit may be invalidated if the instructions for installation and use of two-way radios are not observed.

▶ Only use approved frequency bands.
Observe the maximum permissible output power in these frequency bands.
▶ Only use approved aerial positions.

Top-down line drawing of a car showing the roof, windows, and side panel (no text or symbols)

① Rear roof area

On vehicles with a panoramic sliding sunroof, fitting an aerial is not permitted.

Use Technical Specification ISO/TS 21609 (Road Vehicles - "EMC guidelines for installation of aftermarket radio frequency transmitting equipment") when retrofitting two-way radios. Comply with the legal requirements for detachable parts.

If your vehicle has fittings for two-way radio equipment, use the power supply and aerial connectors provided in the pre-installation. Observe the manufacturer's supplements when fitting.

■ Two-way radio transmission output

The maximum transmission output (PEAK) at the base of the aerial must not exceed the values in the following table.

Frequency band and maximum transmission output

Frequency band Maximum transmission output
2-m- frequency band144 - 174 MHz	50 W
Terrestrial Trunked Radio (TETRA)380 - 460 MHz	10 W

Frequency band Maximum transmission output
Two-way radio2G	2 W
Two-way radio3G/4G/5G	0.5 W

The following can be used in the vehicle without restrictions:

• two-way radios with a maximum transmission output of up to 100 mW
• RF transmitters with transmitter frequencies in the 380 - 410 MHz frequency band and a maximum transmission output of up to 2 W (TETRA)
  • mobile phones (2G/3G/4G/5G)

There are no restrictions when positioning the aerial on the outside of the vehicle for the following frequency bands:

• Terrestrial Trunked Radio (TETRA)

- 2G/3G/4G/5G

Regulatory radio information

Specific information on wireless applications in accordance with 2014/53/EU

Besides the typical frequencies for mobile communication cars by Mercedes-Benz make use of the following automotive radio applications.

Type of wireless applications and specifications in accordance with 2014/53/EU

Technology Frequency range Transmission output/magnetic field strength
Remote Keyless Entry 20 kHz (9–90 kHz) ≤ 72 dBμA/m at 10m
Wireless Power Transmission 105 kHz (90–119 kHz) ≤ 42 dBμA/m at 10m
Remote Keyless Entry 120 kHz (119–135 kHz) ≤ 42 dBμA/m at 10m
Wireless Power Transmission 127 kHz (119–135 kHz) ≤ 66 dBμA/m at 10m with the magnetic field		strength level decreasing 3dB/octave above 119 kHz
Near-field communication 13.553–13.567 MHz ≤ 42 dBμA/m at 10m
Remote Keyless Entry, Garage Door Opener, Tire Pressure Monitoring	433 MHz (433.05–434.79 MHz) ≤ 10 mW ERP

F167 0009 02

Technology Frequency range Transmission output/magnetic field strength
Block Heater Remote Control, Garage Door Opener	868 MHz (868.0–868.6 MHz) ≤ 25 mW ERP
Block Heater Remote Control, Garage Door Opener	869 MHz (868.7–869.2 MHz) ≤ 25 mW ERP
Bluetooth, Kleer, RLAN, wireless Headphones 2.4 GHz ISM band (2400–2483.5 MHz) ≤ 100 mW EIRP
RLAN 5.1 GHz UNII-1 (5150–5250 MHz) ≤ 25 mW EIRP
Interior Monitoring Radar, RLAN 5.8 GHz UNII-3 (5725–5875 MHz) ≤ 25 mW EIRP
Remote Keyless Entry 7.25 GHz UWB (6.0–8.5 GHz) ≤ -41.3 dBm/MHz EIRP mean ≤ 0 dBm/MHz		EIRP peak
76 GHz radar 76–77 GHz ≤ 55 dBm peak EIRP
Compensator ECE DE003 and ECE DE004 GSM (E-GSM 900)GSM (E-GSM 1800)		< +33 dBm< +30 dBm
	UMTS (I, III, VIII) < +23 dBm
	LTE (B1, B3, B7, B8, B20)	< +23 dBm
HERMES (Hardware for Enhanced Remote, Mobility & Emergency Services)	WLAN (2400-2483.5 MHz)WLAN (5736-5833 MHz)	< 20 dBm< 14 dBm

F167 0009 02

Technology Frequency range Transmission output/magnetic field strength
	GSM (E-GSM 900, Class 4)	< +33 dBm (±2 dB)
	GSM (E-GSM 1800, Class 1)	< +30 dBm (±2 dB)
	GSM (E-GSM 900 8-PSK, Class E2)	< +27 dBm (±3 dB)
	GSM (E-GSM 1800 8-PSK, Class E2)	< +26 dBm (±3 dB/-4 dB)
	UMTS (2100 WCDMA FDD B1, Class 3) < +24 dBm	(±1 dB/-3 dB)
	LTE (FDD B I, B III, B38, B39, B40, B41, Class 3) < +23 dBm (±2 dB)
	GPS (1575,42 MHz +/- 2 MHz) Receiving only
RAMSES (Router And Mobile SEviceS) GSM (E-GSM 850 / E-GSM 900, Class 4)		< +32.5 dBm (±1 dB)
		< +29.5 dBm (±1 dB)
	UMTS (WCDMA FDD I, II, III, IV, V, VIII, XIX, Class 3)	< +23.5 dBm (±1 dB)
	LTE (FDD B1, B2, B3, B4, B5, B7, B8, B9, B18, B19, B21, B28, Class 3)	< +23 dBm (±1 dB)
	LTE (TDD B38, B40, B41, Class 3) < +23 dBm (±1 dB)
	GNSS (1559–1610 MHz) Receiving only

F167 0009 02

Further information and updates are available at the following web address:

https://

regulatoryradioinformation.corpinter.net/en

Regulatory radio identifiers and specific notes

The tables and sections contain the following regulatory radio information:

• Manufacturer information
- Required regulatory radio identifiers, listed by country/region:
- Manufacturer's specifications
Model designations
- Radio equipment approval numbers
• Specific information on wireless components

Further information and updates are available at the following web address:

https://

regulatoryradioinformation.corpinter.net/en

Overview of manufacturers

Manufacturer Manufacturer information

ADC ADC Automotive Dis-

tance Control Systems GmbH, Peter-Dornier-Straße 10, 88131 Lindau, Germany

Bosch Robert Bosch GmbH,

Daimlerstraße 6, 71229 Leonberg, Germany

Manufacturer Manufacturer information

Continental Antenna Continental AdvancedAntenna GmbH,Römerring 1, 31137Hildesheim, Germany

Continental Automotive

Continental Automotive GmbH, Siemensstraße 12, 93055 Regensburg, Germany

Gentex Gentex Corporation,

600 North Centennial Street, Zeeland MI49464, USA

Harman Becker Harman	Becker Automotive SystemsGmbH, Becker-Goehring-Strasse 18, 76307Karlsbad, Germany
Manufacturer Manufacturer information
HELLA HELLA KGaA Hueck & Co., Rixbecker Straße 75, 59552 Lippstadt, Germany
Hirschmann Hirschmann Car Communication GmbH, Stuttgarter Straße 45-51, 72654 Neckartenzlingen, Germany
Huf Baolong Huf Baolong Electronics Bretten GmbH, Gewerbestraße 40, 75015 Bretten, Germany
HUF HUF Hülsbeck & Fürst GmbH & Co. KG, Steeger Straße 17, 42551 Velbert, Germany

Manufacturer Manufacturer information

KATHREIN KATHREIN Automotive GmbH & Co. KG, Römerring 1, 31137 Hildesheim, Germany

LEOPOLD KOSTAL LEOPOLD KOSTAL GmbH & Co. KG, Haucert 11, 44227 Dortmund, Germany

MARQUARDT MARQUARDT GmbH, Schloßstraße 16, 78604 Rietheim-Weilheim, Germany

Meta System Meta System S.P.A., Via T. Galimberti 5, 42124 Reggio Emilia, Italy

Molex Molex CVS Dabendorf GmbH, Märkische Straße 72, 15806 Zossen, Germany

Manufacturer Manufacturer information

Panasonic Panasonic Automotive Systems Europe GmbH, Robert-Bosch-Straße 27, 63225 Langen, Germany

Schrader Schrader Electronics Ltd., 11 Technology Park, Belfast Road, Antrim BT41 1QS, Northern Ireland, United Kingdom

Sennheiser Sennheiser electronic GmbH & Co. KG, Am Labor 1, 30900 Wedemark, Germany

F167 0009 02

Manufacturer Manufacturer information

Veoneer Veoneer Sweden AB, Wallentinsvägen 22, 44737 Vårgårda, Sweden

WITTE-Velbert WITTE-Velbert GmbH & Co. KG, Hoeferstr. 3-15, 42551 Velbert, Germany

Algeria

Regulatory radio identification

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
Continental Antenna	RKE223GNS (locking system)	71/H/ANF/2021
Continental Automotive	CMKG1 (locking system)	122/H/ANF/2021
Continental Automotive	MARS Keyless (locking system)	122/H/ANF/2021

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
HELLA DM4 (locking system)		123/H/ANF/2021
Hirschmann 920287A (locking system)		106/H/ANF/2020
Hirschmann 920287B (locking system)		107/H/ANF/2020
LEOPOLD KOSTAL	KK1 (locking system)	172/H/ANF/2021
MARQUARDT DC12A (locking system)		188/H/ANF/2021
MARQUARDT DC12B (locking system)		189/H/ANF/2021
MARQUARDT DC12K (locking system)		190/H/ANF/2021

F167 0009 02

Manufacturer Model designation	Radio equipment approval number
MARQUARDT MS5 (locking system)	195/H/ANF/2021
MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system)	193/H/ANF/2021
MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system)	194/H/ANF/2021
MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system)	186/H/ANF/2021
Schrader AG5SP4 (tyre pressure sensor)	3681/1-73.O A 1639/DT/DG /ARPT/15
Schrader AG3PF4 (tyre pressure sensor)	652/1/DT/D G/ARPCE/2020

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
Schrader BG3FP4	(tyre pressure sensor)	56/H/ANF/2021
Schrader GG4T	(tyre pressure sensor)	3994/1.69-DA/2098/DT/DG/ARPT/17
Schrader DG6W2D4	(tyre pressure sensor)	2695/1-NO.431396/DT/DG/ARPT/17
Huf Baolong TSSRE4A	(tyre pressure sensor)	2695/1-NO.431396/DT/DG/ARPT/17
WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC (locking system)		32/H/ANF/2021

Argentina

Regulatory radio identification

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
Continental Antenna	RKE213E1 (aerial amplifier)	H-26206
Continental Antenna	RKE223E1 (aerial amplifier)	H-24637
Continental Automotive	CMKG1 (locking system)	H-24376
Continental Automotive	MARS Keyless (locking system)	H-17929
Continental Automotive	D-WMI2020A (control unit)	H-23974

F167 0009 02

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
HELLA DM4 (locking system)		H-17845
Hirschmann 920287A (locking system)		H-15694
Hirschmann 920287B (locking system)		H-15695
Huf Baolong TSSRE4A (tyre pressure sensor)		H-20027
HUF HUF14632 (locking system)		H-15541

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
HUF HUF4761	(locking system)	H-11545
LEOPOLD KOSTAL	KK1 (locking system)	H-16874
MARQUARDT DC12A (locking system)		H-17689
MARQUARDT DC12B (locking system)		H-21034
MARQUARDT DC12K (locking system)		H-21035
MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system)		H-17598

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
MARQUARDT MS4 (locking system)		H-23101
MARQUARDT MS5 (locking system)		H-24933
MARQUARDTMK1 (locking system)		H-17213
MARQUARDTMK2 (locking system)		H-17212
MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system)		H-23166
Schrader AG5SP4 (tyre pressure sensor)		H-4788

F167 0009 02

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
Schrader AG3PF4	(tyre pressure sensor)	H-23292
Schrader BG3FP4	(tyre pressure sensor)	H-25586
Schrader GG4T	(tyre pressure sensor)	H-20495
Schrader DG6W2D4	(tyre pressure sensor)	H-20959
WITTE-Velbert	SDHTAG3NFC (locking system)	H-24664

Australia

Regulatory radio identification

Manufacturer Model designation

ADC ARS4-A (radar sensor)

ADC ARS4-C (radar sensor)

Bosch MRR1Rear (radar sensor)

Bosch MRRe14FCR (radar sensor)

Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar sensor)

Continental Antenna RKE213E1 (aerial amplifier)

Continental Antenna RKE223E1 (aerial amplifier)

Manufacturer Model designation

Continental Automotive	CMKG1 (locking system)
Continental Automotive	MARS Keyless (locking system)
Hirschmann 920287A	(locking system)
Hirschmann 920287B	(locking system)
Huf Baolong TSSRE4A	(tyre pressure sensor)
LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1	(locking system)
MARQUARDT MK1	(locking system)
MARQUARDT MK2	(locking system)

F167 0009 02

Manufacturer Model designation

MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking sys-tem)

Schrader AG5SP4 (tyre pres-sure sensor)

Schrader AG3PF4 (tyre pressure sensor)

Schrader BG3FP4 (tyre pressure sensor)

Schrader GG4T (tyre pressure sensor)

Schrader DG6W2D4 (tyre pres-sure sensor)

Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar sensor)

Manufacturer Model designation
Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar sensor)
Veoneer 77V125CRN (radar sensor)
Veoneer MMRV1 (radar sensor)

Bahamas

Regulatory radio identification

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
ADC ARS4-A (radar sensor)		URCA_TA_2014_082
ADC ARS4-C	(radar sensor)	URCA_TA_2019_167

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
Bosch MRR1Rear (radar sensor)		URCA_TA/2017_184
Bosch MRRe14FCR (radar sensor)		URCA_TA/2017_157
Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar sensor)		URCA_TA_2019_195
Continental Automotive	CMKG1 (locking system)	URCA_TA/2020_068
Continental Automotive	MARS Keyless (locking system)	URCA_TA/2017_119
Continental Antenna	RKE213E1 (aerial amplifier)	UCRA_TA/2016_009
Continental Antenna	RKE223E1GN S (aerial amplifier)	UCRA_TA/2020_032

F167 0009 02

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
HELLA DM4 (locking system)		URCA_TA/2017_078
Hirschmann 920287A (locking system)		URCA_TA/2019_053
Hirschmann 920287B (locking system)		URCA_TA/2019_052
HUF HUF4761	(locking system)	URCA_TA/2015_087
Huf Baolong TSSRE4A (tyre pressure sensor)		URCA_TA/2017_094
LEOPOLD KOSTAL	KK1 (locking system)	URCA_TA/2015_081

Manufacturer Model designation	Radio equipment approval number
MARQUARDT DC12A (locking system)	URCA_TA_20 17_042
MARQUARDT DC12B (locking system)	URCA_TA_20 19_128
MARQUARDT DC12K (locking system)	URCA_TA_20 19_129
MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system)	URCA_TA/ 2017_021
MARQUARDT MS4 (locking system)	URCA_TA_20 19_141
MARQUARDT MS5 (locking system)	URCA_TA_20 20_141
MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system)	URCA_TA/ 2015_031
MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system)	URCA_TA/ 2015_033

Manufacturer Model designation	Radio equipment approval number
MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system)	URCA_TA/2019_250
Schrader AG5SP4 (tyre pressure sensor)	URCA_TA_TA/2015_009
Schrader AG3PF4 (tyre pressure sensor)	URCA_TA_2019_101
Schrader BG3FP4 (tyre pressure sensor)	URCA_TA_2021_001
Schrader GG4T (tyre pressure sensor)	URCA_TA_2020_046
Schrader DG6W2D4 (tyre pressure sensor)	URCA_TA_2019_247

F167 0009 02

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar sensor)		URCA_TA_20 19_169
Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar sensor)		URCA_TA_20 19_168
Veoneer 77V125CRN (radar sensor)		URCA_TA_20 21_027
Veoneer MMRV1 (radar sensor)		URCA_TA/ 2015_063
WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC (locking system)		URCA_TA_20 20_056

Belarus

Regulatory radio identification

Manufacturer Model designation

ADC ARS4-A (radar sensor)

ADC ARS4-C (radar sensor)

Bosch MRR1Rear (radar sensor)

Bosch MRRe14FCR (radar sensor)

Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar sensor)

Continental Antenna RKE213E1 (aerial amplifier)

Continental Antenna RKE223E1GNS (aerial amplifier)

Manufacturer Model designation

Continental Automotive	CMKG1 (locking system)
Continental Automotive	MARS Keyless (locking system)
Harman Becker HERMES	3.0 (communication module)
HELLA DM4 (locking system)
LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1	(locking system)
MARQUARDT DC12A	(locking system)
MARQUARDT DC12B	(locking system)
MARQUARDT DC12K	(locking system)

F167 0009 02

Manufacturer Model designation

MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system)

MARQUARDT MS4 (locking system)

MARQUARDT MS5 (locking system)

MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system)

MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system)

MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system)

Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar sensor)

Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar sensor)

Veoneer 77V125CRN (radar sensor)

Manufacturer Model designation

Veoneer MMRV1 (radar sensor)

WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC (locking system)

Botswana
Regulatory radio identification

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
ADC ARS4-A (radar sensor)		BOCRA/TA/2018/2026
ADC ARS4-C (radar sensor)		BOCRA/TA/2020/5186
Bosch MRRe14FCR (radar sensor)		BOCRA/TA/2019/4674

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar sensor)		BOCRA/TA/2019/4975
Bosch MRR1Rear (radar sensor)		BOCRA/TA/2017/3788
Continental Antenna	RKE213E1 (aerial amplifier)	BOCRA/TA/2019/4387
Continental Antenna	RKE223E1GN S (aerial amplifier)	BOCRA/TA/2019/5050
Continental Automotive	CMKG1 (locking system)	BOCRA/TA/2019/5075
Continental Automotive	MARS Keyless (locking system)	BOCRA/TA/2019/4661
HELLA DM4 (locking system)		BOCRA/TA/2019/4662

F167 0009 02

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
Hirschmann 920287A (locking system)		BOCRA/TA/2019/4724
Hirschmann 920287B (locking system)		BOCRA/TA/2019/4723
HUF HUF4761	(locking system)	BOCRA/TA/2019/4664
LEOPOLD KOSTAL	KK1 (locking system)	BOCRA/TA/2019/4593
MARQUARDT DC12A (locking system)		BOCRA/TA/2019/4389
MARQUARDT DC12B (locking system)		BOCRA/TA/2019/4388
MARQUARDT DC12K (locking system)		BOCRA/TA/2019/4390

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system)		BOCRA/TA/2019/5135
MARQUARDT MS4 (locking system)		BOCRA/TA/2019/4758
MARQUARDT MS5 (locking system)		BOCRA/TA/2020/5473
MARQUARDTMK1 (locking system)		BOCRA/TA/2019/4359
MARQUARDTMK2 (locking system)		BOCRA/TA/2019/4360
MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system)		BOCRA/TA/2019/4687
Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar sensor)		BOCRA/TA/2019/4975

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar sensor)		BOCRA/TA/2019/4980
Veoneer 77V125CRN (radar sensor)		BOCRA/TA/2021/6191
WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC (locking system)		BOCRA/TA/2020/5342

Brazil

Note on two-way radio systems in the vehicle:

These systems are not protected against harmful interference and must not cause interference in properly approved systems.

Regulatory radio identification

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
Continental Antenna	RKE223E1 (aerial amplifier)	03691-15-05 298
Continental Antenna	RKE213E1 (aerial amplifier)	07359-21-12 817
Continental Antenna	RKE213E1 (aerial amplifier)	3691-15-529 8
Continental Automotive	CMKG1 (locking system)	00325-20-02 149

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
Continental Automotive	MARS Keyless (locking system)	03189-17-02 856
HELLA DM4 (locking system)		04689-17-05 364
Hirschmann 920287A (locking system)		1855-12-576 2
Hirschmann 920287B (locking system)		1787-12-805 8
Hirschmann 920702A (locking system)

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
HUF HUF14632	(locking system)	03627-15-06643
HUF HUF4761	(locking system)	00053-13-06643
LEOPOLD KOSTAL	KK1 (locking system)	02712-15-03366
MARQUARDT DC12A (locking system)		01333-17-02930
MARQUARDT DC12B (locking system)		01395-11-02930

F167 0009 02

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
MARQUARDT DC12K (locking system)		01392-11-02 930
MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system)		00616-17-02 930
MARQUARDT MS4 (locking system)		06218-19-02 930
MARQUARDT MS5 (locking system)		11149-20-02 930
MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system)		03149-19-02 930
MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system)		03756-15-02 930

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system)		03757-15-02930
WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC (locking system)		03034-20-07018

Further specific information

Rear Seat Entertainment System:

This system is not protected against harmful interference and must not cause interference in properly approved systems.

This product is approved by ANATEL in accordance with the procedures set out in Resolution 242/2000 and complies with the relevant technical requirements. Further information can be found on the https://www.anatel.gov.br

F167 0009 02

Brunei Darussalam

Regulatory radio identification

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
ADC ARS4-C	(radar sensor)	DTA-004005
Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar sensor)		DTA-004222
Bosch LRR3 (radar sensor)		DTA-011039
Bosch MRR1Rear (radar sensor)		DTA-006601
Bosch MRRe14FCR (radar sensor)		DTA-006678

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
Continental Antenna	RKE213E1 (aerial amplifier)	DTA-006665
Continental Antenna	RKE223E1GN S (aerial amplifier)	DTA-004998
Continental Automotive	CMKG1 (locking system)	DTA-005043
Continental Automotive	MARS Keyless (locking system)	DTA-017264
HELLA DM4 (locking system)		DTA-000351

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
Hirschmann 920287A (locking system)		DTA-001661
Hirschmann 920287B (locking system)		DTA-000794
Huf Baolong TSSRE4A (tyre pressure sensor)		DTA-000310
Huf Baolong TSSSG4G6b (tyre pressure monitoring system control unit)		DTA-003757

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
HUF HUF14632	(locking system)	DTA-006138
HUF HUF4761	(locking system)	DTA-000615
LEOPOLD KOSTAL	KK1 (locking system)	DTA-007245
MARQUARDT DC12A (locking system)		LPD-38937
MARQUARDT DC12B (locking system)		DTA-000068
MARQUARDT DC12K (locking system)		DTA-000066
MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system)		LPD-38890
MARQUARDT MS4 (locking system)		DTA-003525
MARQUARDT MS5 (locking system)		DTA-005850
MARQUARDTMK1 (locking system)		DTA-011312
MARQUARDTMK2 (locking system)		DTA-011313

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system)		DTA-003662
Schrader AG5SP4 (tyre pressure sensor)		LPD-29665
Schrader AG3PF4 (tyre pressure sensor)		LPD-29665
Schrader BG3FP4 (tyre pressure sensor)		DRQ-D-JATI-07-2000-109000

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
Schrader DG6W2D4 (tyre pressure sensor)		DTA-001514
Schrader MFR (tyre pressure monitoring system control unit)		DTA No. 003893
Schrader MFR3 (tyre pressure monitoring system control unit)		DRQ-D-MAJU-02-201 1-111083
Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar sensor)		DTA-004000

F167 0009 02

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar sensor)		DTA-003999
Veoneer 77V125CRN (radar sensor)		DTA-010423
Veoneer 77GHz	MMRV1 (radar sensor)	DTA-006216
WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC (locking system)		DTA-005628

Eurasian Economic Union

Regulatory radio identification

Manufacturer Model designation

ADC ARS4-A (radar sensor)

ADC ARS4-C (radar sensor)

Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar sensor)

Bosch LRR3 (radar sensor)

Bosch MRR1Rear (radar sensor)

Bosch MRRe14FCR (radar sensor)

Continental Antenna RKE213E1 (aerial amplifier)

Manufacturer Model designation

Continental Antenna RKE223E1GNS (aerial amplifier)
Continental Automotive	MARS Keyless (locking system)
Continental Automotive	CMKG1 (locking system)
HELLA DM4 (locking system)
Hirschmann 920287A (locking system)
Hirschmann 920287B (locking system)
Huf Baolong TSSRE4A (tyre pressure sensor)

Manufacturer Model designation

HUF HUF4761 (locking sys- tem)

HUF HUF14632 (locking system)

LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (locking system)

MARQUARDT DC12A (locking system)

MARQUARDT DC12B (locking system)

MARQUARDT DC12K (locking system)

MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system)

MARQUARDT MS4 (locking system)

Manufacturer Model designation

MARQUARDT MS5 (locking system)

MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system)

MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system)

MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system)

Schrader AG5SP4 (tyre pressure sensor)

Schrader AG3PF4 (tyre pressure sensor)

Schrader BG3FP4 (tyre pressure sensor)

Schrader GG4T (tyre pressure sensor)

Manufacturer Model designation

Schrader DG6W2D4 (tyre pressure sensor)

Veoneer 77GHz MMRV1 (radar sensor)

Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar sensor)

Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar sensor)

Veoneer 77V125CRN (radar sensor)

WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC (locking system)

Ghana
Regulatory radio identification

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
		NCA APPROVED
ADC ARS4-C	(radar sensor)	ZRO-1H-7E3-152
Bosch FR5CPCCF	(radar sensor)	ZRO-M8-7E3-230
Continental Antenna	RKE213E1 (aerial amplifier)	ZRO-M8-7E3-X53
Continental Antenna	RKE223E1GN S (aerial amplifier)	ZRO-M8-7E3-225
Continental Automotive	CMKG1 (locking system)	ZRO-M8-7E3-277

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
Continental Automotive	MARS Keyless (locking system)	BR3-1M-GE2-16A
HELLA DM4 (locking system)		BR3-1M-GE2-157
Hirschmann 920287A (locking system)		ZRO-M8-7E3-X45
Hirschmann 920287B (locking system)		ZRO-M8-7E3-X47
HUF HUF4761	(locking system)	EX6-6M-GE2-16C
LEOPOLD KOSTAL	KK1 (locking system)	ZRO-M8-7E3-X49

Manufacturer Model designation	Radio equipment approval number
MARQUARDT DC12A (locking system)	ZRO-M8-7E3-X50
MARQUARDT DC12B (locking system)	ZRO-M8-7E3-X51
MARQUARDT DC12K (locking system)	ZRO-M8-7E3-X52
MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system)	BR3-1M-GE-129
MARQUARDT MS4 (locking system)	ZRO-1H-7E3-26E
MARQUARDT MS5 (locking system)	SRO-1M-7E4-11B
MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system)	ZRO-M8-7E3-X4A
MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system)	ZRO-M8-7E3-X4C

F167 0009 02

Manufacturer Model designation	Radio equipment approval number
MARQUARDT 3350.38(locking system)	ZRO-M8-7E3-X3C
Veoneer 77V12BSM(radar sensor)	ZRO-1H-7E3-142
Veoneer 77V12CRN(radar sensor)	ZRO-M8-7E3-230
Veoneer 77V125CRN(radar sensor)	7E5-7M-X72-RDR
WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC(locking system)	SRO-1M-7E4-X59

Indonesia

Regulatory radio identification

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
ADC ARS4-C	(radar sensor)	68676/SDPPI/20207163
ADC ARS4-A (radar sensor)		70266/SDPPI/20207163

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
Bosch LRR3 (radar sensor)		74264/SDPPI/20217163
Bosch MRR1Rear (radar sensor)		74267/SDPPI/20217163
Bosch MRRevo14F (radar sensor)		74265/SDPPI/20217163
Bosch MRRe14FCR (radar sensor)		74266/SDPPI/20217163

Manufacturer Model designation	Radio equipment approval number
Bosch FR5CPCCF(radar sensor)	67882/SDPPI/20207163Dilarang melakukan perubahan spesifikasi yang dapat menimbulkan gangguan fisik dan/atau elektromagnetik terhadap lingkungan sekitar-nya

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number

F167 0009 02

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number	Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number	Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
Continental Antenna	RKE213E1 (aerial amplifier)	76621/SDPPI/20217163				Continental Antenna	RKE223E1GN S (aerial amplifier)	66185/SDPPI/202010325
		Dilarang melakukan perubahan spesifikasi yang dapat menimbulkan gang-guan fisik dan/atau elektromagnetik terhadap lingkungan sekitar-nya						Dilarang melakukan perubahan spesifikasi yang dapat menimbulkan gang-guan fisik dan/atau elektromagnetik terhadap lingkungan sekitar-nya

F167 0009 02

Manufacturer Model designation		al

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
Continental Automotive	CMKG1 (locking system)	66911/SDPPI/20207163Dilarang melakukan perubahan spesifikasi yang dapat menimbulkan gangguan fisik dan/atau elektromagnetik terhadap lingkungan sekitar-nya

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number

F167 0009 02

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number	Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number	Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
Continental Automotive	MARS Keyless (locking system)	69379/SDPPI/2020 7163				Continental Automotive	D-WMI2020A (Steuergerät)	66678/SDPPI/2020 7163
		Dilarang melakukan perubahan spesifikasi yang dapat menimbulkan gang-guan fisik dan/atau elektromagnetik terhadap lingkungan sekitar-nya
								Dilarang melakukan perubahan spesifikasi yang dapat menimbulkan gang-guan fisik dan/atau elektromagnetik terhadap lingkungan sekitar-nya

F167 0009 02

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
Continental Automotive	NTG7 MID (Headunit)	70732/SDPPI/2020 7163
		Dilarang melakukan perubahan spesifikasi yang dapat menimbulkan gangguan fisik dan/atau elektromagnetik terhadap lingkungan sekitar-nya

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number

F167 0009 02

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number	Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number	Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
Continental Automotive	NTG7 HIGH (Headunit)	70733/SDPPI/2020 7163Dilarang melakukan perubahan spesifikasi yang dapat menimbulkan gang-guan fisik dan/atau elektromagnetik terhadap lingkungan sekitar-nya				Continental Automotive	NTG7 PRE-MIUM (Headunit)	70731/SDPPI/2020 7163Dilarang melakukan perubahan spesifikasi yang dapat menimbulkan gang-guan fisik dan/atau elektromagnetik terhadap lingkungan sekitar-nya

F167 0009 02

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
Continental Automotive	NTG7 PRE-MIUM PLUS (Headunit)	70734/SDPPI/2020 7163Dilarang melakukan perubahan spesifikasi yang dapat menimbulkan gangguan fisik dan/atau elektromagnetik terhadap lingkungan sekitar-nya

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number

F167 0009 02

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number	Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number	Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
Harman Becker	NTG6N ENTRY/MID (Headunit) Production: Germany	64019/ SDPPI/2019 7163				Harman Becker	NTG6N HIGH (Headunit) Production: Germany	64018/ SDPPI/2019 7163
		Dilarang melakukan perubahan spesifikasi yang dapat menimbulkan gangguan fisik dan/atau elektromagnetik terhadap lingkungan sekitar-nya						Dilarang melakukan perubahan spesifikasi yang dapat menimbulkan gangguan fisik dan/atau elektromagnetik terhadap lingkungan sekitar-nya

F167 0009 02

Manufacturer Model designation		al

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
Harman Becker	NTG6N ENTRY/MID (Headunit) Production: Hungary	63775/ SDPPI/2019 7163Dilarang melakukan perubahan spesifikasi yang dapat menimbulkan gangguan fisik dan/atau elektromagnetik terhadap lingkungan sekitar-nya

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number

F167 0009 02

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number	Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number	Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
Harman Becker	NTG6N HIGH (Headunit) Production: Hungary	63774/ SDPPI/2019 7163				Harman Becker	NTG7 MID (Headunit)	65544/ SDPPI/2020 7163
		Dilarang melakukan perubahan spesifikasi yang dapat menimbulkan gangguan fisik dan/atau elektromagnetik terhadap lingkungan sekitar-nya						Dilarang melakukan perubahan spesifikasi yang dapat menimbulkan gangguan fisik dan/atau elektromagnetik terhadap lingkungan sekitar-nya

F167 0009 02

Manufacturer Model designation		al

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number

F167 0009 02

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number	Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number	Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
Harman Becker	NTG7 PRE-MIUM (Headunit)	65543/SDPPI/2020 7163				Harman Becker	NTG7 PRE-MIUM PLUS (Headunit)	70512/SDPPI/2020 7163
		Dilarang melakukan perubahan spesifikasi yang dapat menimbulkan gang-guan fisik dan/atau elektromagnetik terhadap lingkungan sekitar-nya						Dilarang melakukan perubahan spesifikasi yang dapat menimbulkan gang-guan fisik dan/atau elektromagnetik terhadap lingkungan sekitar-nya

F167 0009 02

Manufacturer Model designation		al

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
Harman Becker	NTG7 RSU (control unit)	66387/ SDPPI/2020 7163Dilarang melakukan perubahan spesifikasi yang dapat menimbulkan gangguan fisik dan/atau elektromagnetik terhadap lingkungan sekitar-nya

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number

F167 0009 02

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number	Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number	Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
HELLA DM4 (locking system)		69378/SDPPI/20207163				Hirschmann 920287A(locking system)		71369 / SDPPI/20207163
			Huf Baolong TSSRE4A(tyre pressure sensor)		72438/SDPPI/20217163
		Dilarang melakukan perubahan spesifikasi yang dapat menimbulkan gang-guan fisik dan/atau elektromagnetik terhadap lingkungan sekitar-nya						Dilarang melakukan perubahan spesifikasi yang dapat menimbulkan gang-guan fisik dan/atau elektromagnetik terhadap lingkungan sekitar-nya

F167 0009 02

Manufacturer Model designation		al

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number

F167 0009 02

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number	Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number	Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
HUF HUF14632	(locking system)	78368/SDPPI/20217163				HUF HUF4761	(locking system)	26742/SDPPI/20153533
		Dilarang melakukan perubahan spesifikasi yang dapat menimbulkan gang-guan fisik dan/atau elektromagnetik terhadap lingkungan sekitar-nya
								Dilarang melakukan perubahan spesifikasi yang dapat menimbulkan gang-guan fisik dan/atau elektromagnetik terhadap lingkungan sekitar-nya

F167 0009 02

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
LEOPOLD KOSTAL	KK1 (locking system)	41121/SDPPI/20185125

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number

F167 0009 02

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number	Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number	Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
MARQUARDT DC12B (locking system)		80676/SDPPI/20227163				MARQUARDT DC12K (locking system)		80621/SDPPI/20227163
		Dilarang melakukan perubahan spesifikasi yang dapat menimbulkan gangguan fisik dan/atau elektromagnetik terhadap lingkungan sekitarnya						Dilarang melakukan perubahan spesifikasi yang dapat menimbulkan gangguan fisik dan/atau elektromagnetik terhadap lingkungan sekitarnya

F167 0009 02

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number

F167 0009 02

Manufacturer Model designation	Radio equipment approval number	Manufacturer Model designation	Radio equipment approval number	Manufacturer Model designation	Radio equipment approval number
MARQUARDT MS4 (locking system)	64126/SDPPI/20197163			MARQUARDT MS5 (locking system)	69077/SDPPI/202071637163
	Dilarang melakukan perubahan spesil-kasi yang dapat menim-bulkan gang-guan Isik dan/atau elektromagnetik terhadap lingkungan sekitar-nya				Dilarang melakukan perubahan spesi-kasi yang dapat menim-bulkan gang-guan Isik dan/atau elektromagnetik terhadap lingkungan sekitar-nya

F167 0009 02

Manufacturer Model designation		al

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number

F167 0009 02

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number	Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number	Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system)		75285/SDPPI/ 20217163Dilarang melakukan perubahan spesifikasi yang dapat menimbulkan gang-guan fisik dan/atau elektromagnetik terhadap lingkungan sekitar-nya				MARQUARDT 3350.38(locking sys-tem)		82980/SDPPI/20227163Dilarang mel-akukan perubahan spesifi-kasi yang dapat menim-bulkan gang-guan fisik dan/atau elektromagnetik terhadap lingkungan sekitar-nya

F167 0009 02

Manufacturer Model designation		al

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
Molex WCH-302b(Steuergerät)		71668/SDPPI/20207163Dilarang melakukan perubahan spesifikasi yang dapat menimbulkan gangguan fisik dan/atau elektromagnetik terhadap lingkungan sekitarnya

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number

F167 0009 02

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number	Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number	Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
Molex WCH-302d(Steuergerät)		71220/SDPPI/20207163				Molex WCH-302e(Steuergerät)		71669/SDPPI/20207163
		Dilarang melakukan perubahan spesifikasi yang dapat menimbulkan gang-guan fisik dan/atau elektromagnetik terhadap lingkungan sekitar-nya						Dilarang melakukan perubahan spesifikasi yang dapat menimbulkan gang-guan fisik dan/atau elektromagnetik terhadap lingkungan sekitar-nya

F167 0009 02

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
Panasonic DAIRSE(Steuergerät)		63550/SDPPI/2019Dilarang melakukan perubahan spesifikasi yang dapat menimbulkan gangguan fisik dan/atau elektromagnetik terhadap lingkungan sekitar-nya

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
Schrader GG4T (tyre pressure sensor)		72023/SDPPI/20209338
Schrader AG5SP4 (tyre pressure sensor)		75465/SDPPI/20217163

F167 0009 02

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
Schrader BG3FP4 (tyre pressure sensor)		72765/SDPP/20217163
Schrader DG6W2D4 (tyre pressure sensor)		57058/SDPPI/20183612
Schrader MC34MA4 (tyre pressure monitoring system control unit)		25626/SDPPI/20153612

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
Schrader AG3PF4 (tyre pressure sensor)		62396/SDPPI/20207163
Schrader GG4T (tyre pressure sensor)		72023/SDPPI/20207163

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
Veoneer 77GHz	MMRV1 (radar sensor)	74749/SDPPI/20217163
Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar sensor)		66830/SDPPI/20207163
Veoneer 77V125CRN (radar sensor)		78366/SDPPI/20217163

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar sensor)		66792/SDPPI/20207163

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number

Israel

Regulatory radio identification

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
		Approval number of the Ministry of Communications:
ADC ARS4-A (radar sensor)		55-09697

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
ADC ARS4-C	(radar sensor)	55-07525
Bosch FR5CPCCF	(radar sensor)	55-08783
Bosch LRR3 (radar sensor)		55-08334
Bosch MRR1Rear	(radar sensor)	55-08333
Bosch MRRe14FCR	(radar sensor)	55-08395
Continental Automotive	D-WMI2017B(Steuergerät)	51-75654
Continental Automotive	D-WMI2017A(Steuergerät)	51-75367
Continental Automotive	D-WMI2016A(Steuergerät)	55-08177

F167 0009 02

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
Continental Automotive	D-WMI2020A (Steuergerät)	55-08179
Continental Automotive	RKE213E1 (Antennenverstärker)	55-13929
Continental Automotive	RKE223E1GNS (Antennenverstärker)	51-70799
Continental Automotive	CMKG1 (Schließsystem)	51-75924
Continental Automotive	MARS Keyless (Schließsystem)	55-13749
Hirschmann 920287A(Schließsystem)		51-62759
Hirschmann 920287A(Schließsystem)		51-49357
Hirschmann 920287A(Schließsystem)		55-12320
Huf Baolong TSSRE4A(tyre pressure sensor)		63-63571
Huf Baolong TSSSG4G6b(tyre pressure monitoring system control unit)		63-66757

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
LEOPOLD KOSTAL	KK1 (locking system)	51-75788
MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system)		55-09027
MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system)		55-09028
MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system)		51-75547
Schrader AG3PF4 (tyre pressure sensor)		51-78338
Schrader AG5SP4 (tyre pressure sensor)		51-73152

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
Schrader BG3FP4 (tyre pressure sensor)		51-77898
Schrader DG6W2D4 (tyre pressure sensor)		51-64111
Schrader GG4T (tyre pressure sensor)		55-09441
Schrader MC34MA4 (tyre pressure monitoring system control unit)		51-29611
Schrader MFR (tyre pressure monitoring system control unit)		55-06040

F167 0009 02

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
Schrader MFR3	(tyre pressure monitoring system control unit)	51-79817
Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar sensor)		55-08176
Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar sensor)		55-08301

Jamaica

Regulatory radio identification

Manufacturer Model designation
Continental Automotive	CMKG1 (locking system)
Continental Automotive	RKE213E1 (aerial amplifier)

Manufacturer Model designation
Continental Automotive	RKE223E1GNS (aerial amplifier)
Continental Automotive	MARS Keyless (locking system)
Hirschmann 920287A	(locking system)
Hirschmann 920287B	(locking system)
Hirschmann 920702A	(locking system)
HELLA DM4	(locking system)
LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1	(locking system)
MARQUARDT DC12A	(locking system)
MARQUARDT DC12B	(locking system)

Manufacturer Model designation

MARQUARDT DC12K (locking system)

MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system)

MARQUARDT MS4 (locking system)

MARQUARDT MS5 (locking system)

MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system)

MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system)

MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system)

WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC (locking system)

Japan

Regulatory radio identification

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
Sennheiser M3IETW2R (Earbud)		201-190814 (R)
Sennheiser M3IETW2L (Earbud)		201-190815 (L)
Sennheiser BTT100 (Blue-tooth Audio Transmitter)		020-180077

Canada

Regulatory radio identification

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
Sennheiser M3IETW2R(Earbud)		IC:2099A-M3IETW2R
Sennheiser M3IETW2L(Earbud)		IC:2099A-M3IETW2L
Sennheiser BTT100 (Blue-tooth Audio Transmitter)		IC:2099A-BTT100
Sennheiser M3IETW2 C(Charging Case)		CANICS-3(B)/NMB-3(B)

Kuwait

Regulatory radio identification

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
Sennheiser M3IETW2(Momentum True Wireless 2)		Ref. 4870
Sennheiser BTT100 (Blue-tooth Audio Transmitter)		Ref. 4871

Malaysia

Regulatory radio identification

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
ADC ARS4-C	(radar sensor)	HIDF15000153
Bosch FR5CPCCF	(radar sensor)	CIDF15000490
Bosch LRR3 (radar sensor)		CIDF15000490
Bosch MRR1Rear	(radar sensor)	CIDF15000490
Bosch MRRe14FCR	(radar sensor)	CIDF15000490

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
Bosch MRRevo14F (radar sensor)		CIDF15000490
Continental Antenna	RKE213E1 (acrial amplifier)	HIDF15000153
Continental Antenna	RKE223E1GN S (aerial amplifier)	HIDF16000136
Continental Automotive	CMKG1 (locking system)	HIDF15000153
Continental Automotive	MARS Keyless (locking system)	CIDF15000578

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
Continental Automotive	UWBTRX1 (locking system)	HIDF15000153
Continental Automotive	D-WMI2020A (control unit)	RGEZ/12A/1019/S(19-4128)
HELLA DM4 (locking system)		CIDF15000578
Hirschmann 920287A (locking system)		RAUU/63A/0311/S(11-0432)
Hirschmann 920287B (locking system)		RAUU/22C/0615/S(15-1864)

F167 0009 02

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
Huf Baolong TSSRE4A (tyre pressure sensor)		CIDF17000184
HUF HUF14632	(locking sys-tem)	RAYN/25A/0715/S(15-2385)
HUF HUF4761	(locking sys-tem)	RAAU/16B/1112/S(12-2053)
LEOPOLD KOSTAL	KK1 (locking system)	HIDF15000153
MARQUARDT DC12A (lock-ing system)		RDDK/33A/0317/S(17-0669)

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
MARQUARDT DC12B (locking system)		RAUU/62A/0311/S(11-0263)
MARQUARDT DC12K (locking system)		RAUU/62A/0311/S(11-0264)
MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system)		RDDK/31A/0217/S(17-0405)
MARQUARDT MS4 (locking system)		RDDK/25B/1019/S(19-0943)

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
MARQUARDT MS5 (locking system)		RGLO/02A/0720/S(20-2580)
MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system)		CIDF19000029
MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system)		CIDF19000029
MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system)		CIDF19000029
Meta System ITS/TPS (interior protection)		RAVG/18Q/0212/S(11-2068)

F167 0009 02

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
Meta System MUW II (interior protection)		RAVG/17Q/0212/S(11-2067)
Schrader AG5SP4 (tyre pressure sensor)		RCDD/03A/0615/S(19-2094)
Schrader AG3PF4 (tyre pressure sensor)		RBEF/28A/0419/S/(19-1542)
Schrader BG3FP4 (tyre pressure sensor)		RBEF/51A/0121/S/(20-5642)

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
Schrader MFR (tyre pressure monitoring system con-trol unit)		RAQP/62A/0419/S(19-1694)
Schrader MFR3 (tyre pressure monitoring system con-trol unit)		RAQP/62A/0419/S(19-1694)
Veoneer 77GHz	MMRV1(radar sensor)	HIDF15000153
Veoneer 77V12BSM(radar sensor)		HIDF15000153

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar sensor)		HIDF15000153
Veoneer 77V125CRN (radar sensor)		HIDF15000153
WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC (locking system)		RDDK/43B/0420/S(20-1749)

F167 0009 02

Morocco
Regulatory radio identification

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
		AGREE PAR L'ANRT MAROC
ADC ARS4-A (radar sensor)		MR 9490 ANTR 2014-07-23
ADC ARS4-C	(radar sensor)	MR 20231 ANRT 2019-06-27
Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar sensor)		MR 20575 ANRT 2019-07-29
Bosch LRR3 (radar sensor)		MR 5371 ANRT 2010 2019-12-05

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
Bosch MRR1Rear (radar sensor)		MR 9186ANTR2014-04-22
Bosch MRRe14FCR (radar sensor)		MR 13900ANTR2017-05-04
Continental Antenna	RKE213E1(aerial amplifier)	MR 10631ANTR2015-07-16
Continental Antenna	RKE223E1GN S (aerial amplifier)	MR 21174ANTR2019-10-14
Continental Automotive	CMKG1 (locking system)	MR 21701ANTR2019-12-05
Continental Automotive	MARS Keyless (locking system)	MR 13681ANTR2017-04-04

Manufacturer Model designation	Radio equipment approval number
HELLA DM4 (locking system)	MR 14426ANTR2017-07-28
Hirschmann 920287A(locking system)	MR 6700ANTR2011-11-16
Hirschmann 920287B(locking system)	MR 7260ANTR2012-06-13
Hirschmann 920702A(locking system)	MR 32214ANTR2022-03-08
Huf Baolong TSSRE4A(tyre pressure monitoring system control unit)	MR 14320ANTR2017-07-07

F167 0009 02

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
Huf Baolong TSSSG4G6b (tyre pressure monitoring system control unit)		MR 19561 ANTR 2019-04-26
HUF HUF14632	(locking system)	MR 10506 ANTR 2015-06-22
HUF HUF4761	(locking system)	MR 7829 ANTR 2013-02-14
LEOPOLD KOSTAL	KK1 (locking system)	MR 10697 ANTR 2015-08-05
MARQUARDT DC12A (locking system)		MR 13429 ANTR 2017-03-03

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
MARQUARDT DC12B (locking system)		MR 6698ANTR2021-11-04
MARQUARDT DC12K (locking system)		MR 6699ANTR2021-11-04
MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system)		MR 13300ANTR2017-02-15
MARQUARDT MS4 (locking system)		MR 19199ANTR2019-03-25
MARQUARDT MS5 (locking system)		MR 23805ANRT2020-04-22
MARQUARDTMK1 (locking system)		MR 10645ANTR2015-07-21

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system)		MR 10987ANTR2015-10-22
MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system)		MR 18817ANTR2019-02-12
Schrader AG5SP4 (tyre pressure monitoring system control unit)		MR 10216ANRT 2015
Schrader AG3PF4 (tyre pressure sensor)		MR 19241ANRT 2019
Schrader BG3FP4 (tyre pressure sensor)		MR00026829ANRT2020

F167 0009 02

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
Schrader MFR (tyre pressure monitoring system control unit)		MR 19527ANRT2019-04-30
Schrader MFR3 (tyre pressure monitoring system control unit)		MR 19527ANRT 2019
Schrader GG4T (tyre pressure sensor)		MR 14777ANRT2017-09-20
Schrader DG6W2D4 (tyre pressure sensor)		MR 16355ANRT2018-04-19

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
Schrader MC34	MA4(tyre pressure monitoring system control unit)	MR 6706ANRT2011-11-17
Veoneer 77GHz	MMRV1(radar sensor)	MR 10436ANRT2015-05-25
Veoneer 77V12	BSM(radar sensor)	MR 20097ANRT2019-06-14
Veoneer 77V12	CRN(radar sensor)	MR 20149ANRT2019-06-19

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
Veoneer 77V125CRN (radar sensor)		MR 27966ANRT2021-03-29
WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC (locking system)		MR 23310ANRT2020-03-10

Mexico

Regulatory radio identification

Manufacturer Model designation

Radio equipment approval number

ADC ARS4-A (radar sensor)	IFETEL: RCPCOAR14-1191
ADC ARS4-C (radar sensor)	IFETEL: RLVCOR19-1062
Bosch LRR3 (radar sensor)	IFETEL: RCPBOLR09-0828
Bosch MRR1Rear (radar sensor)	IFETEL: RCPBOMR14-0922

Manufacturer Model designation

Radio equipment approval number

Bosch MRRe14FCR(radar sensor)		IFETEL:RCPBOMR17-0598
Continental Antenna	RKE213E1(aerial amplifier)	IFETEL:RLVKARK15-1741
Continental Antenna	RKE223E1(aerial amplifier)	IFETEL:RLVCORK19-2174
Continental Automotive	CMKG1 (locking system)	IFETEL:RCPCOCM19-2315

Manufacturer Model designation

Radio equipment approval number

Continental Automotive	MARS Keyless (locking sys-tem)	IFETEL: RLVDAMA18-1827
Gentex MUAHL	5 (convenience system)	IFETEL: RCPGEMU15-0448
HELLA DM4	(locking system)	IFETEL: RLVHEDM17-10
Hirschmann 920287A	(locking sys-tem)	IFETEL: RLVHI9211-0472
Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
Hirschmann 920287B(locking system)	IFETEL:RLVHI9212-0608
Hirschmann 920702A(locking system)	IFETEL:RLVHI9222-2674
Huf Baolong TSSRE4A(tyre pressure sensor)	IFETEL:RLVHUTS17-0806
HUF HUF14632(locking system)	IFETEL:RLVHUHU15-1204

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
HUF HUF4761	(locking system)	IFETEL:RLVHUHU12-1587
LEOPOLD KOSTAL	KK1 (locking system)	IFETEL:RLVKOKK15-0891
MARQUARDT DC12A (locking system)		IFETEL:RLVMEDC17-0348
MARQUARDT DC12B (locking system)		IFETEL:RLVMADC11-0446

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
MARQUARDT DC12K (interior protection)	IFETEL:RLVMADC11-0446
MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system)	IFETEL:RLVMAMS17-0222
MARQUARDT MS4 (locking system)	IFETEL:RLVMAMS19-0449
MARQUARDT MS5 (locking system)	IFETEL:RLVMEMS20-0957
NOM
	NYCE
Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system)		IFETEL:RLVMAMK15-1042
MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system)		IFETEL:RLVMAMK15-1043
MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system)		IFETEL:RCPMA3319-0530
Schrader AG5SP4 (tyre pressure sensor)		IFETEL:RCPSCAG15-0627

NYCE
Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
Schrader AG3PF4 (tyre pressure sensor)		IFETEL:RLVSCAG19-0705
Schrader BG3FP4 (tyre pressure sensor)		IFETEL:RLVSCBG21-0750
Schrader MFR (tyre pressure sensor)		IFETEL:RLVSCMF15-0959
Schrader MFR3 (tyre pressure sensor)		IFETEL:RLVSCMF19-0777

NYCE
Manufacturer Model designation	Radio equipment approval number
Schrader GG4T (tyre pressure sensor)	IFETEL:RLVSCGG17-1665
Schrader DG6W2D4 (tyre pressure sensor)	IFETEL:RLVSCDG18-04
Schrader MC34MA4 (tyre pressure monitoring system control unit)	IFETEL:RCPSCMR14-062
Sennheiser M3IETW2R (Earbud)	IFETEL:RCPSEM320-0435-A1

Manufacturer Model designation

Radio equipment approval number

Sennheiser M3IETW2L(Earbud)	IFETEL:RCPSEM320-0435
Sennheiser BTT100 (Blue-tooth Audio Transmitter)	IFETEL:RCPSEBT18-1407
WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC(locking sys-tem)	IFETEL:RCPWISD20-0943

Mongolia

Regulatory radio identifiers

Manufacturer Model designation

Radio equipment approval number

Continental Automotive	CMKG1 (locking system)	A19000633
Continental Automotive	MARS Keyless (locking system)	A18000328
HELLA DM4 (locking system)		A18000329
MARQUARDT DC12A (locking system)		A19000400
MARQUARDT DC12B (locking system)		A19000371

Manufacturer Model designation

Radio equipment approval number

MARQUARDT DC12K (locking system)	A19000372
MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system)	A18000289
MARQUARDT MS4 (locking system)	A19000516
MARQUARDT MS5 (locking system)	A20000085
MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system)	A19000374
MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system)	A19000374

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
MARQUARDT 3350.38(locking system)		A19000401
WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC(locking system)		A20000067

Niger

Regulatory radio identification

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
Continental Antenna	RKE213E1 (acrial amplifier)	029/ ARCEP/DG/1 9
Continental Automotive	MARS Keyless (locking system)	083/ ARCEP/DG/1 9
HELLA DM4 (locking system)		082/ ARCEP/DG/1 9
Hirschmann 920287A (locking system)		097/ ARCEP/DG/1 9
Hirschmann 920287B (locking system)		098/ ARCEP/DG/1 9

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
HUF HUF4761	(locking system)	053/ARCEP/DG/19
LEOPOLD KOSTAL	KK1 (locking system)	037/ARCEP/DG/19
MARQUARDT DC12A (locking system)		010/ARCEP/DG/19
MARQUARDT DC12B (locking system)		008/ARCEP/DG/19
MARQUARDT DC12K (locking system)		009/ARCEP/DG/19
MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system)		014/ARCEP/DG/19

F167 0009 02

Manufacturer Model designation	Radio equipment approval number
MARQUARDT MS4 (locking system)	HOMO-0096/ARCEP/DG/2019
MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system)	034/ARCEP/DG/19
MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system)	035/ARCEP/DG/19
MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system)	015/ARCEP/DG/19
MARQUARDT MU1 (locking system)	HOMO-0095/ARCEP/DG/2019

Nigeria

Regulatory radio identification

Manufacturer Model designation
ADC ARS4-A (radar sensor)
ADC ARS4-C (radar sensor)
Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar sensor)
Bosch MRR1Rear (radar sensor)
Bosch MRRe14FCR (radar sensor)
Continental Antenna RKE213E1 (aerial amplifier)
Continental Antenna RKE223E1GNS (aerial amplifier)
Continental Automotive	CMKG1 (locking system)

Manufacturer Model designation
Continental Automotive	MARS Keyless (locking system)
HELLA DM4 (locking system)
Hirschmann 920287A (locking system)
Hirschmann 920287B (locking system)
Hirschmann 920702A (locking system)
HUF HUF14632 (locking system)
HUF HUF4761 (locking system)
LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1	(locking system)
MARQUARDT DC12A (locking system)
Manufacturer Model designation
MARQUARDT DC12B (locking system)
MARQUARDT DC12K (locking system)
MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system)
MARQUARDT MS4 (locking system)
MARQUARDT MS5 (locking system)
MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system)
MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system)
MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system)
Schrader AG3PF4 (tyre pressure sensor)
Schrader BG3FP4 (tyre pressure sensor)
Schrader MFR3 (control unit)

Manufacturer Model designation

Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar sensor)

Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar sensor)

Veoneer 77V125CRN (radar sensor)

WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC (locking system)

Oman

Regulatory radio identification

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
ADC ARS4-A (radar sensor)		TRA/TA-R/2016/14D080134
ADC ARS4-C	(radar sensor)	TRA/TA-R/7769/19D172338
Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar sensor)		TRA/TA-R/7983/19D172338
Bosch LRR3 (radar sensor)		TRA/TA-R/1049/09
Bosch MRR1Rear (radar sensor)		TRA/TA-R/1849/14
Bosch MRRe14FCR (radar sensor)		TRA/TA-R/4353/17
Continental Antenna	RKE213E1 (aerial amplifier)	TRA/TA-R/2715/15D090258
Continental Antenna	RKE223E1 GN S (aerial amplifier)	TRA/TA-R/8337/19
Continental Automotive	CMKG1 (locking system)	TRA/TA-R/8642/19D172338
Continental Automotive	MARS Keyless (locking system)	TRA/TA-R/4158/17D080134
HELLA DM4 (locking system)		TRA/TA-R/4548/17D080134

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
Hirschmann 920287A (locking system)		TRA/TA-R/0210/11D080353
Hirschmann 920287B (locking system)		TRA/TA-R/0655/12D080353
Hirschmann 920702A (locking system)		TRA/TA-R/13300/22D172338
Huf Baolong TSSRE4A (tyre pressure sensor)		TRA/TA-R/4516/17D100428
Huf Baolong TSSSG4G6b (tyre pressure sensor)		TTRA/TA-R/7506/19

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
HUF HUF14632	(locking system)	TRA/TA-R/2665/15
HUF HUF4761	(locking system)	TRA/TA-R/0920/12
LEOPOLD KOSTAL	KK1 (locking system)	TRA/TA-R/3129/16
MARQUARDT DC12A (locking system)		TRA/TA-RD/4056/17D100428
MARQUARDT DC12B (locking system)		TRA/TA-R/0227/11D080353
MARQUARDT DC12K (locking system)		TRA/TA-R/0228/11D080353

F167 0009 02

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system)		TRA/TA-R/4136/17D080134
MARQUARDT MS4 (locking system)		TRA/TA-R/7316/19D172249
MARQUARDT MS5 (locking system)		TRA/TA-R/9324/20D100428
MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system)		TRA/TA-R/2848/15D080353
MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system)		TRA/TA-R/2900/15D080353

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system)		TRA/TA-R/7051/19D172249
Schrader AG5SP4 (tyre pressure sensor)		TTRA R/2380/15D080134
Schrader AG3PF4 (tyre pressure sensor)		TRA R/7287/19D172338
Schrader BG3FP4 (tyre pressure sensor)		TRA/TA-R/10694/20D172338
Schrader MFR (tyre pressure monitoring system control unit)		TRA/TA-R/7464/19D090258

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
Schrader MFR3	(tyre pressure monitoring system con-trol unit)	TRA/TA-R/7467/19D090258
Schrader GG4T	(tyre pressure sen-sor)	TRA/TA-R/4686/17D080134
Schrader DG6W2D4	(tyre pressure sensor)	TRA/TA-R/5511/18D172249
Sennheiser M3IETW2R(Earbud)		TRA/TA-R/10988/21
Sennheiser BTT100 (Blue-tooth Audio Transmitter)		TRA/TA-R/10976/21

F167 0009 02

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
Veoneer 77GHz	MMRV1 (radar sensor)	TRA/TA-R/2706/15
Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar sensor)		TRA/TA-R/7706/19D172338
Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar sensor)		TRA/TA-R/7707/19D172338
Veoneer 77V125CRN (radar sensor)		TRA/TA-R/11335/21D172338
WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC (locking system)		TRA/TA-R/9150/20

Pakistan

Regulatory radio identification

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
ADC ARS4-A (radar sensor)		TAC NO: 9.9014/2019
ADC ARS4-C	(radar sensor)	TAC NO: 9.9389/2019
Bosch FR5CPCCF	(radar sensor)	TAC NO: 9.198/2020
Continental Antenna	RKE213E1 (aerial amplifier)	TAC NO: 9.142/2016

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
Continental Antenna	RKE223E1GN S (aerial amplifier)	TAC NO:9.100169/2019
Continental Automotive	CMKG1 (locking system)	TACNO:9.100175/2019
Continental Automotive	MARS Keyless (locking system)	TAC NO:9.213/2017
Continental Automotive	D-WMI2020A (control unit)	TAC NO:9.9836/2019
HELLA DM4 (locking system)		TAC NO:9.409/2017
Hirschmann 920287A (locking system)	TAC NO: 9.845/2013
Hirschmann 920287B (locking system)	TAC NO: 9.846/2013
Hirschmann 920702A (locking system)	TAC No. 9.412/2022
HUF Baolong TSSRE4A (tyre pressure sensor)	TAC NO: 9.620/2017

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
HUF HUF14632	(locking sys-tem)	TAC NO:9.598/2015
HUF HUF4761	(locking sys-tem)	TAC NO:9.790/2013
LEOPOLD KOSTAL	KK1 (locking system)	TAC NO:9.118/2016
MARQUARDT DC12A (lock-ing system)		TAC NO:9.131/2017
MARQUARDT DC12B (lock-ing system)		TAC NO:9.829/2013

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
MARQUARDT DC12K (locking system)		TAC NO:9.830/2013
MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system)		TAC NO:9.133/2017
MARQUARDT MS4 (locking system)		TAC NO:9.100171/2019
MARQUARDT MS5 (locking system)		TAC.NO:9.774/2020
MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system)		TAC NO:9.486/2015
MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system)		TAC NO:9.497/2015

F167 0009 02

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
Schrader AG3PF4 (tyre pressure sensor)		TACNO:9.039/2016
Schrader AG5SP4 (tyre pressure sensor)		TACNO:9.9167/2019
Schrader BG3FP4 (tyre pressure sensor)		TACNO:9.68/2021
Schrader GG4T (tyre pressure sensor)		TACNO:9.538/2017

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
Schrader DG6W2D4	(tyre pressure sensor)	TAC NO: 9.789/2018
Veoneer 77GHz	MMRV1 (radar sensor)	TAC NO: 9.9284/2019
Veoneer 77V12BSM	(radar sensor)	TAC NO: 9.9391/2019
Veoneer 77V12CRN	(radar sensor)	TAC NO: 9.9391/2019

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
Veoneer 77V125CRN(radar sensor)		TAC NO:9.477/2021
WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC(locking system)		TAC NO:9.527/2020

Paraguay

Regulatory radio identification

CONATEL

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
ADC ARS4-A (radar sensor)		2019-05-I-0271
ADC ARS4-C	(radar sensor)	2019-11-I-0602
Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar sensor)		2019-09-I-0508
Bosch MRRe14FCR (radar sensor)		2017-06-I-0000162
Bosch MRR1Rear (radar sensor)		2019-05-I-000236

CONATEL

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
Continental Antenna	RKE213E1 (aerial amplifier)	2021-02-I-00101 y 2016-02-I-0000038
Continental Antenna	RKE223E1GN S (aerial amplifier)	2019-12-I-0656
Continental Automotive	CMKG1 (locking system)	2020-02-I-0110
Continental Automotive	MARS Keyless (locking system)	2017-05-I-0000136
HELLA DM4 (locking system)		2017-08-I_0000261

CONATEL

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
Hirschmann 920287A (locking system)		2016-5-I-000134 y2011-06-I-0059
Hirschmann 920287B (locking system)		2017-04-I-0000119 y2012-05-I-0096
Hirschmann 920702A (locking system)		2022-03-I-0149
Huf Baolong TSSRE4A (tyre pressure sensor)		2017-09-I-0000328

F167 0009 02

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
HUF HUF14632	(locking system)	2020-06-I-0284 y2015-08-I-0000226
HUF HUF4761	(locking system)	2017-12-I-0000409 y2012-10-I-0178
LEOPOLD KOSTAL	KK1 (locking system)	2015-06-I-0000181
MARQUARDT DC12A (locking system)		2020-12-I-0898 y2015-06-I-0000181

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
MARQUARDT DC12B (locking system)		2021-05-I-0304; 2016-5-I-000144 y 2011-06-I-0067
MARQUARDT DC12K (locking system)		2021-05-I-0305; 2016-5-I-000143 y 2011-06-I-0068
MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system)		2017-04-I-0000101

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
MARQUARDT MS4 (locking system)		2019-10-I-0581
MARQUARDT MS5 (locking system)		2020-08-I-0604
MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system)		2020-07-I-0390 y2015-07-I-0000200
MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system)		2020-07-I-0391 y2015-07-I-0000201

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system)		2019-04-I-000216
Schrader AG5SP4 (tyre pressure sensor)		2015-04-I-0000150
Schrader AG3PF4 (tyre pressure sensor)		2019-05-1-000261
Schrader BG3FP4 (tyre pressure sensor)		2021-02-I-0063

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
Schrader GG4T	(tyre pressure sensor)	2020-02-1-00 44
Schrader DG6W2D4	(tyre pressure sensor)	2019-11-1-06 32
Veoneer 77GHz	MMRV1 (radar sensor)	2020-07-1-0510
Veoneer 77V12BSM	(radar sensor)	2019-07-1-0399
Veoneer 77V12CRN	(radar sensor)	2019-07-1-0398

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
Veoneer 77V125CRN(radar sensor)		2021-04-I-0188
WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC(locking system)		2020-06-I-0326

Further specific information

Charging unit for wireless charging of mobile devices (WMI):

D-WMI2020A:

This vehicle has the following radio frequency component approved by CONATEL - Paraguay: Wireless interface for mobile devices, Continental brand, model D-WMI2020A manufactured by Continental Automotive GmbH.

Radio equipment approval number: 2019-11-1-0600

Rear Seat Entertainment System:

DAIRSE:

Importer: Condor S.A.C.I Casa Central, J.B. Gorostiaga 315 y Guaranías, Asunción, Paraguay, (595 21) 569 7000, [e-mail]

Philippines

Regulatory radio identification

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
ADC ARS4-A (radar sensor)		ESD-1409466 C
ADC ARS4-C	(radar sensor)	ESD-1920226 C

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar sensor)		ESD-1920531 C
Bosch MRR1Rear (radar sensor)		ESD-1408917 C
Bosch MRRe14FCR (radar sensor)		ESD-1716172 C
Continental Antenna	RKE213E1 (aerial amplifier)	ESD-1511856 C
Continental Antenna	RKE223E1GN S (aerial amplifier)	ESD-1921015 C

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
Continental Automotive	CMKG1 (locking system)	ESD-2021556 C
Continental Automotive	MARS Keyless (locking system)	ESD-1714865 C
HELLA DM4 (locking system)		ESD-1715539 C
Hirschmann 920287A (locking system)		ESD-1105246 C
Hirschmann 920287B (locking system)		ESD-1206044 C
Huf Baolong TSSRE4A (tyre pressure sensor)		ESD-1715393 C
HUF HUF14632	(locking sys-tem)	ESD-1511236 C
HUF HUF4761	(locking sys-tem)	ESD-1206521 C
LEOPOLD KOSTAL	KK1 (locking system)	ESD-1510698 C
MARQUARDT DC12A (lock-ing system)		ESD-1714489 C

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
MARQUARDT DC12B (locking system)		ESD-1105216C
MARQUARDT DC12K (locking system)		ESD-1105215C
MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system)		ESD-1715652C
MARQUARDT MS4 (locking system)		ESD-1919133C
MARQUARDT MS5 (locking system)		ESD-2022426C
MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system)		ESD-1510644C

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system)		ESD-1510645 C
MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system)		ESD-1919198 C
Schrader AG5SP4 (tyre pressure sensor)		ESD-1715393 C
Schrader AG3PF4 (tyre pressure sensor)		ESD-1919585 C
Schrader BG3FP4 (tyre pressure sensor)		ESD-RCE-2124846

F167 0009 02

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
Schrader GG4T	(tyre pressure sensor)	ESD-1715977 C
Schrader DG6W2D4	(tyre pressure sensor)	ESD-1817081 C
Veoneer 77GHz	MMRV1 (radar sensor)	ESD-1510921 C
WITTE-Velbert	SDHTAG3NFC (locking system)	ESD-2022599 C

Zambia

Regulatory radio identification

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
Continental Antenna	RKE223E1 (aerial amplifier)	ZMB/ZICTA/TA/2019/3/11
Continental Automotive	MARS Keyless (locking system)	ZMB/ZICTA/TA/2019/3/3
HELLA DM4 (locking system)		ZMB/ZICTA/TA/2019/3/4
Hirschmann 920287A (locking system)		ZMB/ZICTA/TA/2019/7/12

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
Hirschmann 920287B (locking system)		ZMB/ZICTA/TA/2019/7/11
HUF HUF4761	(locking system)	ZMB/ZICTA/TA/2018/12/18
LEOPOLD KOSTAL	KK1 (locking system)	ZMB/ZICTA/TA/2019/3/48
MARQUARDT DC12A (locking system)		ZMB/ZICTA/TA/2019/5/16

F167 0009 02

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
MARQUARDT DC12B (locking system)		ZMB/ZICTA/TA/2019/5/17
MARQUARDT DC12K (locking system)		ZMB/ZICTA/TA/2019/5/18
MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system)		ZMB/ZICTA/TA/2018/9/30
MARQUARDT MS4 (locking system)		ZMB/ZICTA/TA/2019/7/123

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system)		ZMB/ZICTA/TA/2019/3/20
MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system)		ZMB/ZICTA/TA/2019/3/21
MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system)		ZMB/ZICTA/TA/2019/3/6
MARQUARDT MU1 (locking system)		ZMB/ZICTA/TA/2019/7/124

Serbia

Regulatory radio identification

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
ADC ARS4-A (radar sensor)		И011 20
ADC ARS4-C	(radar sensor)	И011 19
Bosch FR5CPCCF	(radar sensor)	И011 19
Bosch LRR3 (radar sensor)		И011 19
Bosch MRR1Rear	(radar sensor)	И011 17

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
Bosch MRRe14	FCR (radar sensor)	И005 17
Continental Antenna	RKE213E1 (acrial amplifier)	И005 21
Continental Antenna	RKE223E1 GN S (aerial amplifier)	И005 19
Continental Automotive	CMKG1 (locking system)	И005 20
Continental Automotive	MARS Keyless (locking system)	И005 20

Manufacturer Model designation	Radio equipment approval number
HELLA DM4 (locking system)	И005 20
Hirschmann 920287A (locking system)	И005 18
Hirschmann 920287B (locking system)	И005 18
Hirschmann 920702A (locking system)	И005 22
Huf Baolong TSSRE4A (tyre pressure sensor)	И005 20

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
HUF HUF14632	(locking system)	И005 21
HUF HUF4761	(locking system)	И005 21
LEOPOLD KOSTAL	KK1 (locking system)	И005 18
MARQUARDT DC12A (locking system)		И005 20
MARQUARDT DC12B (locking system)		И005 20

F167 0009 02

Manufacturer Model designation	Radio equipment approval number
MARQUARDT DC12K (locking system)	И005 20
MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system)	И011 17
MARQUARDT MS4 (locking system)	И005 19
MARQUARDT MS5 (locking system)	И005 20
MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system)	И005 21
MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system)	И005 21

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
MARQUARDT 3350.38(locking system)		И005 22
Meta System MUW II (interior protection)		И011 19
Schrader AG5SP4 (tyre pressure sensor)		И005 15
Schrader AG3PF4 (tyre pressure sensor)		И005 15

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
Schrader BG3FP4	(tyre pressure sensor)	И005 20
Schrader GG4T	(tyre pressure sensor)	И005 17
Schrader DG6W2D4	(tyre pressure sensor)	И005 18
Schrader MC34MA4	(tyre pressure monitoring system control unit)	И011 11

F167 0009 02

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
Veoneer 77GHz	MMRV1 (radar sensor)	И011 18
Veoneer 77V12	BSM (radar sensor)	И011 19
Veoneer 77V12	CRN (radar sensor)	И011 19
Veoneer 77V12	5CRN (radar sensor)	И038 21
WITTE-Velbert	SDHTAG3NFC (locking system)	И005 20

Singapore
Regulatory radio identification

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
		Complies with IMDA Standards
ADC ARS4-A (radar sensor)		DA103365
ADC ARS4-C (radar sensor)		DA103365
Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar sensor)		DA103365
Bosch LRR3 (radar sensor)		DA103365
Bosch MRR1Rear (radar sensor)		DA103365
Bosch MRRe14FCR (radar sensor)		DA103365

F167 0009 02

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
Continental Antenna	RKE213E1 (aerial amplifier)	DA105282
Continental Antenna	RKE223E1GN S (aerial amplifier)	DA107248
Continental Automotive	CMKG1 (locking system)	DA103365
Continental Automotive	MARS Keyless (locking system)	DA105282
Continental Automotive	UWBTRX1 (locking system)	DB107091
Continental Automotive	D-WMI2020A (control unit)	DA103365
Harman Becker	HERMES 3.0 (communication module)	DB107091
HELLA DM4 (locking system)		DA103365
Hirschmann 920287A (locking system)		DA103365
Hirschmann 920287B (locking system)		DA103365
Hirschmann 920702A (locking system)		DA105282
HUF Baolong TSSRE4A (tyre pressure sensor)		DA30668

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
HUF Baolong TSSSG4G6b (tyre pressure sensor)		DA28467
HUF HUF14632	(locking sys-tem)	DA105282
HUF HUF4761	(locking sys-tem)	DA103365
LEOPOLD KOSTAL	KK1 (locking system)	DA103365
MARQUARDT DC12A (lock-ing system)		DA103787
MARQUARDT DC12B (lock-ing system)		DA103365
MARQUARDT DC12K (lock-ing system)		DA103365

Manufacturer Model designation	Radio equipment approval number
MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system)	DA103787
MARQUARDT MS4 (locking system)	DA103787
MARQUARDT MS5 (locking system)	DB107091
MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system)	DA103365
MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system)	DA103365
MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system)	DA103787
Meta System ITS/TPS (interior protection)	DA103365

F167 0009 02

Manufacturer Model designation	Radio equipment approval number
Meta System MUW II (interior protection)	DA103365
Schrader AG5SP4 (tyre pressure sensor)	DA103787
Schrader AG3PF4 (tyre pressure sensor)	DA107968
Schrader BG3FP4 (tyre pressure sensor)	DA103365
Schrader GG4T (tyre pressure sensor)	DA105282
Schrader DG6W2D4 (tyre pressure sensor)	DA105282

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
Veoneer 77GHz	MMRV1 (radar sensor)	DA103365
Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar sensor)		DA103365
Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar sensor)		DA103365
Veoneer 77V125CRN (radar sensor)		DA103365
WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC (locking system)		DA107248

South Africa

Regulatory radio identification

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
ADC ARS4-A (radar sensor)		TA-2014/1637
ADC ARS4-C (radar sensor)		TA-2019/1595
Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar sensor)		TA-2019/1200
Bosch MRR1Rear (radar sensor)		TA-2014/212
Bosch MRRe14FCR (radar sensor)		TA-2017/2013
Bosch LRR3 (radar sensor)		TA-2009/464
Continental Antenna	RKE213E1 (aerial amplifier)	TA-2015/1438
Continental Antenna	RKE223E1 (aerial amplifier)	TA-2020/043
Continental Automotive	CMKG1 (locking system)	TA-2019/5405
Continental Automotive	MARS Keyless (locking system)	TA-2016/3500

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
Continental Automotive	UWBTRX1 (locking system)	TA-2021/346 0
Gentex MUAHL	5 (convenience system)	TA-2015/138 6
HELLA DM4	(locking system)	TA-2017/251 8
Hirschmann 920287A	(locking system)	TA-2011/374
Hirschmann 920287B	(locking system)	TA-2013/126 2

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
Hirschmann 920	702A(locking sys-tem)	TA-2022/0162
Huf Baolong TSSRE4A(tyre pressure sensor)		TA-2017/1393
Huf Baolong TSSSG4G6b(tyre pressure sensor)		TA-2019/1440
HUF HUF14632(locking sys-tem)		TA-2015/1077

F167 0009 02

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
HUF HUF4761	(locking system)	TA-2012/1543
LEOPOLD KOSTAL	KK1 (locking system)	TA-2015/595
Meta System ITS Master (interior protection)		TA-2011/1636
Meta System ITS Sensor (interior protection)		TA-2011/1227
Meta System MUW II (interior protection)		TA-2019/261

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
MARQUARDT DC12A (locking system)		TA-2017/312
MARQUARDT DC12B (locking system)		TA-2011/370
MARQUARDT DC12K (locking system)		TA-2012/1542
MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system)		TA-2016/3314
MARQUARDT MS4 (locking system)		TA-2019/843
MARQUARDT MS5 (locking system)		TA-2020/5765

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system)		TA-2015/179
MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system)		TA-2015/180
MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system)		TA-2018/3985
Schrader AG5SP4 (tyre pressure sensor)		TA-2015/072
Schrader AG3PF4 (tyre pressure sensor)		TA-2019-133

F167 0009 02

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
Schrader BG3FP4 (tyre pressure sensor)		TA-2020/773
Schrader MFR (control unit)		TA-2019/273
Schrader MFR3 (control unit)		TA-2019-273
Schrader GG4T (tyre pressure sensor)		TA-2017/3884
Schrader DG6W2D4 (tyre pressure sensor)		TA-2017/2933

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
Schrader MC34	MA4 (tyre pressure monitoring system con-trol unit)	TA-2011/137 0
Veoneer 77GHz	MMRV1 (radar sensor)	TA-2015/208 7
Veoneer 77V12	BSM (radar sensor)	TA-2019/138 0
Veoneer 77V12	CRN (radar sensor)	TA-2019/138 2

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
Veoneer 77V125CRN(radar sensor)		TA-2021/0150
WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC(locking system)		TA-2020/055

F167 0009 02

South Korea

Regulatory radio identification

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
Continental Antenna	RKE223E1 (acrial amplifier)	R-C-Ca3-RKE223E1
Huf Baolong TSSRE4A
HUF HUF14632		MSIP-CRM-HHF-HUF-14632
Schrader MFR (control unit)		MSIP-REM-SRD-MFR

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
Schrader MFR3	(control unit)	KCC R-R-SRD-MFR3A
Schrader MC34	MA4 (tyre pressure monitoring system control unit)	KCC-REM-SRD-MRXMC34MA 4
Schrader AG5SP4	(tyre pressure sensor)	MSIP-CRM-SRD-AG5SP4
Schrader AG3PF4	(tyre pressure sensor)	R-C-SRD-AG3PF4

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
Schrader BG3FP4	(tyre pressure sensor)	R-C-SRD-BG3FP4
Schrader GG4T	(tyre pressure sensor)	MSIP-CRM-SRD-GG4T
Schrader DG6W2D4	(tyre pressure sensor)	R-CRM-SRD-DG6W2D4

Togo
Regulatory radio identification

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
Continental Antenna	RKE223E1 (acrial amplifier)	No. 024/19
Continental Automotive	MARS Keyless (locking system)	No. 040/19
HELLA DM4 (locking system)		No. 039/19
Hirschmann 920287A (locking system)		No. 089/19
Hirschmann 920287B (locking system)		No. 088/19

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
HUF HUF4761	(locking system)	No. 041/19
LEOPOLD KOSTAL	KK1 (locking system)	No. 060/19
MARQUARDT DC12A (locking system)		No. 055/19
MARQUARDT DC12B (locking system)		No. 057/19
MARQUARDT DC12K (locking system)		No. 056/19
MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system)		No. 008/19
MARQUARDT MS4 (locking system)		No. 101/19

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system)		No. 021/19
MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system)		No. 022/19
MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system)		No. 016/20

Ukraine

Regulatory radio identification

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
Continental Antenna	RKE213E1 (acrial amplifier)	UKR.355-123 /19
Continental Antenna	RKE223E1 GN S (aerial amplifier)	UA.R.TR.052. 682-19
Continental Automotive	CMKG1 (lock-ing system)	UA1.001.021 175-20-TE
Continental Automotive	MARS Keyless (locking sys-tem)	RTS.UKR.355- 34/18

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
HELLA DM4 (locking system)		UA.TR.109
Hirschmann 920287A (locking system)		UKR.355-7/20
Hirschmann 920287B (locking system)		UKR.355-8/20
Huf Baolong TSSRE4A (tyre pressure sensor)		UA 1.001.01856 8-19-TE

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
Huf Baolong TSSSG4G6b	(tyre pressure monitoring system con-trol unit)	UA1.001.019289-19-TE
HUF HUF14632	(locking sys-tem)	UKR.355-113/19
HUF HUF4761	(locking sys-tem)	UA1.001.018653-19-TE
LEOPOLD KOSTAL	KK1 (locking system)	10094.006682-19

F167 0009 02

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
MARQUARDT DC12A (locking system)		UA.R.TR.052.307-19
MARQUARDT DC12B (locking system)		UA.R.TR.052.308-19
MARQUARDT DC12K (locking system)		UA.R.TR.052.309-19
MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system)		UA1.001.019129-19-TE
MARQUARDT MS4 (locking system)		UA.R.TR.052.528-19
MARQUARDT MS5 (locking system)		632.16-CET

Manufacturer Model designation	Radio equipment approval number
MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system)	UA1.001.019233-19-TE
MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system)	UA1.001.019234-19-TE
MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system)	UA1.001.018888-19-TE
Schrader AG5SP4 (tyre pressure sensor)	UA.TR. 032
Schrader AG3PF4 (tyre pressure sensor)	UA-TR-001

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
Schrader BG3FP4	(tyre pressure sensor)	UA-TR-109
Schrader GG4T	(tyre pressure sensor)	UA.TR. 028
Schrader DG6W2D4	(tyre pressure sensor)	UA.TR. 028
WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC (locking system)		UA.R.TR.052, 120-20

F167 0009 02

Uzbekistan

Regulatory radio identification

Manufacturer Model designation

Continental Automotive	RKE213E1 (aerial amplifier)
Continental Automotive	RKE223E1GNS (aerial amplifier)
Continental Automotive	CMKG1 (locking system)
Continental Automotive	MARS Keyless (locking system)
HELLA DM4 (locking system)
Hirschmann 920287A (locking system)

Manufacturer Model designation

Hirschmann 920287B (locking system)

LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (locking system)

MARQUARDT DC12A (locking system)

MARQUARDT DC12B (locking system)

MARQUARDT DC12K (locking system)

MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system)

MARQUARDT MS4 (locking system)

MARQUARDT MS5 (locking system)

MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system)

Manufacturer Model designation

MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system)

MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking sys-tem)

WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC (locking system)

United Arab Emirates

Regulatory radio identification

Manufacturer Model designation

Radio equipment approval number

ADC ARS4-A (radar sensor)

TA RTTE: 58296/17, DA40068/15

Manufacturer Model designation

ADC ARS4-C

(radar sensor)

Radio equipment approval number

TA RTTE: 77062/19, DA40068/15

Manufacturer Model designation

Radio equipment approval number

Bosch FR5CPCCF

(radar sensor)

TA RTTE: 74533/19, DA36758/14

Continental Antenna

RKE213E1 (aerial amplifier)

TRA ER64693/18, DA65993/17

Continental Antenna

RKE223E1GN S (aerial amplifier)

TRA E76442/19, DA65993/17

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
Continental Automotive	CMKG1 (locking system)	TRAER77964/20, DA0018994/09
Continental Automotive	MARS Keyless (locking system)	TRAER56005/17, DA44932/15
Continental Automotive	UWBTRX1 (locking system)	TRAER11321/22, DA36975/14
Gentex MUAHL	5(convenience system)	TRAER41849/15, DA35176/14

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
Haram Becker	HERMES 3.0 (communication module)	TRAER03601/21, DA0028019/10
HELLA DM4	(locking system)	TRAER56616/17, DA44932/15
Hirschmann 920	287A (locking system)	TRAER52213/17, DA35219/14
Hirschmann 920	287B (locking system)	TRAER42011/15, DA35219/14

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
Huf Baolong TSSRE4A (tyre pressure sensor)		TRA ER57806/17, DA36976/14
Huf Baolong TSSSG4G6b (tyre pressure monitoring system control unit)		TRA ER7307/19, DA0086237/12
HUF HUF14632 (locking system)		TRA ER63716/18, DA36976/14
HUF HUF4761 (locking system)		TRA ER55496/17, DA36976/14

F167 0009 02

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
HUF HUF13145	(locking system)	TRAER08607/22DA36976/14
LEOPOLD KOSTAL	KK1 (locking system)	TRAER62622/18, DA0105247/13

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
MARQUARDT DC12A (locking system)		TRAER53465/17, DA0018994/09
MARQUARDT DC12B (locking system)		TRAER0067828/11, DA0018994/09
MARQUARDT DC12K (locking system)		TRAER0067829/11, DA0018994/09

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system)		TRAER52668/17, DA0018994/09
MARQUARDT MS4 (locking system)		TRAER71616/19, DA0018994/09
MARQUARDT MS5 (locking system)		TRAER80720/20, DA0018994/09

F167 0009 02

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system)		TRAER64145/18, DA0018994/09
MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system)		TRAER64146/18, DA0018994/09
MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system)		TRAER69280/19, 0018994/09
Schrader AG5SP4 (tyre pressure sensor)		TRAER37156/15, DA0047074/10

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
Schrader AG3PF4 (tyre pressure sensor)		TRAER70533/19, DA0047074/10
Schrader BG3FP4 (tyre pressure sensor)		TRAER96175/21, DA0047074/10
Schrader GG4T (tyre pressure sensor)		TRAER57985/17, DA0047074/10

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
Schrader DG6W2D4 (tyre pressure sensor)		TRA ER960528/1 8, DA0047074/ 10
Schrader MC34MA4 (tyre pressure monitoring system con- trol unit)		TRA ER37066/15, DA0047074/ 10
Sennheiser M3IETW2L (Earbud)		ER78231/20
Sennheiser BTT100 (Blue- tooth Audio Transmitter)		ER64728/18

F167 0009 02

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
Veoneer 77GHz	MMRV1 (radar sensor)	TA RTTE: ER96352/21; 0020858/10

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
Veoneer 77V12BSM(radar sensor)		TA RTTE:ER72324/19;0020858/10

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
Veoneer 77V12CRN(radar sensor)		TA RTTE:ER72323/19;0020858/10

F167 0009 02

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
Veoneer 77V125CRN(radar sensor)		TA RTTE:ER95775/21;0020858/10
WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC(locking system)		TRAER79695/20,DA0018994/09

Radio equipment approval number
TRA ER79695/20, DA0018994/ 09

United Kingdom

Regulatory radio identification

Manufacturer Model designation

Continental Antenna RKE213E1 (aerial amplifier)
Continental Antenna RKE223E1GNS (aerial amplifier)
Continental Automotive	CMKG1 (locking system)
Continental Automotive	MARS Keyless (locking system)
Continental Automotive	UWBTRX1 (locking system)
HUF HUF13145 (locking system)

F167 0009 02

Manufacturer Model designation

Huf Baolong TSSRE4A (tyre pres-sure sensor)

HELLA DM4 (locking system)

Hirschmann 920287A (locking sys-tem)

Hirschmann 920287B (locking sys-tem)

Hirschmann 920702A (locking sys-tem)

LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (locking system)

MARQUARDT DC12B (locking sys-tem)

UK CA

Manufacturer Model designation

MARQUARDT DC12K (locking system)

MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system)

MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system)

MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system)

MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system)

MARQUARDT MS4 (locking system)

MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system)

Schrader AG5SP4 (tyre pressure sensor)

UK CA

Manufacturer Model designation

Schrader AG3PF4 (tyre pressure sensor)

Schrader BG3FP4 (tyre pressure sensor)

Schrader GG4T (tyre pressure sensor)

Schrader DG6W2D4 (tyre pressure sensor)

WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC (locking system)

Further specific information

Charging unit for wireless charging of mobile devices (WMI):

D-WMI2016A, D-WMI2017A, D-WMI2017B:

F167000902

Restrictions or Requirements in the UK: A separation distance of at least 10 cm between all persons and the device must be provided at all times. The Device must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. D-WMI2020A:

Restrictions or Requirements in the UK: A separation distance of at least 0 cm between all persons and the device must be provided at all times. The Device must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.

United States

Regulatory radio identification

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
Sennheiser M3IETW2R (Earbud)		FCC ID: DMOM3IETW 2R
Sennheiser M3IETW2L (Earbud)		FCC ID: DMOM3IETW 2L
Sennheiser BTT100 (Blue-tooth Audio Transmitter)		FCC ID: DMOBTT100

Information on installation clearances

Charging unit for wireless charging of mobile devices (WMI):

The charging unit for wireless charging of mobile devices (WMI) complies with FCC and IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 0 cm (in contact) between the source of radiation and your body. This transmitter must not be placed in the same location as or used at the same time as another transmitter or antenna.

Rear Seat Entertainment System:

USA: "This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules and Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device must not cause any harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

This device must be installed and used at a distance of at least 6 cm from the body."

Canada: "This device complies with ISED Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device must not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

This equipment complies with ISED radiation exposure limits established for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment must be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 5 cm between the radiation source and your body."

Radar sensors:

For the USA only: Information on exposure to high-frequency radiation:

This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits established for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment must be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 20 cm between the radiation source and your body.

This transmitter must not be placed in the same location as or used at the same time as another antenna or transmitter.

For Canada only: This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 20 cm between the radiation source and your body.

BT Audio Transmitter (BTT100):

This equipment complies with FCC and IC radiation exposure limits established for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 9 cm between the radiation source and your body. This transmitter must not be placed in the same location as or used at the same time as another antenna or transmitter.

Vietnam

Regulatory radio identification

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
ADC ARS4-A (radar sensor)		Mercedes-Benz Vietnam Company Limited
ADC ARS4-C	(radar sensor)	Mercedes-Benz Vietnam Company Limited
Bosch FR5CPCCF	(radar sensor)	Mercedes-Benz Vietnam Company Limited

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
Bosch MRR1Rear	(radar sensor)	Mercedes-Benz Vietnam Company Limited
Bosch MRRe14FCR	(radar sensor)	Mercedes-Benz Vietnam Company Limited
Continental Antenna	RKE213E1 (aerial amplifier)	Suntech Vietnam Technology Company Limited C027415111 8AF04A2

F167 0009 02

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
Continental Antenna	RKE223E1 GN S (aerial amplifier)	Suntech Viet-nam Technol-ogy Company LimitedB1522011121AF04A3
Continental Automotive	CMKG1 (lock-ing system)	Suntech Viet-nam Technol-ogy Company LimitedC0001070120AF04A2

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
Continental Automotive	MARS Keyless (locking system)	Mercedes-Benz Vietnam Company Limited B074824041 9AF04A2
HELLA DM4 (locking system)		Mercedes-Benz Vietnam Company Limited CO20403032 1AF04A3
Huf Baolong TSSRE4A (tyre pressure sensor)		C011220071 7AF04A2

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
LEOPOLD KOSTAL	KK1 (locking system)	Mercedes-Benz Vietnam Company LimitedC0313140421AF0403
MARQUARDT DC12A (locking system)		Suntech Vietnam Technology Company LimitedC0208030321AF04A3

F167 0009 02

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
MARQUARDT DC12B (locking system)		Suntech Vietnam Technology Company LimitedC0076210121AF04A3
MARQUARDT DC12K (locking system)		Suntech Vietnam Technology Company LimitedC0077210121AF04A3

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system)		Suntech Viet-nam Techno-ogy Company LimitedC0075210121AF04A3
MARQUARDT MS4 (locking system)		Suntech Viet-nam Techno-ogy Company LimitedC0913110821AF04A3

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
MARQUARDT MS5 (locking system)		Suntech Vietnam Technology Company LimitedC0141140520AF04A2
MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system)		Suntech Vietnam Technology Company LimitedC0049150121AF04A3
Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system)		Suntech Vietnam Technology Company LimitedC0050150121AF04A3
MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system)		Suntech Vietnam Technology Company LimitedC0131030221AF04A3

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
Schrader AG5SP4 (tyre pressure sensor)		Suntech Viet-nam Techno-logy Company LimitedC0002050119AF042A
Schrader AG3PF4 (tyre pressure sensor)		Suntech Viet-nam Techno-logy Company LimitedC0120220519AF04A2

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
Schrader GG4T (tyre pressure sensor)		Suntech Viet-nam Technol-ogy Company LimitedC0170191017AF04A2
Schrader DG6W2D4 (tyre pressure sensor)		Suntech Viet-nam Technol-ogy Company LimitedC0078070518AF04A2

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
Veoneer 77GHz	MMRV1 (radar sensor)	Mercedes-Benz Vietnam Company Limited
Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar sensor)		Mercedes-Benz Vietnam Company Limited
Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar sensor)		Mercedes-Benz Vietnam Company Limited

Manufacturer Model designation		Radio equipment approval number
Veoneer 77V125CRN(radar sensor)		Mercedes-Benz Vietnam Company Limited
WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC(locking system)		Mercedes-Benz Vietnam Company LimitedA0847130820AF04A3

Information about the specific absorption rate (SAR)

Information about the specific absorption rate For France only:

The values have been determined and tested in accordance with the Décret n° 2019-1186 guideline regarding the indication of the specific absorption rate (SAR) of wireless vehicle components.

Further information and updates are available at the following web address:

https:// regulatoryradioinformation.corpinter.net/en

Information about the specific absorption rate

Vehicle components SAR value in W/kg Applicable limit value
Compensator ECE DE003 & ECE DE004 < 0.2 W/kg 2 W/kg
DAI RSE 1.8 W/kg 2 W/kg
D-WMI2020A 0.018 W/kg 4 W/kg
HERMES communication module < 0.4 W/kg 2 W/kg
RAMSES communication module 0.036 W/kg 2 W/kg
NRCS2P 0.003 W/kg 2 W/kg
NTG6 0.199 W/kg 4 W/kg
NTG7 0.08 W/kg 2 W/kg
NTG7RSU 0.07 W/kg 2 W/kg
Tablet PC SM-T230NZ 0.7 W/kg 4 W/kg
Radio data transmission telephone system	0.24 W/kg 2 W/kg

Importer information for regulatory radio components

For Moldova only:

Importer

S.C. GRAND PREMIUM S.R.L. Moldova

mun. Chisinau, str. Hîncesti sos., 2/2

For Turkey only:

Importer

For the United Kingdom only: Importer

Mercedes-Benz Cars UK Limited

Delaware Drive, Tongwell

Milton Keynes, MK15 8BA

England

Importer of Mercedes-Benz vans

Mercedes-Benz Vans UK Limited

Delaware Drive, Tongwell

Milton Keynes, MK15 8BA

Importer of Mercedes-Benz spare parts

Mercedes-Benz Parts Logistics

Delaware Drive, Tongwell

Milton Keynes, MK15 8BA

England

Further information and updates are available at

the following web address:

https://

regulatoryradioinformation.corpinter.net/en

Vehicle identification plate, VIN and engine number overview

Vehicle identification plate

Interior view of a car showing the seatbelt and dashboard (no text or symbols visible)

MFD BY MERCEDES-BENZ AG STUTTGART GVW 2480KG | MADE IN HUNGARY MY2013 GAW FRT 1190KG | BUILT 10/12 GAW RR 1340KG | PASSENGER CAR XXXX VINXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 1 2 3 4 5

Vehicle identification plate (example: Kuwait)

① Vehicle manufacturer
2 Place of manufacture
③ Manufacturing date
4 Paint code
5 VIN

Mercedes-Benz AG XXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXX kg XXXX kg XXXX kg XXXX kg 1- 2- Made in Germany 8 XXXX TYP-XXX PZ-4 S 1.0% Made in Germany

Vehicle identification plate (example: all other countries)

① Vehicle manufacturer
② EU general operating permit number (only for certain countries)
VIN (vehicle identification number)
4 Maximum permissible gross vehicle weight (kg)

Maximum permissible gross weight of vehicle combination (kg) (for certain countries only, optional)
6 Maximum permissible front axle load (kg)
7 Maximum permissible rear axle load (kg)
Paint code
The data shown in the illustration is example data.

VIN in front of the front seat

Diagram showing vehicle interior with directional arrow and numbered annotation, likely illustrating a driving or navigation system.

VIN (vehicle identification number)

VIN at the lower edge of the windscreen

Diagram of a car's front view with a numbered marker indicating a location or feature on the windshield.

① VIN (vehicle identification number)

The VIN as a label at the lower edge of the wind-screen is only available in some countries.

Engine number

The engine number is stamped into the crank-case.

i Further information can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop.

Operating fluids

Notes on operating fluids

WARNING Risk of injury due to harmful operating fluids

Operating fluids can be toxic.

When using, storing and disposing of operating fluids, observe the imprints on the respective original containers.
Always keep operating fluids in the sealed original container.
Always keep children away from operating fluids.

ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Pollution of the environment due to irresponsible disposal of operating fluids

Incorrect disposal of operating fluids can cause considerable damage to the environment.

▶ Dispose of operating fluids in an environmentally responsible manner.

Operating fluids include the following:

• fuels
• DeNOx agent AdBlue® for exhaust gas after-treatment
• lubricants
• Coolant
• Brake fluid
  • windscreen washer fluid
  • climate control system refrigerant

Only use products approved by Mercedes-Benz. Damage caused by the use of products that have not been approved is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz warranty or goodwill gestures.

The operating fluids approved by Mercedes-Benz can be identified by the following inscriptions on the container:

• MB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51)
• MB-Approval (e.g. MB-Approval 229.51)
Further information on approved operating fluids:
- in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Operating Fluids by entering the designation

- At https://operatingfluids.mercedes-benz.com

• At a qualified specialist workshop

WARNING Risk of fire or explosion from fuel

Fuels are highly flammable.

▶ Fire, naked flames, smoking and creating sparks must be avoided.
Before and during refuelling, switch off the vehicle and, if fitted, the stationary heater.

WARNING Risk of injury from fuels

Fuels are poisonous and hazardous to your health.

Do not swallow fuel or let it come into contact with skin, eyes or clothing.
Do not inhale fuel vapour.
▶ Keep children away from fuel.
Keep doors and windows closed during the refuelling process.

If you or other people come into contact with fuel, observe the following:

Immediately rinse fuel off your skin with soap and water.
If fuel comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse them thoroughly with clean water. Seek medical attention immediately.
If you swallow fuel, seek medical attention immediately. Do not induce vomiting.
Change immediately out of clothing that has come into contact with fuel.

Flexible-fuel vehicles can be refuelled with the following fuel types:

• unleaded petrol
• E85 fuel
  • a mixture of E85 fuel and unleaded petrol

Flexible-fuel vehicles can be identified by the Ethanol up to E85 sticker on the inside of the fuel filler flap.

Depending on the country, the fuels you can use in your vehicle may differ from the information in the Owner's Manual. The fuels that have been approved for your vehicle can be found on the instruction label on the inside of the fuel filler flap.

Fuel

Information on fuel quality for vehicles with a petrol engine

Observe the notes on operating fluids ( page 786).

NOTE Damage caused by the wrong fuel

Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system, the engine and the emission control system.

Only refuel using unleaded, sulphur-free spark-ignition engine fuel that conforms to European EN 228, or an equivalent specification.

Fuel of this specification may contain up to 10% ethanol by volume. Your vehicle is suitable for use with E10 fuel.

See the information label in fuel filler flap for other compatible fuels.

Never refuel with one of the following fuels:

• Diesel
• Regular petrol with an octane number lower than 91 RON
• Petrol with more than 3% methanol by volume, e.g. M15, M30
  • Petrol with additives containing metal

If you have accidentally refuelled with the wrong fuel:

Do not switch on the vehicle.
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The following compatibility indications for fuel apply to your vehicle.

For petrol with a maximum of 5% ethanol by volume
For petrol with a maximum of 10% ethanol by volume

According to European standard EN 16942, you can find the compatibility indications at the following locations:

• On the vehicle on the information label on the fuel filler flap
• On the fuel dispenser or pump nozzle suitable for your vehicle throughout Europe

If the available fuel is not sufficiently low in sulphur, it may produce unpleasant odours.

The recommended octane number for your vehicle can also be found on the information label on the fuel filler flap ( page 21).

As a temporary measure, if the recommended fuel is not available, you may also use regular unleaded petrol with at least 91 RON. This may reduce engine output and increase fuel consumption. Never refuel using petrol with a lower RON.

Further information on fuel can be obtained at a filling station or a qualified specialist workshop.

Information on fuel quality for Mercedes-AMG vehicles Observe the notes on operating fluids (→ page 786).

NOTE Damage caused by the wrong fuel

Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system, the engine and the emission control system.

Only refuel using unleaded, sulphur-free spark-ignition engine fuel that conforms

to European EN 228, or an equivalent specification.

Fuel of this specification may contain up to 10% ethanol by volume. Your vehicle is suitable for use with E10 fuel.

See the information label in fuel filler flap for other compatible fuels.

Never refuel with one of the following fuels:

• Diesel
• Regular petrol with an octane number lower than 91 RON
• Petrol with more than 3% methanol by volume, e.g. M15, M30
  • Petrol with additives containing metal

If you have accidentally refuelled with the wrong fuel:

Do not switch on the vehicle.
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

① E5 ② E10

Compatibility indications for fuel:

① For petrol with maximum of 5% ethanol by volume
For petrol with maximum of 10% ethanol by volume

According to European standard EN 16942, the compatibility indications for fuel on the vehicle can be found on the information label on the fuel filler flap or on the fuel dispenser or pump nozzle suitable for your vehicle throughout Europe.

If the available fuel is not sufficiently low in sulphur, it may produce unpleasant odours.

The recommended octane number can be found on the information label on the fuel filler flap ( page 21).

For maximum engine output: refuel using only super unleaded petrol of at least 98 RON. Alternatively, you can also refuel using premium-grade unleaded petrol of at least 95 RON.

In exceptional cases, if the recommended fuel is not available, you may also use regular unleaded petrol with an octane number of at least 91 RON. This may reduce engine output and increase fuel consumption.

Never refuel using petrol of an even lower RON. Further information on fuel can be obtained at a filling station or a qualified specialist workshop.

Information on additives in petrol (vehicles with petrol engine)

Observe the notes on operating fluids ( page 786).

NOTE Damage from use of unsuitable additives

Even small amounts of the wrong additive may lead to malfunctions occurring.

Only add cleaning additives recommended by Mercedes-Benz to the fuel.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use brand-name fuels with additives.

In some countries, the fuel available may not have sufficient additives. Deposits could build up in the fuel injection system as a result. In this case, in consultation with a qualified specialist workshop (e.g. a Mercedes-Benz service centre), mix the fuel with the cleaning additive recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Observe the notes and mixing ratios indicated on the tank.

Information on fuel quality for vehicles with a diesel engine

General notes

Observe the notes on operating fluids ( page 786).

WARNING Risk of fire from fuel mixture

If you mix diesel fuel with petrol, the flash point of the fuel mixture is lower than that of pure diesel fuel.

▶ Never refuel using petrol in diesel engines.
▶ Never mix petrol with diesel fuel.

NOTE Damage caused by the wrong fuel

Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system, the engine and the emission control system.

Vehicles with a diesel particulate filter:

Only refuel using sulphur-free diesel fuel that conforms to European standard EN 590, or an equivalent specification. In countries without sulphur-free diesel fuel, refuel using only low-sulphur diesel fuel with a sulphur content less than 50 ppm.

Vehicle without diesel particulate filter:

Only refuel using diesel fuel with a sulphur content less than 500 ppm.

Never refuel with one of the following fuels:

• Petrol
• Marine diesel
• Heating oil
• Pure fatty acid methyl ester or vegetable oil
• Paraffin or kerosene

If you have accidentally refuelled with the wrong fuel:

▶ Do not switch on the vehicle.
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The following compatibility indications for fuel apply to your vehicle:

B7

B10

① For diesel fuel with a maximum of 7% fatty acid methyl ester by volume (bio-diesel)
For diesel fuel with a maximum of 10% fatty acid methyl ester by volume (bio-diesel)

According to European standard EN 16942 you can find the compatibility indications at the following locations:

• On the vehicle on the information label on the fuel filler flap ( page 21)
• On the fuel dispenser or pump nozzle suitable for your vehicle throughout Europe

Information on low outside temperatures

Refuel your vehicle with as much winter diesel fuel as possible at the beginning of winter.

Before changing over to winter diesel fuel, the fuel tank should be empty, if possible. When first refuelling with winter diesel fuel, keep the fuel level low, e.g. to reserve level. The fuel tank can be filled as usual when next refuelling.

Further information on fuel can be obtained at a filling station or a qualified specialist workshop.

Tank content and fuel reserve (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)

Total fuel tank capacity

Model
Mercedes-AMG GLE53 4MATIC+ (SUV)	85.0 litres
Mercedes-AMG GLE53 4MATIC+ (Coupé)

Fuel tank reserve

Model
Mercedes-AMG GLE53 4MATIC+ (SUV)	9.0 litres
Mercedes-AMG GLE53 4MATIC+ (Coupé)

Total fuel tank capacity

Model
Mercedes-AMG GLE63 S 4MATIC+ (SUV)	85.0 litres
Mercedes-AMG GLE63 S 4MATIC+(Coupé)

Fuel tank reserve

Model
Mercedes-AMG GLE63 S 4MATIC+ (SUV)	12.0 litres
Mercedes-AMG GLE63 S 4MATIC+(Coupé)

Tank content and fuel reserve

Not for plug-in hybrid:

Total fuel tank capacity

Model
All models 85.0 litres

Fuel tank reserve

Model
All models 9.0 litres

Plug-in hybrid:

Total fuel tank capacity (plug-in hybrid)

Model
All models 65.0 litres
Fuel tank reserve (plug-in hybrid)
Model
All models 9.0 litres

AdBlue ^® (vehicles with a diesel engine only)

Notes on AdBlue®

Observe the notes on operating fluids ( page 786).

AdBlue® is a water-soluble fluid for the NOx exhaust gas aftertreatment of diesel engines.

It may be improper or punishable in some countries to operate a vehicle that uses no AdBlue ^® or one that does not comply with the specifications of this Owner's Manual.

NOTE Malfunctions due to the dilution of AdBlue® or the use of additive-enhanced AdBlue®

The function of the NOx exhaust gas after-treatment can be impaired by the use of unsuitable denoxification agents.

Only use AdBlue ^® in accordance with ISO 22241.
Do not dilute AdBlue ^® with water.
Do not use additive-enhanced AdBlue®.

NOTE Damage and malfunctions due to impurities in AdBlue ^®

Consequences of impurities in AdBlue®:

• increased emission values
• damage to the catalytic converter
- NOx exhaust gas aftertreatment malfunctions
Avoid impurities in AdBlue®.

AdBlue ^® residues crystallise after a period of time, and contaminate the surfaces with which they come into contact. Clean the dirty surfaces with water as soon as possible.

When you open the AdBlue ^® tank, small amounts of ammonia vapour may escape. Do not inhale any ammonia vapours that may be released. Only fill the AdBlue ^® tank in well-ventilated areas.

AdBlue® filling capacity and consumption Missing values were not available at the time of going to press.

Not for plug-in hybrid:

Total capacity of AdBlue ^® tank

Model Total capacity

GLE 300 d 4MATIC 31.6 litres

GLE 450 d 4MATIC

Plug-in hybrid:

AdBlue ^® tank total capacity (plug-in hybrid)

Model Total capacity

GLE 350 de 4MATIC 31.6 litres

AdBlue ^® consumption

The average AdBlue ^® consumption is between 1% and 5% of fuel consumption. Like fuel consumption, AdBlue ^® consumption is highly dependent upon driving style and operating conditions. For this reason, your vehicle's actual consumption figures in day-to-day operating conditions may differ from the average consumption figures calculated. The frequency at which you will have to top up AdBlue ^® will also vary. Have the AdBlue ^® supply checked at a qualified specialist workshop before making journeys outside Europe. Before a longer stay outside Europe, consult a qualified specialist workshop.

AdBlue ^® fill level and range

You can have the AdBlue ^® range and level displayed on the driver's display.

The AdBlue ^® range shown depends strongly on the driving style and operating conditions.

The actual range may therefore differ from the range currently displayed on the driver's display.

The information supplied in the Owner's Manual regarding the reserve quantity at the first warning on the driver's display and the minimum top-up quantity when the AdBlue ^® tank is empty is also to be understood as guide values.

Engine oil

Notes on engine oil

Observe the notes on operating fluids ( page 786).

Mercedes-Benz Oil recommended

NOTE Engine damage caused by an incorrect oil filter, incorrect oil or additives

Do not use engine oils or oil filters other than those which meet the specifications necessary for the prescribed service intervals.
Do not alter the engine oil or oil filter in order to achieve longer change intervals than prescribed.
Do not use additives.
Have the engine oil changed after the prescribed intervals.

Mercedes-Benz recommends having the oil changed at a qualified specialist workshop.

Only use engine oils approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.

Engine oil quality and filling capacity (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
Engine oil specifications

Petrol engines MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval
Mercedes-AMG GLE53 4MATIC+ (SUV)	229.51, 229.52,229.61, 229.71
Mercedes-AMG GLE53 4MATIC+ (Coupé)	229.72*
Mercedes-AMG GLE63 S 4MATIC+ (SUV)	229.5*
Mercedes-AMG GLE63 S 4MATIC+(Coupé)

* Recommended for the lowest possible fuel consumption (lowest SAE viscosity class in each case; observe possible restrictions of the approved SAE viscosity classes)
To achieve the lowest possible fuel consumption, it is recommended to use the engine oil specifications marked in the table with the lowest SAE vis-

cosity class. Possible restrictions of the approved SAE viscosity classes must be observed.

Mercedes-AMG GLE 63 S 4MATIC+ (SUV),

Mercedes-AMG GLE 63 S 4MATIC+ (Coupé): Only use SAE 0W-40 or SAE 5W-40 engine oils.

If the engine oils listed in the table are not available, you may add a maximum of 1.0 litre of the following engine oils once only.

Engine oils for one-time filling only in exceptional cases:

• Mercedes-AMG GLE 53 4MATIC+ (SUV), Mercedes-AMG GLE 53 4MATIC+ (Coupé): MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval 229.31 or ACEA C3
• All other models: MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval 229.3 or ACEA A3/B4

The following values refer to an oil change, including the oil filter.

Engine oil filling capacity

Model Capacity
Mercedes-AMG GLE53 4MATIC+ (SUV)	8.5 litres
Mercedes-AMG GLE53 4MATIC+ (Coupé)
Mercedes-AMG GLE63 S 4MATIC+ (SUV)	9.5 litres
Mercedes-AMG GLE63 S 4MATIC+(Coupé)

Engine oil quality and filling capacity

Missing values were not available at the time of going to press.

Not for plug-in hybrid:

Engine oil specifications (petrol engines)

Model MB-Freigabe or MB-
	Approval
GLE 450 4MATIC
GLE 580 4MATIC 229.52	229.61*

Engine oil specifications (diesel engines)

Model MB-Freigabe or MB-
	Approval
GLE 300 d 4MATIC 229.52, 229.61, 229.71 229.72*
GLE 450 d 4MATIC

* Recommended for the lowest possible fuel consumption (lowest SAE viscosity class in each case; observe possible restrictions of the approved SAE viscosity classes)
To achieve the lowest possible fuel consumption, it is recommended to use the engine oil specifica-

tions marked in the table with the lowest SAE viscosity class. Possible restrictions of the approved SAE viscosity classes must be observed.

If the engine oils listed in the table are not available, you may add a maximum of 1.0 litre of the following engine oils once only.

Engine oils for one-time filling only in exceptional cases:

- Petrol engines:

GLE 450 4MATIC: MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval were not available at the time of going to press.

- GLE 580 4MATIC: MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval 229.51 or ACEA C3

- Diesel engines:

GLE 300 d 4MATIC: MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval ACEA C3
GLE 450 d 4MATIC: MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval were not available at the time of going to press.

Plug-in hybrid:

Engine oil specifications (plug-in hybrid vehicles with a petrol engine)

Model MB-Freigabe or MB-
	Approval
GLE 400 e 4MATIC

Engine oil specifications (plug-in hybrid vehicles with a diesel engine)

Model MB-Freigabe or MB-	Approval
GLE 350 de 4MATIC 229.52*

* Recommended for the lowest possible fuel consumption (lowest SAE viscosity class in each case; observe possible restrictions of the approved SAE viscosity classes)

To achieve the lowest possible fuel consumption, it is recommended to use the engine oil specifications marked in the table with the lowest SAE viscosity class. Possible restrictions of the approved SAE viscosity classes must be observed.

If the engine oils listed in the table are not available, you may add a maximum of 1.0 litre of the following engine oils once only.

Engine oils for one-time filling only in exceptional cases:

- Petrol engines:

- GLE 400 e 4MATIC: MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval were not available at the time of going to press.

- Diesel engines:

- GLE 350 de 4MATIC: MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval 229.51 or ACEA C3

Not for plug-in hybrid:

The following values refer to an oil change, including the oil filter.

Engine oil filling capacity

Model Capacity
GLE 300 d 4MATIC About 6.5 litres
GLE 450 4MATIC About 8.0 litres
	For certain countries only: about 9.9 litres
GLE 450 d 4MATIC
GLE 580 4MATIC About 9.5 litres

Plug-in hybrid:

The following values refer to an oil change, including the oil filter.

Engine oil filling capacity (plug-in hybrid)

Model Capacity

GLE 350 de 4MATIC 6.5 litres

GLE 400 e 4MATIC 5.3 litres

Notes on brake fluid

Observe the notes on operating fluids ( page 786).

WARNING Risk of an accident due to vapour pockets forming in the brake system

The brake fluid constantly absorbs moisture from the air. This lowers the boiling point of the brake fluid. If the boiling point is too low, vapour pockets may form in the brake system when the brakes are applied hard.

This impairs the braking effect.

Have the brake fluid renewed at the specified intervals.

Have the brake fluid regularly replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.

Only use a brake fluid approved by Mercedes-Benz according to MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval 331.0.

Coolant

Notes on coolant

Observe the notes on operating fluids ( page 786).

WARNING Risk of fire- and injury from antifreeze

If antifreeze comes into contact with hot component parts in the engine compartment, it may ignite.

Allow the engine to cool down before you top up the antifreeze.
Make sure that no antifreeze spills out next to the filler opening.
Thoroughly clean the antifreeze from component parts before starting the vehicle.

NOTE Damage caused by incorrect coolant

Only use coolant that has been premixed with the required antifreeze protection.

Information on coolant is available at the following locations:

• In the Mercedes-Benz Specification for Operating Fluids 320.1
At https://operatingfluids.mercedes-benz.com
• At a qualified specialist workshop

! NOTE Overheating at high outside temperatures

If an inappropriate coolant is used, the cooling system is not sufficiently protected against overheating and corrosion at high outside temperatures.

▶ Only use coolant approved for Mercedes-Benz.
Observe the instructions in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Operating Fluids 320.1.

Have the coolant regularly replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.

Proportion of antifreeze concentrate in the cooling system:

• A minimum of 50% (antifreeze protection down to about -37°C)
• A maximum of 55% (antifreeze protection down to -45°C)

Notes on windscreen washer fluid

Observe the notes on operating fluids ( page 786).

WARNING - Risk of fire and injury due to windscreen washer concentrate

Windscreen washer concentrate is highly flammable. It could ignite if it comes into contact with hot engine component parts or the exhaust system.

Make sure that no windscreen washer concentrate spills out next to the filler opening.

NOTE Damage to the exterior lighting due to unsuitable windscreen washer fluid

Unsuitable windscreen washer fluids may damage the plastic surface of the exterior lighting.

Only use windscreen washer fluids which are also suitable for use on plastic surfaces, e.g. MB SummerFit or MB WinterFit.

NOTE Blocked spray nozzles caused by mixing windscreen washer fluids

Do not mix MB SummerFit and MB WinterFit with other windscreen washer fluids.

Do not use distilled or de-ionised water. Otherwise, the fill level sensor may be triggered erroneously.

Recommended windscreen washer fluid:

• above freezing point: e.g. MB SummerFit
• below freezing point: e.g. MB WinterFit

For the correct mixing ratio, refer to the information on the antifreeze container.

Mix washer fluid with windscreen washer fluid all year round.

Vehicle data

Vehicle dimensions

The heights specified may vary as a result of the following factors:

• Tyres
• Load
  • Condition of the suspension
• Optional equipment

Diagram showing a car with a vehicle and two labeled measurement points (1 and 2) indicating positions relative to the vehicle's top position.

Not for plug-in hybrid:

Height when open

	1 Height when opened*	2 Head-room*
Vehicles with steel suspension	2217 mm	1986 mm
Vehicles with AIR-MATIC	2178 mm-2263 mm	1947 mm-2032 mm
Vehicles with Off-road package	2178 mm-2293 mm	1947 mm-2062 mm

*When the rear-end lowering is activated, the values are correspondingly lower.

Not for plug-in hybrid:
Vehicle dimensions

All models
Vehicle length 4924 mm
Vehicle length, AMG Styling 4927 mm

All models

Vehicle width including exterior mirrors	2157 mm
Vehicle width excluding exterior mirrors	2010 mm
Vehicle height (steel suspension)	1797 mm
Maximum vehicle height (AIRMATIC)	1842 mm
Maximum vehicle height (Off-road package)	1872 mm
Minimum vehicle height (standard level)	1782 mm
Wheelbase 2995 mm
Maximum ground clearance (steel suspension)	205 mm
Maximum ground clearance (AIRMATIC)	260 mm

All models

Maximum ground clearance(Off-road package)	290 mm
Minimum ground clearance(AIRMATIC/Off-road package)	175 mm

Plug-in hybrid:

Height when open and height closed (plug-in hybrid)

Model	1 Height when opened*	2 Head-room*
Vehicles with steel suspension	2217 mm	1986 mm
Vehicles with AIR-MATIC	2178 mm-2263 mm	1947 mm-2032 mm

*When the rear-end lowering is activated, the values are correspondingly lower.

Vehicle dimensions (plug-in hybrid)

All models
Vehicle length 4924 mm
Vehicle width including exterior mirrors	2157 mm
Vehicle width excluding exterior mirrors	2010 mm
Vehicle height 1795 mm
Wheelbase 2995 mm
Maximum ground clearance (steel suspension)	185 mm
Maximum ground clearance (AIRMATIC)	240 mm
Minimum ground clearance (AIRMATIC/Off-road package)	155 mm

Vehicle dimensions (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)

The heights specified may vary as a result of the following factors:

• Tyres
• Load
  • Condition of the suspension
• Optional equipment

Diagram showing a car with a lever and two labeled measurement points (1 and 2) indicating positions relative to the vehicle's side profile.

Mercedes-AMG GLE SUV

Diagram showing car charging with a plug, and two labeled circular indicators (1 and 2) indicating positions or zones.

Mercedes-AMG GLE Coupé

Missing values were not available at the time of going to press.

Height when open and height

Model	1 Height when open	2 Height
Mercedes-AMG GLE 53 4MATIC+ (SUV)	2203 mm	1971 mm
Mercedes-AMG GLE 63 S 4MATIC+ (SUV)	2203 mm	1973 mm
Mercedes-AMG GLE 53 4MATIC+ (Coupé) Mercedes-AMG GLE 63 S 4MATIC+ (Coupé)	2297 mm	1961 mm

Vehicle dimensions

Mercedes-AMG GLE 534MATIC+ (SUV)
Vehicle length 4954 mm	Only for specific countries:4937 mm
Vehicle width including exterior mirrors	2157 mm
Vehicle width excluding exterior mirrors	2018 mm
Vehicle height 1782 mm
Wheelbase 2995 mm
Maximum ground clearance
Minimum ground clearance

Vehicle dimensions

Mercedes-AMG GLE 63 S4MATIC+ (SUV)
Vehicle length 4947 mm
Vehicle width including exteriormirrors	2157 mm
Vehicle width excluding exte-rior mirrors	2018 mm
Vehicle height 1782 mm
Wheelbase 2995 mm
Maximum ground clearance
Minimum ground clearance

Vehicle dimensions

Mercedes-AMG GLE 534MATIC+ (Coupé)
Vehicle length 4944 mm
Vehicle width including exteriormirrors	2157 mm
Vehicle width excluding exte-rior mirrors	2018 mm
Vehicle height 1720 mm
Wheelbase 2935 mm
Maximum ground clearance
Minimum ground clearance

Vehicle dimensions

Mercedes-AMG GLE 63 S4MATIC+ (Coupé)
Vehicle length 4954 mm
Vehicle width including exterior mirrors	2157 mm
Vehicle width excluding exterior mirrors	2018 mm
Vehicle height 1720 mm
Wheelbase 2935 mm
Maximum ground clearance
Minimum ground clearance

Weights (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)

Please observe the following notes for the specified vehicle data:

- Items of optional equipment increase the unladen weight and reduce the payload.

- You will find vehicle-specific weight information on the vehicle identification plate (see the vehicle Owner's Manual).

Roof load

Model Maximum roof load
Mercedes-AMG GLE53 4MATIC+ (SUV)	100 kg
Mercedes-AMG GLE53 4MATIC+ (Coupé)
Mercedes-AMG GLE63 S 4MATIC+ (SUV)
Mercedes-AMG GLE63 S 4MATIC+(Coupé)

Weights and loads

Please observe the following notes for the specified vehicle data:

- Items of optional equipment increase the unladen weight and reduce the payload.

- You will find vehicle-specific weight information on the vehicle identification plate ( page 784).

Not for plug-in hybrid:

Roof load

Model Maximum roof load

All models 100 kg

Plug-in hybrid:

Roof load (plug-in hybrid)

Model Maximum roof load

All models 100 kg

Maximum design speeds

The maximum design speed can differ from the stated figures in practice. It depends on the operating conditions, the optional equipment and the size of the tyres.

Missing values were not available at the time of going to press.

Maximum design speed

Model
All models

Maximum design speeds

The following values only apply to vehicles with the AMG Driver's Package.

The maximum design speed can differ from the stated figures in practice. It depends on the operating conditions, the optional equipment and the size of the tyres.

Missing values were not available at the time of going to press.

Maximum design speed

Model
Mercedes-AMG GLE 534MATIC+(SUV)
Mercedes-AMG GLE 534MATIC+(Coupé)
Mercedes-AMG GLE 63S 4MATIC+(SUV)
Mercedes-AMG GLE 63S 4MATIC+(Coupé)

Off-road driving (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)

Fording depth

NOTE Damage due to water when fording

Water can enter the engine compartment and vehicle interior in the following cases:

• the maximum permissible fording depth when driving through standing water is exceeded
  • a bow wave forms during fording
  • water accumulates during fording of flowing water
  Do not exceed the maximum permissible fording depth and drive slowly through the water.

The specified value indicates the maximum permissible fording depth for vehicles that are ready to drive (fuel tank full, all fluids topped up, driver in the vehicle) and for slow driving through standing water.

Driving through flowing water reduces the permissible fording depth due to the accumulation of water.

Observe the notes on off-road driving and fording in the vehicle Owner's Manual.

Side view diagram of a car on a road with directional arrows indicating movement (no text or symbols)

Mercedes-AMG GLE SUV

Side view diagram of a car on a road with directional arrows and numbered marker (1), no text or symbols present.

Mercedes-AMG GLE Coupé

Fording depth

Model 1 Fording depth

Mercedes-AMG GLE 534MATIC+ (SUV)	50 cm
Mercedes-AMG GLE 534MATIC+ (Coupé)

Fording depth

Model 1 Fording depth
Mercedes-AMG GLE 63 S4MATIC+ (SUV)	50 cm
Mercedes-AMG GLE 63 S4MATIC+ (Coupé)

Angle of approach/departure

The specified values are maximum values for vehicles that are ready to drive – fuel tank full, all fluids topped up, with driver. The values depend on the vehicle tyres and vehicle weight.

Observe the notes on driving in mountainous terrain in the vehicle Owner's Manual.

Line drawing of a car on a road with two circular indicators labeled 1 and 2 pointing to the side (no text or symbols on the car itself)

Mercedes-AMG GLE SUV

Line drawing of a car on a road with two circular indicators labeled 1 and 2 (no text or symbols on the car itself)

Mercedes-AMG GLE Coupé

Angle of approach/departure

Model 1 Angle of approach	2 Angle of departure
Mercedes-AMG GLE 53 4MATIC+ (SUV)	21^ 20^
Mercedes-AMG GLE 53 4MATIC+ (Coupé)	21^ 21^
Mercedes-AMG GLE 63 S 4MATIC+ (SUV)	18^ 20^
Mercedes-AMG GLE 63 S 4MATIC+ (Coupé)	18^ 21^

Maximum gradient climbing ability

The vehicle's gradient climbing ability depends on the weight distribution in the vehicle, the terrain conditions and the road surface conditions.

The specified value applies in the following cases:

• the vehicle is ready to drive - fuel tank full, all fluids topped up, driver in the vehicle
• the road surface conditions and thus traction are good

A gradient climbing ability of 100% corresponds to an incline of 45°.

Observe the notes on driving in mountainous terrain in the vehicle Owner's Manual.

Gradient climbing ability

Model Maximum gradient climbing ability
Mercedes-AMG GLE 534MATIC+ (SUV)	99%
Mercedes-AMG GLE 534MATIC+ (Coupé)	80%
Mercedes-AMG GLE 63 S4MATIC+ (SUV)
Mercedes-AMG GLE 63 S4MATIC+ (Coupé)

Off-road driving

Fording depth

NOTE Damage due to water when fording

Water can enter the engine compartment and vehicle interior in the following cases:

• the maximum permissible fording depth when driving through standing water is exceeded
  • a bow wave forms during fording
  • water accumulates during fording of flowing water
  Do not exceed the maximum permissible fording depth and drive slowly through the water.

The specified value indicates the maximum permissible fording depth for vehicles that are ready to drive (fuel tank full, all fluids topped up, driver in the vehicle) and for slow driving through standing water.

Driving through flowing water reduces the permissible fording depth due to the accumulation of water.

Observe the notes on off-road driving and fording ( page 278).

Line drawing of a car on a road with a directional arrow and numbered marker (1), no text or symbols present.

Not for plug-in hybrid:

Fording depth

Model 1 Fording depth
Vehicles with steel suspension	50 cm
Vehicles with AIRMATIC
Model Fording depth
Raised level 50 cm
Vehicles with Off-road package
Off-road level +1 50 cm
Off-road level +2 50 cm
Off-road level +3 58 cm

Plug-in hybrid:

Fording depth (plug-in hybrid)

Model Fording depth
All models 50 cm

Angle of approach/departure

The specified values are maximum values for vehicles that are ready to drive - fuel tank full, all fluids topped up, with driver. The values depend on the vehicle tyres and vehicle weight.

Observe the notes on driving in mountainous terrain ( page 278).

Line drawing of a car on a road with two circular indicators labeled 1 and 2 (no text or symbols on the car itself)

Not for plug-in hybrid:

Angle of approach/departure (vehicles without AMG Styling)

All models 1 Angle of approach		2 Angle of departure
Vehicles with steel suspension*	25° 25°
Vehicles with AIR-MATIC*
Standard level 25° 24°
Raised level 29° 28°

All models 1 Angle of approach		2 Angle of departure
Vehicles with Off-road package
Standard level 25° 24°
Off-road level +1 27° 26°
Off-road level +2 29° 28°
Off-road level +3 31° 30°

Angle of approach/departure (vehicles with AMG Styling)

*Depending on the tyre size Plug-in hybrid:

All models 1 Angle of approach		2 Angle of departure
Vehicles with steel suspension	21° 24°
Vehicles with AIR-MATIC
Standard level 21° 24°
All models 1 Angle of approach		2 Angle of departure
Raised level 25° 27°
Vehicles with Off-road package
Standard level 21° 24°
Off-road level +1 23° 26°
Off-road level +2 25° 27°
Off-road level +3 27° 29°

Angle of approach/departure (plug-in hybrid vehicles without AMG Styling)

All models 1 Angle of approach		2 Angle of departure
Vehicles with steel suspension*	25° 24°
Vehicles with AIR-MATIC*
Standard level 25° 24°
Raised level 29° 28°

Angle of approach/departure (plug-in hybrid vehicles with AMG Styling)

All models 1 Angle of approach		2 Angle of departure
Vehicles with steel suspension	21° 24°
Vehicles with AIR-MATIC

All models 1 Angle of approach	2 Angle of departure
Standard level 21° 24°
Raised level 25° 27°

*Depending on the tyre size

Maximum gradient climbing ability

The vehicle's gradient climbing ability depends on the weight distribution in the vehicle, the terrain conditions and the road surface conditions.

The specified value applies in the following cases:

• the vehicle is ready to drive – fuel tank full, all fluids topped up, driver in the vehicle
• the road surface conditions and thus traction are good

A gradient climbing ability of 100% corresponds to an incline of 45°.

Observe the notes on driving in mountainous terrain ( page 278).

Not for plug-in hybrid:

Gradient climbing ability

Model Maximum gradient climbing ability
Vehicles without Off-road package	80 %
Vehicles with Off-road package

Plug-in hybrid:

Gradient climbing ability (plug-in hybrid)

Model Maximum gradi-	ent climbing abil-ity
All models 80 %

High-voltage battery (plug-in hybrid)

Notes on the power supply for vehicles with high-voltage battery

In accordance with European standard EN 17186:2019, vehicle identifiers are located on the vehicle in the following places:

• On the inside of the socket flap
• On the charging cable connector

In addition, charging stations in European countries are equipped with energy supply identifiers. You can recharge your vehicle at charging stations whose charging station identifier corresponds to the vehicle identifier.

For further information on charging the high-voltage battery, refer to the "Charging the high-voltage battery" section(→ page 316).

① C ② K ③ L

① Supply type: AC

Standard: EN 62196-2

Design: type 2

Plug type: charging cable socket and vehicle plug

Voltage range: 480 V RMS

② Supply type: DC

Standard: EN 62196-3

Design: FF

Plug type: charging cable socket and vehicle plug

Voltage range: 50 V to 500 V

③ Supply type: DC

Standard: EN 62196-3

Design: FF

Plug type: charging cable socket and vehicle plug

Voltage range: 200 V to 920 V

Missing values were not available at the time of going to press.

Energy content and charging times

All models
Type Lithium-ion
Maximum energy content 31.2 kWh
Range in all-electric mode
Charging time - mode 4 with 60 kW charging capacity	Approx. 20 min
Charging time - mode 3 with 11 kW charging capacity	Approx. 2 h 30 min
Charging time - mode 3 with 7.4 kW charging capacity	Approx. 2 h 45 min

All models

Charging time - mode 2 with 3.7 kW charging capacity	Approx. 7 h 30 min
Charging time - mode 2 with 1.8 kW charging capacity	Approx. 16 h 25min

Charging times - modes 2 and 3 apply to alternating current charging from 10% to 100% of the usable energy content.

Charging time - mode 4 applies to direct current charging from 10% to 80% of the usable energy content.

The time taken to charge the battery depends on the state of charge of the battery, the ambient temperature and the charging capacity of the battery. The charging capacity, in turn, depends on the supply voltage, the current intensity and the type of power supply.

The nominal voltage range for your vehicle can be found on the information label in the socket cover.

Trailer hitch

General notes on the trailer hitch

Modifications to the cooling system may be necessary, depending on the vehicle model. The retrofitting of a trailer hitch is only permissible if a trailer load is specified in the vehicle documents.

Further information can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop.

Mounting dimensions

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with numbered components and dimension lines

Diagram showing a mechanical or electrical setup with labeled components and numbered parts, likely illustrating a system or assembly.

Fastening points
2 Overhang dimension
3 Rear axle centre line

The overhang dimension and fastening points are valid for a trailer hitch installed at the factory.

Not for plug-in hybrid:

Overhang dimension length

Model 2 Overhang	dimension
All models 1131 mm

Plug-in hybrid:

Overhang dimension length (plug-in hybrid)

Model 2 Overhang	dimension
GLE 350 de 4MATIC	1131 mm
GLE 400 e 4MATIC

Towing capacity

Not for plug-in hybrid:

The drawbar load is not included in the towing capacity.

Towing capacity, braked (at a minimum start-off gradeability of 12%)

Model Towing capacity, braked
All models 2700 kg
Vehicles with AIR-MATIC and increased towing capacity	3500 kg(3300 kg)*

*GLE 450 d 4MATIC and GLE 580 4MATIC 7-seat vehicle with E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL

Towing capacity, unbraked

Model Towing capacity,	unbraked
All models 750 kg

Plug-in hybrid:

Towing capacity, braked (at a minimum start-off gradeability of 12%)

Model Towing capacity,	braked (at a minimum start-off gradeability of 12 %)
GLE 350 de 4MATIC	2700 kg
GLE 400 e 4MATIC
Vehicles with AIR-MATIC and increased towing capacity	3500 kg(3300 kg)*

*with electrically adjustable rear seats

Towing capacity, unbraked

Model Towing capacity,	unbraked
All models 750 kg

Trailer load (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)

Towing capacity, braked (at a minimum start-off gradeability of 12 %)
Model Towing capacity,	braked
Mercedes-AMG GLE53 4MATIC+ (SUV)	3500 kg
Mercedes-AMG GLE53 4MATIC+ (Coupé)
Mercedes-AMG GLE63 S 4MATIC+ (SUV)
Mercedes-AMG GLE63 S 4MATIC+(Coupé)

Towing capacity, unbraked

Model Towing capacity,	unbraked
Mercedes-AMG GLE53 4MATIC+ (SUV)	750 kg
Mercedes-AMG GLE53 4MATIC+ (Coupé)
Mercedes-AMG GLE63 S 4MATIC+ (SUV)
Mercedes-AMG GLE63 S 4MATIC+(Coupé)

Maximum trailer drawbar noseweight -and load capacity

NOTE Damage caused by the trailer coming loose

If the tongue weight used is too low, the trailer may come loose.

The tongue weight must not be below 50 kg.
Use a tongue weight that is as close as possible to the maximum permissible tongue weight.

NOTE Damage caused by the bicycle rack coming loose

When using a bicycle rack, both the maximal tongue weight and the maximal load capacity should be observed.

Do not exceed the permissible load capacity.

Not for plug-in hybrid:

Observe the additional notes on load capacity ( page 437).

Trailer drawbar load

Model Maximum drawbar load
All models 108 kg
Vehicles with AIR-MATIC and increased towing capacity	140 kg(132 kg)*

*GLE 450 d 4MATIC and GLE 580 4MATIC 7-seat vehicle with E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL

Load capacity

All models Maximum load capa-city
When attaching the bicycle rack to the ball head	75 kg
When attaching the bicycle carrier to the ball head and additionally to the guide pins	100 kg

Plug-in hybrid:

Observe the additional notes on load capacity ( page 437).

Tongue weight (plug-in hybrid)

Model Maximum drawbar
	load
GLE 350 de 4MATIC	108 kg
GLE 400 e 4MATIC
Vehicles with AIR-MATIC and increased towing capacity	140 kg(132 kg)*

*with longitudinally adjustable rear bench seat

Load capacity (plug-in hybrid)

All models Maximum load capa-city
When attaching the bicycle rack to the ball head	75 kg
When attaching the bicycle carrier to the ball head and additionally to the guide pins	100 kg

▶ Use a tongue weight that is as close as possible to the maximum permissible tongue weight.

NOTE Damage caused by the bicycle rack coming loose

When using a bicycle rack, both the maximal tongue weight and the maximal load capacity should be observed.

Do not exceed the permissible load capacity.

Trailer drawbar load

Model Maximum drawbar
	load
Mercedes-AMG GLE53 4MATIC+ (SUV)	140 kg
Mercedes-AMG GLE53 4MATIC+ (Coupé)
Mercedes-AMG GLE63 S 4MATIC+ (SUV)
Mercedes-AMG GLE63 S 4MATIC+(Coupé)

Maximum tongue- weight and load capacity (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)

! NOTE Damage caused by the trailer coming loose

If the tongue weight used is too low, the trailer may come loose.

The tongue weight must not be below 50 kg.

Load capacity

All models Maximum load capa-city
When attaching the bicycle rack to the ball head	75 kg
When attaching the bicycle rack to the ball head and additionally to the guide pin	100 kg

Permissible rear axle load (trailer operation)

Not for plug-in hybrid:

Missing values were not available at the time of going to press.

Axle load when towing trailer

Model Permissible rear axle load dur-ing trailer operation
	Towing capa-city2700 kg5-seat / 7-seat vehicles	Towing capa-city3500 kg(3300 kg)*5-seat / 7-seat vehicles
GLE 300 d4MATIC	1650 kg /1820 kg	1680 kg /1850 kg
GLE 450 d4MATIC	1680 kg /1850 kg	1720 kg /1850 kg(1870 kg)*
GLE 4504MATIC	1650 kg /1800 kg	1670 kg /1850 kg
GLE 5804MATIC

*GLE 450 d 4MATIC and GLE 580 4MATIC 7-seater with E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL

Plug-in hybrid:
Axle load when towing trailer (plug-in hybrid)

Model Permissible rear axle load during trailer operation
	Towing capa-city2700 kg	Towing capa-city3500 kg(3300 kg)*
GLE 350 de4MATIC	1960 kg 1970 kg(1990 kg)*
GLE 400 e4MATIC	1940 kg 1940 kg(1960 kg)*

*with longitudinally adjustable rear bench seat

Permissible axle load, rear axle (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)

Axle load when towing trailer
Model Axle load
Mercedes-AMG GLE53 4MATIC+ (SUV)	1750 kg
Mercedes-AMG GLE53 4MATIC+ (Coupé)
Mercedes-AMG GLE63 S 4MATIC+ (SUV)
Mercedes-AMG GLE63 S 4MATIC+(Coupé)

Display messages

Introduction

Information about display messages

Display messages appear on the driver's display. Display messages with graphical symbols are simplified in the Owner's Manual and may differ from the symbols on the driver's display. The driver's display shows high-priority display messages in red. Certain display messages are accompanied by a warning tone.

Please act in accordance with the display messages and follow the additional notes in the Owner's Manual.

For some display messages, symbols will also be shown:

• Further information
• × Hide display message

With the left-hand Touch Control, you can select the respective symbol by swiping to the left or right. Pressing ⓘ displays further information on the central display. Press the × symbol to hide the display message.

Display messages to be acknowledged can be hidden by pressing the back button ↩ or with the left-hand Touch Control. The display messages will then be stored in the message memory.

Rectify the cause of a display message as quickly as possible.

High-priority display messages cannot be hidden. The driver's display will show these display messages continuously until the cause of the display message has been rectified.

Calling up saved display messages

Driver's display:

The Message memory: XXmessage appears on the driver's display.

▶ Scroll through the display messages by swiping upwards or downwards on the left-hand Touch Control.
To exit the display: press the ← back button.

Occupant safety

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Restraint system malfunction Consult workshop

* The restraint system is malfunctioning ( page 110).

⚠ WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunctions in the restraint system

Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as intended in an accident.

Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

Plug-in hybrid:

DANGER Risk of fatal injuries due to restraint system malfunctions

Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as planned in an accident. In the event of an accident, the high-voltage on-board electrical system may not be deactivated as intended.

You may suffer an electric shock if you touch the damaged components of the high-voltage on-board electrical system.

Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

▶ After an accident, switch off the vehicle immediately.

Recognition of a restraint system fault:

- The restraint system warning lamp does not light up when the vehicle is switched on

- The restraint system warning lamp lights up continuously or repeatedly during a journey

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Front left malfunction Consult workshop

Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

* The restraint system is malfunctioning (→ page 110).

WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunctions in the restraint system

Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as intended in an accident.

Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

Plug-in hybrid:

DANGER Risk of fatal injuries due to restraint system malfunctions

Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as planned in an accident. In the event of an accident, the high-voltage on-board electrical system may not be deactivated as intended.

You may suffer an electric shock if you touch the damaged components of the high-voltage on-board electrical system.

▶ Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

▶ After an accident, switch off the vehicle immediately.

Recognition of a restraint system fault:

- The restraint system warning lamp does not light up when the vehicle is switched on

- The restraint system warning lamp lights up continuously or repeatedly during a journey

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Front right malfunction Consult workshop

Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

* The restraint system is malfunctioning (→ page 110).

WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunctions in the restraint system

Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as intended in an accident.

Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

Plug-in hybrid:

DANGER Risk of fatal injuries due to restraint system malfunctions

Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as planned in an accident. In the event of an accident, the high-voltage on-board electrical system may not be deactivated as intended.

You may suffer an electric shock if you touch the damaged components of the high-voltage on-board electrical system.

Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

▶ After an accident, switch off the vehicle immediately.

Recognition of a restraint system fault:

- The restraint system warning lamp does not light up when the vehicle is switched on

- The restraint system warning lamp lights up continuously or repeatedly during a journey

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Second row of seats, left Malfunction Consult workshop

Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

* The restraint system is malfunctioning ( page 110).

WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunctions in the restraint system

Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as intended in an accident.

Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

Plug-in hybrid:

DANGER Risk of fatal injuries due to restraint system malfunctions

Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as planned in an accident. In the event of an accident, the high-voltage on-board electrical system may not be deactivated as intended.

You may suffer an electric shock if you touch the damaged components of the high-voltage on-board electrical system.

Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

▶ After an accident, switch off the vehicle immediately.

Recognition of a restraint system fault:

- The restraint system warning lamp does not light up when the vehicle is switched on

- The restraint system warning lamp lights up continuously or repeatedly during a journey

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Second row of seats, right Malfunction Consult workshop

Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

* The restraint system is malfunctioning (→ page 110).

WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunctions in the restraint system

Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as intended in an accident.

Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

Plug-in hybrid:

DANGER Risk of fatal injuries due to restraint system malfunctions

Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as planned in an accident. In the event of an accident, the high-voltage on-board electrical system may not be deactivated as intended.

You may suffer an electric shock if you touch the damaged components of the high-voltage on-board electrical system.

Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

▶ After an accident, switch off the vehicle immediately.

Recognition of a restraint system fault:

- The restraint system warning lamp does not light up when the vehicle is switched on

- The restraint system warning lamp lights up continuously or repeatedly during a journey

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Third row of seats, left Mal-function Consult workshop

Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

* The restraint system is malfunctioning (→ page 110).

WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunctions in the restraint system

Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as intended in an accident.

Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

DANGER Risk of fatal injuries due to restraint system malfunctions

Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as planned in an accident. In the event of an accident, the high-voltage on-board electrical system may not be deactivated as intended.

You may suffer an electric shock if you touch the damaged components of the high-voltage on-board electrical system.

▶ Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

▶ After an accident, switch off the vehicle immediately.

Recognition of a restraint system fault:

- The restraint system warning lamp does not light up when the ignition is switched on.

- The restraint system warning lamp lights up continuously or repeatedly during a journey.

Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Third row of seats, right Malfunction Consult workshop

* The restraint system is malfunctioning ( page 110).

WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunctions in the restraint system

Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as intended in an accident.

▶ Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

DANGER Risk of fatal injuries due to restraint system malfunctions

Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as planned in an accident. In the event of an accident, the high-voltage on-board electrical system may not be deactivated as intended.

You may suffer an electric shock if you touch the damaged components of the high-voltage on-board electrical system.

Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

▶ After an accident, switch off the vehicle immediately.

Recognition of a restraint system fault:

- The restraint system warning lamp 🙏 does not light up when the ignition is switched on.

- The restraint system warning lamp lights up continuously or repeatedly during a journey.

Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Left window airbag malfunction Consult workshop

Right window airbag malfunction Consult workshop

Front passenger airbag dis- abled See Owner's Manual

* The restraint system is malfunctioning ( page 110).

WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury due to a malfunction in the windowbag

The windowbag might be triggered unintentionally or might not be triggered at all in the event of an accident. ▶ Have the windowbag checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

* The restraint system is malfunctioning (→ page 110).

WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury due to a malfunction in the windowbag

The windowbag might be triggered unintentionally or might not be triggered at all in the event of an accident. ▶ Have the windowbag checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

* The front passenger airbag has been disabled even though an adult or a person of adult build is on the front passenger seat. If additional forces are applied to the seat, the weight the system detects may be too low.

WARNING - Risk of injury or even fatal injury when the front passenger airbag is disabled

If the front passenger airbag is disabled, It will not be deployed in the event of an accident and cannot perform its intended protective function.

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
	A person in the front passenger seat could then, for example, come into contact with the vehicle interior, especially if the person is sitting too close to the dashboard.▶ Be aware of the status of the front passenger airbag both before and during the journey.
	▶ Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions.▶ Make sure that no objects are trapped under the front passenger seat.▶ Check the status of the automatic front passenger airbag shutoff (→ page 112).▶ If necessary, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Front passenger airbag enabled See Owner's Manual	* The front passenger airbag will be enabled while the vehicle is in motion in the following situations:• even when a child, a small adult or an object weighing less than the system weight threshold is located on the front passenger seat• even when the front passenger seat is not occupiedThe system may detect objects or forces that are adding to the weight applied to the seat.
	⚠ WARNING Risk of injury or death when using a child restraint system while the front passenger airbag is enabledIf you secure a child in a child restraint system on the front passenger seat and the front passenger airbag is enabled, the front passenger airbag can deploy in the event of an accident.The child could be struck by the airbag.

F167 0009 02

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

▶ Ensure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct.

NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur.

▶ Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions.
Make sure that no objects are trapped under the front passenger seat.
▶ Check the status of the automatic front passenger airbag shutoff ( page 112).
If necessary, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Key

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Replace key

* Have the key replaced.

Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
Change key batteries	* The key battery is discharged.▶ Replace the battery (→ page 152).
Key not detected (white display message)	* The key is currently undetected.▶ Change the location of the key in the vehicle.▶ Try to start the vehicle.▶ If the key is still not detected, place it in the slot for starting with the key (→ page 270).▶ Start the vehicle.
Key not detected (red display message)	* The key can no longer be detected during a journey and may no longer be in the vehicle.If the key is no longer in the vehicle and you switch off the vehicle:You can no longer start the vehicle.You cannot centrally lock the vehicle.Ensure that the key is in the vehicle.If the key is in the vehicle and is still not detected:Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions.Place the key in the slot for starting the engine with the key (→ page 270).

F167 0009 02

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
	The key battery is weak or discharged.▶ Check the battery using the indicator lamp (→ page 150).▶ Replace the key battery, if necessary (→ page 152).
Key being taught in Please wait	* The vehicle is processing in order to teach in the new key.▶ Wait until processing is complete.
Place the key in the marked space See Owner's Manual	* Key detection is malfunctioning.▶ Change the location of the key in the vehicle.▶ Place the key in the slot for starting the engine with the key (→ page 270).

Lights

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
Malfunction See Owner's Manual	* The exterior lighting is malfunctioning.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.* Vehicles with a trailer hitch: a fuse may have blown.▶ Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions.▶ Check the fuses and replace them if necessary (→ page 59).
Automatic driving lights inoperative	* The light sensor for automatic driving lights is malfunctioning.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Active Light System inoperative	* The active headlamps are malfunctioning.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Switch on headlamps	* You are driving without low-beam headlamps.▶ Turn the light switch to the [IMAGE] or AUTO position.
Switch off lights	* You are leaving the vehicle and the lights are still switched on.▶ Turn the light switch to the AUTO position.
Dynamic low beam inoperative	* The dynamic low beam is malfunctioning. The lighting system continues to function properly without the functions of the Dynamic Light System.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual	* Adaptive Highbeam Assist is temporarily unavailable.The system limits have been reached (→ page 235).Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. The Adaptive Highbeam Assist available again display message will appear.▶ Drive on

F167 0009 02

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
	▶ Operate the high beam manually until Adaptive High Beam Assist is available again.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist inoperative	* Adaptive Highbeam Assist is malfunctioning.▶ Drive onor▶ Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle.▶ If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop.▶ Until then, operate the high beam manually.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus currently unavailable See Owner's Manual	* Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is temporarily unavailable.The system limits have been reached (→ page 237).Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. The Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus available again display message will appear.▶ Drive on▶ Operate the high beam manually until Adaptive High Beam Assist Plus is available again.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus inoperative	* Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is malfunctioning.▶ Drive onor▶ Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle.▶ If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop.

F167 0009 02

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
	▶ Until then, operate the high beam manually.
Hazard warning lamp sys-tem Malfunction	* The hazard warning lamp switch is malfunctioning. ▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Front left parking lights	* The front left parking light is malfunctioning. ▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Front right parking lights	* The front right parking light is malfunctioning. ▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Left low beam	* The left low beam is malfunctioning. ▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Right low beam	* The right low beam is malfunctioning.► Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Left main beam	* The left high beam is malfunctioning.► Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Right main beam	* The right high beam is malfunctioning.► Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Left daytime running lights	* The left daytime running lights are malfunctioning.► Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Right daytime running lights	* The right-hand daytime running lights are malfunctioning. ▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Left cornering light	* The left cornering light is malfunctioning. ▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Right cornering light	* The right cornering light is malfunctioning. ▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Front left turn signal	* The front left turn signal lamp is malfunctioning. ▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Rear left turn signal	* The rear left turn signal lamp is malfunctioning.► Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Front right turn signal	* The front right turn signal lamp is malfunctioning.► Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Rear right turn signal	* The rear right turn signal lamp is malfunctioning.► Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Left mirror turn signal	* The turn signal lamp on the left mirror is malfunctioning.► Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Right mirror turn signal	* The turn signal lamp on the right mirror is malfunctioning. ▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Left brake lamp	* The left brake light is malfunctioning. ▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Right brake lamp	* The right brake light is malfunctioning. ▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Third brake lamp	* The third brake light is malfunctioning. ▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.* The left tail light is malfunctioning. ▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Left tail light
	* The right tail light is malfunctioning. ▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Right tail light
	* The reversing light is malfunctioning. ▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Reversing light
	* The rear fog light is malfunctioning. ▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Rear fog light
Number plate lamp	* The number plate lamp is malfunctioning. ▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Trailer left turn signal	* The left turn signal lamp on the trailer is malfunctioning. ▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Trailer right turn signal	* The right turn signal lamp on the trailer is malfunctioning. ▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Trailer brake lamp	* The brake light on the trailer is malfunctioning. ▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Trailer tail light

Inoperative indicator lamp in driver display. Consult workshop

* A tail light on the trailer is malfunctioning.

Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

* An indicator lamp on the driver's display is defective.

Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Climate control

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

inoperative See Owner's Man. (stationary heater)

* The stationary heater is temporarily malfunctioning.

When the vehicle is stationary on a level surface and the engine has cooled down, make up to four attempts to switch on the stationary heater, waiting several minutes between each attempt.

If the stationary heater does not switch on, consult a qualified specialist workshop.

① The stationary heater cannot be activated if the outside temperature is above 15^ C.

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Currently unavailable Battery low

Currently unavailable Refuel

Currently unavailable High-voltage battery charging incomplete.

* The on-board electrical system voltage is too low. The stationary heater has switched itself off.

Drive an extended distance until the battery has reached a sufficient charge level again.

* There is too little fuel in the fuel tank. The stationary heater cannot be switched on. ▶ Refuel the vehicle.

* The high-voltage battery is charging. Pre-entry climate control cannot be switched on. ▶ Wait until the charging process has achieved a minimum state of charge.

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
Currently unavailableCharge high-voltage battery	* The charge of the high-voltage battery is too low. Pre-entry climate control cannot be switched on.▶ Charge the high-voltage battery (→ page 316).
Pre-entry climate control via key available again after starting vehicle	* You have attempted to switch on pre-entry climate control more than twice with the vehicle switched off.▶ Start the vehicle for ten seconds.Pre-entry climate control is operational again.
Pre-entry climate control via key currently unavailable. High-voltage battery low	* The charge of the high-voltage battery is too low. Pre-entry climate control cannot be switched on.▶ Charge the high-voltage battery (→ page 316).When the high-voltage battery is sufficiently charged, pre-entry climate control will be operational again.

Hybrid system

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
Towing not permitted See Owner's Manual	* The drive system is malfunctioning.▶ Have the vehicle transported only using a transporter or trailer (→ page 647).
Acoustic presence indicator inoperative	* The sound generator (acoustic vehicle warning system) is malfunctioning. No vehicle noises are being produced. The vehicle may not be heard by other road users.▶ Drive with particular care.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Charger cable connected	* You cannot pull away while the charging cable is connected.▶ Disconnect the charging cable from the vehicle.
Not possible to unlock charging cable See Owner's Manual	* The charging cable connector cannot be removed from the charging station's socket.▶ Press the EMERGENCY OFF switch on the charging station.If the charging cable connector cannot be removed after that:

F167 0009 02

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
	▶ Request service personnel from the operator of the charging station via the emergency call button or the emergency numbers attached to the charging station.
Vehicle not currently being charged Charging station fault	* A malfunction has occurred in the charging station or the RFID card is not recognised.▶ Start the charging process at a different charging station.or▶ Have the RFID card checked to ensure it is functioning.
Charging method currently unavailable Please try again or change charging method	* A temporary malfunction has occurred in the charging station.▶ Wait until the malfunction has passed.or▶ Start the charging process at a different charging station.
Charging fault Please change charging method See Owner's Manual	* A temporary malfunction has occurred in the charging station.▶ Wait until the malfunction has passed.or▶ Start the charging process at a different charging station.
Only electric drive available Power limited	* The fuel tank is empty and the combustion engine is switched off. The output of your vehicle is limited because you are driving in electric mode.▶ Refuel immediately.Subsequently, there may be temporary restrictions in the availability of electric mode over a driving distance of 50 km.If there is fuel in the vehicle, there is a fault with the combustion engine.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
"Electric" drive program currently unavailable	* The state of charge of the high-voltage battery is not sufficient for the Electric drive program.Charge the high-voltage battery (→ page 316).
Reduced drive system performance See Owner's Manual	* The drive system switches to emergency operation mode due to a malfunction.▶ Drive on carefully.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Battery overheated Stop, everybody out! Outdoors if possible	* Plug-in hybrid: the high-voltage battery is overheated. There is a risk of fire.▶ Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions.▶ If possible, stop the vehicle in the open air and ensure that all vehicle occupants get out.1 Supporting vehicle functions may activate automatically, e.g. air-recirculation mode as part of climate control.▶ Do not continue driving.▶ If smoke is present, leave the danger zone and call the fire service immediately.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop even if there are no external signs of a fire.
Malfunction	* The drive system is malfunctioning. A warning tone will also sound. ▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Malfunction Visit workshop	* The drive system is malfunctioning. ▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Without changing gear, consult workshop	* The drive system cannot be restarted due to a malfunction. If the transmission position is changed using the DIRECT SELECT lever, the drive system will be switched off in park position [P] or neutral [N]. ▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop and do not change the transmission position.
Consult workshop without starting the vehicle again	* It is not possible to restart the drive system due to a malfunction. ▶ Do not switch off the drive system; drive on to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.
Malfunction	* The drive system is malfunctioning. The output of your vehicle is restricted. ▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

F167 0009 02

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
Stop Switch off the vehicle	* The drive system is malfunctioning.▶ Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions and switch off the drive system. Do not continue driving.▶ Do not tow the vehicle; stop towing if necessary.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Performance severely limited	* The drive system is outside the normal operating temperature range, e.g. due to extremely low or high outside temperatures.The output is severely restricted.Once the operating temperature of the drive system returns to normal, the full output will be available again. The display message will disappear.* If the drive system power output is still reduced, there is a fault in the drive system.▶ Drive on carefully.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Please wait Depressurising fuel tank	* Vehicles with petrol engines: the pressure in the fuel tank is reduced before the fuel filler flap is opened. This pressure reduction can take up to 15 minutes.

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Fuel tank is depressurised Ready for refuelling

Tank ventilation Malfunction Consult workshop

* Vehicles with petrol engines: the pressure in the fuel tank is released and the fuel filler flap opens.

* Vehicles with petrol engines: There is a malfunction in the fuel system. ▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Vehicle

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

* The driver's display is inoperative due to a failed software update. The display message will be shown every time the engine is started.

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

WARNING Risk of accident if the driver display fails

If the driver display has failed or is malfunctioning, function restrictions in systems relevant to safety cannot be detected.

The operating safety of your vehicle may be impaired.

Drive on carefully.

Have the vehicle checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

If the operating safety of your vehicle is impaired, park the vehicle immediately and safely. Contact a qualified specialist workshop.

Plug-in hybrid:

⚠ WARNING Risk of accident due to failure of the driver display

In the event that the driver display fails or malfunctions, you will not recognise function restrictions affecting systems relevant to safety. This may impair operating safety.

Park the vehicle safely as soon as possible and notify a qualified specialist workshop.

If the driver's display fails, you may not recognise function restrictions affecting systems relevant to safety or the speed display, for example. The operating safety of the vehicle may be impaired ( page 497).

Have the vehicle checked by a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Vehicle is ready to drive Shutdown occurs when locked or automatically in a few minutes

* You are leaving the vehicle in a ready-to-drive state.► Get out of the vehicle, secure it against rolling away and take the key with you.► If you do not leave the vehicle, switch off the electrical consumers, e.g. the seat heating. Otherwise, the 12-V battery may discharge and starting the engine may be possible only with the help of a second battery (jump start).

Vehicle is ready to drive Shutdown occurs when locked or automatically in XX mins

* You are about to leave the vehicle and the engine is running.The vehicle will switch off automatically in 20 minutes.► To prevent the vehicle from switching off automatically, confirm the message in the central display of the multimedia system.* You are in the vehicle. Park position P is engaged and the engine is running.After a certain holding time, this display message appears on the driver display. The vehicle will then switch off automatically after a total of 20 minutes of holding time.► To prevent the vehicle from switching off automatically, confirm the message in the central display of the multimedia system.

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Operation only possible in transmission position P

Trailer coupling in motion

Trailer coupling Check lock (white display message)

* The ball neck will not swivel because transmission position D, R or neutral N is selected.

▶ Depress the brake pedal.
Engage park position P.

* The ball neck is retracting/extending.

Do not attempt to speed up, slow down or initiate the swivel movement using your hand, foot or other aids or move the ball neck when it is stationary. During the swivel movement, do not couple a trailer. When the ball neck has reached an operational position, the display message will disappear.

* The trailer hitch is not operational during a journey with a trailer.

WARNING Risk of an accident if the ball neck is not locked

The trailer may become detached.

▶ Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving.
▶ Uncouple the trailer and secure it against rolling away.
▶ Initiate a new swivelling procedure and do not re-couple the trailer until the display message disappears.

▶ Stop immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions and switch off the vehicle.

▶ Uncouple the trailer and secure it against rolling away.

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

▶ Initiate a new swivel movement ( page 44).
When the display message disappears, couple up the trailer and drive on.

If the display message does not disappear, the trailer hitch is malfunctioning and the ball neck is not locked.

Do not couple up the trailer. Drive on without the trailer. Note the reduced ground clearance due to the unlocked ball neck.
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

* When the vehicle is stationary with a coupled trailer, the trailer hitch is not operational.

Uncouple the coupled trailer and secure it against rolling away.
If the ball neck has been retracted: initiate a new swivel movement ( page 44). The ball neck will engage vertically in the locked position and then engage beneath the bumper.
If the ball neck has been extended: initiate a new swivel movement ( page 44). The ball neck will engage beneath the bumper.

If the display message does not disappear, the trailer hitch is malfunctioning and the ball neck is not locked.

Do not couple up the trailer. Drive on without the trailer. Note the reduced ground clearance due to the unlocked ball neck.
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Trailer coupling Check lock(red display message)

* The trailer hitch is not operational during a journey with a trailer.

WARNING Risk of an accident if the ball neck is not locked

The trailer may become detached.

▶ Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving.
▶ Uncouple the trailer and secure it against rolling away.
▶ Initiate a new swivelling procedure and do not re-couple the trailer until the display message disappears.

▶ Stop immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions and switch off the vehicle.
▶ Uncouple the trailer and secure it against rolling away.
▶ Initiate a new swivel movement ( page 44).
When the display message disappears, couple up the trailer and drive on.

If the display message does not disappear, the trailer hitch is malfunctioning and the ball neck is not locked.

Do not couple up the trailer. Drive on without the trailer. Note the reduced ground clearance due to the unlocked ball neck.
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

* When the vehicle is stationary with a coupled trailer, the trailer hitch is not operational.

▶ Uncouple the coupled trailer and secure it against rolling away.

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
	▶ If the ball neck has been retracted: initiate a new swivel movement (→ page 44).The ball neck will engage vertically in the locked position and then engage beneath the bumper.▶ If the ball neck has been extended: initiate a new swivel movement (→ page 44).The ball neck will engage beneath the bumper.If the display message does not disappear, the trailer hitch is malfunctioning and the ball neck is not locked.▶ Do not couple up the trailer. Drive on without the trailer. Note the reduced ground clearance due to the unlocked ball neck.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Head-up display currently unavailable See Owner's Manual	* The head-up display is temporarily unavailable. Possible causes:malfunctions in the power supplysignal interference▶ Stop in accordance with the traffic conditions and switch the vehicle off and on again.▶ If the display message still appears, consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Head-up display inoperative	* The head-up display has an internal error.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Steering malfunction Increased physical effort See Owner's Manual

* The power steering assistance is malfunctioning.

WARNING Risk of an accident due to altered steering characteristics

If the power assistance of the steering fails partially or completely, you will need to use more force to steer.

If safe steering is possible, drive on carefully.

▶ Visit or consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

If safe steering is possible, drive on carefully.
Visit or consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Steering malfunction Stop immediately See Owner's Manual

* The steering is malfunctioning. Steering capability is significantly impaired.

⚠ WARNING Risk of accident if steering capability is impaired

If the steering does not function as intended, the vehicle's operating safety is jeopardised.

▶ Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

▶ Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving.

Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
	* At least one door is open. ▶ Close all doors.
	* The bonnet is open. ▲ WARNING Risk of accident due to driving with the bonnet unlockedThe bonnet may open and block your view. ▶ Never release the bonnet when driving. ▶ Before every trip, ensure that the engine bonnet is locked. ▶ Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. ▶ Close the bonnet.
	* The tailgate is open. ▲ DANGER Risk of poisoning from exhaust gasesCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases, such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the tailgate is open when the engine is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion. ▶ Always switch off the engine before opening the tailgate. ▶ Never drive with the tailgate open.

F167 0009 02

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
	▶ Close the tailgate.
Anti-theft alarm system Malfunction	* The anti-theft alarm system is malfunctioning. ▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
2nd seat row, left Not locked	* The left-hand seat or the seat backrest in the second row of seats is not engaged. ▶ Fold the corresponding seat backrest back until it engages and push the row of seats back (→ page 182). ▶ Make sure that the seat is engaged (→ page 182).
2nd seat row, right Not locked	* The right-hand seat or the seat backrest in the second row of seats is not engaged. ▶ Fold the corresponding seat backrest back until it engages and push the row of seats back (→ page 182). ▶ Make sure that the seat is engaged (→ page 182).
2nd seat row, centre Not locked	* The seat backrest of the corresponding seat is not engaged. ▶ Fold the seat backrest back until it engages.
Cannot fold 2nd seat rowSee Owner's Manual	* The seat backrests on the second row of seats cannot be folded forward.▶ Check the requirements for folding forward the seat backrests on the second row of seats (→ page 182).
Cannot fold 2nd seat row forwards on the left Please adjust the front seat	* The left seat backrests on the second row of seats cannot be folded forward.▶ Adjust the corresponding front seat.
Cannot fold 2nd seat row forwards on the right Please adjust the front seat	* The right seat backrests on the second row of seats cannot be folded forward.▶ Adjust the corresponding front seat.
3rd seat row, left Not locked	* The left-hand seat or the seat backrest in the third row of seats is not engaged.► Fold the corresponding seat backrest back until it engages and push the row of seats back (→ page 182).► Make sure that the seat is engaged (→ page 182).
3rd seat row, right Not locked	* The right-hand seat or the seat backrest in the third row of seats is not engaged.► Fold the corresponding seat backrest back until it engages and push the row of seats back (→ page 182).► Make sure that the seat is engaged (→ page 182).
Top up washer fluid	* The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has dropped below the minimum.► Top up the washer fluid (→ page 27).
Wiper Malfunction	* The windscreen wiper is malfunctioning.► Restart the vehicle.If the display message still appears:► Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

F167 0009 02

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
4matic currently unavailable	* 4MATIC is currently unavailable.► Drive on carefully.► Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
4matic inoperative	* 4MATIC is inoperative.► Drive on carefully.► Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Engine

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
To switch off the vehicle, press the Start/Stop button for at least 3 seconds or 3 times	* You have pressed the start/stop button while the vehicle is in motion.▶ Information about switching off the vehicle while driving (→ page 268).
Cannot start vehicle See Owner's Manual	* The vehicle cannot be started.▶ Switch the vehicle off and switch it back on▶ If the display message still appears, consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Top up coolant See Owner's Manual

Coolant Stop Switch off the vehicle

* The coolant level is too low.

NOTE Engine damage due to insufficient coolant

▶ Avoid long journeys with insufficient coolant.

▶ Add coolant ( page 617).

Have the engine cooling system checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

* There is a malfunction in the engine cooling system.

Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. In doing so, ensure that the coolant temperature display remains below 120°C.

* The coolant is too hot.

▶ Stop immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions and switch off the vehicle.

WARNING Risk of burns when opening the bonnet

If you open the bonnet in the event of an overheated engine or fire in the engine compartment, the following situations may occur:

• You may come into contact with hot gases.

- You may come into contact with other escaping hot operating fluids.

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
	▶ Before opening the bonnet, allow the engine to cool down.▶ In the event of a fire in the engine compartment, keep the bonnet closed and call the fire service.
	▶ Wait until the engine has cooled down.▶ Make sure that the air supply to the radiator is not obstructed.▶ Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. In doing so, ensure that the coolant temperature display remains below 120°C.
Clean the fuel filter	* Vehicles with diesel engines: the fuel filter is dirty or the water in the fuel filter needs to be drained.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Replace air filter	* Vehicles with diesel engines: the engine air filter is dirty and must be replaced.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Reserve fuel level	* The fuel supply has dropped into the reserve range.▶ Refuel.
Drive system MalfunctionVisit workshop	* The drive system is malfunctioning.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Drive system malfunctionStop Switch off the vehicle	* The drive system is malfunctioning.▶ Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions and switch off the engine.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Transmission

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
Only select P when vehicle is stationary	* It is possible to select the park position ▶ only if the vehicle is stationary. ▶ Depress the brake pedal to stop. ▶ Shift the transmission to park position ▶ when the vehicle is stationary.
Apply brake to deselect P position	* You have attempted to shift the transmission out of park position ▶ and into another transmission position. ▶ Depress the brake pedal.

F167 0009 02

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
	▶ Select transmission position D, R or neutral N.
Apply brake and start vehicle to shift out of P or N	* You have attempted to shift the transmission out of park position P or neutral N and into another transmission position.▶ Depress the brake pedal.▶ Start the vehicle.▶ Change the transmission position.
Apply brake to engage D or R	* You have attempted to select transmission position D or R.▶ Depress the brake pedal.▶ Select transmission position D or R.
Apply brake to engage R	* You have attempted to select transmission position R.▶ Depress the brake pedal.▶ Select transmission position R.
Apply parking brake to park Visit workshop	* A malfunction has occurred in the emergency power supply to park position P.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.▶ Until then, always select park position P manually before you switch off the vehicle.▶ Before leaving the vehicle, apply the electric parking brake.
Risk of vehicle rolling awayDriver's door open Transmission not in P	* The driver's door is not fully closed and transmission position D, R or neutral N is selected.The vehicle may roll away.▶ Select park position P when switching off the vehicle.
Risk of vehicle rolling awayApply parking brake to park	* The transmission is malfunctioning. Park position P cannot be selected.▶ Park the vehicle safely.▶ Use the electric parking brake to secure the vehicle against rolling away.▶ On gradients, turn the front wheels so that the vehicle will roll towards the kerb if it starts moving.
Reversing not poss. Consult workshop	* The transmission is malfunctioning. It is not possible to select transmission position R.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Transmission Malfunction Stop	* The transmission is malfunctioning. The transmission shifts to neutral N automatically.▶ Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions.▶ Depress the brake pedal.▶ Engage park position P.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Consult workshop without changing the transmission position	* The transmission is malfunctioning. It is no longer possible to change the transmission position.▶ If transmission position D is selected, consult a qualified specialist workshop and do not change the transmission position.▶ For all other transmission positions, park the vehicle safely.

F167 0009 02

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
	▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Stop vehicle Leave engine running Wait Transmission cooling	* The transmission is overheating. Pulling away may be temporarily impaired or not possible.▶ Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving.▶ Leave the engine running.▶ Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away.
Auxiliary battery malfunction (white display message)	* There is a malfunction in the auxiliary battery.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.▶ Until then, always select park position [P] manually before you switch off the vehicle.▶ Before leaving the vehicle, apply the electric parking brake.
Auxiliary battery malfunction (red display message)	* There is a malfunction in the auxiliary battery.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.▶ Until then, always select park position [P] manually before you switch off the vehicle.▶ Before leaving the vehicle, apply the electric parking brake.

Brakes

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Parking brake See Owner's Manual

* The yellow Ⓐ indicator lamp is lit. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.

To apply:

▶ Switch the vehicle off and switch it back on
Apply the electric parking brake manually ( page 339).

If it is not possible to apply the electric parking brake:

Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Where necessary, also secure the parked vehicle against rolling away.

* The yellow Ⓓ indicator lamp and the red Ⓟ indicator lamp are lit. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.

To release:

▶ Switch the vehicle off and switch it back on
Release the electric parking brake manually ( page 339).

or

Release the electric parking brake automatically ( page 339).

If it is still not possible to release the electric parking brake:

Do not continue driving. Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

* The yellow (P) indicator lamp is lit and the red (P) indicator lamp is flashing. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

The electric parking brake could not be applied or released.

▶ Switch the vehicle off and switch it back on

To apply:

Release and then apply the electric parking brake manually ( page 339).

To release:

Apply and then release the electric parking brake manually.

If it is not possible to apply the electric parking brake or the red (P) indicator lamp continues to flash:

Do not continue driving. Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Where necessary, also secure the parked vehicle against rolling away.

* The yellow (P) indicator lamp is lit and the red (P) indicator lamp flashes for approximately ten seconds after the electric parking brake has been applied or released. It then remains lit or goes out. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.

If the state of charge is too low:

Charge the 12 V battery.

To apply:

Switch off the vehicle.

The electric parking brake will be applied automatically.

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

	If you do not want the electric parking brake to be applied, e.g. at an automatic car wash or when the vehicle is being towed, leave the vehicle switched on. This does not include having the vehicle towed with the rear axle raised.If the electric parking brake is not applied automatically:► Switch the vehicle off and switch it back on► Release and then apply the electric parking brake manually (→ page 339).If it is still not possible to apply the electric parking brake:► Consult a qualified specialist workshop.► Where necessary, also secure the parked vehicle against rolling away.To release:► If the conditions for automatic release are fulfilled and the electric parking brake is not released automatically, release the electric parking brake manually (→ page 339).If it is still not possible to release the electric parking brake:► Do not continue driving. Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Release parking brake	* The red(P) indicator lamp is flashing.The electric parking brake is applied while you are driving:A condition for automatic release of the electric parking brake has not been fulfilled (→ page 339).You are performing emergency braking using the electric parking brake (→ page 341).
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
	▶ Check the conditions for automatic release of the electric parking brake.▶ Release the electric parking brake manually.
Parking brake Switch on vehicle to release	* The red (P) indicator lamp is lit.You have attempted to release the electric parking brake with the vehicle switched off.▶ Switch on the vehicle.
Check brake fluid level	* There is insufficient brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.⚠ WARNING Risk of an accident due to low brake fluid levelIf the brake fluid level is too low, the braking effect and the braking characteristics may be impaired.▶ Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.▶ Do not top up the brake fluid.▶ Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving.▶ Do not top up the brake fluid.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Check brake pads See Owner's Manual

* The brakepads have reached the wear limit.
4 Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Driving and driving safety systems

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

currently unavailable See Owner's Manual (ABS and ESP®)

* ABS and ESP® are temporarily unavailable.

Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be temporarily unavailable.

The brake system will continue to operate normally. Braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situation.

& WARNING Risk of skidding if ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning

The wheels may lock during braking and ESP ^® does not perform any vehicle stabilisation.

The steerability and braking characteristics are heavily impaired and the braking distance may increase. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched o☐.

Drive carefully on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements at a speed above 30 km/h.

If the display message does not disappear, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Drive carefully.

# Drive carefully on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements at a speed above 30 km/h.

If the display message does not disappear, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Drive carefully.

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

inoperative See Owner's Manual (ABS and ESP ^® )

* ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning.

Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning.

The brake system will continue to operate normally. Braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situation.

WARNING Risk of skidding if ABS and ESP ^® are malfunctioning

The wheels may block during braking and ESP ^® does not perform any vehicle stabilization.

The steerability and braking characteristics are heavily impaired and the braking distance may increase. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off.

Drive on carefully.
Have ABS and ESP ^® checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

Drive on carefully.
Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

* ESP® is temporarily unavailable.

Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning.

currently unavailable See Owner's Manual (ESP®)

WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP is malfunctioning®

If ESP ^ is malfunctioning, ESP ^ cannot carry out vehicle stabilisation. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off.

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
	▸ Drive carefully on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements at a speed above 30 km/h.▸ If the display message does not disappear, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Drive carefully.
	▸ Drive carefully on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements at a speed above 30 km/h.▸ If the display message does not disappear, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Drive carefully.
inoperative See Owner's Manual (ESP®)	* ESP® is malfunctioning.Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning.The brake system will continue to operate normally. Braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situation.
	⚠ WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP® is malfunctioningIf ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabilisation. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off.▸ Drive on carefully.▸ Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
	▸ Drive on carefully.▸ Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

inoperative See Owner's Manual (EBD, ABS and ESP®)

Off

* EBD, ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning.

Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning.

WARNING Risk of skidding if EBD, ABS and ESP ^® are malfunctioning

The wheels may block during braking and ESP® does not perform any vehicle stabilization.

The steerability and braking characteristics are heavily impaired and the braking distance may increase. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off.

Drive on carefully.

Have the brake system checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

Drive on carefully.
Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

* The HOLD function is deactivated because the vehicle is slipping or a condition for activation is not fulfilled.

Reactivate the HOLD function later or check the activation conditions for the HOLD function ( page 352).

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
ATTENTION ASSIST: Take a break!	* ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigue or an increasing lack of concentration on the part of the driver (→ page 354).▶ If necessary, take a break.
--- km/h	* Cruise control cannot be activated as not all activation conditions are fulfilled.▶ Observe the activation conditions for cruise control (→ page 357).
Cruise control inoperative	* Cruise control is malfunctioning.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Cruise control and Limiter inoperative	* Cruise control and the limiter are malfunctioning.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Cruise control off	* Cruise control has been deactivated.If there is an additional warning tone, cruise control has been deactivated automatically (→ page 356).
--- km/h	* The limiter can temporarily not be engaged. Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again.
passive	* If you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the point of resistance (kickdown), the limiter will be switched to passive mode (→ page 356).
Limiter inoperative	* The limiter is malfunctioning.► Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Speed Limit Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual	* Speed Limit Assist is temporarily unavailable.► Drive onOnce the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again.
Speed Limit Assist inoperative	* Speed Limit Assist is malfunctioning.► Drive onor► Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle.► If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop.

F167 0009 02

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
Speed limit (winter tyres)XXX km/h	* You have reached the maximum permissible stored speed for winter tyres. It is not possible to exceed this speed.
120km/h!Maximum speed exceeded	* You have exceeded the maximum permissible speed (for certain countries only).▶ Drive more slowly.
Traffic Sign Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual	* Traffic Sign Assist is temporarily unavailable.Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again.▶ Continue driving in compliance with the traffic regulations.
Traffic Sign Assist inoperative	* Traffic Sign Assist is malfunctioning.▶ Continue driving in compliance with the traffic regulations.or▶ Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle.▶ If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Fault Drive at max. 80 km/h

Fault Drive at max. 80 km/h

* AIRMATIC is functioning only to a limited extent. The vehicle's handling characteristics may be affected.

NOTE The tyres on the front axle or the fenders could be damaged by large steering movements

▶ Avoid large steering movements while driving and listen for scraping sounds.

If you hear scraping sounds, pull over and stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions, and set a higher vehicle level if possible.

▶ Drive in a manner appropriate for the current level, but do not exceed 80 km/h.

Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

* E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL is malfunctioning. The vehicle's handling characteristics may be affected.

NOTE The tyres on the front axle or the fenders could be damaged by large steering movements

Avoid large steering movements while driving and listen for scraping sounds.

If you hear scraping sounds, pull over and stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions, and set a higher vehicle level if possible.

No faster than 80 km/h.

Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
[FYAXW]Fault Drive at max. 80km/h	* AMG RIDE CONTROL + or AMG ACTIVE RIDE CONTROL is malfunctioning. The vehicle's handling characteristics may be affected.▶ No faster than 80 km/h.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
AMG Ride Control Function limited See Owner's Manual	* At least one of the main functions of AMG RIDE CONTROL + or AMG ACTIVE RIDE CONTROL is malfunctioning.The system is outside the operating temperature range or the on-board electrical system voltage is too low.Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again.
	NOTE The vehicle's suspension and damping behaviour is restricted. The vehicle body may tilt heavily to the side during cornering.
	Drive on carefully.Reduce speed considerably before taking a bend.Avoid sudden steering movements.
	Drive on carefully.Reduce speed considerably before taking a bend.Avoid sudden steering movements.

Drive on carefully.
▶ Reduce speed considerably before taking a bend.
▶ Avoid sudden steering movements.

Drive on carefully.
▶ Reduce speed considerably before taking a bend.
Avoid sudden steering movements.

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
Lowering	* The vehicle level will lower for the following reasons:You have selected a different drive program.You have exceeded the speed limit.You have changed the vehicle level by pressing the button.Operation with a trailer or bicycle rack: if an electrical connection has been correctly made, you have exceeded the speed limit.
Rising	* Your vehicle is adjusting to the level you have selected.
Vehicle rising Please wait	* The vehicle level is too low. The vehicle will be raised to the selected vehicle level.Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away.
Compressor is cooling	* Due to frequent level changes within a short space of time, the compressor first needs to cool down in order to set the selected vehicle level.When the compressor has cooled down, the vehicle will continue rising to the selected vehicle level.Drive on in a manner appropriate for the current level. Make sure that there is sufficient ground clearance.

F167 0009 02

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
Reduce speed	* You are driving too fast for the selected vehicle level.▶ Drive more slowly and then select the desired vehicle level again.You are driving too quickly with a trailer or the trailer hitch socket is being used, e.g. for a rear bicycle rack.▶ Read the notes on trailer operation.
	* At least one main function of the E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL system is malfunctioning.The system is outside the operating temperature range or the on-board electrical system voltage is too low.Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again.
	NOTE The vehicle's suspension and damping behaviour is restricted. The vehicle body may tilt heavily to the side during cornering.▶ Drive on carefully.▶ Reduce speed considerably before taking a bend.▶ Avoid sudden steering movements.
	▶ Drive on carefully.▶ Reduce speed considerably before taking a bend.▶ Avoid sudden steering movements.
Cannot reach selected level when rear fog lamp is switched on	* You cannot select off-road level +3. ▶ Switch off the rear fog lamp.
	* At least one main function of the E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL system is malfunctioning. The system is deactivated.
Fault Drive at max. 80 km/h	NOTE The vehicle's suspension and damping behaviour has changed significantly, the vehicle body may tilt heavily to the side during cornering. ▶ Reduce vehicle speed. Drive on carefully. ▶ Reduce the vehicle speed considerably before taking a curve. ▶ Avoid sudden steering movements. ▶ Continue driving carefully and do not exceed 80 km/h. ▶ If possible, stop in accordance with the traffic conditions and switch the vehicle off and on again. ▶ If the display message still appears, consult a qualified specialist workshop.
	* There is a serious malfunction affecting the hydraulics of the E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL system. The system is deactivated.
Fault Stop

F167 0009 02

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
	NOTE The vehicle's driving characteristics have changed significantly.▶ Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving.▶ Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
inoperative	* The Downhill Speed Regulation is malfunctioning.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Max. speed 40 km/h	* The maximum speed of 40 km/h for the Downhill Speed Regulation has been exceeded.▶ Drive more slowly.
Not in curr. drive prog.	* The Downhill Speed Regulation is not available in the currently selected drive program.▶ Change the drive program.

Driver assistance systems

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
--- km/h	* Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC cannot be activated as not all activation conditions are fulfilled.▶ Comply with the activation conditions of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC (→ page 362).
suspended	* If you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the setting of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC, the system will switch to passive mode (→ page 359).
Off	* Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC was deactivated. If a warning tone also sounds, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC has deactivated automatically (→ page 362).
Active Distance Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual	* Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is temporarily unavailable.The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (→ page 359).As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again.▶ Drive on carefully.or

F167 0009 02

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
	▶ If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle.
Active Distance Assist inoperative	* Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is malfunctioning.Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning.▶ Drive on carefully.or▶ Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle.▶ If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Active Distance Assist available again	* Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is operational again.▶ Switch on Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC (→ page 362).
Active Brake Assist Functions currently limited See Owner's Manual	* For vehicles with the Driving Assistance Package, the following functions may be temporarily unavailable or only partially available:Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic functionEvasive Steering AssistPRE-SAFE® PLUSVehicles with Blind Spot Assist: PRE-SAFE® PLUS is temporarily unavailable.The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (→ page 373).Vehicles without the Driving Assistance Package: Active Brake Assist is temporarily unavailable.

F167 0009 02

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
	▶ Drive on carefully.As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again.or▶ If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle.
Active Brake Assist Functions limited See Owner's Manual	* For vehicles with the Driving Assistance Package, the following functions may be temporarily unavailable or only partially available:Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic functionEvasive Steering AssistPRE-SAFE® PLUSVehicles without the Driving Assistance Package: Active Brake Assist is temporarily unavailable or only partially available.Drive on carefully.orStop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle.If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Active Steering Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual	* Active Steering Assist is temporarily unavailable.The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (→ page 370).As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again.

F167 0009 02

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
	▶ Drive on▶ Check the tyre pressure if necessary.
Active Steering Assist inoperative	* Active Steering Assist is malfunctioning. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC remains available.▶ Drive onor▶ Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle.▶ If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Active Steering Assist currently unavailable due to multiple emergency stops	* Active Steering Assist is temporarily unavailable due to multiple emergency stops.▶ Take over the steering and stop in accordance with the traffic conditions.▶ Switch the vehicle off and switch it back onActive Steering Assist is available once more.
Beginning emergency stop	* Your hands are not on the steering wheel. Active Steering Assist will initiate an emergency stop (→ page 370).▶ Put your hands on the steering wheel.Information on cancelling an emergency stop (→ page 372).
Active Stop-and-Go Assist currently unavailable see Owner's Manual	* Active Stop-and-Go Assist is temporarily unavailable. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and Active Steering Assist are still available.The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (→ page 367).

F167 0009 02

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
	As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again.▶ Drive on
Active Stop-and-Go Assist inoperative See Owner's Manual	* Active Stop-and-Go Assist is malfunctioning.Active Stop-and-Go Assist has been deactivated. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and Active Steering Assist are still available.▶ Drive onor▶ Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle.▶ If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Blind Spot Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual	* Blind Spot Assist is temporarily unavailable.The system limits have been reached (→ page 383).Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again.▶ Drive onor▶ If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle.
Blind Spot Assist inoperative	* Blind Spot Assist is malfunctioning.▶ Drive onor

F167 0009 02

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
	▶ Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle.▶ If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Blind Spot Assist unavailable when towing a trailer See Owner's Manual	* When you establish the electrical connection to the trailer, Blind Spot Assist will be unavailable.▶ Press the left-hand Touch Control and acknowledge the display message.
Active Blind Spot Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual	* Active Blind Spot Assist is temporarily unavailable.The system limits have been reached (→ page 383).Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again.▶ Drive onor▶ If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle.
Active Blind Spot Assist inoperative	* Active Blind Spot Assist is malfunctioning.▶ Drive onor▶ Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle.▶ If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Active Blind Spot Assist unavailable when towing a trailer See Owner's Manual	* When you establish the electrical connection to the trailer, Active Blind Spot Assist will be unavailable. ▶ Press the left-hand Touch Control and acknowledge the display message.
Active Lane Keeping Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual	* Active Lane Keeping Assist is temporarily unavailable. The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (→ page 386). As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again. ▶ Drive on
Active Lane Keeping Assist inoperative	* Active Lane Keeping Assist is malfunctioning. ▶ Drive on or ▶ Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle. ▶ If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Active Lane Keeping Assist functions restricted See Owner's Manual	* Active Lane Keeping Assist is available but restricted. ▶ Drive on or ▶ Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle. ▶ If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Four-panel diagram showing car safety icons: sensor, road ahead, speedometer, and warning sign.

temporarily unavailable Sensors dirty

* Front and corner radar sensors (hereafter "sensors") are malfunctioning. Possible causes:

• The sensors are dirty
- Heavy rain or snow
- Extended country driving without other traffic, e.g. in the desert

Driving systems and driving safety systems may be malfunctioning or temporarily unavailable. The brake system, steering and drive system will continue to function normally.

Drive on carefully.

Once the causes of the problem are no longer present, the driving systems and driving safety systems will be available again and the corresponding symbols will be switched off.

If the display message does not disappear:

▶ Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions.
Clean all sensor covers from outside ( page 343).
▶ Restart the vehicle.

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Sequence of vehicle and traffic warning icons with Chinese labels, including car, road, warning sign, speed limit, and license symbol.

Camera view restricted See Owner's Manual

* The view of the multifunction camera is restricted. Possible causes:

• Dirt on the windscreen in the field of vision of the multifunction camera
  • Heavy rain, snow or fog
• Mist on the inside of the windscreen: in certain weather conditions, mist can form on the inside of the windscreen during cold times of year in particular.

This mist on the windscreen will be removed automatically within a short time with the aid of a heater. The restriction is temporary.

Driving systems and driving safety systems may be malfunctioning or temporarily unavailable. The brake system, steering and drive system will continue to function normally.

Drive on carefully.

Once the causes of the problem are no longer present, the driving systems and driving safety systems will be available again and the corresponding symbols will be switched off.

If the display message does not disappear:

▶ Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions.
Clean the windscreen, especially in the position of the multifunction camera ( page 343).
Restart the vehicle.

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Restricted during trailer operation

PRE-SAFE inoperative See Owner's Manual

PRE-SAFE impulse side inoperative See Owner's Manual

* When the trailer socket is occupied, some driving systems will be available only to a limited extent. ▶ Drive carefully if you are towing a trailer or have the bicycle rack mounted.

* The PRE-SAFE® functions are malfunctioning. ▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

* The PRE-SAFE® Impulse Side system is malfunctioning or inoperative after having already been triggered. ▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Parking assistance systems

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
PARKTRONIC inoperative See Owner's Manual	* Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is malfunctioning.Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again.▶ Continue driving while paying attention to the vehicle's surroundings.or▶ Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle.▶ If the display message still appears, consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Active Parking Assist and PARKTRONIC inoperative See Owner's Manual	* Active Parking Assist and Parking Assist PARKTRONIC are malfunctioning.Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again.▶ Continue driving while paying attention to the vehicle's surroundings.or▶ Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle.▶ If the display message still appears, consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Mercedes-Benz emergency call system

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Inoperative

* The Mercedes-Benz emergency call system is malfunctioning. The Mercedes me connect system is also malfunctioning.

Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Battery

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

12 V on-board electrical system Visit workshop

* The 12 V on-board electrical system is malfunctioning.

Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Stop vehicle See Owner's Manual

* The 12 V battery is no longer being charged and the state of charge is too low.

NOTE Possible engine damage if you continue driving

Do not continue driving under any circumstances.

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
	▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
	▶ Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving.▶ Switch off the vehicle.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Start the vehicle to charge the 12 V battery	* The vehicle is off and the state of charge of the 12 V battery is too low.▶ Switch off electrical consumers that are not required.▶ Drive for 30-60 mins.or▶ Charge the 12 V battery when stationary (→ page 58).▶ Plug-in hybrid: Charge the vehicle at a charging station (→ page 316).
Stop vehicle Leave vehicle on to charge the 12 V bat-tery	* The 12 V battery charge level is too low.▶ Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving.▶ Leave the vehicle running▶ If the display message disappears: drive on.▶ If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Battery overheated Stop, everybody out! Outdoors if possible

48 V battery See Owner's Manual

Please wait 48 V battery charging

* The 48 V battery is overheating. There is a risk of fire.

▶ Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions.
If possible, stop the vehicle in the open air and ensure that all vehicle occupants get out.

i Supporting vehicle functions may activate automatically, e.g. air-recirculation mode as part of climate control.

Do not continue driving.
If smoke is present, leave the danger zone and call the fire service immediately.
Consult a qualified specialist workshop even if there are no external signs of a fire.

* The 48 V on-board electrical system has function restrictions.

Comfort functions, such as the air conditioning system, may be available only to a limited extent.

Driving on is possible.

If the display message remains continuously active, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

* The 48 V battery is discharged. You have switched on the vehicle while the 12 V battery was being charged with a suitable charger or while another vehicle was providing starting assistance.

The discharged 48 V battery is charged automatically via the voltage converter. After a few minutes, the Possible to start the vehicle again display message will be shown on the driver's display.

Start the vehicle.

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
	▶ Drive the vehicle for a while to charge the 12 V battery and the 48 V battery after disconnecting the charger from the vehicle.
	If thePossible to start the vehicle againdisplay message does not appear after a few minutes:▶ Try to start the vehicle.▶ If the vehicle does not start, consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Cannot start vehicle See Owner's Manual	* The state of charge of the 48 V battery is too low. You can no longer start the vehicle.▶ Switch off electrical consumers that are not required.▶ Connect a suitable charger approved for Mercedes-Benz with sufficient charge output to the jump-start connection point of the 12 V battery (→ page 58).The 48 V battery is charged via the voltage converter in the vehicle.
Possible to start the vehi-cle again	* The 48 V battery has been charged automatically via the voltage converter.▶ Start the vehicle and drive for a while to charge the 12 V battery and the 48 V battery.

Tyre pressure monitor

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
Tyre press. monitor currently unavailable	* There is interference from a powerful radio signal source As a result, no signals from the tyre pressure sensors are being received. The tyre pressure monitoring system is temporarily unavailable.The tyre pressure monitoring system will restart automatically as soon as the cause has been rectified.

F167000902

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
	▶ Drive on
Tyre press. monitor inoper- ative	* The tyre pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning.⚠ WARNING There is a risk of an accident if the tyre pressure monitoring system is malfunctioningThe tyre pressure monitoring system cannot issue a warning if there is pressure loss in one or more of the tyres.Tyres with insufficient tyre pressure may impair the driving characteristics as well as steering and braking.▶ Have the tyre pressure monitoring system checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
	▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Tyre pressure monitor inop- erative No tyre pressure sensors	* The wheels fitted do not have suitable tyre pressure sensors. The tyre pressure monitoring system is deactivated.▶ Fit wheels with suitable tyre pressure sensors.
Wheel sensor(s) missing	* There is no signal from the tyre pressure sensor in at least one wheel. No pressure value is displayed for the affected tyre.▶ Have the faulty tyre pressure sensor replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.* The tyre pressure in one or more tyres has dropped significantly.The wheel position is displayed. A warning tone will also sound.
Check tyre(s)	⚠ WARNING Risk of an accident due to insufficient tyre pressureThe tyres can burst.The tyres can wear excessively and/or unevenly.The driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking may be greatly impaired.You could then lose control of the vehicle.▶ Observe the recommended tyre pressures.▶ Adjust the tyre pressure if necessary.
	▶ Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions.▶ Check the tyre pressure (→ page 657) and the tyres.
	* The tyre pressure is too low in at least one of the tyres, or the difference in tyre pressure between the individual wheels is too great.▶ Check the tyre pressure and add air, if necessary.▶ When the tyre pressure is correct, restart the tyre pressure monitor (→ page 660).
Rectify tyre pressure

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Warning tyre malfunction

* The pressure in one or more tyres has dropped suddenly. The wheel position is displayed.

WARNING Risk of an accident from driving with a flat tyre

• The tyres can overheat and be damaged.
- The driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking characteristics may be greatly impaired.

You could then lose control of the vehicle.

Do not drive with a flat tyre.
Do not exceed the maximum permissible driving distance in emergency mode and the maximum permissible speed with a flat MOExtended tyre.
▶ Observe the notes on flat tyres.

Notes on flat tyres ( page 60).

▶ Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions.
Check the tyres.

* At least one tyre is overheating. The affected tyres are displayed in red. At temperatures close to the limit value, the tyres are displayed in yellow.

Tyre(s) overheated

WARNING Risk of an accident from driving with overheated tyres

Overheated tyres can burst.

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
	▶ Reduce speed so that the tyres cool down.
	▶ Reduce your speed so that the tyres cool down.
	* At least one tyre is overheating. The affected tyres are displayed in red. At temperatures close to the limit value, the tyres are displayed in yellow.
Reduce speed	⚠ WARNING Risk of an accident from driving with overheated tyresOverheated tyres can burst.▶ Reduce speed so that the tyres cool down.
	▶ Reduce your speed so that the tyres cool down.

Exhaust gas aftertreatment

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
	* The AdBlue® level has fallen into the reserve range.▶ Top up AdBlue® immediately (→ page 25).
Refill AdBlue See Owner's Manual

F167 0009 02

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Top up AdBlue Emergency op. in XXX km See Owner's Manual

Top up AdBlue XX,X I Emerg. op.: max. XXX km/h Start not poss. in XXX km

Top up AdBlue XX,X I Switch vehicle on, wait 60 sec. or engine start not poss.

* The low AdBlue® level will lead to limited performance after the remaining distance displayed has been covered.

Top up with AdBlue® immediately (→ page 25).

* The low AdBlue® level will lead to limited performance from the speed displayed. After the remaining distance displayed has been covered, it will no longer be possible to start the vehicle.

Top up with at least the indicated amount of AdBlue ^® (→ page 25).

* The AdBlue ^® tank is empty. You can no longer start the vehicle.

Top up with at least the indicated amount of AdBlue® (→ page 25).

Switch on the vehicle and wait for approximately 60 seconds.

Start the vehicle.

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
AdBlue system fault See Owner's Manual	* The AdBlue® system is malfunctioning.► Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
AdBlue system malfunction Emergency op. in XXX km See Owner's Manual	* The AdBlue® system is malfunctioning. Performance will be reduced once the remaining distance displayed has been covered.► Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
AdBlue system malfunction Emerg. op.: max. XXX km/h Start not poss. in XXX km	* Power restriction due to the AdBlue® system fault. After the distance displayed has been covered, it will no longer be possible to start the vehicle.► Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

AdBlue system fault Engine start not possible

Top up AdBlue In XXX km Electric only. See Owner's Manual

XX,X I Top up AdBlue Only "Electric" available See Owner's Manual

* The AdBlue® system is malfunctioning. You can no longer start the vehicle.

Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

\* Plug-in hybrid:

The low AdBlue® level will result in the combustion engine being switched off after the displayed remaining distance has been driven.

From this point on, the vehicle can be driven only in all-electric mode, depending on the state of charge of the high-voltage battery.

Top up with AdBlue ^® immediately ( page 25).

\* Plug-in hybrid:

The AdBlue ^® tank is empty. The vehicle can be driven only in all-electric mode, depending on the state of charge of the high-voltage battery.

Top up with at least the indicated amount of AdBlue® (→ page 25).

▶ Switch on the vehicle and wait for approximately 60 seconds.

Start the vehicle.

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

AdBlue system malfunction In XXX km Electric only. See Owner's Manual

AdBlue system fault Only "Electric" drive program available

* Plug-in hybrid:

The AdBlue ^® system is malfunctioning. The combustion engine will switch off after the remaining distance displayed. From this point on, the vehicle can be driven only in all-electric mode, depending on the state of charge of the high-voltage battery.

Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

* Plug-in hybrid:

The AdBlue ^® system is malfunctioning. The vehicle can be driven only in all-electric mode, depending on the state of charge of the high-voltage battery.

Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Engine oil

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
	* The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level.
Add 1 litre engine oil when next refuelling	NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with insufficient engine oilAvoid long journeys with insufficient engine oil.When next refuelling, add 1 litre of engine oil (→ page 615).Notes on engine oil (→ page 793).
	* The engine oil level is too high.
Engine oil level Reduce oil level	NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with excess engine oilAvoid long journeys with excess engine oil.Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately and have the engine oil level reduced.
	* The engine oil level is too low.
Engine oil level Stop Switch off the vehicle	NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with insufficient engine oilAvoid long journeys with insufficient engine oil.Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving.

F167 0009 02

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
	▶ Switch off the vehicle.▶ Add 1 I of engine oil (→ page 615).▶ Check the engine oil level.Notes on engine oil (→ page 793).
Engine oil pressure StopSwitch off the vehicle	* The oil pressure is too low.■ NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with insufficient oil pressure▶ Avoid driving with insufficient oil pressure.▶ Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving.▶ Switch off the vehicle.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Engine oil level cannot be measured	* The electrical connection to the oil level sensor has been interrupted or the oil level sensor is faulty.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Engine oil Quality loss Oil change required

* Vehicles with a diesel engine: the engine oil quality is no longer sufficient.
Visit a qualified specialist workshop and have the oil changed.

Driver's display

Overview of indicator and warning lamps

Some systems will perform a self-test when the vehicle is switched on. Some indicator and warning lamps may briefly light up or flash. This behaviour is non-critical. These indicator and warning lamps indicate a malfunction only if they light up or flash after the vehicle has been started or during a journey.

Indicator and warning lamps

Occupant safety

Restraint system ( page 911)

Seat belt ( page 911)

Drive system

Reduced power ( page 912)

System error ( page 912)

Electrical fault ( page 912)

Vehicle

Trailer hitch ( page 913)

Power steering (yellow) (→ page 913)

Power steering (red) (→ page 913)

Engine

Coolant temperature ( page 915)

Engine diagnostics ( page 915)

Vehicles with a petrol engine: engine operating temperature ( page 915)

Vehicles with a diesel engine: preglow

Electrical fault ( page 915)

Reserve fuel with fuel filler flap location indicator ( page 915)

Brakes

Electric parking brake (yellow) (→ page 919)

Electric parking brake (red) (→ page 919)

Brakes (yellow) ( page 919)

Brakes (red) ( page 919)

Driving and driving safety systems

ABS ( page 921)

ESP ^® (→ page 921)

ESP ^® OFF ( page 921)

ESP ^® OFF ( page 921)

ESP ^® OFF ( page 921)

ESP® SPORT (→ page 921)

ATTENTION ASSIST ( page 921)

Distance warning (→ page 921)

Active Brake Assist ( page 921)

Active Brake Assist ( page 921)

AIRMATIC/E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL (→ page 921)

AMG RIDE CONTROL +/AMG ACTIVE RIDE CONTROL(→ page 921)

Mercedes-Benz emergency call system

Mercedes-Benz emergency call system ( page 927)

Tyre pressure monitoring system

Tyre pressure monitoring system ( page 927)

Exterior lighting

Standing lights (→ page 230)

Low beam ( page 230)

High beam (→ page 232)

Turn signal lights (→ page 232)

Rear fog light ( page 230)

F167 0009 02

Symbols on the central display

Drive Away Assist ( page 426)

Rear cross traffic warning (→ page 426)

Manoeuvring brake function (→ page 427)

Occupant safety

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Restraint system warning lamp

* The restraint system red warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is on. The restraint system is malfunctioning ( page 110).

WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunctions in the restraint system

Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as intended in an accident.

▶ Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

Plug-in hybrid:

DANGER Risk of fatal injuries due to restraint system malfunctions

Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as planned in an accident. In the event of an accident, the high-voltage on-board electrical system may not be deactivated as intended.

You may suffer an electric shock if you touch the damaged components of the high-voltage on-board electrical system.

▶ Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

▶ After an accident, switch off the vehicle immediately.

Drive on carefully.

Note the messages on the driver's display.

Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

912 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
Seat belt warning lamp flashes	* The red seat belt warning lamp flashes and an intermittent warning tone sounds.The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt while the vehicle is in motion.▶ Fasten your seat belt (→ page 110).There are objects on the front passenger seat.▶ Remove the objects from the front passenger seat.
Seat belt warning lamp lights up	* The red seat belt warning lamp lights up once the vehicle has started.In addition, an intermittent warning tone may sound.The red seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger to fasten their seat belts.▶ Fasten your seat belt (→ page 110).If you have placed objects on the front passenger seat, the red seat belt warning lamp may remain lit.

Hybrid system

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
Reduced-power warning lamp	* The yellow reduced-power warning lamp is on.Drive system power output is reduced.▶ Note the messages on the driver's display.

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

System error warning lamp

Electrical fault warning lamp

* The red system error warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is in a state of operational readiness READY. There is a malfunction in the drive system.

Note the messages on the driver's display.

* The red electrical fault warning lamp is lit. There is a fault with the electrics.

Note the messages on the driver's display.

Vehicle

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Trailer hitch warning lamp

* The red trailer hitch warning lamp is lit. The trailer hitch is not operational or is swivelling.

WARNING Risk of an accident if the ball neck is not locked

The trailer may become detached.

▶ Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving.

▶ Uncouple the trailer and secure it against rolling away.

914 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
	▶ Initiate a new swivelling procedure and do not re-couple the trailer until the display message disappears.
	▶ Note the messages on the driver's display.If the trailer hitch is swivelling:▶ Wait until the ball neck has reached the operational position.
Power steering warning lamp (yellow)	* The yellow power steering warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is running.The power assistance or the steering itself is malfunctioning.▶ Note the messages on the driver's display.
Power steering warning lamp (red)	* The red power steering warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is running.The power assistance or the steering itself is malfunctioning.
	⚠ WARNING Risk of accident if steering capability is impairedIf the steering does not function as intended, the vehicle's operating safety is jeopardised.▶ Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
	▶ Note the messages on the driver's display.

F167 0009 02

Engine

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Coolant warning lamp (red)

* The red coolant warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.

Possible causes:

• The temperature sensor is malfunctioning
• The coolant level is too low
• The air supply to the radiator is obstructed
• The radiator fan is faulty
• The engine coolant pump is faulty

If there is an additional warning tone, the coolant temperature has exceeded 120°C.

WARNING Risk of burns when opening the bonnet

If you open the bonnet in the event of an overheated engine or fire in the engine compartment, the following situations may occur:

• You may come into contact with hot gases.
- You may come into contact with other escaping hot operating fluids.

Before opening the bonnet, allow the engine to cool down.

In the event of a fire in the engine compartment, keep the bonnet closed and call the fire service.

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
	▶ Stop immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions and switch off the vehicle. Do not continue driving.▶ Note the messages on the driver's display.
	If the coolant temperature display is at the lower end of the temperature scale:▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
	If the coolant temperature display is at the upper end of the temperature scale:▶ Exit the vehicle and keep a safe distance from it until the engine has cooled down.▶ Check the coolant level (→ page 617).▶ Make sure that the air supply to the radiator is not obstructed.▶ Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. In doing so, ensure that the coolant temperature display remains below 120°C.
Coolant warning lamp (yellow)	* The yellow coolant warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.Possible causes:• The temperature sensor is malfunctioning• The charge air, transmission oil or battery cooling is faulty• The radiator shutters are blocked or defective▶ Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
Engine diagnostics warning lamp		* The yellow engine diagnostics warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.A malfunction has occurred in the engine, the exhaust system or the fuel system.The emissions limit value may have been exceeded and the engine may be running in emergency operation mode.▶ Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop.Vehicles with a diesel engine: the fuel tank may have been run dry.▶ Start the engine three to four times after refuelling.If the yellow engine diagnosis warning lamp goes out, emergency operation mode is cancelled. The vehicle need not be checked.
Electrical fault warning lamp		* The red electrical fault warning lamp is lit.There is a fault in the electrics.▶ Note the messages on the driver's display.
Engine operating temperature warning lamp		*The blue warning lamp for engine operating temperature will remain lit until the engine operating temperature has been reached.The engine output and engine torque will remain reduced until then.▶ Take this into consideration in your driving style.

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Engine operating temperature warning lamp

Fuel reserve warning lamp lights up

*Vehicles with a petrol engine: after a cold start, the blue engine operating temperature warning lamp is on. Engine output and engine torque are reduced.

Take this into consideration in your driving style.

* The yellow fuel reserve warning lamp lights up while the engine is running. The fuel supply has dropped into the reserve range.

Refuel.

Brakes

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Electric parking brake indicator lamp (red)

Electric parking brake indicator lamp (yellow)

Brakes warning lamp (yellow)

*The red electric parking brake indicator lamp flashes or is lit.

The yellow electric parking brake indicator lamp is also lit in the event of a malfunction.

Note the messages on the driver's display.

* The yellow brakes warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is running.

WARNING Risk of an accident due to a brake system malfunction

If the brake system is malfunctioning, braking characteristics may be impaired.

▶ Drive on carefully.

▶ Have the brake system checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

Adjust your speed and drive on carefully, leaving a suitable distance to the vehicle in front.

If the driver's display shows a display message, observe it.

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
	▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Brakes warning lamp (red)	* The red brakes warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is running.Possible causes:The brake force boosting is malfunctioning and the braking characteristics may be affected.There is insufficient brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.Note the messages on the driver's display.
	⚠ WARNING Risk of accident and injury if brake force boosting is malfunctioningIf brake force boosting is malfunctioning, increased brake pedal force may be necessary for braking. The braking characteristics may be impaired. The braking distance can increase in emergency braking situations.▶ Stop in a safe location immediately. Do not continue driving!▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
	⚠ WARNING Risk of an accident due to low brake fluid levelIf the brake fluid level is too low, the braking effect and the braking characteristics may be impaired.▶ Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.▶ Do not top up the brake fluid.

F167 0009 02

Driving and driving safety systems

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

ABS warning lamp

* The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is running. ABS is malfunctioning.

If an additional warning tone sounds, EBD is malfunctioning.

Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning.

Note the messages on the driver's display.

WARNING There is a risk of skidding if EBD or ABS is malfunctioning

The wheels may lock during braking.

The steerability and braking characteristics are heavily impaired and the braking distance may increase. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off.

Drive on carefully.

▶ Have the brake system checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

Drive on carefully.

Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
ESP® warning lamp flashes	* The yellow ESP® warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion.One or more wheels have reached their grip limit (→ page 346).One or more wheels have reached their grip limit (→ page 347).▶ Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.
ESP® warning lamp lights up	* The yellow ESP® warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is running. ESP® is malfunctioning.Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning.▶ Note the messages on the driver's display.
	⚠ WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP® is malfunctioningIf ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabilisation. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off.▶ Drive on carefully.▶ Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
	▶ Drive on carefully.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

ESP ^® OFF warning lamp

* The yellow ESP ^ OFF warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is running. ESP ^ is deactivated.

Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be inoperative.

⚠ WARNING Risk of skidding when driving with ESP® deactivated

ESP ^® does not act to stabilise the vehicle. The availability of further driving safety systems is also limited.

▶ Drive on carefully.
▶ Deactivate ESP ^® only for as long as the situation requires.

If ESP ^ cannot be activated, ESP ^ is malfunctioning.

Have ESP® checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

Observe the notes on deactivating ESP® (→ page 346).

ESP OFF

* The yellow ESP ^ OFF warning lamps are lit while the vehicle is running. ESP ^ is deactivated.

Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be inoperative.

⚠ WARNING Risk of skidding when driving with ESP® deactivated

ESP ^® does not act to stabilise the vehicle. The availability of further driving safety systems is also limited.

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
	▸ Drive on carefully.▸ Deactivate ESP® only for as long as the situation requires.If ESP® cannot be activated, ESP® is malfunctioning.▸ Have ESP® checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
	▸ Observe the notes on deactivating ESP® (→ page 347).
	* ESP® SPORT is activated while the vehicle is running.When ESP® SPORT is activated, ESP® will stabilise the vehicle only to a limited extent.⚠ WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP® SPORT is used incorrectlyWhen you activate ESP® SPORT, there is an increased risk of skidding and having an accident.▸ Activate ESP® SPORT only in the circumstances described below.
	▸ Observe the notes on activating ESP® SPORT(→ page 347).
ATTENTION ASSIST warning lamp	* The ATTENTION ASSIST warning lamp is lit.ATTENTION ASSIST is malfunctioning.▸ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

F167 0009 02

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Warning lamp for distance warning

Active Brake Assist warning lamp

Active Brake Assist warning lamp

* The red distance warning lamp lights up while the vehicle is in motion. The distance to the vehicle in front is too small for the speed selected. If there is an additional warning tone, you are approaching an obstacle at too high a speed.

Be prepared to brake immediately.
▶ Increase the distance.

Function of Active Brake Assist ( page 373).

* The Active Brake Assist warning lamp is on. Due to dirty sensors or a malfunction, the system is not available or the range of functions is restricted.
Note the messages on the driver's display.

* The Active Brake Assist warning lamp is on. The system is switched off or the range of functions has been automatically restricted. This may be the case if another driving system has been activated.

Observe the notes on Active Brake Assist ( page 373).

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
Suspension warning lamp (yellow)	* The yellow AIRMATIC / E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL warning lamp is lit.A fault has occurred in AIRMATIC / E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL.▶ Note the messages on the driver's display.
Suspension warning lamp (red)	* The red AIRMATIC / E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL warning lamp is lit.A fault has occurred in AIRMATIC / E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL.
	! NOTE The vehicle's driving characteristics will have changed significantly.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
	▶ Note the messages on the driver's display.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Suspension warning lamp (yellow)	*The yellow AMG RIDE CONTROL + or AMG ACTIVE RIDE CONTROL warning lamp is lit.There is a fault in the AMG RIDE CONTROL + or the AMG ACTIVE RIDE CONTROL.▶ Note the messages on the driver's display.

Mercedes-Benz emergency call system

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Mercedes-Benz emergency call system warning lamp

*The Mercedes-Benz emergency call system is malfunctioning. The Mercedes me connect system is also malfunctioning.

Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Tyre pressure monitor

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Tyre pressure monitoring system warning lamp flashes

*The yellow tyre pressure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) flashes for approximately one minute and then remains lit. The tyre pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning.

WARNING There is a risk of an accident if the tyre pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning

The tyre pressure monitoring system cannot issue a warning if there is pressure loss in one or more of the tyres. Tyres with insufficient tyre pressure may impair the driving characteristics as well as steering and braking.

▶ Have the tyre pressure monitoring system checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Tyre pressure monitoring system warning lamp lights up

*The yellow tyre pressure monitoring system warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) is lit. The tyre pressure monitoring system has detected tyre pressure loss in at least one of the tyres.

& WARNING Risk of an accident due to insufficient tyre pressure

R The tyres can burst.
R The tyres can wear excessively and/or unevenly.
R The driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking may be greatly impaired.

You could then lose control of the vehicle.

Observe the recommended tyre pressures.

Adjust the tyre pressure if necessary.

Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions.

Check the tyre pressure and the tyres.

1, 2, 3 ...

4MATIC....309

48 V on-board electrical system Displays in the driver's display.... 454 Operating safety.... 90

A

A/C function Activating/deactivating (operating unit).... 252 switching on/off (MBUX).... 253

ABS.... 345

Acceleration Kickdown.... 308 Optimised acceleration.... 274

Accelerator pedal 290

Access data Setting (Bluetooth ^® ).... 588

Accident ERA-GLONASS test mode.... 584

Accident, emergency call.... 68, 581

Activating/deactivating the acoustic locking verification signal.... 151

Active Blind Spot Assist Activating/deactivating....386 Brake application....385 Exit warning....383 Function....383 Trailer operation....385

Active Brake Assist Function.... 373 Setting.... 377

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Activate/deactivate variable limiter.... 362 Activating/deactivating.... 362 Active Emergency Stop Assist.... 372 Calling up a speed.... 362 Function.... 359 Increasing/decreasing the speed.... 362 Route-based speed adaptation.... 366 Storing a speed.... 362

Active Emergency Stop Assist.... 372 Active headlamps.... 233

Active Lane Keeping Assist Activating/deactivating.... 388

Function.... 386 Setting the sensitivity.... 388 Trailer operation.... 386

Active light function.... 233

Active Parking Assist Automatic braking function.... 425 Exiting a parking space.... 423 Function.... 420 Manoeuvering brake function.... 427 Parking.... 422 Pausing.... 425

Active Service System PLUS.... 610

Active Speed Limit Assist.... 365

Active Steering Assist Activating/deactivating.... 372 Active Emergency Stop Assist.... 372 Function.... 370

Active Stop-and-Go Assist Function.... 367

Adaptive brake lights.... 354

Adaptive cruise control.... 366

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Activating/deactivating.... 236

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus Switching on/off.... 238

AdBlue® Additives....792 Capacity....792 Fill level....447 Notes....314 Purity....792 Range....447 Topping up....25, 314

Additional door lock.... 154

Additives AdBlue ^® 25, 314, 792 Engine oil 793 Fuel 789

Adjusting the balance/fader Burmester ^® surround sound system..... 605

Adjusting the bass, mid-range and treble Burmester ^® surround sound system..... 605

Adjusting the mid-range, treble and bass Burmester ^® surround sound system..... 605

Adjusting the sound focus Burmester ^® surround sound system..... 606

Adjusting treble, mid-range and bass settings Burmester ^® surround sound system..... 605

After-sales service.... 610

Air conditioning menu Air distribution.... 254 Climate control.... 253 Fragrance system.... 256 Ionisation.... 256 Rear compartment climate control.... 254 Stationary heater/ventilation.... 262

Air distribution Overview....253 Setting....250, 254

Air freshener system.... 256

Air inlet....620

Air pressure.... 657

Air suspension.... 389

Air vents Glove box....263 Setting....262

Air/water duct....620

Airbag Inflating....118 Overview....123 PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps....112 Warning lamp....110

Airflow Setting.... 250

AIRMATIC Lowering/raising the rear area of the vehicle.... 395 Setting entering/exiting level.... 394 Setting the vehicle level.... 391 Vehicle levels.... 389

Alarm system.... 172

All-wheel drive.... 309

Alternative route.... 517, 526

Ambient lighting.... 240

AMG ACTIVE RIDE CONTROL Function.... 397 Selecting the suspension setting.... 398 Setting the vehicle level.... 399

AMG ceramic high-performance composite brake system.... 281

Index 931

AMG DYNAMIC SELECT

Setting drive programs.... 300

AMG Real Performance Sound.... 290

AMG RIDE CONTROL +

Function.... 396

AMG steering wheel buttons

Setting.... 291

AMG steering-wheel buttons

Function.... 291

AMG TRACK PACE

Configuring.... 502

Drag Race.... 501

Function 499

Telemetry display.... 502

Track Race 499

Android Auto

Connecting a mobile phone (wired)...... 569

Connecting a mobile phone (wireless).... 570

Ending.... 571

Information.... 569

Sound settings.... 571

Transferred vehicle data.... 571

Android smartphone.... 569

Animals.... 119

Anti-lock braking system.... 345

Anti-theft alarm system.... 172

Anti-theft protection

Additional door lock.... 154

Immobiliser.... 172

Anticipatory operating-mode strategy,

Route-based.... 289

Apple CarPlay ^® , Smartphone

Connecting an iPhone ^® (cable).... 567

Connecting an iPhone ^® (wireless)..... 568

Ending.... 568

Notes.... 567

Overview.... 566

Sound settings.... 568

Transferred vehicle data.... 571

Apps, Mercedes me

Mercedes me calls.... 572

Mercedes me connect.... 576

Selecting (MBUX multimedia system)..... 579

Ashtray

in the centre console.... 223

Assembly licence plate, front.... 93

Assistance system.... 344

Assistant display

Menu (driver display)...... 447

ASSYST PLUS

Battery disconnection periods.... 611

Service interval display.... 610

Service requirements.... 610

ATA

Deactivating the alarm.... 173

Function.... 172

Interior protection.... 174

Interior protection function.... 174

Tow-away protection.... 174

Tow-away protection function.... 173

ATTENTION ASSIST

Function.... 354

Setting.... 355

Attention assistant.... 354

Augmented reality

MBUX route guidance.... 538

Authorisations

Setting.... 491

Authorised workshop.... 100

Automatic car wash.... 31,620

Automatic car wash mode.... 622

Automatic climate control.... 253

Automatic co-driver airbag shutoff Function.... 114

Automatic distance control.... 359

Automatic driving lights.... 231

Automatic emergency call.... 582

Automatic engine start/stop.... 281

Automatic front passenger airbag shutoff Information (child restraint system on the front passenger seat).... 129 PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps.... 112

Automatic measures after an accident..... 117

Automatic mirror folding function.... 248

Automatic seat adjustment.... 189

Automatic transmission DIRECT SELECT lever.... 301 Drive programs.... 292, 295 DYNAMIC SELECT button.... 292, 295 Engages neutral.... 302 Engaging drive position.... 305

Engaging reverse gear.... 302

Gear shift.... 301

Kickdown.... 308

Manual shifting.... 305, 306

Oil temperature (driver's display).... 448, 449

Selecting park position.... 303

Steering wheel gearshift paddles.... 305, 306

Transmission position display.... 301

Transmission positions.... 301

Autonomous braking.... 373

Axle load Trailer operation....815 Trailer operation (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)....816

B

Back seat, Rear seat.... 180

Bag hook.... 215

Ball neck Extending/retracting.... 44, 432 Extending/retracting (MBUX multime- dia system).... 433 Trailer coupling.... 434

BAS.... 346

Basic information.... 107

Battery High-voltage battery.... 642

Battery (12 V battery) Charging.... 58, 644 Notes.... 639 Notes (starting assistance and charging).... 642 Replacing.... 645 Starting assistance.... 58, 644

Battery (48 V) Notes...... 640

Battery (high-voltage on-board electrical system)....809

Battery (key).... 152

Battery (starter battery) Charging via Remote Online.... 272

Battery operation.... 265

Belt Adjusting the height.... 110 Fastening.... 110 Notes on wearing correctly.... 109 Releasing.... 123

Bicycle rack

Load capacity.... 812

Load capacity (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) 814

Trailer operation.... 437

Blind Spot Assist

Activating/deactivating.... 386

Function.... 383

BlueTec

AdBlue ^® 314

Bluetooth®

Connecting a mobile phone.... 10, 552

Information 491

Setting up an Internet connection...... 588

Switching on/off.... 491

Bonnet

Opening/closing.... 612

Boost pressure, current (driver's display)

448, 449

Brake Assist

Active Brake Assist.... 373

Brake Assist System.... 346

Brake Assist System.... 346

Brake disks.... 273

Brake fluid 796

Brake force distribution.... 352

Brake lamps

Adaptive brake lights.... 354

Brake pads.... 273

Brakes

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System).... 345

Active Brake Assist.... 373

Adaptive brake lights.... 354

AMG ceramic high-performance com-

posite brake system.... 281

BAS (Brake Assist System).... 346

Driving tips.... 275

EBD (Electronic Brakeforce Distribu-

tion).... 352

Electric parking brake.... 338

Handbrake.... 338

HOLD function.... 352

Limited braking effect (salt-treated

roads).... 275

New/replaced brake pads/brake discs.. 273

Parking brake.... 338

Post-collision brake.... 117

Recuperation.... 286

Running-in notes.... 273

Braking assistance

Brake Assist System.... 346

Breakdown

Flat tyre.... 60, 632

Overview of aids.... 84

Tow-starting.... 652

Towing methods.... 63, 648

Transporting the vehicle.... 650

Wheel change.... 665

Burmester ^® surround sound system

Adjusting the balance/fader.... 605

Adjusting the sound focus.... 606

Adjusting treble, mid-range and bass settings.... 605

Automatic loudness normalisation...... 605

Calling up the sound menu.... 605

Information.... 605

Selecting the sound profile.... 606

C

Call list

Deleting.... 561

Making a call.... 560

Overview.... 560

Selecting options.... 561

Calling the customer centre for

Mercedes-Benz 573

Calling up a web page.... 590

Calling up the sound menu

Burmester ^® surround sound system..... 605

Calls, Telephone operation

Accepting.... 557

Activating functions during a call.... 557

Calls with several participants.... 557

Declining.... 557

Ending a call.... 557

Incoming call during an existing call..... 558

Making....557

Mercedes me.... 572

Telephone 557

Using overhead control panel.... 572

Using the international dialling code..... 558

Camera

360° camera.... 410, 413

Button.... 415

Cleaning.... 625

Function.... 410

Information.... 343

Off-road function.... 413

Opening the camera cover (reversing

camera).... 416

Reversing camera.... 408

ROAD SURFACE SCAN.... 402

Selecting the view.... 416

Transparent bonnet 413

Car key.... 150

Car wash

Automatic car wash.... 31, 620

High-pressure cleaner.... 622

Washing by hand.... 623

Car-to-X-Communication

Display on map.... 537

Overview.... 537

Sending hazard warnings.... 538

Care

Air/water duct.... 620

Automatic car wash.... 31, 620

Camera.... 625

Car parts.... 625

Decorative foil.... 624

Display.... 626

Exterior lighting.... 625

Head-up display.... 626

High-pressure cleaner.... 622

Paint 623

Plastic trim.... 626

Real wood/trim elements.... 626

Roof lining.... 626

Running boards.... 625

Seat belt 626

Steering wheel 626

Trailer hitch 625

Vehicle interior 626

Vehicle socket for the high-voltage

battery.... 625

Washing by hand.... 623

Wheels/rims 625

Caring for plastic trim.... 626

Caring for rims.... 625

Caring for the roof lining.... 626

Caring for the steering wheel.... 626

Carrier....198

Central display

Operating.... 470

Central locking system

Button.... 155

Key.... 151

Charge level display.... 336

Charge level/charge display.... 336

Charging

12 V battery.... 58,644

At time of departure.... 504

Charge level display.... 336

Charging cable control panel.... 323

Charging station, mode 3.... 321

Configuring weekly profile.... 504

Emergency release of the socket flap..... 335

Ending the charging process (alternat-

ing current, mode 2/3).... 329

Ending the charging process (direct

current, mode 4).... 333

Indicator lamps on vehicle socket...... 325

Mains socket, mode 2.... 320

Notes on charging the high-voltage

battery.... 316

Notes on the high-voltage battery...... 642

Rapid charging station, mode 4.... 322

Setting the maximum permissible

charging current (mains socket).... 323

Starting the charging process (alter-

nating current, mode 2/3).... 326

Starting the charging process (direct

current, mode 4).... 331

Stowing the charging cable.... 319

USB port.... 46, 200, 224

Wallbox, mode 3.... 321

Wirelessly charging a mobile phone...... 225

Charging cable

Control panel.... 323

Stowing.... 319

Charging process

Paying.... 518

Charging settings.... 504

Checking the coolant level.... 617

Child safety lock

Rear door.... 146

Side window (rear).... 148

Switching on/off (MBUX rear tablet)..... 494

Child seat

Adjusting the vehicle seat.... 141

Approval categories.... 131

Basic instructions.... 125

Brief overview of most important

points.... 124

Fitting ISOFIX/i-Size.... 143

Front passenger seat.... 129

Overview of warning stickers.... 128

Rearward-facing.... 131

Recommendations for child restraint

systems.... 133

Risks/dangers.... 126

Seats suitable for belt-secured child

restraint systems.... 138

Seats suitable for i-Size child restraint

systems.... 138

Seats suitable for ISOFIX child

restraint systems.... 136

Securing to the front passenger seat

with the seat belt.... 146

Securing to the rear seat with the

seatbelt.... 146

Top Tether.... 144

Without automatic co-driver airbag sh

utoff.... 131

Children

Avoiding dangers in the vehicle.... 126

Basic instructions.... 125

Chock....61, 664, 665

Cigarette lighter Front centre console.... 223

Classic menu display content Selecting.... 444

Clean varnish.... 623

Cleaning Air/water duct....620 Automatic car wash....31, 620 Car parts....625 Decorative foil....624 High-pressure cleaner....622 Paint....623 Real wood/trim elements....626 Sensors....625 Vehicle interior....626 Vehicle socket for the high-voltage battery....625 Washing by hand....623

Cleaning carpets.... 626

Cleaning seat covers.... 626

Climate control, Air conditioning system, Blower, Cooling Activating/deactivating.... 252

Activating/deactivating (rear operating unit)....252 Activating/deactivating the A/C function (control panel)....252 Activating/deactivating the synchronisation function (control panel)....254 Air distribution settings....253 Air vents (front)....262 Air vents (rear)....263 Automatic control....253 Automatically controlling (rear operating unit)....253 Closing/opening the windows (air-recirculation button)....65 Demisting the windscreen....250 Demisting windows....255 Fragrance system....256 Glove box air vent....263 Immediate pre-entry climate control....260 Inserting/removing the flacon (fragrance system)....256 Ionisation....256 Notes....250 Overview of systems....250 Pre-entry climate control for departure time....259

F167 0009 02

Pre-entry climate control using the key... 257
Rear operating unit.... 82
Resetting the climate control settings.... 66
Residual heat.... 255
Setting the air distribution.... 250
Setting the airflow.... 250
Setting the vehicle interior temperature.... 250
Stationary heater/ventilation.... 261
Switching air-recirculation mode on/off.... 255
Switching the A/C function on/off (MBUX).... 253
Switching the rear window heater on/off.... 250
Synchronisation function.... 255
Ventilation with comfort opening.... 165

Climate control settings Resetting....66 Co-driver airbag shutoff, PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF....114 Coat hook....216 COC papers, Certificate of conformity....676

Cockpit

Dashboard.... 70, 74

Coffee cup symbol.... 354

Collapsible spare wheel

Inflating.... 674

Notes 672

Removing.... 674

Collision detection (parked vehicle)

Setting.... 341, 342

Combination switch

Lights.... 232

Windscreen wipers.... 241

Comfort

Information.... 19

Communication module

Disconnecting automatically from the

Internet.... 587

Setting up an Internet connection.... 586

Commuter route.... 517, 527

Compass.... 543

Components subject to radio regulations

Declaration of conformity.... 94

Connection status

Displaying.... 590

Overview.... 589

Contacts, Address book, Phone book

Calling up.... 559

Deleting.... 560

Importing.... 559

Importing (overview)...... 559

Information 558

Making a call.... 560

Name format.... 559

Note about suggestions.... 556

Options.... 560

Selecting options for suggestions...... 556

Storing.... 559

Control element (MBUX multimedia sys-

tem)

Setting acoustic feedback...... 470

Control elements: 89

Convenience closing.... 166

Convenience feature

Closing/opening the windows (air-recirculation button).... 65

Convenience opening.... 165

F167 0009 02

Coolant

Notes....797

Copyright.... 106

Cornering light.... 233

Correct use.... 101

Cover.... 167

Cross traffic (warning) 426

Cross Traffic Alert, Cross traffic warning..... 426

Crosswind Assist.... 349

Cruise control

activating/deactivating.... 357

Calling up a speed.... 357

Function.... 356

Requirements: 357

Setting a speed.... 357

Storing a speed.... 357

Cup holder

Rear 47,202,221

D

Damage

Limited protection.... 119

Damping system ADS PLUS

AIRMATIC.... 389

E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL.... 400

Setting the vehicle level.... 391

Dashboard

Cockpit....70,74

Dashcam

Configuring settings.... 550

Selecting a USB device.... 549

Starting/stopping a video recording..... 549

Data processing in the vehicle.... 102

Data protection

Granting authorisations.... 491

Data protection rights.... 105

Data storage

Data protection rights.... 105

Electronic control units.... 102

Online services.... 105

Deactivating the alarm.... 173

Dealership.... 100

Declaration of conformity

Components subject to radio regulations....94

Electromagnetic compatibility.... 93

Jack....96

TREFIT kit....97

Decorative foil.... 624

DeNOx agent

AdBlue ^® 314

Deployed components

Limited protection.... 119

Deployment situations.... 118

Destination

Editing a suggestion.... 533

Editing intermediate destinations...... 525

Editing the previous destinations.... 533

Saving as a favourite.... 533

Destination entry

Accepting a destination suggestion...... 513

Entering a 3 word address.... 515

Entering an intermediate destination..... 525

Entering geo-coordinates.... 515

Selecting a contact.... 515

Selecting a received destination.... 517

Selecting from favourites.... 516

Selecting from the map.... 516

Selecting previous destinations.... 513

F167 0009 02

Destination entry (multimedia system)

Notes.... 511

Selecting a POI.... 513

Detecting inattentiveness.... 354

Diagnostics connection.... 99

Diesel

Low outside temperatures.... 789

Notes.... 789

Digital Owner's Manual.... 86

Direct commands

Voice commands for MBUX voice

assistant...... 463

DIRECT SELECT lever

Automatic transmission.... 301

Engages neutral.... 302

Engaging drive position.... 305

Engaging park position automatically..... 303

Engaging reverse gear 302

Function.... 301

Gearshift recommendation.... 308

Manual gearshifting.... 305, 306

Selecting park position 303

Display

Care....626

Display (driver's display)

Overview of displays.... 454, 455

Display (MBUX multimedia system)

Settings.... 489

Display message

Calling up on driver display.... 817

Notes.... 817

Display messages

---km/h 884

LIM --- km/h....876

---km/h 875

2nd seat row, centre Not locked... 857

2nd seat row, left Not locked..... 857

2nd seat row, right Not locked..... 857

3rd seat row, left Not locked...... 859

3rd seat row, right Not locked..... 859

12 V on-board electrical system Visit workshop.... 895

48 V battery See Owner's Manual.... 897

Acoustic presence indicator inoperative.... 843

Active Light System inoperative.... 830

AdBlue system fault Engine start not possible.... 905

AdBlue system fault Only "Electric" drive program available.... 906

AdBlue system fault See Owner's Manual....904

AdBlue system malfunction Emerg. op.: max. XXX km/h Start not poss. in XXX km.... 904

AdBlue system malfunction Emergency op. in XXX km See Owner's Manual....904

AdBlue system malfunction In XXX km Electric only. See Owner's Manual....906

Add 1 litre engine oil when next refuelling....907

ATTENTION ASSIST: Take a break! 875

Automatic driving lights inoper- ative....830

Battery overheated Stop, everybody out! Outdoors if possible 845, 897

Beginning emergency stop...... 887

Camera view restricted See Owner's Manual.... 892

Cannot fold 2nd seat row forwards on the left Please adjust the front seat....858

Cannot fold 2nd seat row forwards on the right Please adjust the front seat....858

Cannot fold 2nd seat row See Owner's Manual....858

Change key batteries.... 828

Charger cable connected.... 843

Check brake fluid level.... 870
Check tyre(s)....900
Clean the fuel filter 862
Compressor is cooling.... 880
Coolant Stop Switch off the vehicle.... 861
Currently unavailable Battery low....841
Currently unavailable Charge high-voltage battery.... 842
Currently unavailable High-voltage battery charging incomplete.... 841
Currently unavailable Refuel...... 841
currently unavailable See Owner's Manual (ABS and ESP ^ )...... 871
currently unavailable See Owner's Manual (ESP®).... 872
Dynamic low beam inoperative..... 831
Engine oil level cannot be measured....908

Engine oil level Reduce oil level.... 907
Engine oil level Stop Switch off the vehicle....907
Engine oil pressure Stop Switch off the vehicle....908
Engine oil Quality loss Oil change required.... 909
Fault Drive at max. 80 km/h 878, 879, 882
Fault Stop 882
Front left malfunction Consult workshop.... 819
Front left parking lights.... 833
Front left turn signal.... 835
Front right malfunction Consult workshop....820
Front right parking lights.... 833
Front right turn signal.... 836
Fuel tank is depressurised Ready for refuelling.... 848

inoperative See Owner's Manual (ABS and ESP ^® ).... 872
EBD inoperative See Owner's Manual (EBD, ABS and ESP ^® ).... 874
inoperative See Owner's Manual (ESP ^® ) 873
SOS Inoperative....895
inoperative....883
Key being taught in Please wait.... 829
Key not detected (red display message)....828
Key not detected (white display message).... 828
Left brake lamp 837
Left cornering light 835
Left daytime running lights...... 834
Left low beam.... 833
Left main beam.... 834
Left mirror turn signal.... 836

Left tail light.... 838
Left window airbag malfunction
Consult workshop....825
Lowering....880
Malfunction See Owner's Manual....830
Malfunction Visit workshop...... 846
Malfunction....846
Malfunction....846
Max. speed 40 km/h....883
120km/h! Maximum speed exceeded.... 877
Not in curr. drive prog.... 883
Number plate lamp 839
Off 884
HOLD Off 874
Operation only possible in
transmission position P 851
Parking brake See Owner's
Manual....867

(P) Parking brake Switch on vehicle to release.... 870
LIM passive....876
Performance severely limited..... 847
Please wait 48 V battery charging....897
Please wait Depressurising fuel tank.... 847
Pre-entry climate control via key available again after starting vehicle....842
Pre-entry climate control via key currently unavailable. High-voltage battery low.... 842
Rear fog light 838
Rear left turn signal.... 836
Rear right turn signal.... 836
Rectify tyre pressure.... 900
Reduce speed.... 881
Reduce speed....902

Refill AdBlue See Owner's Manual....902
(P) Release parking brake.... 869
Replace air filter 862
Replace key 827
Reserve fuel level.... 863
Restraint system malfunction Consult workshop.... 818
Restricted during trailer operation....893
Reversing light 838
Right brake lamp.... 837
Right cornering light.... 835
Right daytime running lights...... 835
Right low beam....834
Right main beam.... 834
Right mirror turn signal.... 837
Right tail light 838
Right window airbag malfunction Consult workshop.... 825

Rising....880
Second row of seats, left Mal-function Consult workshop.... 821
Second row of seats, right Mal-function Consult workshop.... 822
Start the vehicle to charge the 12 V battery....896
Steering malfunction Increased physical effort See Owner's Manual..... 855
Steering malfunction Stop immediately See Owner's Manual.... 855
Stop Switch off the vehicle.... 847
Stop vehicle Leave vehicle on to charge the 12 V battery....896
Stop vehicle See Owner's Manual....895
suspended....884
Switch off lights.... 831
Switch on headlamps.... 831

Tank ventilation Malfunction Consult workshop.... 848
temporarily unavailable Sensors dirty....891
Third brake lamp 837
Third row of seats, left Malfunction Consult workshop.... 823
Third row of seats, right Mal-function Consult workshop.... 824
Top up AdBlue Emergency op. in XXX km See Owner's Manual.... 903
Top up AdBlue In XXX km Electric only. See Owner's Manual.... 905
Top up AdBlue XX,X I Emerg. op.: max. XXX km/h Start not poss. in XXX km....903
Top up AdBlue XX,X I Switch vehicle on, wait 60 sec. or engine start not poss....903

Top up coolant See Owner's Manual....861
Top up washer fluid.... 859
Towing not permitted See Own-er's Manual....843
Trailer brake lamp 839
Trailer coupling Check lock (white display message)...... 851
Trailer coupling Check lock (red display message).... 853
Trailer coupling in motion.... 851
Trailer left turn signal.... 839
Trailer right turn signal.... 839
Trailer tail light 840
Tyre(s) overheated.... 901
⚠️ Vehicle is ready to drive Shutdown occurs when locked or automatically in a few minutes.... 850
Vehicle rising Please wait...... 880
Warning tyre malfunction...... 901

Index 943

Wheel sensor(s) missing...... 899

XX,X I Top up AdBlue Only

"Electric" available See Owner's Manual....905

"Electric" drive program currently unavailable....845

4matic currently unavailable.... 860

4matic inoperative.... 860

Active Blind Spot Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual.... 889

Active Blind Spot Assist inoperative...... 889

Active Blind Spot Assist unavailable when towing a trailer See Owner's Manual....890

Active Brake Assist Functions currently limited See Owner's Manual.... 885

Active Brake Assist Functions limited See Owner's Manual.... 886

Active Distance Assist available again..... 885

Active Distance Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual.... 884

Active Distance Assist inoperative...... 885

Active Lane Keeping Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual.... 890

Active Lane Keeping Assist functions restricted See Owner's Manual.... 890

Active Lane Keeping Assist inoperative... 890

Active Parking Assist and PARKTRONIC inoperative See Owner's Manual....894

Active Steering Assist currently unavailable due to multiple emergency stops....887

Active Steering Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual.... 886

Active Steering Assist inoperative...... 887

Active Stop-and-Go Assist currently unavailable see Owner's Manual.... 887

Active Stop-and-Go Assist inoperative See Owner's Manual.... 888

Adaptive Highbeam Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual.... 831

Adaptive Highbeam Assist inoperative.... 832

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus currently unavailable See Owner's Manual... 832

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus inoperative....832

AMG Ride Control Function limited See Owner's Manual.... 879

Anti-theft alarm system Malfunction..... 857

Apply brake and start vehicle to shift out of P or N.... 864

Apply brake to deselect P position...... 863

Apply brake to engage D or R.... 864

Apply brake to engage R.... 864

Apply parking brake to park Visit workshop....864

Auxiliary battery malfunction (red display message).... 866
Auxiliary battery malfunction (white display message).... 866
Blind Spot Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual.... 888
Blind Spot Assist inoperative.... 888
Blind Spot Assist unavailable when towing a trailer See Owner's Manual..... 889
Cannot start vehicle See Owner's Manual.... 860, 898
Charging fault Please change charging method See Owner's Manual.... 844
Charging method currently unavailable Please try again or change charging method....844
Check brake pads See Owner's Manual....871
Consult workshop without changing the transmission position.... 865

Consult workshop without starting the vehicle again.... 846
Cruise control and Limiter inoperative.... 875
Cruise control inoperative.... 875
Cruise control off....875
Drive system malfunction Stop Switch off the vehicle.... 863
Drive system Malfunction Visit work- shop....863
Front passenger airbag disabled See Owner's Manual....825
Front passenger airbag enabled See Owner's Manual....826
Hazard warning lamp system Malfunction....833
Head-up display currently unavailable See Owner's Manual.... 854
Head-up display inoperative.... 854
Inoperative indicator lamp in driver display. Consult workshop.... 840

Limiter inoperative.... 876
Not possible to unlock charging cable See Owner's Manual.... 843
Only electric drive available Power limited 844
Only select P when vehicle is stationary.... 863
PARKTRONIC inoperative See Owner's Manual....894
Place the key in the marked space See Owner's Manual.... 829
Possible to start the vehicle again...... 898
PRE-SAFE impulse side inoperative See Owner's Manual.... 893
PRE-SAFE inoperative See Owner's Manual....893
Reduced drive system performance See Owner's Manual.... 845
Reversing not poss. Consult workshop... 865

Risk of vehicle rolling away Apply parking brake to park.... 865
Risk of vehicle rolling away Driver's door open Transmission not in P.... 865
Speed limit (winter tyres) XXX km/h..... 877
Speed Limit Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual.... 876
Speed Limit Assist inoperative.... 876
Stop vehicle Leave engine running Wait Transmission cooling.... 866
To switch off the vehicle, press the Start/Stop button for at least 3 seconds or 3 times....860
Traffic Sign Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual.... 877
Traffic Sign Assist inoperative.... 877
Transmission Malfunction Stop...... 865
Tyre press. monitor currently unavailable....898
Tyre press. monitor inoperative.... 899

Tyre pressure monitor inoperative No tyre pressure sensors.... 899
Vehicle is ready to drive Shutdown occurs when locked or automatically in XX mins....850
Vehicle not currently being charged Charging station fault.... 844
Wiper Malfunction.... 859
Without changing gear, consult work- shop....846
Displaying road names/house numbers..... 539
Distance control.... 359
Distance warning.... 373
DISTRONIC.... 359
Door Additional door lock.... 154 Child safety lock (rear door).... 146
Emergency key.... 157
Opening (from the inside).... 154
Power closing function.... 157
Unlocking (inside).... 154

Door control panel Seat operation....80
Door control panel (rear).... 82
Downhill Speed Regulation.... 368
Drag Race, Drag race.... 501
Drinks holder.... 220, 221
Drive Away Assist.... 426
Drive position.... 305
Drive program display.... 296, 297
Drive programs AMG DYNAMIC SELECT.... 300 Selecting.... 296, 297
Driver display Track Pace menu.... 450
Driver's display, Instrument cluster 48 V on-board electrical system..... 454
Assistant display.... 447
Classic menu.... 444
Head-up display.... 452
Menus.... 442
Navigation menu.... 451
Notes...... 441
Off-road menu 451

Operating.... 441

Understated menu.... 444

Warning/indicator lamps.... 909

Driver's seat

Adjusting electrically.... 176

Easy entry and exit feature.... 195

Seat heating.... 190

Driving abroad

Light adjustment low beam.... 33, 230

Driving off-road.... 278

Driving safety system

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)...... 345

Active Brake Assist.... 373

Adaptive brake lights.... 354

ATTENTION ASSIST.... 354

BAS (Brake Assist System).... 346

Blind Spot Assist/Active Blind Spot

Assist.... 383

Cameras.... 343

Cruise control.... 356

EBD (Electronic Brakeforce Distribu-

tion).... 352

ESP ^® (Electronic Stability Program)

346, 347

Hill Start Assist.... 354

HOLD function.... 352

Off-road ABS.... 346

Overview.... 344

Radar and ultrasonic sensors.... 343

STEER CONTROL.... 352

Traffic Sign Assist.... 380

Trailer Manoeuvering Assist...... 428

Your responsibility.... 343

Driving system

AMG RIDE CONTROL +.... 396

Driving tips

AMG ceramic high-performance com-

posite brake system.... 281

General driving tips.... 275

Light adjustment when driving abroad

33,230

Off-road driving.... 278

Optimised acceleration.... 274

Recuperation.... 286

Running-in notes.... 273

Drowsiness detection.... 354

DSR

Activating/deactivating.... 368, 369

Changing the target speed.... 369

Function.... 368

Notes 368

Duplicate key.... 153

Dynamic handling control system.... 346

Dynamic low beam

Activating/deactivating.... 235

Overview 233

DYNAMIC SELECT

Calling up the fuel consumption indi-

cator....299

Configuring drive program I.... 298

Displaying engine data.... 299

Displaying vehicle data.... 299

Drive program display.... 296, 297

Drive programs.... 292, 295

Function.... 292, 295

Selecting the drive program.... 296, 297

E

E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL

Electrohydraulic suspension.... 400

Individual wheel control.... 403

Recovery mode.... 403

ROAD SURFACE SCAN 402

Setting the vehicle level.... 404

Suspension.... 400

Vehicle levels.... 400

E-mails.... 462

E10....787,788

Easy entry feature

Setting.... 196

Easy exit feature

Setting.... 196

EASY-PACK load-securing kit

Installing/removing the telescopic rod... 217

Notes.... 216

EBD, Electronic Brakeforce Distribution..... 352

ECO Assist

48 V on-board electrical system..... 284

Activating/deactivating.... 289

Plug-in hybrid.... 288

ECO display

Resetting.... 25

ECO start/stop button

Automatic engine start/stop.... 283

ECO start/stop function

Automatic engine start.... 281

Automatic engine stop.... 281

Conditions (automatic engine stop/

start).... 67

Function 281

Switching off/on 283

Electric drive.... 265

Electric parking brake

Applying automatically.... 338

Emergency braking.... 341

Manually applying/releasing.... 339

Releasing automatically.... 339

Electrical fuses.... 59, 652

Electrohydraulic chassis.... 400

Electrohydraulic suspension.... 400

Electromagnetic compatibility

Declaration of conformity.... 93

Electronic Stability Program.... 346, 347

Emergency

Emergency guide.... 69

Fire extinguisher.... 55, 631

First-aid kit (soft sided).... 36, 58, 631

Overview of aids.... 84

Safety vest.... 34, 56, 629

Warning triangle.... 631

Emergency braking

Active Brake Assist.... 373

Brake Assist System.... 346

Carrying out.... 341

Electric parking brake/handbrake...... 338

Emergency call

Automatic.... 582

Manual.... 582

Emergency call system

Mercedes me connect.... 68, 581

Emergency key

Door.... 157

Inserting/removing.... 152

Tailgate.... 163

Emergency operation mode

Start the vehicle.... 270

Emergency release

Socket flap.... 335

Emergency shutoff (high-voltage on-board

electrical system).... 266

Emergency spare wheel

Inflating....671

Emergency stop assistant.... 372

Emotion Start.... 270

ENERGIZING Coach

Calling up.... 510

Function.... 509

ENERGIZING COMFORT

Overview of programmes.... 506

Starting the programme.... 508

Energy flow display

Function/notes.... 505

Engine

Emergency operation mode.... 270

Engine number 784

Starting assistance.... 642

switching off (start/stop button)...... 336

Tow-starting.... 652

Engine data

Displaying.... 299

DYNAMIC SELECT 299

Engine electronics.... 676

Engine number....784

Engine oil, Oil

Additives....793

Capacity....794

Capacity (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)...... 794

Checking the oil level using the driver

display.... 30, 615

MB-Freigabe / MB-Approval.... 794

MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval

(Mercedes-AMG vehicles).... 794

Quality....794

Quality (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)...... 794

Temperature (driver's display)...... 448, 449

Topping up.... 615

Engine oil temperature (driver's display)

448, 449

Engine operating temperature

Warning lamp 274

Engine output.... 274

Engine output, current (driver's display)

448, 449

Engine sound.... 290

Engine starting

Remote Online 272

Start/stop button 268

Engine torque.... 274

Entering characters

Function/notes 486

Handwriting recognition.... 489

On the touchscreen.... 487

Selecting the writing speed.... 489

Setting the keyboard language.... 489

Environmentally friendly driving.... 87

ERA-GLONASS test mode.... 584

ESC, Electronic Stability Control.... 346

ESP®

Activating/deactivating.... 350, 351

Activating/deactivating (button)...... 351

Adjusting (steering-wheel button)...... 350

Crosswind Assist.... 349

ESP ^® SPORT.... 347

Function.... 346, 347

Trailer stabilisation.... 349

EU type approval number.... 784

Exhaust gas aftertreatment, diesel engine.... 792

Exit warning.... 383

Exiting a parking space Active Parking Assist.... 420 Drive Away Assist.... 426 PARKTRONIC.... 416

Exterior lighting Care....625 Light adjustment when driving abroad ....33, 230

F

Factory settings MBUX reset function.... 498

Fault message Driver's display.... 817

Favourites Adding a destination....516 Calling up....482 Deleting....483 Home address....516

Moving....483 Overview....482 Renaming....483 Work address....516

Fill level AdBlue ^® 447

Fingerprint sensor MBUX multimedia system.... 473

Fire extinguisher.... 55, 631 First aid First-aid kit (soft sided).... 36, 58, 631

Fitting Snow chains.... 49, 656 Tyres/wheels.... 668

Fitting accessories Limited protection.... 119

Fitting the licence plate (front).... 93 Flacon.... 256

Flat towing Pulling/towing.... 439

Flat tyre MOExtended.... 632 Notes.... 60, 632

TREFIT kit.... 634 Wheel change.... 665

Floor mats.... 228 Fog light (extended range).... 234

Foil covering On camera/sensors.... 343 Radar and ultrasonic sensors.... 343

Fragrance.... 256

Fragrance system Activating/deactivating....256 Inserting/removing the flacon....256 Perfume vial....256 Setting....256

Free driving mode Starting.... 407

Free software.... 106

Frequencies Mobile phone....677 Two-way radio....677

Front airbag Inflating.... 118

Front headlamps.... 230

Front passenger airbag

Disabling/enabling.... 113

Front passenger airbag shutoff

Information (child restraint system on the front passenger seat).... 129

Front passenger seat

Adjusting electrically.... 176 Adjusting from driver's seat.... 178

Fuel

Additives....789

Depressurising the fuel tank (plug-in hybrid with petrol engine).... 313

Diesel 789

Diesel quality....789 E10....787,788

Fuel reserve (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)... 791

Low outside temperatures.... 789 Petrol.... 787, 788

Petrol quality.... 787, 788

Refilling.... 21,309

Reserve....791

Sulphur content.... 787, 788

Tank content....791

Tank content (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)....791

Fuel consumption indicator.... 299

Fuel reserve.... 791

Function in the event of an accident.... 118

Function seat....80

Function seat (rear).... 82

Fuses

Cockpit.... 654

Engine compartment.... 653

Front passenger footwell.... 654

Fuse assignment diagram.... 59, 652

Load compartment...... 654

Notes.... 59, 652

G

G-meter, Accelerometer.... 448, 449

Gearshift

DIRECT SELECT lever.... 301

Manual.... 305, 306

Gearshift paddles

Steering wheel gearshift paddles.... 305, 306

General driving tips.... 275

Genuine parts.... 88

Glide mode.... 308, 309

Global search

Function.... 486

Overview 485

Glove box

Air vent.... 263

Glove compartment

Locking/unlocking.... 46, 201

Grab handles.... 175

Gross mass....784

H

Handbrake.... 338

Handling characteristics

Unusual.... 656

HANDS-FREE ACCESS.... 161

Hands-free system.... 550

Handwriting recognition.... 489

Haptic accelerator pedal, Pressure point..... 290

Hazard warning lights.... 55, 232

Hazard warnings

Car-to-X-Communication.... 537

Head restraint

Adjusting (rear).... 186

Adjusting manually (front).... 185

Luxury head restraint (front).... 186

Luxury head restraint (rear).... 188

Removing/fitting (rear).... 187

Head-up display

Care.... 626

Function 452

Memory function.... 197

Operating.... 453

Switching on/off 454

Headlamp flashing.

Headlamps.... 230

Heating

Activating/deactivating.... 252

Panel heating.... 192

Seat 190

Stationary heater.... 54, 261

Steering wheel.... 195

Help call

Mercedes-Benz emergency call system.... 68, 581

High beam

High-pressure cleaner.... 622

High-voltage battery

Charge level display.... 336

Charging at time of departure.... 504

Charging cable control panel.... 323

Charging duration.... 809

Charging station, mode 3.... 321

Configuring weekly profile.... 504

Connection types.... 809

Ending the charging process (alternating current, mode 2/3).... 329

Ending the charging process (direct current, mode 4).... 333

Energy flow display.... 505

General notes on charging.... 316

Mains socket, mode 2.... 320

Notes.... 642

Range 809

Rapid charging station, mode 4.... 322

Setting the maximum permissible charging current (mains socket).... 323

Starting the charging process (alternating current, mode 2/3).... 326

Starting the charging process (direct current, mode 4).... 331

Stowing the charging cable.... 319

Type 809

Voltage types.... 809

Wallbox, mode 3.... 321

High-voltage on-board electrical system

Indicator lamps on vehicle socket...... 325

Manual switch-off.... 266

Operating safety.... 90

Hill descent control.... 368

Hill Start Assist.... 354

HOLD function

Function.... 352

Switching on/off 353

Home screen

Central display.... 468

|

i-Size child restraint system

Fitting.... 143

Suitable seats.... 138

Identification plate

Engine....784

Vehicle....784

Immediate pre-entry climate control.... 260

Immobiliser.... 172

Implied warranty.... 102

Importer information

Regulatory radio information.... 783

In-Car Office

Answering e-mail.... 565

Calling up.... 563

Creating an e-mail.... 565

Forwarding e-mail.... 565

Managing e-mails.... 564

Marking a task as completed.... 564

Selecting functions (calendar entry)...... 564

Selecting functions (Tasks & Calls)...... 564

Incorrect behaviour by vehicle occupants

Limited protection.... 119

Increase in traffic information volume

Setting....603

Indicator lamps/warning lamps

PASSENGER AIR BAG.... 112

Indicator/warning lamps.... 909

Individual drive program

Configuring.... 298

Inside rearview mirror.... 247

Instrument display

Instrument cluster.... 76

Intelligent Light System

Active headlamps.... 233

Adaptive Highbeam Assist.... 235

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus.... 237

Cornering light 233

Enhanced fog light function.... 234

Motorway mode.... 234

Interior lighting

Ambient lighting.... 240

MBUX reading light 477

Setting.... 239

Switch-off delay time 240

Interior protection.... 174

Intermediate destination

Editing.... 525

Starting the automatic service station

search....527

Internet

Calling up a web page.... 590

Calling up the web browser settings..... 591

Calling up web browser options.... 591

Deleting a bookmark.... 591

Deleting browser data.... 591

Managing bookmarks.... 591

Mercedes me connect.... 576

Setting up a Wi-Fi hotspot.... 492

Smartphone integration.... 19

Web browser in the background.... 592

Web browsers.... 591

Internet connection

Cancelling permission (mobile phone).... 589

Disconnecting automatically (commu-

nication module).... 587

Displaying the connection status...... 590

Establishing.... 589

Information 586

Overview of connection status.... 589

Restrictions.... 586

Setting access data (Bluetooth®)...... 588

Setting up (communication module)...... 586

Setting up (Wi-Fi)...... 588

Setup (Bluetooth ^® ) 588

Ionisation.... 256

iPhone®

Smartphone integration.... 566

ISOFIX child restraint system

Fitting.... 143

Suitable seats.... 136

J

Jack

Declaration of conformity.... 96

Storage location.... 61, 664, 665

Jump-start connection.... 58, 644

K

Key

acoustic locking verification signal..... 151

Activating/deactivating pre-entry cli-

mate control.... 258

Battery.... 152

Deactivating a function.... 68, 151

Emergency key.... 152

Energy consumption.... 68, 151

Function.... 150

Key ring attachment.... 152

Problem.... 153

Replacement key.... 153

Unlocking setting.... 151

KEYLESS-GO

Deactivating.... 68, 151

Locking/unlocking the vehicle.... 155

Problem.... 156

Unlocking setting.... 151

Kickdown.... 308

Knee airbag.... 123

1

Lane Keeping Assist.... 386

Lane recognition (automatic)

Active Lane Keeping Assist.... 386

Lane scan.... 402

Language

Notes 494

Setting.... 494

Last destinations

Selecting.... 513

Level control

AIRMATIC.... 389

AMG RIDE CONTROL +.... 396

E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL.... 400

Light adjustment

Driving abroad.... 33, 230

Light switch.... 230

Lighting

Interior lighting.... 239

Lights

Activating/deactivating dynamic low

beam.... 235

Active headlamps.... 233

Adaptive brake lights.... 354

Adaptive Highbeam Assist.... 235

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus.... 237

Automatic driving lights.... 231

Combination switch.... 232

Cornering light.... 233

Dynamic low beam.... 233

Fog light (extended range)...... 234

Hazard warning lights.... 55, 232

High beam.... 232

Interior lighting 239

Light adjustment when driving abroad

33,230

Locator lighting.... 239

Motorway mode.... 234

Off-road light 235

Reading lamp.... 239

Rear fog light.... 231

Responsibility for lighting systems...... 230

Setting low beam.... 238, 239

Switch-off delay time.... 239

Turn signal light.... 232

Limiter

Activating/deactivating.... 357, 362

Buttons.... 357

Calling up a speed.... 357

Function.... 356

Passive mode.... 356

Permanent setting.... 359

Requirements: 357

Selecting.... 357

Setting a speed.... 357

Storing a speed.... 357

LINGUATRONIC

Operating safety.... 457

Live Traffic Information

Displaying the traffic map.... 535

Displaying traffic incidents.... 535

Extending a subscription.... 534

Information of the service provider...... 534

Registering on Mercedes me.... 534

Load capacity

Bicycle rack....812

Load compartment cover

Extending/retracting.... 209

Notes.... 208

Removing/fitting.... 210

Load compartment floor

Locking/unlocking.... 219

Opening/closing.... 43, 218

Load protection net

Attaching.... 213

Loading, Stowage compartments

Bag hook.... 215

Coat hook 216

Opening/closing the load compaR-

ment floor.... 43, 218

Roof luggage rack.... 38, 219

Tie-down eyes.... 45, 215

Loading guidelines.... 198

Loads.... 198

Locator lighting.... 239

Locking an external device (child safety

lock).... 494

Locking/unlocking

Additional door lock.... 154

Automatic locking (MMS).... 156, 157

Doors (from the inside).... 154

Emergency key.... 157

KEYLESS-GO.... 155

Mercedes me connect.... 154

Loud sound

PRE-SAFE® Sound.... 115

Low beam

Activating/deactivating.... 230

Left-hand/right-hand traffic...... 238, 239

Light adjustment when driving abroad 33,230

Setting.... 238, 239

Low emission zone

Avoiding/exiting.... 520

Drive program change (plug-in hybrid).... 520

Lowered suspension

AMG ACTIVE RIDE CONTROL.... 397

Lowering/raising the loading sill.... 395

Lowering/raising the rear of the vehicle..... 395

lubricants....786

Index 955

Luggage....198

Lumbar support.... 180

M

Windscreen wipers.... 28, 52, 243

Maintaining safe distance

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC...... 362

Maintenance....610

Maintenance Management

Notes.... 611

Transferred data.... 611

Malfunction

Restraint system.... 110

Manoeuvering brake function.... 427

Manoeuvring

Manoeuvering brake function.... 427

Manoeuvring assistant

Activating/deactivating.... 428

Drive Away Assist.... 426

Manoeuvering brake function.... 427

Manual gearshifting

Activating/deactivating.... 307

Map, Traffic map

Avoiding an area.... 541

Avoiding an area (overview).... 541

Changing an area.... 542

Deleting an area.... 542

Displaying online map contents...... 545

Displaying Qibla....544

Displaying the compass.... 543

Displaying the map version.... 541

Displaying the range.... 544

Displaying the satellite map.... 544

Displaying the traffic map.... 535

Displaying weather information.... 545

Map data.... 543

Moving....540

Route overview after start.... 540

Selecting additional information.... 541

Selecting POI symbols.... 540

Setting the map scale.... 539

Setting the map scale automatically..... 544

Updating.... 36, 542

Map functions.... 539

Massage programmes.... 190

Maximum full-stop braking.... 346

Maximum permissible gross vehicle weight... 784

Maximum speeds (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) 803

MBUX

Dashcam....548

MBUX Interior Assistant

Favourites.... 477

Lasers and laser classification.... 473

Operating functions by proximity of

your hand....475

Overview 473

Reading light 477

Search light 477

Selecting settings.... 478

Using the favourites pose.... 477

MBUX multimedia system

Activating/deactivating DSR.... 369

Activating/deactivating standby mode... 343

Authorisations.... 491

Display settings.... 489

Drive programs.... 298

ENERGIZING COMFORT programmes

(overview)....506

ENERGIZING seat kinetics.... 506

Factory setting.... 498

Fingerprint sensor.... 473

Global search.... 486

Home screen.... 468

Language settings.... 457

MBUX Interior Assistant.... 473

Mercedes me & Apps.... 20, 578

Overview.... 465, 466

Set collision detection.... 341, 342

Setting keyboard and handwriting rec-

ognition.... 489

Setting route-based speed adaptation.... 367

Standby mode function.... 342

Starting the ENERGIZING COMFORT

programme.... 508

Steering wheel heater / seat heating..... 195

Touchscreen 470

MBUX reading light 477

MBUX rear tablet

Bracket.... 608

Information.... 606

Locking (child safety lock)...... 494

Notes.... 606

Overview....607

Scope....606

Updating software.... 608

MBUX search light.... 477

MBUX voice assistant

E-mails.... 462

Function 457

Language setting.... 458

Media voice commands.... 461

Online voice commands.... 463

Online voice control.... 460

Operable functions.... 458

Operating safety 457

Setting.... 459

Speech quality.... 459

Voice commands.... 460

Voice prompting.... 457

Mecca....544

Media General information.... 18

Media mode Adding a favourite song.... 598

Connecting Bluetooth ^® audio equip-

ment....597

Connecting USB devices.... 597

Controlling media playback.... 598

Copyright and trademarks.... 595

Information about the search function in categories.... 598

Overview of the media menu.... 597

Playing back similar music tracks.... 598

Removing a favourite song.... 598

Starting a search in categories.... 599

Starting media playback.... 598

Supported formats and data storage

media.... 594

Surprise mix.... 598

Using the keyword search.... 599

Medical aids.... 101

Memory function Head-up display.... 197

Outside mirrors.... 197

Seat.... 197

Menus (driver display) Track Pace.... 450

Menus (driver's display), Steering-wheel buttons

Assistant display.... 447

Classic menu.... 444

Navigation.... 451

Index 957

Notes.... 442

Off-road.... 451

Operating.... 443

Service.... 447

Sport.... 448, 449

Supersport.... 449

Understated menu.... 444

Mercedes me App

Activating on-demand features.... 89

Calling up services.... 578

Calling up your user account.... 578

Unlinking the user account.... 579

Mercedes me Apps.... 20, 578

Mercedes me calls

Arranging a service appointment.... 574

Calling the Mercedes-Benz Customer

Centre after automatic accident/

breakdown detection.... 573

Calls via the overhead control panel..... 572

Consenting to the transfer of data..... 574

Information.... 572

Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre...... 573

Transferred data.... 575

Mercedes me Charge, Paying

Charging station display.... 518

Mercedes me connect

Accident/Breakdown Management..... 577

Information.... 576

Transferred data.... 577

Mercedes-Benz emergency call system

Automatic emergency call.... 582

Data processing.... 584

Data transfer.... 583

ERA-GLONASS test mode.... 584

Information.... 579

Manual emergency call.... 582

Overview.... 68, 581

Self-diagnosis.... 584

Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts.... 88

Mercedes-Benz service centre.... 100

Message memory.... 817

Messages, Short messages

Calling a message sender.... 562

Deleting.... 563

Dictating.... 561

Forwarding.... 562

MBUX voice commands.... 462

F167 0009 02

Overview.... 561

Read-aloud function.... 561

Reading.... 561

Replying.... 562

Sending.... 561

Setting the displayed text messages..... 561

Using a phone number or URL.... 562

Mirrors

Mirror folding function.... 248

Outside mirrors.... 245

Rear-view mirror 247

Mobile phone

Cancelling permission for Internet

connection.... 589

Frequencies.... 677

Maximum transmission output...... 677

Notes on wireless charging.... 225

Smartphone integration.... 19

Telephone.... 19

Wireless charging (rear passenger

compartment).... 227

wireless charging (rear)...... 82

Model type....784

Modification

Limited protection.... 119

MOExtended tyres, Run-flat tyres.... 632

Motorway mode.... 234

MULTIBEAM LED.... 233

Multifunction camera ROAD SURFACE SCAN...... 402

Multimedia system

Activating/deactivating voice amplification to rear...... 490

Music online

Adding providers.... 599

Calling up.... 600

Calling up the settings.... 600

Requirements: 599

Search function.... 600

N

Navigation

Activating.... 510

Destination entry.... 37, 511

Information.... 16

MBUX voice commands.... 461

Menu (driver display)...... 451

Overview.... 510

Updating the map data.... 36, 542

Navigation announcements

Activating/deactivating.... 531

Adjusting the volume.... 532

Repeating.... 532

Switching audio fadeout on/off.... 532

Near Field Communication (NFC)

Connecting a mobile phone to the

MBUX multimedia system.... 555

Information.... 492

Switching mobile phones.... 555

Using a mobile phone 555

Near-field communication

Activating/deactivating.... 492

Neutral.... 302

NFC 492

Notifications Centre

Calling up a notification.... 484

Editing a notification.... 485

Message types.... 483

Overview...... 483

Selecting actions.... 485

F167 0009 02

0

Objects in the vehicle interior

Limited protection.... 119

Occupant safety

Airbag.... 123

Basic information.... 107

Child seat.... 125

Information on the child restraint sys-

tem.... 113

Information on the correct seat posi-

tion.... 108

Pets in the vehicle.... 119

PRE-SAFE ^® 115

Off-road 451

Off-road ABS.... 346

Off-road Assist

Setting 407

Off-road driving.... 278

Off-road light 235

Off-road menu

Overview 505

Setting.... 506

On-board diagnostics interface.... 99

On-board electronics

Engine electronics.... 676

Two-way radios.... 676

On-demand feature....89

Online services.... 105

Open Source Software.... 106

Opening angle

Limiting (tailgate).... 163

Opening the tailgate using your foot

HANDS-FREE ACCESS.... 161

Operating fluids

AdBlue ^® 792

Additives.... 789

Brake fluid.... 796

Coolant....797

Diesel....789

Engine oil....793

Notes.... 786

Petrol....787,788

Windscreen washer fluid.... 50, 797

Operating safety

48 V on-board electrical system.... 90

High-voltage on-board electrical system... 90

Outside mirrors

Automatic mirror folding function...... 248

Blind Spot Assist/Active Blind Spot

Assist.... 383

Folding in/out 245

Memory function.... 197

Parking position.... 247

Setting.... 245

Warning lamp.... 383

Overhead control panel.... 78

Overview of airbags.... 123

P

Paint code.... 784

Panel heating.... 192

Park position

DIRECT SELECT lever.... 301

Parking

Active Parking Assist.... 420

PARKTRONIC....416

Prior booking.... 547

Parking Assist

Active Parking Assist.... 420

PARKTRONIC.... 416

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC

Activating/deactivating.... 419

Adjusting warning tones.... 419

Function.... 416

Parking assistance systems

Active Parking Assist.... 420

Drive Away Assist 426

Manoeuvering brake function.... 427

PARKTRONIC.... 416

Parking brake.... 338

Parking charges

Paying....547

Parking option

Displaying on the map.... 547

Parking position

Outside mirrors.... 247

Storing the front-passenger outside

mirror using the memory button.... 66

Storing the position of the passenger

outside mirror using reverse gear...... 248

Parking service

Displaying a parking option on the map.. 547

Paying parking charges.... 547

Prior booking of a parking space...... 547

Selecting parking options.... 546

Parking space

Finding.... 545

Parking up.... 342

PARKTRONIC....416

Partition net

Removing/fitting.... 211

Partitioning net.... 212

PASSENGER AIR BAG

Status display, front passenger airbag.... 112

Period out of use

Activating/deactivating standby mode... 343

Permissible axle load.... 784

Permitted towing methods

Overview.... 646, 647

Petrol....787,788

Pets in the vehicle.... 119

PIN protection

System PIN protection.... 494

Plug-in hybrid operation

Charging cable control panel.... 323

Charging the high-voltage battery at a rapid charging station (mode 4).... 322

Ending the charging process (alternating current, mode 2/3).... 329

Ending the charging process (direct current, mode 4).... 333

Function of the regenerative brake system.... 286

Functions of the energy flow display..... 505

Haptic accelerator pedal.... 290

Indicator lamps on vehicle socket...... 325

Manually disconnecting the high-voltage on-board electrical system.... 266

Notes on charging (charging station, mode 3).... 321

Notes on charging (mains socket, mode 2).... 320

Notes on charging (wallbox, mode 3)..... 321

Notes on plug-in hybrid operation...... 265

Operating safety....90

Power meter 454

Route-based operating-mode strategy.... 289

Sets recuperation.... 287

Setting the maximum permissible charging current.... 323

Starting the charging process (alternating current, mode 2/3).... 326

Starting the charging process (direct current, mode 4).... 331

Stowing the charging cable.... 319

POI

Selecting.... 513

POI symbols

Selecting.... 540

Post-collision brake.... 117

Power closing function

Door.... 157

Power supply

Start/stop button.... 267

Switching on (start/stop button)...... 267

Pre-entry climate control

activating/deactivating for departure time.... 260

At departure time.... 259

At time of departure.... 259

immediate.... 260

When vehicle is unlocked.... 258

Pre-entry climate control using the key

Activating/deactivating.... 258

Function 257

PRE-SAFE®, Anticipatory occupant protection Function.... 115 PRE-SAFE® Sound.... 115 Reversing measures.... 116

PRE-SAFE® Impulse Side Function.... 116 Inflating.... 118

PRE-SAFE® PLUS Function.... 116 Reversing measures.... 116

Preventative occupant protection system 115, 116
Programme 292, 295

Protection Limited.... 119

Protection against collision Manoeuvering brake function...... 427

Protection of the environment Driving style.... 87 Take-back of end-of-life vehicles.... 87

Pulling away Hill Start Assist.... 354

Optimised acceleration.... 274

Q

Qibla....544 QR code rescue card....58, 102 Qualified specialist workshop....100

R

Racetrack mode AMG ceramic high-performance composite brake system.... 281 AMG steering wheel buttons.... 291

Radar and ultrasonic sensors.... 343

Radio Activating....600 Activating/deactivating radio text....603 Calling up a slide show....602 Calling up the station list....601 Deleting stations....602 Displaying radio text....603 Editing station presets....602 Entering a frequency directly....38, 601 Frequency fix....603 Managing favourites....602

F167 0009 02

MBUX voice commands....461 Menu....18 Moving stations....602 Overview....601 Searching for a channel....38, 601 Setting a channel....601 Setting station tracking....603 Setting station tracking (Internet Radio)....602 Setting the frequency band....601 Setting the traffic information service volume increase....603 Showing/hiding lyrics....603 Station suggestion....601 Storing radio stations....602

Radio (audio system) Switching traffic announcements on/off.... 66, 603

Radio announcements Activating....603 Selecting....603

Radio regulations Importer information....783 Regulatory radio identification....681 Specific absorption rate....781

Wireless applications.... 678

Rain closing function

Side windows.... 165

Sliding sunroof.... 170

Rain sensor

Side windows.... 165

Sliding sunroof.... 170

Windscreen wipers.... 241

Range

AdBlue ^® 447

REACH regulation.... 101

Reading lamp

Interior lighting.... 239

Rear compartment climate control.... 254

Rear door (child safety lock)

Securing.... 146

Rear fog lamp.... 231

Rear fog light.... 231

Rear seat belt

Status display.... 111

Rear window

Replacing wiper blade.... 244

Rear window heater.... 250

Rear window wiper

Automatically active.... 66

Switching on/off 241

Rear-view mirror

Automatic anti-glare mode.... 247

Rearward-facing child seat

Information.... 131

Recuperation

Function.... 286

Setting.... 287

Recycling.

Reducing agent

AdBlue ^® 25, 314

Refuelling

Depressurising the fuel tank (plug-in

hybrid with petrol engine).... 313

Fuel....21,309

Refuelling the vehicle.... 21,309

Topping up AdBlue ^® 25, 314

Registration

Remote Online

Charging the starter battery.... 272

F167 0009 02

Cooling/heating the vehicle interior..... 271

Starting the vehicle.... 272

Replacement key 153

Reserve

Fuel 791

Fuel (Mercedes-AMG vehicles).... 791

Resetting

MBUX reset function.... 498

Residual heat.... 255

Responsibility

Driving safety systems.... 343

Restraint system

Basic information.... 107

Basic instructions for children.... 125

Deployment situations.... 118

Functionality.... 110

Information on function.... 118

Information on the correct seat posi-

tion.... 108

Limited protection.... 119

Malfunction.... 110

Protection.... 108

Self-test.... 110

Warning lamp.... 110

Reverse gear

DIRECT SELECT lever.... 301

Reversing camera

360° Camera.... 408

Activating/deactivating.... 416

Care....625

Function.... 408

Opening the camera cover.... 416

Setting 416

ROAD SURFACE SCAN 402

Rocking free.... 305

Roll away protection.... 352

Roller sunblind

Electric.... 171

Sliding sunroof.... 167

Roof load....802

Roof load (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)...... 802

Roof load display

Information.... 296

Roof luggage rack

Loading.... 38, 219

Securing.... 38, 219

Route

Accepting a detour recommendation..... 522

Alternative route.... 517, 526

Calculating.... 517

Calculating alternative routes.... 522

Commuter route.... 517, 527

Displaying destination information...... 524

Displaying the route list.... 525

Editing a stored route.... 527

Low emission zone.... 520

Navigation.... 510

Planning.... 525

Range on Map service.... 521

Recording.... 528

Saving a recorded route.... 528

Selecting a type.... 521

Selecting notifications.... 523

Selecting options.... 522

Starting a saved route.... 527

Starting the automatic service station

search.... 527

Route guidance

Cancelling.... 532

Changing direction.... 529

Destination reached.... 531

Lane recommendations.... 530

Motorway information.... 531

Notes.... 528

Off-road....532

Route guidance with augmented reality

Activating....539

Activating/deactivating the traffic

light view.... 383

Displaying road names/house num-

bers.... 539

Overview.... 538

Route-based operating-mode strategy

Function.... 289

Route-based speed adaptation

Function.... 366

Setting.... 367

Run-flat characteristics.... 632

Running boards

Care.... 625

Running-in notes.... 273

Theorem 1.2. (Theorem of [10, Theorem 1.1]) Let be a finite field and let (x) be the set of all elements of such that

Safety system.... 344

Safety vest.... 34, 56, 629

Satellite map.... 544

Saving a destination suggestion as a favourite.... 533

Searching for a channel.... 38, 601

Seat, Rear seat, Through-loading feature Adjusting electrically.... 176 adjusting electrically (rear).... 180

Automatic adjustment.... 189

Configuring settings.... 189

Correct driver's seat position.... 175

ENERGIZING seat kinetics.... 506

Folding back the backrest (rear)..... 41, 205

Folding back the backrest on the third row of seats.... 207

Folding the backrest (rear) forwards to get in.... 182

Folding the backrest forwards (rear) 39, 203

Folding the backrest on the third row of seats forwards.... 206

Lumbar support.... 180

Memory function.... 197

Panel heating.... 192

Rear (seat comfort).... 180

Resetting settings (massage programme).... 190

Settings....80

Side airbag.... 123

Seat (rear) Settings....82

Seat belt Activating/deactivating seat belt adjustment.... 117

Adjusting the height.... 110

Automatic tightening.... 117

Care....626 Fastening....110

Notes on wearing correctly.... 109

Rear seat belt status display.... 111

Releasing.... 123

Warning lamp.... 111

Seat belt adjustment Activating/deactivating.... 117 Function.... 117

Seat belt tensioners Inflating.... 118

Seat belt warning.... 111

Seat heating Activating/deactivating.... 190

Seat height.... 176

Seat kinetics Setting....506

Seat ventilation.... 192

Second telephone Connecting.... 553

Selecting a gear.... 305, 306

Selecting a sound characteristic (steering-wheel button).... 290

Selecting the sound profile Burmester ^® surround sound system..... 606

Selector lever.... 301

Self-test Automatic front passenger airbag shut off....112 Restraint system....110

Sensors Cleaning.... 625

Service Menu (driver's display).... 447

Service centre.... 100

Service station search Starting automatic search.... 527

Setting the date format.... 490

Setting the distance unit.... 494

Setting the suspension level.... 399

Settings Information.... 20

Shifting Automatic transmission.... 305, 306 Gearshift recommendation.... 308 Manual.... 305, 306 Steering wheel gearshift paddles.... 305, 306

Shortening the braking distance Brake Assist System.... 346

Shunting assistant 428

Shunting support.... 426

Side airbag.... 123

Side windows Automatic function.... 165

Child safety lock (rear).... 148

Close with key.... 166

Convenience closing.... 166

Convenience opening.... 165

Electric roller sunblind.... 171

Opening/closing.... 163

Problem.... 166

Rain closing function.... 165

Skid chains.... 49, 656

Sliding sunroof, Panorama sliding sunroof Automatic functions.... 170 Close with key.... 166 Opening with the key.... 165 Opening/closing.... 167 Problem.... 171 Rain closing function.... 170

Smartphone integration Apple CarPlay®/Android Auto.... 19

Snow chains.... 49, 656

Socket 12 V.... 224 Trailer operation.... 434

Socket flap.... 316

SOS button.... 572

Sound AMG Real Performance Sound....290 PRE-SAFE® Sound....115 Wheels/tyres....656

Sound settings Adjusting treble, mid-range and bass settings....604 Automatic loudness normalisation....604 Setting the balance and fader....604

Spare parts.... 88

Spare wheel 670

Specialist workshop.... 100

Specific absorption rate (SAR).... 781

Speed Limit, Limiter.... 356 Save, cruise control.... 362 Save, DISTRONIC.... 362 Save, Limiter.... 362

Speed adjustment, route-based.... 366

Speed control Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC.... 359 Cruise control.... 356

Limiter 356

Speed limit

Winter tyres.... 49, 359

Speed Limit Assist

Setting.... 380

System limits.... 378

Standing lights.... 230

Start-off assist

Hill Start Assist.... 354

Optimised acceleration.... 274

Start/stop button

Emotion Start.... 270

Parking the vehicle.... 336

Starting the vehicle.... 268

Switching on the power supply / vehicle.... 267

Start/stop function.... 281

Starter battery

Charging via Remote Online.... 272

Starting assistance.... 58, 644

Starting the engine

Emergency operation mode.... 270

Remote Online.... 272

Start/stop button.... 268

Starting-off aid

Drive Away Assist.... 426

Hill Start Assist.... 354

Optimised acceleration.... 274

Station

Deleting.... 602

Entering a frequency directly.... 38, 601

Frequency fix.... 603

Managing favourites.... 602

Moving....602

Setting.... 601

Storing.... 602

Station list

Calling up.... 601

Station presets

Editing....602

Station suggestion

Radio....601

Station tracking

Setting.... 603

Setting (Internet Radio).... 602

Stationary heater/ventilation

Activating/deactivating.... 54, 261

F167 0009 02

Operating.... 262

Status display

Front passenger airbag.... 112

Rear seat belt.... 111

Steer Assist

Active Steering Assist.... 370

STEER CONTROL.... 352

STEER CONTROL.... 352

Steering wheel

Adjusting electrically.... 193

Driver's airbag.... 123

Manually adjusting.... 192

Steering wheel heater.... 194

Steering wheel adjustment.... 193

Steering wheel gearshift paddles...... 305, 306

Steering wheel heater

Decoupling from the seat heating...... 195

Stop/start

ECO start/stop function.... 283

Stopping

Parking the vehicle.... 336

Stowage areas.... 46, 200

Stowage compartment

Rear seat backrest.... 47, 202

Stowage space underneath the load com-

partment floor

Opening/closing.... 43, 218

Stowage spaces

Armrest.... 46, 200

Centre console (front)...... 46, 200

Door.... 46,200

Glove compartment.... 46, 200

Streaming online music.... 600

Suggestions

Configuring.... 495

Deleting.... 495

Sulphur content.... 787, 788

Supersport menu display content

Selecting.... 449

Suspension

Adjusting the vehicle level (E-ACTIVE

BODY CONTROL).... 404

AIRMATIC.... 389

AMG ACTIVE RIDE CONTROL.... 397

AMG RIDE CONTROL +.... 396

E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL.... 400

Individual wheel control (E-ACTIVE

BODY CONTROL).... 403

Rocking free mode (E-ACTIVE BODY

CONTROL)....403

Selecting the suspension setting.... 398

Setting entering/exiting level (AIR-

MATIC)....394

Setting the suspension level (AIR-

MATIC).... 391

Setting the vehicle level.... 399

SVHC

Substances of very high concern...... 101

Switch-off delay time

Exterior 239

Interior 240

Switching air-recirculation mode on/off..... 255

Switching loudness normalisation on/off

Burmester ^® surround sound system..... 605

Synchronisation function

Activating/deactivating (control panel)... 254

System PIN protection

Activating/deactivating.... 494

System settings

Activating/deactivating system PIN

protection.... 494

Activating/deactivating voice amplifi-

cation to rear.... 490

MBUX reset function.... 498

Setting the distance unit.... 494

Setting the time zone.... 489

Setting the time/date format.... 490

Switching near-field communication

(NFC) on or off.... 492

Transmission of the vehicle position..... 491

T

Tabs

managing....592

Tailgate, Boot lid

Closing.... 159

Emergency key.... 163

HANDS-FREE ACCESS.... 161

Limiting the opening angle.... 163

Opening.... 158

Opening dimensions.... 798

Take-back of end-of-life vehicles.... 87

Tank content

AdBlue ^® 792

Fuel 791

Fuel (Mercedes-AMG vehicles).... 791

Reserve....791

Reserve (fuel), (Mercedes-AMG vehicles).... 791

Tank filler cap / flap.... 21,309

Technical data

Axle load (trailer operation).... 815

Axle load (trailer operation), (Mercedes-AMG vehicles).... 816

Fastening points of the trailer hitch..... 811

High-voltage battery 809

Information.... 676

Maximum speeds (Mercedes-AMG vehicles).... 803

Mounting dimensions of a trailer hitch.... 811

Overhang dimension of the trailer hitch.. 811

Radio frequencies.... 677

Radio regulations.... 681

Roof load 802

Specific absorption rate (SAR).... 781

Tongue weight.... 812

Tongue weight (Mercedes-AMG vehi-

cles)....814

Towing capacity.... 811

Trailer load (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)..... 812

Telediagnosis

Diagnostic data.... 611

Telediagnostics

Transferred data.... 612

Telemetry display.... 502

Telephone, Smartphone

Activating functions during a call.... 557

Calls with several participants.... 557

Changing a function.... 554

Charging wirelessly (mobile phone)...... 226

Connecting a mobile phone.... 10, 552

Connecting a mobile phone (Near

Field Communication (NFC).... 555

Disconnecting a mobile phone.... 555

Emergency call.... 68, 581

Importing contacts.... 559

Importing contacts (overview)...... 559

Incoming call during an existing call..... 558

Information.... 14, 552

Interchanging mobile phones.... 553

MBUX voice commands.... 461

Notes.... 550

Notes on wireless charging (mobile

phone)....225

Operating modes.... 552

Reception and transmission volume..... 555

Secure Simple Pairing.... 10, 552

Setting the ringtone.... 556

Smartphone integration.... 19

Switching mobile phones (Near Field

Communication (NFC).... 555

Telephone menu overview.... 551

Telephone operation.... 557

Using Near Field Communication

(NFC) 555

Voice recognition.... 556

Wireless charging (mobile phone, rear)... 227

Telephone (audio system)

Replacing a mobile phone.... 554

Telephony operating modes

Bluetooth ^® telephony.... 552

Television, Digital TV

MBUX voice commands.... 461

Temperature

Setting the vehicle interior temperature.... 250

Text messages.... 462

Third row of seats, Rear seat, Through-loading feature

Folding back the backrest on the third row of seats.... 207

Folding the backrest on the third row of seats forwards.... 206

Tie-down eyes.... 45, 215

Time

Manual time setting.... 490

Setting the time zone.... 489

Setting the time/date format.... 490

TREFIT kit, Tyre inflation compressor

Declaration of conformity.... 97

Storage location.... 62, 63, 633, 634

Toll system

Windscreen.... 248

Tone settings

Calling up the sound menu.... 604

Information.... 604

Tongue weight....812

Tongue weight (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)..... 814

Top Tether.... 144

Torque (driver's display).... 448, 449

Touch Control

Driver's display.... 441

MBUX.... 469

Setting the sensitivity.... 470

Touch-sensitive controls.... 89

Touchpad

Operating.... 471

Selecting a station and track.... 472

Setting sensitivity.... 472

Switching haptic operation feedback on/off.... 472

Touchscreen

Entering characters.... 487

Tow bar system

Towing away 439

Tow-away protection.... 174

Tow-starting....652

Towing

Pulling/towing.... 439

Towing methods.... 646, 647

Towing eye

Fitting/removing.... 35, 57, 630, 651

Storage location.... 35, 57, 630, 651

Towing methods

Both axles on the ground.... 63, 648

Overview.... 646, 647

Track Pace

Menu (driver display)...... 450

Track Race.... 499

Traffic announcements (audio system)

Switching on/off.... 66, 603

Traffic information

Car-to-X-Communication.... 537

Displaying the traffic map.... 535

Displaying traffic incidents.... 535

Extending a Live Traffic Information subscription.... 534

Information about Live Traffic Informa-

tion....534

Overview.... 533

Registering Live Traffic Information...... 534

Traffic Jam Assistant.... 367

Traffic light view Activating/deactivating.... 383 Information.... 382

Traffic light warning/display 380

Traffic restrictions Activating/deactivating.... 520 Service.... 520

Traffic Sign Assist Function.... 380 Setting.... 382

Trailer coupling.... 44, 432

Trailer drawbar, Pulling/towing.... 439

Trailer hitch Axle load....815 Axle load (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)....816 Bicycle rack....437 Care....625 Coupling up/uncoupling a trailer....434 Extending/retracting the ball neck... 44, 432 Extending/retracting the ball neck (MBUX multimedia system)....433 Fastening points....811 General notes....810

Mounting dimensions....811 Overhang dimension....811 Socket....434 Tongue weight....812 Tongue weight (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)....814 Towing capacity....811 Trailer load (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)....812 Trailer Manoeuvering Assist....428

Trailer Manoeuvering Assist Function.... 428

Trailer Manoeuvring Assist, Manoeuvring assistant Operation.... 429

Trailer operation Active Blind Spot Assist.... 385 Active Lane Keeping Assist.... 386 Axle load.... 815 Bicycle rack.... 437 Coupling up/uncoupling a trailer.... 434 Extending/retracting the ball neck... 44, 432 Extending/retracting the ball neck (MBUX multimedia system).... 433 Making settings.... 437 Notes.... 430

Socket 434

Trailer stabilisation.... 349

Transferred vehicle data Android Auto.... 571 Apple CarPlay®.... 571

Transmission position display.... 301 Transmission positions DIRECT SELECT lever.... 301

Transporting Vehicle 650

Trip computer Resetting....25 Trip distance Resetting....25

Tuneln Deleting stations.... 594 Logging out.... 594 Overview.... 593 Registering.... 594 Saving stations.... 594 Selecting and connecting a station.... 593 Selecting stream.... 594 Setting options.... 594

Turn signal indicator.... 232

Turn signal light 232

TV MBUX voice commands.... 461

Two-way radios Frequencies....677 Installation....676 Transmission output....677

Type approval number EG.... 784

Tyre pressure Checking....659 Notes....657 TIREFIT kit....634 Tyre pressure table....658

Tyre pressure monitoring system Function....659 Restarting....660

Tyre pressure table.... 658 Tyre sealant.... 634

Tyre tread.... 33, 48, 656 Tyre-change tool.... 61, 664, 665

Tyre-change tool kit Overview.... 61, 665

Tyres Breakdown....60, 632 Checking....33, 48, 656 Fitting....668 Interchanging....663 MOExtended....632 Noise....656 Notes on fitting....660 Removing....668 Removing/fitting hub cap....665 Replacing....660, 665 Selection....660 Snow chains....49, 656 Storing....664 TREFIT kit....634 Tyre pressure table....658 Unusual handling characteristics....656

U Understated menu display content Selecting.... 444 Unfastening.... 123

Units of measurement Setting.....494 Unlocking setting.....151 Updating software, System update, Update Error message.....497 Information.....495 Performing.....496 URL Sharing.....592 USB port Rear.....224 Stowage compartments (front).....46, 200 USB port (multimedia system) Connecting devices.....597 User profiles, Personalisation Adding a user.....479 Notes.....478 Overview.....478 Requirements for use.....478 Selecting a user.....481 Selecting options.....480 Synchronising.....482 User-specific content.....478

V

Variable limiter.... 356

Vehicle, Switching on the ignition

48 V on-board electrical system.... 90

Activating/deactivating standby mode... 343

Additional door lock.... 154

Correct use.... 101

Data storage.... 102

Diagnostics connection.... 99

Emergency key.... 157

Emotion Start.... 270

enabling, Remote Online.... 272

High-voltage on-board electrical system... 90

Implied warranty.... 102

Information.... 20

KEYLESS-GO.... 155

lock automatically (MMS).... 156, 157

Locking/unlocking (from inside)...... 155

Locking/unlocking using the emer-

gency key.... 157

Lowering.... 669

Medical aids.... 101

Parking up.... 342

QR code rescue card.... 58, 102

Raising.... 666

REACH regulation.... 101

Registration.... 100

Rocking free.... 305

Set collision detection.... 341, 342

Standby mode function.... 342

Starting (start/stop button)...... 268

starting, emergency operation mode..... 270

Stopping.... 336

SVHC/substances of very high con-

cern.... 101

Switching off.... 336

switching off (start/stop button)...... 336

Switching on (start/stop button)...... 267

Towing 439

Towing away.... 646, 647

Transporting.... 650

ventilate / comfort opening.... 165

Voice commands for MBUX voice

assistant...... 462

Vehicle cameras.... 343

Vehicle data

Angle of approach/departure...... 806

Angle of approach/departure

(Mercedes-AMG vehicles)...... 804

Display, MBUX.... 299

Displaying, DYNAMIC SELECT.... 299

Fording depth.... 806

Fording depth (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)....804

Maximum gradeability.... 806

Maximum gradient climbing ability

(Mercedes-AMG vehicles)...... 804

Maximum speeds (Mercedes-AMG vehicles).... 803

Roof load.... 802

Roof load (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)..... 802

Transferring to Android Auto.... 571

Transferring to Apple CarPlay ^® 571

Vehicle height....798

Vehicle height (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) 800

Vehicle length.... 798

Vehicle length (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)....800

Vehicle width....798

Vehicle width (Mercedes-AMG vehicle)... 800

Wheelbase....798

Wheelbase (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)..... 800

Vehicle dimensions.... 798

Vehicle dimensions (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)....800

Vehicle emergency start.... 652

Vehicle identification number.... 784

Vehicle identification plate EU type approval number.... 784

Maximum permissible gross vehicle weight....784

Model type.... 784

Paint code....784 Permissible axle load....784

VIN....784

Vehicle interior Cooling/heating (Remote Online)...... 271

Vehicle key.... 150

Vehicle level Lowering/raising the rear area of the vehicle (AIRMATIC).... 395

Setting (AIRMATIC).... 391

Setting (E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL)..... 404

Setting entering/exiting level (AIR-MATIC) 394

Setting individual wheel control...... 407

Vehicle location Switching transmission on/off...... 491

Vehicle position Storing.... 533

Vehicle sensors.... 343

Vehicle socket Care......625 Emergency release of the socket flap....335 Indicator lamps......325

Vehicle start Emergency operation mode.... 270 Remote Online.... 272 Start/stop button.... 268

Vehicle tool kit TREFIT kit.... 62, 63, 633, 634 Towing eye.... 35, 57, 630, 651

Ventilating.... 165

Ventilation.... 262

Vents Air vents.... 262

VIN Engine compartment.... 784 Identification plate.... 784

Seat....784

Vision Demisting windows.... 255

Voice amplification to the rear Activating/deactivating.... 490

Voice assistant Voice prompting...... 457

Voice recognition.... 556

W Warning system.... 172

Warning triangle.... 35, 57, 630, 631

Warning/indicator lamp ABS warning lamp.... 921

Active Brake Assist warning lamp.... 925

ATTENTION ASSIST warning lamp.... 924

(1) Brakes warning lamp (red)...... 920

(1) Brakes warning lamp (yellow)..... 919 Coolant warning lamp (red)..... 915

Coolant warning lamp (yellow)..... 916
(P) Electric parking brake indicator lamp (red)....919
(P) Electric parking brake indicator lamp (yellow).... 919
Electrical fault warning lamp 913,917
Engine diagnostics warning lamp....917
Engine operating temperature warning lamp.... 917, 918
ESP® OFF warning lamp.... 923
ESP® warning lamp flashes...... 922
ESP® warning lamp lights up...... 922
Fuel reserve warning lamp lights up....918
Mercedes-Benz emergency call system warning lamp.... 927
Power steering warning lamp (red)....914

Power steering warning lamp (yellow)....914
Reduced-power warning lamp..... 912
Restraint system warning lamp..... 911
Seat belt warning lamp flashes..... 912
Seat belt warning lamp lights up... 912
Suspension warning lamp (red).... 926
Suspension warning lamp (yellow) 926
System error warning lamp...... 913
Trailer hitch warning lamp...... 913
Tyre pressure monitoring sys- tem warning lamp flashes.... 927
Tyre pressure monitoring sys- tem warning lamp lights up.... 928
Warning lamp for distance warning.... 925

Warning/indicator lamps Driver's display....909 PASSENGER AIR BAG....112

Washer fluid Topping up.... 27, 50, 619 Windscreen washer fluid.... 50, 797
Washing by hand.... 623
Water tank.... 620
Wear Limited protection.... 119
Weather information.... 545
Web browser Calls up options.... 591 Deleting browser data.... 591
Web browsers Calling up a web page.... 590
Calling up the settings.... 591 Deleting a bookmark.... 591
Managing bookmarks.... 591 Setting in the background.... 592
Sharing URLs.... 592 Tabs.... 592
Wedge.... 61, 665
Weight information.... 784

Index 975

What3words

Destination entry with a 3 word address.... 515

Wheel change

Fitting a new wheel.... 668

Lowering the vehicle.... 669

Preparation.... 665

Raising the vehicle.... 666

Removing a wheel.... 668

Removing/fitting hub caps.... 665

Wheel rotation.... 663

Wheels

Breakdown.... 60, 632

Care....625

Checking.... 33, 48, 656

Fitting....668

Interchanging.... 663

MOExtended.... 632

Noise.... 656

Notes on fitting.... 660

Removing.... 668

Removing/fitting hub cap.... 665

Replacing.... 660, 665

Selection.... 660

Snow chains.... 49, 656

Storing.... 664

TREFIT kit.... 634

Tyre pressure.... 657

Tyre pressure monitoring system...... 659

Unusual handling characteristics...... 656

Wi-Fi

Activating/deactivating.... 492

Information on connection.... 492

Setting up a hotspot.... 492

Setting up an Internet connection...... 588

Window airbag.... 123

Windows

Care....625

Opening/closing.... 163

Opening/closing (air recirculation

button)....65

Removing mist.... 255

Windscreen

Demisting.... 250

Infrared reflective coating.... 249

Radio waves.... 248

Replacing the wiper blades..... 29, 53, 242

Replacing the wiper blades with

MAGIC VISION CONTROL...... 28, 52, 243

Toll system.... 248

Windscreen washer fluid.... 50,797

Windscreen washer system.... 27, 50, 619

Windscreen wipers

Activating/deactivating.... 241

Replacing the wiper blades..... 29, 53, 242

Replacing the wiper blades (wind-screen).... 29, 53, 242

Replacing the wiper blades with MAGIC VISION CONTROL.... 28, 52, 243

Winter operation

Snow chains.... 49, 656

Winter tyres

Limiter 49,359

Setting the permanent speed limit.... 49, 359

Wiper blades

Care....625

Replacing (windscreen).... 29, 53, 242

Replacing with MAGIC VISION CONTROL.... 28, 52, 243

Wipers.... 241

Wireless applications.... 678

Wireless charging

Mobile phone.... 226

Mobile phone (rear)...... 227

Overview.... 225

Workshop.... 100

Publication details

Germany

Internet

Further information about Mercedes-Benz vehicles and about Mercedes-Benz AG can be found on the following websites:

https://www.mercedes-benz.com

https://group.mercedes-benz.com

Documentation team

You are welcome to forward any queries or suggestions you may have regarding this Owner's Manual to the technical documentation team at the following address:

Mercedes-Benz AG, HPC: CAC, Customer Service, 70546 Stuttgart, Germany

^© Mercedes-Benz AG: Not to be reprinted, translated or otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part, without written permission from Mercedes-Benz AG.

Vehicle manufacturer

Mercedes-Benz AG

Mercedesstraße 120

70372 Stuttgart

As at 11.07.22

F167000902

Digital - in the vehicle Vehicle document wallet Digital - on the Internet Digital - as an App

Familiarise yourself with the contents of the Operator's Manual directly via the vehicle's multimedia system under "Vehicle information". Start with the quick guide, explore highlights and practical tips.

Here you can find comprehensive information about operating your vehicle and about services and guarantees in printed form.

You can find the Operator's Manual on the Mercedes-Benz homepage.

The Mercedes-Benz Guides App is available free-of-charge in familiar App stores.

Order no. F167 0009 02 Edition ÄJ2022-Ma

Apple® iOS Android

TM

F167 0009 02